Documenti di Didattica
Documenti di Professioni
Documenti di Cultura
Transportation
Parts 178 to 199
As of October 1, 2016
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00001 Fmt 8091 Sfmt 8091 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
U.S. GOVERNMENT OFFICIAL EDITION NOTICE
http://bookstore.gpo.gov
Phone: toll-free (866) 512-1800; DC area (202) 512-1800
e:\seals\archives.ai</GPH>
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00002 Fmt 8092 Sfmt 8092 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Table of Contents
Page
Explanation ................................................................................................ v
Title 49:
Finding Aids:
iii
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00003 Fmt 8092 Sfmt 8092 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Cite this Code: CFR
iv
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00004 Fmt 8092 Sfmt 8092 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Explanation
The Code of Federal Regulations is a codification of the general and permanent
rules published in the Federal Register by the Executive departments and agen-
cies of the Federal Government. The Code is divided into 50 titles which represent
broad areas subject to Federal regulation. Each title is divided into chapters
which usually bear the name of the issuing agency. Each chapter is further sub-
divided into parts covering specific regulatory areas.
Each volume of the Code is revised at least once each calendar year and issued
on a quarterly basis approximately as follows:
Title 1 through Title 16..............................................................as of January 1
Title 17 through Title 27 .................................................................as of April 1
Title 28 through Title 41 ..................................................................as of July 1
Title 42 through Title 50 .............................................................as of October 1
The appropriate revision date is printed on the cover of each volume.
LEGAL STATUS
The contents of the Federal Register are required to be judicially noticed (44
U.S.C. 1507). The Code of Federal Regulations is prima facie evidence of the text
of the original documents (44 U.S.C. 1510).
HOW TO USE THE CODE OF FEDERAL REGULATIONS
The Code of Federal Regulations is kept up to date by the individual issues
of the Federal Register. These two publications must be used together to deter-
mine the latest version of any given rule.
To determine whether a Code volume has been amended since its revision date
(in this case, October 1, 2016), consult the List of CFR Sections Affected (LSA),
which is issued monthly, and the Cumulative List of Parts Affected, which
appears in the Reader Aids section of the daily Federal Register. These two lists
will identify the Federal Register page number of the latest amendment of any
given rule.
EFFECTIVE AND EXPIRATION DATES
Each volume of the Code contains amendments published in the Federal Reg-
ister since the last revision of that volume of the Code. Source citations for
the regulations are referred to by volume number and page number of the Federal
Register and date of publication. Publication dates and effective dates are usu-
ally not the same and care must be exercised by the user in determining the
actual effective date. In instances where the effective date is beyond the cut-
off date for the Code a note has been inserted to reflect the future effective
date. In those instances where a regulation published in the Federal Register
states a date certain for expiration, an appropriate note will be inserted following
the text.
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00005 Fmt 8008 Sfmt 8092 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Many agencies have begun publishing numerous OMB control numbers as amend-
ments to existing regulations in the CFR. These OMB numbers are placed as
close as possible to the applicable recordkeeping or reporting requirements.
PAST PROVISIONS OF THE CODE
Provisions of the Code that are no longer in force and effect as of the revision
date stated on the cover of each volume are not carried. Code users may find
the text of provisions in effect on any given date in the past by using the appro-
priate List of CFR Sections Affected (LSA). For the convenience of the reader,
a List of CFR Sections Affected is published at the end of each CFR volume.
For changes to the Code prior to the LSA listings at the end of the volume,
consult previous annual editions of the LSA. For changes to the Code prior to
2001, consult the List of CFR Sections Affected compilations, published for 1949-
1963, 1964-1972, 1973-1985, and 1986-2000.
[RESERVED] TERMINOLOGY
The term [Reserved] is used as a place holder within the Code of Federal
Regulations. An agency may add regulatory information at a [Reserved] loca-
tion at any time. Occasionally [Reserved] is used editorially to indicate that
a portion of the CFR was left vacant and not accidentally dropped due to a print-
ing or computer error.
INCORPORATION BY REFERENCE
What is incorporation by reference? Incorporation by reference was established
by statute and allows Federal agencies to meet the requirement to publish regu-
lations in the Federal Register by referring to materials already published else-
where. For an incorporation to be valid, the Director of the Federal Register
must approve it. The legal effect of incorporation by reference is that the mate-
rial is treated as if it were published in full in the Federal Register (5 U.S.C.
552(a)). This material, like any other properly issued regulation, has the force
of law.
What is a proper incorporation by reference? The Director of the Federal Register
will approve an incorporation by reference only when the requirements of 1 CFR
part 51 are met. Some of the elements on which approval is based are:
(a) The incorporation will substantially reduce the volume of material pub-
lished in the Federal Register.
(b) The matter incorporated is in fact available to the extent necessary to
afford fairness and uniformity in the administrative process.
(c) The incorporating document is drafted and submitted for publication in
accordance with 1 CFR part 51.
What if the material incorporated by reference cannot be found? If you have any
problem locating or obtaining a copy of material listed as an approved incorpora-
tion by reference, please contact the agency that issued the regulation containing
that incorporation. If, after contacting the agency, you find the material is not
available, please notify the Director of the Federal Register, National Archives
and Records Administration, 8601 Adelphi Road, College Park, MD 20740-6001, or
call 202-741-6010.
CFR INDEXES AND TABULAR GUIDES
A subject index to the Code of Federal Regulations is contained in a separate
volume, revised annually as of January 1, entitled CFR INDEX AND FINDING AIDS.
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
This volume contains the Parallel Table of Authorities and Rules. A list of CFR
titles, chapters, subchapters, and parts and an alphabetical list of agencies pub-
lishing in the CFR are also included in this volume.
vi
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00006 Fmt 8008 Sfmt 8092 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
An index to the text of Title 3The President is carried within that volume.
The Federal Register Index is issued monthly in cumulative form. This index
is based on a consolidation of the Contents entries in the daily Federal Reg-
ister.
A List of CFR Sections Affected (LSA) is published monthly, keyed to the
revision dates of the 50 CFR titles.
REPUBLICATION OF MATERIAL
There are no restrictions on the republication of material appearing in the
Code of Federal Regulations.
INQUIRIES
For a legal interpretation or explanation of any regulation in this volume,
contact the issuing agency. The issuing agencys name appears at the top of
odd-numbered pages.
For inquiries concerning CFR reference assistance, call 2027416000 or write
to the Director, Office of the Federal Register, National Archives and Records
Administration, 8601 Adelphi Road, College Park, MD 20740-6001 or e-mail
fedreg.info@nara.gov.
SALES
The Government Publishing Office (GPO) processes all sales and distribution
of the CFR. For payment by credit card, call toll-free, 866-512-1800, or DC area,
202-512-1800, M-F 8 a.m. to 4 p.m. e.s.t. or fax your order to 202-512-2104, 24 hours
a day. For payment by check, write to: US Government Publishing Office New
Orders, P.O. Box 979050, St. Louis, MO 63197-9000.
ELECTRONIC SERVICES
The full text of the Code of Federal Regulations, the LSA (List of CFR Sections
Affected), The United States Government Manual, the Federal Register, Public
Laws, Public Papers of the Presidents of the United States, Compilation of Presi-
dential Documents and the Privacy Act Compilation are available in electronic
format via www.ofr.gov. For more information, contact the GPO Customer Con-
tact Center, U.S. Government Publishing Office. Phone 202-512-1800, or 866-512-
1800 (toll-free). E-mail, ContactCenter@gpo.gov.
The Office of the Federal Register also offers a free service on the National
Archives and Records Administrations (NARA) World Wide Web site for public
law numbers, Federal Register finding aids, and related information. Connect
to NARAs web site at www.archives.gov/federal-register.
The e-CFR is a regularly updated, unofficial editorial compilation of CFR ma-
terial and Federal Register amendments, produced by the Office of the Federal
Register and the Government Publishing Office. It is available at www.ecfr.gov.
OLIVER A. POTTS,
Director,
Office of the Federal Register.
October 1, 2016.
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
vii
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00007 Fmt 8008 Sfmt 8092 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00008 Fmt 8008 Sfmt 8092 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
THIS TITLE
In the volume containing parts 100177, see 172.101 for the Hazardous Materials
Table. The Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards appear in part 571.
For this volume, Susannah C. Hurley was Chief Editor. The Code of Federal
Regulations publication program is under the direction of John Hyrum Martinez,
assisted by Stephen J. Frattini.
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
ix
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00009 Fmt 8092 Sfmt 8092 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00010 Fmt 8092 Sfmt 8092 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Title 49Transportation
(This book contains parts 178 to 199)
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00011 Fmt 8008 Sfmt 8008 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00012 Fmt 8008 Sfmt 8008 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Subtitle BOther Regulations
Relating to Transportation
(Continued)
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00013 Fmt 8008 Sfmt 8008 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00014 Fmt 8008 Sfmt 8008 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
CHAPTER IPIPELINE AND HAZARDOUS
MATERIALS SAFETY ADMINISTRATION,
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
(CONTINUED)
Part Page
178 Specifications for packagings ................................. 7
179 Specifications for tank cars .................................... 257
180 Continuing qualification and maintenance of pack-
agings ................................................................... 319
181185 [Reserved]
SUBCHAPTER DPIPELINE SAFETY
186189 [Reserved]
190 Pipeline safety enforcement and regulatory proce-
dures ..................................................................... 381
191 Transportation of natural and other gas by pipe-
line; annual reports, incident reports, and safety-
related condition reports ..................................... 404
192 Transportation of natural and other gas by pipe-
line: Minimum Federal safety standards ............. 410
193 Liquefied natural gas facilities: Federal safety
standards .............................................................. 525
194 Response plans for onshore oil pipelines ................. 545
195 Transportation of hazardous liquids by pipeline ..... 555
196 Protection of underground pipelines from exca-
vation activity ..................................................... 625
197 [Reserved]
198 Regulations for grants to aid State pipeline safety
programs .............................................................. 627
199 Drug and alcohol testing ......................................... 632
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00015 Fmt 8008 Sfmt 8008 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00016 Fmt 8008 Sfmt 8008 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
PART 178SPECIFICATIONS FOR 178.39 Specification 3BN seamless nickel
cylinders.
PACKAGINGS 178.42 Specification 3E seamless steel cyl-
inders.
Sec. 178.44 Specification 3HT seamless steel cyl-
178.1 Purpose and scope. inders for aircraft use.
178.2 Applicability and responsibility. 178.45 Specification 3T seamless steel cyl-
178.3 Marking of packagings. inders.
178.46 Specification 3AL seamless alu-
Subpart A [Reserved] minum cylinders.
178.47 Specification 4DS welded stainless
Subpart BSpecifications for Inside steel cylinders for aircraft use.
Containers, and Linings 178.50 Specification 4B welded or brazed
steel cylinders.
178.33 Specification 2P; inner nonrefillable 178.51 Specification 4BA welded or brazed
metal receptacles. steel cylinders.
178.331 Compliance. 178.53 Specification 4D welded steel cyl-
178.332 Type and size. inders for aircraft use.
178.333 Inspection. 178.55 Specification 4B240ET welded or
178.334 Duties of inspector. brazed cylinders.
178.335 Material. 178.56 Specification 4AA480 welded steel cyl-
178.336 Manufacture. inders.
178.337 Wall thickness. 178.57 Specification 4L welded insulated cyl-
178.338 Tests. inders.
178.339 Marking. 178.58 Specification 4DA welded steel cyl-
178.33a Specification 2Q; inner nonrefillable inders for aircraft use.
metal receptacles. 178.59 Specification 8 steel cylinders with
178.33a1 Compliance. porous fillings for acetylene.
178.33a2 Type and size. 178.60 Specification 8AL steel cylinders
178.33a3 Inspection. with porous fillings for acetylene.
178.33a4 Duties of inspector. 178.61 Specification 4BW welded steel cyl-
178.33a5 Material. inders with electric-arc welded longitu-
178.33a6 Manufacture. dinal seam.
178.33a7 Wall thickness. 178.65 Specification 39 non-reusable (non-re-
178.33a8 Tests. fillable) cylinders.
178.33a9 Marking. 178.68 Specification 4E welded aluminum
178.33b Specification 2S; inner nonrefillable cylinders.
plastic receptacles 178.69 Responsibilities and requirements for
178.33b1 Compliance. manufacturers of UN pressure recep-
178.33b2 Type and size. tacles.
178.33b3 Inspection. 178.70 Approval of UN pressure receptacles.
178.33b4 Duties of inspector. 178.71 Specifications for UN pressure recep-
178.33b5 Material. tacles.
178.33b6 Manufacture. 178.74 Approval of MEGCs.
178.33b7 Design qualification test. 178.75 Specifications for MEGCs.
178.33b8 Production tests. APPENDIX A TO SUBPART C OF PART 178IL-
178.33b9 Marking. LUSTRATIONS: CYLINDER TENSILE SAMPLE
178.33c Specification 2P; inner nonrefillable
metal receptacle variation. Subparts DG [Reserved]
178.33c1 Compliance.
178.33c2 Variation. Subpart HSpecifications for Portable
178.33d Specification 2Q; inner nonrefillable Tanks
metal receptacle variations.
178.33d1 Compliance. 178.251178.2535 [Reserved]
178.33d2 Variation 1. 178.255 Specification 60; steel portable
178.33d3 Variation 2. tanks.
178.2551 General requirements.
Subpart CSpecifications for Cylinders 178.2552 Material.
178.2553 Expansion domes.
178.35 General requirements for specifica- 178.2554 Closures for manholes and domes.
tion cylinders. 178.2555 Bottom discharge outlets.
178.36 Specification 3A and 3AX seamless 178.2556 Loading and unloading accessories.
steel cylinders. 178.2557 Protection of valves and acces-
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00017 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pt. 178 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
178.25511 Tank mountings. 178.3388 Pressure relief devices, piping,
178.25512 Pressure test. valves, and fittings.
178.25513 Repair of tanks. 178.3389 Holding time.
178.25514 Marking. 178.33810 Accident damage protection.
178.25515 Report. 178.33811 Discharge control devices.
178.273 Approval of Specification UN port- 178.33812 Shear section.
able tanks. 178.33813 Supporting and anchoring.
178.274 Specification for UN portable tanks. 178.33814 Gauging devices.
178.275 Specification for UN Portable Tanks 178.33815 Cleanliness.
intended for the transportation of liquid 178.33816 Inspection and testing.
and solid hazardous materials. 178.33817 Pumps and compressors.
178.276 Requirements for the design, con- 178.33818 Marking.
struction, inspection and testing of port- 178.33819 Certification.
able tanks intended for the transpor- 178.340178.343 [Reserved]
tation of non-refrigerated liquefied com- 178.345 General design and construction re-
pressed gases. quirements applicable to Specification
178.277 Requirements for the design, con- DOT 406 ( 178.346), DOT 407 ( 178.347), and
struction, inspection and testing of port- DOT 412 ( 178.348) cargo tank motor vehi-
able tanks intended for the transpor- cles.
tation of refrigerated liquefied gases. 178.3451 General requirements.
178.3452 Material and material thickness.
Subpart I [Reserved] 178.3453 Structural integrity.
178.3454 Joints.
Subpart JSpecifications for Containers for 178.3455 Manhole assemblies.
Motor Vehicle Transportation 178.3456 Supports and anchoring.
178.3457 Circumferential reinforcements.
178.318 Specification MC 201; container for
178.3458 Accident damage protection.
detonators and percussion caps.
178.3181 Scope. 178.3459 Pumps, piping, hoses and connec-
178.3182 Container. tions.
178.3183 Marking. 178.34510 Pressure relief.
178.320 General requirements applicable to 178.34511 Tank outlets.
all DOT specification cargo tank motor 178.34512 Gauging devices.
vehicles. 178.34513 Pressure and leakage tests.
178.337 Specification MC 331; cargo tank 178.34514 Marking.
motor vehicle primarily for transpor- 178.34515 Certification.
tation of compressed gases as defined in 178.346 Specification DOT 406; cargo tank
subpart G of part 173 of this subchapter. motor vehicle.
178.3371 General requirements. 178.3461 General requirements.
178.3372 Material. 178.3462 Material and thickness of mate-
178.3373 Structural integrity. rial.
178.3374 Joints. 178.3463 Pressure relief.
178.3375 Bulkheads, baffles and ring stiff- 178.3464 Outlets.
eners. 178.3465 Pressure and leakage tests.
178.3376 Closure for manhole. 178.347 Specification DOT 407; cargo tank
178.3377 Overturn protection. motor vehicle.
178.3378 Openings, inlets and outlets. 178.3471 General requirements.
178.3379 Pressure relief devices, piping, 178.3472 Material and thickness of mate-
valves, hoses, and fittings. rial.
178.33710 Accident damage protection. 178.3473 Manhole assemblies.
178.33711 Emergency discharge control. 178.3474 Pressure relief.
178.33712 [Reserved] 178.3475 Pressure and leakage test.
178.33713 Supporting and anchoring. 178.348 Specification DOT 412; cargo tank
178.33714 Gauging devices. motor vehicle.
178.33715 Pumps and compressors. 178.3481 General requirements.
178.33716 Testing. 178.3482 Material and thickness of mate-
178.33717 Marking. rial.
178.33718 Certification. 178.3483 Pumps, piping, hoses and connec-
178.338 Specification MC338; insulated tions.
cargo tank motor vehicle. 178.3484 Pressure relief.
178.3381 General requirements. 178.3485 Pressure and leakage test.
178.3382 Material.
178.3383 Structural integrity. Subpart KSpecifications for Packagings
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00018 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT Pt. 178
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00019 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.1 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
178.1040 Preparation of Flexible Bulk Con- (1) Except as otherwise provided in
tainers for testing. this section, all requirements of the
178.1045 Drop test. DOT specification or UN standard, in-
178.1050 Top lift test.
178.1055 Stacking test. cluding performance tests, are met;
178.1060 Topple test. and
178.1065 Righting test. (2) All functions performed by, or on
178.1070 Tear test. behalf of, the person whose name or
APPENDIX A TO PART 178SPECIFICATIONS FOR symbol appears as part of the marking
STEEL conform to requirements specified in
APPENDIX B TO PART 178ALTERNATIVE this part.
LEAKPROOFNESS TEST METHODS
APPENDIX C TO PART 178NOMINAL AND MIN- (c) Notification. (1) Except as specifi-
IMUM THICKNESSES OF STEEL DRUMS AND cally provided in 178.33718, 178.33819,
JERRICANS and 178.34515 of this part, the manufac-
APPENDIX D TO PART 178THERMAL RESIST- turer or other person certifying com-
ANCE TEST pliance with the requirements of this
APPENDIX E TO PART 178FLAME PENETRA-
part, and each subsequent distributor
TION RESISTANCE TEST
of that packaging must:
AUTHORITY: 49 U.S.C. 51015128; 49 CFR 1.81 (i) Notify each person to whom that
and 1.97.
packaging is transferred
178.1 Purpose and scope. (A) Of all requirements in this part
not met at the time of transfer, and
This part prescribes the manufac-
turing and testing specifications for (B) With information specifying the
packaging and containers used for the type(s) and dimensions of the closures,
transportation of hazardous materials including gaskets and any other com-
in commerce. ponents needed to ensure that the
packaging is capable of successfully
[Amdt. 17840, 42 FR 2689, Jan. 13, 1977. Redes- passing the applicable performance
ignated by Amdt. 17897, 55 FR 52715, Dec. 21, tests. This information must include
1990]
any procedures to be followed, includ-
178.2 Applicability and responsi- ing closure instructions for inner pack-
bility. agings and receptacles, to effectively
(a) Applicability. (1) The requirements assemble and close the packaging for
of this part apply to packagings manu- the purpose of preventing leakage in
factured transportation. Closure instructions
(i) To a DOT specification, regardless must provide for a consistent and re-
of country of manufacture; or peatable means of closure that is suffi-
(ii) To a UN standard, for packagings cient to ensure the packaging is closed
manufactured within the United in the same manner as it was tested.
States. For UN standard packagings For packagings sold or represented as
manufactured outside the United being in conformance with the require-
States, see 173.24(d)(2) of this sub- ments of this subchapter applicable to
chapter. For UN standard packagings transportation by aircraft, this infor-
for which standards are not prescribed mation must include relevant guidance
in this part, see 178.3(b). to ensure that the packaging, as pre-
(2) A manufacturer of a packaging pared for transportation, will with-
subject to the requirements of this part stand the pressure differential require-
is primarily responsible for compliance ments in 173.27 of this subchapter.
with the requirements of this part. (ii) Retain copies of each written no-
However, any person who performs a tification for at least one year from
function prescribed in this part shall date of issuance; and
perform that function in accordance (iii) Make copies of all written notifi-
with this part. cations available for inspection by a
(b) Specification markings. When this representative of the Department.
part requires that a packaging be (2) The notification required in ac-
marked with a DOT specification or UN cordance with this paragraph (c) may
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
10
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00020 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.3
11
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00021 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.33 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
the packaging as specified by the com- ed, soldered, brazed, double seamed, or
petent authority is required, the name swedged.
and address or symbol of the manufac- (b) The maximum capacity of con-
turer or the approval agency certifying tainers in this class shall not exceed
compliance with the UN standard must one liter (61.0 cubic inches). The max-
be entered. Symbols, if used, must be imum inside diameter shall not exceed
registered with the Associate Adminis- 3 inches.
trator.
(3) The letters USA must be used [29 FR 18813, Dec. 29, 1964, as amended by
Order 71, 31 FR 9074, July 1, 1966. Redesig-
to indicate the State authorizing the
nated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, and amended
allocation of the specification marks if by Amdt. 178101, 58 FR 50237, Sept. 24, 1993;
the packaging is manufactured in the 66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001]
United States.
(c) Where a packaging conforms to 178.333 Inspection.
more than one UN standard or DOT
(a) By competent inspector.
specification, the packaging may bear
more than one marking, provided the (b) [Reserved]
packaging meets all the requirements
178.334 Duties of inspector.
of each standard or specification.
Where more than one marking appears (a) To inspect material and com-
on a packaging, each marking must ap- pleted containers and witness tests,
pear in its entirety. and to reject defective materials or
(d) No person may mark or otherwise containers.
certify a packaging or container as (b) [Reserved]
meeting the requirements of a manu-
facturing special permit unless that 178.335 Material.
person is the holder of or a party to (a) Uniform quality steel plate such
that special permit, an agent of the as black plate, electro-tin plate, hot
holder or party for the purpose of dipped tin plate, tern plate or other
marking or certification, or a third commercially accepted can making
party tester. plate; or nonferrous metal of uniform
[Amdt. 17897, 55 FR 52716, Dec. 21, 1990; 56 FR drawing quality.
66284, Dec. 20, 1991, as amended by Amdt. 178 (b) Material with seams, cracks, lam-
106, 59 FR 67519, Dec. 29, 1994; Amdt. 178113, inations or other injurious defects not
61 FR 21102, May 9, 1996; 65 FR 50462, Aug. 18, authorized.
2000; 66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 61015,
Sept. 27, 2002; 68 FR 75748, Dec. 31, 2003; 70 FR
178.336 Manufacture.
73166, Dec. 9, 2005; 78 FR 14714, Mar. 7, 2013]
(a) By appliances and methods that
Subpart A [Reserved] will assure uniformity of completed
containers; dirt and scale to be re-
moved as necessary; no defect accept-
Subpart BSpecifications for able that is likely to weaken the fin-
Inside Containers, and Linings ished container appreciably; reason-
ably smooth and uniform surface finish
SOURCE: 29 FR 18823, Dec. 29, 1964, unless required.
otherwise noted. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, (b) Seams when used must be as fol-
Apr. 5, 1967.
lows:
178.33 Specification 2P; inner non- (1) Circumferential seams: By weld-
refillable metal receptacles. ing, swedging, brazing, soldering, or
double seaming.
178.331 Compliance. (2) Side seams: By welding, brazing,
(a) Required in all details. or soldering.
(b) [Reserved] (c) Ends: The ends shall be of pres-
sure design.
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
12
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00022 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.33a6
13
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00023 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.33a7 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
(2) Side seams. By welding, brazing or 178.33b Specification 2S; inner non-
soldering. refillable plastic receptacles.
(c) Ends. The ends shall be of pres-
sure design. 178.33b1 Compliance.
(a) Required in all details.
[Order 71, 31 FR 9074, July 1, 1966. Redesig- (b) [Reserved]
nated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967]
[74 FR 2268, Jan. 14, 2009]
178.33a7 Wall thickness.
178.33b2 Type and size.
(a) The minimum wall thickness for
any container shall be 0.008 inch. (a) Single-trip inside containers.
(b) The maximum capacity of con-
(b) [Reserved]
tainers in this class shall not exceed
[Order 71, 31 FR 9074, July 1, 1966. Redesig- one liter (61.0 cubic inches). The max-
nated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967] imum inside diameter shall not exceed
3 inches.
178.33a8 Tests.
[74 FR 2268, Jan. 14, 2009]
(a) One out of each lot of 25,000 con-
tainers or less, successively produced 178.33b3 Inspection.
per day, shall be pressure tested to de- (a) By competent inspector.
struction and must not burst below 270 (b) [Reserved]
psig gauge pressure. The container
[74 FR 2268, Jan. 14, 2009]
tested shall be complete with end as-
sembled. 178.33b4 Duties of inspector.
(b) Each such 25,000 containers or
(a) To inspect material and com-
less, successively produced per day,
pleted containers and witness tests,
shall constitute a lot and if the test and to reject defective materials or
container shall fail, the lot shall be re- containers.
jected or ten additional containers may (b) [Reserved]
be selected at random and subjected to
the test under which failure occurred. [74 FR 2268, Jan. 14, 2009]
These containers shall be complete
178.33b5 Material.
with ends assembled. Should any of the
ten containers thus tested fail, the en- (a) The receptacles must be con-
tire lot must be rejected. All con- structed of polyethylene terephthalate
tainers constituting a lot shall be of (PET), polyethylene napthalate (PEN),
like material, size, design, construc- polyamide (Nylon) or a blend of PET,
tion, finish and quality. PEN, ethyl vinyl alcohol (EVOH) and/
or Nylon.
[Order 71, 31 FR 9074, July 1, 1966. Redesig- (b) Material with seams, cracks, lam-
nated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, as amended inations or other injurious defects are
by 66 FR 45387, Aug. 28, 2001] forbidden.
178.33a9 Marking. [74 FR 2268, Jan. 14, 2009]
violet radiation.
[Amdt. 17840, 41 FR 38181, Sept. 9, 1976, as (b) [Reserved]
amended by Amdt. 17897, 56 FR 66287, Dec.
20, 1991; 66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001] [74 FR 2268, Jan. 14, 2009]
14
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00024 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.33c2
15
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00025 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.33d 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
lot shall be of like material, size, de- (2) Each such 25,000 containers or
sign construction, finish, and quality. less, successively produced per day,
(c) Marking. By means of printing, shall constitute a lot and if the test
lithographing, embossing, or stamping, container(s) shall fail, the lot shall be
each container must be marked: rejected. Otherwise, ten (10) additional
(1) DOT2P1. pairs of containers may be selected at
(2) With the name or symbol of the random and subjected to the test under
person making the mark. A symbol, if which failure occurred. Should any of
used, must be registered with the Asso- the containers thus tested fail, the en-
ciate Administrator. tire lot must be rejected. All con-
tainers constituting a lot shall be of
[81 FR 3685, Jan. 21, 2016] like material, size, design construc-
tion, finish, and quality.
178.33d Specification 2Q; inner non-
refillable metal receptacle vari- (e) Marking. By means of printing,
ations. lithographing, embossing, or stamping,
each container must be marked:
178.33d1 Compliance. (1) DOT2Q1.
(2) With the name or symbol of the
Required in all details.
person making the mark. A symbol, if
[81 FR 3685, Jan. 21, 2016] used, must be registered with the Asso-
ciate Administrator.
178.33d2 Variation 1.
[81 FR 3685, Jan. 21, 2016]
Notwithstanding the variation pro-
vided in this paragraph, each container 178.33d3 Variation 2.
must otherwise conform to a DOT 2Q Notwithstanding the variation pro-
container in accordance with 178.33a. vided in this paragraph, each container
The following conditions also apply must otherwise conform to a DOT 2Q
under Variation 1 container in accordance with 178.33a.
(a) Type and size. The maximum ca- The following conditions also apply
pacity of containers in this class may under Variation 2
not exceed 0.40 L (24.4 cubic inches). (a) Manufacture. Ends: The ends shall
The maximum inside diameter shall be designed to withstand pressure and
not exceed 2.1 inches. the container equipped with a pressure
(b) Manufacture. Ends: The top of the relief system (e.g., rim-venting release
container must be designed with a or a dome expansion device) designed
pressure relief system consisting of ra- to buckle prior to the burst of the con-
dial scores on the top seam(s). The bot- tainer.
tom of the container must be designed (b) Tests. (1) One out of each lot of
to buckle at a pressure greater than 25,000 containers or less, successively
the pressure at which the top buckles produced per day shall be pressure test-
and vents. ed to destruction at gauge pressure and
(c) Wall thickness. The minimum wall must not burst below 270 psig. For con-
thickness for any container shall be tainers with a pressure relief system as
0.0085 inches. described in paragraph (a) of this sec-
(d) Tests. (1) Two containers (one tion and assembled, failure at a loca-
without a pressure relief system and tion other than the pressure relief sys-
one with) out of each lot of 25,000 or tem will reject the lot.
less, successively produced per day (2) Each such 25,000 containers or
shall be pressure tested to destruction less, successively produced per day,
at gauge pressure. The container with- shall constitute a lot and if the test
out a pressure relief system must not container(s) shall fail, the lot shall be
burst below 320 psig. The container as- rejected. Otherwise, ten (10) additional
sembled with a pressure relief system containers of each container design
as described in paragraph (b) of this produced may be selected at random
section must be tested to destruction. and subjected to the test. These con-
The bottom of the container must tainers shall be complete with ends as-
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
buckle at a pressure greater than the sembled. Should any of the containers
pressure at which the top buckles and thus tested fail, the entire lot must be
vents. rejected. All containers constituting a
16
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00026 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.35
lot shall be of like material, size, de- (2) Verify the material of construc-
sign construction, finish, and quality. tion meets the requirements of the ap-
(c) Marking. By means of printing, plicable specification by
lithographing, embossing, or stamping, (i) Making a chemical analysis of
each container must be marked: each heat of material;
(1) DOT2Q2. (ii) Obtaining a certified chemical
(2) With the name or symbol of the analysis from the material manufac-
person making the mark. A symbol, if turer for each heat of material (a ladle
used, must be registered with the Asso- analysis is acceptable); or
ciate Administrator. (iii) If an analysis is not provided for
each heat of material by the material
[81 FR 3685, Jan. 21, 2016] manufacturer, by making a check anal-
ysis of a sample from each coil, sheet,
Subpart CSpecifications for or tube.
Cylinders (3) Verify compliance of cylinders
with the applicable specification by
178.35 General requirements for (i) Verifying identification of mate-
specification cylinders. rial is proper;
(a) Compliance. Compliance with the (ii) Inspecting the inside of the cyl-
requirements of this subpart is re- inder before closing in ends;
quired in all details. (iii) Verifying that the heat treat-
(b) Inspections and analyses. Chemical ment is proper;
analyses and tests required by this sub- (iv) Obtaining samples for all tests
chapter must be made within the and check chemical analyses (NOTE:
United States, unless otherwise ap- Recommended locations for test speci-
proved in writing by the Associate Ad- mens taken from welded cylinders are
ministrator, in accordance with sub- depicted in Figures 1 through 5 in Ap-
part I of part 107 of this chapter. In- pendix C to this subpart for the specific
construction design.);
spections and verification must be per-
formed by (v) Witnessing all tests;
(vi) Verify threads by gauge;
(1) An independent inspection agency
approved in writing by the Associate (vii) Reporting volumetric capacity
and tare weight (see report form) and
Administrator, in accordance with sub-
minimum thickness of wall noted; and
part I of part 107 of this chapter; or
(viii) Verifying that each cylinder is
(2) For DOT Specifications 3B, 3BN,
marked in accordance with the applica-
3E, 4B, 4BA, 4D (water capacity less
ble specification.
than 1,100 cubic inches), 4B240ET,
(4) Inspectors report. Prepare a report
4AA480, 4L, 8, 8AL, 4BW, 39 (marked
containing, at a minimum, the applica-
service pressure 900 p.s.i.g. or lower)
ble information listed in CGA C11
and 4E manufactured in the United (IBR, see 171.7 of this subchapter).
States, a competent inspector of the Any additional information or mark-
manufacturer. ings that are required by the applicable
(c) Duties of inspector. The inspector specification must be shown on the test
shall determine that each cylinder report. The signature of the inspector
made is in conformance with the appli- on the reports certifies that the proc-
cable specification. Except as other- esses of manufacture and heat treat-
wise specified in the applicable speci- ment of cylinders were observed and
fication, the inspector shall perform found satisfactory. The inspector must
the following: furnish the completed test reports re-
(1) Inspect all material and reject quired by this subpart to the maker of
any not meeting applicable require- the cylinder and, upon request, to the
ments. For cylinders made by the bil- purchaser. The test report must be re-
let-piercing process, billets must be in- tained by the inspector for fifteen
spected and shown to be free from pipe, years from the original test date of the
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
17
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00027 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.36 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
18
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00028 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.36
than 1,000 pounds and a service pres- or other defect is permitted that is
sure of at least 500 psig, conforming to likely to weaken the finished cylinder
the following requirements: appreciably. A reasonably smooth and
(i) Assuming the cylinder is to be uniform surface finish is required. If
supported horizontally at its two ends not originally free from such defects,
only and to be uniformly loaded over the surface may be machined or other-
its entire length consisting of the wise treated to eliminate these defects.
weight per unit of length of the The thickness of the bottoms of cyl-
straight cylindrical portion filled with inders welded or formed by spinning is,
water and compressed to the specified under no condition, to be less than two
test pressure; the sum of two times the times the minimum wall thickness of
maximum tensile stress in the bottom the cylindrical shell; such bottom
fibers due to bending, plus that in the thicknesses must be measured within
same fibers (longitudinal stress), due to an area bounded by a line representing
hydrostatic test may not exceed 80 per- the points of contact between the cyl-
cent of the minimum yield strength of inder and floor when the cylinder is in
the steel at such maximum stress. Wall a vertical position.
thickness must be increased when nec- (e) Welding or brazing. Welding or
essary to meet the requirement. brazing for any purpose whatsoever is
(ii) To calculate the maximum longi- prohibited except as follows:
tudinal tensile stress due to bending, (1) Welding or brazing is authorized
the following formula must be used: for the attachment of neckrings and
S = Mc/I footrings which are non-pressure parts
and only to the tops and bottoms of
(iii) To calculate the maximum lon- cylinders having a service pressure of
gitudinal tensile stress due to hydro- 500 psig or less. Cylinders, neckrings,
static test pressure, the following for-
and footrings must be made of weldable
mula must be used:
steel, the carbon content of which may
S = A1 P/A2 not exceed 0.25 percent except in the
where: case of 4130X steel which may be used
with proper welding procedures.
S = tensile stressp.s.i.;
M = bending moment-inch pounds(wl2)/8; (2) As permitted in paragraph (d) of
w = weight per inch of cylinder filled with this section.
water; (3) Cylinders used solely in anhy-
l = length of cylinder-inches; drous ammonia service may have a 12
c = radius (D)/(2) of cylinder-inches; inch diameter bar welded within their
I = moment of inertia0.04909 (D4d4) inches concave bottoms.
fourth;
D = outside diameter-inches;
(f) Wall thickness. For cylinders with
d = inside diameter-inches; service pressure less than 900 psig, the
A1 = internal area in cross section of cyl- wall stress may not exceed 24,000 psig.
inder-square inches; A minimum wall thickness of 0.100 inch
A2 = area of metal in cross section of cyl- is required for any cylinder over 5
inder-square inches; inches outside diameter. Wall stress
P = hydrostatic test pressure-psig. calculation must be made by using the
(b) Steel. Open-hearth or electric steel following formula:
of uniform quality must be used. Con- S = [P(1.3D2 + 0.4d2)]/(D2d2)
tent percent may not exceed the fol-
lowing: Carbon, 0.55; phosphorous, 0.045; Where:
sulphur, 0.050. S = wall stress in psi;
(c) Identification of material. Material P = minimum test pressure prescribed for
must be identified by any suitable water jacket test or 450 psig whichever is
method, except that plates and billets the greater;
for hot-drawn cylinders must be D = outside diameter in inches;
d = inside diameter in inches.
marked with the heat number.
(d) Manufacture. Cylinders must be (g) Heat treatment. The completed cyl-
manufactured using equipment and inder must be uniformly and properly
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
19
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00029 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.36 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
(k) Physical test. A physical test must gauge length. Elastic extension cal-
be conducted to determine yield culations must be based on an elastic
strength, tensile strength, elongation, modulus of 30,000,000. In the event of
20
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00030 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.37
controversy the entire stress-strain before the hydrostatic test, the manu-
diagram must be plotted and the yield facturer should design the test appa-
strength determined from the 0.2 per- ratus so that the pressure is applied to
cent offset. the smallest area practicable, around
(iii) For the purpose of strain meas- the point of closure, and so as to use
urement, the initial strain must be set the smallest possible volume of air or
while the specimen is under a stress of gas.
12,000 psig and the strain indicator (n) Rejected cylinders. Reheat treat-
reading must be set at the calculated ment is authorized for rejected cyl-
corresponding strain. inders. Subsequent thereto, cylinders
(iv) Cross-head speed of the testing must pass all prescribed tests to be ac-
machine may not exceed 18 inch per ceptable. Repair by welding or spinning
minute during yield strength deter-
is not authorized. Spun cylinders re-
mination.
jected under the provisions of para-
(l) Acceptable results for physical and
graph (m) of this section may be re-
flattening tests. Either of the following
is an acceptable result: moved from the spun cylinder category
(1) An elongation at least 40 percent by drilling to remove defective mate-
for a 2-inch gauge length or at least 20 rial, tapping and plugging.
percent in other cases and yield [Amdt. 178114, 61 FR 25942, May 23, 1996, as
strength not over 73 percent of tensile amended at 62 FR 51561, Oct. 1, 1997; 66 FR
strength. In this instance, the flat- 45185, 45386, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 51652, Aug. 8,
tening test is not required. 2002; 68 FR 75748, Dec. 31, 2003; 73 FR 57006,
(2) An elongation at least 20 percent Oct. 1, 2008]
for a 2-inch gauge length or 10 percent
in other cases and a yield strength not 178.37 Specification 3AA and 3AAX
over 73 percent of tensile strength. In seamless steel cylinders.
this instance, the flattening test is re- (a) Type, size and service pressure. In
quired, without cracking, to 6 times addition to the requirements of 178.35,
the wall thickness. cylinders must conform to the fol-
(m) Leakage test. All spun cylinders lowing:
and plugged cylinders must be tested (1) A DOT-3AA cylinder is a seamless
for leakage by gas or air pressure after steel cylinder with a water capacity
the bottom has been cleaned and is free (nominal) of not over 1,000 pounds and
from all moisture subject to the fol- a service pressure of at least 150 psig.
lowing conditions and limitations: (2) A DOT-3AAX cylinder is a seam-
(1) Pressure, approximately the same
less steel cylinder with a water capac-
as but no less than service pressure,
ity of not less than 1,000 pounds and a
must be applied to one side of the fin-
service pressure of at least 500 psig,
ished bottom over an area of at least
116 of the total area of the bottom but conforming to the following require-
ments:
not less than 34 inch in diameter, in-
cluding the closure, for at least 1 (i) Assuming the cylinder is to be
minute, during which time the other supported horizontally at its two ends
side of the bottom exposed to pressure only and to be uniformly loaded over
must be covered with water and closely its entire length consisting of the
examined for indications of leakage. weight per unit of length of the
Except as provided in paragraph (n) of straight cylindrical portion filled with
this section, a cylinder that is leaking water and compressed to the specified
must be rejected. test pressure; the sum of two times the
(2) A spun cylinder is one in which an maximum tensile stress in the bottom
end closure in the finished cylinder has fibers due to bending, plus that in the
been welded by the spinning process. same fibers (longitudinal stress), due to
(3) A plugged cylinder is one in which hydrostatic test pressure may not ex-
a permanent closure in the bottom of a ceed 80 percent of the minimum yield
finished cylinder has been effected by a strength of the steel at such maximum
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
21
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00031 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.37 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
Carbon ................... 0.25/0.35 ......... 0.28/0.33 ......... 0.10/0.20 ......... 0.20/0.30 ......... 0.270.37 ........ 0.40 max.
Manganese ............ 0.40/0.90 ......... 0.70/0.90 ......... 0.50/0.75 ......... 0.50/0.75 ......... 0.801.40 ........ 1.35/1.65.
Phosphorus ........... 0.04 max ......... 0.04 max ......... 0.04 max ......... 0.04 max ......... 0.035 max ....... 0.04 max.
Sulfur ..................... 0.05 max ......... 0.04 max ......... 0.04 max ......... 0.04 max ......... 0.045 max ....... 0.05 max.
Silicon .................... 0.15/0.35 ......... 0.20/0.35 ......... 0.60/0.90 ......... 0.60/0.90 ......... 0.3 max. .......... 0.10/0.30.
Chromium .............. 0.80/1.10 ......... 0.40/0.60 ......... 0.50/0.65 ......... 0.50/0.65.
Molybdenum .......... 0.15/0.25 ......... 0.15/0.25
Zirconium ............... ......................... ......................... 0.05/0.15 ......... 0.05/0.15
Nickel ..................... ......................... 0.40/0.70.
Boron ..................... ......................... ......................... ......................... ......................... 0.0005/0.003.
Note 1: This designation may not be restrictive and the commercial steel is limited in analysis as shown in this table.
22
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00032 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.37
(c) Identification of material. Material quired in paragraphs (k) and (l) of this
must be identified by any suitable section and must be not over 70,000 psi.
method except that plates and billets (3) Calculation must be made by the
for hot-drawn cylinders must be formula:
marked with the heat number.
S = [P(1.3D2 + 0.4d2)]/(D2d2)
(d) Manufacture. Cylinders must be
manufactured using equipment and Where:
processes adequate to ensure that each S = wall stress in psi;
cylinder produced conforms to the re- P = minimum test pressure prescribed for
quirements of this subpart. No fissure water jacket test or 450 psig whichever is
or other defects is permitted that is the greater;
likely to weaken the finished cylinder D = outside diameter in inches;
d = inside diameter in inches.
appreciably. A reasonably smooth and
uniform surface finish is required. If (g) Heat treatment. The completed cyl-
not originally free from such defects, inders must be uniformly and properly
the surface may be machined or other- heat treated prior to tests. Heat treat-
wise treated to eliminate these defects. ment of cylinders of the authorized
The thickness of the bottoms of cyl- analyses must be as follows:
inders welded or formed by spinning is, (1) All cylinders must be quenched by
under no condition, to be less than two oil, or other suitable medium except as
times the minimum wall thickness of provided in paragraph (g)(5) of this sec-
the cylindrical shell; such bottom tion.
thicknesses must be measured within (2) The steel temperature on quench-
an area bounded by a line representing ing must be that recommended for the
the points of contact between the cyl- steel analysis, but may not exceed 1750
inder and floor when the cylinder is in F.
a vertical position. (3) All steels must be tempered at a
(e) Welding or brazing. Welding or temperature most suitable for that
brazing for any purpose whatsoever is steel.
prohibited except as follows: (4) The minimum tempering tempera-
(1) Welding or brazing is authorized ture may not be less than 1000 F ex-
for the attachment of neckrings and cept as noted in paragraph (g)(6) of this
footrings which are non-pressure parts, section.
and only to the tops and bottoms of (5) Steel 4130X may be normalized at
cylinders having a service pressure of a temperature of 1650 F instead of
500 psig or less. Cylinders, neckrings, being quenched and cylinders so nor-
and footrings must be made of weldable malized need not be tempered.
steel, the carbon content of which may (6) Intermediate manganese steels
not exceed 0.25 percent except in the may be tempered at temperatures not
case of 4130X steel which may be used less than 1150 F., and after heat treat-
with proper welding procedure. ing each cylinder must be submitted to
(2) As permitted in paragraph (d) of a magnetic test to detect the presence
this section. of quenching cracks. Cracked cylinders
(f) Wall thickness. The thickness of must be rejected and destroyed.
each cylinder must conform to the fol- (7) Except as otherwise provided in
lowing: paragraph (g)(6) of this section, all cyl-
(1) For cylinders with a service pres- inders, if water quenched or quenched
sure of less than 900 psig, the wall with a liquid producing a cooling rate
stress may not exceed 24,000 psi. A min- in excess of 80 percent of the cooling
imum wall thickness of 0.100 inch is re- rate of water, must be inspected by the
quired for any cylinder with an outside magnetic particle, dye penetrant or ul-
diameter of over 5 inches. trasonic method to detect the presence
(2) For cylinders with service pres- of quenching cracks. Any cylinder de-
sure of 900 psig or more the minimum signed to the requirements for speci-
wall must be such that the wall stress fication 3AA and found to have a
at the minimum specified test pressure quenching crack must be rejected and
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
may not exceed 67 percent of the min- may not be requalified. Cylinders de-
imum tensile strength of the steel as signed to the requirements for speci-
determined from the physical tests re- fication 3AAX and found to have
23
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00033 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.37 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
wedge shaped knife edges having a 60 permanent strain of 0.2 percent of the
included angle, rounded to 12-inch ra- gauge length. The following conditions
dius. The longitudinal axis of the cyl- apply:
24
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00034 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.38
(i) The yield strength must be deter- and closely examined for indications of
mined by either the offset method or leakage. Except as provided in para-
the extension under load method as graph (n) of this section, a cylinder
prescribed in ASTM E 8 (IBR, see 171.7 must be rejected if there is any leak-
of this subchapter). ing.
(ii) In using the extension under (1) A spun cylinder is one in which an
load method, the total strain (or ex- end closure in the finished cylinder has
tension under load) corresponding to been welded by the spinning process.
the stress at which the 0.2 percent per- (2) A plugged cylinder is one in which
manent strain occurs may be deter- a permanent closure in the bottom of a
mined with sufficient accuracy by cal- finished cylinder has been effected by a
culating the elastic extension of the plug.
gauge length under appropriate load (3) As a safety precaution, if the
and adding thereto 0.2 percent of the manufacturer elects to make this test
gauge length. Elastic extension cal- before the hydrostatic test, the manu-
culations must be based on an elastic facturer should design the test appa-
modulus of 30,000,000. In the event of ratus so that the pressure is applied to
controversy, the entire stress-strain the smallest area practicable, around
diagram must be plotted and the yield the point of closure, and so as to use
strength determined from the 0.2 per- the smallest possible volume of air or
cent offset. gas.
(iii) For the purpose of strain meas- (n) Rejected cylinders. Reheat treat-
urement, the initial strain must be set ment is authorized for rejected cyl-
while the specimen is under a stress of inders. Subsequent thereto, cylinders
12,000 psi, the strain indicator reading must pass all prescribed tests to be ac-
being set at the calculated cor- ceptable. Repair by welding or spinning
responding strain. is not authorized. Spun cylinders re-
(iv) Cross-head speed of the testing jected under the provision of paragraph
machine may not exceed 18 inch per (m) of this section may be removed
minute during yield strength deter- from the spun cylinder category by
mination. drilling to remove defective material,
(l) Acceptable results for physical, flat- tapping and plugging.
tening and bend tests. An acceptable re- [Amdt. 178114, 61 FR 25942, May 23, 1996, as
sult for physical and flattening tests is amended at 65 FR 58631, Sept. 29, 2000; 66 FR
elongation of at least 20 percent for 2 45386, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 51652, Aug. 8, 2002;
inches of gauge length or at least 10 68 FR 75748, Dec. 31, 2003; 76 FR 43531, July 20,
percent in other cases. Flattening is re- 2011]
quired, without cracking, to 6 times
the wall thickness of the cylinder. An 178.38 Specification 3B seamless
acceptable result for the alternative steel cylinders.
bend test is no crack when the cylinder (a) Type, size, and service pressure. A
is bent inward around the mandrel DOT 3B cylinder is seamless steel cyl-
until the interior edges are not further inder with a water capacity (nominal)
apart than the diameter of the man- of not over 1,000 pounds and a service
drel. pressure of at least 150 to not over 500
(m) Leakage test. All spun cylinders psig.
and plugged cylinders must be tested (b) Steel. Open-hearth or electric steel
for leakage by gas or air pressure after of uniform quality must be used. Con-
the bottom has been cleaned and is free tent percent may not exceed the fol-
from all moisture. Pressure, approxi- lowing: carbon, 0.55; phosphorus, 0.045;
mately the same as but no less than sulphur, 0.050.
the service pressure, must be applied to (c) Identification of material. Material
one side of the finished bottom over an must be identified by any suitable
area of at least 116 of the total area of method except that plates and billets
the bottom but not less than 34 inch in for hot-drawn cylinders must be
diameter, including the closure, for at marked with the heat number.
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
least one minute, during which time (d) Manufacture. Cylinders must be
the other side of the bottom exposed to manufactured using equipment and
pressure must be covered with water processes adequate to ensure that each
25
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00035 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.38 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
cylinder produced conforms to the re- (2) Taper threads when used, must be
quirements of this subpart. No fissure of a length not less than as specified
or other defect is permitted that is for American Standard taper pipe
likely to weaken the finished cylinder threads.
appreciably. A reasonably smooth and (3) Straight threads having at least 4
uniform surface finish is required. If engaged threads are authorized.
not originally free from such defects, Straight threads must have a tight fit,
the surface may be machined or other- and calculated shear strength at least
wise treated to eliminate these defects. 10 times the test pressure of the cyl-
The thickness of the bottoms of cyl- inder. Gaskets, adequate to prevent
inders welded or formed by spinning is, leakage, are required.
under no condition, to be less than two (i) Hydrostatic test. Cylinders must
times the minimum wall thickness of successfully withstand a hydrostatic
the cylindrical shell; such bottom test, as follows:
thicknesses to be measured within an (1) The test must be by water-jacket,
area bounded by a line representing the or other suitable method, operated so
points of contact between the cylinder as to obtain accurate data. The pres-
and floor when the cylinder is in a sure gauge must permit reading to an
vertical position. accuracy of 1 percent. The expansion
(e) Welding or brazing. Welding or gauge must permit reading of total ex-
brazing for any purpose whatsoever is pansion to an accuracy either of 1 per-
prohibited except as follows: cent or 0.1 cubic centimeter.
(1) Welding or brazing is authorized (2) Pressure must be maintained for
for the attachment of neckrings and at least 30 seconds and sufficiently
footrings which are non-pressure parts, longer to insure complete expansion.
and only to the tops and bottoms of Any internal pressure applied after
cylinders having a service pressure of heat-treatment and previous to the of-
500 psig or less. Cylinders, neckrings, ficial test may not exceed 90 percent of
and footrings must be made of weldable the test pressure. If, due to failure of
steel, carbon content of which may not the test apparatus, the test pressure
exceed 0.25 percent except in the case cannot be maintained, the test may be
of 4130X steel which may be used with repeated at a pressure increased by 10
proper welding procedure. percent or 100 psig, whichever is the
(2) As permitted in paragraph (d) of lower.
this section. (3) Permanent volumetric expansion
(f) Wall thickness. The wall stress may may not exceed 10 percent of total vol-
not exceed 24,000 psi. The minimum umetric expansion at test pressure.
wall thickness is 0.090 inch for any cyl- (4) Cylinders must be tested as fol-
inder with an outside diameter of 6 lows:
inches. Calculation must be made by
(i) Each cylinder; to at least 2 times
the following formula:
service pressure; or
S = [P(1.3D2 + 0.4d2)]/(D2d2) (ii) 1 cylinder out of each lot of 200 or
Where:
less; to at least 3 times service pres-
sure. Others must be examined under
S = wall stress in psi; pressure of 2 times service pressure and
P = at least two times service pressure or 450
show no defect.
psig, whichever is the greater;
D = outside diameter in inches; (j) Flattening test. A flattening test
d = inside diameter in inches. must be performed on one cylinder
taken at random out of each lot of 200
(g) Heat treatment. The completed cyl- or less, by placing the cylinder between
inders must be uniformly and properly wedge shaped knife edges having a 60
heat-treated prior to tests. included angle, rounded to 12-inch ra-
(h) Openings in cylinders and connec- dius. The longitudinal axis of the cyl-
tions (valves, fuse plugs, etc.) for those inder must be at a 90-degree angle to
openings. Threads, conforming to the knife edges during the test. For lots of
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
following, are required on all openings: 30 or less, flattening tests are author-
(1) Threads must be clean cut, even, ized to be made on a ring at least 8
without checks, and to gauge. inches long cut from each cylinder and
26
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00036 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.38
gauge length. The following conditions not less than 34 inch in diameter, in-
apply: cluding the closure, for at least one
(i) The yield strength must be deter- minute, during which time the other
mined by either the offset method or side of the bottom exposed to pressure
the extension under load method as must be covered with water and closely
prescribed in ASTM E 8 (IBR, see 171.7 examined for indications of leakage.
of this subchapter). Except as provided in paragraph (n) of
(ii) In using the extension under this section, a cylinder must be re-
load method, the total strain (or ex- jected if there is any leaking.
tension under load) corresponding to (2) A spun cylinder is one in which an
the stress at which the 0.2 percent per- end closure in the finished cylinder has
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
manent strain occurs may be deter- been welded by the spinning process.
mined with sufficient accuracy by cal- (3) A plugged cylinder is one in which
culating the elastic extension of the a permanent closure in the bottom of a
27
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00037 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.39 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
finished cylinder has been effected by a (c) Identification of material. The ma-
plug. terial must be identified by any suit-
(4) As a safety precaution, if the able method except that plates and bil-
manufacturer elects to make this test lets for hot-drawn cylinders must be
before the hydrostatic test, he should marked with the heat number.
design his apparatus so that the pres- (d) Manufacture. Cylinders must be
sure is applied to the smallest area manufactured using equipment and
practicable, around the point of clo- processes adequate to ensure that each
sure, and so as to use the smallest pos- cylinder produced conforms to the re-
sible volume of air or gas. quirements of this subpart. No defect is
(n) Rejected cylinders. Reheat treat- permitted that is likely to weaken the
ment of rejected cylinders is author- finished cylinder appreciably. A rea-
ized. Subsequent thereto, cylinders sonably smooth and uniform surface
must pass all prescribed tests to be ac- finish is required. Cylinders closed in
ceptable. Repair by welding or spinning by spinning process are not authorized.
is not authorized. Spun cylinders re- (e) Welding or brazing. Welding or
jected under the provisions of para- brazing for any purpose whatsoever is
graph (m) of this section may be re- prohibited except that welding is au-
moved from the spun cylinder category thorized for the attachment of
by drilling to remove defective mate- neckrings and footrings which are non-
rial, tapping and plugging. pressure parts, and only to the tops and
(o) Marking. Markings may be bottoms of cylinders. Neckrings and
stamped into the sidewalls of cylinders footrings must be of weldable material,
having a service pressure of 150 psig if the carbon content of which may not
all of the following conditions are met: exceed 0.25 percent. Nickel welding rod
(1) Wall stress at test pressure may must be used.
not exceed 24,000 psi. (f) Wall thickness. The wall stress may
(2) Minimum wall thickness must be not exceed 15,000 psi. A minimum wall
not less than 0.090 inch. thickness of 0.100 inch is required for
(3) Depth of stamping must be no any cylinder over 5 inches in outside
greater than 15 percent of the min- diameter. Wall stress calculation must
imum wall thickness, but may not ex- be made by using the following for-
ceed 0.015 inch. mula:
(4) Maximum outside diameter of cyl- S = [P(1.3D2 + 0.4d2)] / (D2 d2)
inder may not exceed 5 inches.
Where:
(5) Carbon content of cylinder may
S = wall stress in psi;
not exceed 0.25 percent. If the carbon P = minimum test pressure prescribed for
content exceeds 0.25 percent, the com- water jacket test or 450 psig whichever is
plete cylinder must be normalized after the greater;
stamping. D = outside diameter in inches;
(6) Stamping must be adjacent to the d = inside diameter in inches.
top head. (g) Heat treatment. The completed cyl-
[Amdt. 178114, 61 FR 25942, May 23, 1996, as inders must be uniformly and properly
amended by 66 FR 45185, 45386, Aug. 28, 2001; heat-treated prior to tests.
67 FR 51652, Aug. 8, 2002; 68 FR 75748, Dec. 31, (h) Openings in cylinders and connec-
2003] tions (valves, fuse plugs, etc.) for those
openings. Threads conforming to the
178.39 Specification 3BN seamless following are required on openings:
nickel cylinders.
(1) Threads must be clean cut, even,
(a) Type, size and service pressure. A without checks, and to gauge.
DOT 3BN cylinder is a seamless nickel (2) Taper threads, when used, to be of
cylinder with a water capacity (nomi- length not less than as specified for
nal) not over 125 pounds water capacity American Standard taper pipe threads.
(nominal) and a service pressure at (3) Straight threads having at least 6
least 150 to not over 500 psig. engaged threads are authorized.
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
(b) Nickel. The percentage of nickel Straight threads must have a tight fit
plus cobalt must be at least 99.0 per- and a calculated shear strength of at
cent. least 10 times the test pressure of the
28
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00038 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.39
29
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00039 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.42 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
minute during yield strength deter- (e) Openings in cylinders and connec-
mination. tions (valves, fuse plugs, etc.) for those
(l) Acceptable results for physical and openings. Threads conforming to the
flattening tests. Either of the following following are required on openings.
is an acceptable result: (1) Threads must be clean cut, even,
(1) An elongation of at least 40 per- without checks, and to gauge.
cent for a 2 inch gauge length or at (2) Taper threads, when used, must be
least 20 percent in other cases and of length not less than as specified for
yield point not over 50 percent of ten- American Standard taper pipe threads.
sile strength. In this instance, the flat- (3) Straight threads having at least 4
tening test is not required. engaged threads are authorized.
(2) An elongation of at least 20 per- Straight threads must have a tight fit
cent for a 2 inch gauge length or 10 per- and a calculated shear strength of at
cent in other cases and a yield point least 10 times the test pressure of the
not over 50 percent of tensile strength. cylinder. Gaskets, adequate to prevent
Flattening is required, without crack- leakage, are required.
ing, to 6 times the wall thickness. (f) Hydrostatic test. Cylinders must be
(m) Rejected cylinders. Reheat treat- tested as follows:
ment is authorized for rejected cyl- (1) One cylinder out of each lot of 500
inders. Subsequent thereto, cylinders or less must be subjected to a hydro-
must pass all prescribed tests to be ac- static pressure of 6,000 psig or higher.
ceptable. Repair by welding is not au- (2) The cylinder referred to in para-
thorized. graph (f)(1) of this section must burst
[Amdt. 178114, 61 FR 25942, May 23, 1996, as at a pressure higher than 6,000 psig
amended by 66 FR 45185, 45386, 45388, Aug. 28, without fragmenting or otherwise
2001; 67 FR 51652, Aug. 8, 2002; 68 FR 75748, showing lack of ductility, or must hold
Dec. 31, 2003] a pressure of 12,000 psig for 30 seconds
without bursting. In which case, it
178.42 Specification 3E seamless steel must be subjected to a flattening test
cylinders. without cracking to six times wall
(a) Type, size, and service pressure. A thickness between knife edges, wedge
DOT 3E cylinder is a seamless steel shaped 60 degree angle, rounded out to
cylinder with an outside diameter not a 12 inch radius. The inspectors report
greater than 2 inches nominal, a length must be suitably changed to show re-
less than 2 feet and a service pressure sults of latter alternate and flattening
of 1,800 psig. test.
(b) Steel. Open-hearth or electric steel (3) Other cylinders must be examined
of uniform quality must be used. Con- under pressure of at least 3,000 psig and
tent percent may not exceed the fol- not to exceed 4,500 psig and show no de-
lowing: Carbon, 0.55; phosphorus, 0.045; fect. Cylinders tested at a pressure in
sulphur, 0.050. excess of 3,600 psig must burst at a
(c) Identification of steel. Materials pressure higher than 7,500 psig when
must be identified by any suitable tested as specified in paragraph (f)(2) of
method. this section. The pressure must be
(d) Manufacture. Cylinders must be maintained for at least 30 seconds and
manufactured by best appliances and sufficiently longer to ensure complete
methods. No defect is permitted that is examination.
likely to weaken the finished cylinder (g) Leakage test. All spun cylinders
appreciably. A reasonably smooth and and plugged cylinders must be tested
uniform surface finish is required. The for leakage by gas or air pressure after
thickness of the spun bottom is, under the bottom has been cleaned and is free
no condition, to be less than two times from all moisture subject to the fol-
the minimum wall thickness of the cy- lowing conditions and limitations:
lindrical shell; such bottom thickness (1) A pressure, approximately the
must be measured within an area same as but not less than the service
bounded by a line representing the pressure, must be applied to one side of
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
points of contact between the cylinder the finished bottom over an area of at
and floor when the cylinder is in a least 116 of the total area of the bottom
vertical position. but not less than 34 inch in diameter,
30
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00040 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.44
including the closure, for at least one The grain size must be determined in
minute, during which time the other accordance with ASTM E 11288 (IBR,
side of the bottom exposed to pressure see 171.7 of this subchapter). Steel of
must be covered with water and closely the following chemical analysis is au-
examined for indications of leakage. thorized:
Accept as provided in paragraph (h) of
this section, a cylinder must be re- TABLE 1AUTHORIZED MATERIALS
jected if there is any leakage. AISI 4130
(2) A spun cylinder is one in which an Designation (percent)
end closure in the finished cylinder has
Carbon ............................................... 0.28/0.33
been welded by the spinning process. Manganese ........................................ 0.40/0.60
(3) A plugged cylinder is one in which Phosphorus ........................................ 0.040 maximum
a permanent closure in the bottom of a Sulfur ................................................. 0.040 maximum
finished cylinder has been effected by a Silicon ................................................ 0.15/0.35
Chromium .......................................... 0.80/1.10
plug. Molybdenum ...................................... 0.15/0.25
(4) As a safety precaution, if the
manufacturer elects to make this test
before the hydrostatic test, the manu- TABLE 2CHECK ANALYSIS TOLERANCES
facturer shall design the test apparatus Tolerance
so that the pressure is applied to the (percent) over the
maximum limit or
smallest area practicable, around the under the
point of closure, and so as to use the Element Limit or maximum minimum limit
specified (percent)
smallest possible volume of air or gas. Under Over
(h) Rejected cylinders. Reheat treat- min- max-
imum imum
ment is authorized for rejected cyl- limit limit
inders. Subsequent thereto, cylinders
must pass all prescribed tests to be ac- Carbon ........... Over 0.15 to 0.40 incl .03 .04
Manganese .... To 0.60 incl ................ .03 .03
ceptable. Repair by welding or spinning Phosphorus1 .. All ranges .................. .............. .01
is not authorized. Spun cylinders re- Sulphur .......... All ranges .................. .............. .01
jected under the provisions of para- Silicon ............ To 0.30 incl ................ .02 .03
graph (g) of this section may be re- Over 0.30 to 1.00 incl .05 .05
Chromium ...... To 0.90 incl ................ .03 .03
moved from the spun cylinder category Over 0.90 to 2.10 incl .05 .05
by drilling to remove defective mate- Molybdenum .. To 0.20 incl ................ .01 .01
rial, tapping and plugging. Over 0.20 to 0.40 incl .02 .02
(i) Marking. Markings required by 1 Rephosphorized steels not subject to check analysis for
31
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00041 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.44 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
cylinder is not originally free of such ticular steel analysis but not less than
defects or does not meet the finish re- 850 F.
quirements, the surface may be ma- (4) All cylinders must be inspected by
chined or otherwise treated to elimi- the magnetic particle or dye penetrant
nate these defects. The point of closure method to detect the presence of
of cylinders closed by spinning may not quenching cracks. Any cylinder found
be less than two times the prescribed to have a quenching crack must be re-
wall thickness of the cylindrical shell. jected and may not be requalified.
The cylinder end contour must be hem- (h) Openings in cylinders and connec-
ispherical or ellipsoidal with a ratio of tions (valves, fuse plugs, etc.) for those
major-to-minor axis not exceeding two openings. Threads conforming to the
to one and with the concave side to following are required on openings:
pressure. (1) Threads must be clean cut, even,
(e) Welding or brazing. Welding or without cracks, and to gauge.
brazing for any purpose whatsoever is (2) Taper threads, when used, must be
prohibited, except that welding by of length not less than as specified for
spinning is permitted to close the bot- National Gas Tapered Thread (NGT) as
tom of spun cylinders. Machining or required by American Standard Com-
grinding to produce proper surface fin- pressed Gas Cylinder Valve Outlet and
ish at point of closure is required. Inlet Connections.
(f) Wall thickness. (1) Minimum wall (3) Straight threads having at least 6
thickness for any cylinder must be engaged threads are authorized.
0.050 inch. The minimum wall thick- Straight threads must have a tight fit
ness must be such that the wall stress and a calculated shear stress of at least
at the minimum specified test pressure 10 times the test pressure of the cyl-
may not exceed 75 percent of the min- inder. Gaskets, adequate to prevent
imum tensile strength of the steel as leakage, are required.
determined from the physical tests re- (i) Hydrostatic test. Each cylinder
quired in paragraph (m) of this section must withstand a hydrostatic test, as
and may not be over 105,000 psi. follows:
(2) Calculations must be made by the (1) The test must be by water-jacket,
formula: or other suitable method, operated so
as to obtain accurate data. Pressure
S = [P(1.3D2 + 0.4d2)] / (D2 d2)
gauge must permit reading to an accu-
Where: racy of 1 percent. The expansion gauge
S = Wall stress in psi; must permit reading of total expansion
P = Minimum test pressure prescribed for to an accuracy either of 1 percent of 0.1
water jacket test; cubic centimeter.
D = Outside diameter in inches; (2) Pressure must be maintained for
d = Inside diameter in inches.
at least 30 seconds and sufficiently
(3) Wall thickness of hemispherical longer to ensure complete expansion.
bottoms only permitted to 90 percent Any internal pressure applied after
of minimum wall thickness of cylinder heat treatment and previous to the of-
sidewall but may not be less than 0.050 ficial test may not exceed 90 percent of
inch. In all other cases, thickness to be the test pressure. If, due to failure of
no less than prescribed minimum wall. the test apparatus, the test pressure
(g) Heat treatment. The completed cyl- cannot be maintained, the test may be
inders must be uniformly and properly repeated at a pressure increased by 10
heated prior to tests. Heat treatment percent or 100 psig, which ever is the
of the cylinders of the authorized anal- lower.
ysis must be as follows: (3) Permanent volumetric expansion
(1) All cylinders must be quenched by may not exceed 10 percent of total vol-
oil, or other suitable medium. umetric expansion at test pressure.
(2) The steel temperature on quench- (4) Each cylinder must be tested to at
ing must be that recommended for the least 53 times service pressure.
steel analysis, but may not exceed 1750 (j) Cycling tests. Prior to the initial
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
32
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00042 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.44
clusive of grip ends, may not be flat- ciably weaken or decrease the dura-
tened. Grip ends may be flattened to bility of the cylinder, must be cause for
within one inch of each end of the re- rejection.
33
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00043 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.45 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
(o) Leakage test. All spun cylinders is not authorized. For each cylinder
and plugged cylinders must be tested subjected to reheat treatment during
for leakage by dry gas or dry air pres- original manufacture, sidewall meas-
sure after the bottom has been cleaned urements must be made to verify that
and is free from all moisture, subject the minimum sidewall thickness meets
to the following conditions and limita- specification requirements after the
tions: final heat treatment.
(1) Pressure, approximately the same (r) Marking. (1) Cylinders must be
as but not less than service pressure, marked by low stress type steel stamp-
must be applied to one side of the fin- ing in an area and to a depth which
ished bottom over an area of at least
116 of the total area of the bottom but will insure that the wall thickness
measured from the root of the stamp-
not less than 34 inch in diameter, in-
cluding the closure, for at least one ing to the interior surface is equal to
minute, during which time the other or greater than the minimum pre-
side of the bottom exposed to pressure scribed wall thickness. Stamping must
must be covered with water and closely be permanent and legible. Stamping on
examined for indications of leakage. side wall not authorized.
Except as provided in paragraph (q) of (2) The rejection elastic expansion
this section, a cylinder must be re- (REE), in cubic cm (cc), must be
jected if there is leakage. marked on the cylinder near the date
(2) A spun cylinder is one in which an of test. The REE for a cylinder is 1.05
end closure in the finished cylinder has times its original elastic expansion.
been welded by the spinning process. (3) Name plates are authorized, pro-
(3) A plugged cylinder is one in which vided that they can be permanently
a permanent closure in the bottom of a and securely attached to the cylinder.
finished cylinder has been effected by a Attachment by either brazing or weld-
plug. ing is not permitted. Attachment by
(4) As a safety precaution, if the soldering is permitted provided steel
manufacturer elects to make this test temperature does not exceed 500 F.
before the hydrostatic test, the manu-
(s) Inspectors report. In addition to
facturer should design the test appa-
the requirements of 178.35, the inspec-
ratus so that the pressure is applied to
tors report must indicate the rejection
the smallest area practicable, around
the point of closure, and so as to use elastic expansion (REE), in cubic cm
the smallest possible volume of air or (cc).
gas. [Amdt. 178114, 61 FR 25942, May 23, 1996, as
(p) Acceptable results of tests. Results amended at 62 FR 51561, Oct. 1, 1997; 65 FR
of the flattening test, physical tests, 58631, Sept. 29, 2000; 66 FR 45385, Aug. 28, 2001;
burst test, and cycling test must con- 67 FR 51652, Aug. 8, 2002; 68 FR 75748, 75749,
form to the following: Dec. 31, 2003]
(1) Flattening required without
cracking to ten times the wall thick- 178.45 Specification 3T seamless steel
ness of the cylinder. cylinder.
(2) Physical tests: (a) Type, size, and service pressure. A
(i) An elongation of at least 6 percent DOT 3T cylinder is a seamless steel
for a gauge length of 24 times the wall cylinder with a minimum water capac-
thickness. ity of 1,000 pounds and a minimum
(ii) The tensile strength may not ex- service pressure of 1,800 psig. Each cyl-
ceed 165,000 p.s.i. inder must have integrally formed
(3) The burst pressure must be at heads concave to pressure at both ends.
least 43 times the test pressure. The inside head shape must be hemi-
(4) Cycling-at least 10,000 pressuriza-
spherical, ellipsoidal in which the
tions.
major axis is two times the minor axis,
(q) Rejected cylinders. Reheat treat-
ment is authorized for rejected cyl- or a dished shape falling within these
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
34
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00044 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.45
(b) Material, steel. Only open hearth, (1) Calculation of the stress for cyl-
basic oxygen, or electric furnace proc- inders must be made by the following
ess steel of uniform quality is author- formula:
ized. The steel analysis must conform S = [P(1.3D2 + 0.4d2)] / (D2 d2)
to the following:
Where:
ANALYSIS TOLERANCES S = Wall stress in psi;
P = Minimum test pressure, at least 53 serv-
Check Analysis ice pressure;
Element Ladle analysis
Under Over D = Outside diameter in inches;
d = Inside diameter in inches.
Carbon ........................ 0.35 to 0.50 ...... 0.03 0.04
Manganese ................. 0.75 to 1.05 ...... 0.04 0.04 (2) Each cylinder must meet the fol-
Phosphorus (max) ...... 0.035 ................. ............ 0.01 lowing additional requirement which
Sulphur (max) ............. 0.04 ................... ............ 0.01 assumes a cylinder horizontally sup-
Silicon ......................... 0.15 to 0.35 ...... 0.02 0.03
Chromium ................... 0.80 to 1.15 ...... 0.05 0.05 ported at its two ends and uniformly
Molybdenum ............... 0.15 to 0.25 ...... 0.02 0.02 loaded over its entire length. This load
consists of the weight per inch of
(1) A heat of steel made under the length of the straight cylindrical por-
specifications in the table in this para- tion filled with water compressed to
graph (b), the ladle analysis of which is the specified test pressure. The wall
slightly out of the specified range, is thickness must be increased when nec-
acceptable if satisfactory in all other essary to meet this additional require-
aspects. However, the check analysis ment:
tolerances shown in the table in this (i) The sum of two times the max-
paragraph (b) may not be exceeded ex- imum tensile stress in the bottom fi-
cept as approved by the Department. bers due to bending (see paragraph
(2) Material with seams, cracks, lam- (d)(2)(ii) of this section), plus the max-
inations, or other injurious defects is imum tensile stress in the same fibers
not permitted. due to hydrostatic testing (see para-
(3) Material used must be identified graph (d)(2)(iii) of this section) may
by any suitable method. not exceed 80 percent of the minimum
(c) Manufacture. General manufac- yield strength of the steel at this max-
turing requirements are as follows: imum stress.
(1) Surface finish must be uniform (ii) The following formula must be
and reasonably smooth. used to calculate the maximum tensile
(2) Inside surfaces must be clean, dry, stress due to bending:
and free of loose particles. S = Mc / I
(3) No defect of any kind is permitted
if it is likely to weaken a finished cyl- Where:
inder. S = Tensile stress in psi;
(4) If the cylinder surface is not origi- M = Bending moment in inch-pounds (wl2/8);
nally free from the defects, the surface I = Moment of inertia0.04909 (D4d4) in
inches fourth;
may be machined or otherwise treated c = Radius (D/2) of cylinder in inches;
to eliminate these defects provided the w = Weight per inch of cylinder filled with
minimum wall thickness is main- water;
tained. l = Length of cylinder in inches;
(5) Welding or brazing on a cylinder D = Outside diameter in inches;
is not permitted. d = Inside diameter in inches.
(d) Wall thickness. The minimum wall (iii) The following formula must be
thickness must be such that the wall used to calculate the maximum longi-
stress at the minimum specified test tudinal tensile stress due to hydro-
pressure does not exceed 67 percent of static test pressure:
the minimum tensile strength of the
steel as determined by the physical S = A1 P / A2
tests required in paragraphs (j) and (k) Where:
of this section. A wall stress of more
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
35
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00045 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.45 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
A2 = Area of metal in cross section of cyl- threads must be in compliance with the
inder in square inches. requirements of NBS Handbook H28.
(e) Heat treatment. Each completed (g) Hydrostatic test. Each cylinder
cylinder must be uniformly and prop- must be tested at an internal pressure
erly heat treated prior to testing, as by the water jacket method or other
follows: suitable method, conforming to the fol-
(1) Each cylinder must be heated and lowing requirements:
held at the proper temperature for at (1) The testing apparatus must be op-
least one hour per inch of thickness erated in a manner that will obtain ac-
based on the maximum thickness of curate data. Any pressure gauge used
the cylinder and then quenched in a must permit reading to an accuracy of
suitable liquid medium having a cool- one percent. Any expansion gauge used
ing rate not in excess of 80 percent of must permit reading of the total ex-
water. The steel temperature on pansion to an accuracy of one percent.
quenching must be that recommended (2) Any internal pressure applied to
for the steel analysis, but it must the cylinder after heat treatment and
never exceed 1750 F. before the official test may not exceed
(2) After quenching, each cylinder 90 percent of the test pressure.
must be reheated to a temperature (3) The pressure must be maintained
below the transformation range but sufficiently long to assure complete ex-
not less than 1050 F., and must be held pansion of the cylinder. In no case may
at this temperature for at least one the pressure be held less than 30 sec-
hour per inch of thickness based on the onds.
maximum thickness of the cylinder. (4) If, due to failure of the test appa-
Each cylinder must then be cooled ratus, the required test pressure can-
under conditions recommended for the not be maintained, the test must be re-
steel. peated at a pressure increased by 10
(f) Openings. Openings in cylinders percent or 100 psig, whichever is lower
must comply with the following: or, the cylinder must be reheat treated.
(1) Openings are permitted on heads (5) Permanent volumetric expansion
only. of the cylinder may not exceed 10 per-
(2) The size of any centered opening cent of its total volumetric expansion
in a head may not exceed one half the at the required test pressure.
outside diameter of the cylinder. (6) Each cylinder must be tested to at
(3) Openings in a head must have lig- least 53 times its service pressure.
aments between openings of at least (h) Ultrasonic examination. After the
three times the average of their hole hydrostatic test, the cylindrical sec-
diameter. No off-center opening may tion of each vessel must be examined in
exceed 2.625 inches in diameter. accordance with ASTM E 213 for shear
(4) All openings must be circular. wave and E 114 for straight beam (IBR,
(5) All openings must be threaded. Standard see 171.7 of this subchapter).
Threads must be in compliance with The equipment used must be calibrated
the following: to detect a notch equal to five percent
(i) Each thread must be clean cut, of the design minimum wall thickness.
even, without any checks, and to Any discontinuity indication greater
gauge. than that produced by the five percent
(ii) Taper threads, when used, must notch must be cause for rejection of
be the American Standard Pipe thread the cylinder, unless the discontinuity
(NPT) type and must be in compliance is repaired within the requirements of
with the requirements of NBS Hand- this specification.
book H28 (IBR, see 171.7 of this sub- (i) Basic requirements for tension and
chapter). Charpy impact tests. Cylinders must be
(iii) Taper threads conforming to Na- subjected to a tension and Charpy im-
tional Gas Taper thread (NGT) stand- pact as follows:
ards must be in compliance with the (1) When the cylinders are heat treat-
requirements of NBS Handbook H28. ed in a batch furnace, two tension
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
36
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00046 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.45
batch. The lot size represented by these (3) The yield strength in tension
tests may not exceed 200 cylinders. must be the stress corresponding to a
(2) When the cylinders are heat treat- permanent strain of 0.2 percent of the
ed in a continuous furnace, two tension gage length.
specimens and three Charpy impact (i) This yield strength must be deter-
specimens must be tested from one of mined by the offset method or the
the cylinders or a test ring from each extension under load method de-
four hours or less of production. How- scribed in ASTM E 8 (IBR, see 171.7 of
ever, in no case may a test lot based on this subchapter).
this production period exceed 200 cyl- (ii) For the extension under load
inders. method, the total strain (or extension
(3) Each specimen for the tension and under load) corresponding to the stress
Charpy impact tests must be taken at which the 0.2 percent permanent
from the side wall of a cylinder or from strain occurs may be determined with
a ring which has been heat treated sufficient accuracy by calculating the
with the finished cylinders of which elastic extension of the gage length
the specimens must be representative. under appropriate load and adding
The axis of the specimens must be par- thereto 0.2 percent of the gage length.
allel to the axis of the cylinder. Each Elastic extension calculations must be
cylinder or ring specimen for test must based on an elastic modulus of
be of the same diameter, thickness, and 30,000,000. However, when the degree of
metal as the finished cylinders they accuracy of this method is question-
represent. A test ring must be at least able the entire stress-strain diagram
must be plotted and the yield strength
24 inches long with ends covered during
determined from the 0.2 percent offset.
the heat treatment process so as to
(iii) For the purpose of strain meas-
simulate the heat treatment process of
urement, the initial strain must be set
the finished cylinders it represents.
with the specimen under a stress of
(4) A test cylinder or test ring need 12,000 p.s.i. and the strain indicator
represent only one of the heats in a reading set at the calculated cor-
furnace batch provided the other heats responding strain.
in the batch have previously been test- (iv) The cross-head speed of the test-
ed and have passed the tests and that ing machine may not exceed 18 inch per
such tests do not represent more than minute during the determination of
200 cylinders from any one heat. yield strength.
(5) The test results must conform to (4) Each impact specimen must be
the requirements specified in para- Charpy V-notch type size 10 mm 10
graphs (j) and (k) of this section. mm taken in accordance with para-
(6) When the test results do not con- graph 11 of ASTM A 333 (IBR, see 171.7
form to the requirements specified, the of this subchapter). When a reduced
cylinders represented by the tests may size specimen is used, it must be the
be reheat treated and the tests re- largest size obtainable.
peated. Paragraph (i)(5) of this section (k) Acceptable physical test results. Re-
applies to any retesting. sults of physical tests must conform to
(j) Basic conditions for acceptable phys- the following:
ical testing. The following criteria must (1) The tensile strength may not ex-
be followed to obtain acceptable phys- ceed 155,000 p.s.i.
ical test results: (2) The elongation must be at least 16
(1) Each tension specimen must have percent for a two-inch gage length.
a gauge length of two inches with a (3) The Charpy V-notch impact prop-
width not exceeding one and one-half erties for the three impact specimens
inches. Except for the grip ends, the which must be tested at 0 F may not
specimen may not be flattened. The be less than the values shown as fol-
grip ends may be flattened to within lows:
one inch of each end of the reduced sec-
Average value Minimum value
tion. Size of specimen
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
37
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00047 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.46 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
Size of specimen Average value Minimum value value for one specimen for each lot
for acceptance (1 specimen only number.
(mm) (3 specimens) of the 3)
10.0 5.0 .............. 17.0 ft. lbs. ........... 14.0 ft. lbs.
[Amdt. 178114, 61 FR 25942, May 23, 1996, as
amended at 66 FR 45385, 43588, Aug. 28, 2001;
67 FR 51652, Aug. 8, 2002; 68 FR 48571, Aug. 14,
(4) After the final heat treatment, 2003; 68 FR 75748, 75749, Dec. 31, 2003]
each vessel must be hardness tested on
the cylindrical section. The tensile 178.46 Specification 3AL seamless
strength equivalent of the hardness aluminum cylinders.
number obtained may not be more than (a) Size and service pressure. A DOT
165,000 p.s.i. (Rc 36). When the result of 3AL cylinder is a seamless aluminum
a hardness test exceeds the maximum cylinder with a maximum water capac-
permitted, two or more retests may be ity of 1000 pounds and minimum service
made; however, the hardness number pressure of 150 psig.
obtained in each retest may not exceed (b) Authorized material and identifica-
the maximum permitted. tion of material. The material of con-
(l) Rejected cylinders. Reheat treat- struction must meet the following con-
ment is authorized for rejected cyl- ditions:
inders. However, each reheat treated (1) Starting stock must be cast stock
cylinder must subsequently pass all the or traceable to cast stock.
prescribed tests. Repair by welding is (2) Material with seams, cracks, lam-
inations, or other defects likely to
not authorized.
weaken the finished cylinder may not
(m) Markings. Marking must be done be used.
by stamping into the metal of the cyl- (3) Material must be identified by a
inder. All markings must be legible and suitable method that will identify the
located on a shoulder. alloy, the aluminum producers cast
(n) Inspectors report. In addition to number, the solution heat treat batch
the requirements of 178.35, the inspec- number and the lot number.
tors report for the physical test re- (4) The material must be of uniform
port, must indicate the average value quality. Only the following heat treat-
for three specimens and the minimum able aluminum alloys in table 1 and 2
are permitted as follows:
TABLE 1HEAT OR CAST ANALYSIS FOR ALUMINUM; SIMILAR TO ALUMINUM ASSOCIATION1 ALLOY
6061
[CHEMICAL ANALYSIS IN WEIGHT PERCENT2]
Other
Si Mg
Fe Cu Mn Cr Zn Ti Pb Bi
min/ min/ A1
max min/max max min/max max max max max each total
max max max max
0.4/0.8 0.7 0.15/0.4 0.15 0.8/1.2 0.04/0.35 0.25 0.15 0.005 0.005 0.05 0.15 Bal.
1 TheAluminum Association refers to Aluminum Standards and Data 1993, published by the Aluminum Association Inc.
2 Except for Pb and Bi, the chemical composition corresponds with that of Table 1 of ASTM B 221 (IBR, see 171.7 of this
subchapter) for Aluminum Association alloy 6061.
1 D
represents specimen diameters. When the cylinder wall is greater than inch thick, a retest without reheat treatment
3 16
using the 4D size specimen is authorized if the test using the 2 inch size specimen fails to meet elongation requirements.
2 When cylinder wall is not over 316-inch thick, 10 percent elongation is authorized when using a 24t 6t size test specimen.
(5) All starting stock must be 100 per- one another. The equipment and con-
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
38
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00048 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.46
an ultrasonic response greater than (5) Each new design and any signifi-
that of a calibration block with a 564- cant change to any acceptable design
inch diameter flat bottomed hole. must be qualified for production by
(6) Cast stock must have uniform testing prototype samples as follows:
equiaxed grain structure not to exceed (i) Three samples must be subjected
500 microns maximum. to 100,000 pressure reversal cycles be-
(7) Any starting stock not complying tween zero and service pressure or
with the provisions of paragraphs (b)(1) 10,000 pressure reversal cycles between
through (b)(6) of this section must be zero and test pressure, at a rate not in
rejected. excess of 10 cycles per minute without
(c) Manufacture. Cylinders must be failure.
manufactured in accordance with the (ii) Three samples must be pressur-
following requirements: ized to destruction and failure may not
(1) Cylinder shells must be manufac- occur at less than 2.5 times the marked
tured by the backward extrusion meth- cylinder service pressure. Each cyl-
od and have a cleanliness level ade- inder must remain in one piece. Fail-
quate to ensure proper inspection. No ure must initiate in the cylinder side-
fissure or other defect is acceptable wall in a longitudinal direction. Rate
that is likely to weaken the finished of pressurization may not exceed 200
cylinder below the design strength re- psig per second.
quirements. A reasonably smooth and (6) In this specification significant
uniform surface finish is required. If change means a 10 percent or greater
not originally free from such defects, change in cylinder wall thickness, serv-
the surface may be machined or other- ice pressure, or diameter; a 30 percent
wise conditioned to eliminate these de- or greater change in water capacity or
fects. base thickness; any change in material;
(2) Thickness of the cylinder base over 100 percent increase in size of
may not be less than the prescribed openings; or any change in the number
minimum wall thickness of the cylin- of openings.
drical shell. The cylinder base must (d) Wall thickness. The minimum wall
have a basic torispherical, hemi- thickness must be such that the wall
spherical, or ellipsoidal interior base stress at the minimum specified test
configuration where the dish radius is pressure will not exceed 80 percent of
no greater than 1.2 times the inside di- the minimum yield strength nor exceed
ameter of the shell. The knuckle radius 67 percent of the minimum ultimate
may not be less than 12 percent of the tensile strength as verified by physical
inside diameter of the shell. The inte- tests in paragraph (i) of this section.
rior base contour may deviate from the The minimum wall thickness for any
true torispherical, hemispherical or el- cylinder with an outside diameter
lipsoidal configuration provided that greater than 5 inches must be 0.125
(i) Any areas of deviation are accom- inch. Calculations must be made by the
panied by an increase in base thick- following formula:
ness; S = [P(1.3D2 + 0.4d2)] / (D2 d2)
(ii) All radii of merging surfaces are
equal to or greater than the knuckle Where:
radius; S = Wall stress in psi;
(iii) Each design has been qualified P = Prescribed minimum test pressure in
by successfully passing the cycling psig (see paragraph (g) of this section);
tests in this paragraph (c); and D = Outside diameter in inches; and
d = Inside diameter in inches.
(iv) Detailed specifications of the
base design are available to the inspec- (e) Openings. Openings must comply
tor. with the following requirements:
(3) For free standing cylinders, the (1) Openings are permitted in heads
base thickness must be at least two only.
times the minimum wall thickness (2) The size of any centered opening
along the line of contact between the in a head may not exceed one-half the
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
cylinder base and the floor when the outside diameter of the cylinder.
cylinders are in the vertical position. (3) Other openings are permitted in
(4) Welding or brazing is prohibited. the head of a cylinder if:
39
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00049 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.46 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
(i) Each opening does not exceed 2.625 (g) Hydrostatic test. Each cylinder
inches in diameter, or one-half the out- must be subjected to an internal test
side diameter of the cylinder; which- pressure using the water jacket equip-
ever is less; ment and method or other suitable
(ii) Each opening is separated from equipment and method and comply
each other by a ligament; and with the following requirements:
(iii) Each ligament which separates (1) The testing apparatus must be op-
two openings must be at least three erated in a manner so as to obtain ac-
times the average of the diameters of curate data. The pressure gauge used
the two openings. must permit reading to an accuracy of
(4) All openings must be circular. one percent. The expansion gauge must
(5) All openings must be threaded. permit reading the total expansion to
Threads must comply with the fol- an accuracy of either one percent or 0.1
lowing: cubic centimeter.
(i) Each thread must be clean cut, (2) The test pressure must be main-
even, without checks, and to gauge. tained for a sufficient period of time to
(ii) Taper threads, when used, must assure complete expansion of the cyl-
conform to one of the following: inder. In no case may the pressure be
(A) American Standard Pipe Thread held less than 30 seconds. If, due to fail-
(NPT) type, conforming to the require-
ure of the test apparatus, the required
ments of NBS Handbook H28 (IBR, see
test pressure cannot be maintained,
171.7 of this subchapter);
the test may be repeated at a pressure
(B) National Gas Taper Thread (NGT)
increased by 10 percent or 100 psig,
type, conforming to the requirements
of NBS Handbook H28; or whichever is lower. If the test appa-
(C) Other taper threads conforming ratus again fails to maintain the test
to other standards may be used pro- pressure, the cylinder being tested
vided the length is not less than that must be rejected. Any internal pressure
specified for NPT threads. applied to the cylinder before any offi-
(iii) Straight threads, when used, cial test may not exceed 90 percent of
must conform to one of the following: the test pressure.
(A) National Gas Straight Thread (3) The minimum test pressure is the
(NGS) type, conforming to the require- greatest of the following:
ments of NBS Handbook H28; (i) 450 psig regardless of service pres-
(B) Unified Thread (UN) type, con- sure;
forming to the requirements of NBS (ii) Two times the service pressure
Handbook H28; for cylinders having service pressure
(C) Controlled Radius Root Thread less than 500 psig; or
(UN) type, conforming to the require- (iii) Five-thirds times the service
ments of NBS Handbook H28; or pressure for cylinders having a service
(D) Other straight threads con- pressure of at least 500 psig.
forming to other recognized standards (4) Permanent volumetric expansion
may be used provided that the require- may not exceed 10 percent of total vol-
ments in paragraph (e)(5)(iv) of this umetric expansion at test pressure.
section are met. (h) Flattening test. One cylinder taken
(iv) All straight threads must have at at random out of each lot must be sub-
least 6 engaged threads, a tight fit, and jected to a flattening test as follows:
a factor of safety in shear of at least 10
(1) The test must be between knife
at the test pressure of the cylinder.
edges, wedge shaped, having a 60 in-
Shear stress must be calculated by
using the appropriate thread shear area cluded angle, and rounded in accord-
in accordance with NBS Handbook H ance with the following table. The lon-
28. gitudinal axis of the cylinder must be
(f) Heat treatment. Prior to any test, at an angle 90 to the knife edges dur-
all cylinders must be subjected to a so- ing the test. The flattening test table
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
40
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00050 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.46
TABLE 3FLATTENING TEST TABLE the inspectors report must show that
the specimens were so taken and pre-
Radius
Cylinder wall thickness in inches in pared. Heating of specimens for any
inches purpose is forbidden.
Under .150 ............................................................... .500 (3) The yield strength in tension
.150 to .249 ............................................................. .875 must be the stress corresponding to a
.250 to .349 ............................................................. 1.500 permanent strain of 0.2 percent of the
.350 to .449 ............................................................. 2.125
.450 to .549 ............................................................. 2.750 gauge length.
.550 to .649 ............................................................. 3.500 (i) The yield strength must be deter-
.650 to .749 ............................................................. 4.125 mined by either the offset method or
the extension under load method as
(2) An alternate bend test in accord- prescribed in ASTM B 557 (IBR, see
ance with ASTM E 290 using a mandrel 171.7 of this subchapter).
diameter not more than 6 times the (ii) In using the extension under
wall thickness is authorized to qualify load method, the total strain (or ex-
lots that fail the flattening test of this tension under load) corresponding to
section without reheat treatment. If the stress at which the 0.2 percent per-
used, this test must be performed on manent strain occurs may be deter-
two samples from one cylinder taken mined with sufficient accuracy by cal-
at random out of each lot of 200 cyl- culating the elastic extension of the
inders or less. gauge length under appropriate load
(3) Each test cylinder must withstand and adding thereto 0.2 percent of the
flattening to nine times the wall thick- gauge length. Elastic extension cal-
ness without cracking. When the alter- culations must be based on an elastic
nate bend test is used, the test speci- modulus of 10,000,000 psi. In the event
mens must remain uncracked when of controversy, the entire stress-strain
bent inward around a mandrel in the diagram must be plotted and the yield
direction of curvature of the cylinder strength determined from the 0.2 per-
wall until the interior edges are at a cent offset.
distance apart not greater than the di-
(iii) For the purpose of strain meas-
ameter of the mandrel.
urement, the initial strain must be set
(i) Mechanical properties test. Two test
while the specimen is under a stress of
specimens cut from one cylinder rep-
6,000 psi, the strain indicator reading
resenting each lot of 200 cylinders or
being set at the calculated cor-
less must be subjected to the mechan-
responding strain.
ical properties test, as follows:
(1) The results of the test must con- (iv) Cross-head speed of the testing
form to at least the minimum accept- machine may not exceed 18 inch per
able mechanical property limits for minute during yield strength deter-
aluminum alloys as specified in para- mination.
graph (b) of this section. (j) Rejected cylinder. Reheat treat-
(2) Specimens must be 4D bar or ment of rejected cylinders is author-
gauge length 2 inches with width not ized one time. Subsequent thereto, cyl-
over 112 inch taken in the direction of inders must pass all prescribed tests to
extrusion approximately 180 from each be acceptable.
other; provided that gauge length at (k) Duties of inspector. In addition to
least 24 times thickness with width not the requirements of 178.35, the inspec-
over 6 times thickness is authorized, tor shall:
when cylinder wall is not over 316 inch (1) Verify compliance with the provi-
thick. The specimen, exclusive of grip sions of paragraph (b) of this section
ends, may not be flattened. Grip ends by:
may be flattened to within one inch of (i) Performing or witnessing the per-
each end of the reduced section. When formance of the chemical analyses on
the size of the cylinder does not permit each melt or cast lot or other unit of
securing straight specimens, the speci- starting material; or
mens may be taken in any location or (ii) Obtaining a certified chemical
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
41
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00051 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.47 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
42
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00052 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.47
(c) Identification of material. Materials P = Test pressure prescribed for water jacket
must be identified by any suitable test, i.e., at least two times service pres-
method. sure, in psig;
D = Outside diameter in inches;
(d) Manufacture. Cylinders must be t = Minimum wall thickness in inches;
manufactured using equipment and E = 0.85 (provides 85 percent weld efficiency
processes adequate to ensure that each factor which must be applied in the girth
cylinder produced conforms to the re- weld area and heat zones which zone
quirements of this subpart. No defect is must extend a distance of 6 times wall
permitted that is likely to weaken the thickness from center of weld);
finished cylinder appreciably, a reason- E = 1.0 (for all other areas).
ably smooth and uniform surface finish (2) Calculation for a cylinder must be
is required. No abrupt change in wall made by the formula:
thickness is permitted. Welding proce-
dures and operators must be qualified S = [P(1.3D2 + 0.4d2)] / (D2 d2)
in accordance with CGA Pamphlet C3 Where:
(IBR, see 171.7 of this subchapter). All S = Wall stress in psi;
seams of the sphere or cylinder must be P = Test pressure prescribed for water jacket
fusion welded. Seams must be of the test, i.e., at least two times service pres-
butt type and means must be provided sure, in psig;
for accomplishing complete penetra- D = Outside diameter in inches;
tion of the joint. d = Inside diameter in inches.
(e) Attachments. Attachments to the (g) Heat treatment. The seamless
container are authorized by fusion hemispheres and cylinders may be
welding provided that such attach- stress relieved or annealed for forming.
ments are made of weldable stainless Welded container must be stress re-
steel in accordance with paragraph (b) lieved at a temperature of 775 F 25
of this section. after process treatment and before hy-
(f) Wall thickness. The minimum wall drostatic test.
thickness must be such that the wall (h) Openings in container. Openings
stress at the minimum specified test must comply with the following:
pressure may not be over 60,000 psig. A (1) Each opening in the container
minimum wall thickness of 0.040 inch is must be provided with a fitting, boss or
required for any diameter container. pad of weldable stainless steel securely
Calculations must be made by the fol- attached to the container by fusion
lowing formulas: welding.
(1) Calculation for sphere must be (2) Attachments to a fitting, boss, or
made by the formula: pad must be adequate to prevent leak-
age. Threads must comply with the fol-
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
S = PD / 4tE
lowing:
Where: (i) Threads must be clean cut, even,
S = Wall stress in psi; without checks, and tapped to gauge.
43
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00053 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.50 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
jected to radiographic inspection. Evi- (a) Type, size, and service pressure. A
dence of any defects likely to seriously DOT 4B is a welded or brazed steel cyl-
weaken the container is cause for re- inder with longitudinal seams that are
44
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00054 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.50
forged lap-welded or brazed and with placing brazing material on one side of
water capacity (nominal) not over 1,000 seam and applying heat until this ma-
pounds and a service pressure of at terial shows uniformly along the seam
least 150 but not over 500 psig. Cyl- of the other side.
inders closed in by spinning process are (e) Welding or brazing. Only the at-
not authorized. tachment of neckrings, footrings, han-
(b) Steel. Open-hearth, electric or dles, bosses, pads, and valve protection
basic oxygen process steel of uniform rings to the tops and bottoms of cyl-
quality must be used. Content percent inders by welding or brazing is author-
may not exceed the following: Carbon, ized. Such attachments and the portion
0.25; phosphorus, 0.045; sulphur, 0.050. of the container to which they are at-
(c) Identification of material. Material tached must be made of weldable steel,
must be identified by any suitable the carbon content of which may not
method except that plates and billets exceed 0.25 percent except in the case
for hotdrawn cylinders must be marked of 4130X steel which may be used with
with the heat number. proper welding procedure.
(d) Manufacture. Cylinders must be (f) Wall thickness. The wall thickness
manufactured using equipment and of the cylinder must comply with the
processes adequate to ensure that each following requirements:
cylinder produced conforms to the re- (1) For cylinders with outside diame-
quirements of this subpart. No defect is ters over 6 inches the minimum wall
permitted that is likely to weaken the thickness must be 0.090 inch. In any
finished cylinder appreciably. A rea- case, the minimum wall thickness
sonably smooth and uniform surface must be such that calculated wall
finish is required. Exposed bottom stress at minimum test pressure (para-
welds on cylinders over 18 inches long graph (i)(4) of this section) may not ex-
must be protected by footrings. Weld- ceed the following values:
ing procedures and operators must be (i) 24,000 psi for cylinders without
qualified in accordance with CGA Pam- longitudinal seam.
phlet C3 (IBR, see 171.7 of this sub- (ii) 22,800 psig for cylinders having
chapter). Seams must be made as fol- copper brazed or silver alloy brazed
lows: longitudinal seam.
(1) Welded or brazed circumferential (iii) 18,000 psi for cylinders having
seams. Heads attached by brazing must forged lapped welded longitudinal
have a driving fit with the shell, unless seam.
the shell is crimped, swedged, or curled (2) Calculation must be made by the
over the skirt or flange of the head, formula:
and be thoroughly brazed until com-
S = [P(1.3D2 + 0.4d2)] / (D2 d2)
plete penetration by the brazing mate-
rial of the brazed joint is secured. Where:
Depth of brazing from end of shell must S = wall stress in psi;
be at least four times the thickness of P = minimum test pressure prescribed for
shell metal. water jacket test or 450 psig whichever is
(2) Longitudinal seams in shells. Longi- the greater;
tudinal seams must be forged lap weld- D = outside diameter in inches;
d = inside diameter in inches.
ed, by copper brazing, by copper alloy
brazing, or by silver alloy brazing. Cop- (g) Heat treatment. Cylinder body and
per alloy composition must be: Copper, heads, formed by drawing or pressing,
95 percent minimum; Silicon, 1.5 per- must be uniformly and properly heat
cent to 3.85 percent; Manganese, 0.25 treated prior to tests.
percent to 1.10 percent. The melting (h) Opening in cylinders. Openings in
point of the silver alloy brazing mate- cylinders must conform to the fol-
rial must be in excess of 1000 F. When lowing:
brazed, the plate edge must be lapped (1) Each opening in cylinders, except
at least eight times the thickness of those for safety devices, must be pro-
plate, laps being held in position, sub- vided with a fitting, boss, or pad, se-
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
45
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00055 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.50 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
for the method of attachment em- (ii) All cylinders not tested as out-
ployed, and which need not be identi- lined in paragraph (i)(4)(i) of this sec-
fied or verified as to analysis except tion must be examined under pressure
that if attachment is by welding, car- of at least two times service pressure
bon content may not exceed 0.25 per- and show no defect.
cent. If threads are used, they must (j) Flattening test. After the hydro-
comply with the following: static test, a flattening test must be
(i) Threads must be clean cut, even performed on one cylinder taken at
without checks, and tapped to gauge. random out or each lot of 200 or less, by
(ii) Taper threads to be of length not placing the cylinder between wedge
less than as specified for American shaped knife edges having a 60 in-
Standard taper pipe threads. cluded angle, rounded to 12-inch radius.
(iii) Straight threads, having at least The longitudinal axis of the cylinder
4 engaged threads, to have tight fit and must be at a 90-degree angle to knife
calculated shear strength at least 10 edges during the test. For lots of 30 or
times the test pressure of the cylinder; less, flattening tests are authorized to
gaskets required, adequate to prevent be made on a ring at least 8 inches long
leakage. cut from each cylinder and subjected to
(iv) A brass fitting may be brazed to same heat treatment as the finished
the steel boss or flange on cylinders cylinder.
used as component parts of hand fire (k) Physical test. A physical test must
extinguishers. be conducted to determine yield
strength, tensile strength, elongation,
(2) The closure of a fitting, boss, or
and reduction of area of material as
pad must be adequate to prevent leak-
follows:
age.
(1) The test is required on 2 speci-
(i) Hydrostatic test. Cylinders must mens cut from 1 cylinder, or part
withstand a hydrostatic test as follows: thereof heat-treated as required, taken
(1) The test must be by water-jacket, at random out of each lot of 200 or less.
or other suitable method, operated so For lots of 30 or less, physical tests are
as to obtain accurate data. The pres- authorized to be made on a ring at
sure gauge must permit reading to an least 8 inches long cut from each cyl-
accuracy of 1 percent. The expansion inder and subjected to same heat treat-
gauge must permit reading of total ex- ment as the finished cylinder.
pansion to an accuracy either of 1 per- (2) Specimens must conform to the
cent or 0.1 cubic centimeter. following:
(2) Pressure must be maintained for (i) A gauge length of 8 inches with a
at least 30 seconds and sufficiently width of not over 112 inches, a gauge
longer to ensure complete expansion. length of 2 inches with a width of not
Any internal pressure applied after over 112 inches, or a gauge length at
heat-treatment and previous to the of- least 24 times the thickness with a
ficial test may not exceed 90 percent of width not over 6 times the thickness is
the test pressure. If, due to failure of authorized when a cylinder wall is not
the test apparatus, the test pressure over 316 inch thick.
cannot be maintained, the test may be (ii) The specimen, exclusive of grip
repeated at a pressure increased by 10 ends, may not be flattened. Grip ends
percent or 100 psig, whichever is the may be flattened to within one inch of
lower. each end of the reduced section.
(3) Permanent volumetric expansion (iii) When size of cylinder does not
may not exceed 10 percent of total vol- permit securing straight specimens,
umetric expansion at test pressure. the specimens may be taken in any lo-
(4) Cylinders must be tested as fol- cation or direction and may be
lows: straightened or flattened cold, by pres-
(i) At least one cylinder selected at sure only, not by blows. When speci-
random out of each lot of 200 or less mens are so taken and prepared, the in-
must be tested as outlined in para- spectors report must show in connec-
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
graphs (i)(1), (i)(2), and (i)(3) of this sec- tion with record of physical tests de-
tion to at least two times service pres- tailed information in regard to such
sure. specimens.
46
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00056 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.51
(iv) Heating of a specimen for any must pass all prescribed tests to be ac-
purpose is not authorized. ceptable. Repair of brazed seams by
(3) The yield strength in tension brazing and welded seams by welding is
must be the stress corresponding to a authorized.
permanent strain of 0.2 percent of the (n) Markings. Markings must be
gauge length. The following conditions stamped plainly and permanently in
apply: any of the following locations on the
(i) The yield strength must be deter- cylinder:
mined by either the offset method or (1) On shoulders and top heads when
the extension under load method as they are not less than 0.087-inch thick.
prescribed in ASTM E 8 (IBR, see 171.7 (2) On side wall adjacent to top head
of this subchapter). for side walls which are not less than
(ii) In using the extension under 0.090 inch thick.
load method, the total strain (or ex- (3) On a cylindrical portion of the
tension under load) corresponding to shell which extends beyond the re-
the stress at which the 0.2 percent per- cessed bottom of the cylinder, consti-
manent strain occurs may be deter- tuting an integral and non-pressure
mined with sufficient accuracy by cal- part of the cylinder.
culating the elastic extension of the (4) On a metal plate attached to the
gauge length under appropriate load top of the cylinder or permanent part
and adding thereto 0.2 percent of the thereof; sufficient space must be left on
gauge length. Elastic extension cal- the plate to provide for stamping at
culations must be based on an elastic least six retest dates; the plate must be
modulus of 30,000,000. In the event of at least 116-inch thick and must be at-
controversy, the entire stress-strain tached by welding, or by brazing. The
diagram must be plotted and the yield brazing rod must melt at a tempera-
strength determined from the 0.2 per- ture of 1100 F. Welding or brazing
cent offset. must be along all the edges of the
(iii) For the purpose of strain meas- plate.
urement, the initial strain must be set (5) On the neck, neckring, valve boss,
while the specimen is under a stress of valve protection sleeve, or similar part
12,000 psi, and strain indicator reading permanently attached to the top of the
must be set at the calculated cor- cylinder.
responding strain. (6) On the footring permanently at-
(iv) Cross-head speed of the testing tached to the cylinder, provided the
machine may not exceed 18 inch per water capacity of the cylinder does not
minute during yield strength deter- exceed 25 pounds.
mination. [Amdt. 178114, 61 FR 25942, May 23, 1996, as
(l) Acceptable results for physical and amended at 62 FR 51561, Oct. 1, 1997; 66 FR
flattening tests. Either of the following 45385, 45388, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 51653, Aug. 8,
is an acceptable result: 2002; 68 FR 75748, Dec. 31, 2003]
(1) An elongation of at least 40 per-
cent for a 2-inch gauge length or at 178.51 Specification 4BA welded or
least 20 percent in other cases and brazed steel cylinders.
yield strength not over 73 percent of (a) Type, size, and service pressure. A
tensile strength. In this instance, a DOT 4BA cylinder is a cylinder, either
flattening test is not required. spherical or cylindrical in shape, with
(2) When cylinders are constructed of a water capacity of 1,000 pounds or less
lap welded pipe, flattening test is re- and a service pressure of at least 225
quired, without cracking, to 6 times and not over 500 psig. Closures made by
the wall thickness. In such case, the the spinning process are not author-
rings (crop ends) cut from each end of ized.
pipe, must be tested with the weld 45 (1) Spherical type cylinders must be
or less from the point of greatest made from two seamless hemispheres
stress. If a ring fails, another from the joined by the welding of one circum-
same end of pipe may be tested. ferential seam.
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
(m) Rejected cylinders. Reheat treat- (2) Cylindrical type cylinders must be
ment is authorized for rejected cyl- of circumferentially welded or brazed
inder. Subsequent thereto, cylinders construction.
47
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00057 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.51 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
(b) Steel. The steel used in the con- least 32 times the strength of the steel
struction of the cylinder must be as wall.
specified in table 1 of appendix A to (2) Welding procedures and operators
this part. must be qualified in accordance with
(c) Identification of material. Material CGA Pamphlet C3 (IBR, see 171.7 of
must be identified by any suitable this subchapter).
method except that plates and billets (e) Welding and brazing. Only the
for hotdrawn cylinders must be marked welding or brazing of neckrings,
with the heat number. footrings, handles, bosses, pads, and
(d) Manufacture. Cylinders must be valve protection rings to the tops and
manufactured using equipment and bottoms of cylinders is authorized.
processes adequate to ensure that each Provided that such attachments and
cylinder produced conforms to the re- the portion of the container to which
quirements of this subpart. No defect is they are attached are made of weldable
permitted that is likely to weaken the steel, the carbon content of which may
finished cylinder appreciably. A rea- not exceed 0.25 percent except in the
sonably smooth and uniform surface case of 4130 steel which may be used
with proper welding procedure.
finish is required. Exposed bottom
(f) Wall thickness. The minimum wall
welds on cylinders over 18 inches long
thickness of the cylinder must meet
must be protected by footrings.
the following conditions:
(1) Seams must be made as follows: (1) For any cylinder with an outside
(i) Minimum thickness of heads and diameter of greater than 6 inches, the
bottoms must be not less than 90 per- minimum wall thickness is 0.078 inch.
cent of the required thickness of the In any case the minimum wall thick-
side wall. ness must be such that the calculated
(ii) Circumferential seams must be wall stress at the minimum test pres-
made by welding or by brazing. Heads sure may not exceed the lesser value of
must be attached by brazing and must any of the following:
have a driving fit with the shell, unless (i) The value shown in table 1 of ap-
the shell is crimped, swedged or curled pendix A to this part, for the particular
over the skirt or flange of the head and material under consideration;
must be thoroughly brazed until com- (ii) One-half of the minimum tensile
plete penetration by the brazing mate- strength of the material determined as
rial of the brazed joint is secured. required in paragraph (j) of this sec-
Depth of brazing from end of the shell tion;
must be at least four times the thick- (iii) 35,000 psi; or
ness of shell metal. (iv) Further provided that wall stress
(iii) Longitudinal seams in shells for cylinders having copper brazed lon-
must be made by copper brazing, cop- gitudinal seams may not exceed 95 per-
per alloy brazing, or by silver alloy cent of any of the above values. Meas-
brazing. Copper alloy composition ured wall thickness may not include
must be: Copper 95 percent minimum, galvanizing or other protective coat-
Silicon 1.5 percent to 3.85 percent, Man- ing.
ganese 0.25 percent to 1.10 percent. The (2) Cylinders that are cylindrical in
melting point of the silver alloy braz- shape must have the wall stress cal-
ing material must be in excess of 1,000 culated by the formula:
F. The plate edge must be lapped at S = [P(1.3D2 + 0.4d2)] / (D2 d2)
least eight times the thickness of
Where:
plate, laps being held in position, sub-
stantially metal to metal, by riveting S = wall stress in psi;
P = minimum test pressure prescribed for
or by electric spot-welding. Brazing water jacket test;
must be done by using a suitable flux D = outside diameter in inches;
and by placing brazing material on one d = inside diameter in inches.
side of seam and applying heat until
this material shows uniformly along (3) Cylinders that are spherical in
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
the seam of the other side. Strength of shape must have the wall stress cal-
longitudinal seam: Copper brazed lon- culated by the formula:
gitudinal seam must have strength at S = PD / 4tE
48
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00058 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8003 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.51
Where: (ii) Taper threads must be of a length
S = wall stress in psi; not less than that specified for Amer-
P = minimum test pressure prescribed for ican Standard taper pipe threads.
water jacket test; (iii) Straight threads, having at least
D = outside diameter in inches; 4 engaged threads, must have a tight
t = minimum wall thickness in inches; fit and a calculated shear strength of
E = 0.85 (provides 85 percent weld efficiency at least 10 times the test pressure of
factor which must be applied in the girth the cylinder. Gaskets, adequate to pre-
weld area and heat affected zones which vent leakage, are required.
zone must extend a distance of 6 times
(i) Hydrostatic test. Each cylinder
wall thickness from center line of weld);
must successfully withstand a hydro-
E = 1.0 (for all other areas).
static test, as follows:
(4) For a cylinder with a wall thick- (1) The test must be by water jacket,
ness less than 0.100 inch, the ratio of or other suitable method, operated so
tangential length to outside diameter as to obtain accurate data. A pressure
may not exceed 4.1. gauge must permit reading to an accu-
(g) Heat treatment. Cylinders must be racy of 1 percent. An expansion gauge
heat treated in accordance with the must permit reading of total expansion
following requirements: to an accuracy of either 1 percent or 0.1
(1) Each cylinder must be uniformly cubic centimeter.
and properly heat treated prior to test (2) Pressure must be maintained for
by the applicable method shown in at least 30 seconds and sufficiently
table 1 of appendix A to this part. Heat longer to ensure complete expansion.
treatment must be accomplished after Any internal pressure applied after
all forming and welding operations, ex- heat treatment and previous to the of-
cept that when brazed joints are used, ficial test may not exceed 90 percent of
heat treatment must follow any form- the test pressure.
ing and welding operations, but may be (3) Permanent volumetric expansion
done before, during or after the brazing may not exceed 10 percent of the total
operations. volumetric expansion at test pressure.
(4) Cylinders must be tested as fol-
(2) Heat treatment is not required
lows:
after the welding or brazing of weldable
(i) At least one cylinder selected at
low carbon parts to attachments of
random out of each lot of 200 or less
similar material which have been pre-
must be tested as outlined in para-
viously welded or brazed to the top or
graphs (i)(1), (i)(2), and (i)(3) of this sec-
bottom of cylinders and properly heat
tion to at least two times service pres-
treated, provided such subsequent
sure.
welding or brazing does not produce a
(ii) All cylinders not tested as out-
temperature in excess of 400 F in any
lined in paragraph (i)(4)(i) of this sec-
part of the top or bottom material.
tion must be examined under pressure
(h) Openings in cylinders. Openings in of at least two times service pressure
cylinders must comply with the fol- and show no defect.
lowing requirements: (j) Physical test. A physical test must
(1) Any opening must be placed on be conducted to determine yield
other than a cylindrical surface. strength, tensile strength, elongation,
(2) Each opening in a spherical type and reduction of area of material, as
cylinder must be provided with a fit- follows:
ting, boss, or pad of weldable steel se- (1) The test is required on 2 speci-
curely attached to the container by fu- mens cut from one cylinder or part
sion welding. thereof having passed the hydrostatic
(3) Each opening in a cylindrical type test and heat-treated as required,
cylinder must be provided with a fit- taken at random out of each lot of 200
ting, boss, or pad, securely attached to or less. Physical tests for spheres are
container by brazing or by welding. required on 2 specimens cut from flat
(4) If threads are used, they must representative sample plates of the
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
comply with the following: same heat taken at random from the
(i) Threads must be clean-cut, even, steel used to produce the spheres. This
without checks and tapped to gauge. flat steel from which 2 specimens are
49
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00059 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.51 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
to be cut must receive the same heat must be set while the specimen is
treatment as the spheres themselves. under a stress of 12,000 psi, and the
Sample plates must be taken from each strain indicator reading must be set at
lot of 200 or less spheres. the calculated corresponding strain.
(2) Specimens must conform to the (iv) Cross-head speed of the testing
following: machine may not exceed 18 inch per
(i) A gauge length of 8 inches with a minute during yield strength deter-
width not over 112 inches, or a gauge mination.
length of 2 inches with a width not (k) Elongation. Physical test speci-
over 112 inches, or a gauge length at
mens must show at least a 40 percent
least 24 times the thickness with a
elongation for a 2-inch gauge length or
width not over 6 times the thickness is
authorized when a cylinder wall is not at least 20 percent in other cases. Ex-
over 316 inch thick. cept that these elongation percentages
(ii) The specimen, exclusive of grip may be reduced numerically by 2 for 2-
ends, may not be flattened. Grip ends inch specimens, and by 1 in other cases,
may be flattened to within one inch of for each 7,500 psi increment of tensile
each end of the reduced section. strength above 50,000 psi to a maximum
(iii) When size of the cylinder does of four such increments.
not permit securing straight speci- (l) Tests of welds. Except for brazed
mens, the specimens may be taken in seams, welds must be tested as follows:
any location or direction and may be (1) Tensile test. A specimen must be
straightened or flattened cold, by pres- cut from one cylinder of each lot of 200
sure only, not by blows. When speci- or less, or welded test plate. The weld-
mens are so taken and prepared, the in- ed test plate must be of one of the
spectors report must show in connec- heats in the lot of 200 or less which it
tion with record of physical tests de- represents, in the same condition and
tailed information in regard to such approximately the same thickness as
specimens. the cylinder wall except that in no case
(iv) Heating of a specimen for any must it be of a lesser thickness than
purpose is not authorized.
that required for a quarter size Charpy
(3) The yield strength in tension
impact specimen. The weld must be
must be the stress corresponding to a
permanent strain of 0.2 percent of the made by the same procedures and sub-
gauge length. The following conditions jected to the same heat treatment as
apply: the major weld on the cylinder. The
(i) The yield strength must be deter- specimen must be taken from across
mined by either the offset method or the major seam and must be prepared
the extension under load method as and tested in accordance with and
prescribed in ASTM E 8 (IBR, see 171.7 must meet the requirements of CGA
of this subchapter). Pamphlet C3 (IBR, see 171.7 of this
(ii) In using the extension under subchapter). Should this specimen fail
load method, the total strain (or ex- to meet the requirements, specimens
tension under load), corresponding to may be taken from two additional cyl-
the stress at which the 0.2 percent per- inders or welded test plates from the
manent strain occurs may be deter- same lot and tested. If either of the lat-
mined with sufficient accuracy by cal- ter specimens fail to meet the require-
culating the elastic extension of the ments, the entire lot represented must
gauge length under appropriate load be rejected.
and adding thereto 0.2 percent of the (2) Guided bend test. A root bend test
gauge length. Elastic extension cal- specimen must be cut from the cyl-
culations must be based on an elastic inder or welded test plate, used for the
modulus of 30,000,000. In the event of tensile test specified in paragraph (l)(1)
controversy, the entire stress-strain
of this section. Specimens must be
diagram must be plotted and the yield
taken from across the major seam and
strength determined from the 0.2 per-
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
50
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00060 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.53
(3) Alternate guided-bend test. This water capacity of the cylinder does not
test may be used and must be as re- exceed 25 pounds.
quired by CGA Pamphlet C3. The spec-
[Amdt. 178114, 61 FR 25942, May 23, 1996, as
imen must be bent until the elongation amended at 66 FR 4535, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR
at the outer surface, adjacent to the 16015, Sept. 27, 2002; 67 FR 51653, Aug. 8, 2002;
root of the weld, between the lightly 68 FR 75748, Dec. 31, 2003]
scribed gage lines a to b, must be at
least 20 percent, except that this per- 178.53 Specification 4D welded steel
centage may be reduced for steels hav- cylinders for aircraft use.
ing a tensile strength in excess of 50,000 (a) Type, size, and service pressure. A
psig, as provided in paragraph (k) of DOT 4D cylinder is a welded steel
this section. sphere (two seamless hemispheres) or
(m) Rejected cylinders. Reheat treat- circumferentially welded cylinder (two
ment is authorized for rejected cyl- seamless drawn shells) with a water ca-
inders. Subsequent thereto, cylinders pacity not over 100 pounds and a serv-
must pass all prescribed tests to be ac- ice pressure of at least 300 but not over
ceptable. Repair of brazed seams by 500 psig. Cylinders closed in by spin-
brazing and welded seams by welding is ning process are not authorized.
authorized. (b) Steel. Open-hearth or electric steel
(n) Markings. Markings must be of uniform and weldable quality must
stamped plainly and permanently in be used. Content may not exceed the
one of the following locations on the following: Carbon, 0.25; phosphorus,
cylinder: 0.045; sulphur, 0.050, except that the fol-
(1) On shoulders and top heads not lowing steels commercially known as
less than 0.087 inch thick. 4130X and Type 304, 316, 321, and 347
(2) On side wall adjacent to top head stainless steels may be used with prop-
for side walls not less than 0.090 inch er welding procedure. A heat of steel
thick. made under table 1 in this paragraph
(3) On a cylindrical portion of the (b), check chemical analysis of which is
shell which extends beyond the re- slightly out of the specified range, is
cessed bottom of the cylinder consti- acceptable, if satisfactory in all other
tuting an integral and non-pressure respects, provided the tolerances shown
part of the cylinder. in table 2 in this paragraph (b) are not
(4) On a plate attached to the top of exceeded, except as approved by the As-
the cylinder or permanent part thereof; sociate Administrator. The following
sufficient space must be left on the chemical analyses are authorized:
plate to provide for stamping at least
six retest dates; the plate must be at TABLE 14130X STEEL
least 116 inch thick and must be at-
tached by welding, or by brazing at a 4130X Percent
temperature of at least 1100 F., Carbon ........................................................... 0.25/0.35.
throughout all edges of the plate. Manganese .................................................... 0.40/0.60.
(5) On the neck, neckring, valve boss, Phosphorus .................................................... 0.04 max.
Sulphur .......................................................... 0.05 max
valve protection sleeve, or similar part Silicon ............................................................ 0.15/0.35.
permanently attached to the top of the Chromium ...................................................... 0.80/1.10.
cylinder. Molybdenum .................................................. 0.15/0.25.
(6) On the footring permanently at- Zirconium ....................................................... None.
Nickel ............................................................. None.
tached to the cylinder, provided the
TABLE 2AUTHORIZED STAINLESS STEELS
Stainless steels
51
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00061 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.53 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
52
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00062 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.53
53
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00063 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.55 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
authorized when a wall is not over 316 (iv) Cross-head speed of the testing
inch thick. machine may not exceed 18 inch per
(3) Physical test for cylinders is re- minute during yield strength deter-
quired on 2 specimens cut from 1 cyl- mination.
inder taken at random out of each lot (k) Acceptable results for physical and
of 200 or less. For lots of 30 or less, flattening tests. Either of the following
physical tests are authorized to be is an acceptable result:
made on a ring at least 8 inches long (1) An elongation of at least 40 per-
cut from each cylinder and subjected to cent for a 2 inch gauge length or at
the same heat treatment as the fin- least 20 percent in other cases and
ished cylinder. yield strength not over 73 percent of
(4) Specimens for cylinders must con- tensile strength. In this instance, the
form to the following: flattening test is not required.
(i) A gauge length of 8 inches with a (2) An elongation of at least 20 per-
width not over 112 inches, or a gauge cent for a 2 inch gauge length or 10 per-
length of 2 inches with a width not cent in other cases. Flattening is re-
over 112 inches, or a gauge length at quired to 50 percent of the original out-
least 24 times the thickness with a side diameter without cracking.
width not over 6 times the thickness is (l) Rejected cylinders. Reheat-treat-
authorized when a cylinder wall is not ment is authorized for rejected cyl-
over 316 inch thick. inders. Subsequent thereto, containers
(ii) The specimen, exclusive of grip must pass all prescribed tests to be ac-
ends, may not be flattened. Grip ends ceptable. Repair of welded seams by
may be flattened to within 1 inch of welding prior to reheat-treatment is
each end of the reduced section. Heat- authorized.
ing of the specimen for any purpose is (m) Marking. Marking on each con-
not authorized. tainer by stamping plainly and perma-
(5) The yield strength in tension nently are only authorized where the
must be the stress corresponding to a metal is at least 0.09 inch thick, or on
permanent strain of 0.2 percent of the a metal nameplate permanently se-
gauge length. The following conditions cured to the container by means other
apply: than soft solder, or by means that
(i) The yield strength must be deter- would not reduce the wall thickness.
mined by either the offset method or [Amdt. 178114, 61 FR 25942, May 23, 1996, as
the extension under load method as amended at 66 FR 45386, 45388, Aug. 28, 2001;
prescribed in ASTM E 8 (IBR, see 171.7 67 FR 51653, Aug. 8, 2002; 68 FR 75748, Dec. 31,
of this subchapter). 2003]
(ii) In using the extension under
load method, the total strain (or ex- 178.55 Specification 4B240ET welded
tension under load) corresponding to or brazed cylinders.
the stress at which the 0.2 percent per- (a) Type, spinning process, size and
manent strain occurs may be deter- service pressure. A DOT 4B240ET cyl-
mined with sufficient accuracy by cal- inder is a brazed type cylinder made
culating the elastic extension of the from electric resistance welded tubing.
gauge length under appropriate load The maximum water capacity of this
and adding thereto 0.2 percent of the cylinder is 12 pounds or 333 cubic
gauge length. Elastic extension cal- inches and the service must be 240 psig.
culations must be based on an elastic The maximum outside diameter of the
modulus of 30,000,000. In the event of shell must be five inches and maximum
controversy, the entire stress-strain length of the shell is 21 inches. Cyl-
diagram must be plotted and the yield inders closed in by a spinning process
strength determined from the 0.2 per- are authorized.
cent offset. (b) Steel. Open-hearth, basic oxygen,
(iii) For the purpose of strain meas- or electric steel of uniform quality
urement, the initial strain must be set must be used. Plain carbon steel con-
while the specimen is under a stress of tent may not exceed the following: Car-
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
12,000 psi and the strain indicator read- bon, 0.25; phosphorus, 0.045; sulfur,
ing being set at the calculated cor- 0.050. The addition of other elements
responding strain. for alloying effect is prohibited.
54
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00064 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.55
(c) Identification of material. Material pressure and may not exceed 18,000 psi.
must be identified by any suitable The minimum wall thickness is 0.044
method. inch. Calculation must be made by the
(d) Manufacture. Cylinders must be following formula:
manufactured using equipment and
S = [P(1.3D2 + 0.4d2)] / (D2 d2)
processes adequate to ensure that each
cylinder produced conforms to the re- Where:
quirements of this subpart. No defect is S = wall stress in psig;
permitted that is likely to weaken the P = 2 times service pressure;
finished cylinder appreciably. A rea- D = outside diameter in inches;
sonably smooth and uniform surface d = inside diameter in inches.
finish is required. Heads may be at- (g) Heat treatment. Heads formed by
tached to shells by lap brazing or may drawing or pressing must be uniformly
be formed integrally. The thickness of and properly heat treated prior to
the bottom of cylinders welded or tests. Cylinders with integral formed
formed by spinning is, under no condi- heads or bases must be subjected to a
tion, to be less than two times the min- normalizing operation. Normalizing
imum wall thickness of the cylindrical and brazing operations may be com-
shell. Such bottom thicknesses must be bined, provided the operation is carried
measured within an area bounded by a out at a temperature in excess of the
line representing the points of contact upper critical temperature of the steel.
between the cylinder and the floor
(h) Openings in cylinders. Openings in
when the cylinder is in a vertical posi-
cylinders must comply with the fol-
tion. Seams must conform to the fol-
lowing:
lowing:
(1) Circumferential seams must be by (1) Each opening in cylinders, except
brazing only. Heads must be attached those for safety devices, must be pro-
to shells by the lap brazing method and vided with a fitting, boss, or pad, se-
must overlap not less than four times curely attached to the cylinder by
the wall thickness. Brazing material brazing or by welding or by threads. A
must have a melting point of not less fitting, boss, or pad must be of steel
than 1000 F. Heads must have a driving suitable for the method of attachment
fit with the shell unless the shell is employed, and which need not be iden-
crimped, swedged, or curled over the tified or verified as to analysis, except
skirt or flange of the head and be thor- that if attachment is by welding, car-
oughly brazed until complete penetra- bon content may not exceed 0.25 per-
tion of the joint by the brazing mate- cent. If threads are used, they must
rial is secured. Brazed joints may be re- comply with the following:
paired by brazing. (i) Threads must be clean cut, even
(2) Longitudinal seams in shell must without checks, and tapped to gauge.
be by electric resistance welded joints (ii) Taper threads to be of length not
only. No repairs to longitudinal joints less than as specified for American
is permitted. Standard taper pipe threads.
(3) Welding procedures and operators (iii) Straight threads, having at least
must be qualified in accordance with 4 engaged threads, to have tight fit and
CGA C3 (IBR, see 171.7 of this sub- calculated shear strength at least 10
chapter). times the test pressure of the cylinder;
(e) Welding or brazing. Only the at- gaskets required, adequate to prevent
tachment, by welding or brazing, to the leakage.
tops and bottoms of cylinders of (2) Closure of a fitting, boss, or pad
neckrings, footrings, handles, bosses, must be adequate to prevent leakage.
pads, and valve protection rings is au- (i) Hydrostatic test. Each cylinder
thorized. Provided that such attach- must successfully withstand a hydro-
ments and the portion of the container static test as follows:
to which they are attached are made of (1) The test must be by water-jacket,
weldable steel, the carbon content of or other suitable method, operated so
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
which may not exceed 0.25 percent. as to obtain accurate data. The pres-
(f) Wall thickness. The wall stress sure gauge must permit reading to an
must be at least two times the service accuracy of 1 percent. The expansion
55
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00065 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.55 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
gauge must permit reading of total ex- (1) The test is required on 2 speci-
pansion to an accuracy of either 1 per- mens cut from 1 cylinder, or part
cent or 0.1 cubic centimeter. thereof heat-treated as required, taken
(2) Pressure must be maintained for at random out of each lot of 200 or less
at least 30 seconds and sufficiently in the case of cylinders of capacity
longer to ensure complete expansion. greater than 86 cubic inches and out of
Any internal pressure applied after each lot of 500 or less for cylinders hav-
heat-treatment and previous to the of- ing a capacity of 86 cubic inches or
ficial test may not exceed 90 percent of less.
the test pressure. If, due to failure of (2) Specimens must conform to the
the test apparatus, the test pressure following:
cannot be maintained, the test may be (i) A gauge length of 8 inches with a
repeated at a pressure increased by 10 width not over 112 inches, a gauge
percent or 100 psig, whichever is the length of 2 inches with a width not
lower. over 112 inches, or a gauge length at
(3) Permanent volumetric expansion least 24 times the thickness with a
may not exceed 10 percent of total vol- width not over 6 times the thickness is
umetric expansion at test pressure. authorized when a cylinder wall is not
(4) Cylinders must be tested as fol- over 316 inch thick.
(ii) The specimen, exclusive of grip
lows:
ends, may not be flattened. Grip ends
(i) At least one cylinder selected at
may be flattened to within one inch of
random out of each lot of 200 or less
each end of the reduced section.
must be tested as outlined in para- (iii) When size of cylinder does not
graphs (i)(1), (i)(2), and (i)(3) of this sec- permit securing straight specimens,
tion to at least two times service pres- the specimens may be taken in any lo-
sure. cation or direction and may be
(ii) All cylinders not tested as out- straightened or flattened cold by pres-
lined in paragraph (i)(4)(i) of this sec- sure only, not by blows. When speci-
tion must be examined under pressure mens are so taken and prepared, the in-
of at least two times service pressure spectors report must show in connec-
and show no defect. tion with record of physical tests de-
(5) Each 1000 cylinders or less succes- tailed information in regard to such
sively produced each day must con- specimens.
stitute a lot. One cylinder must be se- (iv) Heating of a specimen for any
lected from each lot and purpose is not authorized.
hydrostatically tested to destruction. (3) The yield strength in tension
If this cylinder bursts below five times must be the stress corresponding to a
the service pressure, then two addi- permanent strain of 0.2 percent of the
tional cylinders must be selected and gauge length. The following conditions
subjected to this test. If either of these apply:
cylinders fails by bursting below five (i) The yield strength must be deter-
times the service pressure then the en- mined by either the offset method or
tire lot must be rejected. All cylinders the extension under load method as
constituting a lot must be of identical prescribed in ASTM E 8 (IBR, see 171.7
size, construction heat-treatment, fin- of this subchapter).
ish, and quality. (ii) In using the extension under
(j) Flattening test. Following the hy- load method, the total strain (or ex-
drostatic test, one cylinder taken at tension under load) corresponding to
random out of each lot of 200 or less, the stress at which the 0.2 percent per-
must be subjected to a flattening test manent strain occurs may be deter-
that is between knife edges, wedge mined with sufficient accuracy by cal-
shaped, 60 angle, rounded to 12 inch ra- culating the elastic extension of the
dius. gauge length under appropriate load
(k) Physical test. A physical test must and adding thereto 0.2 percent of the
be conducted to determine yield gauge length. Elastic extension cal-
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
56
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00066 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.56
diagram must be plotted and the yield (4) As a safety precaution, if the
strength determined from the 0.2 per- manufacturer elects to make this test
cent offset. before the hydrostatic test, he should
(iii) For the purpose of strain meas- design his apparatus so that the pres-
urement, the initial strain must be set sure is applied to the smallest area
while the specimen is under a stress of practicable, around the point of clo-
12,000 psi and the strain indicator read- sure, and so as to use the smallest pos-
ing being set at the calculated cor- sible volume of air or gas.
responding strain. (n) Rejected cylinders. Repairs of re-
(iv) Cross-head speed of the testing jected cylinders is authorized. Cyl-
machine may not exceed 18 inch per inders that are leaking must be re-
minute during yield strength deter- jected, except that:
mination. (1) Spun cylinders rejected under the
(l) Acceptable results for physical and provisions of paragraph (m) of this sec-
flattening tests. Acceptable results for tion may be removed from the spun
the physical and flattening tests are an cylinder category by drilling to remove
elongation of at least 40 percent for a 2 defective material, tapping, and plug-
ging.
inch gauge length or at least 20 percent
(2) Brazed joints may be rebrazed.
in other cases and a yield strength not
(3) Subsequent to the operations
over 73 percent of tensile strength. In
noted in paragraphs (n)(1) and (n)(2) of
this instance the flattening test is re-
this section, acceptable cylinders must
quired, without cracking, to six times
pass all prescribed tests.
the wall thickness with a weld 90 from
(o) Marking. Markings on each cyl-
the direction of the applied load. Two
inder must be by stamping plainly and
rings cut from the ends of length of permanently on shoulder, top head,
pipe used in production of a lot may be neck or valve protection collar which
used for the flattening test provided is permanently attached to the cyl-
the rings accompany the lot which inders and forming an integral part
they represent in all thermal proc- thereof, provided that cylinders not
essing operations. At least one of the less than 0.090 inch thick may be
rings must pass the flattening test. stamped on the side wall adjacent to
(m) Leakage test. All spun cylinders top head.
and plugged cylinders must be tested
for leakage by gas or air pressure after [Amdt. 178114, 61 FR 25942, May 23, 1996, as
amended at 66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR
the bottom has been cleaned and is free
51653, Aug. 8, 2002; 68 FR 75748, 75749, Dec. 31,
from all moisture, subject to the fol- 2003]
lowing conditions:
(1) Pressure, approximately the same 178.56 Specification 4AA480 welded
as but no less than service pressure, steel cylinders.
must be applied to one side of the fin- (a) Type, size, and service pressure. A
ished bottom over an area of at least DOT 4AA480 cylinder is a welded steel
116 of the total area of the bottom but
cylinder having a water capacity
not less than 34 inch in diameter, in- (nominal) not over 1,000 pounds water
cluding the closure, for at least 1 capacity and a service pressure of 480
minute, during which time the other psig. Closures welded by spinning proc-
side of the bottom exposed to pressure ess not permitted.
must be covered with water and closely (b) Steel. The limiting chemical com-
examined for indications of leakage. position of steel authorized by this
Except as provided in paragraph (n) of specification must be as shown in table
this section, cylinders which are leak- I of appendix A to this part.
ing must be rejected. (c) Identification of material. Material
(2) A spun cylinder is one in which an must be identified by any suitable
end closure in the finished cylinder has method except that plates and billets
been welded by the spinning process. for hotdrawn cylinders must be marked
(3) A plugged cylinder is one in which with the heat number.
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
57
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00067 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.56 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
cylinder produced conforms to the re- (g) Heat treatment. Each cylinder
quirements of this subpart. No defect is must be uniformly and properly heat
permitted that is likely to weaken the treated prior to tests. Any suitable
finished cylinder appreciably. A rea- heat treatment in excess of 1100 F is
sonably smooth and uniform surface authorized except that liquid quench-
finish is required. Exposed bottom ing is not permitted. Heat treatment
welds on cylinders over 18 inches long must be accomplished after all forming
must be protected by footrings. Min- and welding operations. Heat treat-
imum thickness of heads and bottoms ment is not required after welding
may not be less than 90 percent of the weldable low carbon parts to attach-
required thickness of the side wall. ments of similar material which have
Seams must be made as follows: been previously welded to the top or
(1) Circumferential seams must be bottom of cylinders and properly heat
welded. Brazing is not authorized. treated, provided such subsequent
(2) Longitudinal seams are not per- welding does not produce a tempera-
mitted. ture in excess of 400 F., in any part of
(3) Welding procedures and operators the top or bottom material.
must be qualified in accordance with (h) Openings in cylinders. Openings in
CGA C3 (IBR, see 171.7 of this sub- cylinders must conform to the fol-
chapter). lowing:
(e) Welding. Only the welding of (1) All openings must be in the heads
neckrings, footrings, bosses, pads, and or bases.
valve protection rings to the tops and (2) Each opening in the cylinder, ex-
bottoms of cylinders is authorized. cept those for safety devices, must be
Provided that such attachments are provided with a fitting boss, or pad, se-
made of weldable steel, the carbon con- curely attached to the cylinder by
tent of which does not exceed 0.25 per- welding or by threads. If threads are
cent. used they must comply with the fol-
(f) Wall thickness. The wall thickness lowing:
of the cylinder must conform to the (i) Threads must be clean-cut, even
following: without checks and cut to gauge.
(1) For cylinders with an outside di- (ii) Taper threads to be of length not
ameter over 5 inches, the minimum less than as specified for American
wall thickness is 0.078 inch. In any Standard taper pipe threads.
case, the minimum wall thickness (iii) Straight threads having at least
must be such that the calculated wall 6 engaged threads, must have a tight
stress at the minimum test pressure (in fit and a calculated shear strength at
paragraph (i) of this section) may not least 10 times the test pressure of the
exceed the lesser value of either of the cylinder. Gaskets, adequate to prevent
following: leakage, are required.
(i) One-half of the minimum tensile (3) Closure of a fitting, boss or pad
strength of the material determined as must be adequate to prevent leakage.
required in paragraph (j) of this sec- (i) Hydrostatic test. Each cylinder
tion; or must successfully withstand a hydro-
(ii) 35,000 psi. static test as follows:
(2) Calculation must be made by the (1) The test must be by water jacket,
formula: or other suitable method, operated so
S = [P(1.3D2 + 0.4d2)] / (D2 d2) as to obtain accurate data. The pres-
sure gauge must permit reading to an
Where: accuracy of 1 percent. The expansion
S = wall stress in psi; gauge must permit reading of total ex-
P = minimum test pressure prescribed for pansion to an accuracy of either 1 per-
water jacket test; cent or 0.1 cubic centimeter.
D = outside diameter in inches; (2) Pressure must be maintained for
d = inside diameter in inches.
at least 30 seconds or sufficiently
(3) The ratio of tangential length to longer to assure complete expansion.
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
outside diameter may not exceed 4.0 for Any internal pressure applied after
cylinders with a wall thickness less heat-treatment and before the official
than 0.100 inch. test may not exceed 90 percent of the
58
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00068 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.56
test pressure. If, due to failure of test sure only, not by blows. When speci-
apparatus, the test pressure cannot be mens are so taken and prepared, the in-
maintained, the test may be repeated spectors report must show in connec-
at a pressure increased by 10 percent or tion with record of physical tests de-
100 psig, whichever is lower. tailed information in regard to such
(3) Permanent volumetric expansion specimens.
may not exceed 10 percent of the total (iv) Heating of a specimen for any
volumetric expansion at test pressure. purpose is not authorized.
(4) Cylinders must be tested as fol- (3) The yield strength in tension
lows: must be the stress corresponding to a
(i) At least one cylinder selected at permanent strain of 0.2 percent of the
random out of each lot of 200 or less gauge length. The following conditions
must be tested as described in para- apply:
graphs (i)(1), (i)(2), and (i)(3) of this sec- (i) The yield strength must be deter-
tion, to at least two times service pres- mined by either the offset method or
sure. If a selected cylinder fails, then the extension under load method as
two additional specimens must be se- prescribed in ASTM E 8 (IBR, see 171.7
lected at random from the same lot and of this subchapter).
subjected to the prescribed test. If ei- (ii) In using the extension under
ther of these fails the test, then each load method, the total strain (or ex-
cylinder in that lot must be so tested; tension under load), corresponding to
and the stress at which the 0.2 percent per-
(ii) Each cylinder not tested as pre- manent strain occurs may be deter-
scribed in paragraph (i)(4)(i) of this sec- mined with sufficient accuracy by cal-
tion must be examined under pressure culating the elastic extension of the
of at least two times service pressure gauge length under appropriate load
and must show no defect. A cylinder and adding thereto 0.2 percent of the
showing a defect must be rejected un- gauge length. Elastic extension cal-
less it may be requalified under para- culations must be based on an elastic
graph (m) of this section. modulus of 30,000,000. In the event of
(j) Physical test. A physical test must controversy, the entire stress-strain
be conducted to determine yield diagram must be plotted and the yield
strength, tensile strength, elongation, strength determined from the 0.2 per-
and reduction of area of material, as cent offset.
follows: (iii) For the purpose of strain meas-
(1) The test is required on 2 speci- urement, the initial strain reference
mens cut from one cylinder having must be set while the specimen is
passed the hydrostatic test, or part under a stress of 12,000 psi and the
thereof heat-treated as required, taken strain indicator reading being set at
at random out of each lot of 200 or less. the calculated corresponding strain.
(2) Specimens must conform to the (iv) Cross-head speed of the testing
following: machine may not exceed 18 inch per
(i) A gauge length of 8 inches with a minute during yield strength deter-
width not over 112 inches, a gauge mination.
length of 2 inches with a width not (k) Elongation. Physical test speci-
over 112 inches, or a gauge length at mens must show at least a 40 percent
least 24 times the thickness with a elongation for 2-inch gauge lengths or
width not over 6 times thickness is au- at least a 20 percent elongation in
thorized when the cylinder wall is not other cases. Except that these elon-
over 316 inch thick. gation percentages may be reduced nu-
(ii) The specimen, exclusive of grip merically by 2 for 2-inch specimens and
ends, may not be flattened. Grip ends by 1 in other cases for each 7,500 psi in-
may be flattened to within one inch of crement of tensile strength above 50,000
each end of the reduced section. psi to a maximum of four such incre-
(iii) When size of cylinder does not ments.
permit securing straight specimens, (l) Tests of welds. Welds must be test-
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
59
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00069 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.57 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
or less, or a welded test plate. The (3) On a plate attached to the top of
welded test plate must be of one of the the cylinder or permanent part thereof:
heats in the lot of 200 or less which it sufficient space must be left on the
represents, in the same condition and plate to provide for stamping at least
approximately the same thickness as six retest dates: the plate must be at
the cylinder wall except that it may least 116 inch thick and must be at-
not be of a lesser thickness than that tached by welding or by brazing at a
required for a quarter size Charpy im- temperature of at least 1100 F,
pact specimen. The weld must be made throughout all edges of the plate.
by the same procedures and subjected (4) Variations in location of mark-
to the same heat treatment as the ings authorized only when necessitated
major weld on the cylinder. The speci- by lack of space.
mens must be taken across the major [Amdt. 178114, 61 FR 25942, May 23, 1996, as
seam and must be prepared and tested amended at 66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR
in accordance with and must meet the 51653, Aug. 8, 2002; 68 FR 75748, 75749, Dec. 31,
requirements of CGA Pamphlet C3. 2003]
Should this specimen fail to meet the
requirements, specimens may be taken 178.57 Specification 4L welded insu-
from two additional cylinders or weld- lated cylinders.
ed test plates from the same lot and (a) Type, size, service pressure, and de-
tested. If either of the latter specimens sign service temperature. A DOT 4L cyl-
fail to meet the requirements, the en- inder is a fusion welded insulated cyl-
tire lot represented must be rejected. inder with a water capacity (nominal)
(2) Guided bend test. A root bend test not over 1,000 pounds water capacity
specimen must be cut from the cyl- and a service pressure of at least 40 but
inder or a welded test plate, used for not greater than 500 psig conforming to
the tensile test specified in paragraph the following requirements:
(l)(1) of this section. Specimens must (1) For liquefied hydrogen service,
be taken from across the major seam the cylinders must be designed to stand
and must be prepared and tested in ac- on end, with the axis of the cylindrical
cordance with and must meet the re- portion vertical.
quirements of CGA Pamphlet C3. (2) The design service temperature is
(3) Alternate guided-bend test. This the coldest temperature for which a
test may be used and must be as re- cylinder is suitable. The required de-
quired by CGA Pamphlet C3. The spec- sign service temperatures for each
imen must be bent until the elongation cryogenic liquid is as follows:
at the outer surface, adjacent to the
root of the weld, between the lightly Cryogenic liquid Design service temperature
scribed gage lines-a to b, is at least 20 Argon ...................... Minus 320 F or colder.
percent, except that this percentage Helium .................... Minus 452 F or colder.
may be reduced for steels having a ten- Hydrogen ................ Minus 42 3 F or colder.
Neon ....................... Minus 411 F or colder.
sile strength in excess of 50,000 psi, as Nitrogen .................. Minus 320 F or colder.
provided in paragraph (k) of this sec- Oxygen ................... Minus 320 F or colder.
tion.
(m) Rejected cylinders. Reheat treat- (b) Material. Material use in the con-
ment of rejected cylinders is author- struction of this specification must
ized. Subsequent thereto, cylinders conform to the following:
must pass all prescribed tests to be ac- (1) Inner containment vessel (cylinder).
ceptable. Repair of welded seams by Designations and limiting chemical
welding is authorized. compositions of steel authorized by
(n) Markings. Markings must be this specification must be as shown in
stamped plainly and permanently in table 1 in paragraph (o) of this section.
one of the following locations on the (2) Outer jacket. Steel or aluminum
cylinder: may be used subject to the require-
(1) On shoulders and top heads not ments of paragraph (o)(2) of this sec-
less than 0.087 inch thick. tion.
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
(2) On neck, valve boss, valve protec- (c) Identification of material. Material
tion sleeve, or similar part perma- must be identified by any suitable
nently attached to top end of cylinder. method.
60
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00070 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.57
(d) Manufacture. Cylinders must be an impact test of the weld must be per-
manufactured using equipment and formed in accordance with paragraph
processes adequate to ensure that each (l) of this section as part of the quali-
cylinder produced conforms to the re- fication of each welding procedure and
quirements of this subpart and to the operator.
following requirements: (e) Welding. Welding of the cylinder
(1) No defect is permitted that is must be as follows:
likely to weaken the finished cylinder (1) All seams of the cylinder must be
appreciably. A reasonably smooth and fusion welded. A means must be pro-
uniform surface finish is required. The vided for accomplishing complete pene-
shell portion must be a reasonably true tration of the joint. Only butt or joggle
cylinder. butt joints for the cylinder seams are
(2) The heads must be seamless, con- authorized. All joints in the cylinder
cave side to the pressure, hemi- must have reasonably true alignment.
spherical or ellipsoidal in shape with (2) All attachments to the sidewalls
the major diameter not more than and heads of the cylinder must be by
twice the minor diameter. Minimum fusion welding and must be of a
thickness of heads may not be less weldable material complying with the
than 90 percent of the required thick- impact requirements of paragraph (l) of
ness of the sidewall. The heads must be this section.
reasonably true to shape, have no ab- (3) For welding the cylinder, each
rupt shape changes, and the skirts procedure and operator must be quali-
must be reasonably true to round. fied in accordance with the sections of
(3) The surface of the cylinder must CGA Pamphlet C3 that apply. In addi-
be insulated. The insulating material tion, impact tests of the weld must be
must be fire resistant. The insulation performed in accordance with para-
on non-evacuated jackets must be cov- graph (l) of this section as part of the
ered with a steel jacket not less than qualification of each welding procedure
0.060-inch thick or an aluminum jacket and operator.
not less than 0.070 inch thick, so con- (4) Brazing, soldering and threading
structed that moisture cannot come in are permitted only for joints not made
contact with the insulating material. If directly to the cylinder body. Threads
a vacuum is maintained in the insula- must comply with the requirements of
tion space, the evacuated jacket must paragraph (h) of this section.
be designed for a minimum collapsing (f) Wall thickness. The minimum wall
pressure of 30 psig differential whether thickness of the cylinder must be such
made of steel or aluminum. The con- that the calculated wall stress at the
struction must be such that the total minimum required test pressure may
heat transfer, from the atmosphere at not exceed the least value of the fol-
ambient temperature to the contents lowing:
of the cylinder, will not exceed 0.0005 (1) 45,000 psi.
Btu per hour, per Fahrenheit degree (2) One-half of the minimum tensile
differential in temperature, per pound strength across the welded seam deter-
of water capacity of the cylinder. For mined in paragraph (l) of this section.
hydrogen, cryogenic liquid service, the (3) One-half of the minimum tensile
total heat transfer, with a temperature strength of the base metal determined
differential of 520 Fahrenheit degrees, as required in paragraph (j) of this sec-
may not exceed that required to vent tion.
30 SCF of hydrogen gas per hour. (4) The yield strength of the base
(4) For a cylinder having a design metal determined as required in para-
service temperature colder than minus graph (l) of this section.
320 F, a calculation of the maximum
(5) Further provided that wall stress
weight of contents must be made and
for cylinders having longitudinal
that weight must be marked on the
seams may not exceed 85 percent of the
cylinder as prescribed in 178.35.
above value, whichever applies.
(5) Welding procedures and oper-
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
61
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00071 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8003 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.57 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
where: 6 times thickness (authorized when cyl-
S = wall stress in pounds psi; inder wall is not over 116 inch thick).
P = minimum test pressure prescribed for (ii) The specimen, exclusive of grip
pressure test in psig; ends, may not be flattened. Grip ends
D = outside diameter in inches; may be flattened to within one inch of
d = inside diameter in inches. each end of the reduced section.
(g) Heat treatment. Heat treatment is (iii) When size of the cylinder does
not permitted. not permit securing straight speci-
(h) Openings in cylinder. Openings in mens, the specimens may be taken in
cylinders must conform to the fol- any location or direction and may be
lowing: straightened or flattened cold by pres-
(1) Openings are permitted in heads sure only, not by blows. When speci-
only. They must be circular and may mens are so taken and prepared, the in-
not exceed 3 inches in diameter or one spectors report must show in connec-
third of the cylinder diameter, which- tion with record of physical tests de-
ever is less. Each opening in the cyl- tailed information in regard to such
inder must be provided with a fitting, specimens.
boss or pad, either integral with, or se- (iv) Heating of a specimen for any
curely attached to, the cylinder body purpose is not authorized.
by fusion welding. Attachments to a (3) The yield strength in tension
fitting, boss or pad may be made by must be the stress corresponding to a
welding, brazing, mechanical attach- permanent strain of 0.2 percent of the
ment, or threading. gauge length. The following conditions
(2) Threads must comply with the fol- apply:
lowing: (i) The yield strength must be deter-
(i) Threads must be clean-cut, even, mined by either the offset method or
without checks and cut to gauge. the extension under load method as
(ii) Taper threads to be of a length prescribed in ASTM E 8 (IBR, see 171.7
not less than that specified for NPT. of this subchapter).
(iii) Straight threads must have at (ii) In using the extension under
least 4 engaged threads, tight fit and load method, the total strain (or ex-
calculated shear strength at least 10 tension under load), corresponding to
times the test pressure of the cylinder. the stress at which the 0.2 percent per-
Gaskets, which prevent leakage and manent strain occurs may be deter-
are inert to the hazardous material, mined with sufficient accuracy by cal-
are required. culating the elastic expansion of the
(i) Pressure test. Each cylinder, before gauge length under appropriate load
insulating and jacketing, must be ex- and adding thereto 0.2 percent of the
amined under a pressure of at least 2 gauge length. Elastic extension cal-
times the service pressure maintained culations must be based on the elastic
for at least 30 seconds without evidence modulus of the material used. In the
of leakage, visible distortion or other event of controversy, the entire stress-
defect. The pressure gauge must permit strain diagram must be plotted and the
reading to an accuracy of 1 percent. yield strength determined from the 0.2
(j) Physical test. A physical test must percent offset.
be conducted to determine yield (iii) For the purpose of strain meas-
strength, tensile strength, and elon- urement, the initial strain reference
gation as follows: must be set while the specimen is
(1) The test is required on 2 speci- under a stress of 12,000 psi and the
mens selected from material of each strain indicator reading being set at
heat and in the same condition as that the calculated corresponding strain.
in the completed cylinder. (iv) Cross-head speed of the testing
(2) Specimens must conform to the machine may not exceed 18 inch per
following: minute during yield strength deter-
(i) A gauge length of 8 inches with a mination.
width not over 112 inches, a gauge (k) Acceptable results for physical tests.
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
length of 2 inches with width not over Physical properties must meet the lim-
112 inches, or a gauge length at least 24 its specified in paragraph (o)(1), table 1,
times thickness with a width not over of this section, for the particular steel
62
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00072 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.57
in the annealed condition. The speci- may be reduced for steels having a ten-
mens must show at least a 20 percent sile strength in excess of 100,000 psig, as
elongation for a 2-inch gage length. Ex- provided in paragraph (c) of this sec-
cept that the percentage may be re- tion.
duced numerically by 2 for each 7,500 (4) Impact tests. One set of three im-
psi increment of tensile strength above pact test specimens (for each test)
100,000 psi to a maximum of 5 such in- must be prepared and tested for deter-
crements. Yield strength and tensile mining the impact properties of the de-
strength must meet the requirements posited weld metal
of paragraph (o)(1), table 1, of this sec- (i) As part of the qualification of the
tion. welding procedure.
(l) Tests of welds. Welds must be test- (ii) As part of the qualification of the
ed as follows: operators.
(1) Tensile test. A specimen must be (iii) For each heat of welding rodor
cut from one cylinder of each lot of 200 wire used.
or less, or welded test plate. The weld- (iv) For each 1,000 feet of weld made
ed test plate must be of one of the with the same heat of welding rod or
heats in the lot of 200 or less which it wire.
represents, in the same condition and (v) All impact test specimens must be
approximately the same thickness as of the charpy type, keyhole or milled
the cylinder wall except that it may U-notch, and must conform in all re-
not be of a lesser thickness than that spects to ASTM E 23 (IBR, see 171.7 of
required for a quarter size Charpy im- this subchapter). Each set of impact
pact specimen. The weld must be made specimens must be taken across the
by the same procedures and subjected weld and have the notch located in the
to the same heat treatment as the weld metal. When the cylinder mate-
major weld on the cylinder. The speci- rial thickness is 2.5 mm or thicker, im-
men must be taken across the major pact specimens must be cut from a cyl-
seam and must be prepared in accord- inder or welded test plate used for the
ance with and must meet the require- tensile or bend test specimens. The di-
ments of CGA Pamphlet C3. Should mension along the axis of the notch
this specimen fail to meet the require- must be reduced to the largest possible
ments, specimens may be taken from of 10 mm, 7.5 mm, 5 mm or 2.5 mm, de-
two additional cylinders or welded test pending upon cylinder thickness. When
plates from the same lot and tested. If the material in the cylinder or welded
either of the latter specimens fails to test plate is not of sufficient thickness
meet the requirements, the entire lot to prepare 2.5 mm impact test speci-
represented must be rejected. mens, 2.5 mm specimens must be pre-
(2) Guided bend test. A root bend pared from a welded test plate made
test specimen must be cut from the from 18 inch thick material meeting
cylinder or welded test plate, used for the requirements specified in para-
the tensile test specified in paragraph graph (o)(1), table 1, of this section and
(l)(1) of this section and from any other having a carbon analysis of .05 min-
seam or equivalent welded test plate if imum, but not necessarily from one of
the seam is welded by a procedure dif- the heats used in the lot of cylinders.
ferent from that used for the major The test piece must be welded by the
seam. Specimens must be taken across same welding procedure as used on the
the particular seam being tested and particular cylinder seam being quali-
must be prepared and tested in accord- fied and must be subjected to the same
ance with and must meet the require- heat treatment.
ments of CGA Pamphlet C3. (vi) Impact test specimens must be
(3) Alternate guided-bend test. This cooled to the design service tempera-
test may be used and must be as speci- ture. The apparatus for testing the
fied in CGA Pamphlet C3. The speci- specimens must conform to require-
men must be bent until the elongation ments of ASTM Standard E 23. The test
at the outer surface, adjacent to the piece, as well as the handling tongs,
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
root of the weld, between the lightly must be cooled for a length of time suf-
scribed gage lines a to b, is at least 20 ficient to reach the service tempera-
percent, except that this percentage ture. The temperature of the cooling
63
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00073 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.57 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
device must be maintained within a must pass all prescribed tests to be ac-
range of plus or minus 3 F. The speci- ceptable. Welds may be repaired by
men must be quickly transferred from suitable methods of fusion welding.
the cooling device to the anvil of the (o) Authorized materials of construc-
testing machine and broken within a tion. Authorized materials of construc-
time lapse of not more than six sec- tion are as follows:
onds. (1) Inner containment vessel (cylinder).
(vii) The impact properties of each Electric furnace steel of uniform qual-
set of impact specimens may not be ity must be used. Chemical analysis
less than the values in the following must conform to ASTM A 240/A 240M
table: (IBR, see 171.7 of this subchapter),
Type 304 stainless steel. Chemical anal-
Minimum Minimum ysis must conform to ASTM A240, Type
impact value impact value
required for 304 Stainless Steel. A heat of steel
permitted on
Size of specimen avg. of each one only of a made under table 1 and table 2 in this
set of three set of three
specimens paragraph (o)(1) is acceptable, even
(ft.-lb.)
(ft.-lb.)
though its check chemical analysis is
10 mm 10 mm .................... 15 10 slightly out of the specified range, if it
10 mm 7.5 mm ................... 12.5 8.5 is satisfactory in all other respects,
10 mm 5 mm ...................... 10 7.0
10 mm 2.5 mm ................... 5 3.5 provided the tolerances shown in table
3 in this paragraph (o)(1) are not ex-
(viii) When the average value of the ceeded. The following chemical anal-
three specimens equals or exceeds the yses and physical properties are au-
minimum value permitted for a single thorized:
specimen and the value for more than
one specimen is below the required av- TABLE 1AUTHORIZED MATERIALS
erage value, or when the value for one Chemical analysis,
Designation
specimen is below the minimum value limits in percent
permitted for a single specimen, a Carbon 1 ............................................. 0.08 max.
retest of three additional specimens Manganese ........................................ 2.00 max.
must be made. The value of each of Phosphorus ........................................ 0.045 max.
Sulphur .............................................. 0.030 max.
these retest specimens must equal or Silicon ................................................ 1.00 max.
exceed the required average value. Nickel ................................................. 8.0010.50.
When an erratic result is caused by a Chromium .......................................... 18.0020.00.
Molybdenum ...................................... None.
defective specimen, or there is uncer- Titanium ............................................. None.
tainty in test procedure, a retest is au- Columbium ......................................... None.
thorized. 1 The carbon analysis must be reported to the nearest hun-
(m) Radiographic examination. Cyl- dredth of one percent.
inders must be subject to a radio-
graphic examination as follows: TABLE 2PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
(1) The techniques and acceptability Physical
of radiographic inspection must con- properties
form to the standards set forth in CGA (annealed)
Pamphlet C3. Tensile strength, p.s.i. (minimum) ....................... 75,000
(2) One finished longitudinal seam Yield strength, p.s.i. (minimum) ........................... 30,000
must be selected at random from each Elongation in 2 inches (minimum) percent .......... 30.0
Elongation other permissible gauge lengths
lot of 100 or less successively produced (minimum) percent ........................................... 15.0
and be radiographed throughout its en-
tire length. Should the radiographic
TABLE 3CHECK ANALYSIS TOLERANCES
examination fail to meet the require-
ments of paragraph (m)(1) of this sec- Tolerance
tion, two additional seams of the same over the
Limit or specified range maximum
lot must be examined, and if either of Elements (percent) limit or under
these fail to meet the requirements of the minimum
limit
(m)(1) of this section, only those pass-
ing are acceptable. Carbon ............... To 0.030, incl ................... 0.005
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
64
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00074 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.58
(2) Outer jacket. (i) Nonflammable 178.58 Specification 4DA welded steel
cylinders for aircraft use.
cryogenic liquids. Cylinders intended
for use in the transportation of non- (a) Type, size, and service pressure. A
flammable cryogenic liquid must have DOT 4DA is a welded steel sphere (two
an outer jacket made of steel or alu- seamless hemispheres) or a circum-
minum. ferentially welded cylinder (two seam-
(ii) Flammable cryogenic liquids. less drawn shells) with a water capac-
Cylinders intended for use in the trans- ity not over 100 pounds and a service
portation of flammable cryogenic liq- pressure of at least 500 but not over 900
uid must have an outer jacket made of psig.
steel. (b) Steel. Open-hearth or electric steel
(p) Markings. (1) Markings must be of uniform quality must be used. A
stamped plainly and permanently on heat of steel made under table 1 in this
shoulder or top head of jacket or on a paragraph (b), check chemical analysis
permanently attached plate or head of which is slightly out of the specified
protective ring. range, is acceptable, if satisfactory in
(2) The letters ST, followed by the all other respects, provided the toler-
design service temperature (for exam- ances shown in table 2 in this para-
ple, ST423F), must be marked on cyl- graph (b) are not exceeded except as ap-
inders having a design service tempera- proved by the Associate Administrator.
ture of colder than minus 320 F only. The following chemical analyses are
Location to be just below the DOT authorized:
mark.
(3) The maximum weight of contents, TABLE 1AUTHORIZED MATERIALS
in pounds (for example, Max. Content 4130 Percent
51 #), must be marked on cylinders
having a design service temperature Carbon ........................................................ 0.28/0.33.
Manganese ................................................. 0.40/0.60.
colder than minus 320 F only. Loca- Phosphorus ................................................ 0.040 max.
tion to be near symbol. Sulfur .......................................................... 0.040 max.
(4) Special orientation instructions Silicon ......................................................... 0.15/0.35.
Chromium ................................................... 0.80/1.10.
must be marked on the cylinder (for Molybdenum ............................................... 0.15/0.25.
example, THIS END UP), if the cyl-
inder is used in an orientation other
than vertical with openings at the top TABLE 2CHECK ANALYSIS TOLERANCES
of the cylinder. Tolerance (per-
(5) If the jacket of the cylinder is cent) over the
maximum limit or
constructed of aluminum, the letters under the min-
AL must be marked after the service Element Limit or maximum imum limit
specified (percent)
pressure marking. Example: DOT-4L150 Under Over
AL. min- max-
imum imum
(6) Except for serial number and jack- limit limit
et material designation, each marking
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
prescribed in this paragraph (p) must Carbon ............ Over 0.15 to 0.40 incl .03 ....... .04
Manganese ..... To 0.60 incl ................. .03 ....... .03
be duplicated on each cylinder by any Phosphorus1 ... All ranges .................... .............. .01
suitable means. Sulphur ........... All ranges .................... .............. .01
65
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00075 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.58 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
66
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00076 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.58
(h) Openings in container. Openings in (1) Flattening test for spheres. One
the container must comply with the sphere taken at random out of each lot
following requirements: of 200 or less must be subjected to a
(1) Each opening in the container flattening test as follows:
must be provided with a fitting, boss, (i) The test must be performed after
or pad of weldable steel securely at- the hydrostatic test.
tached to the container by fusion weld- (ii) The test must be at the weld be-
ing. tween the parallel steel plates on a
(2) Attachments to a fitting, boss, or press with a welded seam, at right an-
pad must be adequate to prevent leak- gles to the plates. Any projecting ap-
age. Threads must comply with the fol- purtenances may be cut off (by me-
lowing: chanical means only) prior to crushing.
(i) Threads must be clean cut, even, (2) Flattening test for cylinders. One
without checks, and tapped to gauge. cylinder taken at random out of each
(ii) Taper threads to be of length not lot of 200 or less, must be subjected to
less than as specified for American a flattening test as follows:
Standard taper pipe threads.
(i) The test must be performed after
(iii) Straight threads, having at least
the hydrostatic test.
4 engaged threads, to have tight fit and
(ii) The test cylinder must be placed
calculated shear strength at least 10
between wedge-shaped knife edges hav-
times the test pressure of the con-
ing a 60 angle, rounded to a 12-inch ra-
tainer; gaskets required, adequate to
dius.
prevent leakage.
(i) Hydrostatic test. Each cylinder (l) Radiographic inspection. Radio-
must successfully withstand a hydro- graphic examinations is required on all
static test as follows: welded joints which are subjected to in-
(1) The test must be by water-jacket, ternal pressure, except that at the dis-
or other suitable method, operated so cretion of the disinterested inspector,
as to obtain accurate data. The pres- openings less than 25 percent of the
sure gauge must permit reading to an sphere diameter need not be subjected
accuracy of 1 percent. The expansion to radiographic inspection. Evidence of
gauge must permit reading of total ex- any defects likely to seriously weaken
pansion to accuracy either of 1 percent the container must be cause for rejec-
or 0.1 cubic centimeter. tion.
(2) Pressure must be maintained for (m) Physical test and specimens for
at least 30 seconds and sufficiently spheres and cylinders. Spheres and cyl-
longer to ensure complete expansion. inders must be subjected to a physical
Any internal pressure applied after test as follows:
heat-treatment and previous to the of- (1) A physical test for a sphere is re-
ficial test may not exceed 90 percent of quired on 2 specimens cut from a flat
the test pressure. If, due to failure of representative sample plate of the
the test apparatus, the test pressure same heat taken at random from the
cannot be maintained, the test may be steel used to produce the sphere. This
repeated at a pressure increased by 10 flat steel from which the 2 specimens
percent or 100 psig, whichever is the are to be cut must receive the same
lower. heat-treatment as the spheres them-
(3) Permanent volumetric expansion selves. Sample plates to be taken for
may not exceed 10 percent of total vol- each lot of 200 or less spheres.
umetric expansion at test pressure. (2) Specimens for spheres have a
(4) Each container must be tested to gauge length of 2 inches with a width
at least 2 times service pressure. not over 112 inches, or a gauge length
(j) Burst test. One container taken at at least 24 times thickness with a
random out of 200 or less must be width not over 6 times thickness is au-
hydrostatically tested to destruction. thorized when wall of sphere is not
The rupture pressure must be included over 316 inch thick.
as part of the inspectors report. (3) A physical test for cylinders is re-
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
(k) Flattening test. Spheres and cyl- quired on 2 specimens cut from 1 cyl-
inders must be subjected to a flat- inder taken at random out of each lot
tening test as follows: of 200 or less.
67
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00077 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.59 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
(4) Specimens for cylinder must con- (2) Flattening is required to 50 per-
form to the following: cent of the original outside diameter
(i) A gauge length of 8 inches with a without cracking.
width not over 112 inches, a gauge (3) Burst pressure must be at least 3
length of 2 inches with a width not times service pressure.
over 112 inches, a gauge length at least (o) Rejected containers. Reheat-treat-
24 times thickness with a width not ment of rejected cylinders is author-
over 6 times thickness is authorized ized. Subsequent thereto, containers
when a cylinder wall is not over 316 must pass all prescribed tests to be ac-
inch thick. ceptable. Repair of welded seams by
(ii) The specimen, exclusive of grip welding prior to reheat-treatment is
ends, may not be flattened. Grip ends authorized.
may be flattened to within 1 inch of (p) Marking. Markings on each con-
each end of the reduced section. tainer must be stamped plainly and
(iii) Heating of a specimen for any permanently on a permanent attach-
purpose is not authorized. ment or on a metal nameplate perma-
(5) The yield strength in tension nently secured to the container by
must be the stress corresponding to a means other than soft solder.
permanent strain of 0.2 percent of the
gauge length. The following conditions [Amdt. 178114, 61 FR 25942, May 23, 1996, as
apply: amended at 66 FR 45386, 45388, Aug. 28, 2001;
67 FR 51654, Aug. 8, 2002; 67 FR 61015, Sept. 27,
(i) The yield strength must be deter- 2002; 68 FR 75748, Dec. 31, 2003]
mined by either the offset method or
the extension under load method as 178.59 Specification 8 steel cylinders
prescribed in ASTM E 8 (IBR, see 171.7 with porous fillings for acetylene.
of this subchapter).
(ii) In using the extension under (a) Type and service pressure. A DOT 8
load method, the total strain (or ex- cylinder is a seamless cylinder with a
tension under load) corresponding to service pressure of 250 psig. The fol-
the stress at which the 0.2 percent per- lowing steel is authorized:
manent strain occurs may be deter- (1) A longitudinal seam if forge lap
mined with sufficient accuracy by cal- welded;
culating the elastic extension of the (2) Attachment of heads by welding
gauge length under appropriate load or by brazing by dipping process; or
and adding thereto 0.2 percent of the (3) A welded circumferential body
gauge length. Elastic extension cal- seam if the cylinder has no longitu-
culations must be based on an elastic dinal seam.
modulus of 30,000,000. In the event of (b) Steel. Open-hearth, electric or
controversy, the entire stress-strain basic oxygen process steel of uniform
diagram must be plotted and the yield quality must be used. Content percent
strength determined from the 0.2 per- may not exceed the following: Carbon,
cent offset. 0.25; phosphorus, 0.045; sulphur, 0.050.
(iii) For the purpose of strain meas- (c) Identification of steel. Materials
urement, the initial strain must be set must be identified by any suitable
while the specimen is under a stress of method except that plates and billets
12,000 psi and the strain indicator read- for hot-drawn cylinders must be
ing being set at the calculated cor- marked with the heat number.
responding strain. (d) Manufacture. Cylinders must be
(iv) Cross-head speed of the testing manufactured using equipment and
machine may not exceed 18 inch per processes adequate to ensure that each
minute during yield strength deter- cylinder produced conforms to the re-
mination. quirements of this subpart. No defect is
(n) Acceptable results for physical, flat- acceptable that is likely to weaken the
tening, and burst tests. The following are finished cylinder appreciably. A rea-
acceptable results of the physical, flat- sonably smooth and uniform surface
tening and burst test: finish is required. Welding procedures
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
68
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00078 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.59
(e) Exposed bottom welds. Exposed bot- (2) Specimens must conform to a
tom welds on cylinders over 18 inches gauge length of 8 inches with a width
long must be protected by footrings. not over 112 inches, a gauge length of 2
(f) Heat treatment. Body and heads inches with width not over 112, or a
formed by drawing or pressing must be gauge length at least 24 times thick-
uniformly and properly heat treated ness with a width not over 6 times
prior to tests. thickness is authorized when a cylinder
(g) Openings. Openings in the cyl- wall is not over 316 inch thick.
inders must comply with the following: (3) The yield strength in tension
(1) Standard taper pipe threads are must be the stress corresponding to a
required; permanent strain of 0.2 percent of the
(2) Length may not be less than as gauge length. The following conditions
specified for American Standard pipe apply:
threads; tapped to gauge; clean cut, (i) The yield strength must be deter-
even, and without checks. mined by either the offset method or
the extension under load method as
(h) Hydrostatic test. Each cylinder
prescribed in ASTM E 8 (IBR, see 171.7
must successfully withstand a hydro-
of this subchapter).
static test as follows:
(ii) In using the extension under
(1) The test must be by water-jacket,
load method, the total strain (or ex-
or other suitable method, operated so
tension under load) corresponding to
as to obtain accurate data. The pres-
the stress at which the 0.2 percent per-
sure gauge must permit reading to an
manent strain occurs may be deter-
accuracy of 1 percent. The expansion
mined with sufficient accuracy by cal-
gauge must permit reading of total ex-
culating the elastic extension of the
pansion to an accuracy of either 1 per-
gauge length under appropriate load
cent or 0.1 cubic centimeter.
and adding thereto 0.2 percent of the
(2) Pressure must be maintained for gauge length. Elastic extension cal-
at least 30 seconds and sufficiently culations must be based on an elastic
longer to ensure complete expansion. modulus of 30,000,000. In the event of
Any internal pressure applied after controversy, the entire stress-strain
heat-treatment and previous to the of- diagram must be plotted and the yield
ficial test may not exceed 90 percent of strength determined from the 0.2 off-
the test pressure. set.
(3) Permanent volumetric expansion (iii) For the purpose of strain meas-
may not exceed 10 percent of total vol- urement, the initial strain must be set
umetric expansion at test pressure. while the specimen is under a stress of
(4) One cylinder out of each lot of 200 12,000 psi and the strain indicator read-
or less must be hydrostatically tested ing being set at the calculated cor-
to at least 750 psig. Cylinders not so responding strain.
tested must be examined under pres- (iv) Cross-head speed of the testing
sure of between 500 and 600 psig and machine may not exceed 18 inch per
show no defect. If hydrostatically test- minute during yield strength deter-
ed cylinder fails, each cylinder in the mination.
lot may be hydrostatically tested and (4) Yield strength may not exceed 73
those passing are acceptable. percent of tensile strength. Elongation
(i) Leakage test. Cylinders with bot- must be at least 40 percent in 2 inch or
toms closed in by spinning must be 20 percent in other cases.
subjected to a leakage test by setting (k) Rejected cylinders. Reheat treat-
the interior air or gas pressure to not ment of rejected cylinder is authorized.
less than the service pressure. Cyl- Subsequent thereto, cylinders must
inders which leak must be rejected. pass all prescribed tests to be accept-
(j) Physical test. A physical test must able. Repair by welding is authorized.
be conducted as follows: (l) Porous filling. (1) Cylinders must
(1) The test is required on 2 speci- be filled with a porous material in ac-
mens cut longitudinally from 1 cyl- cordance with the following:
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
inder or part thereof taken at random (i) The porous material may not dis-
out of each lot of 200 or less, after heat integrate or sag when wet with solvent
treatment. or when subjected to normal service;
69
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00079 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.59 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
(ii) The porous filling material must (ii) Having volumetric capacity of 20
be uniform in quality and free of voids, pounds or less water capacity (nomi-
except that a well drilled into the fill- nal), may not exceed the following:
ing material beneath the valve is au-
Maximum
thorized if the well is filled with a ma- acetone sol-
terial of such type that the functions Percent porosity of filler vent percent
shell capac-
of the filling material are not im- ity by vol-
paired; ume
(iii) Overall shrinkage of the filling
90 to 92 ............................................................. 41.8
material is authorized if the total 83 to 90 ............................................................. 38.5
clearance between the cylinder shell 80 to 83 ............................................................. 37.1
and filling material, after solvent has 75 to 80 ............................................................. 34.8
been added, does not exceed 12 of 1 per- 70 to 75 ............................................................. 32.5
65 to 70 ............................................................. 30.2
cent of the respective diameter or
length, but not to exceed 18 inch, meas-
ured diametrically and longitudinally; (m) Tare weight. The tare weight is
(iv) The clearance may not impair the combined weight of the cylinder
the functions of the filling material; proper, porous filling, valve, and sol-
vent, without removable cap.
(v) The installed filling material
must meet the requirements of CGA C (n) Duties of inspector. In addition to
12 (IBR, see 171.7 of this subchapter); the requirements of 178.35, the inspec-
and tor is required to
(vi) Porosity of filling material may (1) Certify chemical analyses of steel
not exceed 80 percent except that fill- used, signed by manufacturer thereof;
ing material with a porosity of up to 92 also verify by, check analyses of sam-
percent may be used when tested with ples taken from each heat or from 1 out
satisfactory results in accordance with of each lot of 200 or less, plates, shells,
CGA Pamphlet C12. or tubes used.
(2) When the porosity of each cyl- (2) Verify compliance of cylinder
inder is not known, a cylinder taken at shells with all shell requirements; in-
random from a lot of 200 or less must spect inside before closing in both ends;
be tested for porosity. If the test cyl- verify heat treatment as proper; obtain
inder fails, each cylinder in the lot all samples for all tests and for check
may be tested individually and those analyses; witness all tests; verify
cylinders that pass the test are accept- threads by gauge; report volumetric ca-
able. pacity and minimum thickness of wall
(3) For filling that is molded and noted.
dried before insertion in cylinders, po- (3) Prepare report on manufacture of
rosity test may be made on a sample steel shells in form prescribed in
block taken at random from material 178.35. Furnish one copy to manufac-
to be used. turer and three copies to the company
(4) The porosity of the filling mate- that is to complete the cylinders.
rial must be determined. The amount (4) Determine porosity of filling and
of solvent at 70 F for a cylinder: tare weights; verify compliance of
(i) Having shell volumetric capacity marking with prescribed requirements;
above 20 pounds water capacity (nomi- obtain necessary copies of steel shell
nal) may not exceed the following: reports; and furnish complete reports
required by this specification to the
Maximum person who has completed the manu-
acetone sol-
vent percent facture of the cylinders and, upon re-
Percent porosity of filler shell capac- quest, to the purchaser. The test re-
ity by vol-
ume ports must be retained by the inspector
for fifteen years from the original test
90 to 92 ............................................................. 43.4 date of the cylinder.
87 to 90 ............................................................. 42.0
83 to 87 ............................................................. 40.0 (o) Marking. (1) Marking on each cyl-
inder must be stamped plainly and per-
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
80 to 83 ............................................................. 38.6
75 to 80 ............................................................. 36.2 manently on or near the shoulder, top
70 to 75 ............................................................. 33.8 head, neck or valve protection collar
65 to 70 ............................................................. 31.4
which is permanently attached to the
70
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00080 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.60
cylinder and forming integral part (2) Heat treatment is not required
thereof. after welding or brazing weldable low
(2) Tare weight of cylinder, in pounds carbon parts to attachments, specified
and ounces, must be marked on the in paragraph (f)(1) of this section, of
cylinder. similar material which have been pre-
(3) Cylinders, not completed, when viously welded or brazed to the top or
delivered must each be marked for bottom of cylinders and properly heat
identification of each lot of 200 or less. treated, provided such subsequent
welding or brazing does not produce a
[Amdt. 178114, 61 FR 25942, May 23, 1996, as
amended at 66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR temperature in excess of 400 F in any
61016, Sept. 27, 2002; 67 FR 51654, Aug. 8, 2002; part of the top or bottom material.
68 FR 75748, 75749, Dec. 31, 2003] (g) Wall thickness; wall stress. The wall
thickness/wall stress of the cylinder
178.60 Specification 8AL steel cyl- must conform to the following:
inders with porous fillings for acet- (1) The calculated wall stress at 750
ylene. psi may not exceed 35,000 psi, or one-
(a) Type and service pressure. A DOT half of the minimum ultimate strength
8AL cylinder is a seamless steel cyl- of the steel as determined in paragraph
inder with a service pressure of 250 (l) of this section, whichever value is
psig. However, the attachment of heads the smaller. The measured wall thick-
by welding or by brazing by dipping ness may not include galvanizing or
process and a welded circumferential other protective coating.
body seam is authorized. Longitudinal (i) Calculation of wall stress must be
seams are not authorized. made by the formula:
(b) Authorized steel. The authorized S = [P(1.3D2 + 0.4d2)] / (D2 d2)
steel is as specified in table I of appen-
dix A to this part. Where:
(c) Identification of steel. Material S = wall stress in pounds psi;
must be identified by any suitable P = 750 psig (minimum test pressure);
method except that plates and billets D = outside diameter in inches;
d = inside diameter in inches.
for hot-drawn cylinders must be
marked with heat number. (ii) Either D or d must be calculated
(d) Manufacture. Cylinders must be from the relation D = d + 2t, where t =
manufactured using equipment and minimum wall thickness.
processes adequate to ensure that each (2) Cylinders with a wall thickness
cylinder produced conforms to the re- less than 0.100 inch, the ratio of
quirements of this subpart. No defect is straight side wall length to outside di-
permitted that is likely to weaken the ameter may not exceed 3.5.
finished cylinder appreciably. A rea- (3) For cylinders having outside di-
sonably smooth and uniform surface ameter over 5 inches, the minimum
finish is required. Welding procedures wall thickness must be 0.087 inch.
and operators must be qualified in ac- (h) Heat treatment. Each cylinder
cordance with CGA Pamphlet C3 (IBR, must be uniformly and properly heat
see 171.7 of this subchapter). treated, prior to tests, by any suitable
(e) Footrings. Exposed bottom welds method in excess of 1100 F. Heat treat-
on cylinders over 18 inches long must ment must be accomplished after all
be protected by footrings. forming and welding operations, except
(f) Welding or brazing. Welding or that when brazed joints are used, heat
brazing for any purpose whatsoever is treatment must follow any forming
prohibited except as follows: and welding operations but may be
(1) The attachment to the tops or done before, during, or after the braz-
bottoms of cylinders of neckrings, ing operations. Liquid quenching is not
footrings, handlers, bosses, pads, and authorized.
valve protecting rings is authorized (i) Openings. Standard taper pipe
provided that such attachments and threads required in all openings. The
the portion of the container to which length of the opening may not be less
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
they are attached are made of weldable than as specified for American Stand-
steel, the carbon content of which may ard pipe threads; tapped to gauge;
not exceed 0.25 percent. clean cut, even, and without checks.
71
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00081 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.60 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
(j) Hydrostatic test. Each cylinder prescribed in ASTM E 8 (IBR, see 171.7
must successfully withstand a hydro- of this subchapter).
static test as follows: (ii) In using the extension under
(1) The test must be by water-jacket, load method, the total strain (or ex-
or other suitable method, operated so tension under load) corresponding to
as to obtain accurate data. The pres- the stress at which the 0.2 percent per-
sure gauge must permit reading to an manent strain occurs may be deter-
accuracy of 1 percent. The expansion mined with sufficient accuracy by cal-
gauge must permit reading of total ex- culating the elastic extension of the
pansion to an accuracy of either 1 per- gauge length under appropriate load
cent or 0.1 cubic centimeter. and adding thereto 0.2 percent of the
(2) Pressure must be maintained for gauge length. Elastic extension cal-
at least 30 seconds and sufficiently culations must be based on an elastic
longer to ensure complete expansion. modulus of 30,000,000. In the event of
Any internal pressure applied after controversy, the entire stress-strain
heat-treatment and previous to the of- diagram must be plotted and the yield
ficial test may not exceed 90 percent of strength determined from the 0.2 off-
the test pressure. set.
(3) Permanent volumetric expansion (iii) For the purpose of strain meas-
may not exceed 10 percent of total vol- urement, the initial strain must be set
umetric expansion at test pressure. while the specimen is under a stress of
(4) One cylinder out of each lot of 200 12,000 psi, the strain indicator reading
or less must be hydrostatically tested being set at the calculated cor-
to at least 750 psig. Cylinders not so responding strain.
tested must be examined under pres- (iv) Cross-head speed of the testing
sure of between 500 and 600 psig and machine may not exceed 18 inch per
show no defect. If a hydrostatically minute during yield strength deter-
tested cylinder fails, each cylinder in mination.
the lot may be hydrostatically tested (m) Elongation. Physical test speci-
and those passing are acceptable. mens must show at least a 40 percent
(k) Leakage test. Cylinders with bot- elongation for a 2 inch gauge length or
toms closed in by spinning must be at least a 20 percent elongation in
leakage tested by setting the interior other cases. Except that these elon-
air or gas pressure at not less than the gation percentages may be reduced nu-
service pressure. Any cylinder that merically by 2 for 2 inch specimens and
leaks must be rejected. 1 in other cases for each 7,500 psi incre-
(l) Physical test. A physical test must ment of tensile strength above 50,000
be conducted as follows; psi to a maximum of four such incre-
(1) The test is required on 2 speci- ments.
mens cut longitudinally from 1 cyl- (n) Weld tests. Specimens taken
inder or part thereof taken at random across the circumferentially welded
out of each lot of 200 or less, after heat seam must be cut from one cylinder
treatment. taken at random from each lot of 200 or
(2) Specimens must conform to a less cylinders after heat treatment and
gauge length of 8 inches with a width must pass satisfactorily the following
not over 112 inches, a gauge length 2 tests:
inches with a width not over 112 inches, (1) Tensile test. A specimen must be
or a gauge length at least 24 times cut from one cylinder of each lot of 200
thickness with a width not over 6 times or less, or welded test plate. The speci-
thickness is authorized when a cylinder men must be taken from across the
wall is not over 316 inch thick. major seam and must be prepared and
(3) The yield strength in tension tested in accordance with and must
must be the stress corresponding to a meet the requirements of CGA Pam-
permanent strain of 0.2 percent of the phlet C3. Should this specimen fail to
gauge length. The following conditions meet the requirements, specimens may
apply: be taken from two additional cylinders
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
(i) The yield strength must be deter- or welded test plates from the same lot
mined by either the offset method or and tested. If either of the latter speci-
the extension under load method as mens fail to meet the requirements,
72
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00082 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.60
the entire lot represented must be re- satisfactory results in accordance with
jected. CGA Pamphlet C12.
(2) Guided bend test. A root bend test (2) When the porosity of each cyl-
specimen must be cut from the cyl- inder is not known, a cylinder taken at
inder or welded test plate, used for the random from a lot of 200 or less must
tensile test specified in paragraph be tested for porosity. If the test cyl-
(n)(1) of this section. Specimens must inder fails, each cylinder in the lot
be prepared and tested in accordance may be tested individually and those
with and must meet the requirements cylinders that pass the test are accept-
of CGA Pamphlet C3. able.
(3) Alternate guided-bend test. This (3) For filling that is molded and
test may be used and must be as re- dried before insertion in cylinders, po-
quired by CGA Pamphlet C3. The spec- rosity test may be made on sample
imen must be bent until the elongation block taken at random from material
at the outer surface, adjacent to the to be used.
root of the weld, between the lightly (4) The porosity of the filling mate-
scribed gage lines-a to b, must be at rial must be determined; the amount of
least 20 percent, except that this per- solvent at 70 F for a cylinder:
centage may be reduced for steels hav- (i) Having shell volumetric capacity
ing a tensile strength in excess of 50,000 above 20 pounds water capacity (nomi-
psi, as provided in paragraph (m) of nal) may not exceed the following:
this section.
Maximum acetone
(o) Rejected cylinders. Reheat treat- Percent porosity of filler solvent percent shell
ment of rejected cylinders is author- capacity by volume
ized. Subsequent thereto, cylinders 90 to 92 ......................................... 43.4
must pass all prescribed tests to be ac- 87 to 90 ......................................... 42.0
ceptable. Repair by welding is author- 83 to 87 ......................................... 40.0
80 to 83 ......................................... 38.6
ized. 75 to 80 ......................................... 36.2
(p) Porous filling. (1) Cylinders must 70 to 75 ......................................... 33.8
be filled with a porous material in ac- 65 to 70 ......................................... 31.4
cordance with the following:
(i) The porous material may not dis- (ii) Having volumetric capacity of 20
integrate or sag when wet with solvent pounds or less water capacity (nomi-
or when subjected to normal service; nal), may not exceed the following:
(ii) The filling material must be uni- Maximum acetone
form in quality and free of voids, ex- Percent porosity of filler solvent percent shell
cept that a well drilled into the filling capacity by volume
material beneath the valve is author- 90 to 92 ......................................... 41.8
ized if the well is filled with a material 83 to 90 ......................................... 38.5
of such type that the functions of the 80 to 83 ......................................... 37.1
75 to 80 ......................................... 34.8
filling material are not impaired; 70 to 75 ......................................... 32.5
(iii) Overall shrinkage of the filling 65 to 70 ......................................... 30.2
material is authorized if the total
clearance between the cylinder shell (q) Tare weight. The tare weight is
and filling material, after solvent has the combined weight of the cylinder
been added, does not exceed 12 of 1 per- proper, porous filling, valve, and sol-
cent of the respective diameter or vent, but without removable cap.
length but not to exceed 18 inch, meas- (r) Duties of inspector. In addition to
ured diametrically and longitudinally; the requirements of 178.35, the inspec-
(iv) The clearance may not impair tor shall
the functions of the filling material; (1) Certify chemical analyses of steel
(v) The installed filling material used, signed by manufacturer thereof;
must meet the requirements of CGA C also verify by check analyses, of sam-
12 (IBR, see 171.7 of this subchapter); ples taken from each heat or from 1 out
and of each lot of 200 or less plates, shells,
(vi) Porosity of filling material may or tubes used.
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
not exceed 80 percent except that fill- (2) Verify compliance of cylinder
ing material with a porosity of up to 92 shells with all shell requirements, in-
percent may be used when tested with spect inside before closing in both ends,
73
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00083 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.61 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
67 FR 51654, Aug. 8, 2002; 68 FR 75748, 75749, butt) or lap with minimum overlap of
Dec. 31, 2003] at least four times nominal sheet
thickness.
74
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00084 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.61
(3) Longitudinal seams in shells must thickness must be 0.078 inch. For a cyl-
conform to the following: inder with a wall thickness less than
(i) Longitudinal electric-arc welded 0.100 inch, the ratio of tangential
seams must be of the butt welded type. length to outside diameter may not ex-
Welds must be made by a machine ceed 4 to1 (4:1). In any case the min-
process including automatic feed and imum wall thickness must be such that
welding guidance mechanisms. Longi- the wall stress calculated by the for-
tudinal seams must have complete mula listed in paragraph (f)(4) of this
joint penetration, and must be free section may not exceed the lesser value
from undercuts, overlaps or abrupt of any of the following:
ridges or valleys. Misalignment of mat- (1) The value referenced in paragraph
ing butt edges may not exceed 16 of (b) of this section for the particular
nominal sheet thickness or 132 inch material under consideration.
whichever is less. All joints with nomi- (2) One-half of the minimum tensile
nal sheet thickness up to and including strength of the material determined as
18 inch must be tightly butted. When
required in paragraph (j) of this sec-
nominal sheet thickness is greater tion.
than 18 inch, the joint must be gapped (3) 35,000 psi.
with maximum distance equal to one- (4) Stress must be calculated by the
half the nominal sheet thickness or 132 following formula:
inch whichever is less. Joint design,
preparation and fit-up must be such S = [2P(1.3D2 + 0.4d2)] / [E(D2 d2)]
that requirements of this paragraph (d) where:
are satisfied.
S = wall stress, psi;
(ii) Maximum joint efficiency must P = service pressure, psig;
be 1.0 when each seam is radiographed D = outside diameter, inches;
completely. Maximum joint efficiency d = inside diameter, inches;
must be 0.90 when one cylinder from E = joint efficiency of the longitudinal seam
each lot of 50 consecutively welded cyl- (from paragraph (d) of this section).
inders is spot radiographed. In addi-
tion, one out of the first five cylinders (g) Heat treatment. Each cylinder
welded following a shut down of weld- must be uniformly and properly heat
ing operations exceeding four hours treated prior to test by the applicable
must be spot radiographed. Spot method referenced in Table 1 of appen-
radiographs, when required, must be dix A to this part. Heat treatment
made of a finished welded cylinder and must be accomplished after all forming
must include the girth weld for 2 and welding operations. Heat treat-
inches in both directions from the ment is not required after welding or
intersection of the longitudinal and brazing of weldable low carbon parts to
girth welds and include at least 6 attachments of similar material which
inches of the longitudinal weld. Max- have been previously welded to the top
imum joint efficacy of 0.75 must be per- or bottom of cylinders and properly
missible without radiography. heat treated, provided such subsequent
(4) Welding procedures and operators welding or brazing does not produce a
must be qualified in accordance with temperature in excess of 400 F in any
CGA Pamphlet C3 (IBR, see 171.7 of part of the top or bottom material.
this subchapter). (h) Openings in cylinders. Openings in
(e) Welding of attachments. The at- the cylinder must conform to the fol-
tachment to the tops and bottoms only lowing:
of cylinders by welding of neckrings, (1) All openings must be in the heads
footrings, handles, bosses, pads and or bases.
valve protection rings is authorized (2) Openings in cylinders must be pro-
provided that such attachments and vided with adequate fittings, bosses, or
the portion of the container to which pads, integral with or securely at-
they are attached are made of weldable tached to the cylinder by welding.
steel, the carbon content of which may (3) Threads must comply with the fol-
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
75
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00085 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.61 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
(ii) Taper threads must be of length body section at least 90 degrees away
not less than as specified for American from the weld.
Standard Taper Pipe threads. (ii) Head specimen. One specimen
(iii) Straight threads, having at least must be taken from either head on a
4 engaged threads, to have tight fit and cylinder when both heads are made of
calculated shear strength at least 10 the same material. However, if the two
times the test pressure of the cylinder; heads are made of differing materials,
gaskets required, adequate to prevent a specimen must be taken from each
leakage. head.
(4) Closure of fittings, boss or pads (iii) If due to welded attachments on
must be adequate to prevent leakage. the top head there is insufficient sur-
(i) Hydrostatic test. Cylinders must face from which to take a specimen, it
withstand a hydrostatic test, as fol- may be taken from a representative
lows: head of the same heat treatment as the
(1) The test must be by water-jacket, test cylinder.
or other suitable method, operated so (2) Specimens must conform to the
as to obtain accurate data. The pres- following:
sure gauge must permit readings to an (i) A gauge length of 8 inches with a
accuracy of 1 percent. The expansion width not over 112 inches, a gauge
gauge must permit readings of total length of 2 inches with a width not
volumetric expansion to an accuracy over 112 inches, or a gauge length at
either of 1 percent or 0.1 cubic centi- least 24 times thickness with a width
meter. not over 6 times thickness is author-
(2) Pressure must be maintained for ized when a cylinder wall is not over 316
at least 30 seconds and sufficiently inch thick.
longer to ensure complete expansion. (ii) The specimen, exclusive of grip
Any internal pressure applied after ends, may not be flattened. Grip ends
heat treatment and previous to the of- may be flattened to within 1 inch of
ficial test may not exceed 90 percent of each end of the reduced section.
the test pressure. (iii) When size of the cylinder does
not permit securing straight speci-
(3) Permanent volumetric expansion
mens, the specimens may be taken in
may not exceed 10 percent of the total
any location or direction and may be
volumetric expansion at test pressure.
straightened or flattened cold, by pres-
(4) Cylinders must be tested as fol-
sure only, not by blows when speci-
lows:
mens are so taken and prepared, the in-
(i) At least 1 cylinder selected at ran- spectors report must show in connec-
dom out of each lot of 200 or less must tion with record of physical tests de-
be tested as outlined in paragraphs tailed information in regard to such
(i)(1), (i)(2), and (i)(3) of this section to specimens.
at least two times service pressure. (iv) Heating of a specimen for any
(ii) All cylinders not tested as out- purpose is not authorized.
lined in paragraph (i)(4)(i) of this sec- (3) The yield strength in tension
tion must be examined under pressure must be the stress corresponding to a
of at least two times service pressure permanent strain of 0.2 percent of the
and show no defect. gauge length. The following conditions
(5) One finished cylinder selected at apply:
random out of each lot of 500 or less (i) The yield strength must be deter-
successively produced must be mined by either the off-set method
hydrostatically tested to 4 times serv- or the extension under load method
ice pressure without bursting. as prescribed in ASTM E 8 (IBR, see
(j) Physical tests. Cylinders must be 171.7 of this subchapter).
subjected to a physical test as follows: (ii) In using the extension under
(1) Specimens must be taken from load method, the total strain (or ex-
one cylinder after heat treatment and tension under load), corresponding to
chosen at random from each lot of 200 the stress at which the 0.2-percent per-
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
76
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00086 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.61
ing a tensile strength in excess of 50,000 tached to the cylinder, provided the
psi, as provided in paragraph (k) of this water capacity of the cylinder does not
section. exceed 25 pounds.
77
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00087 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.65 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
78
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00088 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.65
(4) Welding procedures and operators (i) The leakage test must be con-
must be qualified in accordance with ducted by submersion under water or
CGA Pamphlet C3 (IBR, see 171.7 of by some other method that will be
this subchapter). equally sensitive.
(d) Wall thickness. The minimum wall (ii) If the cylinder leaks, evidences
thickness must be such that the wall visible distortion, or any other defect,
stress at test pressure does not exceed while under test, it must be rejected
the yield strength of the material of (see paragraph (h) of this section).
the finished cylinder wall. Calculations (2) One cylinder taken from the be-
must be made by the following for- ginning of each lot, and one from each
mulas: 1,000 or less successively produced
(1) Calculation of the stress for cyl- within the lot thereafter, must be
inders must be made by the following hydrostatically tested to destruction.
formula: The entire lot must be rejected (see
S = [P(1.3D2 + 0.4d2)] / (D2 d2) paragraph (h) of this section) if:
(i) A failure occurs at a gage pressure
Where: less than 2.0 times the test pressure;
S = Wall stress, in psi; (ii) A failure initiates in a braze or a
P = Test pressure in psig; weld or the heat affected zone thereof;
D = Outside diameter, in inches; (iii) A failure is other than in the
d = Inside diameter, in inches.
sidewall of a cylinder longitudinal with
(2) Calculation of the stress for its long axis; or
spheres must be made by the following (iv) In a sphere, a failure occurs in
formula: any opening, reinforcement, or at a
S = PD / 4t point of attachment.
(3) A lot is defined as the quantity
Where: of cylinders successively produced per
S = Wall stress, in psi; production shift (not exceeding 10
P = Test pressure i psig; hours) having identical size, design,
D = Outside diameter, in inches; construction, material, heat treat-
t = Minimum wall thickness, in inches. ment, finish, and quality.
(e) Openings and attachments. Open- (g) Flattening test. One cylinder must
ings and attachments must conform to be taken from the beginning of produc-
the following: tion of each lot (as defined in para-
(1) Openings and attachments are graph (f)(3) of this section) and sub-
permitted on heads only. jected to a flattening test as follows:
(2) All openings and their reinforce- (1) The flattening test must be made
ments must be within an imaginary on a cylinder that has been tested at
circle, concentric to the axis of the cyl- test pressure.
inder. The diameter of the circle may (2) A ring taken from a cylinder may
not exceed 80 percent of the outside di- be flattened as an alternative to a test
ameter of the cylinder. The plane of on a complete cylinder. The test ring
the circle must be parallel to the plane may not include the heat affected zone
of a circumferential weld and normal or any weld. However, for a sphere, the
to the long axis of the cylinder. test ring may include the circumferen-
(3) Unless a head has adequate thick- tial weld if it is located at a 45 degree
ness, each opening must be reinforced angle to the ring, 5 degrees.
by a securely attached fitting, boss, (3) The flattening must be between 60
pad, collar, or other suitable means. degrees included-angle, wedge shaped
(4) Material used for welded openings knife edges, rounded to a 0.5 inch ra-
and attachments must be of weldable dius.
quality and compatible with the mate- (4) Cylinders and test rings may not
rial of the cylinder. crack when flattened so that their
(f) Pressure tests. (1) Each cylinder outer surfaces are not more than six
must be tested at an internal pressure times wall thickness apart when made
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
of at least the test pressure and must of steel or not more than ten times
be held at that pressure for at least 30 wall thickness apart when made of alu-
seconds. minum.
79
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00089 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.68 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
(5) If any cylinder or ring cracks at least 18 inch high and displayed se-
when subjected to the specified flat- quentially. For example:
tening test, the lot of cylinders rep-
DOT-39 NRC 250/500 M1001.
resented by the test must be rejected
(see paragraph (h) of this section). (4) No person may mark any cylinder
(h) Rejected cylinders. Rejected cyl- with the specification identification
inders must conform to the following DOT-39 unless it was manufactured
requirements: in compliance with the requirements of
(1) If the cause for rejection of a lot this section and its manufacturer has a
is determinable, and if by test or in- registration number (M****) from the
spection defective cylinders are elimi- Associate Administrator.
nated from the lot, the remaining cyl- [Amdt. 178114, 61 FR 25942, May 23, 1996, as
inders must be qualified as a new lot amended at 65 FR 58631, Sept. 29, 2000; 66 FR
under paragraphs (f) and (g) of this sec- 45389, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 51654, Aug. 8, 2002;
tion. 68 FR 75748, 75749, Dec. 31, 2003]
(2) Repairs to welds are permitted.
Following repair, a cylinder must pass 178.68 Specification 4E welded alu-
the pressure test specified in paragraph minum cylinders.
(f) of this section. (a) Type, size and service pressure. A
(3) If a cylinder made from seamless DOT 4E cylinder is a welded aluminum
steel tubing fails the flattening test de- cylinder with a water capacity (nomi-
scribed in paragraph (g) of this section, nal) of not over 1,000 pounds and a serv-
suitable uniform heat treatment must ice pressure of at least 225 to not over
be used on each cylinder in the lot. All 500 psig. The cylinder must be con-
prescribed tests must be performed structed of not more than two seamless
subsequent to this heat treatment. drawn shells with no more than one
(i) Markings. (1) The markings re- circumferential weld. The circumferen-
quired by this section must be durable tial weld may not be closer to the point
and waterproof. The requirements of of tangency of the cylindrical portion
178.35(h) do not apply to this section. with the shoulder than 20 times the
(2) Required markings are as follows: cylinder wall thickness. Cylinders or
(i) DOT-39. shells closed in by spinning process and
(ii) NRC. cylinders with longitudinal seams are
(iii) The service pressure. not authorized.
(iv) The test pressure. (b) Authorized material. The cylinder
(v) The registration number (M****) must be constructed of aluminum of
of the manufacturer. uniform quality. The following chem-
(vi) The lot number. ical analyses are authorized:
(vii) The date of manufacture if the
lot number does not establish the date TABLE 1AUTHORIZED MATERIALS
of manufacture. Chemical analysislimits in
(viii) With one of the following state- Designation percent 5154 1
ments:
Iron plus silicon .................... 0.45 maximum.
(A) For cylinders manufactured prior Copper .................................. 0.10 maximum.
to October 1, 1996: Federal law forbids Manganese ........................... 0.10 maximum.
transportation if refilled-penalty up to Magnesium ........................... 3.10/3.90.
$25,000 fine and 5 years imprisonment Chromium ............................. 0.15/0.35.
Zinc ....................................... 0.20 maximum.
(49 U.S.C. 1809) or Federal law for- Titanium ................................ 0.20 maximum.
bids transportation if refilled-penalty Others, each ......................... 0.05 maximum.
up to $500,000 fine and 5 years imprison- Others, total .......................... 0.15 maximum.
Aluminum .............................. remainder.
ment (49 U.S.C. 5124).
(B) For cylinders manufactured on or 1 Analysis must regularly be made only for the elements
specifically mentioned in this table. If, however, the presence
after October 1, 1996: Federal law for- of other elements is indicated in the course of routine anal-
bids transportation if refilled-penalty ysis, further analysis should be made to determine conform-
ance with the limits specified for other elements.
up to $500,000 fine and 5 years imprison-
ment (49 U.S.C. 5124). (c) Identification. Material must be
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
(3) The markings required by para- identified by any suitable method that
graphs (i)(2)(i) through (i)(2)(v) of this will identify the alloy and manufactur-
section must be in numbers and letters ers lot number.
80
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00090 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.68
by inert gas shielded arc process or by bursting. Inability to meet this re-
threads. If threads are used, they must quirement must result in rejection of
comply with the following: the lot.
81
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00091 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.68 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
(i) Flattening test. After hydrostatic (3) The yield strength in tension
testing, a flattening test is required on must be the stress corresponding to a
one section of a cylinder, taken at ran- permanent strain of 0.2 percent of the
dom out of each lot of 200 or less as fol- gauge length. The following conditions
lows: apply:
(1) If the weld is not at midlength of (i) The yield strength must be deter-
the cylinder, the test section must be mined by the offset method as pre-
no less in width than 30 times the cyl- scribed in ASTM E 8 (IBR, see 171.7 of
inder wall thickness. The weld must be this subchapter).
in the center of the section. Weld rein- (ii) Cross-head speed of the testing
forcement must be removed by machin- machine may not exceed 18 inch per
ing or grinding so that the weld is flush minute during yield strength deter-
with the exterior of the parent metal. mination.
There must be no evidence of cracking (k) Acceptable results for physical tests.
in the sample when it is flattened be- An acceptable result of the physical
tween flat plates to no more than 6 test requires an elongation to at least
times the wall thickness. 7 percent and yield strength not over 80
(2) If the weld is at midlength of the percent of tensile strength.
cylinder, the test may be made as spec- (l) Weld tests. Welds of the cylinder
ified in paragraph (i)(1) of this section are required to successfully pass the
or must be made between wedge shaped following tests:
knife edges (60 angle) rounded to a 12 (1) Reduced section tensile test. A speci-
inch radius. There must be no evidence men must be cut from the cylinder
of cracking in the sample when it is used for the physical tests specified in
flattened to no more than 6 times the paragraph (j) of this section. The speci-
wall thickness. men must be taken from across the
seam, edges must be parallel for a dis-
(j) Physical test. A physical test must
tance of approximately 2 inches on ei-
be conducted to determine yield
ther side of the weld. The specimen
strength, tensile strength, elongation,
must be fractured in tension. The ap-
and reduction of area of material as
parent breaking stress calculated on
follows:
the minimum wall thickness must be
(1) The test is required on 2 speci- at least equal to 2 times the stress cal-
mens cut from one cylinder or part culated under paragraph (f)(2) of this
thereof taken at random out of each section, and in addition must have an
lot of 200 or less. actual breaking stress of at least 30,000
(2) Specimens must conform to the psi. Should this specimen fail to meet
following: the requirements, specimens may be
(i) A gauge length of 8 inches with a taken from 2 additional cylinders from
width not over 112 inches, a gauge the same lot and tested. If either of the
length of 2 inches with a width not latter specimens fails to meet require-
over 112 inches. ments, the entire lot represented must
(ii) The specimen, exclusive of grip be rejected.
ends, may not be flattened. Grip ends (2) Guided bend test. A bend test speci-
may be flattened to within 1 inch of men must be cut from the cylinder
each end of the reduced section. used for the physical test specified in
(iii) When size of cylinder does not paragraph (j) of this section. Specimen
permit securing straight specimens, must be taken across the seam, must
the specimens may be taken in any lo- be a minimum of 112 inches wide, edges
cation or direction and may be must be parallel and rounded with a
straightened or flattened cold, by pres- file, and back-up strip, if used, must be
sure only, not by blows; when speci- removed by machining. The specimen
mens are so taken and prepared, the in- shall be tested as follows:
spectors report must show in connec- (i) The specimen must be bent to re-
tion with record of physical test de- fusal in the guided bend test jig as il-
tailed information in regard to such lustrated in paragraph 6.10 of CGA C3
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
82
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00092 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.69
the ram of the jig. The specimen must its quality system approved by the As-
not show a crack or other open defect sociate Administrator. The quality sys-
exceeding 18 inch in any direction upon tem will initially be assessed through
completion of the test. Should this an audit by the Associate Adminis-
specimen fail to meet the require- trator or his or her representative to
ments, specimens may be taken from determine whether it meets the re-
each of 2 additional cylinders from the quirements of this section. The Asso-
same lot and tested. If either of the lat- ciate Administrator will notify the
ter specimens fails to meet require- manufacturer in writing of the results
ments, the entire lot represented must of the audit. The notification will con-
be rejected. tain the conclusions of the audit and
(ii) Alternatively, the specimen may any corrective action required. The As-
be tested in a guided bend test jig as il- sociate Administrator may perform
lustrated in Figure 12.1 of The Alu- periodic audits to ensure that the man-
minum Associations 2002 publication, ufacturer operates in accordance with
Welding Aluminum: Theory and Prac- the quality system. Reports of periodic
tice. The root of the weld (inside sur- audits will be provided to the manufac-
face of the cylinder) must be located turer. The manufacturer must bear the
away from the mandrel of the jig. No
cost of audits.
specimen must show a crack or other
(2) Quality system documentation. The
open defect exceeding 18 inch in any di-
rection upon completion of the test. manufacturer must be able to dem-
Should this specimen fail to meet the onstrate a documented quality system.
requirements, specimens may be taken Management must review the adequacy
from each of 2 additional cylinders of the quality system to assure that it
from the same lot and tested. If either is effective and conforms to the re-
of the latter specimens fails to meet quirements in 178.70. The quality sys-
requirements, the entire lot rep- tem records must be in English and
resented must be rejected. must include detailed descriptions of
(m) Rejected cylinders. Repair of weld- the following:
ed seams is authorized. Acceptable cyl- (i) The organizational structure and
inders must pass all prescribed tests. responsibilities of personnel with re-
(n) Inspectors report. In addition to gard to design and product quality;
the information required by 178.35, the (ii) The design control and design
record of chemical analyses must also verification techniques, processes, and
include applicable information on iron, procedures used when designing the
titanium, zinc, and magnesium used in pressure receptacles;
the construction of the cylinder. (iii) The relevant procedures for pres-
[Amdt. 178114, 61 FR 25942, May 23, 1996, as sure receptacle manufacturing, quality
amended at 62 FR 51561, Oct. 1, 1997; 66 FR control, quality assurance, and process
45386, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 51654, Aug. 8, 2002; operation instructions;
68 FR 75748, Dec. 31, 2003; 69 FR 54046, Sept. (iv) Inspection and testing meth-
7, 2004; 74 FR 16143, Apr. 9, 2009] odologies, measuring and testing equip-
ment, and calibration data;
178.69 Responsibilities and require-
ments for manufacturers of UN (v) The process for meeting customer
pressure receptacles. requirements;
(a) Each manufacturer of a UN pres- (vi) The process for document control
sure receptacle marked with USA as and document revision;
a country of approval must comply (vii) The system for controlling non-
with the requirements in this section. conforming material and records, in-
The manufacturer must maintain a cluding procedures for identification,
quality system, obtain an approval for segregation, and disposition;
each initial pressure receptacle design (viii) Production, processing and fab-
type, and ensure that all production of rication, including purchased compo-
UN pressure receptacles meets the ap- nents, in-process and final materials;
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
83
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00093 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.70 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
(3) Maintenance of quality system. The mentation, including drawings and cal-
manufacturer must maintain the qual- culations, to verify that the design
ity system as approved by the Asso- meets all requirements of the applica-
ciate Administrator. The manufacturer ble UN pressure receptacle standard
shall notify the Associate Adminis- and specification requirements. If the
trator of any intended changes to the technical documentation shows that
approved quality system prior to mak- the pressure receptacle prototype de-
ing the change. The Associate Adminis- sign conforms to the applicable stand-
trator will evaluate the proposed ards and requirements in 178.70, the
change to determine whether the manufacturer will fabricate a proto-
amended quality system will satisfy type lot of pressure receptacles in con-
the requirements. The Associate Ad- formance with the technical docu-
ministrator will notify the manufac- mentation representative of the design.
turer of the findings. The IIA will verify that the prototype
(b) Design type approvals. The manu- lot conforms to the applicable require-
facturer must have each pressure re- ments by selecting pressure receptacles
ceptacle design type reviewed by an IIA and witnessing their testing. After pro-
and approved by the Associate Admin- totype testing has been satisfactorily
istrator in accordance with 178.70. A completed, showing the pressure recep-
cylinder is considered to be of a new tacles fully conform to all applicable
design, compared with an existing ap- specification requirements, the certi-
proved design, as stated in the applica- fying IIA must prepare a letter of rec-
ble ISO design, construction and test- ommendation and a design type ap-
ing standard. proval certificate. The design type ap-
(c) Production inspection and certifi- proval certificate must contain the
cation. The manufacturer must ensure name and address of the manufacturer
that each UN pressure receptacle is in- and the IIA certifying the design type,
spected and certified in accordance the test results, chemical analyses, lot
with 178.71. identification, and all other supporting
[71 FR 33885, June 12, 2006] data specified in the applicable ISO de-
sign, construction and testing stand-
178.70 Approval of UN pressure re- ard. The IIA must provide the certifi-
ceptacles. cate and documentation to the manu-
(a) Initial design-type approval. The facturer.
manufacturer of a UN pressure recep- (c) Application for initial design type
tacle must obtain an initial design approval. If the pre-audit is found satis-
type approval from the Associate Ad- factory by the IIA, the manufacturer
ministrator. The initial design type ap- will submit the letter of recommenda-
proval must be of the pressure recep- tion from the IIA and an application
tacle design as it is intended to be pro- for design type approval to the Asso-
duced. The manufacturer must arrange ciate Administrator. An application for
for an IIA, approved by the Associate initial design type approval must be
Administrator in accordance with sub- submitted for each manufacturing fa-
part I of part 107 of this chapter, to cility. The application must be in
perform a pre-audit of its pressure re- English and, at a minimum, contain
ceptacle manufacturing operation prior the following information:
to having an audit conducted by the (1) The name and address of the man-
Associate Administrator or his des- ufacturing facility. If the application is
ignee. submitted by an authorized representa-
(b) IIA pre-audit. The manufacturer tive on behalf of the manufacturer, the
must submit an application for initial application must include the represent-
design type approval to the IIA for re- atives name and address.
view. The IIA will examine the manu- (2) The name and title of the indi-
facturers application for initial design vidual responsible for the manufactur-
type approval for completeness. An in- ers quality system, as required by
complete application will be returned 178.69.
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
84
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00094 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.70
(2) Verify that the production inspec- the Associate Administrator, the pres-
tions were performed in accordance sure receptacle manufacturer must
with this section; sign the certificate.
85
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00095 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.71 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
(g) Recordkeeping. The production IIA (i) Written notice of the facts or con-
and the manufacturer must retain a duct believed to warrant the with-
copy of the design type approval cer- drawal;
tificate and certificate of compliance (ii) Opportunity to submit oral and
records for at least 20 years. written evidence, and
(h) Denial of design type application. If (iii) Opportunity to demonstrate or
the design type application is denied, achieve compliance with the applica-
the Associate Administrator will no- tion requirement.
tify the applicant in writing and pro- (3) If the Associate Administrator de-
vide the reason for the denial. The termines that a certificate of approval
manufacturer may request that the As- must be withdrawn to preclude a sig-
sociate Administrator reconsider the nificant and imminent adverse affect
decision. The application request on public safety, the procedures in
must paragraph (j)(2)(ii) and (iii) of this sec-
(1) Be written in English and filed tion need not be provided prior to with-
within 60 days of receipt of the deci- drawal of the approval, but shall be
sion; provided as soon as practicable there-
(2) State in detail any alleged errors after.
of fact and law; and [71 FR 33886, June 12, 2006, as amended at 71
(3) Enclose any additional informa- FR 54397, Sept. 14, 2006; 77 FR 60943, Oct. 5,
tion needed to support the request to 2012]
reconsider.
178.71 Specifications for UN pressure
(i) Appeal. (1) A manufacturer whose receptacles.
reconsideration request is denied may
appeal to the PHMSA Administrator. (a) General. Each UN pressure recep-
The appeal must tacle must meet the requirements of
this section. UN pressure receptacles
(i) Be written in English and filed
and service equipment constructed ac-
within 60 days of receipt of the Asso-
cording to the standards applicable at
ciate Administrators decision on re-
the date of manufacture may continue
consideration;
in use subject to the continuing quali-
(ii) State in detail any alleged errors
fication and maintenance provisions of
of fact and law;
part 180 of this subchapter. Require-
(iii) Enclose any additional informa- ments for approval, qualification,
tion needed to support the appeal; and maintenance, and testing are contained
(iv) State in detail the modification in 178.70, and subpart C of part 180 of
of the final decision sought. this subchapter.
(2) The PHMSA Administrator will (b) Definitions. The following defini-
grant or deny the relief and inform the tions apply for the purposes of design
appellant in writing of the decision. and construction of UN pressure recep-
PHMSA Administrators decision is the tacles under this subpart:
final administrative action. Alternative arrangement means an ap-
(j) Termination of a design type ap- proval granted by the Associate Ad-
proval certificate. (1) The Associate Ad- ministrator for a MEGC that has been
ministrator may terminate an approval designed, constructed or tested to the
certificate issue under this section if it technical requirements or testing
is determined that, because of a change methods other than those specified for
in circumstances, the approval no UN pressure receptacles in part 178 or
longer is needed or no longer would be part 180 of this subchapter.
granted if applied for; information Bundle of cylinders. See 171.8 of this
upon which the approval was based is subchapter.
fraudulent or substantially erroneous; Design type means a pressure recep-
or termination of the approval is nec- tacle design as specified by a particular
essary to adequately protect against pressure receptacle standard.
risks to life and property. Design type approval means an overall
(2) Before an approval is terminated, approval of the manufacturers quality
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
the Associate Administrator will pro- system and design type of each pres-
vide the manufacturer and the ap- sure receptacle to be produced within
proval agency the manufacturers facility.
86
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00096 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.71
UN tube. See 171.8 of this subchapter. (1) The frame must securely retain
(c) Following the final heat treat- all the components of the bundle and
ment, all cylinders, except those se- must protect them from damage during
lected for batch testing must be sub- conditions normally incident to trans-
jected to a proof pressure or a hydrau- portation. The method of cylinder re-
lic volumetric expansion test. straint must prevent any vertical or
(d) Service equipment. (1) Except for horizontal movement or rotation of the
pressure relief devices, UN pressure re- cylinder that could cause undue strain
ceptacle equipment, including valves, on the manifold. The total assembly
piping, fittings, and other equipment must be able to withstand rough han-
subjected to pressure must be designed dling, including being dropped or over-
and constructed to withstand at least turned.
1.5 times the test pressure of the pres- (2) The frame must include features
sure receptacle. designed for the handling and transpor-
(2) Service equipment must be config- tation of the bundle. The lifting rings
ured or designed to prevent damage must be designed to withstand a design
that could result in the release of the load of 2 times the maximum gross
pressure receptacle contents during weight. Bundles with more than one
normal conditions of handling and lifting ring must be designed such that
transport. Manifold piping leading to a minimum sling angle of 45 degrees to
shut-off valves must be sufficiently the horizontal can be achieved during
flexible to protect the valves and the lifting using the lifting rings. If four
piping from shearing or releasing the lifting rings are used, their design
pressure receptacle contents. The fill- must be strong enough to allow the
ing and discharge valves and any pro- bundle to be lifted by two rings. Where
tective caps must be secured against two or four lifting rings are used, dia-
unintended opening. The valves must metrically opposite lifting rings must
conform to ISO 10297:2006 (IBR, see be aligned with each other to allow for
171.7 of this subchapter), or ISO 13340 correct lifting using shackle pins. If
(IBR, see 171.7 of this subchapter) for the bundle is filled with forklift pock-
non-refillable pressure receptacles, and ets, it must contain two forklift pock-
be protected as specified in 173.301b(f) ets on each side from which it is to be
of this subchapter. Until December 31, lifted. The forklift pockets must be po-
2008, the manufacture of a valve con- sitioned symmetrically consistent with
forming to the requirements in ISO the bundle center of gravity.
10297:1999 (IBR, see 171.7 of this sub- (3) The frame structural members
chapter) is authorized. must be designed for a vertical load of
(3) UN pressure receptacles that can- 2 times the maximum gross weight of
not be handled manually or rolled, the bundle. Design stress levels may
must be equipped with devices (e.g., not exceed 0.9 times the yield strength
skids, rings, straps) ensuring that they of the material.
can be safely handled by mechanical (4) The frame must not contain any
means and so arranged as not to impair protrusions from the exterior frame
the strength of, nor cause undue structure that could cause a hazardous
stresses, in the pressure receptacle. condition.
(4) Pressure receptacles filled by vol- (5) The frame design must prevent
ume must be equipped with a level in- collection of water or other debris that
dicator. would increase the tare weight of bun-
(e) Bundles of cylinders. UN pressure dles filled by weight.
receptacles assembled in bundles must (6) The floor of the bundle frame
be structurally supported and held to- must not buckle during normal oper-
gether as a unit and secured in a man- ating conditions and must allow for the
ner that prevents movement in rela- drainage of water and debris from
tion to the structural assembly and around the base of the cylinders.
movement that would result in the (7) If the frame design includes mov-
concentration of harmful local able doors or covers, they must be ca-
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
stresses. The frame design must ensure pable of being secured with latches or
stability under normal operating con- other means that will not become dis-
ditions. lodged by operational impact loads.
87
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00097 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.71 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
Valves that need to be operated in nor- 171.7 of this subchapter). Until Decem-
mal service or in an emergency must ber 31, 2018, the manufacture of a cyl-
be accessible. inder conforming to the requirements
(8) For bundles of cylinders, pressure in ISO 98093:2000 (IBR, see 171.7 of
receptacle marking requirements only this subchapter) is authorized.
apply to the individual cylinders of a (h) Design and construction require-
bundle and not to any assembly struc- ments for UN refillable seamless aluminum
ture. alloy cylinders. In addition to the gen-
(f) Design and construction require- eral requirements of this section, UN
ments for UN refillable welded cylinders. refillable seamless aluminum cylinders
In addition to the general requirements must conform to ISO 7866: Gas cyl-
of this section, UN refillable welded indersRefillable seamless aluminum
cylinders must conform to the fol- alloy gas cylindersDesign, construc-
lowing ISO standards, as applicable: tion and testing. (IBR, see 171.7 of this
(1) ISO 4706: Gas cylindersRefillable subchapter). The use of Aluminum
welded steel cylindersTest pressure alloy 6351T6 or equivalent is prohib-
60 bar and below (IBR, see 171.7 of this ited.
subchapter). (i) Design and construction require-
(2) ISO 181721: Gas cylindersRefill- ments for UN non-refillable metal cyl-
able welded stainless steel cylinders inders. In addition to the general re-
Part 1: Test pressure 6 MPa and below quirements of this section, UN non-re-
(IBR, see 171.7 of this subchapter). fillable metal cylinders must conform
(3) ISO 20703: Gas cylindersRefill- to ISO 11118: Gas cylindersNon-refill-
able welded aluminum-alloy cyl- able metallic gas cylindersSpecifica-
indersDesign, construction and test- tion and test methods. (IBR, see 171.7
ing (IBR, see 171.7 of this subchapter). of this subchapter.)
(g) Design and construction require-
(j) Design and construction require-
ments for UN refillable seamless steel cyl-
ments for UN refillable seamless steel
inders. In addition to the general re-
tubes. In addition to the general re-
quirements of this section, UN refill-
quirements of this section, UN refill-
able seamless steel cylinders must con-
form to the following ISO standards, as able seamless steel tubes must conform
applicable: to ISO 11120: Gas cylindersRefillable
(1) ISO 98091:2010 Gas cylindersRe- seamless steel tubes of water capacity
fillable seamless steel gas cylinders between 150 L and 3000 LDesign, con-
Design, construction and testingPart struction and testing. (IBR, see 171.7
1: Quenched and tempered steel cyl- of this subchapter).
inders with tensile strength less than (k) Design and construction require-
1100 MPa. (IBR, see 171.7 of this sub- ments for UN acetylene cylinders. In ad-
chapter). Until December 31, 2018, the dition to the general requirements of
manufacture of a cylinder conforming this section, UN acetylene cylinders
to the requirements in ISO 98091:1999 must conform to the following ISO
(IBR, see 171.7 of this subchapter) is standards, as applicable:
authorized. (1) For the cylinder shell:
(2) ISO 98092: Gas cylindersRefill- (i) ISO 98091:2010 Gas cylindersRe-
able seamless steel gas cylindersDe- fillable seamless steel gas cylinders
sign, construction and testingPart 2: Design, construction and testingPart
Quenched and tempered steel cylinders 1: Quenched and tempered steel cyl-
with tensile strength greater than or inders with tensile strength less than
equal to 1100 MPa. (IBR, see 171.7 of 1100 MPa. Until December 31, 2018, the
this subchapter). Until December 31, manufacture of a cylinder conforming
2018, the manufacture of a cylinder to the requirements in ISO 98091:1999
conforming to the requirements in ISO (IBR, see 171.7 of this subchapter) is
98092:2000 (IBR, see 171.7 of this sub- authorized.
chapter) is authorized. (ii) ISO 98093: Gas cylindersRefill-
(3) ISO 98093: Gas cylindersRefill- able seamless steel gas cylindersDe-
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
88
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00098 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.71
89
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00099 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.71 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
(2) The ISO standard, for example two significant figures rounded down
ISO 98091, used for design, construc- to the last digit. For acetylene cyl-
tion and testing. Acetylene cylinders inders, the tare weight must be marked
must be marked to indicate the porous on the cylinders in kilograms. The tare
mass and the steel shell, for example: weight is the sum of the empty weight,
ISO 38072/ISO 98091. mass of the valve, any coating and all
(3) The mark of the country where permanently attached parts (e.g., fit-
the approval is granted. The letters tings and accessories) that are not re-
USA must be marked on UN pressure moved during filling. The tare weight
receptacles approved by the United must be expressed to two significant
States. The manufacturer must obtain figures rounded down to the last digit.
an approval number from the Associate The tare weight does not include the
Administrator. The manufacturer ap- cylinder cap or any outlet cap or plug
proval number must follow the country not permanently attached to the cyl-
of approval mark, separated by a slash inder.
(for example, USA/MXXXX). Pressure (9) The minimum wall thickness of
receptacles approved by more than one the pressure receptacle in millimeters
national authority may contain the followed by the letters MM. This
mark of each country of approval, sep- mark is not required for pressure re-
arated by a comma. ceptacles with a water capacity less
(4) The identity mark or stamp of the than or equal to 1.0 L or for composite
IIA. cylinders.
(5) The date of the initial inspection, (10) For pressure receptacles intended
the year (four digits) followed by the for the transport of compressed gases
month (two digits) separated by a and UN 1001 acetylene, dissolved, the
slash, for example 2006/04. working pressure in bar, proceeded by
(6) The test pressure in bar, preceded the letters PW.
by the letters PH and followed by (11) For liquefied gases, the water ca-
the letters BAR. pacity in liters expressed to three sig-
(7) The rated charging pressure of the nificant digits rounded down to the
metal hydride storage system in bar, last digit, followed by the letter L. If
preceded by the letters RCP and fol- the value of the minimum or nominal
lowed by the letters BAR. water capacity is an integer, the digits
(8) The empty or tare weight. Except after the decimal point may be omit-
for acetylene cylinders, empty weight ted.
is the mass of the pressure receptacle (12) Identification of the cylinder
in kilograms, including all integral thread type (e.g., 25E).
parts (e.g., collar, neck ring, foot ring, (13) The country of manufacture. The
etc.), followed by the letters KG. The letters USA must be marked on cyl-
empty weight does not include the inders manufactured in the United
mass of the valve, valve cap or valve States.
guard or any coating. The empty (14) The serial number assigned by
weight must be expressed to three sig- the manufacturer.
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
nificant figures rounded up to the last (15) For steel pressure receptacles,
digit. For cylinders of less than 1 kg, the letter H showing compatibility
the empty weight must be expressed to of the steel, as specified in ISO 111141.
90
ER19JA11.035</GPH>
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00100 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.71
(16) Identification of aluminum alloy, (1) The top grouping contains manu-
if applicable. facturing marks and must appear con-
(17) Stamp for nondestructive test- secutively in the sequence given in
ing, if applicable. paragraphs (q)(13) through (19) of this
(18) Stamp for underwater use of section.
composite cylinders, if applicable. (2) The middle grouping contains
(19) For metal hydride storage sys- operational marks described in para-
tems having a limited life, the date of
graphs (q)(6) through (11) of this sec-
expiration indicated by the word
tion.
FINAL, followed by the year (four
digits), the month (two digits) and sep- (3) The bottom grouping contains
arated by a slash. certification marks and must appear
(r) Marking sequence. The marking re- consecutively in the sequence given in
quired by paragraph (q) of this section paragraphs (q)(1) through (5) of this
must be placed in three groups as section.
shown in the example below:
(s) Other markings. Other markings the pressure receptacle (e.g., a welded
are allowed in areas other than the side collar).
wall, provided they are made in low (1) The marking requirements and se-
stress areas and are not of a size and quence listed in paragraphs (q)(1)
depth that will create harmful stress through (19) of this section are re-
concentrations. Such marks must not quired, except the markings in para-
conflict with required marks. graphs (q)(8), (9), (12) and (18) are not
(t) Marking of UN non-refillable pres- applicable. The required serial number
sure receptacles. Unless otherwise speci- marking in paragraph (q)(14) may be
fied in this paragraph, each UN non-re- replaced by the batch number.
fillable pressure receptacle must be (2) Each receptacle must be marked
clearly and legibly marked as pre- with the words DO NOT REFILL in
scribed in paragraph (q) of this section. letters of at least 5 mm in height.
In addition, permanent stenciling is (3) A non-refillable pressure recep-
authorized. Except when stenciled, the tacle, because of its size, may sub-
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
marks must be on the shoulder, top end stitute the marking required by this
or neck of the pressure receptacle or on paragraph with a label. Reduction in
a permanently affixed component of
91
ER08JA15.001</GPH>
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00101 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.71 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
(ii) The ISO standard, for example gases and UN 1001 acetylene, dissolved,
ISO 98091, used for design, construc- the working pressure in bar, proceeded
tion and testing. Acetylene cylinders by the letters PW;
must be marked to indicate the porous (viii) For liquefied gases, the water
mass and the steel shell, for example: capacity in liters expressed to three
ISO 38072/ISO 98091; significant digits rounded down to the
(iii) The mark of the country where last digit, followed by the letter L. If
the approval is granted. The letters the value of the minimum or nominal
USA must be marked on UN pressure water capacity is an integer, the digits
receptacles approved by the United after the decimal point may be omit-
States. The manufacturer must obtain ted;
an approval number from the Associate (ix) The total mass of the frame of
Administrator. The manufacturer ap- the bundle and all permanently at-
proval number must follow the country tached parts (cylinders, manifolds, fit-
of approval mark, separated by a slash tings and valves). Bundles intended for
(for example, USA/MXXXX). Pressure the carriage of UN 1001 acetylene, dis-
receptacles approved by more than one solved must bear the tare mass as spec-
national authority may contain the ified in clause N.4.2 of ISO 10961:2010;
mark of each country of approval, sep- (x) The country of manufacture. The
arated by a comma; letters USA must be marked on cyl-
(iv) The identity mark or stamp of inders manufactured in the United
the IIA; States;
(v) The date of the initial inspection, (xi) The serial number assigned by
the year in four digits followed by the the manufacturer; and
two digit month separated by a slash, (xii) For steel pressure receptacles,
for example 2006/04; the letter H showing compatibility
(vi) The test pressure in bar, preceded of the steel, as specified in 1SO 111141.
by the letters PH and followed by (v) Marking sequence. The marking re-
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
92
ER08JA15.002</GPH>
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00102 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.74
(1) The top grouping contains manu- (i) Two complete copies of all engi-
facturing marks and must appear con- neering drawings, calculations, and
secutively in the sequence given in test data necessary to ensure that the
paragraphs (u)(2)(x) through (u)(2)(xii) design meets the relevant specifica-
of this section as applicable. tion.
(2) The middle grouping contains (ii) The manufacturers serial number
operational marks described in para- that will be assigned to each MEGC.
graphs (u)(2)(vi) through (u)(2)(ix) of (iii) A statement as to whether the
this section as applicable. When the design type has been examined by any
operational mark specified in para- approval agency previously and judged
graph (u)(2)(vii) is required, it must im- unacceptable. Affirmative statements
mediately precede the operational must be documented with the name of
mark specified in paragraph (u)(2)(vi). the approval agency, reason for non-ac-
(3) The bottom grouping contains ceptance, and the nature of modifica-
certification marks and must appear tions made to the design type.
consecutively in the sequence given in (b) Actions by the approval agency. The
paragraphs (u)(2)(i) through (u)(2)(v) of approval agency must review the appli-
this section as applicable. cation for design type approval, includ-
ing all drawings and calculations, to
[76 FR 3385, Jan. 19, 2011, as amended at 76 ensure that the design of the MEGC
FR 43532, July 20, 2011; 77 FR 60943, Oct. 5, meets all requirements of the relevant
2012; 78 FR 1096, Jan. 7, 2013; 80 FR 1166, Jan. specification and to determine whether
8, 2015; 80 FR 72929, Nov. 23, 2015]
it is complete and conforms to the re-
quirements of this section. An incom-
178.74 Approval of MEGCs.
plete application will be returned to
(a) Application for design type ap- the applicant with the reasons why the
proval. (1) Each new MEGC design type application was returned. If the appli-
must have a design approval certifi- cation is complete and all applicable
cate. An owner or manufacturer must requirements of this section are met,
apply to an approval agency that is ap- the approval agency must prepare a
proved by the Associate Administrator MEGC design approval certificate con-
in accordance with subpart E of part taining the manufacturers name and
107 of this chapter + to obtain approval address, results and conclusions of the
of a new design. When a series of examination and necessary data for
MEGCs is manufactured without identification of the design type. If the
change in the design, the certificate is Associate Administrator approves the
valid for the entire series. The design Design Type Approval Certificate ap-
approval certificate must refer to the plication, the approval agency and the
prototype test report, the materials of manufacturer must each maintain a
construction of the manifold, the copy of the approved drawings, calcula-
standards to which the pressure recep- tions, and test data for at least 20
tacles are made and an approval num- years.
ber. The compliance requirements or (c) Approval agencys responsibilities.
test methods applicable to MEGCs as The approval agency is responsible for
specified in this subpart may be varied ensuring that the MEGC conforms to
when the level of safety is determined the design type approval. The approval
to be equivalent to or exceed the re- agency must:
quirements of this subchapter and is (1) Witness all tests required for the
approved in writing by the Associate approval of the MEGC specified in this
Administrator. A design approval may section and 178.75.
serve for the approval of smaller (2) Ensure, through appropriate in-
MEGCs made of materials of the same spection, that each MEGC is fabricated
type and thickness, by the same fab- in all respects in conformance with the
rication techniques and with identical approved drawings, calculations, and
supports, equivalent closures and other test data.
appurtenances. (3) Determine and ensure that the
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
(2) Each application for design ap- MEGC is suitable for its intended use
proval must be in English and contain and that it conforms to the require-
the following information: ments of this subchapter.
93
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00103 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.74 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
(4) Apply its name, identifying mark (1) Comply with all the requirements
or identifying number, and the date the of the applicable ISO standard specified
approval was issued, to the metal iden- in 178.71;
tification marking plate attached to (2) Obtain and use an approval agen-
the MEGC upon successful completion cy to review the design, construction
of all requirements of this subpart. and certification of the MEGC;
Any approvals by the Associate Admin- (3) Provide a statement in the manu-
istrator authorizing design or con- facturers data report certifying that
struction alternatives (Alternate Ar- each MEGC manufactured complies
rangements) of the MEGC (see para- with the relevant specification and all
graph (a) of this section) must be indi- the applicable requirements of this
cated on the metal identification plate
subchapter; and
as specified in 178.75(j).
(4) Retain records for the MEGCs for
(5) Prepare an approval certificate
at least 20 years. When required by the
for each MEGC or, in the case of a se-
specification, the manufacturer must
ries of identical MEGCs manufactured
provide copies of the records to the ap-
to a single design type, for each series
of MEGCs. The approval certificate proval agency, the owner or lessee of
must include all of the following infor- the MEGC, and to a representative of
mation: DOT, upon request.
(i) The information displayed on the (e) Denial of application for approval.
metal identification plate required by If the Associate Administrator finds
178.75(j); that the MEGC will not be approved for
(ii) The results of the applicable any reason, the Associate Adminis-
framework test specified in ISO 14963 trator will notify the applicant in writ-
(IBR, see 171.7 of this subchapter); ing and provide the reason for the de-
(iii) The results of the initial inspec- nial. The manufacturer may request
tion and test specified in paragraph (h) that the Associate Administrator re-
of this section; consider the decision. The application
(iv) The results of the impact test request must
specified in 178.75(i)(4); (1) Be written in English and filed
(v) Certification documents verifying within 90 days of receipt of the deci-
that the cylinders and tubes conform sion;
to the applicable standards; and (2) State in detail any alleged errors
(vi) A statement that the approval of fact and law; and
agency certifies the MEGC in accord- (3) Enclose any additional informa-
ance with the procedures in this sec- tion needed to support the request to
tion and that the MEGC is suitable for reconsider.
its intended purpose and meets the re- (f) Appeal. (1) A manufacturer whose
quirements of this subchapter. When a reconsideration request is denied may
series of MEGCs is manufactured with- appeal to the PHMSA Administrator.
out change in the design type, the cer- The appeal must
tificate may be valid for the entire se- (i) Be in writing and filed within 90
ries of MEGCs representing a single de- days of receipt of the Associate Admin-
sign type. The approval number must
istrator s decision on reconsideration;
consist of the distinguishing sign or
mark of the country (USA for the (ii) State in detail any alleged errors
United States of America) where the of fact and law;
approval was granted and a registra- (iii) Enclose any additional informa-
tion number. tion needed to support the appeal; and
(6) Retain on file a copy of each ap- (iv) State in detail the modification
proval certificate for at least 20 years. of the final decision sought.
(d) Manufacturers responsibilities. The (2) The Administrator will grant or
manufacturer is responsible for compli- deny the relief and inform the appel-
ance with the applicable specifications lant in writing of the decision. The Ad-
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
for the design and construction of ministrators decision is the final ad-
MEGCs. The manufacturer of a MEGC ministrative action.
must:
94
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00104 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.75
95
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00105 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.75 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
gross mass. The MEGC must be de- ible with the hazardous materials in-
signed to be loaded onto a transport ve- tended to be transported, as specified
hicle or vessel and equipped with skids, in this subchapter.
96
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00106 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.75
(5) Contact between dissimilar met- proof strength and, for austenitic
als that could result in damage by gal- steels, the 1 percent proof strength.
vanic action must be prevented by ap- (11) MEGCs must be capable of being
propriate means. electrically grounded to prevent elec-
(6) The materials of the MEGC, in- trostatic discharge when intended for
cluding any devices, gaskets, and ac- flammable gases.
cessories, must have no adverse effect (12) The pressure receptacles of a
on the gases intended for transport in MEGC must be secured in a manner to
the MEGC. prevent movement that could result in
(7) MEGCs must be designed to with- damage to the structure and con-
stand, without loss of contents, at centration of harmful localized
least the internal pressure due to the stresses.
contents, and the static, dynamic and (e) Service equipment. (1) Service
thermal loads during normal condi- equipment must be arranged so that it
tions of handling and transport. The is protected from mechanical damage
design must take into account the ef- by external forces during handling and
fects of fatigue, caused by repeated ap- transportation. When the connections
plication of these loads through the ex- between the frame and the pressure re-
pected life of the MEGC. ceptacles allow relative movement be-
(8) MEGCs and their fastenings must, tween the subassemblies, the equip-
under the maximum permissible load, ment must be fastened to allow move-
be capable of withstanding the fol- ment to prevent damage to any work-
lowing separately applied static forces ing part. The manifolds, discharge fit-
(for calculation purposes, acceleration tings (pipe sockets, shut-off devices),
due to gravity (g) = 9.81 m/s2): and shut-off valves must be protected
(i) In the direction of travel: 2g from damage by external forces. Mani-
(twice the MPGM multiplied by the ac- fold piping leading to shut-off valves
celeration due to gravity); must be sufficiently flexible to protect
(ii) Horizontally at right angles to the valves and the piping from shear-
the direction of travel: 1g (the MPGM ing, or releasing the pressure recep-
multiplied by the acceleration due to tacle contents. The filling and dis-
gravity. When the direction of travel is charge devices, including flanges or
not clearly determined, the forces must threaded plugs, and any protective caps
be equal to twice the MPGM); must be capable of being secured
(iii) Vertically upwards: 1g (the against unintended opening.
MPGM multiplied by the acceleration (2) Each pressure receptacle intended
due to gravity); and for the transport of Division 2.3 gases
(iv) Vertically downwards: 2g (twice must be equipped with an individual
the MPGM (total loading including the shut-off valve. The manifold for Divi-
effect of gravity) multiplied by the ac- sion 2.3 liquefied gases must be de-
celeration due to gravity. signed so that each pressure receptacle
(9) Under each of the forces specified can be filled separately and be kept
in paragraph (d)(8) of this section, the isolated by a valve capable of being
stress at the most severely stressed closed during transit. For Division 2.1
point of the pressure receptacles must gases, the pressure receptacles must be
not exceed the values given in the ap- isolated by an individual shut-off valve
plicable design specifications (e.g., ISO into assemblies of not more than 3,000
11120). L.
(10) Under each of the forces specified (3) For MEGC filling and discharge
in paragraph (d)(8) of this section, the openings:
safety factor for the framework and (i) Two valves in series must be
fastenings must be as follows: placed in an accessible position on each
(i) For steels having a clearly defined discharge and filling pipe. One of the
yield point, a safety factor of 1.5 in re- valves may be a backflow prevention
lation to the guaranteed yield valve. (ii) The filling and discharge de-
strength; or vices may be equipped to a manifold.
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
(ii) For steels with no clearly defined (iii) For sections of piping which can
yield point, a safety factor of 1.5 in re- be closed at both ends and where a liq-
lation to the guaranteed 0.2 percent uid product can be trapped, a pressure-
97
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00107 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.75 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
relief valve must be provided to pre- devices must be of sufficient size to en-
vent excessive pressure build-up. able the required discharge to pass un-
(iv) The main isolation valves on a restricted to the pressure relief device.
MEGC must be clearly marked to indi- A shut-off valve installed between the
cate their directions of closure. All pressure receptacle and the pressure re-
shutoff valves must close by a clock- lief device is prohibited, except where
wise motion of the handwheel. duplicate devices are provided for
(v) Each shut-off valve or other maintenance or other reasons, and the
means of closure must be designed and shut-off valves serving the devices ac-
constructed to withstand a pressure tually in use are locked open, or the
equal to or greater than 1.5 times the shut-off valves are interlocked so that
test pressure of the MEGC. at least one of the duplicate devices is
(vi) All shut-off valves with screwed always operable and capable of meeting
spindles must close by a clockwise mo- the requirements of paragraph (f)(1) of
tion of the handwheel. For other shut- this section. No obstruction is per-
off valves, the open and closed posi- mitted in an opening leading to or
tions and the direction of closure must leaving from a vent or pressure-relief
be clearly shown. device that might restrict or cut-off
(vii) All shut-off valves must be de- the flow from the pressure receptacle
signed and positioned to prevent unin- to that device. The opening through all
tentional opening. piping and fittings must have at least
(viii) Ductile metals must be used in the same flow area as the inlet of the
the construction of valves or acces- pressure relief device to which it is
sories. connected. The nominal size of the dis-
(4) The piping must be designed, con- charge piping must be at least as large
structed and installed to avoid damage as that of the pressure relief device.
due to expansion and contraction, me- (3) Location of pressure-relief de-
chanical shock and vibration. Joints in vices: For liquefied gases, each pres-
tubing must be brazed or have an sure relief device must, under max-
equally strong metal union. The melt- imum filling conditions, be in commu-
ing point of brazing materials must be nication with the vapor space of the
no lower than 525 C (977 F). The rated pressure receptacles. The devices, when
pressure of the service equipment and installed, must be arranged to ensure
of the manifold must be not less than the escaping vapor is discharged up-
two-thirds of the test pressure of the wards and unrestrictedly to prevent
pressure receptacles. impingement of escaping gas or liquid
(f) Pressure relief devices. Each pres- upon the MEGC, its pressure recep-
sure receptacle must be equipped with tacles or personnel. For flammable,
one or more pressure relief devices as pyrophoric and oxidizing gases, the es-
specified in 173.301(f) of this sub- caping gas must be directed away from
chapter. When pressure relief devices the pressure receptacle in such a man-
are installed, each pressure receptacle ner that it cannot impinge upon the
or group of pressure receptacles of a other pressure receptacles. Heat resist-
MEGC that can be isolated must be ant protective devices that deflect the
equipped with one or more pressure re- flow of gas are permissible provided the
lief devices. Pressure relief devices required pressure relief device capacity
must be of a type that will resist dy- is not reduced. Arrangements must be
namic forces including liquid surge and made to prevent access to the pressure
must be designed to prevent the entry relief devices by unauthorized persons
of foreign matter, the leakage of gas and to protect the devices from damage
and the development of any dangerous caused by rollover.
excess pressure. (g) Gauging devices. When a MEGC is
(1) The size of the pressure relief de- intended to be filled by mass, it must
vices: CGA S1.1 (IBR, see 171.7 of this be equipped with one or more gauging
subchapter) must be used to determine devices. Glass level-gauges and gauges
the relief capacity of individual pres- made of other fragile material are pro-
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
98
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00108 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.75
must be designed and constructed with (i) Initial inspection and test. The pres-
a support structure to provide a secure sure receptacles and items of equip-
base during transport. MEGCs must be ment of each MEGC must be inspected
protected against damage to the pres- and tested before being put into service
sure receptacles and service equipment for the first time (initial inspection
resulting from lateral and longitudinal and test). This initial inspection and
impact and overturning. The forces test of an MEGC must include the fol-
specified in paragraph (d)(8) of this sec- lowing:
tion, and the safety factor specified in (1) A check of the design characteris-
paragraph (d)(10) of this section must tics.
be considered in this aspect of the de- (2) An external examination of the
sign. Skids, frameworks, cradles or MEGC and its fittings, taking into ac-
other similar structures are accept- count the hazardous materials to be
able. If the pressure receptacles and transported.
service equipment are so constructed
(3) A pressure test performed at the
as to withstand impact and over-
test pressures specified in
turning, additional protective support
173.304b(b)(1) and (2) of this sub-
structure is not required (see para-
graph (h)(4) of this section). chapter. The pressure test of the mani-
(2) The combined stresses caused by fold may be performed as a hydraulic
pressure receptacle mountings (e.g. test or by using another liquid or gas.
cradles, frameworks, etc.) and MEGC A leakproofness test and a test of the
lifting and tie-down attachments must satisfactory operation of all service
not cause excessive stress in any pres- equipment must also be performed be-
sure receptacle. Permanent lifting and fore the MEGC is placed into service.
tie-down attachments must be When the pressure receptacles and
equipped to all MEGCs. Any welding of their fittings have been pressure-tested
mountings or attachments onto the separately, they must be subjected to a
pressure receptacles is prohibited. leakproof test after assembly.
(3) The effects of environmental cor- (4) An MEGC that meets the defini-
rosion must be taken into account in tion of container in the CSC (see 49
the design of supports and frameworks. CFR 450.3(a)(2)) must be subjected to an
(4) When MEGCs are not protected impact test using a prototype rep-
during transport as specified in para- resenting each design type. The proto-
graph (h)(1) of this section, the pres- type MEGC must be shown to be capa-
sure receptacles and service equipment ble of absorbing the forces resulting
must be protected against damage re- from an impact not less than 4 times (4
sulting from lateral or longitudinal im- g) the MPGM of the fully loaded
pact or overturning. External fittings MEGC, at a duration typical of the me-
must be protected against release of chanical shocks experienced in rail
the pressure receptacles contents upon transport. A listing of acceptable
impact or overturning of the MEGC on methods for performing the impact test
its fittings. Particular attention must is provided in the UN Recommenda-
be paid to the protection of the mani- tions (IBR, see 171.7 of this sub-
fold. Examples of protection include: chapter).
(i) Protection against lateral impact, (j) Marking. (1) Each MEGC must be
which may consist of longitudinal bars; equipped with a corrosion resistant
(ii) Protection against overturning, metal plate permanently attached to
which may consist of reinforcement the MEGC in a conspicuous place read-
rings or bars fixed across the frame; ily accessible for inspection. The pres-
(iii) Protection against rear impact, sure receptacles must be marked ac-
which may consist of a bumper or cording to this section. Affixing the
frame; metal plate to a pressure receptacle is
(iv) Protection of the pressure recep- prohibited. At a minimum, the fol-
tacles and service equipment against lowing information must be marked on
damage from impact or overturning by
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
99
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00109 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pt. 178, Subpt. C, App. A 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
100
ER12JN06.002</GPH>
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00110 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8026 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration,Pt.DOT
178, Subpt. C, App. A
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
101
ER08AU02.013</GPH>
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00111 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pt. 178, Subpt. C, App. A 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
102
ER08AU02.014</GPH>
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00112 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration,Pt.DOT
178, Subpt. C, App. A
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
103
ER08AU02.015</GPH>
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00113 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pt. 178, Subpt. C, App. A 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
104
ER08AU02.016</GPH>
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00114 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration,Pt.DOT
178, Subpt. C, App. A
105
ER08AU02.017</GPH>
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00115 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8026 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.251178.2535 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
106
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00116 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.25513
(a) Tanks shall be designed and fab- pliance with the requirements of this
ricated with mountings to provide a se- specification.
cure base in transit. Skids or similar (b) [Reserved]
107
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00117 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.25514 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
108
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00118 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.273
(4) Ensure, through appropriate in- series of identical portable tanks man-
spection that each portable tank is fab- ufactured to a single design type, for
ricated in all respects in conformance each series of portable tanks. The ap-
with the approved drawings, calcula- proval certificate must include all the
tions, and test data. information required to be displayed on
(5) Determine and ensure that the the metal identification plate required
portable tank is suitable for its in- by 178.274(i). The approval certificate
tended use and that it conforms to the must certify that the approval agency
requirements of this subchapter. designated to approve the portable
(6) For UN portable tanks intended tank has approved the portable tank in
for non-refrigerated and refrigerated accordance with the procedures in sub-
liquefied gases and Division 6.1 liquids part E of part 107 of this subchapter
which meet the inhalation toxicity cri- and that the portable tank is suitable
teria (Zone A or B) as defined in for its intended purpose and meets the
173.132 of this subchapter, or that are requirements of this subchapter. When
designated as toxic by inhalation mate- a series of portable tanks is manufac-
rials in the 172.101 Table of this sub- tured without change in the design
chapter, the approval agency must en- type, the certificate may be valid for
sure that: the entire series of portable tanks rep-
(i) The portable tank has been de- resenting a single design type. For UN
signed, constructed, certified, and portable tanks, the certificate must
stamped in accordance with the re- refer to the prototype test report, the
quirements in Division 1 of Section hazardous material or group of haz-
VIII of the ASME Code (IBR, see 171.7 ardous materials allowed to be trans-
of this subchapter). Other design codes ported, the materials of construction of
may be used if approved by the Asso- the shell and lining (when applicable)
ciate Administrator (see 178.274(b)(1)); and an approval number. The approval
(ii) All applicable provisions of the number must consist of the distin-
design and construction have been met guishing sign or mark of the country
to the satisfaction of the designated (USA for the United States of Amer-
approval agency in accordance with the ica) where the approval was granted
rules established in the ASME Code and a registration number.
and that the portable tank meets the (iii) Retain a copy of each approval
requirements of the ASME Code and all certificate.
the applicable requirements specified (8) For UN portable tanks, the ap-
in this subchapter; proval certificate must also include the
(iii) The inspector has carried out all following:
the inspections specified by the rules (i) The results of the applicable
established in the ASME Code; and framework and rail impact test speci-
(iv) The portable tank is marked fied in part 180, subpart G, of this sub-
with a U stamp code symbol under the chapter; and
authority of the authorized inde- (ii) The results of the initial inspec-
pendent inspector. tion and test in 178.274(j).
(7) Upon successful completion of all (9) The approval agency shall be inde-
requirements of this subpart, the ap- pendent from the manufacturer. The
proval agency must: approval agency and the authorized in-
(i) Apply its name, identifying mark spector may be the same entity.
or identifying number, and the date (c) Manufacturers responsibilities. The
upon which the approval was issued, to manufacturer is responsible for compli-
the metal identification marking plate ance with the applicable specifications
attached to the portable tank. Any ap- for the design and construction of port-
provals for UN portable tanks author- able tanks. In addition to responsi-
izing design or construction alter- bility for compliance, manufacturers
natives (Alternate Arrangements) ap- are responsible for ensuring that the
proved by the Associate Administrator contracted approval agency and au-
(see 178.274(a)(2)) must be indicated on thorized inspector, if applicable, are
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
109
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00119 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.273 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
(1) Comply with all the applicable re- (2) A statement as to whether the in-
quirements of the ASME Code and of tended modification has been examined
this subpart including, but not limited and determined to be unacceptable by
to, ensuring that the quality control, any approval agency. The written
design calculations and required tests statement must include the name of
are performed and that all aspects of the approving agency, the reason for
the portable tank meet the applicable nonacceptance, and the nature of
requirements. changes made to the modification since
(2) Obtain and use a designated ap- its original rejection.
proval agency, if applicable, and obtain (3) The approval agency shall review
and use a DOT-designated approval the request for modification, and if it
agency to approve the design, construc- is determined that the proposed modi-
tion and certification of the portable fication is in full compliance with the
tank. relevant DOT specification, including a
(3) Provide a statement in the manu- UN portable tank, the request shall be
facturers data report certifying that approved and the approval agency shall
each portable tank that is manufac- perform the following activities:
tured complies with the relevant speci- (i) Return one set of the approved re-
fication and all the applicable require- vised drawings, calculations, and test
ments of this subchapter. data to the applicant. The second and
(4) Maintain records of the qualifica- third sets of the approved revised draw-
tion of portable tanks for at least 5 ings, calculations, and data shall be re-
years and provide copies to the ap- tained by the approval agency as re-
proval agency, the owner or lessee of quired in 107.404(a)(3) of this sub-
the tank. Upon request, provide these chapter.
records to a representative of DOT.
(ii) Ensure through appropriate in-
(d) Denial of application for approval.
spection that all modifications con-
If an approval agency finds that a port-
form to the revised drawings, calcula-
able tank cannot be approved for any
tions, and test data.
reason, it shall notify the applicant in
writing and shall provide the applicant (iii) Determine the extent to which
with the reasons for which the ap- retesting of the modified tank is nec-
proval is denied. A copy of the notifica- essary based on the nature of the pro-
tion letter shall be provided to the As- posed modification, and ensure that all
sociate Administrator. An applicant required retests are satisfactorily per-
aggrieved by a decision of an approval formed.
agency may appeal the decision in (iv) If modification to an approved
writing, within 90 days of receipt, to tank alters any information on the ap-
the Associate Administrator. proval certificate, issue a new approval
(e) Modifications to approved portable certificate for the modified tank and
tanks. (1) Prior to modification of any ensure that any necessary changes are
UN portable tank which may affect made to the metal identification plate.
conformance and the safe use of the A copy of each newly issued approval
portable tank, which may involve a certificate shall be retained by the ap-
change to the design type or which proval agency and by the owner of each
may affect its ability to retain haz- portable tank.
ardous material in transportation, the (4) If the approval agency determines
person desiring to make such modifica- that the proposed modification is not
tion shall inform the approval agency in compliance with the relevant DOT
that issued the initial approval of the specification, the approval agency
portable tank (or if unavailable, an- shall deny the request in accordance
other approval agency) of the nature of with paragraph (d) of this section.
the modification and request approval (f) Termination of Approval Certificate.
of the modification. The person desir- (1) The Associate Administrator may
ing to modify the tank must supply the terminate an approval issued under
approval agency with three sets of all this section if he determines that
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
revised drawings, calculations, and test (i) Information upon which the ap-
data relative to the intended modifica- proval was based is fraudulent or sub-
tion. stantially erroneous; or
110
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00120 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.274
(2) In recognition of scientific and Leakage test means a test using gas to
technological advances, the technical subject the shell and its service equip-
requirements applicable to UN portable ment to an internal pressure.
111
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00121 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.274 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
Maximum allowable working pressure (b) General design and construction re-
(MAWP) is defined according to the quirements. (1) The design temperature
hazardous materials intended to be range for the shell must be 40 C to 50
transported in the portable tank. See C (40 F to 122 F) for hazardous ma-
178.275, 178.276 and 178.277, as applica- terials transported under normal con-
ble. ditions of transportation, except for
Maximum permissible gross mass portable tanks used for refrigerated
(MPGM) means the sum of the tare liquefied gases where the minimum de-
mass of the portable tank and the sign temperature must not be higher
heaviest hazardous material authorized than the lowest (coldest) temperature
for transportation. (for example, service temperature) of
Mild steel means a steel with a guar- the contents during filling, discharge
anteed minimum tensile strength of 360 or transportation. For hazardous mate-
N/mm2 to 440 N/mm2 and a guaranteed rials handled under elevated tempera-
minimum elongation at fracture as ture conditions, the design tempera-
specified in paragraph (c)(10) of this ture must not be less than the max-
section. imum temperature of the hazardous
Offshore portable tank means a port- material during filling, discharge or
able tank specially designed for re- transportation. More severe design
peated use in the transportation of haz- temperatures must be considered for
ardous materials to, from and between portable tanks subjected to severe cli-
offshore facilities. An offshore portable matic conditions (for example, portable
tank is designed and constructed in ac- tanks transported in arctic regions).
cordance with the Guidelines for the Shells must be designed and con-
Approval of Containers Handled in structed in accordance with the re-
Open Seas specified in the IMDG Code quirements in Section VIII of the
(IBR, see 171.7 of this subchapter). ASME Code (IBR, see 171.7 of this sub-
Reference steel means a steel with a chapter), except as limited or modified
tensile strength of 370 N/mm2 and an in this subchapter. For portable tanks
elongation at fracture of 27%. used for liquid or solid hazardous mate-
Service equipment means measuring rials, a design code other than the
instruments and filling, discharge, ASME Code may be used if approved by
venting, safety, heating, cooling and the Associate Administrator. Portable
insulating devices. tanks must have an ASME certifi-
Shell means the part of the portable cation and U stamp when used for Haz-
tank which retains the hazardous ma- ard Zone A or B toxic by inhalation liq-
terials intended for transportation, in- uids, or when used for non-refrigerated
cluding openings and closures, but does or refrigerated liquefied compressed
not include service equipment or exter- gases. Shells must be made of metallic
nal structural equipment. materials suitable for forming. Non-
Structural equipment means the rein- metallic materials may be used for the
forcing, fastening, protective and stabi- attachments and supports between the
lizing members external to the shell. shell and jacket, provided their mate-
Test pressure means the maximum rial properties at the minimum and
gauge pressure at the top of the shell maximum design temperatures are
during the hydraulic pressure test proven to be sufficient. For welded
equal to not less than 1.5 times the de- shells, only a material whose
sign pressure for liquids and 1.3 for liq- weldability has been fully dem-
uefied compressed gases and refrig- onstrated may be used. Welds must be
erated liquefied gases. In some in- of high quality and conform to a level
stances a pneumatic test is authorized of integrity at least equivalent to the
as an alternative to the hydraulic test. welding requirements specified in Sec-
The minimum test pressures for port- tion VIII of the ASME Code for the
able tanks intended for specific liquid welding of pressure vessels. When the
and solid hazardous materials are spec- manufacturing process or the materials
ified in the applicable portable tank T make it necessary, the shells must be
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
112
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00122 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.274
must be compatible with the hazardous (ii) For metals with no clearly de-
materials intended to be transported, fined yield point, a design margin of 1.5
homogeneous, non-porous, free from in relation to the guaranteed 0.2%
113
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00123 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.274 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
shell must not exceed 0.75 Re or 0.50 and manhole covers) not more than 1.80
Rm, whichever is lower, at the test m in diameter may not be less than 5
pressure, where: mm thick in the reference steel or of
114
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00124 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.274
equivalent thickness in the metal to be d1 = 1.8m, unless the formula is used to de-
used. Shells more than 1.80 m in diame- termine the equivalent minimum thick-
ter may not be less than 6 mm (0.2 ness for a portable tank shell that is re-
quired to have a minimum thickness of
inches) thick in the reference steel or 8mm or 10mm according to the applica-
of equivalent thickness in the metal to ble T code indicated in the 172.101 Table
be used. For portable tanks used only of this subchapter. When reference steel
for the transportation of powdered or thicknesses of 8mm or 10mm are speci-
granular solid hazardous materials of fied, d1 is equal to the actual diameter of
Packing Group II or III, the minimum the shell but not less than 1.8m;
thickness requirement may be reduced Rm1 = guaranteed minimum tensile strength
to 5 mm in the reference steel or of (in N/mm 2) of the metal to be used;
A1 = guaranteed minimum elongation at
equivalent thickness in the metal to be fracture (in %) of the metal to be used
used regardless of the shell diameter. according to recognized material stand-
For vacuum-insulated tanks, the ag- ards.
gregate thickness of the jacket and the
shell must correspond to the minimum (6) The wall and all parts of the shell
thickness prescribed in this paragraph, may not have a thickness less than
with the thickness of the shell itself that prescribed in paragraphs (d)(2),
not less than the minimum thickness (d)(3) and (d)(4) of this section. This
prescribed in paragraph (d)(3) of this thickness must be exclusive of any cor-
section. rosion allowance.
(3) When additional protection (7) There must be no sudden change
against shell damage is provided in the of plate thickness at the attachment of
case of portable tanks used for liquid the heads to the cylindrical portion of
and solid hazardous materials requir- the shell.
ing test pressures less than 2.65 bar (e) Service equipment. (1) Service
(265.0 kPa), subject to certain limita- equipment must be arranged so that it
tions specified in the UN Recommenda- is protected against the risk of me-
tions (IBR, see 171.7 of this sub- chanical damage by external forces
chapter), the Associate Administrator during handling and transportation.
may approve a reduced minimum shell When the connections between the
thickness. frame and the shell allow relative
(4) The cylindrical portions, heads movement between the sub-assemblies,
and manhole covers of all shells must the equipment must be fastened to
not be less than 3 mm (0.1 inch) thick allow such movement without risk of
regardless of the material of construc- damage to any working part. The ex-
ternal discharge fittings (pipe sockets,
tion, except for portable tanks used for
shut-off devices) and the internal stop-
liquefied compressed gases where the
valve and its seating must be protected
cylindrical portions, ends (heads) and
against mechanical damage by exter-
manhole covers of all shells must not
nal forces (for example, by using shear
be less than 4 mm (0.2 inch) thick re-
sections). Each internal self-closing
gardless of the material of construc-
stop-valve must be protected by a
tion.
shear section or sacrificial device lo-
(5) When steel is used, that has char-
cated outboard of the valve. The shear
acteristics other than that of reference
section or sacrificial device must break
steel, the equivalent thickness of the
at no more than 70% of the load that
shell and heads must be determined ac-
would cause failure of the internal self-
cording to the following formula: closing stop valve. The filling and dis-
charge devices (including flanges or
21.4e 0 d1
e1 = threaded plugs) and any protective
1.8m 3 Rm1 A1 caps must be capable of being secured
against unintended opening.
Where:
(2) Each filling or discharge opening
e1 = required equivalent thickness (in mm) of of a portable tank must be clearly
the metal to be used;
e0 = minimum thickness (in mm) of the ref-
marked to indicate its function.
(3) Each stop-valve or other means of
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
115
EN21JN01.005</MATH>
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00125 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.274 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
into account the temperatures ex- and ISO 41267 (IBR, see 171.7 of this
pected during transport. All stop- subchapter); and
valves with screwed spindles must (vi) The cross sectional flow areas of
close by a clockwise motion of the the spring loaded pressure relief de-
handwheel. For other stop-valves, the vices, frangible discs, and fusible ele-
position (open and closed) and direc- ments in mm2; and
tion of closure must be clearly indi- (vii) When practicable, the device
cated. All stop-valves must be designed must show the manufacturers name
to prevent unintentional opening. and product number.
(4) Piping must be designed, con- (2) Connections to pressure relief de-
structed and installed to avoid the risk vices. Connections to pressure relief de-
of damage due to thermal expansion vices must be of sufficient size to en-
and contraction, mechanical shock and able the required discharge to pass un-
vibration. All piping must be of a suit- restricted to the safety device. No stop-
able metallic material. Welded pipe valve may be installed between the
joints must be used wherever possible. shell and the pressure relief devices ex-
(5) Joints in copper tubing must be cept where duplicate devices are pro-
brazed or have an equally strong metal vided for maintenance or other reasons
union. The melting point of brazing and the stop-valves serving the devices
materials must be no lower than 525 C actually in use are locked open or the
(977 F). The joints must not decrease stop-valves are interlocked so that at
the strength of the tubing, such as may least one of the devices is always in
happen when cutting threads. Brazed use. There must be no obstruction in
joints are not authorized for portable an opening leading to a vent or pres-
tanks intended for refrigerated lique- sure relief device which might restrict
fied gases. or cut-off the flow from the shell to
(6) The burst pressure of all piping that device. Vents or pipes from the
and pipe fittings must be greater than pressure relief device outlets, when
the highest of four times the MAWP of used, must deliver the relieved vapor or
the shell or four times the pressure to liquid to the atmosphere in conditions
which it may be subjected in service by of minimum back-pressure on the re-
the action of a pump or other device lieving devices.
(except pressure relief devices). (3) Location of pressure relief devices.
(7) Ductile metals must be used in (i) Each pressure relief device inlet
the construction of valves and acces- must be situated on top of the shell in
sories. a position as near the longitudinal and
(f) Pressure relief devices(1) Marking transverse center of the shell as rea-
of pressure relief devices. Every pressure sonably practicable. All pressure relief
relief device must be clearly and per- device inlets must, under maximum
manently marked with the following: filling conditions, be situated in the
(i) the pressure (in bar or kPa) or vapor space of the shell and the devices
temperature for fusible elements (in must be so arranged as to ensure that
C) at which it is set to discharge; any escaping vapor is not restricted in
(ii) the allowable tolerance at the any manner. For flammable hazardous
discharge pressure for reclosing de- materials, the escaping vapor must be
vices; directed away from the shell in such a
(iii) the reference temperature cor- manner that it cannot impinge upon
responding to the rated pressure for the shell. For refrigerated liquefied
frangible discs; gases, the escaping vapor must be di-
(iv) the allowable temperature toler- rected away from the tank and in such
ance for fusible elements; a manner that it cannot impinge upon
(v) The rated flow capacity of the the tank. Protective devices which de-
spring loaded pressure relief devices, flect the flow of vapor are permissible
frangible disc or fusible elements in provided the required relief-device ca-
standard cubic meters of air per second pacity is not reduced.
(m3/s). For spring loaded pressure relief (ii) Provisions must be implemented
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
devices, the rated flow capacity must to prevent unauthorized persons from
be determined according to ISO 41261 access to the pressure relief devices
(including Technical Corrigendum 1) and to protect the devices from damage
116
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00126 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.274
caused by the portable tank over- (ii) The distance between forklift
turning. pockets (measured from the center of
(g) Gauging devices. Unless a portable each pocket) is at least half of the
tank is intended to be filled by weight, maximum length of the portable tank.
it must be equipped with one or more (5) During transport, portable tanks
gauging devices. Glass level-gauges and must be adequately protected against
gauges made of other fragile material, damage to the shell, and service equip-
which are in direct communication ment resulting from lateral and longi-
with the contents of the tank are pro- tudinal impact and overturning, or the
hibited. A connection for a vacuum shell and service equipment must be
gauge must be provided in the jacket of constructed to withstand the forces re-
a vacuum-insulated portable tank. sulting from impact or overturning.
(h) Portable tank supports, frameworks, External fittings must be protected so
lifting and tie-down attachments. (1) as to preclude the release of the shell
Portable tanks must be designed and contents upon impact or overturning of
the portable tank on its fittings. Ex-
constructed with a support structure to
amples of protection include:
provide a secure base during transport.
(i) Protection against lateral impact
The forces and safety factors specified
which may consist of longitudinal bars
in paragraphs (c)(1) and (c)(2) of this
protecting the shell on both sides at
section, respectively, must be taken
the level of the median line;
into account in this aspect of the de-
(ii) Protection of the portable tank
sign. Skids, frameworks, cradles or against overturning which may consist
other similar structures are accept- of reinforcement rings or bars fixed
able. across the frame;
(2) The combined stresses caused by (iii) Protection against rear impact
portable tank mountings (for example, which may consist of a bumper or
cradles, framework, etc.) and portable frame;
tank lifting and tie-down attachments (iv) Protection of the shell against
must not cause stress that would dam- damage from impact or overturning by
age the shell in a manner that would use of an ISO frame in accordance with
compromise its lading retention capa- ISO 14963 (IBR, see 171.7 of this sub-
bility. Permanent lifting and tie-down chapter); and
attachments must be fitted to all port- (v) Protection of the portable tank
able tanks. Preferably they should be from impact or damage that may re-
fitted to the portable tank supports sult from overturning by an insulation
but may be secured to reinforcing jacket.
plates located on the shell at the (i) Marking. (1) Every portable tank
points of support. Each portable tank must be fitted with a corrosion resist-
must be designed so that the center of ant metal plate permanently attached
gravity of the filled tank is approxi- to the portable tank in a conspicuous
mately centered within the points of place and readily accessible for inspec-
attachment for lifting devices. tion. When the plate cannot be perma-
(3) In the design of supports and nently attached to the shell, the shell
frameworks, the effects of environ- must be marked with at least the infor-
mental corrosion must be taken into mation required by Section VIII of the
account. ASME Code. At a minimum, the fol-
(4) Forklift pockets must be capable lowing information must be marked on
of being closed off. The means of clos- the plate by stamping or by any other
ing forklift pockets must be a perma- equivalent method:
nent part of the framework or perma- Country of manufacture
nently attached to the framework. Sin- UN
gle compartment portable tanks with a Approval Country
length less than 3.65 m (12 ft.) need not Approval Number
have forklift pockets that are capable Alternative Arrangements (see 178.274(a)(2))
AA
of being closed off provided that:
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
117
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00127 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.274 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
Owners registration number OFFSHORE PORTABLE TANK must
Year of manufacture be marked on the identification plate.
Pressure vessel code to which the shell is de-
signed
(j) Initial inspection and test. The ini-
Test pressurellllbar gauge. tial inspection and test of a portable
MAWPllllbar gauge. tank must include the following:
External design pressure (not required for (1) A check of the design characteris-
portable tanks used for refrigerated lique- tics.
fied gases)llllbar gauge. (2) An internal and external examina-
Design temperature rangellll C
tollll C. (For portable tanks used for
tion of the portable tank and its fit-
refrigerated liquefied gases, the minimum tings, taking into account the haz-
design temperature must be marked.) ardous materials to be transported. For
Water capacity at 20 C/llllliters. UN portable tanks used for refrigerated
Water capacity of each compartment at 20 liquefied gases, a pressure test using an
Cllllliters. inert gas may be conducted instead of
Initial pressure test date and witness identi- a hydrostatic test. An internal inspec-
fication.
MAWP for heating/cooling systemllllbar tion is not required for a portable tank
gauge. used for the dedicated transportation
Shell material(s) and material standard ref- of refrigerated liquefied gases that are
erence(s). not filled with an inspection opening.
Equivalent thickness in reference (3) A pressure test as specified in
steelllllmm. paragraph (i) of this section.
Lining material (when applicable).
Date and type of most recent periodic test(s). (4) A leakage test.
MonthllllYearllll Test (5) A test of the satisfactory oper-
pressurellllbar gauge. ation of all service equipment includ-
Stamp of approval agency that performed or ing pressure relief devices must also be
witnessed the most recent test. performed. When the shell and its fit-
For portable tanks used for refrigerated tings have been pressure-tested sepa-
liquefied gases: rately, they must be subjected to a
Either thermally insulated or vacuum in- leakage test after reassembly. All
sulatedllll. welds, subject to full stress level in the
Effectiveness of the insulation system (heat
influx)llllWatts (W).
shell, must be inspected during the ini-
Reference holding timelllldays or hours tial test by radiographic, ultrasonic, or
and initial pressurellllbar/kPa gauge another suitable non-destructive test
and degree of fillingllllin kg for each method. This does not apply to the
refrigerated liquefied gas permitted for jacket.
transportation. (6) Effective January 1, 2008, each
(2) The following information must new UN portable tank design type
be marked either on the portable tank meeting the definition of container
itself or on a metal plate firmly se- in the Convention for Safe Containers
cured to the portable tank: (CSC) (see 49 CFR 450.3(a)(2)) must be
subjected to the dynamic longitudinal
Name of the operator.
impact test prescribed in Part IV, Sec-
Name of hazardous materials being trans-
ported and maximum mean bulk tempera- tion 40 of the UN Manual of Tests and
ture (except for refrigerated liquefied Criteria (see IBR, 171.7 of this sub-
gases, the name and temperature are only chapter). A UN portable tank design
required when the maximum mean bulk type impact-tested prior to January 1,
temperature is higher than 50 C). 2008, in accordance with the require-
Maximum permissible gross mass ments of this section in effect on Octo-
(MPGM)llllkg. ber 1, 2005, need not be retested. UN
Unladen (tare) massllllkg.
portable tanks used for the dedicated
NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (i)(2): For the identi- transportation of Helium, refrigerated
fication of the hazardous materials being liquid, UN1963, and Hydrogen, refrig-
transported refer to part 172 of this sub- erated liquid, UN1966, that are
chapter.
marked NOT FOR RAIL TRANS-
(3) If a portable tank is designed and PORT in letters of a minimum height
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
approved for open seas operations, such of 10 cm (4 inches) on at least two sides
as offshore oil exploration, in accord- of the portable tank are excepted from
ance with the IMDG Code, the words the dynamic longitudinal impact test.
118
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00128 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.275
(i) The maximum effective gauge (4) Piping must be designed, con-
pressure allowed in the shell during structed and installed to avoid the risk
filling or discharge; or of damage due to thermal expansion
119
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00129 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.275 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
and contraction, mechanical shock and (D) Except for portable tanks having
vibration. All piping must be of a suit- a capacity less than 1,000 liters (264.2
able metallic material. Welded pipe gallons), it must be possible to close
joints must be used wherever possible. the valve from an accessible position
(d) Bottom openings. (1) Certain haz- on the portable tank that is remote
ardous materials may not be trans- from the valve itself within 30 seconds
ported in portable tanks with bottom of actuation; and
openings. When the applicable T code (E) The valve must continue to be ef-
or portable tank special provision, as fective in the event of damage to the
referenced for materials in the 172.101 external device for controlling the op-
Table of this subchapter, specifies that eration of the valve;
bottom openings are prohibited, there (ii) An external stop-valve fitted as
must be no openings below the liquid close to the shell as reasonably prac-
level of the shell when it is filled to its ticable;
maximum permissible filling limit. (iii) A liquid tight closure at the end
When an existing opening is closed, it of the discharge pipe, which may be a
must be accomplished by internally bolted blank flange or a screw cap; and
and externally welding one plate to the (iv) For UN portable tanks, with bot-
shell. tom outlets, used for the transpor-
(2) Bottom discharge outlets for port- tation of liquid hazardous materials
able tanks carrying certain solid, crys- that are Class 3, PG I or II, or PG III
tallizable or highly viscous hazardous with a flash point of less than 100 F (38
materials must be equipped with at C); Division 5.1, PG I or II; or Division
least two serially fitted and mutually 6.1, PG I or II, the remote means of clo-
independent shut-off devices. Use of sure must be capable of thermal acti-
only two shut-off devices is only au- vation. The thermal means of activa-
thorized when this paragraph is ref- tion must activate at a temperature of
erenced in the applicable T Code indi- not more than 250 F (121 C).
cated for each hazardous material in (e) Pressure relief devices. All portable
the 172.101 Table of this subchapter. tanks must be fitted with at least one
The design of the equipment must be to pressure relief device. All relief devices
the satisfaction of the approval agency must be designed, constructed and
and must include: marked in accordance with the require-
(i) An external stop-valve fitted as ments of this subchapter.
close to the shell as reasonably prac- (f) Vacuum-relief devices. (1) A shell
ticable; and which is to be equipped with a vacuum-
(ii) A liquid tight closure at the end relief device must be designed to with-
of the discharge pipe, which may be a stand, without permanent deformation,
bolted blank flange or a screw cap. an external pressure of not less than
(3) Except as provided in paragraph 0.21 bar (21.0 kPa). The vacuum-relief
(d)(2) of this section, every bottom dis- device must be set to relieve at a vacu-
charge outlet must be equipped with um setting not greater than 0.21 bar
three serially fitted and mutually inde- (21.0 kPa) unless the shell is designed
pendent shut-off devices. The design of for a higher external over pressure, in
the equipment must include: which case the vacuum-relief pressure
(i) A self-closing internal stop-valve, of the device to be fitted must not be
which is a stop-valve within the shell greater than the tank design vacuum
or within a welded flange or its com- pressure. A shell that is not fitted with
panion flange, such that: a vacuum-relief device must be de-
(A) The control devices for the oper- signed to withstand, without perma-
ation of the valve are designed to pre- nent deformation, an external pressure
vent any unintended opening through of not less than 0.4 bar (40.0 kPa).
impact or other inadvertent act; (2) Vacuum-relief devices used on
(B) The valve is operable from above portable tanks intended for the trans-
or below; portation of hazardous materials meet-
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
(C) If possible, the setting of the ing the criteria of Class 3, including
valve (open or closed) must be capable elevated temperature hazardous mate-
of being verified from the ground; rials transported at or above their
120
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00130 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.275
flash point, must prevent the imme- pressure 10% above the start-to-dis-
diate passage of flame into the shell or charge pressure of the reclosable pres-
the portable tank must have a shell ca- sure relief device.
pable of withstanding, without leak- (4) Every portable tank with a capac-
age, an internal explosion resulting ity less than 1,900 liters (501.9 gallons)
from the passage of flame into the must be fitted with a pressure relief de-
shell. vice which, except as provided in para-
(g) Pressure relief devices. (1) Each graph (g)(3) of this section, may be a
portable tank with a capacity not less frangible disc when this disc is set to
than 1,900 liters (501.9 gallons) and rupture at a nominal pressure equal to
every independent compartment of a the test pressure at any temperature
portable tank with a similar capacity, within the design temperature range.
must be provided with one or more
(5) When the shell is fitted for pres-
pressure relief devices of the reclosing
sure discharge, a suitable pressure re-
type. Such portable tanks may, in ad-
dition, have a frangible disc or fusible lief device must provide the inlet line
element in parallel with the reclosing to the portable tank and set to operate
devices, except when the applicable T at a pressure not higher than the
code assigned to a hazardous material MAWP of the shell, and a stop-valve
requires that the frangible disc precede must be fitted as close to the shell as
the pressure relief device, according to practicable to minimize the potential
paragraph (g)(3) of this section, or for damage.
when no bottom openings are allowed. (6) Setting of pressure relief devices. (i)
The pressure relief devices must have Pressure relief devices must operate
sufficient capacity to prevent rupture only in conditions of excessive rise in
of the shell due to over pressurization temperature. The shell must not be
or vacuum resulting from filling, dis- subject to undue fluctuations of pres-
charging, heating of the contents or sure during normal conditions of trans-
fire. portation.
(2) Pressure relief devices must be de- (ii) The required pressure relief de-
signed to prevent the entry of foreign vice must be set to start to discharge
matter, the leakage of liquid and the at a nominal pressure of five-sixths of
development of any dangerous excess the test pressure for shells having a
pressure. test pressure of not more than 4.5 bar
(3) When required for certain haz- (450 kPa) and 110% of two-thirds of the
ardous materials by the applicable T test pressure for shells having a test
code or portable tank special provision pressure of more than 4.5 bar (450 kPa).
specified for a hazardous material in A self-closing relief device must close
the 172.101 Table of this subchapter,
at a pressure not more than 10% below
portable tanks must have a pressure
the pressure at which the discharge
relief device consistent with the re-
starts. The device must remain closed
quirements of this subchapter. Except
for a portable tank in dedicated service at all lower pressures. This require-
that is fitted with an approved relief ment does not prevent the use of vacu-
device constructed of materials com- um-relief or combination pressure re-
patible with the hazardous material, lief and vacuum-relief devices.
the relief device system must include a (h) Fusible elements. Fusible elements
frangible disc preceding (such as, be- must operate at a temperature between
tween the lading and the reclosing 110 C (230 F) and 149 C (300.2 F), pro-
pressure relief device) a reclosing pres- vided that the pressure in the shell at
sure relief device. A pressure gauge or the fusing temperature will not exceed
suitable tell-tale indicator for the de- the test pressure. They must be placed
tection of disc rupture, pin-holing or at the top of the shell with their inlets
leakage must be provided in the space in the vapor space and in no case may
between the frangible disc and the they be shielded from external heat.
pressure relief device to allow the port- Fusible elements must not be utilized
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
able tank operator to check to deter- on portable tanks with a test pressure
mine if the disc is leak free. The fran- which exceeds 2.65 bar (265.0 kPa); how-
gible disc must rupture at a nominal ever, fusible elements are authorized
121
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00131 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.275 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
1.06 0.620
Where: 1.08 0.624
1.10 0.628
Q = minimum required rate of discharge in 1.12 0.633
cubic meters of air per second (m3/s) at 1.14 0.637
conditions: 1 bar and 0 C (273 K); 1.16 0.641
1.18 0.645
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
1.20 0.649
shells: U(649t)/13.6 but in no case is less 1.22 0.652
than 0.25 1.24 0.656
Where: 1.26 0.660
122
ER01OC08.000</MATH>
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00132 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.276
123
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00133 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.276 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
as defined in this paragraph under capacity greater than 450 liters (118.9
MAWP; and gallons). Shells must be designed, con-
(B) A head pressure determined on structed, certified and stamped in ac-
the basis of the dynamic forces speci- cordance with the ASME Code, Section
fied in paragraph (h) of this section, VIII.
but not less than 0.35 bar (35 kPa). (2) Portable tanks must be postweld
(2) Design reference temperature means heat-treated and radiographed as pre-
the temperature at which the vapor scribed in Section VIII of the ASME
pressure of the contents is determined Code, except that each portable tank
for the purpose of calculating the constructed in accordance with part
MAWP. The value for each portable UHT of the ASME Code must be
tank type is as follows: postweld heat-treated. Where postweld
(i) Shell with a diameter of 1.5 meters heat treatment is required, the port-
(4.9 ft.) or less: 65 C (149 F); or able tank must be treated as a unit
(ii) Shell with a diameter of more after completion of all the welds in
than 1.5 meters (4.9 ft.): and/or to the shell and heads. The
(A) Without insulation or sun shield: method must be as prescribed in the
60 C (140 F); ASME Code. Welded attachments to
(B) With sun shield: 55 C (131 F); and pads may be made after postweld heat
(C) With insulation: 50 C (122 F). treatment is made. A portable tank
(3) Filling density means the average used for anhydrous ammonia must be
mass of liquefied compressed gas per
postweld heat-treated. The postweld
liter of shell capacity (kg/l).
heat treatment must be as prescribed
(4) Maximum allowable working pres-
in the ASME Code, but in no event at
sure (MAWP) means a pressure that
less than 1050 F tank metal tempera-
must be not less than the highest of
ture. Additionally, portable tanks con-
the following pressures measured at
structed in accordance with part UHT
the top of the shell while in operating
of the ASME Code must conform to the
position, but in no case less than 7 bar
following requirements:
(700 kPa):
(i) The maximum effective gauge (i) Welding procedure and welder per-
pressure allowed in the shell during formance tests must be made annually
filling or discharge; or in accordance with Section IX of the
(ii) The maximum effective gauge ASME Code. In addition to the essen-
pressure to which the shell is designed, tial variables named therein, the fol-
which must be: lowing must be considered to be essen-
(A) Not less than the pressure speci- tial variables: number of passes, thick-
fied for each liquefied compressed gas ness of plate, heat input per pass, and
listed in the UN Portable Tank Table manufacturers identification of rod
for Liquefied Compressed Gases in and flux. The number of passes, thick-
173.313; and ness of plate and heat input per pass
(B) Not less than the sum of: may not vary more than 25 percent
(1) The absolute vapor pressure (in from the qualified procedure. Records
bar) of the liquefied compressed gas at of the qualification must be retained
the design reference temperature for at least 5 years by the portable
minus 1 bar; and tank manufacturer or his designated
(2) The partial pressure (in bar) of air agent and, upon request, made avail-
or other gases in the ullage space able to a representative of the Depart-
which is determined by the design ref- ment of Transportation or the owner of
erence temperature and the liquid the tank.
phase expansion due to the increase of (ii) Impact tests must be made on a
the mean bulk temperature of trtf (tf lot basis. A lot is defined as 100 tons or
= filling temperature, usually 15 C, tr = less of the same heat and having a
50 C maximum mean bulk tempera- thickness variation no greater than
ture). plus or minus 25 percent. The minimum
(b) General design and construction re- impact required for full-sized speci-
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
124
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00134 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.276
tains its effectiveness. The excess flow ards of The Chlorine Institute, Inc.
valves must be selected and fitted so as (IBR, see 171.7 of this subchapter) as
to close automatically when the rated follows:
125
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00135 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.276 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
(i) A valve conforming to Drawing than the MAWP and be fully open at a
1017, dated July 1993, must be installed pressure equal to 110% of the MAWP.
under each liquid angle valve. These devices must, after discharge,
(ii) A valve conforming to Drawing close at a pressure not less than 10%
1066, dated July 1993, must be installed below the pressure at which discharge
under each gas angle valve. For port- starts and must remain closed at all
able tanks used to transport non-re- lower pressures. The pressure relief de-
frigerated liquefied gases. vices must be of a type that will resist
(8) External fittings must be grouped dynamic forces including liquid surge.
together as close as reasonably prac- A frangible disc may only be used in se-
ticable. The following openings may be ries with a reclosing pressure relief de-
installed at locations other than on the vice.
top or end of the tank: (2) Pressure relief devices must be de-
(i) The openings for liquid level gaug- signed to prevent the entry of foreign
ing devices, pressure gauges, or for matter, the leakage of gas and the de-
safety devices, may be installed sepa- velopment of any dangerous excess
rately at the other location or in the pressure.
side of the shell; (3) A portable tank intended for the
(ii) One plugged opening of 2-inch Na- transportation of certain liquefied
tional Pipe Thread or less provided for compressed gases identified in the UN
maintenance purposes may be located Portable Tank Table for Liquefied
elsewhere; Compressed Gases in 173.313 of this
(iii) An opening of 3-inch National subchapter must have a pressure relief
Pipe Size or less may be provided at device which conforms to the require-
another location, when necessary, to ments of this subchapter. Unless a
facilitate installation of condensing portable tank, in dedicated service, is
coils. fitted with a relief device constructed
(9) Filling and discharge connections of materials compatible with the haz-
are not required to be grouped and may ardous material, the relief device must
be installed below the normal liquid be comprised of a frangible disc pre-
level of the tank if: ceded by a reclosing device. The space
(i) The portable tank is permanently between the frangible disc and the de-
mounted in a full framework for con- vice must be provided with a pressure
tainerized transport; gauge or a suitable tell-tale indicator.
(ii) For each portable tank design, a This arrangement must facilitate the
prototype portable tank, meets the re- detection of disc rupture, pinholing or
quirements of parts 450 through 453 of leakage which could cause a malfunc-
this title for compliance with the re- tion of the pressure relief device. The
quirements of Annex II of the Inter- frangible disc must rupture at a nomi-
national Convention for Safe Con- nal pressure 10% above the start-to-dis-
tainers; and charge pressure of the relief device.
(iii) Each filling and discharge outlet (4) In the case of portable tanks used
meets the requirements of paragraph for more than one gas, the pressure re-
(c)(4) of this section. lief devices must open at a pressure in-
(d) Bottom openings. Bottom openings dicated in paragraph (e)(1) of this sec-
are prohibited on portable tanks when tion for the gas having the highest
the UN Portable Tank Table for Lique- maximum allowable pressure of the
fied Compressed Gases in 173.313 of gases allowed to be transported in the
this subchapter indicates that bottom portable tank.
openings are not allowed. In this case, (f) Capacity of relief devices. The com-
there may be no openings located bined delivery capacity of the relief de-
below the liquid level of the shell when vices must be sufficient so that, in the
it is filled to its maximum permissible event of total fire engulfment, the
filling limit. pressure inside the shell cannot exceed
(e) Pressure relief devices. (1) Portable 120% of the MAWP. Reclosing relief de-
tanks must be provided with one or vices must be used to achieve the full
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
more reclosing pressure relief devices. relief capacity prescribed. In the case
The pressure relief devices must open of portable tanks used for more than
automatically at a pressure not less gas, the combined delivery capacity of
126
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00136 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.277
the pressure relief devices must be design and construction of the shell
taken for the liquefied compressed gas not higher than the lowest (coldest)
which requires the highest delivery ca- service temperature of the contents
pacity of the liquefied compressed during normal conditions of filling, dis-
gases allowed to be transported in the charge and transportation.
portable tank. The total required ca- Shell means the part of the portable
pacity of the relief devices must be de- tank which retains the refrigerated liq-
termined according to the require- uefied gas intended for transport, in-
ments in 178.275(i). These require- cluding openings and their closures,
ments apply only to liquefied com- but does not include service equipment
pressed gases which have critical tem- or external structural equipment.
peratures well above the temperature Tank means a construction which
at the accumulating condition. For normally consists of either:
gases that have critical temperatures (1) A jacket and one or more inner
near or below the temperature at the shells where the space between the
accumulating condition, the calcula- shell(s) and the jacket is exhausted of
tion of the pressure relief device deliv- air (vacuum insulation) and may incor-
ery capacity must consider the addi- porate a thermal insulation system; or
tional thermodynamic properties of the (2) A jacket and an inner shell with
gas, for example see CGA S1.2 (IBR, an intermediate layer of solid ther-
see 171.7 of this subchapter). mally insulating material (for exam-
ple, solid foam).
[66 FR 33448, June 21, 2001, as amended at 68
FR 75748, 75752, Dec. 31, 2003; 69 FR 54046, (b) General design and construction re-
Sept. 7, 2004; 69 FR 76185, Dec. 20, 2004] quirements. (1) Portable tanks must be
of seamless or welded steel construc-
178.277 Requirements for the design, tion and have a water capacity of more
construction, inspection and testing than 450 liters (118.9 gallons). Portable
of portable tanks intended for the tanks must be designed, constructed,
transportation of refrigerated lique- certified and stamped in accordance
fied gases. with Section VIII of the ASME Code.
(a) In addition to the requirements of (2) Portable tanks must be postweld
178.274 applicable to UN portable heat treated and radiographed as pre-
tanks, the following requirements and scribed in Sections V and VIII of the
definitions apply to UN portable tanks ASME Code except that each tank con-
used for refrigerated liquefied gases: structed in accordance with part UHT
Design pressure For the purpose of in Section VIII of the ASME Code must
this section the term design pressure be postweld heat treated. Where
is consistent with the definition for de- postweld heat treatment is required,
sign pressure in the ASME Code, Sec- the tank must be treated as a unit
tion VIII (IBR, see 171.7 of this sub- after completion of all the welds to the
chapter). shell and heads. The method must be as
Holding time is the time, as deter- prescribed in the ASME Code. Welded
mined by testing, that will elapse from attachments to pads may be made after
loading until the pressure of the con- postweld heat treatment is made. The
tents, under equilibrium conditions, postweld heat treatment must be as
reaches the lowest set pressure of the prescribed in Section VIII of the ASME
pressure limiting device(s) (for exam- Code, but in no event at less than 1,050
ple, pressure control valve or pressure F tank metal temperature.
relief device). Holding time must be de- (3) Welding procedure and welder per-
termined as specified in 178.3389. formance tests must be made annually
Maximum allowable working pressure in accordance with Section IX of the
(MAWP) means the maximum effective ASME Code (IBR, see 171.7 of this sub-
gauge pressure permissible at the top chapter). In addition to the essential
of the shell of a loaded portable tank in variables named in the ASME Code, the
its operating position including the following must be considered as essen-
highest effective pressure during filling tial variables: number of passes, thick-
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
127
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00137 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.277 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
input per pass may not vary more than (10) A reference holding time must be
25% from the procedure qualification. determined for each refrigerated lique-
Records of the qualification must be fied gas intended for transport in a
retained for at least 5 years by the portable tank. The reference holding
portable tank manufacturer and made time must be determined by testing in
available to the approval agency and accordance with the requirements of
the owner of the portable tank as spec- 178.3389, considering the following
ified in 178.273. factors:
(4) Shells and jackets must be made (i) The effectiveness of the insulation
of metallic materials suitable for form- system, determined in accordance with
ing. Jackets must be made of steel. paragraph (b)(11) of this section;
Non-metallic materials may be used (ii) The lowest set pressure of the
for the attachments and supports be- pressure limiting device;
tween the shell and jacket, provided (iii) The initial filling conditions;
their material properties at the min- (iv) An assumed ambient tempera-
imum design temperature are proven ture of 30 C (86 F);
to be sufficient. In choosing the mate- (v) The physical properties of the in-
rial, the minimum design temperature dividual refrigerated liquefied gas in-
must be taken into account with re- tended to be transported.
spect to risk of brittle fracture, to hy- (11) The effectiveness of the insula-
drogen embrittlement, to stress corro- tion system (heat influx in watts) may
sion cracking and to resistance to im- be determined by type testing the port-
pact. able tank in accordance with a proce-
(5) Any part of a portable tank, in- dure specified in 178.3389(c) or by
cluding fittings, gaskets and pipe- using the holding time test in 178.338
work, which can be expected normally 9(b). This test must consist of either:
to come into contact with the refrig- (i) A constant pressure test (for ex-
erated liquefied gas transported must ample, at atmospheric pressure) when
be compatible with that refrigerated the loss of refrigerated liquefied gas is
liquefied gas. measured over a period of time; or
(6) The thermal insulation system (ii) A closed system test when the
must include a complete covering of rise in pressure in the shell is measured
the shell with effective insulating ma- over a period of time.
terials. External insulation must be (12) When performing the constant
protected by a jacket so as to prevent pressure test, variations in atmos-
the ingress of moisture and other dam- pheric pressure must be taken into ac-
age under normal transport conditions. count. When performing either test,
(7) When a jacket is so closed as to be corrections must be made for any vari-
gas-tight, a device must be provided to ation of the ambient temperature from
prevent any dangerous pressure from the assumed ambient temperature ref-
developing in the insulation space. erence value of 30 C (86 F).
(8) Materials which may react with (13) The jacket of a vacuum-insulated
oxygen or oxygen enriched double-wall tank must have either an
atmospheres in a dangerous manner external design pressure not less than
may not be used in portable tanks in- 100 kPa (1 bar) gauge pressure cal-
tended for the transport of refrigerated culated in accordance with Section
liquefied gases having a boiling point VIII of the ASME Code or a calculated
below minus 182 C at atmospheric critical collapsing pressure of not less
pressure in locations with the thermal than 200 kPa (2 bar) gauge pressure. In-
insulation where there is a risk of con- ternal and external reinforcements
tact with oxygen or with oxygen en- may be included in calculating the
riched fluid. ability of the jacket to resist the exter-
(9) Insulating materials must not de- nal pressure.
teriorate to an extent that the effec- NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (b): For the deter-
tiveness of the insulation system, as
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
128
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00138 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.277
(c) Design criteria. For shells with (7) Vacuum insulated portable tanks
vacuum insulation, the test pressure are not required to have an inspection
must not be less than 1.3 times the sum opening.
of the MAWP and 100 kPa (1 bar). In no (e) Pressure relief devices. (1) Every
case may the test pressure be less than shell must be provided with not less
300 kPa (3 bar) gauge pressure. than two independent reclosing pres-
(d) Service equipment. (1) Each filling sure relief devices. The pressure relief
and discharge opening in portable devices must open automatically at a
tanks used for the transport of flam- pressure not less than the MAWP and
mable refrigerated liquefied gases must be fully open at a pressure equal to
be fitted with at least three mutually 110% of the MAWP. These devices
independent shut-off devices in series: must, after discharge, close at a pres-
the first being a stop-valve situated as
sure not lower than 10% below the pres-
close as reasonably practicable to the
sure at which discharge starts and
jacket, the second being a stop-valve
must remain closed at all lower pres-
and the third being a blank flange or
sures. The pressure relief devices must
equivalent device. The shut-off device
closest to the jacket must be a self- be of the type that will resist dynamic
closing device, which is capable of forces including surge.
being closed from an accessible posi- (2) Except for portable tanks used for
tion on the portable tank that is re- oxygen, portable tanks for non-flam-
mote from the valve within 30 seconds mable refrigerated liquefied gases (ex-
of actuation. This device must actuate cept oxygen) and hydrogen may in ad-
at a temperature of not more than 121 dition have frangible discs in parallel
C (250 F). with the reclosing devices as specified
(2) Each filling and discharge opening in paragraphs (e)(4)(ii) and (e)(4)(iii) of
in portable tanks used for the trans- this section.
port of non-flammable refrigerated liq- (3) Pressure relief devices must be de-
uefied gases must be fitted with at signed to prevent the entry of foreign
least two mutually independent shut- matter, the leakage of gas and the de-
off devices in series: the first being a velopment of any dangerous excess
stop-valve situated as close as reason- pressure.
ably practicable to the jacket and the (4) Capacity and setting of pressure re-
second a blank flange or equivalent de- lief devices. (i) In the case of the loss of
vice. vacuum in a vacuum-insulated tank or
(3) For sections of piping which can of loss of 20% of the insulation of a
be closed at both ends and where liquid portable tank insulated with solid ma-
product can be trapped, a method of terials, the combined capacity of all
automatic pressure relief must be pro-
pressure relief devices installed must
vided to prevent excess pressure build-
be sufficient so that the pressure (in-
up within the piping.
cluding accumulation) inside the shell
(4) Each filling and discharge opening
does not exceed 120% of the MAWP.
on a portable tank must be clearly
marked to indicate its function. (ii) For non-flammable refrigerated
(5) When pressure-building units are liquefied gases (except oxygen) and hy-
used, the liquid and vapor connections drogen, this capacity may be achieved
to that unit must be provided with a by the use of frangible discs in parallel
valve as close to the jacket as reason- with the required safety-relief devices.
ably practicable to prevent the loss of Frangible discs must rupture at nomi-
contents in case of damage to the pres- nal pressure equal to the test pressure
sure-building unit. A check valve may of the shell.
be used for this purpose if it is located (iii) Under the circumstances de-
on the vapor side of the pressure build- scribed in paragraphs (e)(4)(i) and
up coil. (e)(4)(ii) of this section, together with
(6) The materials of construction of complete fire engulfment, the com-
valves and accessories must have satis- bined capacity of all pressure relief de-
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
129
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00139 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.318 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
(iv) The required capacity of the re- event to come in contact with any of
lief devices must be calculated in ac- the caps. Space shall be provided so
cordance with CGA Pamphlet S1.2 that each detonator of whatever nature
(IBR, see 171.7 of this subchapter). may be inserted in an individual cell in
[66 FR 33450, June 21, 2001, as amended at 68 the body of the container, into which
FR 75748, 75752, Dec. 31, 2003] each such cap shall snugly fit. There
shall be provided no more than twenty
Subpart I [Reserved] (20) such cellular spaces. Space may be
provided into which a plurality of per-
cussion caps may be carried, provided
Subpart JSpecifications for Con- that such space may be closed with a
tainers for Motor Vehicle screw cap, and further provided that
Transportation each or any such space is entirely sepa-
rate from any space provided for any
SOURCE: 29 FR 18975, Dec. 29, 1964, unless detonator. Each cellular space into
otherwise noted. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, which a detonator is to be inserted and
Apr. 5, 1967. carried shall be capable of being cov-
178.318 Specification MC 201; con- ered by a rotary cover so arranged as
tainer for detonators and percus- to expose not more than one cell at any
sion caps. time, and capable of rotation to such a
place that all cells will be covered at
178.3181 Scope. the same time, at which place means
(a) This specification pertains to a shall be provided to lock the cover in
container to be used for the transpor- place. Means shall be provided to lock
tation of detonators and percussion in place the cover for the cells provided
caps in connection with the transpor- for the carrying of detonators. The re-
tation of liquid nitroglycerin, desen- quirement that not more than one cell
sitized liquid nitroglycerin or be exposed at one time need not apply
diethylene glycol dinitrate, where any in the case of detonators, although
or all of such types of caps may be used spaces for such caps and detonators
for the detonation of liquid nitroglyc- shall be separate. Sufficient annular
erin, desentitized liquid nitroglycerin space shall be provided inside the cover
or diethylene glycol dinitrate in blast- for such detonators that, when the
ing operations. This specification is cover is closed, there will be sufficient
not intended to take the place of any space to accommodate the wires cus-
shipping or packing requirements of tomarily attached to such caps. If the
this Department where the caps in material is of such a nature as to re-
question are themselves articles of quire treatment to prevent the absorp-
commerce. tion of moisture, such treatment shall
(b) [Reserved] be applied as shall be necessary in
[29 FR 18975, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32 order to provide against the penetra-
FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, and amended by Amdt. tion of water by permeation. A suitable
17860, 44 FR 70733, Dec. 10, 1979] carrying handle shall be provided, ex-
cept for which handle no part of the
178.3182 Container. container may project beyond the exte-
(a) Every container for detonators rior of the body.
and percussion caps coming within the (b) Exhibited in plates I and II are
scope of this specification shall be con- line drawings of a container for deto-
structed entirely of hard rubber, nators and percussion caps, illustrative
phenolresinous or other resinous mate- of the requirements set forth in
rial, or other nonmetallic, nonsparking 178.3182(a). These plates shall not be
material, except that metal parts may construed as a part of this specifica-
be used in such locations as not in any tion.
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
130
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00140 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.320
subchapter: that:
Appurtenance means any attachment (1) Is a tank intended primarily for
to a cargo tank that has no lading re- the carriage of liquids, gases, solids, or
131
EC02MR91.076</GPH>
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00141 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.320 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
132
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00142 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.320
(3) The thickness as computed per of a shell and heads, that forms a pres-
the ASME Code requirements (if appli- sure tight vessel having openings de-
cable). signed to accept pressure tight fittings
133
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00143 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.337 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
or closures, but excludes any appur- (c) Exceptions to the ASME Code. Un-
tenances, reinforcements, fittings, or less otherwise specified, when excep-
closures. tions are provided in this subpart from
Test pressure means the pressure to compliance with certain paragraphs of
which a tank is subjected to determine the ASME Code, compliance with those
structural integrity. paragraphs is not prohibited.
Toughness of material means the capa- [Amdt. 17889, 55 FR 37055, Sept. 7, 1990, as
bility of a material to absorb energy amended by Amdt. 17898, 58 FR 33306, June
represented by the area under a stress 16, 1993; Amdt. 178118, 61 FR 51339, Oct. 1,
strain curve (indicating the energy ab- 1996; 68 FR 19277, Apr. 18, 2003; 68 FR 52370,
sorbed per unit volume of the material) Sept. 3, 2003; 68 FR 75752, Dec. 31, 2003; 76 FR
up to the point of rupture. 43532, July 20, 2011]
Vacuum cargo tank means a cargo
tank that is loaded by reducing the 178.337 Specification MC 331; cargo
tank motor vehicle primarily for
pressure in the cargo tank to below at- transportation of compressed gases
mospheric pressure. as defined in subpart G of part 173
Variable specification cargo tank of this subchapter.
means a cargo tank that is constructed
in accordance with one specification, 178.3371 General requirements.
but that may be altered to meet an- (a) ASME Code construction. Tanks
other specification by changing relief must be
device, closures, lading discharge de- (1) Seamless or welded construction,
vices, and other lading retention de- or a combination of both;
vices. (2) Designed, constructed, certified,
Void means the space between tank and stamped in accordance with Sec-
heads or bulkheads and a connecting tion VIII of the ASME Code (IBR, see
structure. 171.7 of this subchapter);
Welded flange means a flange at- (3) Made of steel or aluminum; how-
tached to the tank by a weld joining ever, if aluminum is used, the cargo
the tank shell to the cylindrical outer tank must be insulated and the haz-
surface of the flange, or by a fillet weld ardous material to be transported must
joining the tank shell to a flange be compatible with the aluminum (see
shaped to fit the shell contour. 178.3371(e)(2), 173.315(a) table, and
(b) Design certification. (1) Each cargo 178.3372(a)(1) of this subchapter); and
tank or cargo tank motor vehicle de- (4) Covered with a steel jacket if the
sign type, including its required acci- cargo tank is insulated and used to
dent damage protection device, must transport a flammable gas (see
be certified to conform to the specifica- 173.315(a) table Note 11 of this sub-
tion requirements by a Design Certi- chapter).
fying Engineer who is registered in ac- (b) Design pressure. The design pres-
cordance with subpart F of part 107 of sure of a cargo tank authorized under
this title. An accident damage protec- this specification shall be not less than
tion device is a rear-end protection, the vapor pressure of the commodity
overturn protection, or piping protec- contained therein at 115 F. or as pre-
tion device. scribed for a particular commodity in
(2) The Design Certifying Engineer 173.315(a) of this subchapter, except
shall furnish to the manufacturer a that in no case shall the design pres-
certificate to indicate compliance with sure of any cargo tank be less than 100
the specification requirements. The p.s.i.g. nor more than 500 p.s.i.g.
certificate must include the sketches,
drawings, and calculations used for cer- NOTE 1: The term design pressure as used in
tification. Each certificate, including this specification, is identical to the term
MAWP as used in the ASME Code.
sketches, drawings, and calculations,
shall be signed by the Design Certi- (c) Openings. (1) Excess pressure relief
fying Engineer. valves shall be located in the top of the
(3) The manufacturer shall retain the cargo tank or heads.
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
design certificate at his principal place (2) A chlorine cargo tank shall have
of business for as long as he manufac- only one opening. That opening shall
tures DOT specification cargo tanks. be in the top of the cargo tank and
134
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00144 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.3371
shall be fitted with a nozzle that meets provisions in Section VIII of the ASME
the following requirements: Code under which it is constructed.
(i) On a cargo tank manufactured on Where postweld heat treatment is re-
or before December 31, 1974, the nozzle quired, the cargo tank must be treated
shall be protected by a dome cover as a unit after completion of all the
plate which conforms to either the welds in and/or to the shells and heads.
standard of The Chlorine Institute, The method must be as prescribed in
Inc., Dwg. 1033, dated January 23, 1958, Section VIII of the ASME Code. Welded
or to the standard specified in para- attachments to pads may be made after
graph (c) (2) (ii) of this section. postweld heat treatment. A cargo tank
(ii) On a cargo tank manufactured on used for anhydrous ammonia must be
or after January 1, 1975, the nozzle postweld heat treated. The postweld
shall be protected by a manway cover heat treatment must be as prescribed
which conforms to the standard of The in Section VIII of the ASME Code, but
Chlorine Institute, Inc., Dwg. 1034, in no event at less than 1,050 F cargo
dated September 1, 1971. tank metal temperature.
(d) Reflective design. Every (g) Definitions. The following defini-
uninsulated cargo tank permanently tions apply to 178.3371 through
attached to a cargo tank motor vehicle 178.33718:
shall, unless covered with a jacket Emergency discharge control means the
made of aluminum, stainless steel, or ability to stop a cargo tank unloading
other bright nontarnishing metal, be operation in the event of an uninten-
painted a white, aluminum or similar tional release. Emergency discharge
reflecting color on the upper two-thirds control can utilize passive or off-truck
of area of the cargo tank. remote means to stop the unloading
(e) Insulation. (1) Each cargo tank re- operation. A passive means of emer-
quired to be insulated must conform gency discharge control automatically
with the use and performance require- shuts off the flow of product without
ments contained in 173.315(a) table the need for human intervention with-
and 178.3371 (a)(3) and (e)(2) of this in 20 seconds of an unintentional re-
subchapter. lease caused by a complete separation
(2) Each cargo tank intended for of the liquid delivery hose. An off-
chlorine; carbon dioxide, refrigerated truck remote means of emergency dis-
liquid; or nitrous oxide, refrigerated charge control permits a qualified per-
liquid service must have suitable insu- son attending the unloading operation
lation of such thickness that the over- to close the cargo tanks internal self-
all thermal conductance is not more closing stop valve and shut off all mo-
than 0.08 Btu per square foot per F dif- tive and auxiliary power equipment at
ferential per hour. The conductance a distance from the cargo tank motor
must be determined at 60 F. Insulation vehicle.
material used on cargo tanks for ni- Excess flow valve, integral excess flow
trous oxide, refrigerated liquid must be valve, or excess flow feature means a
noncombustible. Insulating material component that will close automati-
used on cargo tanks for chlorine must cally if the flow rate of a gas or liquid
be corkboard or polyurethane foam, through the component reaches or ex-
with a minimum thickness of 4 inches, ceeds the rated flow of gas or liquid
or 2 inches minimum thickness of ce- specified by the original valve manu-
ramic fiber/fiberglass of 4 pounds per facturer when piping mounted directly
cubic foot minimum density covered by on the valve is sheared off before the
2 inches minimum thickness of fiber. first valve, pump, or fitting down-
(f) Postweld heat treatment. Postweld stream from the valve.
heat treatment must be as prescribed Internal self-closing stop valve means a
in the ASME Code except that each primary shut off valve installed in a
cargo tank constructed in accordance product discharge outlet of a cargo
with Part UHT of Section VIII of the tank and designed to be kept closed by
ASME Code must be postweld heat self-stored energy.
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
treated. Each chlorine cargo tank must Primary discharge control system
be fully radiographed and postweld means a primary shut-off installed at a
heat treated in accordance with the product discharge outlet of a cargo
135
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00145 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.3372 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
136
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00146 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.3373
137
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00147 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.3373 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
static weight of the fully loaded cargo (C) The lateral shear stress generated
tank motor vehicle, all structural ele- by a normal operating lateral accelera-
ments, equipment and appurtenances tive force equal to 0.2 times the
supported by the cargo tank wall. The vertical reaction at each suspension as-
following loadings must be included: sembly of a trailer, applied at the road
(1) The axial load generated by a surface, and as transmitted to the
decelerative force; cargo tank wall through the suspension
(2) The bending moment generated by assembly of a trailer, and the hori-
a decelerative force; zontal pivot of the upper coupler (fifth
(3) The axial load generated by an ac- wheel) or turntable; or anchoring and
support members of a truck, as applica-
celerative force; and
ble. The vertical reaction must be cal-
(4) The bending moment generated by culated based on the static weight of
an accelerative force; and the fully loaded cargo tank motor vehi-
(C) The tensile or compressive stress cle, all structural elements, equipment
generated by the bending moment re- and appurtenances supported by the
sulting from normal operating vertical cargo tank wall; and
accelerative force equal to 0.35 times (D) The torsional shear stress gen-
the vertical reaction at the suspension erated by the same lateral forces as de-
assembly of a trailer; or the horizontal scribed in paragraph (c)(1)(iv)(C) of this
pivot of the upper coupler (fifth wheel) section.
or turntable; or anchoring and support (2) Extreme dynamic loadings. The fol-
members of a truck, as applicable. The lowing procedure addresses stress in
vertical reaction must be calculated the tank shell resulting from extreme
based on the static weight of the fully dynamic loadings. The effective stress
loaded cargo tank motor vehicle, all (the maximum principal stress at any
structural elements, equipment and ap- point) must be determined by the fol-
purtenances supported by the cargo lowing formula:
tank wall.
S = 0.5(Sy + Sx) [0.25(Sy Sx)2 + Ss2]0.5
(iv) Ss = The following shear stresses
generated by the following static and Where:
normal operating loading conditions, (i) S = effective stress at any given
in psi: point under a combination of static
(A) The static shear stress resulting and extreme dynamic loadings that can
from the vertical reaction at the sus- occur at the same time, in psi.
pension assembly of a trailer, and the (ii) Sy = circumferential stress gen-
horizontal pivot of the upper coupler erated by MAWP and external pressure,
(fifth wheel) or turntable; or anchoring when applicable, plus static head, in
and support members of a truck, as ap- psi.
plicable. The vertical reaction must be (iii) Sx = the following net longitu-
calculated based on the static weight dinal stress generated by the following
of the fully loaded cargo tank motor static and extreme dynamic loading
vehicle, all structural elements, equip- conditions, in psi:
ment and appurtenances supported by (A) The longitudinal stresses result-
the cargo tank wall; ing from the MAWP and external pres-
(B) The vertical shear stress gen- sure, when applicable, plus static head,
erated by a normal operating accelera- in combination with the bending stress
tive force equal to 0.35 times the generated by the static weight of the
vertical reaction at the suspension as- fully loaded cargo tank motor vehicle,
sembly of a trailer; or the horizontal all structural elements, equipment and
pivot of the upper coupler (fifth wheel) appurtenances supported by the tank
or turntable; or anchoring and support wall;
members of a truck, as applicable. The (B) The tensile or compressive stress
vertical reaction must be calculated resulting from extreme longitudinal
based on the static weight of the fully acceleration or deceleration. In each
loaded cargo tank motor vehicle, all case the forces applied must be 0.7
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
structural elements, equipment and ap- times the vertical reaction at the sus-
purtenances supported by the cargo pension assembly, applied at the road
tank wall; surface, and as transmitted to the
138
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00148 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.3373
cargo tank wall through the suspension or turntable; or anchoring and support
assembly of a trailer during decelera- members of a truck, as applicable. The
tion; or the horizontal pivot of the vertical reaction must be calculated
truck tractor or converter dolly fifth based on the static weight of the fully
wheel, or the drawbar hinge on the loaded cargo tank motor vehicle, all
fixed dolly during acceleration; or the structural elements, equipment and ap-
anchoring and support members of a purtenances supported by the cargo
truck during acceleration and decelera- tank wall;
tion, as applicable. The vertical reac- (C) The lateral shear stress generated
tion must be calculated based on the by an extreme lateral accelerative
static weight of the fully loaded cargo force equal to 0.4 times the vertical re-
tank motor vehicle, all structural ele- action at the suspension assembly of a
ments, equipment and appurtenances trailer, applied at the road surface, and
supported by the cargo tank wall. The as transmitted to the cargo tank wall
following loadings must be included: through the suspension assembly of a
(1) The axial load generated by a trailer, and the horizontal pivot of the
decelerative force; upper coupler (fifth wheel) or turn-
(2) The bending moment generated by table; or anchoring and support mem-
a decelerative force; bers of a truck, as applicable. The
(3) The axial load generated by an ac- vertical reaction must be calculated
celerative force; and based on the static weight of the fully
(4) The bending moment generated by loaded cargo tank motor vehicle, all
an accelerative force; and structural elements, equipment and ap-
(C) The tensile or compressive stress purtenances supported by the cargo
generated by the bending moment re- tank wall; and
sulting from an extreme vertical accel-
(D) The torsional shear stress gen-
erative force equal to 0.7 times the
erated by the same lateral forces as de-
vertical reaction at the suspension as-
scribed in paragraph (c)(2)(iv)(C) of this
sembly of a trailer, and the horizontal
section.
pivot of the upper coupler (fifth wheel)
or turntable; or the anchoring and sup- (d) In order to account for stresses
port members of a truck, as applicable. due to impact in an accident, the de-
The vertical reaction must be cal- sign calculations for the cargo tank
culated based on the static weight of shell and heads must include the load
the fully loaded cargo tank motor vehi- resulting from the design pressure in
cle, all structural elements, equipment combination with the dynamic pres-
and appurtenances supported by the sure resulting from a longitudinal de-
cargo tank wall. celeration of 2g. For this loading
(iv) Ss = The following shear stresses condition the stress value used may
generated by static and extreme dy- not exceed the lesser of the yield
namic loading conditions, in psi: strength or 75 percent of the ultimate
(A) The static shear stress resulting tensile strength of the material of con-
from the vertical reaction at the sus- struction. For cargo tanks constructed
pension assembly of a trailer, and the of stainless steel the maximum design
horizontal pivot of the upper coupler stress may not exceed 75 percent of the
(fifth wheel) or turntable; or anchoring ultimate tensile strength of the type
and support members of a truck, as ap- steel used.
plicable. The vertical reaction must be (e) The minimum metal thickness for
calculated based on the static weight the shell and heads on tanks with a de-
of the fully loaded cargo tank motor sign pressure of 100 psig or more must
vehicle, all structural elements, equip- be 4.75 mm (0.187 inch) for steel and 6.86
ment and appurtenances supported by mm (0.270 inch) for aluminum, except
the cargo tank wall; for chlorine and sulfur dioxide tanks.
(B) The vertical shear stress gen- In all cases, the minimum thickness of
erated by an extreme vertical accelera- the tank shell and head shall be deter-
tive force equal to 0.7 times the mined using structural design require-
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
vertical reaction at the suspension as- ments in Section VIII of the ASME
sembly of a trailer, and the horizontal Code or 25% of the tensile strength of
pivot of the upper coupler (fifth wheel) the material used. For a cargo tank
139
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00149 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.3373 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
used in chlorine or sulfur dioxide serv- there will be no adverse effect upon the
ice, the cargo tank must be made of lading retention integrity of the cargo
steel. A corrosion allowance of 20 per- tank if any force less than that pre-
cent or 2.54 mm (0.10 inch), whichever scribed in paragraph (b)(1) of this sec-
is less, must be added to the thickness tion is applied from any direction. The
otherwise required for sulfur dioxide thickness of the mounting pad may not
and chlorine tank material. In chlorine be less than that of the shell wall or
cargo tanks, the wall thickness must head wall to which it is attached, and
be at least 1.59 cm (0.625 inch), includ- not more than 1.5 times the shell or
ing corrosion allowance. head thickness. However, a pad with a
(f) Where a cargo tank support is at- minimum thickness of 0.25 inch may be
tached to any part of the cargo tank
used when the shell or head thickness
wall, the stresses imposed on the cargo
is over 0.25 inch. If weep holes or tell-
tank wall must meet the requirements
in paragraph (a) of this section. tale holes are used, the pad must be
(g) The design, construction, and in- drilled or punched at the lowest point
stallation of an attachment, appur- before it is welded to the tank. Each
tenance to the cargo tank, structural pad must
support member between the cargo (i) Be fabricated from material deter-
tank and the vehicle or suspension mined to be suitable for welding to
component, or accident protection de- both the cargo tank material and the
vice must conform to the following re- material of the appurtenance or struc-
quirements: tural support member; a Design Certi-
(1) Structural members, the suspen- fying Engineer must make this deter-
sion sub-frame, accident protection mination considering chemical and
structures, and external circumferen- physical properties of the materials
tial reinforcement devices must be and must specify filler material con-
used as sites for attachment of appur- forming to the requirements in Section
tenances and other accessories to the VIII of the ASME Code (IBR, see 171.7
cargo tank, when practicable. of this subchapter).
(2) A lightweight attachment to the (ii) Be preformed to an inside radius
cargo tank wall such as a conduit clip, no greater than the outside radius of
brake line clip, skirting structure,
the cargo tank at the attachment loca-
lamp mounting bracket, or placard
tion.
holder must be of a construction hav-
ing lesser strength than the cargo tank (iii) Extend at least 2 inches in each
wall materials and may not be more direction from any point of attachment
than 72 percent of the thickness of the of an appurtenance or structural sup-
material to which it is attached. The port member. This dimension may be
lightweight attachment may be se- measured from the center of the at-
cured directly to the cargo tank wall if tached structural member.
the device is designed and installed in (iv) Have rounded corners, or other-
such a manner that, if damaged, it will wise be shaped in a manner to mini-
not affect the lading retention integ- mize stress concentrations on the shell
rity of the tank. A lightweight attach- or head.
ment must be secured to the cargo (v) Be attached by continuous fillet
tank shell or head by a continuous welding. Any fillet weld discontinuity
weld or in such a manner as to preclude may only be for the purpose of pre-
formation of pockets which may be- venting an intersection between the fil-
come sites for corrosion. Attachments let weld and a tank or jacket seam
meeting the requirements of this para- weld.
graph are not authorized for cargo
tanks constructed under part UHT in [Amdt. 17889, 55 FR 37056, Sept. 7, 1990, as
Section VIII of the ASME Code. amended by Amdt. 178104, 59 FR 49135, Sept.
(3) Except as prescribed in para- 26, 1994; Amdt. 178105, 60 FR 17401, Apr. 5,
graphs (g)(1) and (g)(2) of this section, 1995; Amdt. 178118, 61 FR 51340, Oct. 1, 1996;
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
the welding of any appurtenance to the 65 FR 58631, Sept. 29, 2000; 68 FR 19279, Apr.
18, 2003; 68 FR 52370, Sept. 3, 2003; 68 FR 75753,
cargo tank wall must be made by at-
Dec. 31, 2003]
tachment of a mounting pad so that
140
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00150 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.3378
141
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00151 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.3378 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
closed with a plug, cap, or bolted ing connection area. The loading/un-
flange. loading connection area is where hoses
(3) Except as provided in paragraph or hose reels are connected to the per-
(b) of this section, each product inlet manent metal piping. Linkages be-
opening, including vapor return lines, tween closures and remote operators
must be fitted with a back flow check must be corrosion resistant and effec-
valve or an internal self-closing stop tive in all types of environmental con-
valve located inside the cargo tank or ditions incident to discharge of prod-
inside a welded nozzle that is an inte- uct.
gral part of the cargo tank. The valve (iii) All parts of a valve inside a
seat must be located inside the cargo cargo tank or within a welded flange
tank or within 2.54 cm (one inch) of the must be made of material that will not
external face of the welded flange.
corrode or deteriorate in the presence
Damage to parts exterior to the cargo
of the lading.
tank or mating flange must not pre-
vent effective seating of the valve. All (iv) An excess flow valve, integral ex-
parts of a valve inside a cargo tank or cess flow valve, or excess flow feature
welded flange must be made of mate- must close if the flow reaches the rated
rial that will not corrode or deteriorate flow of a gas or liquid specified by the
in the presence of the lading. original valve manufacturer when pip-
(4) Except as provided in paragraphs ing mounted directly on the valve is
(a)(5), (b), and (c) of this section, each sheared off before the first valve,
liquid or vapor discharge outlet must pump, or fitting downstream from the
be fitted with a primary discharge con- excess flow valve, integral excess flow
trol system as defined in 178.3371(g). valve, or excess flow feature.
Thermal remote operators must acti- (v) An integral excess flow valve or
vate at a temperature of 121.11 C (250 the excess flow feature of an internal
F) or less. Linkages between closures self-closing stop valve may be designed
and remote operators must be corro- with a bypass, not to exceed 0.1016 cm
sion resistant and effective in all types (0.040 inch) diameter opening, to allow
of environmental conditions incident equalization of pressure.
to discharging of product. (vi) The internal self-closing stop
(i) On a cargo tank over 13,247.5 L valve must be designed so that the self-
(3,500 gallons) water capacity, thermal stored energy source and the valve seat
and mechanical means of remote clo- are located inside the cargo tank or
sure must be installed at the ends of within 2.54 cm (one inch) of the exter-
the cargo tank in at least two diago- nal face of the welded flange. Damage
nally opposite locations. If the loading/ to parts exterior to the cargo tank or
unloading connection at the cargo tank mating flange must not prevent effec-
is not in the general vicinity of one of tive seating of the valve.
the two locations specified in the first (5) A primary discharge control sys-
sentence of this paragraph (a)(4)(i), ad- tem is not required on the following:
ditional means of thermal remote clo-
(i) A vapor or liquid discharge open-
sure must be installed so that heat
ing of less than 114 NPT equipped with
from a fire in the loading/unloading
connection area or the discharge pump an excess flow valve together with a
will activate the primary discharge manually operated external stop valve
control system. The loading/unloading in place of an internal self-closing stop
connection area is where hoses or hose valve.
reels are connected to the permanent (ii) An engine fuel line on a truck-
metal piping. mounted cargo tank of not more than
34 NPT equipped with a valve having an
(ii) On a cargo tank of 13,247.5 L (3,500
gallons) water capacity or less, a ther- integral excess flow valve or excess
mal means of remote closure must be flow feature.
installed at or near the internal self- (iii) A cargo tank motor vehicle used
closing stop valve. A mechanical to transport refrigerated liquids such
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
means of remote closure must be in- as argon, carbon dioxide, helium, kryp-
stalled on the end of the cargo tank ton, neon, nitrogen, and xenon, or mix-
furthest away from the loading/unload- tures thereof.
142
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00152 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.3379
(6) In addition to the internal self- lief devices, must be at least 4 times
closing stop valve, each filling and dis- the design pressure of the cargo tank.
charge line must be fitted with a stop Additionally, the burst pressure may
valve located in the line between the not be less than 4 times any higher
internal self-closing stop valve and the pressure to which each pipe, pipe fit-
hose connection. A back flow check ting, hose or other pressure part may
valve or excess flow valve may not be be subjected to in service. For chlorine
used to satisfy this requirement. service, see paragraph (b)(7) of this sec-
(7) An excess flow valve may be de- tion.
signed with a bypass, not to exceed a (2) Pipe joints must be threaded,
0.1016 centimeter (0.040 inch) diameter welded, or flanged. If threaded pipe is
opening, to allow equalization of pres-
used, the pipe and fittings must be
sure.
Schedule 80 weight or heavier, except
(b) Inlets and discharge outlets on chlo-
for sacrificial devices. Malleable metal,
rine tanks. The inlet and discharge out-
lets on a cargo tank used to transport stainless steel, or ductile iron must be
chlorine must meet the requirements used in the construction of primary
of 178.3371(c)(2) and must be fitted valve body parts and fittings used in
with an internal excess flow valve. In liquid filling or vapor equalization.
addition to the internal excess flow Stainless steel may be used for internal
valve, the inlet and discharge outlets components such as shutoff discs and
must be equipped with an external stop springs except where incompatible with
valve (angle valve). Excess flow valves the lading to be transported. Where
must conform to the standards of The copper tubing is permitted, joints must
Chlorine Institute, Inc., as follows: be brazed or be of equally strong metal
(1) A valve conforming to The Chlo- union type. The melting point of the
rine Institute, Inc., Dwg. 1017 (IBR, brazing material may not be lower
see 171.7 of this subchapter), must be than 538 C (1,000 F). The method of
installed under each liquid angle valve. joining tubing may not reduce the
(2) A valve conforming to The Chlo- strength of the tubing.
rine Institute, Inc., Dwg. 1066 (IBR, (3) Each hose coupling must be de-
see 171.7 of this subchapter), must be signed for a pressure of at least 120 per-
installed under each gas angle valve. cent of the hose design pressure and so
(c) Discharge outlets on carbon dioxide, that there will be no leakage when con-
refrigerated liquid, cargo tanks. A dis- nected.
charge outlet on a cargo tank used to (4) Piping must be protected from
transport carbon dioxide, refrigerated damage due to thermal expansion and
liquid is not required to be fitted with contraction, jarring, and vibration.
an internal self-closing stop valve. Slip joints are not authorized for this
[64 FR 28049, May 24, 1999, as amended at 66 purpose.
FR 45387, Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR 19279, Apr. 18, (5) [Reserved]
2003; 68 FR 75753, Dec. 31, 2003] (6) Cargo tank manufacturers and
178.3379 Pressure relief devices, fabricators must demonstrate that all
piping, valves, hoses, and fittings. piping, valves, and fittings on a cargo
tank are free from leaks. To meet this
(a) Pressure relief devices. (1) See
requirement, the piping, valves, and
173.315(i) of this subchapter.
fittings must be tested after installa-
(2) On cargo tanks for carbon dioxide
or nitrous oxide see 173.315 (i) (9) and tion at not less than 80 percent of the
(10) of this subchapter. design pressure marked on the cargo
(3) Each valve must be designed, con- tank.
structed, and marked for a rated pres- (7) A hose assembler must:
sure not less than the cargo tank de- (i) Permanently mark each hose as-
sign pressure at the temperature ex- sembly with a unique identification
pected to be encountered. number.
(b) Piping, valves, hose, and fittings. (1) (ii) Demonstrate that each hose as-
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
The burst pressure of all piping, pipe sembly is free from leaks by per-
fittings, hose and other pressure parts, forming the tests and inspections in
except for pump seals and pressure re- 180.416(f) of this subchapter.
143
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00153 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.33710 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
(iii) Mark each hose assembly with 178.33710 Accident damage protec-
the month and year of its original pres- tion.
sure test. (a) All valves, fittings, pressure relief
(8) Chlorine cargo tanks. Angle valves devices, and other accessories to the
on cargo tanks intended for chlorine tank proper shall be protected in ac-
service must conform to the standards cordance with paragraph (b) of this sec-
of the Chlorine Institute, Inc., Dwg. tion against such damage as could be
1048 or Section 3, Pamphlet 166, caused by collision with other vehicles
Angle Valve Guidelines for Chlorine or objects, jack-knifing and over-
Bulk Transportation. (IBR, see 171.7 turning. In addition, pressure relief
of this subchapter). Before installation, valves shall be so protected that in the
each angle valve must be tested for event of overturn of the vehicle onto a
leakage at not less than 225 psig using hard surface, their opening will not be
dry air or inert gas. prevented and their discharge will not
(c) Marking inlets and outlets. Except be restricted.
for gauging devices, thermometer (b) The protective devices or housing
wells, and pressure relief valves, each must be designed to withstand static
cargo tank inlet and outlet must be loading in any direction equal to twice
marked liquid or vapor to des- the weight of the tank and attach-
ignate whether it communicates with ments when filled with the lading,
liquid or vapor when the cargo tank is using a safety factor of not less than
filled to the maximum permitted fill- four, based on the ultimate strength of
ing density. A filling line that commu- the material to be used, without dam-
nicates with vapor may be marked age to the fittings protected, and must
spray-fill instead of vapor. be made of metal at least 316-inch
(d) Refrigeration and heating coils. (1) thick.
Refrigeration and heating coils must (c) Rear-end tank protection. Rear-end
be securely anchored with provisions tank protection devices must:
for thermal expansion. The coils must (1) Consist of at least one rear bump-
be pressure tested externally to at er designed to protect the cargo tank
least the cargo tank test pressure, and and all valves, piping and fittings lo-
internally to either the tank test pres- cated at the rear of the cargo tank
sure or twice the working pressure of from damage that could result in loss
the heating/refrigeration system, of lading in the event of a rear end col-
whichever is higher. A cargo tank may lision. The bumper design must trans-
not be placed in service if any leakage mit the force of the collision directly
occurs or other evidence of damage is to the chassis of the vehicle. The rear
found. The refrigerant or heating me- bumper and its attachments to the
dium to be circulated through the coils chassis must be designed to withstand
must not be capable of causing any ad- a load equal to twice the weight of the
verse chemical reaction with the cargo loaded cargo tank motor vehicle and
tank lading in the event of leakage. attachments, using a safety factor of
The unit furnishing refrigeration may four based on the tensile strength of
the materials used, with such load
be mounted on the motor vehicle.
being applied horizontally and parallel
(2) Where any liquid susceptible to
to the major axis of the cargo tank.
freezing, or the vapor of any such liq- The rear bumper dimensions must also
uid, is used for heating or refrigera- meet the requirements of 393.86 of this
tion, the heating or refrigeration sys- title; or
tem shall be arranged to permit com-
(2) Conform to the requirements of
plete drainage. 178.3458(d).
[Order 59B, 30 FR 580, Jan. 16, 1965. Redesig- (d) Chlorine tanks. A chlorine tank
nated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967] must be equipped with a protective
EDITORIAL NOTE: For FEDERAL REGISTER ci- housing and a manway cover to permit
the use of standard emergency kits for
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
144
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00154 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.33714
valve having an integral excess flow amended by Amdt. 17889, 54 FR 25018, June
valve or excess flow feature. 12, 1989; Amdt. 178118, 61 FR 51340, Oct. 1,
[64 FR 28050, May 24, 1999] 1996]
145
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00155 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.33715 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
146
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00156 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.33718
ASME, the information need not be re- (c) Specification plate. The following
peated on the name and specification information must be marked on the
plates. specification plate in accordance with
(4) The specification plate may be at- this section:
tached to the cargo tank motor vehicle (1) Cargo tank motor vehicle manu-
chassis rail by brazing, welding, or facturer (CTMV mfr.).
other suitable means on the left side (2) Cargo tank motor vehicle certifi-
near the front head, in a place acces- cation date (CTMV cert. date).
sible for inspection. If the specification (3) Cargo tank manufacturer (CT
plate is attached to the chassis rail, mfr.).
then the cargo tank serial number as- (4) Cargo tank date of manufacture
signed by the cargo tank manufacturer (CT date of mfr.), month and year.
must be included on the plate. (5) Maximum weight of lading (Max.
(b) Name plate. The following infor- Payload), in pounds
mation must be marked on the name (6) Lining materials (Lining), if ap-
plate in accordance with this section: plicable.
(1) DOT-specification number MC 331 (7) Heating system design pressure
(DOT MC 331). (Heating sys. press.), in psig, if applica-
(2) Original test date (Orig. Test ble.
Date). (8) Heating system design tempera-
(3) MAWP in psig. ture (Heating sys. temp.), in F, if ap-
(4) Cargo tank design temperature plicable.
(Design Temp. Range) lll F to (9) Cargo tank serial number, as-
lll F. signed by cargo tank manufacturer (CT
(5) Nominal capacity (Water Cap.), in serial), if applicable.
pounds. NOTE 1 TO PARAGRAPH (c): See 173.315(a) of
(6) Maximum design density of lading this chapter regarding water capacity.
(Max. Lading density), in pounds per NOTE 2 TO PARAGRAPH (c): When the shell
gallon. and head materials are the same thickness,
(7) Material specification number they may be combined (Shell & head matl,
yyy***).
shell (Shell matl, yyy***), where yyy
is replaced by the alloy designation (d) The design weight of lading used
and *** is replaced by the alloy type. in determining the loading in 178.337
(8) Material specification number 3(b), 178.33710(b) and (c), and 178.337
heads (Head matl. yyy***), where 13(a) and (b), must be shown as the
yyy is replaced by the alloy designa- maximum weight of lading marking re-
tion and *** by the alloy type. quired by paragraph (c) of this section.
(9) Minimum Thicknessshell (Min. [68 FR 19280, Apr. 18, 2003; 68 FR 52370, Sept.
Shell-thick), in inches. When minimum 3, 2003, as amended at 68 FR 57633, Oct. 6,
shell thicknesses are not the same for 2003; 81 FR 35544, June 2, 2016]
different areas, show (topll, sidell,
bottomll, in inches). 178.33718 Certification.
(10) Minimum thicknessheads (Min. (a) At or before the time of delivery,
heads thick.), in inches. the cargo tank motor vehicle manufac-
(11) Manufactured thicknessshell turer must supply and the owner must
(Mfd. Shell thick.), topll, sidell, obtain, a cargo tank motor vehicle
bottomll, in inches. (Required when manufacturers data report as required
additional thickness is provided for by Section VIII of the ASME Code
corrosion allowance.) (IBR, see 171.7 of this subchapter), and
(12) Manufactured thicknessheads a certificate stating that the com-
(Mfd. Heads thick.), in inches. (Re- pleted cargo tank motor vehicle con-
quired when additional thickness is forms in all respects to Specification
provided for corrosion allowance.) MC 331 and the ASME Code. The reg-
(13) Exposed surface area, in square istration numbers of the manufacturer,
feet. the Design Certifying Engineer, and
the Registered Inspector, as appro-
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
147
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00157 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.338 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
(1) For each design type, the certifi- certificate, or certificates, will include
cate must be signed by a responsible of- sufficient sketches, drawings, and
ficial of the manufacturer and a Design other information to indicate the loca-
Certifying Engineer; and tion, make, model, and size of each
(2) For each cargo tank motor vehi- valve and the arrangement of all piping
cle, the certificate must be signed by a associated with the cargo tank.
responsible official of the manufac- (6) The certificate must contain a
turer and a Registered Inspector. statement indicating whether or not
(3) When a cargo tank motor vehicle the cargo tank was postweld heat
is manufactured in two or more stages, treated for anhydrous ammonia as
each manufacturer who performs a specified in 178.3371(f).
manufacturing function or portion (b) The owner shall retain the copy of
thereof on the incomplete cargo tank the data report and certificates and re-
motor vehicle must provide to the suc- lated papers in his files throughout his
ceeding manufacturer, at or before the ownership of the cargo tank motor ve-
time of delivery, a certificate that hicle and for at least one year there-
states the function performed by the after; and in the event of change in
manufacturer, including any certifi- ownership, retention by the prior
cates received from previous manufac- owner of nonfading photographically
turers, Registered Inspectors, and De- reproduced copies will be deemed to
sign Certifying Engineers. satisfy this requirement. Each motor
(4) Specification shortages. When a carrier using the cargo tank motor ve-
cargo tank motor vehicle is manufac- hicle, if not the owner thereof, shall
tured in two or more stages, the manu- obtain a copy of the data report and
facturer of the cargo tank must attach certificate and retain them in his files
the name plate and specification plate during the time he uses the cargo tank
as required by 178.33717(a) and (b) motor vehicle and for at least one year
without the original date of certifi- thereafter.
cation stamped on the specification [Order 59B, 30 FR 583, Jan. 16, 1965. Redesig-
plate. Prior manufacturers must list nated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967]
the specification requirements that are
not completed on the Certificate of EDITORIAL NOTE: For FEDERAL REGISTER ci-
tations affecting 178.33718, see the List of
Compliance. When the cargo tank
CFR Sections Affected, which appears in the
motor vehicle is brought into full com- Finding Aids section of the printed volume
pliance with the applicable specifica- and at www.fdsys.gov.
tion, the cargo tank motor vehicle
manufacturer must have a Registered 178.338 Specification MC338; insu-
Inspector stamp the date of certifi- lated cargo tank motor vehicle.
cation on the specification plate and
issue a Certificate of Compliance to the 178.3381 General requirements.
owner of the cargo tank motor vehicle. (a) For the purposes of this section
The Certificate of Compliance must (1) Design pressure means the
list the actions taken to bring the MAWP as used in Section VIII of the
cargo tank motor vehicle into full ASME Code (IBR, see 171.7 of this sub-
compliance. In addition, the certificate chapter), and is the gauge pressure at
must include the date of certification the top of the tank.
and the person (manufacturer, carrier (2) Design service temperature means
or repair organization) accomplishing the coldest temperature for which the
compliance. tank is suitable (see 173.318 (a)(1) and
(5) The certificate must state wheth- (f) of this subchapter).
er or not it includes certification that (b) Each cargo tank must consist of a
all valves, piping, and protective de- suitably supported welded inner vessel
vices conform to the requirements of enclosed within an outer shell or jack-
the specification. If it does not so cer- et, with insulation between the inner
tify, the installer of any such valve, vessel and outer shell or jacket, and
piping, or device shall supply and the having piping, valves, supports and
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
148
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00158 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.3382
and jacket means either the outer shell 178.3383(b), may not exceed 25 percent
or insulation cover. of the minimum specified tensile
(c) Each tank must be designed, con- strength.
structed, certified, and stamped in ac- [Amdt. 17877, 48 FR 27703, June 16, 1983, as
cordance with Section VIII of the amended at 49 FR 24316, June 12, 1984; Amdt.
ASME Code. 178104, 59 FR 49135, Sept. 26, 1994; 66 FR
(d) The exterior surface of the tank 45387, Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR 75754, Dec. 31, 2003]
must be insulated with a material com-
patible with the lading. 178.3382 Material.
(1) Each cargo tank must have an in- (a) All material used in the construc-
sulation system that will prevent the tion of a tank and its appurtenances
tank pressure from exceeding the pres- that may come in contact with the lad-
sure relief valve set pressure within the ing must be compatible with the lading
specified holding time when the tank is to be transported. All material used for
loaded with the specific cryogenic liq- tank pressure parts must conform to
uid at the design conditions of the requirements in Section II of the
(i) The specified temperature and ASME Code (IBR, see 171.7 of this sub-
pressure of the cryogenic liquid, and chapter). All material used for evacu-
(ii) The exposure of the filled cargo ated jacket pressure parts must con-
tank to an average ambient tempera- form to the chemistry and steelmaking
ture of 85 F. practices of one of the material speci-
(2) For a cargo tank used to transport fications of Section II of the ASME
oxygen, the insulation may not sustain Code or the following ASTM Specifica-
combustion in a 99.5 percent oxygen at- tions (IBR, see 171.7 of this sub-
mosphere at atmospheric pressure chapter): A 242, A 441, A 514, A 572, A
when contacted with a continuously
588, A 606, A 633, A 715, A 1008/A 1008M,
heated glowing platinum wire. The
A 1011/A 1011M.
cargo tank must be marked in accord- (b) All tie-rods, mountings, and other
ance with 178.33818(b)(7). appurtenances within the jacket and
(3) Each vacuum-insulated cargo
all piping, fittings and valves must be
tank must be provided with a connec-
of material suitable for use at the low-
tion for a vacuum gauge to indicate the
est temperature to be encountered.
absolute pressure within the insulation (c) Impact tests are required on all
space. tank materials, except materials that
(e) The insulation must be com-
are excepted from impact testing by
pletely covered by a metal jacket. The
the ASME Code, and must be per-
jacket or the insulation must be so
formed using the procedure prescribed
constructed and sealed as to prevent
in Section VIII of the ASME Code.
moisture from coming into contact (d) The direction of final rolling of
with the insulation (see 173.318(a)(3) of the shell material must be the circum-
this subchapter). Minimum metal ferential orientation of the tank shell.
thicknesses are as follows: (e) Each tank constructed in accord-
Jacket evacu- Jacket not ance with part UHT in Section VIII of
ated evacuated the ASME Code must be postweld heat
Type metal
Gauge Inches Gauge Inches treated as a unit after completion of
all welds to the shell and heads. Other
Stainless steel .............. 18 0.0428 22 0.0269
Low carbon mild steel .. 12 0.0946 14 0.0677 tanks must be postweld heat treated as
Aluminum ..................... ........... 0.125 ........... 0.1000 required in Section VIII of the ASME
Code. For all tanks the method must
(f) An evacuated jacket must be in be as prescribed in the ASME Code.
compliance with the following require- Welded attachments to pads may be
ments: made after postweld heat treatment.
(1) The jacket must be designed to (f) The fabricator shall record the
sustain a minimum critical collapsing heat and slab numbers and the certified
pressure of 30 psig. Charpy impact values of each plate
(2) If the jacket also supports addi- used in the tank on a sketch showing
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
tional loads, such as the weight of the the location of each plate in the shell
tank and lading, the combined stress, and heads of the tank. A copy of the
computed according to the formula in sketch must be provided to the owner
149
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00159 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.3383 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
of the cargo tank and a copy must be tank wall, and the effect of tempera-
retained by the fabricator for at least ture gradients resulting from lading
five years and made available, upon re- and ambient temperature extremes.
quest, to any duly identified represent- When dissimilar materials are used,
ative of the Department. their thermal coefficients must be used
(Approved by the Office of Management and
in calculation of the thermal stresses.
Budget under control number 21370017) (2) Stress concentrations in tension,
bending, and torsion which occur at
[Amdt. 17877, 48 FR 27703, 27713, June 16, pads, cradles, or other supports must
1983, as amended at 49 FR 24316, June 12, 1984;
68 FR 19281, Apr. 18, 2003; 68 FR 75754, Dec. 31,
be considered in accordance with ap-
2003; 70 FR 34076, June 13, 2005] pendix G in Section VIII of the ASME
Code.
178.3383 Structural integrity. (c) Stresses resulting from static and
(a) General requirements and accept- dynamic loadings, or a combination
ance criteria. (1) Except as permitted in thereof, are not uniform throughout
paragraph (d) of this section, the max- the cargo tank motor vehicle. The fol-
imum calculated design stress at any lowing is a simplified procedure for cal-
point in the tank may not exceed the culating the effective stress in the
lesser of the maximum allowable stress tank resulting from static and dynamic
value prescribed in Section VIII of the loadings. The effective stress (the max-
ASME Code (IBR, see 171.7 of this sub- imum principal stress at any point)
chapter), or 25 percent of the tensile must be determined by the following
strength of the material used. formula:
(2) The relevant physical properties S = 0.5 (Sy + Sx) (0.25(Sy Sx)2 + Ss2) 0.5
of the materials used in each tank may
be established either by a certified test Where:
report from the material manufacturer (1) S = effective stress at any given
or by testing in conformance with a point under the most severe combina-
recognized national standard. In either tion of static and dynamic loadings
case, the ultimate tensile strength of that can occur at the same time, in psi.
the material used in the design may (2) Sy = circumferential stress gen-
not exceed 120 percent of the minimum erated by internal and external pres-
ultimate tensile strength specified in sure when applicable, in psi.
either the ASME Code or the ASTM (3) Sx = the net longitudinal stress, in
standard to which the material is man- psi, generated by the following loading
ufactured. conditions:
(3) The maximum design stress at (i) The longitudinal tensile stress
any point in the tank must be cal- generated by internal pressure;
culated separately for the loading con- (ii) The tensile or compressive stress
ditions described in paragraphs (b), (c), generated by the axial load resulting
and (d) of this section. Alternate test from a decelerative force applied inde-
or analytical methods, or a combina- pendently to each suspension assembly
tion thereof, may be used in lieu of the at the road surface using applicable
procedures described in paragraphs (b), static loadings specified in 178.33813
(c), and (d) of this section, if the meth- (b);
ods are accurate and verifiable. (iii) The tensile or compressive stress
(4) Corrosion allowance material may generated by the bending moment re-
not be included to satisfy any of the sulting from a decelerative force ap-
design calculation requirements of this plied independently to each suspension
section. assembly at the road surface using ap-
(b) Static design and construction. (1) plicable static loadings specified in
The static design and construction of 178.33813 (b);
each tank must be in accordance with (iv) The tensile or compressive stress
appendix G in Section VIII of the generated by the axial load resulting
ASME Code (IBR, see 171.7 of this sub- from an accelerative force applied to
chapter). The tank design must include the horizontal pivot of the fifth wheel
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
calculation of stress due to the design supporting the vehicle using applicable
pressure, the weight of lading, the static loadings specified in 178.33813
weight of structures supported by the (b);
150
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00160 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.3383
tenance to the cargo tank or structural (i) Be fabricated from material deter-
support member between the cargo mined to be suitable for welding to
tank and the vehicle or suspension both the cargo tank material and the
151
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00161 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.3384 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
cated so as not to intersect nozzles or manual vent valve, would permit loss
supports other than load rings and of flammable material, an additional
stiffening rings. closure that is leak tight at the tank
152
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00162 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.3389
design pressure must be provided out- (7) All fittings must be rated for the
board of such valve. maximum tank pressure and suitable
[Amdt. 17877, 48 FR 27704, June 16, 1983]
for the coldest temperature to which
they will be subjected in actual serv-
178.3388 Pressure relief devices, ice.
piping, valves, and fittings. (8) All piping, valves, and fittings
(a) Pressure relief devices. Each tank must be grouped in the smallest prac-
pressure relief device must be designed, ticable space and protected from dam-
constructed, and marked in accordance age as required by 178.33810.
with 173.318(b) of this subchapter. (9) When a pressure-building coil is
(b) Piping, valves, and fittings. (1) The used on a tank designed to handle oxy-
burst pressure of all piping, pipe fit- gen or flammable ladings, the vapor
tings, hoses and other pressure parts, connection to that coil must be pro-
except for pump seals and pressure re- vided with a valve or check valve as
lief devices, must be at least 4 times close to the tank shell as practicable to
the design pressure of the tank. Addi- prevent the loss of vapor from the tank
tionally, the burst pressure may not be in case of damage to the coil. The liq-
less than 4 times any higher pressure uid connection to that coil must also
to which each pipe, pipe fitting, hose or be provided with a valve.
other pressure part may be subjected [Amdt. 17877, 48 FR 27704, June 16, 1983, as
to in service. amended by Amdt. 17889, 54 FR 25019, June
(2) Pipe joints must be threaded, 12, 1989]
welded or flanged. If threaded pipe is
used, the pipe and fittings must be 178.3389 Holding time.
Schedule 80 weight or heavier. Malle- (a) Holding time is the time, as de-
able metals must be used in the con- termined by testing, that will elapse
struction of valves and fittings. Where from loading until the pressure of the
copper tubing is permitted, joints shall contents, under equilibrium conditions,
be brazed or be of equally strong metal reaches the level of the lowest pressure
union type. The melting point of the control valve or pressure relief valve
brazing materials may not be lower setting.
than 1000 F. The method of joining (b) Holding time test. (1) The test to
tubing may not reduce the strength of determine holding time must be per-
the tubing, such as by the cutting of formed by charging the tank with a
threads. cryogenic liquid having a boiling point,
(3) Each hose coupling must be de- at a pressure of one atmosphere, abso-
signed for a pressure of at least 120 per- lute, no lower than the design service
cent of the hose design pressure and so temperature of the tank. The tank
that there will be no leakage when con- must be charged to its maximum per-
nected. mitted filling density with that liquid
(4) Piping must be protected from and stabilized to the lowest practical
damage due to thermal expansion and pressure, which must be equal to or
contraction, jarring, and vibration. less than the pressure to be used for
Slip joints are not authorized for this loading. The cargo tank together with
purpose. its contents must then be exposed to
(5) All piping, valves and fittings on a ambient temperature.
cargo tank must be proved free from (2) The tank pressure and ambient
leaks. This requirement is met when temperature must be recorded at 3-
such piping, valves, and fittings have hour intervals until the pressure level
been tested after installation with gas of the contents reaches the set-to-dis-
or air and proved leak tight at not less charge pressure of the pressure control
than the design pressure marked on the valve or pressure relief valve with the
cargo tank. This requirement is appli- lowest setting. This total time lapse in
cable to all hoses used in a cargo tank, hours represents the measured holding
except that hose may be tested before time at the actual average ambient
or after installation on the tank. temperature. This measured holding
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
(6) Each valve must be suitable for time for the test cryogenic liquid must
the tank design pressure at the tank be adjusted to an equivalent holding
design service temperature. time for each cryogenic liquid that is
153
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00163 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.33810 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
154
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00164 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.33811
(c) Rear-end tank protection. Rear-end control must be of fail-safe design and
tank protections devices must: spring-biased to stop the admission of
(1) Consist of at least one rear bump- such pressure into the cargo tank. If
er designed to protect the cargo tank the jacket is not evacuated, the seat of
and piping in the event of a rear-end the valve must be inside the tank, in
collision. The rear-end tank protection the opening nozzle or flange, or in a
device design must transmit the force companion flange bolted to the nozzle.
of the collision directly to the chassis If the jacket is evacuated, the re-
of the vehicle. The rear-end tank pro- motely controlled valve must be lo-
tection device and its attachments to cated as close to the tank as prac-
the chassis must be designed to with- ticable.
stand a load equal to twice the weight
(2) Each remotely controlled shut off
of the loaded cargo tank and attach-
valve must be provided with on-vehicle
ments, using a safety factor of four
remote means of automatic closure,
based on the tensile strength of the
materials used, with such load being both mechanical and thermal. One
applied horizontally and parallel to the means may be used to close more than
major axis of the cargo tank. The rear- one remotely controlled valve. Cable
end tank protection device dimensions linkage between closures and remote
must meet the requirements of 393.86 operators must be corrosion resistant
of this title and extend vertically to a and effective in all types of environ-
height adequate to protect all valves ment and weather. The thermal means
and fittings located at the rear of the must consist of fusible elements actu-
cargo tank from damage that could re- ated at a temperature not exceeding
sult in loss of lading; or 121 C (250 F), or equivalent devices.
(2) Conform to the requirements of The loading/unloading connection area
178.3458(b). is where hoses are connected to the
(d) Every part of the loaded cargo permanent metal piping. The number
tank, and any associated valve, pipe, and location of remote operators and
enclosure, or protective device or thermal devices shall be as follows:
structure (exclusive of wheel assem- (i) On a cargo tank motor vehicle
blies), must be at least 14 inches above over 3,500 gallons water capacity, re-
level ground. mote means of automatic closure must
[Amdt. 17877, 48 FR 27705, June 16, 1983, as be installed at the ends of the cargo
amended at 49 FR 24316, June 12, 1984; Amdt. tank in at least two diagonally oppo-
17899, 58 FR 51534, Oct. 1, 1993; 68 FR 19282, site locations. If the loading/unloading
Apr. 18, 2003; 68 FR 52371, Sept. 3, 2003] connection at the cargo tank is not in
178.33811 Discharge control devices. the general vicinity of one of these lo-
cations, at least one additional ther-
(a) Excess-flow valves are not re- mal device must be installed so that
quired. heat from a fire in the loading/unload-
(b) Each liquid filling and liquid dis- ing connection area will activate the
charge line must be provided with a emergency control system.
shut-off valve located as close to the
(ii) On a cargo tank motor vehicle of
tank as practicable. Unless this valve
3,500 gallons water capacity or less, at
is manually operable at the valve, the
least one remote means of automatic
line must also have a manual shut-off
closure must be installed on the end of
valve.
(c) Except for a cargo tank that is the cargo tank farthest away from the
used to transport argon, carbon diox- loading/unloading connection area. At
ide, helium, krypton, neon, nitrogen, least one thermal device must be in-
xenon, or mixtures thereof, each liquid stalled so that heat from a fire in the
filling and liquid discharge line must loading/unloading connection area will
be provided with an on-vehicle re- activate the emergency control sys-
motely controlled self-closing shutoff tem.
valve.
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
155
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00165 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.33812 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
156
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00166 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.33816
level gauge must be used as the pri- remove any contaminants likely to
mary control for filling. Other gauging react with the lading.
devices, except gauge glasses, may be [68 FR 75755, Dec. 31, 2003]
used, but not as the primary control
for filling. 178.33816 Inspection and testing.
(2) The design pressure of each liquid
(a) General. The material of construc-
level gauging device must be at least
tion of a tank and its appurtenances
that of the tank.
(3) If a fixed length dip tube or must be inspected for conformance to
trycock line gauging device is used, it Section VIII of the ASME Code (IBR,
must consist of a pipe or tube of small see 171.7 of this subchapter). The tank
diameter equipped with a valve at or must be subjected to either a hydro-
near the jacket and extending into the static or pneumatic test. The test pres-
cargo tank to a specified filling height. sure must be one and one-half times
The fixed height at which the tube ends the sum of the design pressure, plus
in the cargo tank must be such that static head of lading, plus 101.3 kPa
the device will function when the liq- (14.7 psi) if subjected to external vacu-
uid reaches the maximum level per- um, except that for tanks constructed
mitted in loading. in accordance with Part UHT in Sec-
(4) The liquid level gauging device tion VIII of the ASME Code the test
used as a primary control for filling pressure must be twice the design pres-
must be designed and installed to accu- sure.
rately indicate the maximum filling (b) Additional requirements for pneu-
level at the point midway of the tank matic test. A pneumatic test may be
both longitudinally and laterally. used in place of the hydrostatic test.
(b) Pressure gauges. Each cargo tank Due regard for protection of all per-
must be provided with a suitable pres- sonnel should be taken because of the
sure gauge indicating the lading pres- potential hazard involved in a pneu-
sure and located on the front of the matic test. The pneumatic test pres-
jacket so it can be read by the driver in sure in the tank must be reached by
gradually increasing the pressure to
the rear view mirror. Each gauge must
one-half of the test pressure. There-
have a reference mark at the cargo
after, the test pressure must be in-
tank design pressure or the set pres-
creased in steps of approximately one-
sure of the pressure relief valve or pres-
tenth of the test pressure until the re-
sure control valve, whichever is lowest.
quired test pressure has been reached.
(c) Orifices. All openings for dip tube
Then the pressure must be reduced to a
gauging devices and pressure gauges in
value equal to four-fifths of the test
flammable cryogenic liquid service
pressure and held for a sufficient time
must be restricted at or inside the
to permit inspection of the cargo tank
jacket by orifices no larger than 0.060-
for leaks.
inch diameter. Trycock lines, if pro- (c) Weld inspection. All tank shell or
vided, may not be greater than 12-inch head welds subject to pressure shall be
nominal pipe size. radiographed in accordance with Sec-
[Amdt. 17877, 48 FR 27706, June 16, 1983, as tion VIII of the ASME Code. A tank
amended at 49 FR 24317, June 12, 1984] which has been subjected to inspection
by the magnetic particle method, the
178.33815 Cleanliness. liquid penetrant method, or any meth-
A cargo tank constructed for oxygen od involving a material deposit on the
service must be thoroughly cleaned to interior tank surface, must be cleaned
remove all foreign material in accord- to remove any such residue by scrub-
ance with CGA G4.1 (IBR, see 171.7 of bing or equally effective means, and all
this subchapter). All loose particles such residue and cleaning solution
from fabrication, such as weld beads, must be removed from the tank prior
dirt, grinding wheel debris, and other to final closure of the tank.
loose materials, must be removed prior (d) Defect repair. All cracks and other
to the final closure of the manhole of defects must be repaired as prescribed
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
the tank. Chemical or solvent cleaning in Section VIII of the ASME Code. The
with a material compatible with the welder and the welding procedure must
intending lading must be performed to be qualified in accordance with Section
157
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00167 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.33817 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
IX of the ASME Code (IBR, see 171.7 of means of forming letters into the
this subchapter). After repair, the tank metal of the plate, with the informa-
must again be postweld heat-treated, if tion required in paragraphs (b) and (c)
such heat treatment was previously of this section, in addition to that re-
performed, and the repaired areas must quired by Section VIII of the ASME
be retested. Code (IBR, see 171.7 of this sub-
(e) Verification must be made of the chapter), in characters at least 316 inch
interior cleanliness of a tank con- high (parenthetical abbreviations may
structed for oxygen service by means be used). All plates must be maintained
that assure that all contaminants that in a legible condition.
are likely to react with the lading have (2) Each insulated cargo tank must
been removed as required by 178.338 have additional plates, as described, at-
15. tached to the jacket in the location
[Amdt. 17877, 48 FR 27706, June 16, 1983, as specified unless the specification plate
amended at 49 FR 24317, June 12, 1984; 49 FR is attached to the chassis and has the
42736, Oct. 24, 1984; 68 FR 75755, Dec. 31, 2003] information required in paragraphs (b)
and (c) of this section.
178.33817 Pumps and compressors. (3) The information required for both
(a) Liquid pumps and gas compressors, the name and specification plate may
if used, must be of suitable design, ade- be displayed on a single plate. If the in-
quately protected against breakage by formation required by this section is
collision, and kept in good condition. displayed on a plate required by Sec-
They may be driven by motor vehicle tion VIII of the ASME Code, the infor-
power take-off or other mechanical, mation need not be repeated on the
electrical, or hydraulic means. Unless name and specification plates.
they are of the centrifugal type, they (4) The specification plate may be at-
shall be equipped with suitable pres- tached to the cargo tank motor vehicle
sure actuated by-pass valves permit- chassis rail by brazing, welding, or
ting flow from discharge to suction to other suitable means on the left side
the tank. near the front head, in a place acces-
(b) A valve or fitting made of alu- sible for inspection. If the specification
minum with internal rubbing or abrad- plate is attached to the chassis rail,
ing aluminum parts that may come in then the cargo tank serial number as-
contact with oxygen (cryogenic liquid) signed by the cargo tank manufacturer
may not be installed on any cargo tank must be included on the plate.
used to transport oxygen (cryogenic
(b) Name plate. The following infor-
liquid) unless the parts are anodized in
mation must be marked on the name
accordance with ASTM B 580 (IBR, see
plate in accordance with this section:
171.7 of this subchapter).
(1) DOT-specification number MC 338
[Amdt. 17889, 54 FR 25020, June 12, 1989, as (DOT MC 338).
amended at 55 FR 37058, Sept. 7, 1990; 67 FR (2) Original test date (Orig, Test
61016, Sept. 27, 2002; 68 FR 75755, Dec. 31, 2003]
Date).
178.33818 Marking. (3) MAWP in psig.
(a) General. Each cargo tank certified (4) Cargo tank test pressure (Test P),
after October 1, 2004 must have a corro- in psig.
sion-resistant metal name plate (5) Cargo tank design temperature
(ASME Plate) and specification plate (Design Temp. Range) ll F to ll
permanently attached to the cargo F.
tank by brazing, welding, or other suit- (6) Nominal capacity (Water Cap.), in
able means on the left side near the pounds.
front, in a place accessible for inspec- (7) Maximum design density of lading
tion. If the specification plate is at- (Max. Lading density), in pounds per
tached directly to the cargo tank wall gallon.
by welding, it must be welded to the (8) Material specification number
tank before the cargo tank is postweld shell (Shell matl, yyy * * *), where
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
158
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00168 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.33819
(9) Material specification number (11) Cargo tank serial number (CT se-
heads (Head matl. yyy * * *), where rial), as assigned by cargo tank manu-
yyy is replaced by the alloy designa- facturer, if applicable.
tion and * * * by the alloy type. NOTE 1 TO PARAGRAPH (c): See 173.315(a) of
NOTE: When the shell and heads materials this chapter regarding water capacity.
are the same thickness, they may be com- NOTE 2 TO PARAGRAPH (c): When the shell
bined, (Shell & head matl, yyy * * *). and head materials are the same thickness,
they may be combined (Shell & head matl,
(10) Weld material (Weld matl.). yyy***).
(11) Minimum Thickness-shell (Min. (d) The design weight of lading used
Shell-thick), in inches. When minimum in determining the loading in 178.338
shell thicknesses are not the same for 3 (b), 178.33810 (b) and (c), and 178.338
different areas, show (top ll, side 13 (b), must be shown as the maximum
ll, bottom ll, in inches). weight of lading marking required by
(12) Minimum thickness-heads (Min paragraph (c) of this section.
heads thick.), in inches.
[68 FR 19283, Apr. 18, 2003, as amended at 68
(13) Manufactured thickness-shell FR 57634, Oct. 6, 2003; 68 FR 75755, Dec. 31,
(Mfd. Shell thick.), top ll, side ll, 2003]
bottom ll, in inches. (Required when
additional thickness is provided for 178.33819 Certification.
corrosion allowance.) (a) At or before the time of delivery,
(14) Manufactured thickness-heads the manufacturer of a cargo tank
(Mfd. Heads thick.), in inches. (Re- motor vehicle shall furnish to the
quired when additional thickness is owner of the completed vehicle the fol-
provided for corrosion allowance.) lowing:
(15) Exposed surface area, in square (1) The tank manufacturers data re-
feet. port as required by the ASME Code
(c) Specification plate. The following (IBR, see 171.7 of this subchapter), and
information must be marked on the a certificate bearing the manufactur-
specification plate in accordance with ers vehicle serial number stating that
this section: the completed cargo tank motor vehi-
(1) Cargo tank motor vehicle manu- cle conforms to all applicable require-
facturer (CTMV mfr.). ments of Specification MC 338, includ-
(2) Cargo tank motor vehicle certifi- ing Section VIII of the ASME Code
cation date (CTMV cert. date). (IBR, see 171.7 of this subchapter) in
(3) Cargo tank manufacturer (CT effect on the date (month, year) of cer-
mfr.). tification. The registration numbers of
(4) Cargo tank date of manufacture the manufacturer, the Design Certi-
(CT date of mfr.), month and year. fying Engineer, and the Registered In-
spector, as appropriate, must appear on
(5) Maximum weight of lading (Max.
the certificates (see subpart F, part 107
Payload), in pounds.
in subchapter B of this chapter).
(6) Maximum loading rate in gallons (2) A photograph, pencil rub, or other
per minute (Max. Load rate, GPM). facsimile of the plates required by
(7) Maximum unloading rate in gal- paragraphs (a) and (b) of 178.338-18.
lons per minute (Max Unload rate). (b) In the case of a cargo tank vehicle
(8) Lining materials (Lining), if ap- manufactured in two or more stages,
plicable. each manufacturer who performs a
(9) Insulated for oxygen service or manufacturing operation on the incom-
Not insulated for oxygen service as plete vehicle or portion thereof shall
appropriate. furnish to the succeeding manufac-
(10) Marked rated holding time for at turer, at or before the time of delivery,
least one cryogenic liquid, in hours, a certificate covering the particular
and the name of that cryogenic liquid operation performed by that manufac-
(MRHT ll hrs, name of cryogenic liq- turer, and any certificates received
uid). Marked rated holding marking for from previous manufacturers, Reg-
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
159
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00169 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.340178.343 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
and other information to indicate the Appurtenance means any cargo tank
location, make, model and size of each accessory attachment that has no lad-
valve and the arrangement of all piping ing retention or containment function
associated with the tank. Each certifi- and provides no structural support to
cate must be signed by an official of the cargo tank.
the manufacturing firm responsible for Baffle means a non-liquid-tight trans-
the portion of the complete cargo tank verse partition device that deflects,
vehicle represented thereby, such as checks or regulates fluid motion in a
basic tank fabrication, insulation, tank.
jacket, or piping. The final manufac- Bulkhead means a liquid-tight trans-
turer shall furnish the owner with all verse closure at the ends of or between
certificates, as well as the documents cargo tanks.
required by paragraph (a) of this sec- Charging line means a hose, tube,
tion. pipe, or similar device used to pres-
(c) The owner shall retain the data surize a tank with material other than
report, certificates, and related papers the lading.
throughout his ownership of the cargo Companion flange means one of two
tank. In the event of change of owner- mating flanges where the flange faces
ship, the prior owner shall retain non- are in contact or separated only by a
fading photographically reproduced thin leak sealing gasket and are se-
copies of these documents for at least cured to one another by bolts or
one year. Each operator using the clamps.
cargo tank vehicle, if not the owner Connecting structure means the struc-
thereof, shall obtain a copy of the data ture joining two cargo tanks.
report and the certificate or certifi- Constructed and certified in conform-
cates and retain them during the time ance with the ASME Code means the
he uses the cargo tank and for at least cargo tank is constructed and stamped
one year thereafter. in accordance with the ASME Code,
(Approved by the Office of Management and and is inspected and certified by an Au-
Budget under control number 21370017) thorized Inspector.
Constructed in accordance with the
[Amdt. 17877, 48 FR 27707, 27713, June 16,
1983, as amended by Amdt. 17889, 55 FR ASME Code means the cargo tank is
37058, Sept. 7, 1990; Amdt. 17899, 58 FR 51534, constructed in accordance with the
Oct. 1, 1993; 62 FR 51561, Oct. 1, 1997; 68 FR ASME Code with the authorized excep-
75755, Dec. 31, 2003] tions (see 178.346, 178.347, and 178.348)
and is inspected and certified by a Reg-
178.340178.343 [Reserved] istered Inspector.
External self-closing stop-valve means
178.345 General design and construc-
tion requirements applicable to a self-closing stop-valve designed so
Specification DOT 406 ( 178.346), that the self-stored energy source is lo-
DOT 407 ( 178.347), and DOT 412 cated outside the cargo tank and the
( 178.348) cargo tank motor vehi- welded flange.
cles. Extreme dynamic loading means the
maximum single-acting loading a cargo
178.3451 General requirements. tank motor vehicle may experience
(a) Specification DOT 406, DOT 407 during its expected life, excluding acci-
and DOT 412 cargo tank motor vehicles dent loadings.
must conform to the requirements of Flange means the structural ring for
this section in addition to the require- guiding or attachment of a pipe or fit-
ments of the applicable specification ting with another flange (companion
contained in 178.346, 178.347 or 178.348. flange), pipe, fitting or other attach-
(b) All specification requirements are ment.
minimum requirements. Inspection pressure means the pres-
(c) Definitions. See 178.320(a) for the sure used to determine leak tightness
definition of certain terms used in of the cargo tank when testing with
178.345, 178.346, 178.347, and 178.348. In pneumatic pressure.
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
160
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00170 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.3451
inside the cargo tank or cargo tank piping or devices in case of a rear end
sump, or within the welded flange, and collision.
the valve seat is located within the Sacrificial device means an element,
cargo tank or within one inch of the such as a shear section, designed to fail
external face of the welded flange or under a load in order to prevent dam-
sump of the cargo tank. age to any lading retention part or de-
Lading means the hazardous material vice. The device must break under
contained in a cargo tank. strain at no more than 70 percent of
Loading/unloading connection means the strength of the weakest piping ele-
the fitting in the loading/unloading ment between the cargo tank and the
line farthest from the loading/unload- sacrificial device. Operation of the sac-
ing outlet to which the loading/unload- rificial device must leave the remaining
ing hose or device is attached. piping and its attachment to the cargo
Loading/unloading outlet means the tank intact and capable of retaining
cargo tank outlet used for normal load- lading.
ing/unloading operations. Self-closing stop-valve means a stop-
Loading/unloading stop-valve means valve held in the closed position by
the stop valve farthest from the cargo means of self-stored energy, which
tank loading/unloading outlet to which opens only by application of an exter-
the loading/unloading connection is at- nal force and which closes when the ex-
tached. ternal force is removed.
MAWP. See 178.320(a). Shear section means a sacrificial de-
Multi-specification cargo tank motor ve- vice fabricated in such a manner as to
hicle means a cargo tank motor vehicle abruptly reduce the wall thickness of
equipped with two or more cargo tanks the adjacent piping or valve material
fabricated to more than one cargo tank by at least 30 percent.
specification. Shell means the circumferential por-
Normal operating loading means the tion of a cargo tank defined by the
loading a cargo tank motor vehicle basic design radius or radii excluding
may be expected to experience rou- the closing heads.
tinely in operation. Stop-valve means a valve that stops
Nozzle means the subassembly con- the flow of lading.
sisting of a pipe or tubular section with Sump means a protrusion from the
or without a welded or forged flange on bottom of a cargo tank shell designed
one end. to facilitate complete loading and un-
Outlet means any opening in the shell loading of lading.
or head of a cargo tank, (including the Tank means a container, consisting
means for attaching a closure), except of a shell and heads, that forms a pres-
that the following are not outlets: A sure tight vessel having openings de-
threaded opening securely closed dur- signed to accept pressure tight fittings
ing transportation with a threaded or closures, but excludes any appur-
plug or a threaded cap, a flanged open- tenances, reinforcements, fittings, or
ing securely closed during transpor- closures.
tation with a bolted or welded blank Test pressure means the pressure to
flange, a manhole, or gauging devices, which a tank is subjected to determine
thermometer wells, and safety relief pressure integrity.
devices. Toughness of material means the capa-
Outlet stop-valve means the stop-valve bility of a material to absorb the en-
at the cargo tank loading/unloading ergy represented by the area under the
outlet. stress strain curve (indicating the en-
Pipe coupling means a fitting with in- ergy absorbed per unit volume of the
ternal threads on both ends. material) up to the point of rupture.
Rear bumper means the structure de- Vacuum cargo tank means a cargo
signed to prevent a vehicle or object tank that is loaded by reducing the
from under-riding the rear of a motor pressure in the cargo tank to below at-
vehicle. See 393.86 of this title. mospheric pressure.
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
161
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00171 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.3452 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
but which may be altered to meet an- in all respects with the specification
other specification by changing relief for which it is certified.
device, closures, lading discharge de- (2) The strength of the connecting
vices, and other lading retention de- structure joining multiple cargo tanks
vices. in a cargo tank motor vehicle must
Void means the space between tank meet the structural design require-
heads or bulkheads and a connecting ments in 178.3453. Any void within
structure. the connecting structure must be
Welded flange means a flange at- equipped with a drain located on the
tached to the tank by a weld joining bottom centerline that is accessible
the tank shell to the cylindrical outer and kept open at all times. For carbon
surface of the flange, or by a fillet weld steel, self-supporting cargo tanks, the
joining the tank shell to a flange drain configuration may consist of a
shaped to fit the shell contour. single drain of at least 1.0 inch diame-
(d) A manufacturer of a cargo tank ter, or two or more drains of at least
must hold a current ASME certificate 0.5 inch diameter, 6.0 inches apart, one
of authorization and must be registered of which is located as close to the bot-
with the Department in accordance tom centerline as practicable. Vapors
with part 107, subpart F of this chapter. trapped in a void within the connecting
(e) All construction must be certified structure must be allowed to escape to
by an Authorized Inspector or by a the atmosphere either through the
Registered Inspector as applicable to drain or a separate vent.
the cargo tank. (j) Variable specification cargo tank. A
(f) Each cargo tank must be designed cargo tank that may be physically al-
and constructed in conformance with tered to conform to another cargo tank
the requirements of the applicable specification must have the required
cargo tank specification. Each DOT 412 physical alterations to convert from
cargo tank with a MAWP greater one specification to another clearly in-
than 15 psig, and each DOT 407 cargo dicated on the variable specification
tank with a maximum allowable work- plate.
ing pressure greater than 35 psig must
[Amdt. 17889, 54 FR 25020, June 12, 1989, as
be constructed and certified in con- amended at 55 FR 37058, Sept. 7, 1990; Amdt.
formance with Section VIII of the 178105, 59 FR 55173, Nov. 3, 1994; Amdt. 178
ASME Code (IBR, see 171.7 of this 118, 61 FR 51340, Oct. 1, 1996; 66 FR 45387,
subchapter) except as limited or modi- 45389, Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR 19283, Apr. 18, 2003;
fied by the applicable cargo tank speci- 68 FR 52371, Sept. 3, 2003; 68 FR 75755, Dec. 31,
fication. Other cargo tanks must be 2003; 70 FR 56099, Sept. 23, 2005; 76 FR 43532,
constructed in accordance with Sec- July 20, 2011]
tion VIII of the ASME Code, except as
178.3452 Material and material
limited or modified by the applicable thickness.
cargo tank specification.
(g) Requirements relating to parts (a) All material for shell, heads,
and accessories on motor vehicles, bulkheads, and baffles must conform to
which are contained in part 393 of the Section II of the ASME Code (IBR, see
Federal Motor Carrier Safety Regula- 171.7 of this subchapter) except as fol-
tions of this title, are incorporated lows:
into these specifications. (1) The following steels are also au-
(h) Any additional requirements pre- thorized for cargo tanks constructed
scribed in part 173 of this subchapter in accordance with the ASME Code,
that pertain to the transportation of a Section VIII.
specific lading are incorporated into ASTM A 569
these specifications. ASTM A 570
(i) Cargo tank motor vehicle composed ASTM A 572
of multiple cargo tanks. (1) A cargo tank ASTM A 622
motor vehicle composed of more than ASTM A 656
one cargo tank may be constructed ASTM A 715
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
162
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00172 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.3453
163
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00173 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.3453 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
supported by the cargo tank wall and and normal operating loadings that can
the effect of temperature gradients re- occur at the same time, in psi.
sulting from lading and ambient tem- (ii) Sy = circumferential stress gen-
perature extremes. When dissimilar erated by the MAWP and external pres-
materials are used, their thermal coef- sure, when applicable, plus static head,
ficients must be used in the calculation in psi.
of thermal stresses. (iii) Sx = The following net longitu-
(1) Stress concentrations in tension, dinal stress generated by the following
bending and torsion which occur at static and normal operating loading
pads, cradles, or other supports must conditions, in psi:
be considered in accordance with ap- (A) The longitudinal stresses result-
pendix G in Section VIII of the ASME ing from the MAWP and external pres-
Code. sure, when applicable, plus static head,
(2) Longitudinal compressive buck- in combination with the bending stress
ling stress for ASME certified vessels generated by the static weight of the
must be calculated using paragraph fully loaded cargo tank motor vehicle,
UG23(b) in Section VIII of the ASME all structural elements, equipment and
Code. For cargo tanks not required to appurtenances supported by the cargo
be certified in accordance with the tank wall;
ASME Code, compressive buckling (B) The tensile or compressive stress
stress may be calculated using alter- resulting from normal operating longi-
native analysis methods which are ac- tudinal acceleration or deceleration. In
curate and verifiable. When alternative each case, the forces applied must be
methods are used, calculations must 0.35 times the vertical reaction at the
include both the static loads described suspension assembly, applied at the
in this paragraph and the dynamic road surface, and as transmitted to the
loads described in paragraph (c) of this cargo tank wall through the suspension
section. assembly of a trailer during decelera-
tion; or the horizontal pivot of the
(3) Cargo tank designers and manu-
truck tractor or converter dolly fifth
facturers must consider all of the con-
wheel, or the drawbar hinge on the
ditions specified in 173.33(c) of this
fixed dolly during acceleration; or an-
subchapter when matching a cargo
choring and support members of a
tanks performance characteristic to
truck during acceleration and decelera-
the characteristic of each lading trans-
tion, as applicable. The vertical reac-
ported.
tion must be calculated based on the
(c) Shell design. Shell stresses result-
static weight of the fully loaded cargo
ing from static or dynamic loadings, or
tank motor vehicle, all structural ele-
combinations thereof, are not uniform
ments, equipment and appurtenances
throughout the cargo tank motor vehi-
supported by the cargo tank wall. The
cle. The vertical, longitudinal, and lat-
following loadings must be included:
eral normal operating loadings can
(1) The axial load generated by a
occur simultaneously and must be
decelerative force;
combined. The vertical, longitudinal
(2) The bending moment generated by
and lateral extreme dynamic loadings
a decelerative force;
occur separately and need not be com-
(3) The axial load generated by an ac-
bined.
celerative force; and
(1) Normal operating loadings. The fol- (4) The bending moment generated by
lowing procedure addresses stress in an accelerative force; and
the cargo tank shell resulting from (C) The tensile or compressive stress
normal operating loadings. The effec- generated by the bending moment re-
tive stress (the maximum principal sulting from normal operating vertical
stress at any point) must be deter- accelerative force equal to 0.35 times
mined by the following formula: the vertical reaction at the suspension
S = 0.5(Sy + SX) [0.25(Sy SX)2 + SS2]0.5 assembly of a trailer; or the horizontal
pivot of the upper coupler (fifth wheel)
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
164
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00174 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.3453
based on the static weight of the fully treme dynamic loadings. The effective
loaded cargo tank motor vehicle, all stress (the maximum principal stress
structural elements, equipment and ap- at any point) must be determined by
purtenances supported by the cargo the following formula:
tank wall.
S = 0.5(Sy + Sx) [0.25(Sy Sx)2 + SS2]0.5
(iv) SS = The following shear stresses
generated by the following static and Where:
normal operating loading conditions,
(i) S = effective stress at any given
in psi:
point under a combination of static
(A) The static shear stress resulting
and extreme dynamic loadings that can
from the vertical reaction at the sus-
occur at the same time, in psi.
pension assembly of a trailer, and the
horizontal pivot of the upper coupler (ii) Sy = circumferential stress gen-
(fifth wheel) or turntable; or anchoring erated by MAWP and external pressure,
and support members of a truck, as ap- when applicable, plus static head, in
plicable. The vertical reaction must be psi.
calculated based on the static weight (iii) Sx = the following net longitu-
of the fully loaded cargo tank motor dinal stress generated by the following
vehicle, all structural elements, equip- static and extreme dynamic loading
ment and appurtenances supported by conditions, in psi:
the cargo tank wall; (A) The longitudinal stresses result-
(B) The vertical shear stress gen- ing from the MAWP and external pres-
erated by a normal operating accelera- sure, when applicable, plus static head,
tive force equal to 0.35 times the in combination with the bending stress
vertical reaction at the suspension as- generated by the static weight of the
sembly of a trailer; or the horizontal fully loaded cargo tank motor vehicle,
pivot of the upper coupler (fifth wheel) all structural elements, equipment and
or turntable; or anchoring and support appurtenances supported by the tank
members of a truck, as applicable. The wall;
vertical reaction must be calculated (B) The tensile or compressive stress
based on the static weight of the fully resulting from extreme longitudinal
loaded cargo tank motor vehicle, all acceleration or deceleration. In each
structural elements, equipment and ap- case the forces applied must be 0.7
purtenances supported by the cargo times the vertical reaction at the sus-
tank wall; pension assembly, applied at the road
(C) The lateral shear stress generated surface, and as transmitted to the
by a normal operating lateral accelera- cargo tank wall through the suspension
tive force equal to 0.2 times the assembly of a trailer during decelera-
vertical reaction at each suspension as- tion; or the horizontal pivot of the
sembly of a trailer, applied at the road truck tractor or converter dolly fifth
surface, and as transmitted to the wheel, or the drawbar hinge on the
cargo tank wall through the suspension fixed dolly during acceleration; or the
assembly of a trailer, and the hori- anchoring and support members of a
zontal pivot of the upper coupler (fifth truck during acceleration and decelera-
wheel) or turntable; or anchoring and tion, as applicable. The vertical reac-
support members of a truck, as applica- tion must be calculated based on the
ble. The vertical reaction must be cal- static weight of the fully loaded cargo
culated based on the static weight of tank motor vehicle, all structural ele-
the fully loaded cargo tank motor vehi- ments, equipment and appurtenances
cle, all structural elements, equipment supported by the cargo tank wall. The
and appurtenances supported by the following loadings must be included:
cargo tank wall; and (1) The axial load generated by a
(D) The torsional shear stress gen- decelerative force;
erated by the same lateral forces as de- (2) The bending moment generated by
scribed in paragraph (c)(1)(iv)(C) of this a decelerative force;
section. (3) The axial load generated by an ac-
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
165
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00175 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.3453 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
based on the static weight of the fully cargo tank wall must be made by at-
loaded cargo tank motor vehicle, all tachment of a mounting pad so that
structural elements, equipment and ap- there will be no adverse effect upon the
166
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00176 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.3455
167
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00177 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.3456 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
168
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00178 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.3458
I/C = 0.00027WL, for MS, HSLA and SS; (a) General. Each cargo tank motor
or vehicle must be designed and con-
I/C = 0.000467WL, for aluminum alloys; structed in accordance with the re-
quirements of this section and the ap-
Where: plicable individual specification to
I/C = Section modulus in inches 3 minimize the potential for the loss of
W = Tank width, or diameter, inches lading due to an accident.
L = Spacing of ring stiffener, inches; i.e., the (1) Any dome, sump, or washout
maximum longitudinal distance from the
midpoint of the unsupported shell on one
cover plate projecting from the cargo
side of the ring stiffener to the midpoint tank wall that retains lading in any
of the unsupported shell on the opposite tank orientation, must be as strong
side of the ring stiffener. and tough as the cargo tank wall and
have a thickness at least equal to that
(2) If a ring stiffener is welded to the
specified by the appropriate cargo tank
cargo tank shell, a portion of the shell
specification. Any such projection lo-
may be considered as part of the ring
cated in the lower 13 of the tank cir-
section for purposes of computing the
cumference (or cross section perimeter
ring section modulus. This portion of
for non-circular cargo tanks) that ex-
the shell may be used provided at least
tends more than half its diameter at
50 percent of the total circumference of
the point of attachment to the tank or
the cargo tank is welded and the length
more than 4 inches from the cargo tank
of any unwelded space on the joint does
wall, or located in the upper 23 of the
not exceed 40 times the shell thickness.
tank circumference (or cross section
The maximum portion of the shell to
perimeter for non-circular cargo tanks)
be used in these calculations is as fol-
that extends more than 14 its diameter
lows:
or more than 2 inches from the point of
Number of circum- Shell sec-
attachment to the tank must have ac-
ferential ring stiffener- J1 cident damage protection devices that
tion
to-shell welds
are:
1 .................................. ..................................... 20t (i) As specified in this section;
2 .................................. Less than 20t ............. 20t + J
2 .................................. 20t or more ................. 40t
(ii) 125 percent as strong as the other-
1 where:
wise required accident damage protec-
t = Shell thickness, inches; tion device; or
J = Longitudinal distance between parallel circumferential (iii) Attached to the cargo tank in
ring stiffener-to-shell welds.
accordance with the requirements of
(3) When used to meet the vacuum re- paragraph (a)(3) of this section.
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
quirements of this section, ring stiff- (2) Outlets, valves, closures, piping,
eners must be as prescribed in Section or any devices that if damaged in an
VIII of the ASME Code. accident could result in a loss of lading
169
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00179 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.3458 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
from the cargo tank must be protected be calculated at the gross vehicle
by accident damage protection devices weight rating of the cargo tank motor
as specified in this section. vehicle.
(3) Accident damage protection de- (b) Each outlet, projection or piping
vices attached to the wall of a cargo located in the lower 13 of the cargo
tank must be able to withstand or de- tank circumference (or cross section
flect away from the cargo tank the perimeter for non-circular cargo tanks)
loads specified in this section. They that could be damaged in an accident
must be designed, constructed and in- that may result in the loss of lading
stalled so as to maximize the distribu- must be protected by a bottom damage
tion of loads to the cargo tank wall and protection device, except as provided
to minimize the possibility of ad- by paragraph (a)(1) of this section and
versely affecting the lading retention 173.33(e) of this subchapter. Outlets,
integrity of the cargo tank. Accident projections and piping may be grouped
induced stresses resulting from the ap- or clustered together and protected by
propriate accident damage protection a single protection device.
device requirements in combination (1) Any bottom damage protection
with the stresses from the cargo tank device must be able to withstand a
operating at the MAWP may not result force of 155,000 pounds (based on the ul-
in a cargo tank wall stress greater timate strength of the material) from
than the ultimate strength of the ma- the front, side, or rear, uniformly dis-
terial of construction using a safety tributed over each surface of the de-
factor of 1.3. Deformation of the pro- vice, over an area not to exceed 6
tection device is acceptable provided square feet, and a width not to exceed
the devices being protected are not 6 feet. Suspension components and
damaged when loads specified in this structural mounting members may be
section are applied. used to provide all, or part, of this pro-
(4) Any piping that extends beyond tection. The device must extend no less
an accident damage protection device than 6 inches beyond any component
must be equipped with a stop-valve and that may contain lading in transit.
a sacrificial device such as a shear sec- (2) A lading discharge opening
tion. The sacrificial device must be lo- equipped with an internal self-closing
cated in the piping system outboard of stop-valve need not conform to para-
the stop-valve and within the accident graph (b)(1) of this section provided it
damage protection device to prevent is protected so as to reasonably assure
any accidental loss of lading. The de- against the accidental loss of lading.
vice must break at no more than 70 This protection must be provided by a
percent of the load that would be re- sacrificial device located outboard of
quired to cause the failure of the pro- each internal self-closing stop-valve
tected lading retention device, part or and within 4 inches of the major radius
cargo tank wall. The failure of the sac- of the cargo tank shell or within 4
rificial device must leave the protected inches of a sump, but in no case more
lading retention device and its attach- than 8 inches from the major radius of
ment to the cargo tank wall intact and the tank shell. The device must break
capable of retaining product. at no more than 70 percent of the load
(5) Minimum road clearance. The min- that would be required to cause the
imum road clearance of any cargo tank failure of the protected lading reten-
motor vehicle component or protection tion device, part or cargo tank wall.
device located between any two adja- The failure of the sacrificial device
cent axles on a vehicle or vehicle com- must leave the protected lading reten-
bination must be at least one-half inch tion device or part and its attachment
for each foot separating the component to the cargo tank wall intact and capa-
or device from the nearest axle of the ble of retaining product.
adjacent pair, but in no case less than (c) Each closure for openings, includ-
twelve (12) inches, except that the min- ing but not limited to the manhole,
imum road clearance for landing gear filling or inspection openings, and each
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
or other attachments within ten (10) valve, fitting, pressure relief device,
feet of an axle must be no less than ten vapor recovery stop valve or lading re-
(10) inches. These measurements must taining fitting located in the upper 23
170
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00180 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.3458
of a cargo tank circumference (or cross during transit and with any part of the
section perimeter for non-circular rear-end protection device, or with a
tanks) must be protected by being lo- vertical plane passing through the out-
cated within or between adjacent roll- board surface of the protection device.
over damage protection devices, or by (2) The dimensions of the rear-end
being 125 percent of the strength that cargo tank protection device shall con-
would be provided by the otherwise re- form to the following:
quired damage protection device. (i) The bottom surface of the rear-end
(1) A rollover damage protection de- protection device must be at least 4
vice on a cargo tank motor vehicle inches below the lower surface of any
must be designed and installed to with- part at the rear of the cargo tank
stand loads equal to twice the weight motor vehicle which contains lading
of the loaded cargo tank motor vehicle during transit and not more than 60
applied as follows: normal to the cargo inches from the ground when the vehi-
tank shell (perpendicular to the cargo cle is empty.
tank surface); and tangential (perpen- (ii) The maximum width of a notch,
dicular to the normal load) from any indentation, or separation between sec-
direction. The stresses shall not exceed tions of a rear-end cargo tank protec-
the ultimate strength of the material tion device may not exceed 24 inches. A
of construction. These design loads notched, indented, or separated rear-
may be considered to be uniformly dis- end protection device may be used only
tributed and independently applied. If when the piping at the rear of the
more than one rollover protection de- cargo tank is equipped with a sacrifi-
vice is used, each device must be capa- cial device outboard of a shut-off valve.
ble of carrying its proportionate share (iii) The widest part of the motor ve-
of the required loads and in each case hicle at the rear may not extend more
at least one-fourth the total tangential than 18 inches beyond the outermost
load. The design must be proven capa- ends of the device or (if separated) de-
ble of carrying the required loads by vices on either side of the vehicle.
calculations, tests or a combination of (3) The structure of the rear-end pro-
tests and calculations. tection device and its attachment to
(2) A rollover damage protection de- the vehicle must be designed to satisfy
vice that would otherwise allow the ac- the conditions specified in paragraph
cumulation of liquid on the top of the (d)(1) of this section when subjected to
cargo tank, must be provided with a an impact of the cargo tank motor ve-
drain that directs the liquid to a safe hicle at rated payload, at a decelera-
point of discharge away from any tion of 2 g. Such impact must be
structural component of the cargo considered as being uniformly applied
tank motor vehicle. in the horizontal plane at an angle of
(d) Rear-end tank protection. Each 10 degrees or less to the longitudinal
cargo tank motor vehicle must be pro- axis of the vehicle.
vided with a rear-end tank protection (e) Longitudinal deceleration protec-
device to protect the cargo tank and tion. In order to account for stresses
piping in the event of a rear-end colli- due to longitudinal impact in an acci-
sion and reduce the likelihood of dam- dent, the cargo tank shell and heads
age that could result in the loss of lad- must be able to withstand the load re-
ing. Nothing in this paragraph relieves sulting from the design pressure in
the manufacturer of responsibility for combination with the dynamic pres-
complying with the requirements of sure resulting from a longitudinal de-
393.86 of this title and, if applicable, celeration of 2 g. For this loading
paragraph (b) of this section. The rear- condition, the allowable stress value
end tank protection device must con- used may not exceed the ultimate
form to the following requirements: strength of the material of construc-
(1) The rear-end cargo tank protec- tion using a safety factor of 1.3. Per-
tion device must be designed so that it formance testing, analytical methods,
can deflect at least 6 inches hori- or a combination thereof, may be used
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
zontally forward with no contact be- to prove this capability provided the
tween any part of the cargo tank methods are accurate and verifiable.
motor vehicle which contains lading For cargo tanks with internal baffles,
171
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00181 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.3459 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
the decelerative force may be reduced ment is located outboard of the lading
by 0.25 g for each baffle assembly, retention system.
but in no case may the total reduction
[Amdt. 17889, 54 FR 25025, June 12, 1989, as
in decelerative force exceed 1.0 g. amended at 55 FR 37061, Sept. 7, 1990, Amdt.
[Amdt. 17889, 54 FR 25023, June 12, 1989, as 17889, 56 FR 27877, June 17, 1991; Amdt. 178
amended at 55 FR 37061, Sept. 7, 1990; Amdt. 118, 61 FR 51341, Oct. 1, 1996]
178105, 59 FR 55175, Nov. 3, 1994; Amdt. 178
118, 61 FR 51341, Oct. 1, 1996; 68 FR 19284, Apr. 178.34510 Pressure relief.
18, 2003] (a) Each cargo tank must be equipped
to relieve pressure and vacuum condi-
178.3459 Pumps, piping, hoses and tions in conformance with this section
connections.
and the applicable individual specifica-
(a) Suitable means must be provided tion. The pressure and vacuum relief
during loading or unloading operations system must be designed to operate
to ensure that pressure within a cargo and have sufficient capacity to prevent
tank does not exceed test pressure. cargo tank rupture or collapse due to
(b) Each hose, piping, stop-valve, lad- over-pressurization or vacuum result-
ing retention fitting and closure must ing from loading, unloading, or from
be designed for a bursting pressure of heating and cooling of lading. Pressure
the greater of 100 psig or four times the relief systems are not required to con-
MAWP. form to the ASME Code.
(c) Each hose coupling must be de- (b) Type and construction of relief sys-
signed for a bursting pressure of the tems and devices. (1) Each cargo tank
greater of 120 psig or 4.8 times the must be provided with a primary pres-
MAWP of the cargo tank, and must be sure relief system consisting of one or
designed so that there will be no leak- more reclosing pressure relief valves. A
age when connected. secondary pressure relief system con-
(d) Suitable provision must be made sisting of another pressure relief valve
to allow for and prevent damage due to in parallel with the primary pressure
expansion, contraction, jarring, and vi- relief system may be used to augment
bration. Slip joints may not be used for the total venting capacity of the cargo
this purpose in the lading retention tank. Non-reclosing pressure relief de-
system. vices are not authorized in any cargo
tank except when in series with a re-
(e) Any heating device, when in-
closing pressure relief device. Gravity
stalled, must be so constructed that
actuated reclosing valves are not au-
the breaking of its external connec-
thorized on any cargo tank.
tions will not cause leakage of the
(2) When provided by 173.33(c)(1)(iii)
cargo tank lading.
of this subchapter, cargo tanks may be
(f) Any gauging, loading or charging
equipped with a normal vent. Such
device, including associated valves,
vents must be set to open at not less
must be provided with an adequate than 1 psig and must be designed to
means of secure closure to prevent prevent loss of lading through the de-
leakage. vice in case of vehicle overturn.
(g) The attachment and construction (3) Each pressure relief system must
of each loading/unloading or charging be designed to withstand dynamic pres-
line must be of sufficient strength, or sure surges in excess of the design set
be protected by a sacrificial device, pressure as specified in paragraphs
such that any load applied by loading/ (b)(3) (i) and (ii) of this section. Set
unloading or charging lines connected pressure is a function of MAWP as set
to the cargo tank cannot cause damage forth in paragraph (d) of this section.
resulting in loss of lading from the (i) Each pressure relief device must
cargo tank. be able to withstand dynamic pressure
(h) Use of a nonmetallic pipe, valve surge reaching 30 psig above the design
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
or connection that is not as strong and set pressure and sustained above the
heat resistant as the cargo tank mate- set pressure for at least 60 milliseconds
rial is authorized only if such attach- with a total volume of liquid released
172
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00182 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.34510
not exceeding one gallon before the re- the required vent capacity is main-
lief device recloses to a leak-tight con- tained.
dition. This requirement must be met (d) Settings of pressure relief system.
regardless of vehicle orientation. This The set pressure of the pressure relief
capability must be demonstrated by system is the pressure at which it
testing. An acceptable method is out- starts to open, allowing discharge.
lined in TTMA RP No. 8197 Perform- (1) Primary pressure relief system. The
ance of Spring Loaded Pressure Relief set pressure of each primary relief
Valves on MC 306, MC 307, MC 312, DOT valve must be no less than 120 percent
406, DOT 407, and DOT 412 Tanks (in- of the MAWP, and no more than 132
corporated by reference; see 171.7 of percent of the MAWP. The valve must
this subchapter). reclose at not less than 108 percent of
(ii) After August 31, 1995, each pres- the MAWP and remain closed at lower
sure relief device must be able to with- pressures.
stand a dynamic pressure surge reach- (2) Secondary pressure relief system.
ing 30 psig above the design set pres- The set pressure of each pressure relief
sure and sustained above the design set valve used as a secondary relief device
pressure for at least 60 milliseconds must be not less than 120 percent of the
with a total volume of liquid released MAWP.
not exceeding 1 L before the relief (e) Venting capacity of pressure relief
valve recloses to a leak-tight condi- systems. The pressure relief system (pri-
tion. This requirement must be met re- mary and secondary, including piping)
gardless of vehicle orientation. This must have sufficient venting capacity
capability must be demonstrated by to limit the cargo tank internal pres-
testing. TTMA RP No. 81, cited in para- sure to not more than the cargo tank
graph (b)(3)(i) of this section, is an ac- test pressure. The total venting capac-
ity, rated at not more than the cargo
ceptable test procedure.
tank test pressure, must be at least
(4) Each reclosing pressure relief
that specified in table I, except as pro-
valve must be constructed and in-
vided in 178.3484.
stalled in such a manner as to prevent
unauthorized adjustment of the relief TABLE IMINIMUM EMERGENCY VENT CAPACITY
valve setting. [In cubic feet free air/hour at 60 F and 1 atm.]
(5) No shut-off valve or other device
Cubic feet
that could prevent venting through the Exposed area in square feet free air per
pressure relief system may be installed hour
in a pressure relief system. 20 ....................................................................... 15,800
(6) The pressure relief system must 30 ....................................................................... 23,700
be mounted, shielded and drainable so 40 ....................................................................... 31,600
50 ....................................................................... 39,500
as to minimize the accumulation of 60 ....................................................................... 47,400
material that could impair the oper- 70 ....................................................................... 55,300
ation or discharge capability of the 80 ....................................................................... 63,300
90 ....................................................................... 71,200
system by freezing, corrosion or block- 100 ..................................................................... 79,100
age. 120 ..................................................................... 94,900
(c) Location of relief devices. Each 140 ..................................................................... 110,700
160 ..................................................................... 126,500
pressure relief device must commu- 180 ..................................................................... 142,300
nicate with the vapor space above the 200 ..................................................................... 158,100
lading as near as practicable to the 225 ..................................................................... 191,300
250 ..................................................................... 203,100
center of the vapor space. For example, 275 ..................................................................... 214,300
on a cargo tank designed to operate in 300 ..................................................................... 225,100
350 ..................................................................... 245,700
a level attitude, the device should be 400 ..................................................................... 265,000
positioned at the horizontal and trans- 450 ..................................................................... 283,200
verse center of the cargo tank; on 500 ..................................................................... 300,600
550 ..................................................................... 317,300
cargo tanks sloped to the rear, the de- 600 ..................................................................... 333,300
vice should be located in the forward 650 ..................................................................... 348,800
half of the cargo tank. The discharge 700 ..................................................................... 363,700
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
173
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00183 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.34511 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
TABLE IMINIMUM EMERGENCY VENT percent of the average value for the de-
CAPACITYContinued vices tested.
[In cubic feet free air/hour at 60 F and 1 atm.] (3) The rated flow capacity derived
for each device model must be certified
Cubic feet
Exposed area in square feet free air per by a responsible official of the device
hour manufacturer.
950 ..................................................................... 432,300 (h) Marking of pressure relief devices.
1,000 .................................................................. 445,000 Each pressure relief device must be
Note 1: Interpolate for intermediate sizes. permanently marked with the fol-
lowing:
(1) Primary pressure relief system. Un- (1) Manufacturers name;
less otherwise specified in the applica-
(2) Model number;
ble individual specification, the pri-
(3) Set pressure, in psig; and
mary relief system must have a min-
imum venting capacity of 12,000 SCFH (4) Rated flow capacity, in SCFH at
per 350 square feet of exposed cargo the rating pressure, in psig.
tank area, but in any case at least one [Amdt. 17889, 54 FR 25025, June 12, 1989, as
fourth the required total venting ca- amended at 55 FR 21038, May 22, 1990; 55 FR
pacity for the cargo tank. 37062, Sept. 7, 1990; Amdt. 17889, 56 FR 27877,
(2) Secondary pressure relief system. If June 17, 1991; Amdt. 178105, 59 FR 55175, Nov.
the primary pressure relief system does 3, 1994; Amdt. 178118, 61 FR 51341, Oct. 1,
not provide the required total venting 1996; 65 FR 58631, Sept. 29, 2000; 66 FR 45389,
capacity, additional capacity must be Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR 19284, Apr. 18, 2003]
provided by a secondary pressure relief
178.34511 Tank outlets.
system.
(f) Certification of pressure relief de- (a) General. As used in this section,
vices. The manufacturer of any pressure loading/unloading outlet means any
relief device, including valves, fran- opening in the cargo tank wall used for
gible (rupture) disks, vacuum vents and loading or unloading of lading, as dis-
combination devices must certify that tinguished from outlets such as man-
the device model was designed and hole covers, vents, vapor recovery de-
tested in accordance with this section vices, and similar closures. Cargo tank
and the appropriate cargo tank speci- outlets, closures and associated piping
fication. The certificate must contain must be protected in accordance with
sufficient information to describe the 178.3458.
device and its performance. The certifi- (b) Each cargo tank loading/unload-
cate must be signed by a responsible of- ing outlet must be equipped with an in-
ficial of the manufacturer who ap- ternal self-closing stop-valve, or alter-
proved the flow capacity certification. natively, with an external stop-valve
(g) Rated flow capacity certification located as close as practicable to the
test. Each pressure relief device model cargo tank wall. Each cargo tank load-
must be successfully flow capacity cer- ing/unloading outlet must be in accord-
tification tested prior to first use. De- ance with the following provisions:
vices having one design, size and set (1) Each loading/unloading outlet
pressure are considered to be one
must be fitted with a self-closing sys-
model. The testing requirements are as
tem capable of closing all such outlets
follows:
in an emergency within 30 seconds of
(1) At least 3 devices of each specific
actuation. During normal operations
model must be tested for flow capacity
the outlets may be closed manually.
at a pressure not greater than the test
pressure of the cargo tank. For a de- The self-closing system must be de-
vice model to be certified, the capac- signed according to the following:
ities of the devices tested must fall (i) Each self-closing system must in-
within a range of plus or minus 5 per- clude a remotely actuated means of
cent of the average for the devices test- closure located more than 10 feet from
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
174
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00184 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.34513
loading/unloading outlet. The actu- liquid level. Gauge glasses are not per-
ating mechanism must be corrosion-re- mitted.
sistant and effective in all types of en- [Amdt. 17889, 55 FR 37062, Sept. 7, 1990, as
vironment and weather. amended by Amdt. 178118, 61 FR 51342, Oct.
(ii) If the actuating system is acci- 1, 1996]
dentally damaged or sheared off during
transportation, each loading/unloading 178.34513 Pressure and leakage
outlet must remain securely closed and tests.
capable of retaining lading. (a) Each cargo tank must be pressure
(iii) When required by part 173 of this and leakage tested in accordance with
subchapter for materials which are this section and 178.3465, 178.3475, or
flammable, pyrophoric, oxidizing, or 178.3485.
Division 6.1 (poisonous liquid) mate- (b) Pressure test. Each cargo tank or
rials, the remote means of closure cargo tank compartment must be test-
must be capable of thermal activation. ed hydrostatically or pneumatically.
The means by which the self-closing Each cargo tank of a multi-cargo tank
motor vehicle must be tested with the
system is thermally activated must be
adjacent cargo tanks empty and at at-
located as close as practicable to the
mospheric pressure. Each closure, ex-
primary loading/unloading connection
cept pressure relief devices and load-
and must actuate the system at a tem-
ing/unloading venting devices rated at
perature not over 250 F. In addition,
less than the prescribed test pressure,
outlets on these cargo tanks must be
must be in place during the test. If the
capable of being remotely closed manu- venting device is not removed during
ally or mechanically. the test, such device must be rendered
(2) Bottom loading outlets which dis- inoperative by a clamp, plug or other
charge lading into the cargo tank equally effective restraining device,
through fixed internal piping above the which may not prevent the detection of
maximum liquid level of the cargo leaks, or damage the device. Restrain-
tank need not be equipped with a self- ing devices must be removed imme-
closing system. diately after the test is completed.
(c) Any loading/unloading outlet ex- (1) Hydrostatic method. Each cargo
tending beyond an internal self-closing tank, including its domes, must be
stop-valve, or beyond the innermost ex- filled with water or other liquid having
ternal stop-valve which is part of a similar viscosity, the temperature of
self-closing system, must be fitted with which may not exceed 100 F. The cargo
another stop-valve or other leak-tight tank must then be pressurized as pre-
closure at the end of such connection. scribed in the applicable specification.
(d) Each cargo tank outlet that is not The pressure must be gauged at the top
a loading/unloading outlet must be of the cargo tank. The prescribed test
equipped with a stop-valve or other pressure must be maintained for at
leak-tight closure located as close as least 10 minutes during which time the
practicable to the cargo tank outlet. cargo tank must be inspected for leak-
Any connection extending beyond this age, bulging, or other defect.
closure must be fitted with another (2) Pneumatic method. A pneumatic
stop-valve or other leak-tight closure test may be used in place of the hydro-
at the end of such connection. static test. However, pneumatic pres-
sure testing may involve higher risk
[Amdt. 17889, 56 FR 27877, June 17, 1991, as than hydrostatic testing. Therefore,
amended by Amdt. 17897, 57 FR 45465, Oct. 1, suitable safeguards must be provided to
1992; Amdt. 178118, 61 FR 51341, Oct. 1, 1996] protect personnel and facilities should
failure occur during the test. The cargo
178.34512 Gauging devices.
tank must be pressurized with air or an
Each cargo tank, except a cargo tank inert gas. Test pressure must be
intended to be filled by weight, must be reached gradually by increasing the
equipped with a gauging device that in- pressure to one half of test pressure.
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
dicates the maximum permitted liquid Thereafter, the pressure must be in-
level to within 0.5 percent of the nomi- creased in steps of approximately one
nal capacity as measured by volume or tenth of the test pressure until test
175
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00185 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.34514 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
pressure is reached. Test pressure must ing, embossing or other means in char-
be held for at least 5 minutes. The pres- acters at least 316 inch high. The infor-
sure must then be reduced to the in- mation required by paragraphs (b) and
spection pressure which must be main- (c) of this section may be combined on
tained while the entire cargo tank sur- one specification plate.
face is inspected for leakage and other (b) Nameplate. Each cargo tank must
sign of defects. The inspection method have a corrosion resistant nameplate
must consist of coating all joints and permanently attached to it. The fol-
fittings with a solution of soap and lowing information, in addition to any
water or other equally sensitive meth- applicable information required by the
od. ASME Code, must be marked on the
(c) Leakage test. The cargo tank with tank nameplate (parenthetical abbre-
all its accessories in place and operable viations may be used):
must be leak tested at not less than 80 (1) DOT-specification number DOT
percent of tanks MAWP with the pres- XXX (DOT XXX) where XXX is re-
sure maintained for at least 5 minutes. placed with the applicable specification
(d) Any cargo tank that leaks, bulges number. For cargo tanks having a vari-
or shows any other sign of defect must able specification plate, the DOT-speci-
be rejected. Rejected cargo tanks must fication number is replaced with the
be suitably repaired and retested suc- words See variable specification
cessfully prior to being returned to plate.
service. The retest after any repair (2) Original test date, month and
must use the same method of test year (Orig. Test Date).
under which the cargo tank was origi- (3) Tank MAWP in psig.
nally rejected. (4) Cargo tank test pressure (Test P),
[Amdt. 17889, 54 FR 25026, June 12, 1989, as in psig.
amended at 55 FR 37063, Sept. 7, 1990; Amdt. (5) Cargo tank design temperature
178105, 59 FR 55176, Nov. 3, 1994; Amdt. 178 range (Design temp. range),l F to l
118, 61 FR 51342, Oct. 1, 1996; 65 FR 58631, F.
Sept. 29, 2000; 68 FR 19284, Apr. 18, 2003] (6) Nominal capacity (Water cap.), in
gallons.
178.34514 Marking.
(7) Maximum design density of lading
(a) General. The manufacturer shall (Max. lading density), in pounds per
certify that each cargo tank motor ve- gallon.
hicle has been designed, constructed (8) Material specification number
and tested in accordance with the ap- shell (Shell matl, yyy***), where yyy
plicable Specification DOT 406, DOT 407 is replaced by the alloy designation
or DOT 412 ( 178.345, 178.346, 178.347, and *** by the alloy type.
178.348) cargo tank requirements and, (9) Material specification number
when applicable, with Section VIII of heads (Head matl, yyy***), where
the ASME Code (IBR, see 171.7 of this yyy is replaced by the alloy designa-
subchapter). The certification shall be tion and *** by the alloy type.
accomplished by marking the cargo
tank as prescribed in paragraphs (b) NOTE: When the shell and heads materials
are the same thickness, they may be com-
and (c) of this section, and by pre-
bined, (Shell&head matl, yyy***).
paring the certificate prescribed in
178.34515. Metal plates prescribed by (10) Weld material (Weld matl.).
paragraphs (b), (c), (d) and (e) of this (11) Minimum thicknessshell (Min.
section, must be permanently attached shell-thick), in inches. When minimum
to the cargo tank or its integral sup- shell thicknesses are not the same for
porting structure, by brazing, welding different areas, show (top l, side l,
or other suitable means. These plates bottom l, in inches).
must be affixed on the left side of the (12) Minimum thicknessheads (Min.
vehicle near the front of the cargo tank heads thick.), in inches.
(or the frontmost cargo tank of a (13) Manufactured thicknessshell
multi-cargo tank motor vehicle), in a (Mfd. shell thick.), top l, side l, bot-
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
place readily accessible for inspection. tom l, in inches. (Required when addi-
The plates must be permanently and tional thickness is provided for corro-
plainly marked in English by stamp- sion allowance.)
176
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00186 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.34514
ble. specification.
(10) Heating system design tempera- (2) If no change of information in the
ture (Heating sys. temp.), in F, if ap- specification plate is required, the let-
plicable. ters NC must follow the rating re-
(d) Multi-cargo tank motor vehicle. For quired. If the cargo tank is not so
a multi-cargo tank motor vehicle hav- equipped, the word None must be in-
ing all its cargo tanks not separated by serted.
any void, the information required by (3) Those parts to be changed or
paragraphs (b) and (c) of this section added must be stamped with the appro-
may be combined on one specification priate MC or DOT Specification mark-
plate. When separated by a void, each ings.
cargo tank must have an individual (4) The alterations that must be
nameplate as required in paragraph (b) made in order for the tank to be modi-
of this section, unless all cargo tanks fied from one specification to another
are made by the same manufacturer must be clearly indicated on the manu-
with the same materials, manufactured facturers certificate and on the vari-
thickness, minimum thickness and to able specification plate.
the same specification. The cargo tank
motor vehicle may have a combined [Amdt. 17889, 54 FR 25027, June 12, 1989, as
nameplate and specification plate. amended at 55 FR 37063, Sept. 7, 1990; Amdt.
When only one plate is used, the plate 17899, 58 FR 51534, Oct. 1, 1993; Amdt. 178104,
59 FR 49135, Sept. 26, 1994; Amdt. 178105, 59
must be visible and not covered by in-
FR 55176, Nov. 3, 1994; 60 FR 17402, Apr. 5,
sulation. The required information
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
177
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00187 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.34515 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
178
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00188 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.3462
(b) MAWP: The MAWP of each cargo cated farther from the top and bottom
tank must be no lower than 2.65 psig centerline than 16 percent of the shells
and no higher than 4 psig. circumference.
(c) Vacuum loaded cargo tanks must (ii) For a self-supporting cargo tank,
not be constructed to this specifica- no more than two such joints may be
tion. used on the top of the tank. They may
(d) Each cargo tank must be con- not be located farther from the top
structed in accordance with Section centerline than 12.5 percent of the
VIII of the ASME Code (IBR, see shells circumference.
171.7 of this subchapter) except as (iii) Compliance test. Two test speci-
modified herein: mens of the material to be used in the
(1) The record-keeping requirements manufacture of a cargo tank must be
contained in the ASME Code Section tested to failure in tension. The test
VIII do not apply. Parts UG90 through specimens must be of the same
94 in Section VIII do not apply. Inspec- thicknesses and joint configuration as
tion and certification must be made by the cargo tank, and joined by the same
an inspector registered in accordance welding procedures. The test specimens
with subpart F of part 107. may represent all the tanks that are
(2) Loadings must be as prescribed in made of the same materials and weld-
178.3453. ing procedures, have the same joint
(3) The knuckle radius of flanged configuration, and are made in the
heads must be at least three times the same facility within 6 months after the
material thickness, and in no case less tests are completed. Before welding,
than 0.5 inch. Stuffed (inserted) heads the fit-up of the joints on the test
may be attached to the shell by a fillet specimens must represent production
weld. The knuckle radius and dish ra- conditions that would result in the
dius versus diameter limitations of least joint strength. Evidence of joint
UG32 do not apply. Shell sections of
fit-up and test results must be retained
cargo tanks designed with a non-cir-
at the manufacturers facility.
cular cross section need not be given a
(iv) Weld joint efficiency. The lower
preliminary curvature, as prescribed in
UG79(b). value of stress at failure attained in
(4) Marking, certification, data re- the two tensile test specimens shall be
ports, and nameplates must be as pre- used to compute the efficiency of the
scribed in 178.34514 and 178.34515. joint as follows: Determine the failure
(5) Manhole closure assemblies must ratio by dividing the stress at failure
conform to 178.3455 and 178.3465. by the mechanical properties of the ad-
(6) Pressure relief devices must be as jacent metal; this value, when multi-
prescribed in 178.3463. plied by 0.75, is the design weld joint ef-
(7) The hydrostatic or pneumatic test ficiency.
must be as prescribed in 178.3465. (10) The requirements of paragraph
(8) The following paragraphs in parts UW9(d) in Section VIII of the ASME
UG and UW in Section VIII of the Code do not apply.
ASME Code do not apply: UG11, UG [Amdt. 17889, 54 FR 25028, June 12, 1989, as
12, UG22(g), UG32(e), UG34, UG35, amended at 55 FR 37063, Sept. 7, 1990; Amdt.
UG44, UG76, UG77, UG80, UG81, 17889, 56 FR 27877, June 17, 1991; Amdt. 178
UG96, UG97, UW13(b)(2), UW13.1(f) 105, 59 FR 55176, Nov. 3, 1994; 65 FR 58631,
and the dimensional requirements Sept. 29, 2000; 66 FR 45387, Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR
found in Figure UW13.1. 19285, Apr. 18, 2003; 68 FR 75756, Dec. 31, 2003]
(9) Single full fillet lap joints with-
out plug welds may be used for arc or 178.3462 Material and thickness of
gas welded longitudinal seams without material.
radiographic examination under the The type and thickness of material
following conditions: for DOT 406 specification cargo tanks
(i) For a truck-mounted cargo tank, must conform to 178.3452, but in no
no more than two such joints may be case may the thickness be less than
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
used on the top half of the tank and no that determined by the minimum
more than two joints may be used on thickness requirements in 178.320(a).
the bottom half. They may not be lo- The following Tables I and II identify
179
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00189 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.3463 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
Thickness .............................................. .100 .100 .160 .115 .115 .173 .129 .129 .187
TABLE IISPECIFIED MINIMUM THICKNESS OF SHELL USING MILD STEEL (MS), HIGH STRENGTH LOW
ALLOY STEEL (HSLA), AUSTENITIC STAINLESS STEEL (SS), OR ALUMINUM (AL)EXPRESSED IN
DECIMALS OF AN INCH AFTER FORMING 1
Cargo tank motor vehicle rated capacity (gallons) MS SS/HSLA AL
[Amdt. 17889, 54 FR 25028, June 12, 1989, as amended at 55 FR 37064, Sept. 7, 1990; Amdt. 178
105, 59 FR 55176, Nov. 3, 1994; 68 FR 19285, Apr. 18, 2003]
with a total volume of liquid released greater than 125 percent of the tank
not exceeding 1 L before the relief test pressure and not greater than 3
valve recloses to a leak-tight condi-
180
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00190 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.3471
psig above the MAWP. The venting ca- mination of Vapor Tightness of Gaso-
pacity required in 178.34510(e) may be line Delivery Tank Using Pressure-
rated at these same pressures. Vacuum Test) may not be used to sat-
(2) Each vacuum relief system must isfy the leakage test requirements of
have sufficient capacity to limit the this paragraph. A cargo tank tested in
vacuum to 1 psig. accordance with 40 CFR 63.425(e) may
(3) If pressure loading or unloading be marked as specified in 180.415 of
devices are provided, the relief system this subchapter.
must have adequate vapor and liquid
[Amdt. 17889, 54 FR 25029, June 12, 1989, as
capacity to limit the tank pressure to
amended at 55 FR 37064, Sept. 7, 1990; Amdt.
the cargo tank test pressure at max- 178105, 59 FR 55176, Nov. 3, 1994. Redesig-
imum loading or unloading rate. The nated by Amdt. 178112, 61 FR 18934, Apr. 29,
maximum loading and unloading rates 1996; 68 FR 19285, Apr. 18, 2003]
must be included on the metal speci-
fication plate. 178.347 Specification DOT 407; cargo
tank motor vehicle.
[Amdt. 17889, 54 FR 25029, June 12, 1989, as
amended at 55 FR 37064, Sept. 7, 1990; Amdt. 178.3471 General requirements.
178105, 59 FR 55176, Nov. 3, 1994. Redesig-
nated by Amdt. 178112, 61 FR 18934, Apr. 29, (a) Each specification DOT 407 cargo
1996; 66 FR 45389, Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR 75756, tank motor vehicle must conform to
Dec. 31, 2003] the general design and construction re-
quirements in 178.345 in addition to
178.3464 Outlets. the specific requirements contained in
(a) All outlets on each tank must this section.
conform to 178.34511 and this section. (b) Each tank must be of a circular
(b) External self-closing stop-valves cross-section and have an MAWP of at
are not authorized as an alternative to least 25 psig.
internal self-closing stop-valves on (c) Any cargo tank motor vehicle
loading/unloading outlets. built to this specification with a
[Amdt. 17889, 54 FR 25029, June 12, 1989. Re- MAWP greater than 35 psig or any
designated by Amdt. 178112, 61 FR 18934, cargo tank motor vehicle built to this
Apr. 29, 1996] specification designed to be loaded by
vacuum must be constructed and cer-
178.3465 Pressure and leakage tests. tified in accordance with Section VIII
(a) Each cargo tank must be tested in of the ASME Code (IBR, see 171.7 of
accordance with 178.34513 and this this subchapter). The external design
section. pressure for a cargo tank loaded by
(b) Pressure test. Test pressure must vacuum must be at least 15 psi.
be as follows: (d) Any cargo tank motor vehicle
(1) Using the hydrostatic test meth- built to this specification with a
od, the test pressure must be the great- MAWP of 35 psig or less or any cargo
er of 5.0 psig or 1.5 times the cargo tank motor vehicle built to this speci-
tank MAWP. fication designed to withstand full vac-
(2) Using the pneumatic test method, uum but not equipped to be loaded by
the test pressure must be the greater of vacuum must be constructed in accord-
5.0 psig or 1.5 times the cargo tank ance with Section VIII of the ASME
MAWP, and the inspection pressure Code.
must be the cargo tank MAWP. (1) The record-keeping requirements
(c) Leakage test. A cargo tank used to contained in Section VIII of the ASME
transport a petroleum distillate fuel Code do not apply. The inspection re-
that is equipped with vapor recovery quirements of parts UG90 through 94
equipment may be leakage tested in do not apply. Inspection and certifi-
accordance with 40 CFR 63.425(e). To cation must be made by an inspector
satisfy the leakage test requirements registered in accordance with subpart
of this paragraph, the test specified in F of part 107.
40 CFR 63.425(e)(1) must be conducted (2) Loadings must be as prescribed in
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
181
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00191 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.3472 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
Thickness (MS) ....................................................... 0.100 0.100 0.115 0.129 0.129 0.143 0.156
Thickness (HSLA) ................................................... 0.100 0.100 0.115 0.129 0.129 0.143 0.156
Thickness (SS) ........................................................ 0.100 0.100 0.115 0.129 0.129 0.143 0.156
Thickness (AL) ........................................................ 0.160 0.160 0.173 0.187 0.194 0.216 0.237
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
182
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00192 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.3481
TABLE IISPECIFIED MINIMUM THICKNESS OF SHELL USING MILD STEEL (MS), HIGH STRENGTH LOW
ALLOY STEEL (HSLA), AUSTENITIC STAINLESS STEEL (SS), OR ALUMINUM (AL)EXPRESSED IN
DECIMALS OF AN INCH AFTER FORMING
10 or Over 10 Over 14 Over 18 Over 22 Over 26
Volume capacity in gallons per inch Over 30
less to 14 to 18 to 22 to 26 to 30
Thickness (MS) ....................................................... 0.100 0.100 0.115 0.129 0.129 0.143 0.156
Thickness (HSLA) ................................................... 0.100 0.100 0.115 0.129 0.129 0.143 0.156
Thickness (SS) ........................................................ 0.100 0.100 0.115 0.129 0.129 0.143 0.156
Thickness (AL) ........................................................ 0.151 0.151 0.160 0.173 0.194 0.216 0.237
(b) [Reserved]
[Amdt. 17889, 54 FR 25030, June 12, 1989, as amended at 55 FR 37064, Sept. 7, 1990; Amdt. 178
104, 59 FR 49135, Sept. 26, 1994; 68 FR 19285, Apr. 18, 2003]
183
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00193 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.3482 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
be at least 25 psig internal and 15 psig tion need not be given a preliminary
external. curvature, as prescribed in UG79(b).
(d) Each cargo tank having a MAWP (iv) Marking, certification, data re-
greater than 15 psig must be of circular ports, and nameplates must be as pre-
cross-section. scribed in 178.34514 and 178.34515.
(e) Each cargo tank having a (v) Manhole closure assemblies must
(1) MAWP greater than 15 psig must conform to 178.3455.
be constructed and certified in con- (vi) Pressure relief devices must be as
formance with Section VIII of the prescribed in 178.3484.
ASME Code (IBR, see 171.7 of this (vii) The hydrostatic or pneumatic
subchapter); or test must be as prescribed in 178.3485.
(2) MAWP of 15 psig or less must be (viii) The following paragraphs in
parts UG and UW in Section VIII of the
constructed in accordance with Sec-
ASME Code do not apply: UG11, UG
tion VIII of the ASME Code, except as
12, UG22(g), UG32(e), UG34, UG35,
modified herein:
UG44, UG76, UG77, UG80, UG81,
(i) The recordkeeping requirements UG96, UG97, UW13(b)(2), UW13.1(f),
contained in Section VIII of the ASME and the dimensional requirements
Code do not apply. Parts UG90 found in Figure UW13.1.
through 94 in Section VIII do not
apply. Inspection and certification [Amdt. 17889, 54 FR 25031, June 12, 1989, as
must be made by an inspector reg- amended at 55 FR 37065, Sept. 7, 1990; Amdt.
17889, 56 FR 27877, June 17, 1991; 65 FR 58632,
istered in accordance with subpart F of Sept. 29, 2000; 68 FR 19285, Apr. 18, 2003; 68 fR
part 107. 75756, Dec. 31, 2003]
(ii) Loadings must be as prescribed in
178.3453. 178.3482 Material and thickness of
(iii) The knuckle radius of flanged material.
heads must be at least three times the (a) The type and thickness of mate-
material thickness, and in no case less rial for DOT 412 specification cargo
than 0.5 inch. Stuffed (inserted) heads tanks must conform to 178.3452, but
may be attached to the shell by a fillet in no case may the thickness be less
weld. The knuckle radius and dish ra- than that determined by the minimum
dius versus diameter limitations of thickness requirements in 178.320(a).
UG32 do not apply for cargo tank The following Tables I and II identify
motor vehicles with a MAWP of 15 psig the Specified Minimum Thickness
or less. Shell sections of cargo tanks values to be employed in that deter-
designed with a non-circular cross sec- mination.
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
184
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00194 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
VerDate Sep<11>2014
TABLE ISPECIFIED MINIMUM THICKNESS OF HEADS (OR BULKHEADS AND BAFFLES WHEN USED AS TANK REINFORCEMENT) USING MILD STEEL
(MS), HIGH STRENGTH LOW ALLOY STEEL (HSLA), AUSTENITIC STAINLESS STEEL (SS), OR ALUMINUM (AL)EXPRESSED IN DECIMALS OF AN
Jkt 238227
Lading density at 60 F in pounds per gallon ..................................... 10 lbs Over Over Over 10 lbs Over Over Over 10 lbs Over Over 10 lbs Over Over
and 10 to 13 to 16 lbs and 10 to 13 to 16 lbs and 10 to 13 to and 10 to 13 to
less 13 lbs 16 lbs less 13 lbs 16 lbs less 13 lbs 16 lbs less 13 lbs 16 lbs
Thickness (inch), steel ......................................................................... .100 .129 .157 .187 .129 .157 .187 .250 .157 .250 .250 .157 .250 .312
Thickness (inch), aluminum ................................................................. .144 .187 .227 .270 .187 .227 .270 .360 .227 .360 .360 .227 .360 .450
PO 00000
TABLE IISPECIFIED MINIMUM THICKNESS OF SHELL USING MILD STEEL (MS), HIGH STRENGTH LOW ALLOY STEEL (HSLA), AUSTENITIC STAINLESS
STEEL (SS), OR ALUMINUM (AL)EXPRESSED IN DECIMALS OF AN INCH AFTER FORMING
Frm 00195
Volume capacity in gallons per inch 10 or less Over 10 to 14 Over 14 to 18 18 and over
Lading density at 60 F in pounds per gallon ..................................... 10 lbs Over Over Over 10 lbs Over Over Over 10 lbs Over Over 10 lbs Over Over
Fmt 8010
and 10 to 13 to 16 lbs and 10 to 13 to 16 lbs and 10 to 13 to and 10 to 13 to
less 13 lbs 16 lbs less 13 lbs 16 lbs less 13 lbs 16 lbs less 13 lbs 16 lbs
185
Thickness (steel):
Distances between heads (and bulkheads baffles and ring
stiffeners when used as tank reinforcement):
Sfmt 8010
36 in. or less ............................................................ .100 .129 .157 .187 .100 .129 .157 .187 .100 .129 .157 .129 .157 .187
Over 36 in. to 54 inches .......................................... .100 .129 .157 .187 .100 .129 .157 .187 .129 .157 .187 .157 .250 .250
Over 54 in. to 60 inches .......................................... .100 .129 .157 .187 .129 .157 .187 .250 .157 .250 .250 .187 .250 .312
Thickness (aluminum):
Distances between heads (and bulkheads baffles and ring
stiffeners when used as tank reinforcement):
36 in. or less ............................................................ .144 .187 .227 .270 .144 .187 .227 .270 .144 .187 .227 .187 .227 .270
Over 36 in. to 54 inches .......................................... .144 .187 .227 .270 .144 .187 .227 .270 .187 .227 .270 .157 .360 .360
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT
Over 54 in. to 60 inches .......................................... .144 .187 .227 .270 .187 .227 .270 .360 .227 .360 .360 .270 .360 .450
Y:\SGML\238227.XXX
238227
178.3482
178.3483 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
(b) [Reserved]
[Amdt. 17889, 54 FR 25031, June 12, 1989; 54 FR 28750, July 7, 1989, as amended at 55 FR 37065,
Sept. 7, 1990; 68 FR 19285, Apr. 18, 2003]
lowing formula (use of approximate [Amdt. 17889, 54 FR 25032, June 12, 1989. Re-
values given for the formula is accept- designated by Amdt. 178112, 61 FR 18934,
able): Apr. 29, 1996]
186
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00196 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.503
187
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00197 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.503 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
marks must bear the marks specified designation shall be the maximum
in paragraphs (a)(1) through (a)(6) and gross mass in kilograms;
(a)(9) of this section in a permanent (5)(i) For single and composite pack-
form (e.g. embossed) able to withstand agings intended to contain liquids, the
the reconditioning process. A marking test pressure in kilopascals rounded
may be applied in a single line or in down to the nearest 10 kPa of the hy-
multiple lines provided the correct se- drostatic pressure test that the pack-
quence is used. As illustrated by the aging design type has successfully
examples in paragraph (e) of this sec- passed;
tion, the following information must (ii) For packagings intended to con-
be presented in the correct sequence. tain solids or inner packagings, the let-
Slash marks should be used to separate ter S;
this information. A packaging con- (6) The last two digits of the year of
forming to a UN standard must be manufacture. Packagings of types 1H
marked as follows: and 3H shall also be marked with the
(1) Except as provided in paragraph month of manufacture in any appro-
(e)(1)(ii) of this section, the United Na- priate manner; this may be marked on
tions symbol as illustrated in para- the packaging in a different place from
graph (e)(1)(i) of this section (for em- the remainder of the markings;
bossed metal receptacles, the letters (7) The state authorizing allocation
UN may be applied in place of the of the mark. The letters USA indicate
symbol); that the packaging is manufactured
(2) A packaging identification code and marked in the United States in
designating the type of packaging, the compliance with the provisions of this
material of construction and, when ap- subchapter;
propriate, the category of packaging (8) The name and address or symbol
under 178.504 through 178.523 of this of the manufacturer or the approval
subpart within the type to which the agency certifying compliance with sub-
packaging belongs. The letter V part L and subpart M of this part.
must follow the packaging identifica- Symbols, if used, must be registered
tion code on packagings tested in ac- with the Associate Administrator;
cordance with 178.601(g)(2); for exam- (9) For metal or plastic drums or
ple, 4GV. The letter W must fol- jerricans intended for reuse or recondi-
low the packaging identification code tioning as single packagings or the
on packagings when required by an ap- outer packagings of a composite pack-
proval under the provisions of aging, the thickness of the packaging
178.601(h) of this part; material, expressed in mm (rounded to
the nearest 0.1 mm), as follows:
(3) A letter identifying the perform-
(i) Metal drums or jerricans must be
ance standard under which the pack-
marked with the nominal thickness of
aging design type has been successfully
the metal used in the body. The
tested, as follows:
marked nominal thickness must not
(i) Xfor packagings meeting Pack- exceed the minimum thickness of the
ing Group I, II and III tests; steel used by more than the thickness
(ii) Yfor packagings meeting Pack- tolerance stated in ISO 3574 (IBR, see
ing Group II and III tests; or 171.7 of this subchapter). (See appen-
(iii) Zfor packagings only meeting dix C of this part.) The unit of measure
Packing Group III tests; is not required to be marked. When the
(4) A designation of the specific grav- nominal thickness of either head of a
ity or mass for which the packaging de- metal drum is thinner than that of the
sign type has been tested, as follows: body, the nominal thickness of the top
(i) For packagings without inner head, body, and bottom head must be
packagings intended to contain liquids, marked (e.g., 1.01.21.0 or 0.91.0
the designation shall be the specific 1.0).
gravity rounded down to the first dec- (ii) Plastic drums or jerricans must
imal but may be omitted when the spe- be marked with the minimum thick-
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
cific gravity does not exceed 1.2; and ness of the packaging material. Min-
(ii) For packagings intended to con- imum thicknesses of plastic must be as
tain solids or inner packagings, the determined in accordance with
188
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00198 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.503
173.28(b)(4). The unit of measure is not (iii) The last two digits of the year of
required to be marked; reconditioning;
(10) In addition to the markings pre- (iv) The letter R; and
scribed in paragraphs (a)(1) through (v) For every packaging successfully
(a)(9) of this section, every new metal passing a leakproofness test, the addi-
drum having a capacity greater than tional letter L.
100 L must bear the marks described in (2) When, after reconditioning, the
paragraphs (a)(1) through (a)(6), and markings required by paragraph (a)(1)
(a)(9)(i) of this section, in a permanent through (a)(5) of this section no longer
form, on the bottom. The markings on appear on the top head or the side of
the top head or side of these pack- the metal drum, the reconditioner
agings need not be permanent, and must apply them in a durable form fol-
need not include the thickness mark lowed by the markings in paragraph
described in paragraph (a)(9) of this (c)(1) of this section. These markings
section. This marking indicates a may identify a different performance
drums characteristics at the time it capability than that for which the
was manufactured, and the information original design type had been tested
in paragraphs (a)(1) through (a)(6) of and marked, but may not identify a
this section that is marked on the top greater performance capability. The
head or side must be the same as the markings applied in accordance with
information in paragraphs (a)(1) this paragraph may be different from
through (a)(6) of this section perma- those which are permanently marked
nently marked by the original manu- on the bottom of a drum in accordance
facturer on the bottom of the drum; with paragraph (a)(10) of this section.
and (d) Marking of remanufactured pack-
(11) Rated capacity of the packaging agings. For remanufactured metal
expressed in liters may be marked. drums, if there is no change to the
(b) For a packaging with a removable packaging type and no replacement or
head, the markings may not be applied removal of integral structural compo-
only to the removable head. nents, the required markings need not
(c) Marking of reconditioned pack- be permanent (e.g., embossed). Every
agings. (1) If a packaging is recondi- other remanufactured drum must bear
tioned, it shall be marked by the re- the marks required in paragraphs (a)(1)
conditioner near the marks required in through (a)(6) of this section in a per-
paragraphs (a)(1) through (6) of this manent form (e.g., embossed) on the
section with the following additional top head or side. If the metal thickness
information: marking required in paragraph (a)(9)(i)
(i) The name of the country in which of this section does not appear on the
the reconditioning was performed (in bottom of the drum, or if it is no
the United States, use the letters longer valid, the remanufacturer also
USA); must mark this information in perma-
(ii) The name and address or symbol nent form.
of the reconditioner. Symbols, if used, (e) The following are examples of sym-
must be registered with the Associate bols and required markings.
Administrator; (1)(i) The United Nations symbol is:
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
189
ER05OC12.059</GPH>
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00199 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.503 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
(ii) The circle that surrounds the let- circumference of the circle (72 degrees);
ters u and n may have small and
breaks provided the following provi- D) The letters u and n appear
sions are met: exactly as depicted in 178.503(e)(1)(i)
(A) The total gap space does not ex- with no gaps.
ceed 15 percent of the circumference of (2) Examples of markings for a new
the circle; packaging are as follows:
(B) There are no more than four gaps
(i) For a fiberboard box designed to
in the circle;
contain an inner packaging:
C) The spacing between gaps is sepa-
rated by no less than 20 percent of the
(as in 178.503 (a)(1) through (9) of this (ii) For a steel drum designed to con-
subpart). tain liquids:
(as in 178.503 (a)(1) through (10) of this (iii) For a steel drum to transport
subpart). solids or inner packagings:
ER05OC12.062</GPH>
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
ER05OC12.061</GPH>
190
ER05OC12.060</GPH>
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00200 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.504
(as in 178.503 (a)(1) through (8) of this (3) Examples of markings for recondi-
subpart). tioned packagings are as follows:
lowing the marking designating the at least two expanded rolling hoops or
type of packaging and material re- two separate rolling hoops. If there are
separate rolling hoops, they must be
191
ER05OC12.063</GPH>
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00201 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.505 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
fitted tightly on the body and so se- ing requirements in 173.28(b)(4) and
cured that they cannot shift. Rolling 178.503(a)(9) of this subchapter apply to
hoops may not be spot-welded. drums intended for reuse.
(5) Openings for filling, emptying and (2) All seams must be welded. Chime
venting in the bodies or heads of non- seams, if any, must be reinforced by
removable head (1A1) drums may not the application of separate reinforcing
exceed 7.0 cm (3 inches) in diameter. rings.
Drums with larger openings are consid- (3) The body of a drum of a capacity
ered to be of the removable head type greater than 60 L (16 gallons) may have
(1A2). Closures for openings in the bod- at least two expanded rolling hoops or
ies and heads of drums must be so de- two separate rolling hoops. If there are
signed and applied that they will re- separate rolling hoops, the hoops must
main secure and leakproof under nor- be fitted tightly on the body and so se-
mal conditions of transport. Closure cured that they cannot shift. Rolling
flanges may be mechanically seamed or hoops may not be spot-welded.
welded in place. Gaskets or other seal- (4) Openings for filling, emptying, or
ing elements must be used with clo- venting in the bodies or heads of non-
sures unless the closure is inherently removable head (1B1) drums may not
leakproof. exceed 7.0 cm (3 inches) in diameter.
(6) Closure devices for removable Drums with larger openings are consid-
head drums must be so designed and ered to be of the removable head type
applied that they will remain secure (1B2). Closures for openings in the bod-
and drums will remain leakproof under ies and heads of drums must be so de-
normal conditions of transport. Gas- signed and applied that they will re-
kets or other sealing elements must be main secure and leakproof under nor-
used with all removable heads. mal conditions of transport. Closure
(7) If materials used for body, heads, flanges may be welded in place so that
closures, and fittings are not in them- the weld provides a leakproof seam.
selves compatible with the contents to Gaskets or other sealing elements
be transported, suitable internal pro- must be used with closures unless the
tective coatings or treatments must be closure is inherently leakproof.
applied. These coatings or treatments (5) Closure devices for removable
must retain their protective properties head drums must be so designed and
under normal conditions of transport. applied that they remain secure and
(8) Maximum capacity of drum: 450 L drums remain leakproof under normal
(119 gallons). conditions of transport. Gaskets or
(9) Maximum net mass: 400 kg (882 other sealing elements must be used
pounds). with all removable heads.
[Amdt. 17897, 55 FR 52717, Dec. 21, 1990, as (6) Maximum capacity of drum: 450 L
amended at 56 FR 66284, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. (119 gallons).
178110, 60 FR 49111, Sept. 21, 1995] (7) Maximum net mass: 400 kg (882
pounds).
178.505 Standards for aluminum
drums. [Amdt. 17897, 55 FR 52717, Dec. 21, 1990, as
(a) The following are the identifica- amended at 56 FR 66284, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt.
tion codes for aluminum drums: 178102, 59 FR 28494, June 2, 1994]
(1) 1B1 for a non-removable head alu-
178.506 Standards for metal drums
minum drum; and other than steel or aluminum.
(2) 1B2 for a removable head alu-
minum drum. (a) The following are the identifica-
(b) Construction requirements for tion codes for metal drums other than
aluminum drums are as follows: steel or aluminum:
(1) Body and heads must be con- (1) 1N1 for a non-removable head
structed of aluminum at least 99 per- metal drum; and
cent pure or an aluminum base alloy. (2) 1N2 for a removable head metal
Material must be of suitable type and drum.
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
192
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00202 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.508
(1) Body and heads must be con- (1) The wood used must be well-sea-
structed of metal (other than steel or soned, commercially dry and free from
aluminum) of suitable type and ade- any defect likely to lessen the effec-
quate thickness in relation to the ca- tiveness of the drum for the purpose in-
pacity and the intended use of the tended. A material other than plywood,
drum. Minimum thickness and mark- of at least equivalent strength and du-
ing requirements in 173.28(b)(4) and rability, may be used for the manufac-
178.503(a)(9) of this subchapter apply to ture of the heads.
drums intended for reuse. (2) At least two-ply plywood must be
(2) All seams must be welded. Chime used for the body and at least three-ply
seams, if any, must be reinforced by plywood for the heads; the plies must
the application of separate reinforcing be firmly glued together, with their
rings. grains crosswise.
(3) The body of a drum of a capacity (3) The body and heads of the drum
greater than 60 L (16 gallons) may have and their joints must be of a design ap-
at least two expanded rolling hoops or propriate to the capacity of the drum
two separate rolling hoops. If there are and its intended use.
separate rolling hoops, the hoops must (4) In order to prevent sifting of the
be fitted tightly on the body and so se- contents, lids must be lined with kraft
cured that they cannot shift. Rolling paper or some other equivalent mate-
hoops may not be spot-welded. rial which must be securely fastened to
(4) Openings for filling, emptying, or the lid and extend to the outside along
venting in the bodies or heads of non- its full circumference.
(5) Maximum capacity of drum: 250 L
removable head (1N1) drums may not
(66 gallons).
exceed 7.0 cm (3 inches) in diameter.
(6) Maximum net mass: 400 kg (882
Drums with larger openings are consid-
pounds).
ered to be of the removable head type
(1N2). Closures for openings in the bod- [Amdt. 17897, 55 FR 52717, Dec. 21, 1990, as
ies and heads of drums must be so de- amended at 57 FR 45465, Oct. 1, 1992]
signed and applied that they will re-
main secure and leakproof under nor- 178.508 Standards for fiber drums.
mal conditions of transport. Closure (a) The identification code for a fiber
flanges may be welded in place so that drum is 1G.
the weld provides a leakproof seam. (b) Construction requirements for
Gaskets or other sealing elements fiber drums are as follows:
must be used with closures unless the (1) The body of the drum must be
closure is inherently leakproof. constructed of multiple plies of heavy
(5) Closure devices for removable paper or fiberboard (without corruga-
head drums must be so designed and tions) firmly glued or laminated to-
applied that they remain secure and gether and may include one or more
drums remain leakproof under normal protective layers of bitumen, waxed
conditions of transport. Gaskets or kraft paper, metal foil, plastic mate-
other sealing elements must be used rial, or similar materials.
with all removable heads. (2) Heads must be of natural wood, fi-
(6) Maximum capacity of drum: 450 L berboard, metal, plywood, plastics, or
(119 gallons). other suitable material and may in-
(7) Maximum net mass: 400 kg (882 clude one or more protective layers of
pounds). bitumen, waxed kraft paper, metal foil,
plastic material, or similar material.
[Amdt. 17897, 55 FR 52717, Dec. 21, 1990, as (3) The body and heads of the drum
amended at 56 FR 66285, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. and their joints must be of a design ap-
178102, 59 FR 28494, June 2, 1994] propriate to the capacity and intended
use of the drum.
178.507 Standards for plywood (4) The assembled packaging must be
drums.
sufficiently water-resistant so as not
(a) The identification code for a ply- to delaminate under normal conditions
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
193
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00203 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.509 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
(6) Maximum net mass: 400 kg (882 (4) The wall thickness at every point
pounds). of the packaging must be appropriate
[Amdt. 17897, 55 FR 52717, Dec. 21, 1990, as
to its capacity and its intended use,
amended by Amdt. 178106, 59 FR 67521, Dec. taking into account the stresses to
29, 1994] which each point is liable to be ex-
posed. Minimum thickness and mark-
178.509 Standards for plastic drums ing requirements in 173.28(b)(4) and
and jerricans. 178.503(a)(9) of this subchapter apply to
(a) The following are identification drums intended for reuse.
codes for plastic drums and jerricans: (5) Openings for filling, emptying and
(1) 1H1 for a non-removable head venting in the bodies or heads of non-
plastic drum; removable head (1H1) drums and
(2) 1H2 for a removable head plastic jerricans (3H1) may not exceed 7.0 cm (3
drum; inches) in diameter. Drums and
(3) 3H1 for a non-removable head jerricans with larger openings are con-
jerrican; and sidered to be of the removable head
(4) 3H2 for a removable head jerrican. type (1H2 and 3H2). Closures for open-
(b) Construction requirements for ings in the bodies or heads of drums
plastic drums and jerricans are as fol- and jerricans must be so designed and
lows: applied that they remain secure and
(1) The packaging must be manufac- leakproof under normal conditions of
tured from suitable plastic material transport. Gaskets or other sealing ele-
and be of adequate strength in relation ments must be used with closures un-
to its capacity and intended use. No less the closure is inherently leakproof.
used material other than production (6) Closure devices for removable
residues or regrind from the same man- head drums and jerricans must be so
ufacturing process may be used unless designed and applied that they remain
approved by the Associate Adminis- secure and leakproof under normal con-
trator. The packaging must be ade- ditions of transport. Gaskets must be
quately resistant to aging and to deg- used with all removable heads unless
radation caused either by the sub- the drum or jerrican design is such
stance contained or by ultra-violet ra- that when the removable head is prop-
diation. Any permeation of the sub- erly secured, the drum or jerrican is in-
stance contained may not constitute a herently leakproof.
danger under normal conditions of (7) Maximum capacity of drums and
transport. jerricans: 1H1, 1H2: 450 L (119 gallons);
(2) If protection against ultra-violet 3H1, 3H2: 60 L (16 gallons).
radiation is required, it must be pro- (8) Maximum net mass: 1H1, 1H2: 400
vided by the addition of carbon black kg (882 pounds); 3H1, 3H2: 120 kg (265
or other suitable pigments or inhibi- pounds).
tors. These additives must be compat- [Amdt. 17897, 55 FR 52717, Dec. 21, 1990, as
ible with the contents and remain ef- amended by Amdt. 178102, 59 FR 28494, June
fective throughout the life of the pack- 2, 1994; 64 FR 10782, Mar. 5, 1999; 66 FR 45386,
aging. Where use is made of carbon Aug. 28, 2001]
black, pigments or inhibitors other
than those used in the manufacture of 178.510 Standards for wooden bar-
the design type, retesting may be omit- rels.
ted if the carbon black content does (a) The following are identification
not exceed 2 percent by mass or if the codes for wooden barrels:
pigment content does not exceed 3 per- (1) 2C1 for a bung type wooden barrel;
cent by mass; the content of inhibitors and
of ultra-violet radiation is not limited. (2) 2C2 for a slack type (removable
(3) Additives serving purposes other head) wooden barrel.
than protection against ultra-violet ra- (b) Construction requirements for
diation may be included in the com- wooden barrels are as follows:
position of the plastic material pro- (1) The wood used must be of good
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
194
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00204 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.512
to lessen the effectiveness of the barrel jerricans intended to carry 40 L (11 gal-
for the purpose intended. lons) or less must be mechanically
(2) The body and heads must be of a seamed or welded.
design appropriate to the capacity and (4) Openings in jerricans (3A1) may
intended use of the barrel. not exceed 7.0 cm (3 inches) in diame-
(3) Staves and heads must be sawn or ter. Jerricans with larger openings are
cleft with the grain so that no annual considered to be of the removable head
ring extends over more than half the type. Closures must be so designed that
thickness of a stave or head. they remain secure and leakproof
(4) Barrel hoops must be of steel or under normal conditions of transport.
iron of good quality. The hoops of 2C2 Gaskets or other sealing elements
barrels may be of a suitable hardwood. must be used with closures, unless the
(5) For wooden barrels 2C1, the di- closure is inherently leakproof.
ameter of the bung-hole may not ex- (5) If materials used for body, heads,
ceed half the width of the stave in closures and fittings are not in them-
which it is placed.
selves compatible with the contents to
(6) For wooden barrels 2C2, heads
be transported, suitable internal pro-
must fit tightly into crozes.
tective coatings or treatments must be
(7) Maximum capacity of barrel: 250 L
applied. These coatings or treatments
(66 gallons).
must retain their protective properties
(8) Maximum net mass: 400 kg (882
pounds). under normal conditions of transport.
(6) Maximum capacity of jerrican: 60
178.511 Standards for aluminum and L (16 gallons).
steel jerricans. (7) Maximum net mass: 120 kg (265
(a) The following are identification pounds).
codes for aluminum and steel jerricans: [Amdt. 17897, 55 FR 52717, Dec. 21, 1990, as
(1) 3A1 for a non-removable head amended by Amdt. 178102, 59 FR 28494, June
steel jerrican; 2, 1994; Amdt. 178119, 62 FR 24742, May 6,
(2) 3A2 for a removable head steel 1997]
jerrican;
(3) 3B1 for a non-removable head alu- 178.512 Standards for steel, alu-
minum jerrican; and minum or other metal boxes.
(4) 3B2 for a removable head alu- (a) The following are identification
minum jerrican. codes for steel, aluminum, or other
(b) Construction requirements for metal boxes:
aluminum and steel jerricans are as (1) 4A for a steel box;
follows: (2) 4B for an aluminum box; and
(1) For steel jerricans the body and
(3) 4N for an other metal box.
heads must be constructed of steel
sheet of suitable type and adequate (b) Construction requirements for
thickness in relation to the capacity of steel, aluminum or other metal boxes
the jerrican and its intended use. Min- are as follows:
imum thickness and marking require- (1) The strength of the metal and the
ments in 173.28(b)(4) and 178.503(a)(9) construction of the box must be appro-
of this subchapter apply to jerricans priate to the capacity and intended use
intended for reuse. of the box.
(2) For aluminum jerricans the body (2) Boxes must be lined with fiber-
and heads must be constructed of alu- board or felt packing pieces or must
minum at least 99% pure or of an alu- have an inner liner or coating of suit-
minum base alloy. Material must be of able material in accordance with sub-
a type and of adequate thickness in re- part C of part 173 of this subchapter. If
lation to the capacity of the jerrican a double seamed metal liner is used,
and to its intended use. steps must be taken to prevent the in-
(3) Chimes of all jerricans must be gress of materials, particularly explo-
mechanically seamed or welded. Body sives, into the recesses of the seams.
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
195
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00205 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.513 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
(4) Maximum net mass: 400 kg (882 material used and the method of con-
pounds). struction must be appropriate to the
[Amdt. 17897, 55 FR 52717, Dec. 21, 1990, as
capacity and intended use of the box.
amended by Amdt. 178106, 59 FR 67521, Dec. All adjacent plies must be glued with
29, 1994; 78 FR 1096, Jan. 7, 2013] water-resistant adhesive. Other suit-
able materials may be used together
178.513 Standards for boxes of nat- with plywood in the construction of
ural wood. boxes. Boxes must be nailed or secured
(a) The following are the identifica- to corner posts or ends or assembled
tion codes for boxes of natural wood: with other equally suitable devices.
(1) 4C1 for an ordinary box; and (2) Maximum net mass: 400 kg (882
(2) 4C2 for a box with sift-proof walls. pounds).
(b) Construction requirements for
boxes of natural wood are as follows: 178.515 Standards for reconstituted
(1) The wood used must be well-sea- wood boxes.
soned, commercially dry and free from (a) The identification code for a re-
defects that would materially lessen constituted wood box is 4F.
the strength of any part of the box. The (b) Construction requirements for re-
strength of the material used and the constituted wood boxes are as follows:
method of construction must be appro-
(1) The walls of boxes must be made
priate to the capacity and intended use
of water-resistant, reconstituted wood
of the box. The tops and bottoms may
such as hardboard, particle board, or
be made of water-resistant reconsti-
other suitable type. The strength of
tuted wood such as hard board, particle
the material used and the method of
board or other suitable type.
(2) Fastenings must be resistant to construction must be appropriate to
vibration experienced under normal the capacity of the boxes and their in-
conditions of transportation. End grain tended use.
nailing must be avoided whenever prac- (2) Other parts of the box may be
ticable. Joints which are likely to be made of other suitable materials.
highly stressed must be made using (3) Boxes must be securely assembled
clenched or annular ring nails or equiv- by means of suitable devices.
alent fastenings. (4) Maximum net mass: 400 kg (882
(3) Each part of the 4C2 box must be pounds).
one piece or equivalent. Parts are con-
sidered equivalent to one piece when 178.516 Standards for fiberboard
one of the following methods of glued boxes.
assembly is used: Linderman joint, (a) The identification code for a fi-
tongue and groove joint, ship lap or berboard box is 4G.
rabbet joint, or butt joint with at least (b) Construction requirements for fi-
two corrugated metal fasteners at each berboard boxes are as follows:
joint. (1) Strong, solid or double-faced cor-
(4) Maximum net mass: 400 kg (882 rugated fiberboard (single or multi-
pounds). wall) must be used, appropriate to the
[Amdt. 17897, 55 FR 52717, Dec. 21, 1990, as capacity and intended use of the box.
amended by Amdt. 178106, 59 FR 67521, Dec. The water resistance of the outer sur-
29, 1994] face must be such that the increase in
mass, as determined in a test carried
178.514 Standards for plywood boxes. out over a period of 30 minutes by the
(a) The identification code for a ply- Cobb method of determining water ab-
wood box is 4D. sorption, is not greater than 155 g per
(b) Construction requirements for square meter (0.0316 pounds per square
plywood boxes are as follows: foot)see ISO 535 (IBR, see 171.7 of
(1) Plywood used must be at least 3 this subchapter). Fiberboard must have
ply. It shall be made from well-sea- proper bending qualities. Fiberboard
soned rotary cut, sliced or sawn veneer, must be cut, creased without cutting
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
commercially dry and free from defects through any thickness of fiberboard,
that would materially lessen the and slotted so as to permit assembly
strength of the box. The strength of the without cracking, surface breaks, or
196
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00206 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.518
undue bending. The fluting of cor- tion containing cavities for the inner
rugated fiberboard must be firmly receptacles, and a top section covering
glued to the facings. and interlocking with the bottom sec-
(2) The ends of boxes may have a tion. The top and bottom sections must
wooden frame or be entirely of wood or be so designed that the inner recep-
other suitable material. Reinforce- tacles fit snugly. The closure cap for
ments of wooden battens or other suit- any inner receptacle may not be in
able material may be used. contact with the inside of the top sec-
(3) Manufacturing joints. (i) Manu- tion of the box.
facturing joints in the bodies of boxes (3) For transportation, an expanded
must be plastic box must be closed with a self-
(A) Taped; adhesive tape having sufficient tensile
(B) Lapped and glued; or strength to prevent the box from open-
(C) Lapped and stitched with metal ing. The adhesive tape must be weath-
staples. er-resistant and its adhesive compat-
(ii) Lapped joints must have an ap- ible with the expanded plastic material
propriate overlap. of the box. Other closing devices at
(4) Where closing is effected by glu- least equally effective may be used.
ing or taping, a water resistant adhe- (4) For solid plastic boxes, protection
sive must be used. against ultra-violet radiation, if re-
(5) Boxes must be designed so as to
quired, must be provided by the addi-
provide a snug fit to the contents.
tion of carbon black or other suitable
(6) Maximum net mass: 400 kg (882
pigments or inhibitors. These additives
pounds).
must be compatible with the contents
(7) Authorization to manufacture,
and remain effective throughout the
mark, and sell UN4G combination
life of the box. Where use is made of
packagings with outer fiberboard boxes
carbon black pigment or inhibitors
and with inner fiberboard components
other than those used in the manufac-
that have individual containerboard or
ture of the tested design type, re-
paper wall basis weights that vary by
testing may be waived if the carbon
not more than plus or minus 5% from
black content does not exceed 2 percent
the nominal basis weight reported in
by mass or if the pigment content does
the initial design qualification test re-
not exceed 3 percent by mass; the con-
port.
tent of inhibitors of ultra-violet radi-
[Amdt. 17897, 55 FR 52717, Dec. 21, 1990, as ation is not limited.
amended by Amdt. 17899, 58 FR 51534, Oct. 1, (5) Additives serving purposes other
1993; Amdt. 178106, 59 FR 67521, Dec. 29, 1994; than protection against ultra-violet ra-
68 FR 75758, Dec. 31, 2003; 79 FR 15046, Mar. 18,
2014]
diation may be included in the com-
position of the plastic material if they
178.517 Standards for plastic boxes. do not adversely affect the material of
the box. Addition of these additives
(a) The following are identification
does not change the design type.
codes for plastic boxes:
(1) 4H1 for an expanded plastic box; (6) Solid plastic boxes must have clo-
and sure devices made of a suitable mate-
(2) 4H2 for a solid plastic box. rial of adequate strength and so de-
(b) Construction requirements for signed as to prevent the box from unin-
plastic boxes are as follows: tentionally opening.
(1) The box must be manufactured (7) Maximum net mass 4H1: 60 kg (132
from suitable plastic material and be pounds); 4H2: 400 kg (882 pounds).
of adequate strength in relation to its
178.518 Standards for woven plastic
capacity and intended use. The box bags.
must be adequately resistant to aging
and to degradation caused either by (a) The following are identification
the substance contained or by ultra- codes for woven plastic bags:
violet radiation. (1) 5H1 for an unlined or non-coated
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
197
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00207 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.519 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
(3) 5H3 for a water-resistant woven 178.520 Standards for textile bags.
plastic bag.
(a) The following are identification
(b) Construction requirements for codes for textile bags:
woven plastic fabric bags are as fol-
(1) 5L1 for an unlined or non-coated
lows: textile bag;
(1) Bags must be made from stretched (2) 5L2 for a sift-proof textile bag;
tapes or monofilaments of a suitable and
plastic material. The strength of the
(3) 5L3 for a water-resistant textile
material used and the construction of bag.
the bag must be appropriate to the ca-
(b) Construction requirements for
pacity and intended use of the bag.
textile bags are as follows:
(2) If the fabric is woven flat, the (1) The textiles used must be of good
bags must be made by sewing or some quality. The strength of the fabric and
other method ensuring closure of the the construction of the bag must be ap-
bottom and one side. If the fabric is tu- propriate to the capacity and intended
bular, the bag must be closed by sew- use of the bag.
ing, weaving, or some other equally (2) Bags, sift-proof, 5L2: The bag
strong method of closure. must be made sift-proof, by appropriate
(3) Bags, sift-proof, 5H2 must be made means, such as by the use of paper
sift-proof by appropriate means such as bonded to the inner surface of the bag
use of paper or a plastic film bonded to by a water-resistant adhesive such as
the inner surface of the bag or one or bitumen, plastic film bonded to the
more separate inner liners made of inner surface of the bag, or one or more
paper or plastic material. inner liners made of paper or plastic
(4) Bags, water-resistant, 5H3: To pre- material.
vent the entry of moisture, the bag (3) Bags, water-resistant, 5L3: To pre-
must be made waterproof by appro- vent entry of moisture, the bag must
priate means, such as separate inner be made waterproof by appropriate
liners of water-resistant paper (e.g., means, such as by the use of separate
waxed kraft paper, double-tarred kraft inner liners of water-resistant paper
paper or plastic-coated kraft paper), or (e.g., waxed kraft paper, tarred paper,
plastic film bonded to the inner or or plastic-coated kraft paper), or plas-
outer surface of the bag, or one or more tic film bonded to the inner surface of
inner plastic liners. the bag, or one or more inner liners
(5) Maximum net mass: 50 kg (110 made of plastic material or metalized
pounds). film or foil.
(4) Maximum net mass: 50 kg (110
[Amdt. 17897, 55 FR 52717, Dec. 21, 1990, as
amended by Amdt. 17899, 58 FR 51534, Oct. 1,
pounds).
1993] [Amdt. 17897, 55 FR 52717, Dec. 21, 1990, as
amended at 56 FR 66285, Dec. 20, 1991]
178.519 Standards for plastic film
bags. 178.521 Standards for paper bags.
(a) The identification code for a plas- (a) The following are identification
tic film bag is 5H4. codes for paper bags:
(b) Construction requirements for (1) 5M1 for a multi-wall paper bag;
plastic film bags are as follows: and
(1) Bags must be made of a suitable (2) 5M2 for a multi-wall water-resist-
plastic material. The strength of the ant paper bag.
material used and the construction of (b) Construction requirements for
the bag must be appropriate to the ca- paper bags are as follows:
pacity and the intended use of the bag. (1) Bags must be made of a suitable
Joints and closures must be capable of kraft paper, or of an equivalent paper
withstanding pressures and impacts with at least three plies. The strength
liable to occur under normal conditions of the paper and the construction of
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
198
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00208 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.522
(2) Paper bags 5M2: To prevent the (11) 6HH2 for a plastic receptacle
entry of moisture, a bag of four plies or within a protective plastic box.
more must be made waterproof by the (b) Construction requirements for
use of either a water-resistant ply as composite packagings with inner re-
one of the two outermost plies or a ceptacles of plastic are as follows:
water-resistant barrier made of a suit- (1) Inner receptacles must be con-
able protective material between the structed under the applicable construc-
two outermost plies. A 5M2 bag of tion requirements prescribed in
three plies must be made waterproof by 178.509(b) (1) through (7) of this sub-
the use of a water-resistant ply as the part.
outermost ply. When there is danger of (2) The inner plastic receptacle must
the lading reacting with moisture, or fit snugly inside the outer packaging,
when it is packed damp, a waterproof
which must be free of any projections
ply or barrier, such as double-tarred
which may abrade the plastic material.
kraft paper, plastics-coated kraft
paper, plastics film bonded to the inner (3) Outer packagings must be con-
surface of the bag, or one or more inner structed as follows:
plastics liners, must also be placed (i) 6HA1 or 6HB1: Protective pack-
next to the substance. Seams and clo- aging must conform to the require-
sures must be waterproof. ments for steel drums in 178.504(b) of
(3) Maximum net mass: 50 kg (110 this subpart, or aluminum drums in
pounds). 178.505(b) of this subpart.
(4) UN5M1 and UN5M2 multi wall (ii) 6HA2 or 6HB2: Protective pack-
paper bags that have paper wall basis agings with steel or aluminum crate
weights that vary by not more than must conform to the requirements for
plus or minus 5% from the nominal steel or aluminum boxes found in
basis weight reported in the initial de- 178.512(b) of this subpart.
sign qualification test report. (iii) 6HC protective packaging must
[Amdt. 17897, 55 FR 52717, Dec. 21, 1990, as
conform to the requirements for wood-
amended at 56 FR 66285, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. en boxes in 178.513(b) of this subpart.
178106, 59 FR 67521, Dec. 29, 1994; 79 FR 15046, (iv) 6HD1: Protective packaging must
Mar. 18, 2014] conform to the requirements for ply-
wood drums, in 178.507(b) of this sub-
178.522 Standards for composite part.
packagings with inner plastic re-
ceptacles. (v) 6HD2: Protective packaging must
conform to the requirements of ply-
(a) The following are the identifica- wood boxes, in 178.514(b) of this sub-
tion codes for composite packagings part.
with inner plastic receptacles: (vi) 6HG1: Protective packaging must
(1) 6HA1 for a plastic receptacle with- conform to the requirements for fiber
in a protective steel drum; drums, in 178.508(b) of this subpart.
(2) 6HA2 for a plastic receptacle with-
(vii) 6HG2: protective packaging
in a protective steel crate or box;
must conform to the requirements for
(3) 6HB1 for a plastic receptacle with-
fiberboard boxes, in 178.516(b) of this
in a protective aluminum drum.
subpart.
(4) 6HB2 for a plastic receptacle with-
in a protective aluminum crate or box. (viii) 6HH1: Protective packaging
(5) 6HC for a plastic receptacle within must conform to the requirements for
a protective wooden box. plastic drums, in 178.509(b).
(6) 6HD1 for a plastic receptacle with- (ix) 6HH2: Protective packaging must
in a protective plywood drum; conform to the requirements for plastic
(7) 6HD2 for a plastic receptacle with- boxes, in 178.517(b).
in a protective plywood box; (4) Maximum capacity of inner recep-
(8) 6HG1 for a plastic receptacle with- tacles is as follows: 6HA1, 6HB1, 6HD1,
in a protective fiber drum; 6HG1, 6HH1250 L (66 gallons); 6HA2,
(9) 6HG2 for a plastic receptacle with- 6HB2, 6HC, 6HD2, 6HG2, 6HH260 L (16
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
199
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00209 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.523 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
(882 pounds); 6HB2, 6HC, 6HD2, 6HG2, (ii) Any part of a closure likely to
6HH275 kg (165 pounds). come into contact with the contents of
the receptacle must be resistant to
[Amdt. 17897, 55 FR 52717, Dec. 21, 1990, as
amended by Amdt. 178106, 59 FR 67521, Dec.
those contents. Closures must be fitted
29, 1994] so as to be leakproof and secured to
prevent any loosening during transpor-
178.523 Standards for composite tation. Vented closures must conform
packagings with inner glass, por- to 173.24(f) of this subchapter.
celain, or stoneware receptacles. (2) Protective packagings must con-
(a) The following are identification form to the following requirements:
codes for composite packagings with (i) For receptacles with protective
inner receptacles of glass, porcelain, or steel drum 6PAl, the drum must com-
stoneware: ply with 178.504(b) of this subpart.
(1) 6PA1 for glass, porcelain, or stone- However, the removable lid required
ware receptacles within a protective for this type of packaging may be in
steel drum; the form of a cap.
(2) 6PA2 for glass, porcelain, or stone- (ii) For receptacles with protective
ware receptacles within a protective packaging of steel crate or steel box
steel crate or box; 6PA2, the protective packaging must
conform to the following:
(3) 6PB1 for glass, porcelain, or stone-
(A) Section 178.512(b) of this subpart.
ware receptacles within a protective
(B) In the case of cylindrical recep-
aluminum drum;
tacles, the protective packaging must,
(4) 6PB2 for glass, porcelain, or stone-
when upright, rise above the receptacle
ware receptacles within a protective
and its closure; and
aluminum crate or box;
(C) If the protective crate surrounds
(5) 6PC for glass, porcelain, or stone- a pear-shaped receptacle and is of
ware receptacles within a protective matching shape, the protective pack-
wooden box; aging must be fitted with a protective
(6) 6PD1 for glass, porcelain, or stone- cover (cap).
ware receptacles within a protective (iii) For receptacles with protective
plywood drum; aluminum drum 6PB1, the require-
(7) 6PD2 for glass, porcelain, or stone- ments of 178.505(b) of this subpart
ware receptacles within a protective apply to the protective packaging.
wickerwork hamper; (iv) For receptacles with protective
(8) 6PG1 for glass, porcelain, or stone- aluminum box or crate 6PB2, the re-
ware receptacles within a protective quirements of 178.512(b) of this sub-
fiber drum; part apply to the protective packaging.
(9) 6PG2 for glass, porcelain, or stone- (v) For receptacles with protective
ware receptacles within a protective fi- wooden box 6PC, the requirements of
berboard box; 178.513(b) of this subpart apply to the
(10) 6PH1 for glass, porcelain, or protective packaging.
stoneware receptacles within a protec- (vi) For receptacles with protective
tive expanded plastic packaging; and plywood drum 6PD1, the requirements
(11) 6PH2 for glass, porcelain, or of 178.507(b) of this subpart apply to
stoneware receptacles within a protec- the protective packaging.
tive solid plastic packaging. (vii) For receptacles with protective
(b) Construction requirements for wickerwork hamper 6PD2, the
composite packagings with inner re- wickerwork hamper must be properly
ceptacles of glass, porcelain, or stone- made with material of good quality.
ware are as follows: The hamper must be fitted with a pro-
(1) Inner receptacles must conform to tective cover (cap) so as to prevent
the following requirements: damage to the receptacle.
(i) Receptacles must be of suitable (viii) For receptacles with protective
form (cylindrical or pear-shaped), be fiber drum 6PG1, the drum must con-
made of good quality materials free form to the requirements of 178.508(b)
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
200
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00210 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.601
of 178.516(b) of this subpart apply to with 173.22 and 178.2 of this sub-
the protective packaging. chapter.
(x) For receptacles with protective (c) Definitions. For the purpose of this
solid plastic or expanded plastic pack- subpart:
aging 6PH1 or 6PH2, the requirements (1) Design qualification testing is the
of 178.517(b) of this subpart apply to performance of the tests prescribed in
the protective packaging. Solid protec- 178.603, 178.604, 178.605, 178.606,
tive plastic packaging must be manu- 178.607, 178.608, or 178.609, as applica-
factured from high-density poly- ble, for each new or different pack-
ethylene from some other comparable aging, at the start of production of
plastic material. The removable lid re- that packaging.
quired for this type of packaging may (2) Periodic retesting is the perform-
be a cap. ance of the drop, leakproofness, hydro-
(3) Quantity limitations are as fol- static pressure, and stacking tests, as
lows: applicable, as prescribed in 178.603,
(i) Maximum net capacity for pack- 178.604, 178.605, or 178.606, respec-
aging for liquids: 60 L (16 gallons). tively, at the frequency specified in
(ii) Maximum net mass for pack- paragraph (e) of this section. For infec-
agings for solids: 75 kg (165 pounds). tious substances packagings required
to meet the requirements of 178.609,
Subpart MTesting of Non-bulk periodic retesting is the performance of
Packagings and Packages the tests specified in 178.609 at the fre-
quency specified in paragraph (e) of
SOURCE: Amdt. 17897, 55 FR 52723, Dec. 21, this section.
1990, unless otherwise noted. (3) Production testing is the perform-
ance of the leakproofness test pre-
178.600 Purpose and scope. scribed in 178.604 of this subpart on
This subpart prescribes certain test- each single or composite packaging in-
ing requirements for performance-ori- tended to contain a liquid.
ented packagings identified in subpart (4) A different packaging is one that
L of this part. differs (i.e. is not identical) from a pre-
viously produced packaging in struc-
[Amdt. 17897, 55 FR 52717, Dec. 21, 1990, as tural design, size, material of construc-
amended by Amdt. 17899, 58 FR 51534, Oct. 1,
1993]
tion, wall thickness or manner of con-
struction but does not include:
178.601 General requirements. (i) A packaging which differs only in
surface treatment;
(a) General. The test procedures pre-
scribed in this subpart are intended to (ii) A combination packaging which
ensure that packages containing haz- differs only in that the outer pack-
ardous materials can withstand normal aging has been successfully tested with
conditions of transportation and are different inner packagings. A variety of
considered minimum requirements. such inner packagings may be assem-
Each packaging must be manufactured bled in this outer packaging without
and assembled so as to be capable of further testing;
successfully passing the prescribed (iii) A plastic packaging which differs
tests and of conforming to the require- only with regard to additives which
ments of 173.24 of this subchapter at conform to 178.509(b)(3) or 178.517(b)
all times while in transportation. (4) or (5) of this part;
(b) Responsibility. It is the responsi- (iv) A combination packaging with
bility of the packaging manufacturer inner packagings conforming to the
to assure that each package is capable provisions of paragraph (g) of this sec-
of passing the prescribed tests. To the tion;
extent that a package assembly func- (v) Packagings which differ from the
tion, including final closure, is per- design type only in their lesser design
formed by the person who offers a haz- height; or
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
201
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00211 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.601 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
to determine that the inner packaging, used for the drop test;
including closure, maintains an equiva- (iii) The thickness of cushioning ma-
lent level of performance is docu- terial between inner packagings and
202
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00212 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.601
between inner packagings and the out- duced with reductions in external di-
side of the packaging may not be re- mensions (i.e., length, width or diame-
duced below the corresponding thick- ter) of up to 25 percent of the dimen-
ness in the originally tested packaging; sions of a tested packaging may be
and when a single inner packaging was used without further testing provided
used in the original test, the thickness an equivalent level of performance is
of cushioning between inner pack- maintained. The packagings must, in
agings may not be less than the thick- all other respects (including wall
ness of cushioning between the outside thicknesses), be identical to the tested
of the packaging and the inner pack- design-type. The marked gross mass
aging in the original test. When either (when required) must be reduced in
fewer or smaller inner packagings are proportion to the reduction in volume.
used (as compared to the inner pack- (4) Variation 4. Variations are per-
agings used in the drop test), sufficient mitted in outer packagings of a tested
additional cushioning material must be design-type combination packaging,
used to take up void spaces. without further testing, provided an
(iv) The outer packaging must have equivalent level of performance is
successfully passed the stacking test maintained, as follows:
set forth in 178.606 of this subpart (i) Each external dimension (length,
when empty, i.e., without either inner width and height) is less than or equal
packagings or cushioning materials. to the corresponding dimension of the
The total mass of identical packages tested design-type;
must be based on the combined mass of (ii) The structural design of the test-
inner packagings used for the drop ed outer packaging (i.e. methods of
test; construction, materials of construc-
(v) Inner packagings containing liq- tion, strength characteristics of mate-
uids must be completely surrounded rials of construction, method of closure
with a sufficient quantity of absorbent and material thicknesses) is main-
material to absorb the entire liquid tained;
contents of the inner packagings; (iii) The inner packagings are iden-
(vi) When the outer packaging is in- tical to the inner packagings used in
tended to contain inner packagings for the tested design type except that their
liquids and is not leakproof, or is in- size and mass may be less; and they are
tended to contain inner packagings for oriented within the outer packaging in
solids and is not siftproof, a means of the same manner as in the tested pack-
containing any liquid or solid contents aging;
in the event of leakage must be pro- (iv) The same type or design of ab-
vided in the form of a leakproof liner, sorbent materials, cushioning mate-
plastic bag, or other equally efficient rials and any other components nec-
means of containment. For packagings essary to contain and protect inner
containing liquids, the absorbent mate- packagings, as used in the tested de-
rial required in paragraph (g)(2)(v) of sign type, are maintained. The thick-
this section must be placed inside the ness of cushioning material between
means of containing liquid contents; inner packagings and between inner
and packagings and the outside of the
(vii) Packagings must be marked in packaging may not be less than the
accordance with 178.503 of this part as thicknesses in the tested design type
having been tested to Packing Group I packaging; and
performance for combination pack- (v) Sufficient additional cushioning
agings. The marked maximum gross material is used to take up void spaces
mass may not exceed the sum of the and to prevent significant moving of
mass of the outer packaging plus one the inner packagings.
half the mass of the filled inner pack- An outer packaging qualifying for use
agings of the tested combination pack- in transport in accordance with all of
aging. In addition, the marking re- the above conditions may also be used
quired by 178.503(a)(2) of this part without testing to transport inner
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
203
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00213 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.601 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
Variation 1 in paragraph (g)(1) of this the specific gravity of the liquid used
section. in the design type tests of the pack-
(5) Variation 5. Single packagings aging with replacement closure devices
(i.e., non-bulk packagings other than or gasketing.)
combination packagings), that differ (6) The provisions in Variations 1, 2,
from a tested design type only to the and 4 in paragraphs (g)(1), (2) and (4) of
extent that the closure device or this section for combination pack-
gasketing differs from that used in the agings may be applied to packagings
originally tested design type, may be containing articles, where the provi-
used without further testing, provided sions for inner packagings are applied
an equivalent level of performance is analogously to the articles. In this
maintained, subject to the following case, inner packagings need not comply
conditions (the qualifying tests): with 173.27(c)(1) and (c)(2) of this sub-
(i) A packaging with the replacement chapter.
closure devices or gasketing must suc-
(7) Approval of selective testing. In ad-
cessfully pass the drop test specified in
dition to the provisions of 178.601(g)(1)
178.603 in the orientation which most
through (g)(6) of this subpart, the Asso-
severely tests the integrity of the clo-
ciate Administrator may approve the
sure or gasket;
selective testing of packagings that
(ii) When intended to contain liquids,
a packaging with the replacement clo- differ only in minor respects from a
sure devices or gasketing must success- tested type.
fully pass the leakproofness test speci- (8) For a steel drum with a capacity
fied in 178.604, the hydrostatic pres- greater than 12 L (3 gallons) manufac-
sure test specified in 178.605, and the tured from low carbon, cold-rolled
stacking test specified in 178.606. sheet steel meeting ASTM designations
A 366/A 366M or A 568/A 568M, vari-
Replacement closures and gasketings
ations in elements other than the fol-
qualified under the above test require-
lowing design elements are considered
ments are authorized without addi-
minor and do not constitute a different
tional testing for packagings described
drum design type, or different pack-
in paragraph (g)(3) of this section. Re-
aging as defined in paragraph (c) of
placement closures and gasketings
this section for which design qualifica-
qualified under the above test require-
tion testing and periodic retesting are
ments also are authorized without ad-
required. Minor variations authorized
ditional testing for different tested de-
without further testing include
sign types packagings of the same type
changes in the identity of the supplier
as the originally tested packaging, pro-
of component material made to the
vided the original design type tests are
same specifications, or the original
more severe or comparable to tests
manufacturer of a DOT specification or
which would otherwise be conducted on
UN standard drum to be remanufac-
the packaging with the replacement
tured. A change in any one or more of
closures or gasketings. (For example:
the following design elements con-
The packaging used in the qualifying
stitutes a different drum design type:
tests has a lesser packaging wall thick-
ness than the packaging with replace- (i) The packaging type and category
ment closure devices or gasketing; the of the original drum and the remanu-
gross mass of the packaging used in the factured drum, i.e., 1A1 or 1A2;
qualifying drop test equals or exceeds (ii) The style, (i.e., straight-sided or
the mass for which the packaging with tapered);
replacement closure devices or (iii) Except as provided in paragraph
gasketing was tested; the packaging (g)(3) of this section, the rated
used in the qualifying drop test was (marked) capacity and outside dimen-
dropped from the same or greater sions;
height than the height from which the (iv) The physical state for which the
packaging with replacement closure packaging was originally approved
devices or gasketing was dropped in de- (e.g., tested for solids or liquids);
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
sign type tests; and the specific gravity (v) An increase in the marked level of
of the substance used in the qualifying performance of the original drum (i.e.,
drop test was the same or greater than to a higher packing group, hydrostatic
204
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00214 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.601
205
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00215 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.602 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
Person manufacturing the packaging .......................................... As long as manufactured and two years thereafter.
Person performing design testing ............................................... Design test maintained for a single or composite packaging for
six years after the test is successfully performed and for a
combination packaging or packaging intended for infectious
substances for seven years after the test is successfully per-
formed.
Person performing periodic retesting .......................................... Performance test maintained for a single or composite pack-
aging for one year after the test is successfully performed
and for a combination packaging or packaging intended for
infectious substances for two years after the test is success-
fully performed.
(2) The test report must be made packagings in the case of combination
available to a user of a packaging or a packagings.
representative of the Department upon (b) For the drop and stacking test,
request. The test report, at a min- inner and single-unit receptacles other
imum, must contain the following in- than bags must be filled to not less
formation: than 95% of maximum capacity (see
(i) Name and address of test facility; 171.8 of this subchapter) in the case of
(ii) Name and address of applicant solids and not less than 98% of max-
(where appropriate); imum in the case of liquids. Bags con-
(iii) A unique test report identifica- taining solids shall be filled to the
tion; maximum mass at which they may be
(iv) Date of the test report; used. The material to be transported in
(v) Manufacturer of the packaging; the packagings may be replaced by a
(vi) Description of the packaging de- non-hazardous material, except for
sign type (e.g., dimensions, materials, chemical compatibility testing or
closures, thickness, etc.), including where this would invalidate the results
methods of manufacture (e.g., blow of the tests.
molding) and which may include draw- (c) If the material to be transported
ing(s) and/or photograph(s); is replaced for test purposes by a non-
(vii) Maximum capacity; hazardous material, the material used
must be of the same or higher specific
(viii) Characteristics of test contents,
gravity as the material to be carried,
e.g., viscosity and relative density for
and its other physical properties
liquids and particle size for solids;
(grain, size, viscosity) which might in-
(ix) Test descriptions and results; and
fluence the results of the required tests
(x) Signed with the name and title of must correspond as closely as possible
signatory. to those of the hazardous material to
[Amdt. 17897, 55 FR 52723, Dec. 21, 1990, as be transported. Water may also be used
amended at 56 FR 66285, Dec. 20, 1991; 57 FR for the liquid drop test under the con-
45465, Oct. 1, 1992; Amdt. 178102, 59 FR 28494, ditions specified in 178.603(e) of this
June 2, 1994; Amdt. 178106, 59 FR 67521, 67522, subpart. It is permissible to use addi-
Dec. 29, 1994; Amdt. 178117, 61 FR 50628, Sept. tives, such as bags of lead shot, to
26, 1996; 66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 53143,
achieve the requisite total package
Aug. 14, 2002; 68 FR 75758, Dec. 31, 2003; 68 FR
61942, Oct. 30, 2003; 75 FR 5396, Feb. 2, 2010; 75 mass, so long as they are placed so that
FR 60339, Sept. 30, 2010; 77 FR 60944, Oct. 5, the test results are not affected.
2012; 78 FR 1118, Jan. 7, 2013; 78 FR 14715, Mar. (d) Paper or fiberboard packagings
7, 2013; 78 FR 65487, Oct. 31, 2013] must be conditioned for at least 24
hours immediately prior to testing in
178.602 Preparation of packagings an atmosphere maintained
and packages for testing. (1) At 50 percent 2 percent relative
(a) Except as otherwise provided in humidity, and at a temperature of 23
this subchapter, each packaging and C2 C (73 F4 F). Average values
package must be closed in preparation should fall within these limits. Short-
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
for testing and tests must be carried term fluctuations and measurement
out in the same manner as if prepared limitations may cause individual meas-
for transportation, including inner urements to vary by up to 5 percent
206
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00216 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.603
Steel drums, Aluminum drums, Metal Six(three for each First drop (using three samples): The package must strike the
drums (other than steel or alu- drop). target diagonally on the chime or, if the packaging has no
minum), Steel Jerricans, Plywood chime, on a circumferential seam or an edge. Second drop
drums, Wooden barrels, Fiber (using the other three samples): The package must strike
drums, Plastic drums and Jerricans, the target on the weakest part not tested by the first drop,
Composite packagings which are in for example a closure or, for some 7 cylindrical drums, the
the shape of a drum. welded longitudinal seam of the drum body.
Boxes of natural wood, Plywood Five(one for each First drop: Flat on the bottom (using the first sample). Second
boxes, Reconstituted wood boxes, drop). drop: Flat on the top (using the second sample). Third drop:
Fiberboard boxes, Plastic boxes, Flat on the long side (using the third sample). Fourth drop:
Steel, aluminum or other metal Flat on the short side (using the fourth sample). Fifth drop:
boxes, Composite packagings that On a corner (using the fifth sample).
are in the shape of a box.
Bagssingle-ply with a side seam ..... Three(three drops First drop: Flat on a wide face (using all three samples). Sec-
per bag). ond drop: Flat on a narrow face (using all three samples).
Third drop: On an end of the bag (using all three samples).
Bagssingle-ply without a side seam, Three(two drops per First drop: Flat on a wide face (using all three samples). Sec-
or multi-ply. bag). ond drop: On an end of the bag (using all three samples).
(b) Exceptions. For testing of single or other than expanded polystyrene boxes,
composite packagings constructed of composite packagings (plastic mate-
stainless steel, nickel, or monel at rial), and combination packagings with
periodic intervals only (i.e., other than plastic inner packagings other than
design qualification testing), the drop plastic bags intended to contain solids
test may be conducted with two sam- or articles must be carried out when
ples, one sample each for the two drop the temperature of the test sample and
orientations. These samples may have its contents has been reduced to 18 C
been previously used for the hydro- (0 F) or lower. Test liquids must be
static pressure or stacking test. Excep- kept in the liquid state, if necessary,
tions for the number of steel, alu- by the addition of anti-freeze. Water/
minum and other metal packaging anti-freeze solutions with a minimum
samples used for conducting the drop specific gravity of 0.95 for testing at
test are subject to the approval of the 18 C (0 F) or lower are considered
Associate Administrator. acceptable test liquids. Test samples
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
(c) Special preparation of test samples prepared in this way are not required
for the drop test. (1) Testing of plastic to be conditioned in accordance with
drums, plastic jerricans, plastic boxes 178.602(d).
207
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00217 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.604 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
(d) Target. The target must be a rigid, (3) For a bag, neither the outermost
non-resilient, flat and horizontal sur- ply nor an outer packaging exhibits
face. any damage likely to adversely affect
(e) Drop height. Drop heights, meas- safety during transport;
ured as the vertical distance from the (4) The packaging or outer packaging
target to the lowest point on the pack- of a composite or combination pack-
age, must be equal to or greater than aging must not exhibit any damage
the drop height determined as follows: likely to affect safety during transport.
(1) For solids and liquids, if the test Inner receptacles, inner packagings, or
is performed with the solid or liquid to articles must remain completely with-
be transported or with a non-hazardous in the outer packaging and there must
material having essentially the same be no leakage of the filling substance
physical characteristic, the drop height from the inner receptacles or inner
must be determined according to pack- packagings;
ing group, as follows: (5) Any discharge from a closure is
(i) Packing Group I: 1.8 m (5.9 feet). slight and ceases immediately after
(ii) Packing Group II: 1.2 m (3.9 feet). impact with no further leakage; and
(iii) Packing Group III: 0.8 m (2.6 (6) No rupture is permitted in pack-
feet). agings for materials in Class 1 which
(2) For liquids in single packagings would permit spillage of loose explo-
and for inner packagings of combina- sive substances or articles from the
tion packagings, if the test is per- outer packaging.
formed with water: [Amdt. 17897, 55 FR 52723, Dec. 21, 1990, as
(i) Where the materials to be carried amended at 56 FR 66286, Dec. 20, 1991; 57 FR
have a specific gravity not exceeding 45465, Oct. 1, 1992; Amdt. 17899, 58 FR 51534,
1.2, drop height must be determined ac- Oct. 1, 1993; Amdt. 178106, 59 FR 67522, Dec.
cording to packing group, as follows: 29, 1994; 65 FR 50462, Aug. 18, 2000; 66 FR 45386,
Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 61016, Sept. 27, 2002; 69 FR
(A) Packing Group I: 1.8 m (5.9 feet). 76186, Dec. 20, 2004; 76 FR 3389, Jan. 19, 2011;
(B) Packing Group II: 1.2 m (3.9 feet). 78 FR 1097, Jan. 7, 2013]
(C) Packing Group III: 0.8 m (2.6 feet).
(ii) Where the materials to be trans- 178.604 Leakproofness test.
ported have a specific gravity exceed- (a) General. The leakproofness test
ing 1.2, the drop height must be cal- must be performed with compressed air
culated on the basis of the specific or other suitable gases on all pack-
gravity (SG) of the material to be car- agings intended to contain liquids, ex-
ried, rounded up to the first decimal, as cept that:
follows: (1) The inner receptacle of a com-
(A) Packing Group I: SG 1.5 m (4.9 posite packaging may be tested with-
feet). out the outer packaging provided the
(B) Packing Group II: SG 1.0 m (3.3 test results are not affected; and
feet). (2) This test is not required for inner
(C) Packing Group III: SG 0.67 m packagings of combination packagings.
(2.2 feet). (b) Number of packagings to be tested
(f) Criteria for passing the test. A pack- (1) Production testing. All packagings
age is considered to successfully pass subject to the provisions of this section
the drop tests if for each sample test- must be tested and must pass the
ed leakproofness test:
(1) For packagings containing liquid, (i) Before they are first used in trans-
each packaging does not leak when portation; and
equilibrium has been reached between (ii) Prior to reuse, when authorized
the internal and external pressures, ex- for reuse by 173.28 of this subchapter.
cept for inner packagings of combina- (2) Design qualification and periodic
tion packagings when it is not nec- testing. Three samples of each different
essary that the pressures be equalized; packaging must be tested and must
(2) For removable head drums for sol- pass the leakproofness test. Exceptions
ids, the entire contents are retained by for the number of samples used in con-
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
an inner packaging (e.g., a plastic bag) ducting the leakproofness test are sub-
even if the closure on the top head of ject to the approval of the Associate
the drum is no longer sift-proof; Administrator.
208
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00218 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.605
209
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00219 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.606 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
must be tested to a minimum test pres- the test by placing two filled pack-
sure of 250 kPa (36 psig). agings of the same type on the test
(e) Criteria for passing the test. A pack- sample. The stacked packages must
age passes the hydrostatic test if, for maintain their position for one hour.
each test sample, there is no leakage of Plastic packagings must be cooled to
liquid from the package. ambient temperature before this stack-
ing stability assessment.
[Amdt. 17897, 55 FR 52723, Dec. 21, 1990, as
amended at 56 FR 66286, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. (2) Periodic retesting. The test sample
17899, 58 FR 51534, Oct. 1, 1993; Amdt. 178102, must be tested in accordance with:
59 FR 28494, June 2, 1994; 65 FR 50462, Aug. 18, (i) Section 178.606(c)(1) of this sub-
2000; 66 FR 45386, 45390, Aug. 28, 2001; 73 FR part; or
57007, Oct. 1, 2008; 78 FR 60755, Oct. 2, 2013] (ii) The packaging may be tested
using a dynamic compression testing
178.606 Stacking test. machine. The test must be conducted
(a) General. All packaging design at room temperature on an empty, un-
types other than bags must be sub- sealed packaging. The test sample
jected to a stacking test. must be centered on the bottom platen
(b) Number of test samples. Three test of the testing machine. The top platen
samples are required for each different must be lowered until it comes in con-
packaging. For periodic retesting of tact with the test sample. Compression
packagings constructed of stainless must be applied end to end. The speed
steel, monel, or nickel, only one test of the compression tester must be one-
sample is required. Exceptions for the half inch plus or minus one-fourth inch
number of aluminum and steel sample per minute. An initial preload of 50
packagings used in conducting the pounds must be applied to ensure a
stacking test are subject to the ap- definite contact between the test sam-
proval of the Associate Administrator. ple and the platens. The distance be-
Notwithstanding the provisions of tween the platens at this time must be
178.602(a) of this subpart, combination recorded as zero deformation. The force
packagings may be subjected to the A to then be applied must be calculated
stacking test without their inner pack- using the formula:
agings, except where this would invali- Liquids: A = (n1) [w + (s v 8.3
date the results of the test. .98)] 1.5;
(c) Test method(1) Design qualifica- Solids: A = (n1) (m 2.2 1.5)
tion testing. The test sample must be
subjected to a force applied to the top Where:
surface of the test sample equivalent to A = applied load in pounds
the total weight of identical packages m = the certified maximum gross mass for
which might be stacked on it during the container in kilograms.
n = minimum number of containers that,
transport; where the contents of the
when stacked, reach a height of 3 meters.
test sample are non-hazardous liquids s = specific gravity of lading.
with specific gravities different from w = maximum weight of one empty container
that of the liquid to be transported, the in pounds.
force must be calculated based on the v = actual capacity of container (rated ca-
specific gravity that will be marked on pacity + outage) in gallons.
the packaging. The minimum height of And:
the stack, including the test sample, 8.3 corresponds to the weight in pounds of 1.0
must be 3.0 m (10 feet). The duration of gallon of water.
the test must be 24 hours, except that .98 corresponds to the minimum filling per-
plastic drums, jerricans, and composite centage of the maximum capacity for liq-
packagings 6HH intended for liquids uids.
1.5 is a compensation factor that converts
shall be subjected to the stacking test
the static load of the stacking test into
for a period of 28 days at a temperature a load suitable for dynamic compression
of not less than 40 C (104 F). Alter- testing.
native test methods which yield equiv- 2.2 is the conversion factor for kilograms to
alent results may be used if approved pounds.
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
by the Associate Administrator. In (d) Criteria for passing the test. No test
guided load tests, stacking stability sample may leak. In composite pack-
must be assessed after completion of agings or combination packagings,
210
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00220 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.609
there must be no leakage of the filling (0.063 inch) thickness (such as steel
substance from the inner receptacle, or strapping or paperboard) can be passed
inner packaging. No test sample may between the bottom of any package
show any deterioration which could ad- and the platform.
versely affect transportation safety or (4) Immediately following the period
any distortion likely to reduce its of vibration, each package must be re-
strength, cause instability in stacks of moved from the platform, turned on its
packages, or cause damage to inner side and observed for any evidence of
packagings likely to reduce safety in leakage.
transportation. For the dynamic com- (5) Other methods, at least equally
pression test, a container passes the effective, may be used, if approved by
test if, after application of the required the Associate Administrator.
load, there is no buckling of the side- (c) Criteria for passing the test. A pack-
walls sufficient to cause damage to its aging passes the vibration test if there
expected contents; in no case may the is no rupture or leakage from any of
maximum deflection exceed one inch. the packages. No test sample should
show any deterioration which could ad-
[Amdt. 17897, 55 FR 52723, Dec. 21, 1990, as
versely affect transportation safety or
amended at 56 FR 66286, Dec. 20, 1991; 57 FR
45465, Oct. 1, 1992; Amdt. 178102, 59 FR 28494, any distortion liable to reduce pack-
June 2, 1994; Amdt. 178106, 59 FR 67522, Dec. aging strength.
29, 1994; 65 FR 58632, Sept. 29, 2000; 66 FR [Amdt. 17897, 55 FR 52723, Dec. 21, 1990, as
45386, Aug. 28, 2001; 70 FR 34076, June 13, 2005; amended at 56 FR 66286, Dec. 20, 1991; 66 FR
72 FR 55696, Oct. 1, 2007] 45386, Aug. 28, 2001]
178.607 Cooperage test for bung-type 178.609 Test requirements for pack-
wooden barrels. agings for infectious substances.
(a) Number of samples. One barrel is (a) Samples of each packaging must
required for each different packaging. be prepared for testing as described in
(b) Method of testing. Remove all paragraph (b) of this section and then
hoops above the bilge of an empty bar- subjected to the tests in paragraphs (d)
rel at least two days old. through (i) of this section.
(c) Criteria for passing the test. A pack- (b) Samples of each packaging must
aging passes the cooperage test only if be prepared as for transport except
the diameter of the cross-section of the that a liquid or solid infectious sub-
upper part of the barrel does not in- stance should be replaced by water or,
crease by more than 10 percent. where conditioning at 18 C (0 F) is
specified, by water/antifreeze. Each pri-
178.608 Vibration standard. mary receptacle must be filled to 98
(a) Each packaging must be capable percent capacity. Packagings for live
of withstanding, without rupture or animals should be tested with the live
leakage, the vibration test procedure animal being replaced by an appro-
outlined in this section. priate dummy of similar mass.
(b) Test method. (1) Three sample (c) Packagings prepared as for trans-
packagings, selected at random, must port must be subjected to the tests in
be filled and closed as for shipment. Table I of this paragraph (c), which, for
(2) The three samples must be placed test purposes, categorizes packagings
on a vibrating platform that has a according to their material character-
vertical or rotary double-amplitude istics. For outer packagings, the head-
(peak-to-peak displacement) of one ings in Table I relate to fiberboard or
inch. The packages should be con- similar materials whose performance
strained horizontally to prevent them may be rapidly affected by moisture;
from falling off the platform, but must plastics that may embrittle at low
be left free to move vertically, bounce temperature; and other materials, such
and rotate. as metal, for which performance is not
(3) The test must be performed for significantly affected by moisture or
one hour at a frequency that causes the temperature. Where a primary recep-
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
211
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00221 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.609 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
They must then be subjected to the first. In each instance, the steel rod
test described in paragraph (d) of this must be aimed to impact the primary
section. receptacle(s). For a successful test,
212
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00222 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.609
there must be no leakage from the pri- the same manner as in the tested pack-
mary receptacle(s) following each im- age.
pact. (2) Variation 2. A lesser number of the
(2) Samples must be dropped onto the tested primary receptacles, or of the
end of a cylindrical steel rod. The rod alternative types of primary recep-
must be set vertically in a level, hard tacles identified in paragraph (i)(1) of
surface. It must have a diameter of 38 this section, may be used provided suf-
mm (1.5 inches) and a radius not ex- ficient cushioning is added to fill the
ceeding 6 mm (0.2 inches) at the edges void space(s) and to prevent significant
of the upper end. The rod must pro- movement of the primary receptacles.
trude from the surface a distance at (3) Variation 3. Primary receptacles of
least equal to that between the pri- any type may be placed within a sec-
mary receptacle(s) and the outer sur- ondary packaging and shipped without
face of the outer packaging with a min- testing in the outer packaging provided
imum of 200 mm (7.9 inches). One sam- all of the following conditions are met:
ple must be dropped in a vertical free (i) The secondary and outer pack-
fall from a height of 1 m (3 feet), meas- aging combination must be success-
ured from the top of the steel rod. A fully tested in accordance with para-
second sample must be dropped from graphs (a) through (h) of this section
the same height in an orientation per- with fragile (e.g., glass) inner recep-
pendicular to that used for the first. In tacles.
each instance, the packaging must be (ii) The total combined gross weight
oriented so the steel rod will impact of inner receptacles may not exceed
the primary receptacle(s). For a suc- one-half the gross weight of inner re-
cessful test, there must be no leakage ceptacles used for the drop test in para-
from the primary receptacle(s) fol- graph (d) of this section.
lowing each impact. (iii) The thickness of cushioning ma-
(i) Variations. The following vari- terial between inner receptacles and
ations in the primary receptacles between inner receptacles and the out-
placed within the secondary packaging side of the secondary packaging may
are allowed without additional testing not be reduced below the corresponding
of the completed package. An equiva- thicknesses in the originally tested
lent level of performance must be packaging. If a single inner receptacle
maintained. was used in the original test, the thick-
(1) Variation 1. Primary receptacles of ness of cushioning between the inner
equivalent or smaller size as compared receptacles must be no less than the
to the tested primary receptacles may thickness of cushioning between the
be used provided they meet all of the outside of the secondary packaging and
following conditions: the inner receptacle in the original
(i) The primary receptacles are of test. When either fewer or smaller
similar design to the tested primary re- inner receptacles are used (as com-
ceptacle (e.g., shape: round, rectan- pared to the inner receptacles used in
gular, etc.). the drop test), sufficient additional
(ii) The material of construction of cushioning material must be used to
the primary receptacle (glass, plastics, fill the void.
metal, etc.) offers resistance to impact (iv) The outer packaging must pass
and a stacking force equal to or greater the stacking test in 178.606 while
than that of the originally tested pri- empty. The total weight of identical
mary receptacle. packages must be based on the com-
(iii) The primary receptacles have bined mass of inner receptacles used in
the same or smaller openings and the the drop test in paragraph (d) of this
closure is of similar design (e.g., screw section.
cap, friction lid, etc.). (v) For inner receptacles containing
(iv) Sufficient additional cushioning liquids, an adequate quantity of ab-
material is used to fill void spaces and sorbent material must be present to
to prevent significant movement of the absorb the entire liquid contents of the
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
213
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00223 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.700 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
liquids and is not leakproof, or is in- specified in paragraph (a)(1) of this sec-
tended to contain inner receptacles for tion; followed by the capital letter(s)
solids and is not sift proof, a means of specified in paragraph (a)(2) of this sec-
containing any liquid or solid contents tion; followed, when specified in an in-
in the event of leakage must be pro- dividual section, by a numeral indi-
vided. This can be a leakproof liner, cating the category of intermediate
plastic bag, or other equally effective bulk container.
means of containment. (1) IBC code number designations are
(vii) In addition, the marking re- as follows:
quired in 178.503(f) of this subchapter
must be followed by the letter U. For solids, discharged
Rigid .................. 11 21 31
Subpart NIBC Performance- Flexible .............. 13
Oriented Standards
(2) Intermediate bulk container code
178.700 Purpose, scope and defini- letter designations are as follows:
tions.
A means steel (all types and surface treat-
(a) This subpart prescribes require- ments).
ments applying to IBCs intended for B means aluminum.
the transportation of hazardous mate- C means natural wood.
rials. Standards for these packagings D means plywood.
are based on the UN Recommendations. F means reconstituted wood.
(b) Terms used in this subpart are de- G means fiberboard.
fined in 171.8 of this subchapter and in H means plastic.
paragraph (c) of this section. L means textile.
(c) The following definitions pertain M means paper, multiwall.
to the IBC standards in this subpart. N means metal (other than steel or alu-
(1) Body means the receptacle proper minum).
(including openings and their closures, (b) For composite IBCs, two capital
but not including service equipment) letters are used in sequence following
that has a volumetric capacity of not the numeral indicating IBC design
more than 3 cubic meters (3,000 L, 793 type. The first letter indicates the ma-
gallons, or 106 cubic feet). terial of the IBC inner receptacle. The
(2) Service equipment means filling and second letter indicates the material of
discharge, pressure relief, safety, heat- the outer IBC. For example, 31HA1 is a
ing and heat-insulating devices and composite IBC with a plastic inner re-
measuring instruments. ceptacle and a steel outer packaging.
(3) Structural equipment means the re-
inforcing, fastening, handling, protec- [Amdt. 178103, 59 FR 38068, July 26, 1994, as
tive or stabilizing members of the body amended at 66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001]
or stacking load bearing structural
members (such as metal cages). 178.703 Marking of IBCs.
(4) Maximum permissible gross mass (a) The manufacturer shall:
means the mass of the body, its service (1) Mark every IBC in a durable and
equipment, structural equipment and clearly visible manner. The marking
the maximum net mass (see 171.8 of may be applied in a single line or in
this subchapter). multiple lines provided the correct se-
[Amdt. 178103, 59 FR 38068, July 26, 1994, as quence is followed with the informa-
amended by Amdt. 178108, 60 FR 40038, Aug. tion required by this section in letters,
4, 1995; 66 FR 45386, 45387, Aug. 28, 2001; 73 FR numerals and symbols of at least 12
57008, Oct. 1, 2008; 75 FR 5396, Feb. 2, 2010] mm in height. This minimum marking
size applies only to IBCs manufactured
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
214
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00224 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.703
(iii) For a rigid plastic IBC con- symbol in place of the manufacturers
taining liquids, made from plastic with name and address:
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
215
ER26JY94.000</GPH>
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00225 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.703 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
(iv) For a composite IBC containing with the symbol of a DOT approved
liquids, with a rigid plastic inner re- third-party test laboratory:
ceptacle and an outer steel body and
(vii) Serial number assigned by the designed for stacking or not designed
manufacturer. for stacking, as appropriate, must be
216
ER26JY94.002</GPH>
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00226 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.704
217
ER04JA10.097</GPH>
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00227 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.705 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
from damage. Valves having lever clo- (ii) Aluminum IBCs intended to con-
sures must be secured against acci- tain flammable liquids must have no
dental opening. The open or closed po- movable parts, such as covers and clo-
sition of each valve must be readily ap- sures, made of unprotected steel liable
parent. For each IBC containing a liq- to rust, which might cause a dangerous
uid, a secondary means of sealing the reaction from friction or percussive
discharge aperture must also be pro- contact with the aluminum.
vided, e.g., by a blank flange or equiva- (iii) Metals used in fabricating the
lent device. body of a metal IBC must meet the fol-
(f) IBC design types must be con- lowing requirements:
structed in such a way as to be bottom- (A) For steel, the percentage elon-
lifted or top-lifted as specified in gation at fracture must not be less
178.811 and 178.812. than 10,000/Rm with a minimum of 20
[Amdt. 178103, 59 FR 38068, July 26, 1994, as
percent; where Rm = minimum tensile
amended at 66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR strength of the steel to be used, in N/
61942, Oct. 30, 2003] mm2; if U.S. Standard units of psi are
used for tensile strength then the ratio
178.705 Standards for metal IBCs. becomes 10,000 (145/Rm).
(a) The provisions in this section (B) For aluminum, the percentage
apply to metal IBCs intended to con- elongation at fracture must not be less
tain liquids and solids. Metal IBC types than 10,000/(6Rm) with an absolute min-
are designated: imum of eight percent; if U.S. Standard
(1) 11A, 11B, 11N for solids that are units of psi are used for tensile
loaded or discharged by gravity. strength then the ratio becomes 10,000
(2) 21A, 21B, 21N for solids that are 145 / (6Rm).
loaded or discharged at a gauge pres- (C) Specimens used to determine the
sure greater than 10 kPa (1.45 psig). elongation at fracture must be taken
(3) 31A, 31B, 31N for liquids. transversely to the direction of rolling
(b) Definitions for metal IBCs: and be so secured that:
(1) Metal IBC means an IBC with a Lo = 5d
metal body, together with appropriate
service and structural equipment. or
(2) Protected means providing the IBC Lo = 5.65 A
body with additional external protec-
tion against impact and abrasion. For where:
example, a multi-layer (sandwich) or Lo = gauge length of the specimen before the
double wall construction or a frame test
with a metal lattice-work casing. d = diameter
A = cross-sectional area of test specimen.
(c) Construction requirements for
metal IBCs are as follows: (iv) Minimum wall thickness:
(1) Body. The body must be made of (A) For a reference steel having a
ductile metal materials. Welds must be product of Rm Ao = 10,000, where Ao
made so as to maintain design type in- is the minimum elongation (as a per-
tegrity of the receptacle under condi- centage) of the reference steel to be
tions normally incident to transpor- used on fracture under tensile stress
tation. (Rm Ao = 10,000 145; if tensile
(i) The use of dissimilar metals must strength is in U.S. Standard units of
not result in deterioration that could pounds per square inch), the wall
affect the integrity of the body. thickness must not be less than:
Wall thickness (T) in mm
Capacity (C) in liters 1 Types 11A, 11B, 11N Types 21A, 21B, 21N, 31A, 31B, 31N
2000<C3000 ................................................ T = C/2000 + 1.5 T = C/2000 + 1.0 T = C/1000 + 1.0 T = C/2000 + 1.5
218
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00228 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.706
(B) For metals other than the ref- to pressure build-up. This can be
erence steel described in paragraph achieved by spring-loaded or non-re-
(c)(1)(iii)(A) of this section, the min- closing pressure relief devices or by
imum wall thickness is the greater of other means of construction.
1.5 mm (0.059 inches) or as determined (ii) The start-to-discharge pressure
by use of the following equivalence for- may not be higher than 65 kPa (9 psig)
mula: and no lower than the vapor pressure of
the hazardous material plus the partial
FORMULA FOR METRIC UNITS pressure of the air or other inert gases,
measured in the IBC at 55 C (131 F),
determined on the basis of a maximum
21.4 e 0
e1 = 3
degree of filling as specified in
173.35(d) of this subchapter. This does
Rm1 A1 not apply to fusible devices unless such
FORMULA FOR U.S. STANDARD devices are the only source of pressure
UNITS relief for the IBC. Pressure relief de-
vices must be fitted in the vapor space.
(d) Metal IBCs may not have a volu-
21.4 e 0 metric capacity greater than 3,000 L
e1 =
3
( Rm1 A1 )/145 (793 gallons) or less than 450 L (119 gal-
lons).
where: [Amdt. 178103, 59 FR 38068, July 26, 1994, as
e1 = required equivalent wall thickness of the amended by Amdt. 178108, 60 FR 40038, Aug.
metal to be used (in mm or if eo is in 4, 1995; Amdt. 178117, 61 FR 50629, Sept. 26,
inches, use formula for U.S. Standard 1996; 66 FR 33452, June 21, 2001; 66 FR 45386,
units). 45387, Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR 45041, July 31, 2003;
eo = required minimum wall thickness for 75 FR 5396, Feb. 2, 2010; 78 FR 1097, Jan. 7,
the reference steel (in mm or if eo is in 2013]
inches, use formula for U.S. Standard
units). 178.706 Standards for rigid plastic
Rm1 = guaranteed minimum tensile strength IBCs.
of the metal to be used (in N/mm2 or for (a) The provisions in this section
U.S. Standard units, use psi). apply to rigid plastic IBCs intended to
A1 = minimum elongation (as a percentage)
of the metal to be used on fracture under
contain solids or liquids. Rigid plastic
tensile stress (see paragraph (c)(1) of this IBC types are designated:
section). (1) 11H1 fitted with structural equip-
ment designed to withstand the whole
(C) For purposes of the calculation load when IBCs are stacked, for solids
described in paragraph (c)(1)(iv)(B) of which are loaded or discharged by grav-
this section, the guaranteed minimum ity.
tensile strength of the metal to be used (2) 11H2 freestanding, for solids which
(Rm1) must be the minimum value ac- are loaded or discharged by gravity.
cording to material standards. How- (3) 21H1 fitted with structural equip-
ever, for austenitic (stainless) steels, ment designed to withstand the whole
the specified minimum value for Rm, load when IBCs are stacked, for solids
according to the material standards, which are loaded or discharged under
may be increased by up to 15% when a pressure.
greater value is provided in the mate- (4) 21H2 freestanding, for solids which
rial inspection certificate. When no are loaded or discharged under pres-
material standard exists for the mate- sure.
rial in question, the value of Rm must (5) 31H1 fitted with structural equip-
be the minimum value indicated in the ment designed to withstand the whole
material inspection certificate. load when IBCs are stacked, for liquids.
(2) Pressure relief. The following pres- (6) 31H2 freestanding, for liquids.
sure relief requirements apply to IBCs (b) Rigid plastic IBCs consist of a
intended for liquids: rigid plastic body, which may have
(i) IBCs must be capable of releasing structural equipment, together with
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
EP26JN96.001</MATH>
219
EP26JN96.000</MATH>
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00229 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.707 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
contain solids and liquids. To complete priate. The inner receptacle is not in-
the marking codes listed below, the tended to perform a containment func-
letter Z must be replaced by a cap- tion without the outer packaging.
220
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00230 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.707
(2) A composite IBC with a fully en- must be appropriate to the capacity of
closing outer packaging must be de- the composite IBC and its intended use.
signed to permit assessment of the in- The outer packaging must be free of
tegrity of the inner container following any projection that might damage the
the leakproofness and hydraulic tests. inner receptacle.
The outer packaging of 31HZ2 com- (i) Outer packagings of natural wood
posite IBCs must enclose the inner re- must be constructed of well seasoned
ceptacles on all sides. wood that is commercially dry and free
(3) The inner receptacle must be from defects that would materially
manufactured from plastic material of lessen the strength of any part of the
known specifications and be of a outer packaging. The tops and bottoms
strength relative to its capacity and to may be made of water-resistant recon-
the service it is required to perform. In stituted wood such as hardboard or
addition to conformance with the re- particle board. Materials other than
quirements of 173.24 of this sub- natural wood may be used for construc-
chapter, the material must be resistant tion of structural equipment of the
to aging and to degradation caused by outer packaging.
ultraviolet radiation. The inner recep- (ii) Outer packagings of plywood
tacle of 31HZ2 composite IBCs must must be made of well-seasoned, rotary
consist of at least three plies of film. cut, sliced, or sawn veneer, commer-
(i) If necessary, protection against cially dry and free from defects that
ultraviolet radiation must be provided would materially lessen the strength of
by the addition of pigments or inhibi- the casing. All adjacent plies must be
tors such as carbon black. These addi- glued with water-resistant adhesive.
tives must be compatible with the con- Materials other than plywood may be
tents and remain effective throughout used for construction of structural
the life of the inner receptacle. Where equipment of the outer packaging.
use is made of carbon black, pigments,
Outer packagings must be firmly
or inhibitors, other than those used in
nailed or secured to corner posts or
the manufacture of the tested design
ends or be assembled by equally suit-
type, retesting may be omitted if the
able devices.
carbon black content, the pigment con-
tent, or the inhibitor content do not (iii) Outer packagings of reconsti-
adversely affect the physical properties tuted wood must be constructed of
of the material of construction. water-resistant reconstituted wood
(ii) Additives may be included in the such as hardboard or particle board.
composition of the plastic material of Materials other than reconstituted
the inner receptacle to improve resist- wood may be used for the construction
ance to aging, provided they do not ad- of structural equipment of reconsti-
versely affect the physical or chemical tuted wood outer packaging.
properties of the material. (iv) Fiberboard outer packagings
(iii) No used material other than pro- must be constructed of strong, solid, or
duction residues or regrind from the double-faced corrugated fiberboard
same manufacturing process may be (single or multiwall).
used in the manufacture of inner recep- (A) Water resistance of the outer sur-
tacles. face must be such that the increase in
(iv) Composite IBCs intended for the mass, as determined in a test carried
transportation of liquids must be capa- out over a period of 30 minutes by the
ble of releasing a sufficient amount of Cobb method of determining water ab-
vapor to prevent the body of the IBC sorption, is not greater than 155 grams
from rupturing if it is subjected to an per square meter (0.0316 pounds per
internal pressure in excess of that for square foot)see ISO 535 (E) (IBR, see
which it was hydraulically tested. This 171.7 of this subchapter). Fiberboard
may be achieved by spring-loaded or must have proper bending qualities. Fi-
non-reclosing pressure relief devices or berboard must be cut, creased without
by other means of construction. cutting through any thickness of fiber-
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
(4) The strength of the construction board, and slotted so as to permit as-
material comprising the outer pack- sembly without cracking, surface
aging and the manner of construction breaks, or undue bending. The fluting
221
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00231 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.708 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
222
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00232 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.709
completely through all pieces to be fas- (2) Liner means a separate tube or
tened and be formed or protected so bag, including the closures of its open-
that any inner liner cannot be abraded ings, inserted in the body but not form-
or punctured by them. ing an integral part of it.
(3) The strength of the material used (c) Construction requirements for
and the construction of the liner must wooden IBCs are as follows:
be appropriate to the capacity of the (1) Top lifting devices are prohibited
IBC and the intended use. Joints and in wooden IBCs.
closures must be sift-proof and capable (2) The strength of the materials used
of withstanding pressures and impacts and the method of construction must
liable to occur under normal conditions be appropriate to the capacity and in-
of handling and transport. tended use of the IBC.
(4) Any integral pallet base forming (i) Natural wood used in the con-
part of an IBC, or any detachable pal- struction of an IBC must be well-sea-
let, must be suitable for the mechan- soned, commercially dry, and free from
ical handling of an IBC filled to its defects that would materially lessen
maximum permissible gross mass. the strength of any part of the IBC.
(i) The pallet or integral base must Each IBC part must consist of uncut
be designed to avoid protrusions that wood or a piece equivalent in strength
may cause damage to the IBC in han- and integrity. IBC parts are equivalent
dling. to one piece when a suitable method of
(ii) The outer packaging must be se- glued assembly is used (i.e., a
cured to any detachable pallet to en- Lindermann joint, tongue and groove
sure stability in handling and trans- joint, ship lap or rabbet joint, or butt
port. Where a detachable pallet is used, joint with at least two corrugated
its top surface must be free from sharp metal fasteners at each joint, or when
protrusions that might damage the other methods at least equally effec-
IBC. tive are used). Materials other than
(iii) Strengthening devices, such as natural wood may be used for the con-
timber supports to increase stacking struction of structural equipment of
performance, may be used but must be the outer packaging.
external to the inner liner. (ii) Plywood used in construction of
(iv) The load-bearing surfaces of IBCs bodies must be at least 3-ply. Plywood
intended for stacking must be designed must be made of well-seasoned, rotary-
to distribute loads in a stable manner. cut, sliced or sawn veneer, commer-
(d) Fiberboard IBCs may not have a cially dry, and free from defects that
volumetric capacity greater than 3,000 would materially lessen the strength of
L (793 gallons) or less than 450 L (119 the body. All adjacent plies must be
gallons). glued with water-resistant adhesive.
[Amdt. 178103, 59 FR 38068, July 26, 1994, as Materials other than plywood may be
amended at 66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR used for the construction of structural
75758, Dec. 31, 2003; 75 FR 5396, Feb. 2, 2010] equipment of the outer packaging.
(iii) Reconstituted wood used in con-
178.709 Standards for wooden IBCs. struction of bodies must be water re-
(a) The provisions in this section sistant reconstituted wood such as
apply to wooden IBCs intended to con- hardboard or particle board. Materials
tain solids that are loaded or dis- other than reconstituted wood may be
charged by gravity. Wooden IBC types used for the construction of structural
are designated: equipment of the outer packaging.
(1) 11C Natural wood with inner liner. (iv) Wooden IBCs must be firmly
(2) 11D Plywood with inner liner. nailed or secured to corner posts or
(3) 11F Reconstituted wood with ends or be assembled by similar de-
inner liner. vices.
(b) Definitions for wooden IBCs: (3) The strength of the material used
(1) Wooden IBCs consist of a rigid or and the construction of the liner must
collapsible wooden body together with be appropriate to the capacity of the
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
an inner liner (but no inner packaging) IBC and its intended use. Joints and
and appropriate service and structural closures must be sift-proof and capable
equipment. of withstanding pressures and impacts
223
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00233 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.710 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
liable to occur under normal conditions equipment and handling devices, and if
of handling and transportation. necessary, an inner coating or liner.
(4) Any integral pallet base forming (2) Woven plastic means a material
part of an IBC, or any detachable pal- made from stretched tapes or
let, must be suitable for the mechan- monofilaments.
ical handling of an IBC filled to its (3) Handling device means any sling,
maximum permissible gross mass. loop, eye, or frame attached to the
(i) The pallet or integral base must body of the IBC or formed from a con-
be designed to avoid protrusions that tinuation of the IBC body material.
may cause damage to the IBC in han- (c) Construction requirements for
dling. flexible IBCs are as follows:
(ii) The outer packaging must be se- (1) The strength of the material and
cured to any detachable pallet to en- the construction of the flexible IBC
sure stability in handling and transpor- must be appropriate to its capacity and
tation. Where a detachable pallet is its intended use.
used, its top surface must be free from (2) All materials used in the con-
sharp protrusions that might damage struction of flexible IBCs of types 13M1
the IBC. and 13M2 must, after complete immer-
(iii) Strengthening devices, such as sion in water for not less than 24 hours,
timber supports to increase stacking retain at least 85 percent of the tensile
performance, may be used but must be strength as measured originally on the
external to the inner liner. material conditioned to equilibrium at
(iv) The load-bearing surfaces of IBCs 67 percent relative humidity or less.
intended for stacking must be designed (3) Seams must be stitched or formed
to distribute loads in a stable manner. by heat sealing, gluing or any equiva-
(d) Wooden IBCs may not have a vol- lent method. All stitched seam-ends
umetric capacity greater than 3,000 L must be secured.
(793 gallons) or less than 450 L (119 gal- (4) In addition to conformance with
lons). the requirements of 173.24 of this sub-
[Amdt. 178103, 59 FR 38068, July 26, 1994, as chapter, flexible IBCs must be resistant
amended at 66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001; 75 FR to aging and degradation caused by ul-
5397, Feb. 2, 2010] traviolet radiation.
(5) For plastic flexible IBCs, if nec-
178.710 Standards for flexible IBCs. essary, protection against ultraviolet
(a) The provisions of this section radiation must be provided by the addi-
apply to flexible IBCs intended to con- tion of pigments or inhibitors such as
tain solid hazardous materials. Flexi- carbon black. These additives must be
ble IBC types are designated: compatible with the contents and re-
(1) 13H1 woven plastic without coat- main effective throughout the life of
ing or liner. the container. Where use is made of
(2) 13H2 woven plastic, coated. carbon black, pigments, or inhibitors,
(3) 13H3 woven plastic with liner. other than those used in the manufac-
(4) 13H4 woven plastic, coated and ture of the tested design type, re-
with liner. testing may be omitted if the carbon
(5) 13H5 plastic film. black content, the pigment content or
(6) 13L1 textile without coating or the inhibitor content does not ad-
liner. versely affect the physical properties
(7) 13L2 textile, coated. of the material of construction. Addi-
(8) 13L3 textile with liner. tives may be included in the composi-
(9) 13L4 textile, coated and with tion of the plastic material to improve
liner. resistance to aging, provided they do
(10) 13M1 paper, multiwall. not adversely affect the physical or
(11) 13M2 paper, multiwall, water re- chemical properties of the material.
sistant. (6) No used material other than pro-
(b) Definitions for flexible IBCs: duction residues or regrind from the
(1) Flexible IBCs consist of a body con- same manufacturing process may be
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
224
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00234 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.801
fittings and pallet bases, provided such (2) Design qualification testing is the
components have not in any way been performance of the drop, leakproofness,
damaged in previous use. hydrostatic pressure, stacking, bot-
(7) When flexible IBCs are filled, the tom-lift or top-lift, tear, topple, right-
ratio of height to width may not be ing and vibration tests, as applicable,
more than 2:1. prescribed in this subpart, for each dif-
(d) Flexible IBCs: (1) May not have a ferent IBC design type, at the start of
volumetric capacity greater than 3,000 production of that packaging.
L (793 gallons) or less than 56 L (15 gal- (3) Periodic design requalification test is
lons); and the performance of the applicable tests
(2) Must be designed and tested to a specified in paragraph (c)(2) of this sec-
capacity of no less than 50 kg (110 tion on an IBC design type, in order to
pounds). requalify the design for continued pro-
[Amdt. 178103, 59 FR 38068, July 26, 1994, as duction at the frequency specified in
amended by Amdt. 178108, 60 FR 40038, Aug. paragraph (e) of this section.
4, 1995; 66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001; 75 FR 5397, (4) Production inspection is the inspec-
Feb. 2, 2010] tion that must initially be conducted
on each newly manufactured IBC.
Subpart OTesting of IBCs (5) Production testing is the perform-
ance of the leakproofness test in ac-
178.800 Purpose and scope. cordance with paragraph (f) of this sec-
This subpart prescribes certain test- tion on each IBC intended to contain
ing requirements for IBCs identified in solids discharged by pressure or in-
subpart N of this part. tended to contain liquids.
(6) Periodic retest and inspection is per-
[Amdt. 178103, 59 FR 38074, July 26, 1994, as
amended by 66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001]
formance of the applicable test and in-
spections on each IBC at the frequency
178.801 General requirements. specified in 180.352 of this subchapter.
(7) Different IBC design type is one
(a) General. The test procedures pre-
that differs from a previously qualified
scribed in this subpart are intended to
IBC design type in structural design,
ensure that IBCs containing hazardous
size, material of construction, wall
materials can withstand normal condi-
thickness, or manner of construction,
tions of transportation and are consid-
but does not include:
ered minimum requirements. Each
packaging must be manufactured and (i) A packaging which differs in sur-
assembled so as to be capable of suc- face treatment;
cessfully passing the prescribed tests (ii) A rigid plastic IBC or composite
and of conforming to the requirements IBC which differs with regard to addi-
of 173.24 of this subchapter at all tives used to comply with 178.706(c),
times while in transportation. 178.707(c) or 178.710(c);
(b) Responsibility. It is the responsi- (iii) A packaging which differs only
bility of the IBC manufacturer to as- in its lesser external dimensions (i.e.,
sure that each IBC is capable of passing height, width, length) provided mate-
the prescribed tests. To the extent that rials of construction and material
an IBC assembly function, including thicknesses or fabric weight remain
final closure, is performed by the per- the same;
son who offers a hazardous material for (iv) A packaging which differs in
transportation, that person is respon- service equipment.
sible for performing the function in ac- (d) Design qualification testing. The
cordance with 173.22 and 178.2 of this packaging manufacturer shall achieve
subchapter. successful test results for the design
(c) Definitions. For the purpose of this qualification testing at the start of
subpart: production of each new or different IBC
(1) IBC design type refers to an IBC design type. The service equipment se-
that does not differ in structural de- lected for this design qualification
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
225
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00235 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.801 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
the design. Application of the certifi- using random samples of IBCs, accord-
cation mark by the manufacturer shall ing to the appropriate test section.
constitute certification that the IBC (h) Selective testing of IBCs. Variation
design type passed the prescribed tests of a tested IBC design type is permitted
in this subpart. without further testing, provided selec-
(e) Periodic design requalification test- tive testing demonstrates an equiva-
ing. (1) Periodic design requalification lent or greater level of safety than the
must be conducted on each qualified design type tested and which has been
IBC design type if the manufacturer is approved by the Associate Adminis-
to maintain authorization for contin- trator.
ued production. The IBC manufacturer (i) Approval of equivalent packagings.
shall achieve successful test results for An IBC differing from the standards in
the periodic design requalification at subpart N of this part, or tested using
sufficient frequency to ensure each methods other than those specified in
packaging produced by the manufac- this subpart, may be used if approved
turer is capable of passing the design by the Associate Administrator. Such
qualification tests. Design requalifica- IBCs must be shown to be equally effec-
tion tests must be conducted at least tive, and testing methods used must be
once every 12 months. equivalent.
(2) Changes in the frequency of design (j) Proof of compliance. Notwith-
requalification testing specified in
standing the periodic design requali-
paragraph (e)(1) of this section are au-
fication testing intervals specified in
thorized if approved by the Associate
paragraph (e) of this section, the Asso-
Administrator. These requests must be
based on: ciate Administrator, or a designated
representative, may at any time re-
(i) Detailed quality assurance pro-
quire demonstration of compliance by
grams that assure that proposed de-
a manufacturer, through testing in ac-
creases in test frequency maintain the
integrity of originally tested IBC de- cordance with this subpart, that pack-
sign types; and agings meet the requirements of this
subpart. As required by the Associate
(ii) Demonstrations that each IBC
Administrator, or a designated rep-
produced is capable of withstanding
higher standards (e.g., increased drop resentative, the manufacturer shall ei-
height, hydrostatic pressure, wall ther:
thickness, fabric weight). (1) Conduct performance tests or
(f) Production testing and inspection. have tests conducted by an inde-
(1) Production testing consists of the pendent testing facility, in accordance
leakproofness test prescribed in with this subpart; or
178.813 of this subpart and must be (2) Make a sample IBC available to
performed on each IBC intended to con- the Associate Administrator, or a des-
tain solids discharged by pressure or ignated representative, for testing in
intended to contain liquids. For this accordance with this subpart.
test: (k) Coatings. If an inner treatment or
(i) The IBC need not have its closures coating of an IBC is required for safety
fitted, except that the IBC must be reasons, the manufacturer shall design
fitted with its primary bottom closure. the IBC so that the treatment or coat-
(ii) The inner receptacle of a com- ing retains its protective properties
posite IBC may be tested without the even after withstanding the tests pre-
outer IBC body, provided the test re- scribed by this subpart.
sults are not affected. (l) Record retention. Following each
(2) Applicable inspection require- design qualification test and each peri-
ments in 180.352 of this subchapter odic retest on an IBC, a test report
must be performed on each IBC ini- must be prepared.
tially after production. (1) The test report must be main-
(g) Test samples. The IBC manufac- tained at each location where the pack-
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
turer shall conduct the design quali- aging is manufactured, certified, and a
fication and periodic design requali- design qualification test or periodic
fication tests prescribed in this subpart retest is conducted as follows:
226
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00236 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.803
Person manufacturing the packaging .......................................... As long as manufactured and two years thereafter.
Person performing design testing ............................................... Design test maintained for a single or composite packaging for
six years after the test is successfully performed and for a
combination packaging or packaging intended for infectious
substances for seven years after the test is successfully per-
formed.
Person performing periodic retesting .......................................... Performance test maintained for a single or composite pack-
aging for one year after the test is successfully performed
and for a combination packaging or packaging intended for
infectious substances for two years after the test is success-
fully performed.
(2) The test report must be made must be conditioned for at least 24
available to a user of a packaging or a hours in an atmosphere maintained:
representative of the Department upon (1) At 50 percent 2 percent relative
request. The test report, at a min- humidity, and at a temperature of 23
imum, must contain the following in- 2 C (73 F 4 F); or
formation: (2) At 65 percent 2 percent relative
(i) Name and address of test facility; humidity, and at a temperature of 20
(ii) Name and address of the person
2 C (68 F 4 F), or 27 C 2 C (81 F
certifying the IBC;
(iii) A unique test report identifica- 4 F).
tion; (b) Average values for temperature
(iv) Date of test report; and humidity must fall within the lim-
(v) Manufacturer of the IBC; its in paragraph (a) of this section.
(vi) Description of the IBC design Short-term fluctuations and measure-
type (e.g., dimensions, materials, clo- ment limitations may cause individual
sures, thickness, representative service measurements to vary by up to 5 per-
equipment, etc.); cent relative humidity without signifi-
(vii) Maximum IBC capacity; cant impairment of test reproduc-
(viii) Characteristics of test contents; ibility.
(ix) Test descriptions and results (in- (c) For purposes of periodic design re-
cluding drop heights, hydrostatic pres- qualification only, fiberboard IBCs or
sures, tear propagation length, etc.); composite IBCs with fiberboard outer
and
packagings may be at ambient condi-
(x) The signature of the person con-
tions.
ducting the test, and name of the per-
son responsible for testing. [Amdt. 178103, 59 FR 38074, July 26, 1994, as
amended at 66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001]
[Amdt. 178103, 59 FR 38074, July 26, 1994, as
amended by Amdt. 178108, 60 FR 40038, Aug.
4, 1995; 66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001; 66 FR 33452, 178.803 Testing and certification of
June 21, 2001; 68 FR 75758, Dec. 31, 2003; 73 FR IBCs.
57008, Oct. 1, 2008; 74 FR 2269, Jan. 14, 2009; 75 Tests required for the certification of
FR 5397, Feb. 2, 2010; 78 FR 14715, Mar. 7, 2013;
78 FR 65487, Oct. 31, 2013; 80 FR 72929, Nov. 23,
each IBC design type are specified in
2015] the following table. The letter X indi-
cates that one IBC (except where
178.802 Preparation of fiberboard noted) of each design type must be sub-
IBCs for testing. jected to the tests in the order pre-
(a) Fiberboard IBCs and composite sented:
IBCs with fiberboard outer packagings
IBC type
Performance test Rigid plastic Composite Fiber-board
Metal IBCs Wooden IBCs Flexible IBCs
IBCs IBCs IBCs
227
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00237 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.810 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
IBC type
Performance test Rigid plastic Composite Fiber-board
Metal IBCs Wooden IBCs Flexible IBCs
IBCs IBCs IBCs
Hydrostatic .................... 3 X 3 X 3 X
Drop ............................... 4 X 4 X 4 X 4 X 4 X 5 X
Topple ........................... 5 X
Righting ......................... 25 X
Tear ............................... 5 X
1 Flexible IBCs must be capable of withstanding the vibration test.
2 This test must be performed only if IBCs are designed to be handled this way. For metal IBCs, at least one of the bottom lift
or top lift tests must be performed.
3 The leakproofness and hydrostatic pressure tests are required only for IBCs intended to contain liquids or intended to contain
solids loaded or discharged under pressure.
4 Another IBC of the same design type may be used for the drop test set forth in 178.810 of this subchapter.
5 Another different flexible IBC of the same design type may be used for each test.
6 The vibration test may be performed in another order for IBCs manufactured and tested under provisions of an exemption be-
fore October 1, 1994 and for non-DOT specification portable tanks tested before October 1, 1994, intended for export.
7 This test must be performed only if the IBC is designed to be stacked.
[Amdt. 178108, 60 FR 40039, Aug. 4, 1995, as amended at 64 FR 51919, Sept. 27, 1999; 66 FR 45386,
45390, Aug. 28, 2001]
ceptable test liquids, and may be con- tion for each IBC design type; and
sidered equivalent to water for test (ii) Where the substances to be car-
purposes. IBCs conditioned in this way ried have a specific gravity exceeding
228
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00238 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.812
1.2, the drop heights must be as fol- 178.812 Top lift test.
lows: (a) General. The top lift test must be
(A) Packing Group I: SG 1.5 m (4.9 conducted for the qualification of all
feet). IBC design types designed to be lifted
(B) Packing Group II: SG 1.0 m (3.3
from the top or, for flexible IBCs, from
feet).
the side.
(C) Packing Group III: SG 0.67 m
(b) Special preparation for the top lift
(2.2 feet).
test. (1) Metal, rigid plastic, and com-
(e) Criteria for passing the test. For all
posite IBC design types must be loaded
IBC design types, there may be no dam-
to twice the maximum permissible
age which renders the IBC unsafe to be
gross mass with the load being evenly
transported for salvage or for dispos-
distributed.
able, and no loss of contents. The IBC
(2) Flexible IBC design types must be
shall be capable of being lifted by an
filled to six times the maximum net
appropriate means until clear of the
mass, the load being evenly distrib-
floor for five minutes. A slight dis-
uted.
charge from a closure upon impact is (c) Test method. (1) A metal or flexible
not considered to be a failure of the
IBC must be lifted in the manner for
IBC provided that no further leakage
which it is designed until clear of the
occurs. A slight discharge (e.g., from
floor and maintained in that position
closures or stitch holes) upon impact is
for a period of five minutes.
not considered a failure of the flexible
(2) Rigid plastic and composite IBC
IBC provided that no further leakage
design types must be:
occurs after the IBC has been raised
(i) Lifted by each pair of diagonally
clear of the ground.
opposite lifting devices, so that the
[Amdt. 178103, 59 FR 38074, July 26, 1994, as hoisting forces are applied vertically,
amended at 66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001; 69 FR for a period of five minutes; and
76186, Dec. 20, 2004; 71 FR 78635, Dec. 29, 2006; (ii) Lifted by each pair of diagonally
74 FR 2269, Jan. 14, 2009; 75 FR 5397, Feb. 2, opposite lifting devices, so that the
2010]
hoisting forces are applied towards the
178.811 Bottom lift test. center at 45 to the vertical, for a pe-
riod of five minutes.
(a) General. The bottom lift test must (3) If not tested as indicated in para-
be conducted for the qualification of graph (c)(1) of this section, a flexible
all IBC design types designed to be lift- IBC design type must be tested as fol-
ed from the base. lows:
(b) Special preparation for the bottom (i) Fill the flexible IBC to 95% full
lift test. The IBC must be loaded to 1.25 with a material representative of the
times its maximum permissible gross product to be shipped.
mass, the load being evenly distrib- (ii) Suspend the flexible IBC by its
uted. lifting devices.
(c) Test method. All IBC design types (iii) Apply a constant downward force
must be raised and lowered twice by a through a specially designed platen.
lift truck with the forks centrally posi- The platen will be a minimum of 60%
tioned and spaced at three quarters of and a maximum of 80% of the cross sec-
the dimension of the side of entry (un- tional surface area of the flexible IBC.
less the points of entry are fixed). The (iv) The combination of the mass of
forks must penetrate to three quarters the filled flexible IBC and the force ap-
of the direction of entry. The test must plied through the platen must be a
be repeated from each possible direc- minimum of six times the maximum
tion of entry. net mass of the flexible IBC. The test
(d) Criteria for passing the test. For all must be conducted for a period of five
IBC design types designed to be lifted minutes.
from the base, there may be no perma- (v) Other equally effective methods
nent deformation which renders the of top lift testing and preparation may
IBC unsafe for transportation and no be used with approval of the Associate
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
229
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00239 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.813 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
from the top, there may be no perma- charged under pressure or intended to
nent deformation which renders the contain liquids.
IBC, including the base pallets when (b) Special preparation for the hydro-
applicable, unsafe for transportation, static pressure test. For metal IBCs, the
and no loss of contents. test must be carried out before the fit-
ting of any thermal insulation equip-
[Amdt. 178103, 59 FR 38074, July 26, 1994, as
amended at 66 FR 33452, June 21, 2001; 66 FR ment. For all IBCs, pressure relief de-
45386, Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR 45042, July 31, 2003] vices and vented closures must be re-
moved and their apertures plugged or
178.813 Leakproofness test. rendered inoperative.
(c) Test method. Hydrostatic gauge
(a) General. The leakproofness test
pressure must be measured at the top
must be conducted for the qualification
of the IBC. The test must be carried
of all IBC design types and on all pro-
out for a period of at least 10 minutes
duction units intended to contain sol-
applying a hydrostatic gauge pressure
ids that are loaded or discharged under
not less than that indicated in para-
pressure or intended to contain liquids.
graph (d) of this section. The IBCs may
(b) Special preparation for the
not be mechanically restrained during
leakproofness test. Vented closures must
the test.
either be replaced by similar non-vent-
(d) Hydrostatic gauge pressure applied.
ed closures or the vent must be sealed.
(1) For metal IBC design types, 31A,
For metal IBC design types, the initial
31B, 31N: 65 kPa gauge pressure (9.4
test must be carried out before the fit-
psig).
ting of any thermal insulation equip-
(2) For metal IBC design types 21A,
ment. The inner receptacle of a com-
21B, 21N, 31A, 31B, 31N: 200 kPa (29
posite IBC may be tested without the
psig). For metal IBC design types 31A,
outer packaging provided the test re-
31B and 31N, the tests in paragraphs
sults are not affected.
(d)(1) and (d)(2) of this section must be
(c) Test method and pressure applied.
conducted consecutively.
The leakproofness test must be carried
(3) For metal IBCs design types 21A,
out for a suitable length of time using
21B, and 21N, for Packing Group I sol-
air at a gauge pressure of not less than
ids: 250 kPa (36 psig) gauge pressure.
20 kPa (2.9 psig). Leakproofness of IBC
(4) For rigid plastic IBC design types
design types must be determined by
21H1 and 21H2 and composite IBC de-
coating the seams and joints with a
sign types 21HZ1 and 21HZ2: 75 kPa (11
heavy oil, a soap solution and water, or
psig).
other methods suitable for the purpose
(5) For rigid plastic IBC design types
of detecting leaks. Other methods, if at
31H1 and 31H2 and composite IBC de-
least equally effective, may be used in
sign types 31HZ1 and 31HZ2: whichever
accordance with appendix B of this
is the greater of:
part, or if approved by the Associate
(i) The pressure determined by any
Administrator, as provided in
one of the following methods:
178.801(i)).
(A) The gauge pressure (pressure in
(d) Criterion for passing the test. For the IBC above ambient atmospheric
all IBC design types intended to con- pressure) measured in the IBC at 55 C
tain solids that are loaded or dis- (131 F) multiplied by a safety factor of
charged under pressure or intended to 1.5. This pressure must be determined
contain liquids, there may be no leak- on the basis of the IBC being filled and
age of air from the IBC. closed to no more than 98 percent ca-
[Amdt. 178103, 59 FR 38074, July 26, 1994, as pacity at 15 C (60 F);
amended at 64 FR 10782, Mar. 5, 1999; 66 FR (B) If absolute pressure (vapor pres-
45185, 45386, Aug. 28, 2001] sure of the hazardous material plus at-
mospheric pressure) is used, 1.5 multi-
178.814 Hydrostatic pressure test. plied by the vapor pressure of the haz-
(a) General. The hydrostatic pressure ardous material at 55 C (131 F) minus
test must be conducted for the quali- 100 kPa (14.5 psi). If this method is cho-
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
fication of all metal, rigid plastic, and sen, the hydrostatic test pressure ap-
composite IBC design types intended to plied must be at least 100 kPa gauge
contain solids that are loaded or dis- pressure (14.5 psig); or
230
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00240 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.815
(C) If absolute pressure (vapor pres- (2) Fiberboard, wooden and composite
sure of the hazardous material plus at- IBCs with outer packagings con-
mospheric pressure) is used, 1.75 multi- structed of other than plastic mate-
plied by the vapor pressure of the haz- rials must be subject to the test for 24
ardous material at 50 C (122 F) minus hours.
100 kPa (14.5 psi). If this method is cho- (3) Rigid plastic IBC types and com-
sen, the hydrostatic test pressure ap- posite IBC types with plastic outer
plied must be at least 100 kPa gauge packagings (11HH1, 11HH2, 21HH1,
pressure (14.5 psig); or 21HH2, 31HH1 and 31HH2) which bear
(ii) Twice the greater of: (A) The the stacking load must be subjected to
static pressure of the hazardous mate- the test for 28 days at 40 C (104 F).
rial on the bottom of the IBC filled to (4) For all IBCs, the load must be ap-
98 percent capacity; or plied by one of the following methods:
(B) The static pressure of water on (i) One or more IBCs of the same type
the bottom of the IBC filled to 98 per- loaded to their maximum permissible
cent capacity. gross mass and stacked on the test
(e) Criteria for passing the test(s). (1) IBC;
For metal IBCs, subjected to the 65 (ii) The calculated superimposed test
kPa (9.4 psig) test pressure specified in load weight loaded on either a flat
paragraph (d)(1) of this section, there plate or a reproduction of the base of
may be no leakage or permanent defor- the IBC, which is stacked on the test
IBC.
mation that would make the IBC un-
(5) Calculation of superimposed test
safe for transportation.
load. For all IBCs, the load to be placed
(2) For metal IBCs intended to con-
on the IBC must be 1.8 times the com-
tain liquids, when subjected to the 200 bined maximum permissible gross mass
kPa (29 psig) and the 250 kPa (36 psig) of the number of similar IBCs that may
test pressures specified in paragraphs be stacked on top of the IBC during
(d)(2) and (d)(3) of this section, respec- transportation.
tively, there may be no leakage. (d) Periodic Retest. (1) The package
(3) For rigid plastic IBC types 21H1, must be tested in accordance with
21H2, 31H1, and 31H2, and composite paragraph (c) of this section; or
IBC types 21HZ1, 21HZ2, 31HZ1, and (2) The packaging may be tested
31HZ2, there may be no leakage and no using a dynamic compression testing
permanent deformation which renders machine. The test must be conducted
the IBC unsafe for transportation. at room temperature on an empty, un-
[Amdt. 178103, 59 FR 38074, July 26, 1994, as sealed packaging. The test sample
amended at 66 FR 45185, 45386, Aug. 28, 2001] must be centered on the bottom platen
of the testing machine. The top platen
178.815 Stacking test. must be lowered until it comes in con-
(a) General. The stacking test must tact with the test sample. Compression
be conducted for the qualification of must be applied end to end. The speed
all IBC design types intended to be of the compression tester must be one-
stacked. half inch plus or minus one-fourth inch
(b) Special preparation for the stacking per minute. An initial preload of 50
test. (1) All IBCs except flexible IBC de- pounds must be applied to ensure a
sign types must be loaded to their max- definite contact between the test sam-
imum permissible gross mass. ple and the platens. The distance be-
(2) The flexible IBC must be filled to tween the platens at this time must be
not less than 95 percent of its capacity recorded as zero deformation. The force
and to its maximum net mass, with the A then to be applied must be cal-
load being evenly distributed. culated using the applicable formula:
(c) Test method. (1) Design Qualifica- Liquids: A = (1.8)(n 1) [w + (s v 8.3
tion Testing. All IBCs must be placed on .98)] 1.5;
their base on level, hard ground and or
subjected to a uniformly distributed
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
231
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00241 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.816 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
A = applied load in pounds. (e) Criteria for passing the test. For all
n = maximum number of IBCs being stacked flexible IBCs, there may be no loss of
during transportation. contents. A slight discharge (e.g., from
w = maximum weight of one empty container
closures or stitch holes) upon impact is
in pounds.
s = specific gravity (liquids) or density (sol-
not considered to be a failure, provided
ids) of the lading. no further leakage occurs.
v = actual capacity of container (rated ca- [Amdt. 178103, 59 FR 38074, July 26, 1994, as
pacity + outage) in gallons. amended at 66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001]
and:
8.3 corresponds to the weight in pounds of 1.0 178.817 Righting test.
gallon of water.
1.5 is a compensation factor converting the (a) General. The righting test must be
static load of the stacking test into a load conducted for the qualification of all
suitable for dynamic compression testing. flexible IBCs designed to be lifted from
(e) Criteria for passing the test. (1) For the top or side.
metal, rigid plastic, and composite (b) Special preparation for the righting
IBCs, there may be no permanent de- test. The flexible IBC must be filled to
formation, which renders the IBC un- not less than 95 percent of its capacity
safe for transportation, and no loss of and to its maximum net mass, with the
contents. load being evenly distributed.
(2) For fiberboard and wooden IBCs, (c) Test method. The flexible IBC,
there may be no loss of contents and no lying on its side, must be lifted at a
permanent deformation, which renders speed of at least 0.1 m/second (0.33 ft/s)
the whole IBC, including the base pal- to an upright position, clear of the
let, unsafe for transportation. floor, by one lifting device, or by two
(3) For flexible IBCs, there may be no lifting devices when four are provided.
deterioration, which renders the IBC (d) Criterion for passing the test. For
unsafe for transportation, and no loss all flexible IBCs, there may be no dam-
of contents. age to the IBC or its lifting devices
(4) For the dynamic compression which renders the IBC unsafe for trans-
test, a container passes the test if, portation or handling.
after application of the required load,
[Amdt. 178103, 59 FR 38074, July 26, 1994, as
there is no permanent deformation to amended at 66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001]
the IBC, which renders the whole IBC,
including the base pallet, unsafe for 178.818 Tear test.
transportation; in no case may the
maximum deflection exceed one inch. (a) General. The tear test must be
conducted for the qualification of all
[75 FR 5397, Feb. 2, 2010] flexible IBC design types.
(b) Special preparation for the tear test.
178.816 Topple test.
The flexible IBC must be filled to not
(a) General. The topple test must be less than 95 percent of its capacity and
conducted for the qualification of all to its maximum net mass, the load
flexible IBC design types. being evenly distributed.
(b) Special preparation for the topple (c) Test method. Once the IBC is
test. The flexible IBC must be filled to placed on the ground, a 100-mm (4-inch)
not less than 95 percent of its capacity knife score, completely penetrating the
and to its maximum net mass, with the wall of a wide face, is made at a 45
load being evenly distributed. angle to the principal axis of the IBC,
(c) Test method. A flexible IBC must halfway between the bottom surface
be toppled onto any part of its top and the top level of the contents. The
upon a rigid, non-resilient, smooth, IBC must then be subjected to a uni-
flat, and horizontal surface. formly distributed superimposed load
(d) Topple height. For all flexible equivalent to twice the maximum net
IBCs, the topple height is specified as mass. The load must be applied for at
follows: least five minutes. An IBC which is de-
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
(1) Packing Group I: 1.8 m (5.9 feet). signed to be lifted from the top or the
(2) Packing Group II: 1.2 m (3.9 feet). side must, after removal of the super-
(3) Packing Group III: 0.8 m (2.6 feet). imposed load, be lifted clear of the
232
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00242 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.910
178.900 Purpose and scope. (ii) The code number designating the
(a) This subpart prescribes require- Large Packaging design type according to
ments for Large Packaging intended 178.905. The letters T or W may
233
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00243 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.910 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
follow the Large Packaging design type (v) The country authorizing the allo-
identification code on a Large Pack- cation of the mark. The letters USA
aging. Large Salvage Packagings con- indicate that the Large Packaging is
forming to the requirements of subpart manufactured and marked in the
P of this part must be marked with the United States in compliance with the
letter T. Large Packagings must be provisions of this subchapter.
marked with the letter W when the (vi) The name and address or symbol
Large Packaging differs from the re-
of the manufacturer or the approval
quirements in subpart P of this part, or
agency certifying compliance with sub-
is tested using methods other than
part P and subpart Q of this part. Sym-
those specified in this subpart, and is
approved by the Associate Adminis- bols, if used, must be registered with
trator in accordance with the provi- the Associate Administrator.
sions in 178.955; (vii) The stacking test load in kilo-
(iii) A capital letter identifying the grams (kg). For Large Packagings not
performance standard under which the designed for stacking the figure 0
design type has been successfully test- must be shown.
ed, as follows: (viii) The maximum permissible
(A) Xfor Large Packagings meeting gross mass or for flexible Large Pack-
Packing Groups I, II and III tests; agings, the maximum net mass, in kg.
(B) Yfor Large Packagings meeting (2) The following are examples of
Packing Groups II and III tests; and symbols and required markings:
(C) Zfor Large Packagings meeting (i) For a steel Large Packaging suit-
Packing Group III test.
able for stacking; stacking load: 2,500
(iv) The month (designated numeri-
kg; maximum gross mass: 1,000 kg.
cally) and year (last two digits) of
manufacture;
ER02FE10.004</GPH>
234
ER02FE10.003</GPH>
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00244 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.915
(iv) For a steel Large Salvage Pack- load: 2,500 kg; maximum gross mass:
aging suitable for stacking; stacking 1,000 kg.
(b) All Large Packagings manufac- side being not less than 100 mm (3.9
tured, repaired or remanufactured after inches) by 100 mm (3.9 inches) as meas-
January 1, 2015 must be marked with ured from the corner printer marks
the symbol applicable to a Large Pack- shown on the following figures. Where
aging designed for stacking or not de- dimensions are not specified, all fea-
signed for stacking, as appropriate. tures must be in approximate propor-
The symbol must be a square with each tion to those shown.
(1) Transitional exceptionA marking tinue in service until the end of its use-
in conformance with the requirements ful life.
of this paragraph in effect on December
[75 FR 5397, Feb. 2, 2010, as amended at 75 FR
31, 2014, may continue to be applied to 60339, Sept. 30, 2010; 78 FR 1097, Jan. 7, 2013;
all Large Packagings manufactured, 80 FR 1168, Jan. 8, 2015]
repaired or remanufactured between
January 1, 2015 and December 31, 2016. 178.915 General Large Packaging
(2) For domestic transportation, a standards.
Large Packaging marked prior to Jan- (a) Each Large Packaging must be re-
ER07JA13.001</GPH>
uary 1, 2017 and in conformance with sistant to, or protected from, deterio-
the requirements of this paragraph in ration due to exposure to the external
effect on December 31, 2014, may con- environment. Large Packagings in-
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
235
ER02FE10.005</GPH>
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00245 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.920 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
(b) All service equipment must be po- than 3,000 L (793 gallons) and not less
sitioned or protected to minimize po- than 450 L (119 gallons).
tential loss of contents resulting from
damage during Large Packaging han- 178.925 Standards for rigid plastic
dling and transportation. Large Packagings.
(c) Each Large Packaging, including (a) The provisions in this section
attachments and service and structural apply to rigid plastic Large Packagings
equipment, must be designed to with- intended to contain liquids and solids.
stand, without loss of hazardous mate- Rigid plastic Large Packaging types
rials, the internal pressure of the con- are designated:
tents and the stresses of normal han-
(1) 50H rigid plastics.
dling and transport. A Large Pack-
aging intended for stacking must be de- (2) [Reserved]
signed for stacking. Any lifting or se- (b) A rigid plastic Large Packaging
curing features of a Large Packaging must be manufactured from plastic
must be sufficient strength to with- material of known specifications and
stand the normal conditions of han- be of a strength relative to its capacity
dling and transportation without gross and to the service it is required to per-
distortion or failure and must be posi- form. In addition to conformance to
tioned so as to cause no undue stress in 173.24 of this subchapter, plastic mate-
any part of the Large Packaging. rials must be resistant to aging and to
(d) A Large Packaging consisting of degradation caused by ultraviolet radi-
packagings within a framework must ation.
be so constructed that the packaging is (1) If protection against ultraviolet
not damaged by the framework and is radiation is necessary, it must be pro-
retained within the framework at all vided by the addition of a pigment or
times. inhibiter such as carbon black to plas-
(e) Large Packaging design types tic materials. These additives must be
must be constructed in such a way as compatible with the contents and re-
to be bottom-lifted or top-lifted as main effective throughout the life of
specified in 178.970 and 178.975. the plastic Large Packaging body.
[75 FR 5397, Feb. 2, 2010, as amended at 75 FR Where use is made of carbon black, pig-
60339, Sept. 30, 2010] ments or inhibitors, other than those
used in the manufacture of the tested
178.920 Standards for metal Large design type, retesting may be omitted
Packagings. if changes in the carbon black content,
(a) The provisions in this section the pigment content or the inhibitor
apply to metal Large Packagings in- content do not adversely affect the
tended to contain liquids and solids. physical properties of the material of
Metal Large Packaging types are des- construction.
ignated: (2) Additives may be included in the
(1) 50A steel composition of the plastic material to
(2) 50B aluminum improve the resistance to aging or to
(3) 50N metal (other than steel or alu- serve other purposes, provided they do
minum) not adversely affect the physical or
(b) Each Large Packaging must be chemical properties of the material of
made of suitable ductile metal mate-
construction.
rials. Welds must be made so as to
(3) No used material other than pro-
maintain design type integrity of the
receptacle under conditions normally duction residues or regrind from the
incident to transportation. Low-tem- same manufacturing process may be
perature performance must be taken used in the manufacture of rigid plastic
into account when appropriate. Large Packagings.
(c) The use of dissimilar metals must (c) Rigid plastic Large Packagings:
not result in deterioration that could (1) May not have a volumetric capac-
affect the integrity of the Large Pack- ity greater than 3,000 L (793 gallons);
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
aging. and
(d) Metal Large Packagings may not (2) May not have a volumetric capac-
have a volumetric capacity greater ity less than 450 L (119 gallons).
236
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00246 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.935
178.930 Standards for fiberboard (ii) The pallet or integral base must
Large Packagings. be designed to avoid protrusions caus-
(a) The provisions in this section ing damage to the fiberboard Large
Packagings in handling.
apply to fiberboard Large Packagings
intended to contain solids. Rigid fiber- (iii) The body must be secured to any
board Large Packaging types are des- detached pallet to ensure stability in
ignated: handling and transport. Where a de-
tachable pallet is used, its top surface
(1) 50G fiberboard
must be free from protrusions that
(2) [Reserved] might damage the Large Packaging.
(b) Construction requirements for fiber- (3) Strengthening devices, such as
board Large Packagings. (1) Fiberboard timber supports to increase stacking
Large Packagings must be constructed performance may be used but must be
of strong, solid or double-faced cor- external to the liner.
rugated fiberboard (single or (4) The load-bearing surfaces of Large
multiwall) that is appropriate to the Packagings intended for stacking must
capacity of the Large Packagings and be designed to distribute the load in a
to their intended use. Water resistance stable manner.
of the outer surface must be such that
(c) Fiberboard Large Packagings may
the increase in mass, as determined in
not have a volumetric capacity greater
a test carried out over a period of 30
than 3,000 L (793 gallons) and not less
minutes by the Cobb method of deter-
than 450 L (119 gallons).
mining water absorption, is not greater
than 155 grams per square meter (0.0316 [75 FR 5397, Feb. 2, 2010, as amended at 75 FR
pounds per square foot)see ISO 535 (E) 60339, Sept. 30, 2010]
(IBR, see 171.7 of this subchapter). Fi-
berboard must have proper bending 178.935 Standards for wooden Large
qualities. Fiberboard must be cut, Packagings.
creased without cutting through any (a) The provisions in this section
thickness of fiberboard, and slotted so apply to wooden Large Packagings in-
as to permit assembly without crack- tended to contain solids. Wooden Large
ing, surface breaks or undue bending. Packaging types are designated:
The fluting or corrugated fiberboard (1) 50C natural wood.
must be firmly glued to the facings. (2) 50D plywood.
(i) The walls, including top and bot- (3) 50F reconstituted wood.
tom, must have a minimum puncture (b) Construction requirements for
resistance of 15 Joules (11 foot-pounds wooden Large Packagings are as fol-
of energy) measured according to ISO lows:
3036 (IBR, see 171.7 of this subchapter). (1) The strength of the materials used
(ii) Manufacturers joints in the and the method of construction must
outer packaging of Large Packagings be appropriate to the capacity and in-
must be made with an appropriate tended use of the Large Packagings.
overlap and be taped, glued, stitched (i) Natural wood used in the con-
with metal staples or fastened by other struction of Large Packagings must be
means at least equally effective. Where well-seasoned, commercially dry and
joints are made by gluing or taping, a free from defects that would materially
water resistant adhesive must be used. lessen the strength of any part of the
Metal staples must pass completely Large Packagings. Each Large Pack-
through all pieces to be fastened and be aging part must consist of uncut wood
formed or protected so that any inner or a piece equivalent in strength and
liner cannot be abraded or punctured integrity. Large Packagings parts are
by them. equivalent to one piece when a suitable
(2) Integral and detachable pallets. (i) method of glued assembly is used (i.e.,
Any integral pallet base forming part a Lindermann joint, tongue and groove
of a Large Packaging or any detach- joint, ship, lap or babbet joint; or butt
able pallet must be suitable for me- joint with at least two corrugated
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
chanical handling with the Large metal fasteners at each joint, or when
Packaging filled to its maximum per- other methods at least equally effec-
missible gross mass. tive are used).
237
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00247 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.940 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
Flexible Large Packagings types are ity greater than 3,000 L (793 gallons);
designated: (2) May not have a volumetric capac-
(1) 51H flexible plastics. ity less than 56 L (15 gallons); and
238
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00248 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.955
specified in paragraph (c)(2) of this sec- tion for continued production. The
tion on a Large Packaging design type, Large Packaging manufacturer must
to requalify the design for continued achieve successful test results for the
239
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00249 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.955 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
240
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00250 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.960
Person manufacturing the packaging .......................................... As long as manufactured and two years thereafter.
Person performing design testing ............................................... Design test maintained for a single or composite packaging for
six years after the test is successfully performed and for a
combination packaging or packaging intended for infectious
substances for seven years after the test is successfully per-
formed.
Person performing periodic retesting .......................................... Performance test maintained for a single or composite pack-
aging for one year after the test is successfully performed
and for a combination packaging or packaging intended for
infectious substances for two years after the test is success-
fully performed.
(2) The test report must be made installed using proper techniques and
available to a user of a Large Pack- torques.
aging or a representative of the De- (b) For the drop and stacking test,
partment of Transportation upon re- inner receptacles must be filled to not
quest. The test report, at a minimum, less than 95 percent of maximum ca-
must contain the following informa- pacity (see 171.8 of this subchapter) in
tion: the case of solids and not less than 98
(i) Name and address of test facility; percent of maximum in the case of liq-
(ii) Name and address of applicant uids. Bags must be filled to the max-
(where appropriate); imum mass at which they may be used.
(iii) A unique test report identifica- For Large Packagings where the inner
tion; packagings are designed to carry liq-
(iv) Date of the test report; uids and solids, separate testing is re-
(v) Manufacturer of the packaging; quired for both liquid and solid con-
tents. The material to be transported
(vi) Description of the packaging de-
in the packagings may be replaced by a
sign type (e.g., dimensions, materials,
non-hazardous material, except for
closures, thickness, etc.), including
chemical compatibility testing or
methods of manufacture (e.g., blow
where this would invalidate the results
molding) and which may include draw-
of the tests.
ing(s) and/or photograph(s);
(c) If the material to be transported
(vii) Maximum capacity;
is replaced for test purposes by a non-
(viii) Characteristics of test contents,
hazardous material, the material used
e.g., viscosity and relative density for
must be of the same or higher specific
liquids and particle size for solids;
gravity as the material to be carried,
(ix) Mathematical calculations per- and its other physical properties
formed to conduct and document test- (grain, size, viscosity) which might in-
ing (for example, drop height, test ca- fluence the results of the required tests
pacity, outage requirements, etc.); must correspond as closely as possible
(x) Test descriptions and results; and to those of the hazardous material to
(xi) Signature with the name and be transported. It is permissible to use
title of signatory. additives, such as bags of lead shot, to
[75 FR 5400, Feb. 2, 2010, as amended at 75 FR achieve the requisite total package
60339, Sept. 30, 2010; 76 FR 3389, Jan. 19, 2011; mass, so long as they do not affect the
78 FR 14715, Mar. 7, 2013; 78 FR 65487, Oct. 31, test results.
2013; 81 FR 35545, June 2, 2016] (d) Paper or fiberboard Large Pack-
agings must be conditioned for at least
178.960 Preparation of Large Pack- 24 hours immediately prior to testing
agings for testing. in an atmosphere maintained
(a) Except as otherwise provided in (1) At 50 percent 2 percent relative
this subchapter, each Large Packaging humidity, and at a temperature of 23 C
and package must be closed in prepara- 2 C (73 F 4 F). Average values
tion for testing and tests must be car- should fall within these limits. Short-
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
ried out in the same manner as if pre- term fluctuations and measurement
pared for transportation, including limitations may cause individual meas-
inner packagings. All closures must be urements to vary by up to 5 percent
241
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00251 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.965 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
relative humidity without significant (e) Drop height. (1) For all Large
impairment of test reproducibility; Packagings, drop heights are specified
(2) At 65 percent 2 percent relative as follows:
humidity, and at a temperature of 20 C (i) Packing group I: 1.8 m (5.9 feet)
2 C (68 F 4 F), or 27 C 2 C (81 F (ii) Packing group II: 1.2 m (3.9 feet)
4 F). Average values should fall with- (iii) Packing group III: 0.8 m (2.6 feet)
in these limits. Short-term fluctua- (2) Drop tests are to be performed
tions and measurement limitations with the solid or liquid to be trans-
may cause individual measurements to ported or with a non-hazardous mate-
vary by up to 5 percent relative hu- rial having essentially the same phys-
midity without significant impairment ical characteristics.
of test reproducibility; or (3) The specific gravity and viscosity
(3) For testing at periodic intervals of a substituted non-hazardous mate-
only (i.e., other than initial design rial used in the drop test for liquids
qualification testing), at ambient con- must be similar to the hazardous mate-
ditions. rial intended for transportation. Water
also may be used for the liquid drop
178.965 Drop test. test under the following conditions:
(a) General. The drop test must be (i) Where the substances to be carried
conducted for the qualification of all have a specific gravity not exceeding
Large Packaging design types and per- 1.2, the drop heights must be those
formed periodically as specified in specified in paragraph (e)(1) of this sec-
178.955(e) of this subpart. tion for each Large Packaging design
(b) Special preparation for the drop test. type; and
Large Packagings must be filled in ac- (ii) Where the substances to be car-
cordance with 178.960. ried have a specific gravity exceeding
(c) Conditioning. Rigid plastic Large 1.2, the drop heights must be as fol-
Packagings and Large Packagings with lows:
plastic inner receptacles must be con- (A) Packing Group I: SG 1.5 m (4.9
ditioned for testing by reducing the feet).
temperature of the packaging and its (B) Packing Group II: SG 1.0 m (3.3
contents to 18 C (0 F) or lower. Test feet).
liquids must be kept in the liquid (C) Packing Group III: SG 0.67 m
state, if necessary, by the addition of (2.2 feet).
anti-freeze. Water/anti-freeze solutions (f) Criteria for passing the test. For all
with a minimum specific gravity of 0.95 Large Packaging design types there
for testing at 18 C (0 F) or lower are may be no loss of the filling substance
considered acceptable test liquids, and from inner packaging(s) or article(s).
may be considered equivalent to water Ruptures are not permitted in Large
for test purposes. Large Packagings Packaging for articles of Class 1 which
conditioned in this way are not re- permit the spillage of loose explosive
quired to be conditioned in accordance substances or articles from the Large
with 178.960(d). Packaging. Where a Large Packaging
undergoes a drop test, the sample
(d) Test method. (1) Samples of all
passes the test if the entire contents
Large Packaging design types must be
are retained even if the closure is no
dropped onto a rigid, non-resilient,
longer sift-proof.
smooth, flat and horizontal surface.
The point of impact must be the most [75 FR 5400, Feb. 2, 2010, as amended at 75 FR
vulnerable part of the base of the Large 60339, Sept. 30, 2010]
Packaging being tested. Following the
drop, the Large Packaging must be re- 178.970 Bottom lift test.
stored to the upright position for ob- (a) General. The bottom lift test must
servation. be conducted for the qualification of
(2) Large Packaging design types all Large Packagings design types de-
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
with a capacity of 0.45 cubic meters signed to be lifted from the base.
(15.9 cubic feet) or less must be subject (b) Special preparation for the bottom
to an additional drop test. lift test. The Large Packaging must be
242
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00252 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.980
loaded to 1.25 times its maximum per- (ii) Suspend the flexible Large Pack-
missible gross mass, the load being aging by its lifting devices.
evenly distributed. (iii) Apply a constant downward force
(c) Test method. All Large Packaging through a specially designed platen.
design types must be raised and low- The platen will be a minimum of 60
ered twice by a lift truck with the percent and a maximum of 80 percent
forks centrally positioned and spaced of the cross sectional surface area of
at three quarters of the dimension of the flexible Large Packaging.
the side of entry (unless the points of (iv) The combination of the mass of
entry are fixed). The forks must pene- the filled flexible Large Packaging and
trate to three quarters of the direction the force applied through the platen
of entry. must be a minimum of six times the
(d) Criteria for passing the test. For all maximum net mass of the flexible
Large Packagings design types de- Large Packaging. The test must be
signed to be lifted from the base, there conducted for a period of five minutes.
may be no permanent deformation (v) Other equally effective methods
which renders the Large Packaging un- of top lift testing and preparation may
safe for transport and there must be no be used with approval of the Associate
loss of contents. Administrator.
(d) Criterion for passing the test. For
178.975 Top lift test. all Large Packagings design types de-
signed to be lifted from the top, there
(a) General. The top lift test must be
may be no permanent deformation
conducted for the qualification of all of
which renders the Large Packagings
Large Packagings design types to be
unsafe for transport and no loss of con-
lifted from the top or, for flexible
tents.
Large Packagings, from the side.
(b) Special preparation for the top lift 178.980 Stacking test.
test. (1) Metal and rigid plastic Large
(a) General. The stacking test must
Packagings design types must be load-
be conducted for the qualification of
ed to twice its maximum permissible
all Large Packagings design types in-
gross mass.
tended to be stacked.
(2) Flexible Large Packaging design
(b) Special preparation for the stacking
types must be filled to six times the
test. (1) All Large Packagings except
maximum permissible gross mass, the
flexible Large Packaging design types
load being evenly distributed.
must be loaded to their maximum per-
(c) Test method. (1) A Large Pack- missible gross mass.
aging must be lifted in the manner for (2) Flexible Large Packagings must
which it is designed until clear of the be filled to not less than 95 percent of
floor and maintained in that position their capacity and to their maximum
for a period of five minutes. net mass, with the load being evenly
(2) Rigid plastic Large Packaging de- distributed.
sign types must be: (c) Test method. (1) All Large Pack-
(i) Lifted by each pair of diagonally agings must be placed on their base on
opposite lifting devices, so that the level, hard ground and subjected to a
hoisting forces are applied vertically uniformly distributed superimposed
for a period of five minutes; and test load for a period of at least five
(ii) Lifted by each pair of diagonally minutes (see paragraph (c)(5) of this
opposite lifting devices so that the section).
hoisting forces are applied towards the (2) Fiberboard and wooden Large
center at 45 to the vertical, for a pe- Packagings must be subjected to the
riod of five minutes. test for 24 hours.
(3) If not tested as indicated in para- (3) Rigid plastic Large Packagings
graph (c)(1) of this section, a flexible which bear the stacking load must be
Large Packaging design type must be subjected to the test for 28 days at 40
tested as follows: C (104 F).
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
(i) Fill the flexible Large Packaging (4) For all Large Packagings, the
to 95% full with a material representa- load must be applied by one of the fol-
tive of the product to be shipped. lowing methods:
243
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00253 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.985 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
(i) One or more Large Packagings of 8.3 corresponds to the weight in pounds of 1.0
the same type loaded to their max- gallon of water.
imum permissible gross mass and 1.5 is a compensation factor that converts
the static load of the stacking test into
stacked on the test Large Packaging; a load suitable for dynamic compression
(ii) The calculated superimposed test testing.
load weight loaded on either a flat
plate or a reproduction of the base of (e) Criterion for passing the test. (1) For
the Large Packaging, which is stacked metal or rigid plastic Large Pack-
on the test Large Packaging; or agings, there may be no permanent de-
(5) Calculation of superimposed test formation which renders the Large
load. For all Large Packagings, the Packaging unsafe for transportation
load to be placed on the Large Pack- and no loss of contents.
aging must be 1.8 times the combined (2) For fiberboard or wooden Large
maximum permissible gross mass of Packagings, there may be no loss of
the number of similar Large Packaging contents and no permanent deforma-
that may be stacked on top of the tion that renders the whole Large
Large Packaging during transpor- Packaging, including the base pallet,
tation. unsafe for transportation.
(d) Periodic Retest. (1) The package (3) For flexible Large Packagings,
must be tested in accordance with there may be no deterioration which
178.980(c) of this subpart; or renders the Large Packaging unsafe for
(2) The packaging may be tested transportation and no loss of contents.
using a dynamic compression testing (4) For the dynamic compression
machine. The test must be conducted test, a container passes the test if,
at room temperature on an empty, un- after application of the required load,
sealed packaging. The test sample there is no permanent deformation to
must be centered on the bottom platen the Large Packaging which renders the
of the testing machine. The top platen whole Large Packaging; including the
must be lowered until it comes in con- base pallet, unsafe for transportation;
tact with the test sample. Compression in no case may the maximum deflec-
must be applied end to end. The speed tion exceed one inch.
of the compression tester must be one- [75 FR 5400, Feb. 2, 2010, as amended at 75 FR
half inch plus or minus one-fourth inch 60339, Sept. 30, 2010; 78 FR 1097, Jan. 7, 2013]
per minute. An initial preload of 50
pounds must be applied to ensure a 178.985 Vibration test.
definite contact between the test sam- (a) General. All rigid Large Pack-
ple and the platens. The distance be- aging and flexible Large Packaging de-
tween the platens at this time must be sign types must be capable of with-
recorded as zero deformation. The force standing the vibration test.
A to then be applied must be cal- (b) Test method. (1) A sample Large
culated using the applicable formula: Packaging, selected at random, must
Liquids: A = (1.8)(n1) [w + (s v 8.3 be filled and closed as for shipment.
.98)] 1.5; Large Packagings intended for liquids
may be tested using water as the filling
or material for the vibration test.
(2) The sample Large Packaging must
Solids: A = (1.8)(n1) [w + (s v 8.3
be placed on a vibrating platform that
.95)] 1.5
has a vertical or rotary double-ampli-
Where: tude (peak-to-peak displacement) of
A = applied load in pounds. one inch. The Large Packaging must be
n = maximum number of Large Packagings constrained horizontally to prevent it
that may be stacked during transpor- from falling off the platform, but must
tation. be left free to move vertically and
w = maximum weight of one empty container bounce.
in pounds.
(3) The sample Large Packaging must
s = specific gravity (liquids) or density (sol-
be placed on a vibrating platform that
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
244
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00254 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.1010
245
ER07JA13.002</GPH>
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00255 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.1015 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
not to exceed two years from the date tion on a Flexible Bulk Container de-
of manufacture of the Flexible Bulk sign type, to requalify the design for
Container. continued production at the frequency
246
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00256 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.1035
subpart using random samples of pack- blow molding) and which may include
agings, in the numbers specified in the drawing(s) and/or photograph(s);
appropriate test section. (7) Maximum capacity;
247
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00257 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
178.1040 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
(8) Characteristics of test contents (d) Drop height. (1) For all Flexible
(e.g., particle size for solids); Bulk Containers, drop heights are spec-
(9) Mathematical calculations per- ified as follows: Packing group III: 0.8
formed to conduct and document test- m (2.6 feet)
ing (e.g., drop height, test capacity, (2) Drop tests are to be performed
outage requirements, etc.); with the solid to be transported or with
(10) Test descriptions and results; and a non-hazardous material having essen-
(11) Signature with the name and tially the same physical characteris-
title of signatory. tics.
(e) Criteria for passing the test. For all
178.1040 Preparation of Flexible Bulk Flexible Bulk Container design types
Containers for testing. there may be no loss of the filling sub-
(a) Except as otherwise provided in stance. However a slight discharge
this subchapter, each Flexible Bulk (e.g., from closures or stitch holes)
Container must be closed in prepara- upon impact is not considered a failure
tion for testing and tests must be car- of the Flexible Bulk Container pro-
ried out in the same manner as if pre- vided that no further leakage occurs
pared for transportation. All closures after the container has been restored
must be installed using proper tech- to the upright position.
niques and torques.
(b) If the material to be transported 178.1050 Top lift test.
is replaced for test purposes by a non- (a) General. The top lift test must be
hazardous material, the physical prop- conducted for the qualification of all of
erties (grain, size, viscosity) of the re- Flexible Bulk Containers design types
placement material used that might to be lifted from the top.
influence the results of the required (b) Special preparation for the top lift
tests must correspond as closely as test. Flexible Bulk Container design
possible to those of the hazardous ma- types must be filled to six times the
terial to be transported. It is permis- maximum permissible gross mass, the
sible to use additives, such as bags of load being evenly distributed.
lead shot, to achieve the requisite total (c) Test method. (1) A Flexible Bulk
package mass, so long as they do not Container must be lifted in the manner
affect the test results. for which it is designed until clear of
the floor and maintained in that posi-
178.1045 Drop test. tion for a period of five minutes.
(a) General. The drop test must be (2) If not tested as indicated in para-
conducted for the qualification of all graph (c)(1) of this section, a Flexible
Flexible Bulk Container design types Bulk Container design type must be
and performed periodically as specified tested as follows:
in 178.1035(e) of this subpart. (i) Fill the Flexible Bulk Container
(b) Special preparation for the drop test. to 95% full with a material representa-
Flexible Bulk Containers must be filled tive of the product to be shipped.
to their maximum permissible gross (ii) Suspend the Flexible Bulk Con-
mass. tainer by its lifting devices.
(c) Test method. (1) A sample of all (iii) Apply a constant downward force
Flexible Bulk Container design types through a specially designed platen.
must be dropped onto a rigid, non-resil- The platen will be a minimum of 60
ient, smooth, flat and horizontal sur- percent and a maximum of 80 percent
face. This test surface must be large of the cross sectional surface area of
enough to be immovable during testing the Flexible Bulk Container.
and sufficiently large enough to ensure (iv) The combination of the mass of
that the test Flexible Bulk Container the filled Flexible Bulk Container and
falls entirely upon the surface. The the force applied through the platen
test surface must be kept free from must be a minimum of six times the
local defects capable of influencing the maximum net mass of the Flexible
test results. Bulk Container. The test must be con-
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
(2) Following the drop, the Flexible ducted for a period of five minutes.
Bulk Container must be restored to the (v) Other equally effective methods
upright position for observation. of top lift testing and preparation may
248
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00258 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 178.1070
be used with approval of the Associate be toppled onto any part of its top by
Administrator. lifting the side furthest from the drop
(d) Criteria for passing the test. For all edge upon a rigid, non-resilient,
Flexible Bulk Containers design types smooth, flat and horizontal surface.
designed to be lifted from the top, This test surface must be large enough
there may be no damage to the Flexi- to be immovable during testing and
ble Bulk Container or its lifting de- sufficiently large enough to ensure
vices that renders the Flexible Bulk that the test Flexible Bulk Container
Container unsafe for transport, and no falls entirely upon the surface. The
loss of contents. test surface must be kept free from
local defects capable of influencing the
178.1055 Stacking test. test results.
(a) General. The stacking test must (d) Topple height. (1) For all Flexible
be conducted for the qualification of Bulk Containers, topple heights are
all Flexible Bulk Containers design specified as follows: Packing group III:
types. 0.8 m (2.6 feet).
(b) Special preparation for the stacking (e) Criterion for passing the test. For
test. All Flexible Bulk Containers de- all Flexible Bulk Container design
sign types must be loaded to their max- types there may be no loss of the fill-
imum permissible gross mass. ing substance. However a slight dis-
(c) Test method. (1) All Flexible Bulk charge (e.g., from closures or stitch
Containers must be placed on their holes) upon impact is not considered a
base on level, hard ground and sub- failure of the Flexible Bulk Container.
jected to a uniformly distributed super-
imposed test load that is four times the 178.1065 Righting test.
design type maximum gross weight for (a) General. The righting test must be
a period of at least twenty-four hours. conducted for the qualification of all
(2) For all Flexible Bulk Containers, Flexible Bulk Containers design types
the load must be applied by one of the designed to be lifted from the top or
following methods: side.
(i) Four Flexible Bulk Containers of (b) Special preparation for the righting
the same type loaded to their max- test. Flexible Bulk Container design
imum permissible gross mass and types must be filled to not less than
stacked on the test Flexible Bulk Con- 95% of their capacity and to their max-
tainer; imum permissible gross mass, the load
(ii) The calculated superimposed test being evenly distributed.
load weight loaded on either a flat (c) Test method. A sample Flexible
plate or a reproduction of the base of Bulk Container design type must be
the Flexible Bulk Container, which is tested; the Flexible Bulk Container
stacked on the test Flexible Bulk Con- should start lying on its side and then
tainer. must be lifted at a speed of at least
(d) Criteria for passing the test. There 0.1m/s (0.328 ft/s) to an upright position
may be no deterioration that renders clear of the floor, by no more than half
the Flexible Bulk Container unsafe for of the lifting devices.
transportation and no loss of contents (d) Criterion for passing the test. For
during the test or after removal of the all Flexible Bulk Container design
test load. types there must be no damage that
renders the Flexible Bulk Container
178.1060 Topple test. unsafe for transport or handling.
(a) General. The topple test must be
conducted for the qualification of all 178.1070 Tear test.
Flexible Bulk Containers design types. (a) General. The tear test must be
(b) Special preparation for the topple conducted for the qualification of all of
test. Flexible Bulk Container design Flexible Bulk Containers design types.
types must be filled to their maximum (b) Special preparation for the tear test.
permissible gross mass, the load being Flexible Bulk Container design types
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
249
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00259 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pt. 178, App. A 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
250
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00260 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT Pt. 178, App. C
[Amdt. 1783, 34 FR 12283, July 25, 1969; 34 FR 12593, Aug. 1, 1969, as amended by Amdt. 178
64, 45 FR 81573, Dec. 11, 1980; Amdt. 17897, 55 FR 52728, Dec. 21, 1990; 68 FR 75758, Dec. 31, 2003]
APPENDIX B TO PART 178ALTERNATIVE and oil mixture. The test must be conducted
LEAKPROOFNESS TEST METHODS for a period of time sufficient to pressurize
the interior of the packaging to the specified
In addition to the method prescribed in air pressure and to determine if there is
178.604 of this subchapter, the following leakage of air from the packaging. A pack-
leakproofness test methods are authorized: aging passes the test if there is no leakage of
(1) Helium test. The packaging must be air from the packaging.
filled with at least 1 L inert helium gas, air (4) Solution over partial seams test. For other
tight closed, and placed in a testing cham- than design qualification testing, the fol-
ber. The testing chamber must be evacuated lowing test may be used for metal drums:
down to a pressure of 5 kPa which equals an The packaging must be restrained while an
over-pressure inside the packaging of 95 kPa. internal air pressure of 48 kPa (7.0 psig) is
The air in the testing chamber must be ana- applied; the method of restraint may not af-
lyzed for traces of helium gas by means of a fect the results of the test. The packaging
mass spectrograph. The test must be con- must be coated with a soap solution over the
ducted for a period of time sufficient to evac- entire side seam and a distance of not less
uate the chamber and to determine if there than eight inches on each side of the side
is leakage into or out of the packaging. If he- seam along the chime seam(s). The test must
lium gas is detected, the leaking packaging be conducted for a period of time sufficient
must be automatically separated from non- to pressurize the interior of the packaging to
leaking drums and the leaking area deter- the specified air pressure and to determine if
mined according to the method prescribed in there is leakage of air from the packaging. A
178.604(d) of this subchapter. A packaging packaging passes the test if there is no leak-
passes the test if there is no leakage of he- age of air from the packaging. Chime cuts
lium. must be made on the initial drum at the be-
(2) Pressure differential test. The packaging ginning of each production run and on the
shall be restrained while either pressure or a initial drum after any adjustment to the
vacuum is applied internally. The packaging chime seamer. Chime cuts must be main-
must be pressurized to the pressure required tained on file in date order for not less than
by 178.604(e) of this subchapter for the ap- six months and be made available to a rep-
propriate packing group. The method of re- resentative of the Department of Transpor-
straint must not affect the results of the tation on request.
test. The test must be conducted for a period [Amdt. 17897, 55 FR 52728, Dec. 21, 1990, as
of time sufficient to appropriately pressurize amended at 56 FR 66287, Dec. 20, 1991; 57 FR
or evacuate the interior of the packaging 45466, Oct. 1, 1992]
and to determine if there is leakage into or
out of the packaging. A packaging passes the APPENDIX C TO PART 178NOMINAL AND
pressure differential test if there is no MINIMUM THICKNESSES OF STEEL
change in measured internal pressure. DRUMS AND JERRICANS
(3) Solution over seams. The packaging must
be restrained while an internal air pressure For each listed packaging capacity, the
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
is applied; the method of restraint may not following table compares the ISO 3574 (IBR,
affect the results of the test. The exterior see 171.7 of this subchapter) nominal thick-
surface of all seams and welds must be coat- ness with the corresponding ISO 3574 min-
ed with a solution of soap suds or a water imum thickness.
251
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00261 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pt. 178, App. D 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
the highest temperature to which the cyl- the outer surface of the cylinder and valve
inder is subjected instead of temperature does not exceed a temperature of 93 C (199
measurements in intervals of not more than F) at any of the three points where the
five (5) minutes. thermocouples are located.
252
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00262 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT Pt. 178, App. E
7.2 For an oxygen generator, the gener- Burner models which have been used suc-
ator must not actuate. cessfully in testing are the Lenox Model OB
32, Carlin Model 200 CRD and Park Model
[72 FR 4457, Jan. 31, 2008, as amended at 72
DPL.
FR 55099, Sept. 28, 2007]
(3) Calorimeter. (i) The calorimeter to be
APPENDIX E TO PART 178FLAME used in testing must be a total heat flux Foil
Type Gardon Gage of an appropriate range
PENETRATION RESISTANCE TEST
(approximately 0 to 15.0 British thermal unit
(a) Criteria for Acceptance. (1) At least three (BTU) per ft.2 sec., 017.0 watts/cm2). The cal-
specimens of the outer packaging materials orimeter must be mounted in a 6 inch by 12
must be tested; inch (152 by 305 mm) by 34 inch (19 mm) thick
(2) Each test must be conducted on a flat 16 insulating block which is attached to a steel
inch 24 inch test specimen mounted in the angle bracket for placement in the test stand
horizontal ceiling position of the test appa- during burner calibration as shown in Figure
ratus to represent the outer packaging de- 2 of this part of this appendix.
sign; (ii) The insulating block must be mon-
(3) Testing must be conducted on all design itored for deterioration and the mounting
features (latches, seams, hinges, etc.) affect- shimmed as necessary to ensure that the cal-
ing the ability of the outer packaging to orimeter face is parallel to the exit plane of
safely prevent the passage of fire in the hori- the test burner cone.
zontal ceiling position; and (4) Thermocouples. The seven thermocouples
(4) There must be no flame penetration of to be used for testing must be 116 inch ce-
any specimen within 5 minutes after applica- ramic sheathed, type K, grounded
tion of the flame source and the maximum thermocouples with a nominal 30 American
allowable temperature at a point 4 inches wire gage (AWG) size conductor. The seven
above the test specimen, centered over the thermocouples must be attached to a steel
burner cone, must not exceed 205 C (400 F). angle bracket to form a thermocouple rake
(b) Summary of Method. This method pro- for placement in the test stand during burn-
vides a laboratory test procedure for meas- er calibration.
uring the capability of cargo compartment (5) Apparatus Arrangement. The test burner
lining materials to resist flame penetration must be mounted on a suitable stand to posi-
with a 2 gallon per hour (GPH) #2 Grade ker- tion the exit of the burner cone a distance of
osene or equivalent burner fire source. Ceil- 8 inches from the ceiling liner panel and 2
ing and sidewall liner panels may be tested inches from the sidewall liner panel. The
individually provided a baffle is used to sim- burner stand should have the capability of
ulate the missing panel. Any specimen that allowing the burner to be swung away from
passes the test as a ceiling liner panel may the test specimen during warm-up periods.
be used as a sidewall liner panel. (6) Instrumentation. A recording potentiom-
(c) Test Specimens. (1) The specimen to be eter or other suitable instrument with an ap-
tested must measure 16 18 inches (406 3 propriate range must be used to measure and
mm) by 24 + 18 inches (610 3 mm). record the outputs of the calorimeter and
(2) The specimens must be conditioned at
the thermocouples.
70 F. 5 F. (21 C. 2 C.) and 55% 5% hu-
(7) Timing Device. A stopwatch or other de-
midity for at least 24 hours before testing.
vice must be used to measure the time of
(d) Test Apparatus. The arrangement of the
flame application and the time of flame pen-
test apparatus must include the components
described in this section. Minor details of the etration, if it occurs.
apparatus may vary, depending on the model (e) Preparation of Apparatus. Before calibra-
of the burner used. tion, all equipment must be turned on and
(1) Specimen Mounting Stand. The mounting allowed to stabilize, and the burner fuel flow
stand for the test specimens consists of steel must be adjusted as specified in paragraph
angles. (d)(2).
(2) Test Burner. The burner to be used in (f) Calibration. To ensure the proper ther-
tesing must mal output of the burner the following test
(i) Be a modified gun type. must be made:
(ii) Use a suitable nozzle and maintain fuel (1) Remove the burner extension from the
pressure to yield a 2 GPH fuel flow. For ex- end of the draft tube. Turn on the blower
ample: An 80 degree nozzle nominally rated portion of the burner without turning the
at 2.25 GPH and operated at 85 pounds per fuel or igniters on. Measure the air velocity
square inch (PSI) gauge to deliver 2.03 GPH. using a hot wire anemometer in the center of
(iii) Have a 12 inch (305 mm) burner exten- the draft tube across the face of the opening.
sion installed at the end of the draft tube Adjust the damper such that the air velocity
with an opening 6 inches (152 mm) high and is in the range of 1550 to 1800 ft./min. If tabs
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
11 inches (280 mm) wide. are being used at the exit of the draft tube,
(iv) Have a burner fuel pressure regulator they must be removed prior to this measure-
that is adjusted to deliver a nominal 2.0 GPH ment. Reinstall the draft tube extension
of #2 Grade kerosene or equivalent. cone.
253
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00263 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pt. 178, App. E 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
(2) Place the calorimeter on the test stand zontal or vertical position. Mount the insu-
as shown in Figure 2 at a distance of 8 inches lating material in the other position.
(203 mm) from the exit of the burner cone to (3) Position the burner so that flames will
simulate the position of the horizontal test not impinge on the specimen, turn the burn-
specimen. er on, and allow it to run for 2 minutes. Ro-
(3) Turn on the burner, allow it to run for tate the burner to apply the flame to the
2 minutes for warm-up, and adjust the damp- specimen and simultaneously start the tim-
er to produce a calorimeter reading of 8.0 0.5 ing device.
BTU per ft.2 sec. (9.1 0.6 Watts/cm2). (4) Expose the test specimen to the flame
(4) Replace the calorimeter with the ther- for 5 minutes and then turn off the burner.
mocouple rake. The test may be terminated earlier if flame
(5) Turn on the burner and ensure that penetration is observed.
each of the seven thermocouples reads 1700 (5) When testing ceiling liner panels,
F. 100 F. (927 C. 38 C.) to ensure steady record the peak temperature measured 4
state conditions have been achieved. If the inches above the sample.
temperature is out of this range, repeat steps
(6) Record the time at which flame pene-
2 through 5 until proper readings are ob-
tration occurs if applicable.
tained.
(6) Turn off the burner and remove the (h) Test Report. The test report must in-
thermocouple rake. clude the following:
(7) Repeat (1) to ensure that the burner is (1) A complete description of the materials
in the correct range. tested including type, manufacturer, thick-
(g) Test Procedure. (1) Mount a thermo- ness, and other appropriate data.
couple of the same type as that used for cali- (2) Observations of the behavior of the test
bration at a distance of 4 inches (102 mm) specimens during flame exposure such as
above the horizontal (ceiling) test specimen. delamination, resin ignition, smoke, etc., in-
The thermocouple should be centered over cluding the time of such occurrence.
the burner cone. (3) The time at which flame penetration
(2) Mount the test specimen on the test occurs, if applicable, for each of the three
stand shown in Figure 1 in either the hori- specimens tested.
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
254
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00264 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT Pt. 178, App. E
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
255
ER11MR13.013</GPH>
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00265 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pt. 178, App. E 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
256
ER11MR13.014</GPH>
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00266 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT Pt. 179
[72 FR 55099, Sept. 28, 2007, as amended at 78 179.101 Individual specification require-
FR 15328, Mar. 11, 2013] ments applicable to pressure tank car
tanks.
179.1011 Individual specification require-
PART 179SPECIFICATIONS FOR ments.
TANK CARS 179.102 Special commodity requirements for
pressure tank car tanks.
Subpart AIntroduction, Approvals and 179.1021 Carbon dioxide, refrigerated liquid.
Reports 179.1022 Chlorine.
179.1023 Materials poisonous by inhalation.
Sec. 179.1024 Vinyl fluoride, stabilized.
179.1 General. 179.10217 Hydrogen chloride, refrigerated
179.2 Definitions and abbreviations. liquid.
179.3 Procedure for securing approval. 179.103 Special requirements for class 114A
179.4 Changes in specifications for tank * * * tank car tanks.
cars. 179.1031 Type.
179.5 Certificate of construction. 179.1032 Manway cover.
179.6 Repairs and alterations. 179.1033 Venting, loading and unloading
179.7 Quality assurance program. valves, measuring and sampling devices.
179.8 Limitation on actions by states, local 179.1034 Safety relief devices and pressure
governments, and Indian tribes. regulators.
179.1035 Bottom outlets.
Subpart BGeneral Design Requirements
Subpart DSpecifications for Non-Pressure
179.10 Tank mounting. Tank Car Tanks (Classes DOT-111AW,
179.11 Welding certification. 115AW, and 117AW)
179.12 Interior heater systems.
179.13 Tank car capacity and gross weight 179.200 General specifications applicable to
limitation. non-pressure tank car tanks (Class DOT
179.14 Coupler vertical restraint system. 111, DOT117).
179.15 Pressure relief devices. 179.2001 Tank built under these specifica-
179.16 Tank-head puncture-resistance sys- tions must meet the applicable require-
tems. ments in this part.
179.2003 Type.
179.18 Thermal protection systems.
179.2004 Insulation.
179.20 Service equipment; protection sys-
179.2006 Thickness of plates.
tems.
179.2007 Materials.
179.22 Marking.
179.2008 Tank heads.
179.24 Stamping.
179.2009 Compartment tanks.
179.20010 Welding.
Subpart CSpecifications for Pressure 179.20011 Postweld heat treatment.
Tank Car Tanks (Classes DOT-105, 109, 179.20013 Manway ring or flange, pressure
112, 114, and 120) relief device flange, bottom outlet nozzle
flange, bottom washout nozzle flange and
179.100 General specifications applicable to other attachments and openings.
pressure tank car tanks. 179.20014 Expansion capacity.
179.1001 Tanks built under these specifica- 179.20015 Closures for manways.
tions shall comply with the requirements 179.20016 Gauging devices, top loading and
of 179.100, 179.101 and when applicable, unloading devices, venting and air inlet
179.102 and 179.103. devices.
179.1003 Type. 179.20017 Bottom outlets.
179.1004 Insulation. 179.20019 Reinforcements, when used, and
179.1006 Thickness of plates. appurtenances not otherwise specified.
179.1007 Materials. 179.20021 Closures for openings.
179.1008 Tank heads. 179.20022 Test of tanks.
179.1009 Welding. 179.20023 Tests of pressure relief valves.
179.10010 Postweld heat treatment. 179.20024 Stamping.
179.10012 Manway nozzle, cover and protec- 179.201 Individual specification require-
tive housing. ments applicable to non-pressure tank
179.10013 Venting, loading and unloading car tanks.
valves, measuring and sampling devices. 179.2011 Individual specification require-
179.10014 Bottom outlets. ments.
179.10016 Attachments. 179.2012 [Reserved]
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
257
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00267 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pt. 179 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
179.2016 Manways and manway closures. 179.2211 Individual specification require-
179.2018 Sampling device and thermometer ments.
well.
179.2019 Gauging device. Subpart ESpecifications for Multi-Unit
179.20110 Water capacity marking. Tank Car Tanks (Classes DOT-106A
179.20111 Insulation. and 110AW)
179.202 Individual specification require-
ments applicable to DOT117 tank car 179.300 General specifications applicable to
tanks. multi-unit tank car tanks designed to be
179.2021 Applicability. removed from car structure for filling
and emptying (Classes DOT-106A and
179.2022 [Reserved]
110AW).
179.2023 Approval to operate at 286,000 179.3001 Tanks built under these specifica-
gross rail load (GRL). tions shall meet the requirements of
179.2024 Thickness of plates. 179.300 and 179.301.
179.2025 Tank head puncture resistance 179.3003 Type and general requirements.
system. 179.3004 Insulation.
179.2026 Thermal protection system. 179.3006 Thickness of plates.
179.2027 Jackets. 179.3007 Materials.
179.2028 Bottom outlets. 179.3008 Tank heads.
179.2029 Top fittings protection. 179.3009 Welding.
179.10210 ECP brakes. 179.30010 Postweld heat treatment.
179.20211 Individual specification require- 179.30012 Protection of fittings.
ments. 179.30013 Venting, loading and unloading
179.20212 Performance standard require- valves.
ments (DOT117P). 179.30014 Attachments not otherwise speci-
179.20213 Retrofit standard requirements fied.
(DOT117R). 179.30015 Pressure relief devices.
179.203179.20222 [Reserved] 179.30016 Tests of tanks.
179.30017 Tests of pressure relief devices.
179.220 General specifications applicable to
179.30018 Stamping.
nonpressure tank car tanks consisting of
179.30019 Inspection.
an inner container supported within an
179.30020 Reports.
outer shell (class DOT-115).
179.301 Individual specification require-
179.2201 Tanks built under these specifica- ments for multi-unit tank car tanks.
tions must meet the requirements of 179.302 [Reserved]
179.220 and 179.221.
179.2203 Type. Subpart FSpecification for Cryogenic Liq-
179.2204 Insulation. uid Tank Car Tanks and Seamless Steel
179.2206 Thickness of plates.
Tanks (Classes DOT-113 and 107A)
179.2207 Materials.
179.2208 Tank heads. 179.400 General specification applicable to
179.2209 Compartment tanks. cryogenic liquid tank car tanks.
179.22010 Welding. 179.4001 General.
179.22011 Postweld heat treatment. 179.4003 Type.
179.22013 Inner container manway nozzle 179.4004 Insulation system and perform-
and cover. ance standard.
179.22014 Openings in the tanks. 179.4005 Materials.
179.22015 Support system for inner con- 179.4006 Bursting and buckling pressure.
tainer. 179.4007 Tank heads.
179.22016 Expansion capacity. 179.4008 Thickness of plates.
179.22017 Gauging devices, top loading and 179.4009 Stiffening rings.
unloading devices, venting and air inlet 179.40010 Sump or siphon bowl.
179.40011 Welding.
devices.
179.40012 Postweld heat treatment.
179.22018 Bottom outlets.
179.40013 Support system for inner tank.
179.22020 Reinforcements, when used, and 179.40014 Cleaning of inner tank.
appurtenances not otherwise specified. 179.40015 Radioscopy.
179.22022 Closure for openings. 179.40016 Access to inner tank.
179.22023 Test of tanks. 179.40017 Inner tank piping.
179.22024 Tests of pressure relief valves. 179.40018 Test of inner tank.
179.22025 Stamping. 179.40019 Valves and gages.
179.22026 Stenciling. 179.40020 Pressure relief devices.
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
258
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00268 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 179.2
179.40025 Stenciling. sponsibility of the tank builder. Mark-
179.401 Individual specification require- ing the tank with the DOT specifica-
ments applicable to inner tanks for cryo- tion shall be understood to certify
genic liquid tank car tanks.
179.4011 Individual specification require-
compliance by the builder that the
ments. functions performed by the builder, as
179.500 Specification DOT-107A * * * *, prescribed in this part, have been per-
seamless steel tank car tanks. formed in compliance with this part.
179.5001 Tanks built under these specifica- (f) The tank builder should inform
tions shall meet the requirements of each person to whom that tank is
179.500. transferred of any specification re-
179.5003 Type and general requirements.
179.5004 Thickness of wall. quirements which have not been met at
179.5005 Material. time of transfer.
179.5006 Heat treatment.
[Amdt. 17917, 41 FR 38183, Sept. 9, 1976, as
179.5007 Physical tests.
amended by Amdt. 17950, 60 FR 49076, Sept.
179.5008 Openings in tanks.
21, 1995; 68 FR 48571, Aug. 14, 2003]
179.50010 Protective housing.
179.50011 Loading and unloading valves.
179.50012 Pressure relief devices. 179.2 Definitions and abbreviations.
179.50013 Fixtures. (a) The following apply in part 179:
179.50014 Test of tanks. (1) AAR means Association of Amer-
179.50015 Handling of tanks failing in tests.
179.50016 Tests of pressure relief devices. ican Railroads.
179.50017 Marking. (2) Approved means approval by the
179.50018 Inspection and reports. AAR Tank Car Committee.
APPENDIX A TO PART 179PROCEDURES FOR (3) ASTM means American Society
TANK-HEAD PUNCTURE-RESISTANCE TEST for Testing and Materials.
APPENDIX B TO PART 179PROCEDURES FOR (4) [Reserved]
SIMULATED POOL AND TORCH-FIRE TEST-
(5) Definitions in part 173 of this
ING
chapter also apply.
AUTHORITY: 49 U.S.C. 51015128; 49 CFR 1.81 (6) F means degrees Fahrenheit.
and 1.97.
(7) NGT means National Gas Taper
SOURCE: 29 FR 18995, Dec. 29, 1964, unless Threads.
otherwise noted. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, (8) NPT means an American Standard
Apr. 5, 1967. Taper Pipe Thread conforming to the
requirements of NBS Handbook H28
Subpart AIntroduction, (IBR, see 171.7 of this subchapter).
Approvals and Reports (9) [Reserved]
(10) Tank car facility means an entity
179.1 General. that manufactures, repairs, inspects,
(a) This part prescribes the specifica- tests, qualifies, or maintains a tank
tions for tanks that are to be mounted car to ensure that the tank car con-
on or form part of a tank car and which forms to this part and subpart F of part
are to be marked with a DOT specifica- 180 of this subchapter, that alters the
tion. certificate of construction of the tank
(b) Except as provided in paragraph car, that ensures the continuing quali-
(c) of this section, tanks to which this fication of a tank car by performing a
part is applicable, must be built to the function prescribed in parts 179 or 180
specifications prescribed in this part. of this subchapter, or that makes any
(c) Tanks built to specifications pre- representation indicating compliance
dating those in this part may continue with one or more of the requirements
in use as provided in 180.507 of this of parts 179 or 180 of this subchapter.
subchapter. (11) Tanks means tank car tanks.
(d) Any person who performs a func- (b) [Reserved]
tion prescribed in this part, shall per-
form that function in accordance with [29 FR 18995, Dec. 20, 1964. Redesignated at 32
FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, and amended by Amdt.
this part. 17910, 36 FR 21344, Nov. 6, 1971; Amdt. 17950,
(e) When this part requires a tank to
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
259
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00269 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
179.3 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
chapter).
earliest convenience and report its rec-
ommendations through the Executive [68 FR 75759, Dec. 31, 2003]
DirectorTank Car Safety to the De-
260
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00270 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 179.8
179.7 Quality assurance program. the inspection and test technique and
(a) At a minimum, each tank car fa- minimum detectable crack length.
cility shall have a quality assurance (11) Procedures for the periodic cali-
program, approved by AAR, that bration and measurement of inspection
(1) Ensures the finished product con- and test equipment.
forms to the requirements of the appli- (12) A system for the maintenance of
cable specification and regulations of records, inspections, tests, and the in-
this subchapter; terpretation of inspection and test re-
(2) Has the means to detect any non- sults.
conformity in the manufacturing, re- (c) Each tank car facility shall en-
pair, inspection, testing, and qualifica- sure that only personnel qualified for
tion or maintenance program of the each non-destructive inspection and
tank car; and test perform that particular operation.
(3) Prevents non-conformities from (d) Each tank car facility shall pro-
recurring. vide written procedures to its employ-
(b) At a minimum, the quality assur- ees to ensure that the work on the
ance program must have the following tank car conforms to the specification,
elements AAR approval, and owners acceptance
(1) Statement of authority and re- criteria.
sponsibility for those persons in charge (e) Each tank car facility shall train
of the quality assurance program. its employees in accordance with sub-
(2) An organizational chart showing part H of part 172 of this subchapter on
the interrelationship between man- the program and procedures specified
agers, engineers, purchasing, construc- in paragraph (b) of this section to en-
tion, inspection, testing, and quality sure quality.
control personnel. (f) No tank car facility may manufac-
(3) Procedures to ensure that the lat- ture, repair, inspect, test, qualify or
est applicable drawings, design calcula- maintain tank cars subject to require-
tions, specifications, and instructions ments of this subchapter, unless it is
are used in manufacture, inspection, operating in conformance with a qual-
testing, and repair. ity assurance program and written pro-
(4) Procedures to ensure that the fab- cedures required by paragraphs (a) and
rication and construction materials re- (b) of this section.
ceived are properly identified and docu- [Amdt. 17950, 60 FR 49076, Sept. 21, 1995, as
mented. amended by Amdt. 17950, 61 FR 33255, June
(5) A description of the manufac- 26, 1996; 68 FR 48571, Aug. 14, 2003; 68 FR 75759,
turing, repair, inspection, testing, and Dec. 31, 2003]
qualification or maintenance program,
including the acceptance criteria, so 179.8 Limitation on actions by states,
that an inspector can identify the char- local governments, and Indian
tribes.
acteristics of the tank car and the ele-
ments to inspect, examine, and test at Sections 5125 and 20106 of Title 49,
each point. United States Code, limit the author-
(6) Monitoring and control of proc- ity of states, political subdivisions of
esses and product characteristics dur- states, and Indian tribes to impose re-
ing production. quirements on the transportation of
(7) Procedures for correction of hazardous materials in commerce. A
nonconformities. state, local, or Indian tribe require-
(8) Provisions indicating that the re- ment on the transportation of haz-
quirements of the AAR Specifications ardous materials by rail may be pre-
for Tank Cars (IBR, see 171.7 of this empted under either 49 U.S.C. 5125 or
subchapter), apply. 20106, or both.
(9) Qualification requirements of per- (a) Section 171.1(f) of this subchapter
sonnel performing non-destructive in- describes the circumstances under
spections and tests. which 49 U.S.C. 5125 preempts a re-
(10) Procedures for evaluating the in- quirement of a state, political subdivi-
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
261
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00271 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
179.10 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
by the Federal Railroad Administra- (a) For other than tank cars con-
tion (see 49 CFR parts 200244), laws, taining poisonous-by-inhalation mate-
regulations and orders related to rail- rial, a tank car may be loaded to a
road safety, including security, shall be gross weight on rail of up to 286,000
nationally uniform to the extent prac- pounds (129,727 kg) upon approval by
ticable. A state may adopt, or continue the Associate Administrator for Safe-
in force, a law, regulation, or order ty, Federal Railroad Administration
covering the same subject matter as a (FRA). Tank cars must conform to the
DOT regulation or order applicable to conditions of the approval and must be
railroad safety and security (including operated only under controlled inter-
the requirements in this subpart) only change conditions agreed to by partici-
when an additional or more stringent pating railroads.
state law, regulation, or order is nec- (b) Tank cars containing poisonous-
essary to eliminate or reduce an essen- by-inhalation material meeting the ap-
tially local safety or security hazard; is plicable authorized tank car specifica-
not incompatible with a law, regula- tions listed in 173.244(a)(2) or (3) or
tion, or order of the United States Gov- 173.314(c) or (d) of this subchapter may
ernment; and does not unreasonably have a gross weight on rail of up to
burden interstate commerce. 286,000 pounds (129,727 kg). Tank cars
[74 FR 1801, Jan. 13, 2009] containing poisonous-by-inhalation
material not meeting the specifica-
Subpart BGeneral Design tions listed in 173.244(a)(2) or (3) or
Requirements 173.314(c) or (d) may be loaded to a
gross weight on rail of up to 286,000
179.10 Tank mounting. pounds (129,727 kg) only upon approval
(a) The manner in which tanks are of the Associate Administrator for
attached to the car structure shall be Safety, Federal Railroad Administra-
approved. The use of rivets to secure tion (FRA). Any increase in weight
anchors to tanks prohibited. above 263,000 pounds may not be used
(b) [Reserved] to increase thequantity of the contents
of the tank car.
179.11 Welding certification.
[74 FR 1802, Jan. 13, 2009, as amended at 75
(a) Welding procedures, welders and FR 27216, May 14, 2010; 77 FR 37985, June 25,
fabricators shall be approved. 2012; 81 FR 35545, June 2, 2016]
(b) [Reserved]
179.14 Coupler vertical restraint sys-
179.12 Interior heater systems. tem.
(a) Interior heater systems shall be of (a) Performance standard. Each tank
approved design and materials. If a car shall be equipped with couplers ca-
tank is divided into compartments, a pable of sustaining, without disengage-
separate system shall be provided for ment or material failure, vertical loads
each compartment. of at least 200,000 pounds (90,718.5 kg)
(b) Each interior heater system shall applied in upward and downward direc-
be hydrostatically tested at not less tions in combination with buff loads of
than 13.79 bar (200 psig) and shall hold 2,000 pounds (907.2 kg), when coupled to
the pressure for 10 minutes without cars which may or may not be equipped
leakage or evidence of distress. with couplers having this vertical re-
[Amdt. 17952, 61 FR 28678, June 5, 1996, as straint capability.
amended by 66 FR 45390, Aug. 28, 2001] (b) Test verification. Except as pro-
vided in paragraph (d) of this section,
179.13 Tank car capacity and gross compliance with the requirements of
weight limitation. paragraph (a) of this section shall be
Except as provided in this section, achieved by verification testing of the
tank cars, built after November 30, coupler vertical restraint system in ac-
1970, or any existing tank cars that are cordance with paragraph (c) of this sec-
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
262
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00272 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 179.15
263
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00273 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
179.16 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
tank burst pressure greater than 34.47 the discharge setting of the reclosing
Bar (500 psig) and from 110 percent to pressure relief device.
130 percent for tanks having a min- (f) Nonreclosing pressure relief device.
imum tank burst pressure less than or In addition to paragraphs (a), (b)(4), (c),
equal to 34.47 Bar (500 psig). and (d) of this section, a nonreclosing
(5) The tolerance for a reclosing pres- pressure relief device must conform to
sure relief valve is 3 psi for valves the following requirements:
with a start-to-discharge pressure of (1) A non-reclosing pressure relief de-
6.89 Bar (100 psig) or less and 3 percent vice must incorporate a rupture disc
for valves with a start-to-discharge designed to burst at a pressure equal to
pressure greater than 6.89 Bar (100 the greater of 100% of the tank test
psig). pressure, or 33% of the tank burst pres-
(c) Flow capacity of pressure relief de- sure.
vices. The total flow capacity of each (2) The approach channel and the dis-
reclosing and nonreclosing pressure re- charge channel may not reduce the re-
lief device must conform to appendix A quired minimum flow capacity of the
of the AAR Specifications for Tank pressure relief device.
Cars.
(3) The non-reclosing pressure relief
(d) Flow capacity tests. The manufac-
device must be designed to prevent
turer of any reclosing or nonreclosing
interchange with other fittings in-
pressure relief device must design and
stalled on the tank car, must have a
test the device in accordance with ap-
structure that encloses and clamps the
pendix A of the AAR Specifications for
rupture disc in position (preventing
Tank Cars.
any distortion or damage to the rup-
(e) Combination pressure relief systems.
ture disc when properly applied), and
A non-reclosing pressure relief device
must have a cover, with suitable means
may be used in series with a reclosing
of preventing misplacement, designed
pressure relief valve. The pressure re-
to direct any discharge of the lading
lief valve must be located outboard of
downward.
the non-reclosing pressure relief de-
(4) The non-reclosing pressure relief
vice.
device must be closed with a rupture
(1) When a breaking pin device is
disc that is compatible with the lading
used in combination with a reclosing
and manufactured in accordance with
pressure relief valve, the breaking pin
Appendix A of the AAR Specifications
must be designed to fail at the start-to-
for Tank Cars. The tolerance for a rup-
discharge pressure specified in para-
ture disc is + 0 to 15 percent of the
graph (b) of this section, and the re-
burst pressure marked on the disc.
closing pressure relief valve must be
designed to discharge at not greater (g) Location of relief devices. Each
than 95 percent of the start-to-dis- pressure relief device must commu-
charge pressure. nicate with the vapor space above the
(2) When a rupture disc is used in lading as near as practicable on the
combination with a reclosing pressure longitudinal center line and center of
relief valve, the rupture disc must be the tank.
designed to burst at the pressure speci- (h) Marking of pressure relief devices.
fied in paragraph (b) of this section, Each pressure relief device and rupture
and the reclosing pressure relief valve disc must be permanently marked in
must be designed to discharge at not accordance with the appendix A of the
greater than 95 percent of the pressure. AAR Specifications for Tank Cars.
A device must be installed to detect [Amdt. 17952, 61 FR 28678, June 5, 1996, as
any accumulation of pressure between amended by Amdt. 17952, 61 FR 50255, Sept.
the rupture disc and the reclosing pres- 25, 1996; 62 FR 51561, Oct. 1, 1997; 64 FR 51919,
sure relief valve. The detection device Sept. 27, 1999; 66 FR 45390, Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR
must be a needle valve, trycock, or 75759, Dec. 31, 2003]
tell-tale indicator. The detection de-
vice must be closed during transpor- 179.16 Tank-head puncture-resist-
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
264
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00274 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 179.18
a tank-head puncture-resistance sys- lease of any lading within the tank car,
tem, the system shall be capable of sus- except release through the pressure re-
taining, without any loss of lading, lease device, when subjected to:
coupler-to-tank-head impacts at rel- (1) A pool fire for 100 minutes; and
ative car speeds of 29 km/hour (18 mph) (2) A torch fire for 30 minutes.
when: (b) Thermal analysis. (1) Compliance
(1) The weight of the impact car is at with the requirements of paragraph (a)
least 119,295 kg (263,000 pounds);
of this section shall be verified by ana-
(2) The impacted tank car is coupled
lyzing the fire effects on the entire sur-
to one or more backup cars that have a
total weight of at least 217,724 kg face of the tank car. The analysis must
(480,000 pounds) and the hand brake is consider the fire effects on and heat
applied on the last backup car; and flux through tank discontinuities, pro-
(3) The impacted tank car is pressur- tective housings, underframes, metal
ized to at least 6.9 Bar (100 psig). jackets, insulation, and thermal pro-
(b) Verification by testing. Compliance tection. A complete record of each
with the requirements of paragraph (a) analysis shall be made, retained, and
of this section shall be verified by full- upon request, made available for in-
scale testing according to appendix A spection and copying by an authorized
of this part. representative of the Department. The
(c) Alternative compliance by other procedures outlined in Temperatures,
than testing. As an alternative to re- Pressures, and Liquid Levels of Tank
quirements prescribed in paragraph (b) Cars Engulfed in Fires, DOT/FRA/
of this section, compliance with the re- OR&D84/08.11, (1984), Federal Railroad
quirements of paragraph (a) of this sec- Administration, Washington, DC
tion may be met by installing full-head (available from the National Technical
protection (shields) or full tank-head Information Service, Springfield, VA)
jackets on each end of the tank car shall be deemed acceptable for ana-
conforming to the following: lyzing the fire effects on the entire sur-
(1) The full-head protection (shields)
face of the tank car.
or full tank-head jackets must be at
least 1.27 cm (0.5 inch) thick, shaped to (2) When the analysis shows the ther-
the contour of the tank head and made mal resistance of the tank car does not
from steel having a tensile strength conform to paragraph (a) of this sec-
greater than 379.21 N/mm2 (55,000 psi). tion, the thermal resistance of the
(2) The design and test requirements tank car must be increased by using a
of the full-head protection (shields) or system listed by the Department under
full tank-head jackets must meet the paragraph (c) of this section or by test-
impact test requirements in Section 5.3 ing a new or untried system and
of the AAR Specifications for Tank verifying it according to appendix B of
Cars (IBR, see 171.7 of this sub- this part.
chapter). (c) Systems that no longer require test
(3) The workmanship must meet the verification. The Department maintains
requirements in Section C, Part II, a list of thermal protection systems
Chapter 5, of the AAR Specifications that comply with the requirements of
for Design, Fabrication, and Construc- appendix B of this part and that no
tion of Freight Cars (IBR, see 171.7 of longer require test verification. Infor-
this subchapter). mation necessary to equip tank cars
[Amdt. 17950, 60 FR 49077, Sept. 21, 1995, as with one of these systems is available
amended by Amdt. 17950, 61 FR 33255, June in the PHMSA Records Center, Pipe-
26, 1996; 66 FR 45390, Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR 75759, line and Hazardous Materials Safety
Dec. 31, 2003]
Administration, East Building, 1200
179.18 Thermal protection systems. New Jersey Avenue, SE., Washington,
DC 205900001.
(a) Performance standard. When the
regulations in this subchapter require [Amdt. 17950, 60 FR 49077, Sept. 21, 1995, as
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
thermal protection on a tank car, the amended by Amdt. 17950, 61 FR 33256, June
tank car must have sufficient thermal 26, 1996; 66 FR 45390, Aug. 28, 2001; 70 FR 56099,
resistance so that there will be no re- Sept. 23, 2005; 72 FR 55696, Oct. 1, 2007]
265
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00275 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
179.20 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
266
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00276 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 179.1006
179.100 General specifications appli- [29 FR 18995, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32
cable to pressure tank car tanks. FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, and amended by Amdt.
17910, 36 FR 21344, Nov. 6, 1971; Amdt. 17950,
60 FR 49077, Sept. 21, 1995]
179.1001 Tanks built under these
specifications shall comply with the
requirements of 179.100, 179.101 179.1006 Thickness of plates.
and when applicable, 179.102 and (a) The wall thickness after forming
179.103. of the tank shell and heads must not be
less than that specified in 179.101, nor
179.1003 Type. that calculated by the following for-
(a) Tanks built under this specifica- mula:
tion shall be fusion-welded with heads
t = Pd / 2SE
designed convex outward. Except as
provided in 179.103 they shall be cir- Where:
cular in cross section, shall be provided d = Inside diameter in inches;
with a manway nozzle on top of the E = 1.0 welded joint efficiency; except for
tank of sufficient size to permit access heads with seams = 0.9;
to the interior, a manway cover to pro- P = Minimum required bursting pressure in
vide for the mounting of all valves, p.s.i.;
measuring and sampling devices, and a S = Minimum tensile strength of plate mate-
protective housing. Other openings in rial in p.s.i., as prescribed in 179.1007;
the tank are prohibited, except as pro- t = Minimum thickness of plate in inches
after forming.
vided in part 173 of this chapter,
179.10014, 179.1011, 179.102 or 179.103. (b) If plates are clad with material
(b) Head shields and shells of tanks having tensile strength properties at
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
built under this specification must be least equal to the base plate, the clad-
normalized. Tank car heads must be ding may be considered a part of the
normalized after forming unless spe- base plate when determining thickness.
267
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00277 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
179.1007 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
268
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00278 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 179.10012
269
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00279 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
179.10013 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
179.10013 Venting, loading and un- in conjunction with the metal of the
loading valves, measuring and sam- tank shell. When the sump or siphon
pling devices. bowl is pressed in the bottom of the
(a) Venting, loading and unloading tank shell, the wall thickness of the
valves must be of approved design, pressed section must not be less than
made of metal not subject to rapid de- that specified for the shell. The section
terioration by the lading, and must of a circular cross section tank to
withstand the tank test pressure with- which a sump or siphon bowl is at-
out leakage. The valves shall be bolted tached need not comply with the out-
to seatings on the manway cover, ex- of-roundness requirement specified in
cept as provided in 179.103. Valve out- AAR Specifications for Tank Cars, ap-
lets shall be closed with approved pendix W, W14.06 (IBR, see 171.7 of this
screw plugs or other closures fastened subchapter). Any portion of a sump or
to prevent misplacement. siphon bowl not forming a part of cyl-
(b) The interior pipes of the loading inder of revolution must have walls of
and unloading valves shall be anchored such thickness and be so reinforced
and, except as prescribed in 173.314(j),
that the stresses in the walls caused by
179.102 or 179.103, may be equipped with
a given internal pressure are no greater
excess flow valves of approved design.
than the circumferential stress that
(c) Gauging device, sampling valve
and thermometer well are not speci- would exist under the same internal
fication requirements. When used, they pressure in the wall of a tank of cir-
shall be of approved design, made of cular cross section designed in accord-
metal not subject to rapid deteriora- ance with 179.1006(a), but in no case
tion by the lading, and shall withstand shall the wall thickness be less than
the tank test pressure without leakage. that specified in 179.1011.
Interior pipes of the gauging device and [29 FR 18995, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32
sampling valve, except as prescribed in FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, and amended by Amdt.
173.314(j), 179.102 or 179.103, may be 17910, 36 FR 21345, Nov. 6, 1971; Amdt. 17940,
equipped with excess flow valves of ap- 52 FR 13046, Apr. 20, 1987; Amdt. 17942, 54 FR
proved design. Interior pipe of the ther- 38798, Sept. 20, 1989; 65 FR 58632, Sept. 29,
mometer well shall be anchored in an 2000; 68 FR 48571, Aug. 14, 2003; 68 FR 75760,
approved manner to prevent breakage Dec. 31, 2003]
due to vibration. The thermometer
well shall be closed by an approved 179.10014 Bottom outlets.
valve attached close to the manway (a) Bottom outlets for discharge of
cover, or other approved location, and lading is prohibited, except as provided
closed by a screw plug. Other approved in 179.1033. If indicated in 179.101,
arrangements that permit testing ther- tank may be equipped with a bottom
mometer well for leaks without com- washout of approved construction. If
plete removal of the closure may be applied, bottom washout shall be in ac-
used. cordance with the following require-
(d) An excess flow valve as referred to ments;
in this specification, is a device which
(1) The extreme projection of the bot-
closes automatically against the out-
tom washout equipment may not be
ward flow of the contents of the tank
more than that allowed by appendix E
in case the external closure valve is
of the AAR Specifications for Tank
broken off or removed during transit.
Excess flow valves may be designed Cars (IBR, see 171.7 of this sub-
with a by-pass to allow the equali- chapter).
zation of pressures. (2) Bottom washout shall be of cast,
(e) Bottom of tank shell may be forged or fabricated metal and shall be
equipped with a sump or siphon bowl, fusion-welded to the tank. It shall be of
or both, welded or pressed into the good weldable quality in conjunction
shell. Such sumps or siphon bowls, if with metal of tank.
applied, are not limited in size and (3) If the bottom washout nozzle ex-
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
must be made of cast, forged or fab- tends 6 inches or more from shell of
ricated metal. Each sump or siphon tank, a V-shaped breakage groove shall
bowl must be of good welding quality be cut (not cast) in the upper part of
270
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00280 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 179.10020
271
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00281 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
179.101 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
[Amdt. 17952, 61 FR 28679, June 5, 1996, as amended at 66 FR 45390, Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR 75760,
Dec. 31, 2003]
272
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00282 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8016 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 179.1023
(1) Tanks must be fabricated from pling without jacket shift such that re-
carbon steel complying with ASTM sults in damage to the nozzle.
Specification A 516 (IBR, see 171.7 of [74 FR 1802, Jan. 13, 2009]
273
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00283 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
179.1024 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
274
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00284 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 179.1031
20/A 20M (IBR, see 171.7 of this sub- MINIMUM OPERATING TEMPERATURE l
chapter). F.
(ii) AAR Specification TC 128 mate- (l) The tank car and insulation must
rial must meet the Charpy V-notch be designed to prevent the pressure of
test requirements, in longitudinal di- the lading from increasing from the
rection of rolling of 15 ft.-lb. minimum pressure at the maximum allowable
average for 3 specimens, with a 10 ft.- filling density to the start-to-discharge
lb. minimum for any one specimen, at pressure of the pressure relief valve
minus 50 F or colder, in accordance within 30 days, at an ambient tempera-
with ASTM A 370 (IBR, see 171.7 of ture of 90 F.
this subchapter). (m) Except as provided in 173.314(d),
(iii) Production welded test plates tank cars built on or after March 16,
must 2009 used for the transportation of hy-
(A) Be prepared in accordance with drogen chloride, refrigerated liquid,
AAR Specifications for Tank Cars, ap- must meet the applicable authorized
pendix W, W4.00 (IBR, see 171.7 of this tank car specification listed in
subchapter); 173.314(c).
(B) include impact test specimens of
weld metal and heat affected zone pre- [Amdt. 17932, 48 FR 27708, June 16, 1983, as
pared and tested in accordance with amended at 48 FR 50441, Nov. 1, 1983; 49 FR
AAR Specifications for Tank Cars, ap- 24317, June 12, 1984; 49 FR 42736, Oct. 24, 1984;
Amdt. 17945, 55 FR 52728, Dec. 21, 1990; 66 FR
pendix W, W9.00; and 45390, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 51660, Aug. 8, 2002;
(C) meet the same impact require- 68 FR 75758, 75760, Dec. 31, 2003; 74 FR 1802,
ments as the plate material. Jan. 13, 2009]
(c) Insulation must be of approved
material. 179.103 Special requirements for
(d) Pressure relief valves must be class 114A * * * tank car tanks.
trimmed with monel or other approved (a) In addition to the applicable re-
material and equipped with a rupture quirements of 179.100 and 179.101 the
disc of silver, polytetrafluoroethylene following requirements shall be com-
coated monel, or tantalum. Each pres- plied with:
sure relief device shall have the space (b) [Reserved]
between the rupture disc and the valve
vented with a suitable auxiliary valve. 179.1031 Type.
The discharge from each pressure relief
(a) Tanks built under this section
valve must be directed outside the pro-
may be of any approved cross section.
tective housing.
(e) Loading and unloading valves (b) Any portion of the tank shell not
must be trimmed with Hastelloy B or circular in cross section shall have
C, monel, or other approved material, walls of such thickness and be so rein-
and identified as Vapor or Liquid. forced that the stresses in the walls
Excess flow valves must be installed caused by a given internal pressure are
under all liquid and vapor valves, ex- no greater than the circumferential
cept safety relief valves. stresses which would exist under the
(f) A thermometer well may be in- same internal pressure in the wall of a
stalled. tank of circular cross section designed
(g) Only an approved gaging device in accordance with paragraphs 179.100
may be installed. 6 (a) and (b), but in no case shall the
(h) A sump must be installed in the wall thickness be less than that speci-
bottom of the tank under the liquid fied in 179.101.
pipes. (c) [Reserved]
(i) All gaskets must be made of, or (d) Valves and fittings need not be
coated with, polytetrafluoroethylene mounted on the manway cover.
or other approved material. (e) One opening may be provided in
(j) The tank car tank may be each head for use in purging the tank
equipped with exterior cooling coils on interior.
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
top of the tank car shell. [29 FR 18995, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32
(k) The jacket must be stenciled, ad- FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, and amended by Amdt.
jacent to the water capacity stencil, 17950, 60 FR 49077, Sept. 21, 1995]
275
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00285 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
179.1032 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
[29 FR 18995, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32 (b) Bottom outlet equipment must be
FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, and amended by Amdt.
of approved design and must meet the
17910, 36 FR 21348, Nov. 6, 1971]
following requirements:
276
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00286 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 179.2003
(1) The extreme projection of the bot- clude an in-line auxiliary valve, either
tom outlet equipment may not be more integral with the quick-coupling device
than allowed by appendix E of the AAR or located between the primary bottom
Specifications for Tank Cars (IBR, see outlet valve and the quick-coupling de-
171.7 of this subchapter). All bottom vice. The quick-coupling device closure
outlet reducers and closures and their dust cap or outlet nozzle shall be fitted
attachments shall be secured to the car with a minimum 1-inch NPT closure
by at least 38 inch chain, or its equiva- (see Fig. E17.8 and E17.9).
lent, except that bottom outlet closure (3) The valve operating mechanism
plugs may be attached by 14 inch chain. must be provided with a suitable lock-
When the bottom outlet closure is of ing arrangement to insure positive clo-
the combination cap and valve type, sure during transit.
the pipe connection to the valve shall (4) If the outlet nozzle extends 6
be closed by a plug, cap, or approved inches or more from shell of tank, a V-
quick coupling device. The bottom out- shaped breakage groove shall be cut
let equipment should include only the (not cast) in the upper part to the out-
valve, reducers and closures that are let nozzle at a point immediately below
necessary for the attachment of un- the lowest part of value closest to the
loading fixtures. The permanent at- tank. In no case may the nozzle wall
tachment of supplementary exterior thickness at the roof of the V be
fittings must be approved by the AAR more than 14-inch. On cars without
Committee on Tank Cars. continuous center sills, the breakage
(2) To provide for the attachment of groove or its equivalent may not be
unloading connections, the discharge more than 15 inches below the tank
end of the bottom outlet nozzle or re- shell. On cars with continuous center
ducer, the valve body of the exterior sills, the breakage groove or its equiva-
valve, or some fixed attachment there- lent must be above the bottom of the
to, shall be provided with one of the center sill construction.
following arrangements or an approved (5) The valve body must be of a thick-
modification thereof. (See appendix E. ness which will insure that accidental
Fig. E17 of the AAR Specifications for breakage of the outlet nozzle will occur
Tank Cars for illustrations of some of at or below the V groove, or its
the possible arrangements.) equivalent, and will not cause distor-
(i) A bolted flange closure arrange- tion of the valve seat or valve.
ment including a minimum 1-inch NPT [Amdt. 17910, 36 FR 21348, Nov. 6, 1971, as
pipe plug (see Fig. E17.1) or including amended by Amdt. 17940, 52 FR 13046, Apr.
an auxiliary valve with a threaded clo- 20, 1987; Amdt. 17941, 52 FR 36672, Sept. 30,
sure. 1987; Amdt. 17950, 60 FR 49077, Sept. 21, 1995;
Amdt. 17952, 61 FR 28680, June 5, 1996; Amdt.
(ii) A threaded cap closure arrange-
17953, 61 FR 51342, Oct. 1, 1996; 66 FR 45186,
ment including a minimum 1-inch NPT Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR 75761, Dec. 31, 2003]
pipe plug (see Fig. E17.2) or including
an auxiliary valve with a threaded clo-
sure.
Subpart DSpecifications for Non-
(iii) A quick-coupling device using a Pressure Tank Car Tanks
threaded plug closure of at least 1-inch (Classes DOT-111AW, 115AW,
NPT or having a threaded cap closure and 117AW)
with a minimum 1-inch NPT pipe plug
(see Fig. E17.3 through E17.5). A min- 179.200 General specifications appli-
cable to non-pressure tank car
imum 1-inch auxiliary test valve with a tanks (Class DOT111, DOT117).
threaded closure may be substituted
for the 1-inch pipe plug (see Fig E17.6). 179.2001 Tank built under these
If the threaded cap closure does not specifications must meet the appli-
have a pipe plug or integral auxiliary cable requirements in this part.
test valve, a minimum 1-inch NPT pipe
plug shall be installed in the outlet 179.2003 Type.
nozzle above the closure (see Fig. Tank built under these specifications
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
277
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00287 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
179.2004 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
must have at least one manway or one (b) The wall thickness after forming
expansion dome with manway, and of 3:1 ellipsoidal heads must be not less
such other external projections as are than specified in 179.2011, nor that
prescribed herein. When the tank is di- calculated by the following formula:
vided into compartments, each com-
partment must be treated as a separate Pd
tank. t= 1.83
2 SE
[Amdt. 17910, 36 FR 21348, Nov. 6, 1971]
Where:
179.2004 Insulation. d = Inside diameter in inches;
E = 0.9 Welded joint efficiency; except E = 1.0
(a) If insulation is applied, the tank for seamless heads;
shell and expansion dome when used P = Minimum required bursting pressure in
must be insulated with an approved psig;
material. The entire insulation must S = Minimum tensile strength of plate mate-
be covered with a metal jacket of a rial in p.s.i. as prescribed in 179.2007;
thickness not less than 11 gauge (0.1196 t = Minimum thickness of plate in inches
inch) nominal (Manufacturers Stand- after forming.
ard Gauge) and flashed around all open- (c) The wall thickness after forming
ings so as to be weather tight. The ex- of a flanged and dished head must be
terior surface of a carbon steel tank not less than specified in 179.2011, nor
and the inside surface of a carbon steel that calculated by the following for-
jacket must be given a protection coat- mula:
ing.
(b) If insulation is a specification re- 5 PL
quirement, it shall be of sufficient t=
thickness so that the thermal conduct- 6 SE
ance at 60 F is not more than 0.225 Btu Where:
per hour, per square foot, per degree F E = 0.9 Welded joint efficiency; except E = 1.0
temperature differential, unless other- for seamless heads;
wise provided in 179.2011. If exterior L = Main inside radius to which head is
heaters are attached to tank, the dished, measured on concave side in
inches;
thickness of the insulation over each
P = Minimum required bursting pressure in
heater element may be reduced to one- psig;
half that required for the shell. S = Minimum tensile strength of plate mate-
[29 FR 18995, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32 rial in p.s.i. as prescribed in 179.2007;
FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, and amended by Amdt. t = Minimum thickness of plate in inches
17910, 36 FR 21349, Nov. 6, 1971; Amdt. 17950, after forming.
60 FR 49078, Sept. 21, 1995] (d) If plates are clad with material
having tensile strength properties at
179.2006 Thickness of plates.
least equal to the base plate, the clad-
(a) The wall thickness after forming ding may be considered a part of the
of the tank shell, dome shell, and of 2:1 base plate when determining thickness.
ellipsoidal heads must be not less than If cladding material does not have ten-
specified in 179.2011, nor that cal- sile strength at least equal to the base
culated by the following formula: plate, the base plate alone must meet
the thickness requirements.
Pd (e) For a tank constructed of longitu-
t= dinal sections, the minimum width of
2 SE bottom sheet of the tank must be 60
Where: inches measured on the arc, but in all
EC13NO91.034</MATH>
278
EC13NO91.032</MATH>
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00288 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 179.2007
clad with other approved materials: pansion dome, when used, must be tested in accordance with
Practice A of ASTM Specification A 262 titled, Standard
Practices for Detecting Susceptibility to Intergranular Attack in
Minimum elon- Austenitic Stainless Steels (IBR; see 171.7 of this sub-
Minimum ten- gation in 2 chapter). If the specimen does not pass Practice A, Practice B
sile strength inches (per- or C must be used and the corrosion rates may not exceed
Specifications (p.s.i.) welded cent) weld the following:
condition 1 metal (longitu-
dinal)
Corrosion
Test procedure Material rate i.p.m.
AAR TC 128, Gr. B ........... 81,000 19
ASTM A 516 2 .................... 70,000 20 Practice B ................... Types 304, 304L, 316, 0.0040
1 Minimum
and 316L.
stresses to be used in calculations.
2 This specification is incorporated by reference (IBR, see Practice C ................... Type 304L .................. .0020
171.7 of this subchapter). Type 304L and Type 316L test specimens must be given a
sensitizing treatment prior to testing. (A typical sensitizing
(c) Aluminum alloy plate: Aluminum treatment is 1 hour at 1250 F.)
alloy plate must be suitable for weld- (e) Nickel plate: Nickel plate must
ing and comply with one of the fol- comply with the following specifica-
lowing specifications (IBR, see 171.7 of tion (IBR, see 171.7 of this sub-
this subchapter): chapter):
Minimum Minimum
Minimum ten- elongation in Minimum elongation
sile strength 2 inches tensile in 2 inches
Specifications (p.s.i.) weld- (percent) 0 strength
Specifications (percent)
ed condi- temper weld (psi) weld- weld metal
tion 3 4 metal (longi- ed condi- (longitu-
tudinal) tion 1 dinal)
ASTM B 209, Alloy 5052 1 ..... 25,000 18 ASTM B 162 2 ................................ 40,000 20
ASTM B 209, Alloy 5083 2 ..... 38,000 16
ASTM B 209, Alloy 5086 1 ..... 35,000 14
(f) Manganese-molybdenum steel plate:
ASTM B 209, Alloy 5154 1 ..... 30,000 18
ASTM B 209, Alloy 5254 1 ..... 30,000 18
Manganese-molybdenum steel plate
ASTM B 209, Alloy 5454 1 ..... 31,000 18 must be suitable for fusion welding and
ASTM B 209, Alloy 5652 1 ..... 25,000 18 comply with the following specifica-
1 For fabrication, the parent plate material may be 0, H112,
tion (IBR, see 171.7 of this sub-
or H32 temper, but design calculations must be based on chapter):
minimum tensile strength shown.
2 0 temper only.
Minimum
Minimum
3 Weld filler metal 5556 must not be used. elongation
tensile
4 Maximum stresses to be used in calculations. in 2 inches
strength
Specifications (percent)
(p.s.i.) weld metal
(d) High alloy steel plate: High alloy welded (longitu-
condition 1
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
279
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00289 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
179.2008 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
(g) All parts and items of construc- inch and not more than 112-inch solid
tion in contact with the lading must be pipe plugs having NPT threads.
made of material compatible with (b) When the tank is divided into
plate material and not subject to rapid compartments by constructing each
deterioration by the lading, or be coat- compartment as a separate tank, these
ed or lined with suitable corrosion re- tanks shall be joined together by a cyl-
sistant material. inder made of plate, having a thickness
(h) All external projections that may not less than that required for the tank
be in contact with the lading and all shell and applied to the outside surface
castings, forgings, or fabrications used of tank head flanges. The cylinder shall
for fittings or attachments to tank and fit the straight flange portion of the
expansion dome, when used, in contact compartment tank head tightly. The
with lading must be made of material cylinder shall contact the head flange
to an approved specification. See AAR for a distance of at least two times the
Specifications for Tank Cars, appendix plate thickness, or a minimum of 1
M, M4.05 (IBR, see 171.7 of this sub- inch, whichever is greater. The cyl-
chapter) for approved material speci- inder shall be joined to the head flange
fications for castings for fittings.
by a full fillet weld. Distance from
[Amdt. 17910, 36 FR 21349, Nov. 9, 1971; 36 FR head seam to cylinder shall not be less
21893, Nov. 17, 1971, as amended by Amdt.179 than 112 inches or three times the plate
28, 46 FR 49906, Oct. 8, 1981; Amdt. 17940, 52 thickness, whichever is greater. Voids
FR 13046, Apr. 20, 1987; Amdt. 17952, 61 FR
28680, June 5, 1996; 66 FR 45186, Aug. 28, 2001;
created by the space between heads of
67 FR 51660, Aug. 8, 2002; 68 FR 75761, Dec. 31, tanks joined together to form a com-
2003; 70 FR 34076, June 13, 2005] partment tank shall be provided with a
tapped drain hole at their lowest point
179.2008 Tank heads. and a tapped hole at top of tank. The
(a) All external tank heads must be top hole shall be closed and the bottom
an ellipsoid of revolution in which the hole may be closed with solid pipe
major axis must equal the diameter of plugs not less than 34 inch nor more
the shell and the minor axis must be than 112 inches having NPT threads.
one-half the major axis. [29 FR 18995, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32
(b) Internal compartment tank heads FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, and amended by Amdt.
may be 2:1 ellipsoidal, 3:1 ellipsoidal, or 17910, 36 FR 21350, Nov. 6, 1971; 66 FR 45186,
flanged and dished to thicknesses as Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR 75761, Dec. 31, 2003]
specified in 179.2006. Flanged and
dished heads must have main inside ra- 179.20010 Welding.
dius not exceeding 10 feet, and inside (a) All joints shall be fusion-welded
knuckle radius must not be less than in compliance with the requirements of
334 inches for steel, alloy steel, or nick- AAR Specifications for Tank Cars, ap-
el tanks, and not less than 5 inches for pendix W (IBR, see 171.7 of this sub-
aluminum alloy tanks. chapter). Welding procedures, welders
[Amdt. 17910, 36 FR 21350, Nov. 6, 1971] and fabricators shall be approved.
(b) Welding is not permitted on or to
179.2009 Compartment tanks. ductile iron or malleable iron fittings.
(a) When a tank is divided into com-
[29 FR 18995, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32
partments, by inserting interior heads, FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, and amended by Amdt.
interior heads must be inserted in ac- 17910, 36 FR 21350, Nov. 6, 1971; 68 FR 75761,
cordance with AAR Specifications for Dec. 31, 2003]
Tank Cars, appendix E, E7.00 (IBR, see
171.7 of this subchapter), and must 179.20011 Postweld heat treatment.
comply with the requirements specified
When specified in 179.2011, after
in 179.2011. Voids between compart-
welding is complete, postweld heat
ment heads must be provided with at
treatment must be in compliance with
least one tapped drain hole at their
the requirements of AAR Specifica-
lowest point, and a tapped hole at the
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
280
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00290 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 179.20015
281
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00291 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
179.20016 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
(b) Manway covers shall be designed and enclosed within a housing. Other
to provide a secure closure of the approved devices may be used in lieu of
manway. outage scale or telltale pipe.
(c) Manway covers must be of ap- (e) Bottom of tank shell may be
proved cast, forged, or fabricated met- equipped with a sump or siphon bowl,
als. Malleable iron, if used, must com- or both, welded or pressed into the
ply with ASTM A 47 (IBR, see 171.7 of shell. Such sumps or siphon bowls, if
this subchapter), Grade 35018. Cast iron applied are not limited in size and
manway covers must not be used. must be made of cast, forged, or fab-
(d) All joints between manway covers ricated metal. Each sump or siphon
and their seats shall be made tight bowl must be of good welding quality
against leakage of vapor and liquid by in conjunction with the metal of the
use of gaskets of suitable material. tank shell. When sump or siphon bowl
(e) For other manway cover require- is pressed in the bottom of the tank
ments see 179.2011. shell, the wall thickness of the pressed
section must not be less than that
[29 FR 18995, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32
FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, and amended by Amdt.
specified for the shell. The section of a
17910, 36 FR 21350, Nov. 6, 1971; Amdt. 17937, circular cross section tank to which a
50 FR 11066, Mar. 19, 1985; 68 FR 75762, Dec. 31, sump or siphon bowl is attached need
2003] not comply with the out-of-roundness
requirement specified in appendix W,
179.20016 Gauging devices, top load- W14.06, of the AAR Specifications for
ing and unloading devices, venting Tank Cars. Any portion of a sump or si-
and air inlet devices. phon bowl not forming a part of a cyl-
(a) When installed, these devices inder of revolution must have walls of
shall be of an approved design which such thickness and be so reinforced
will prevent interchange with any that the stresses in the walls caused by
other fixture, and be tightly closed. a given internal pressure are not great-
Unloading pipes shall be securely an- er than the circumferential stress
chored within the tank. Each tank or which would exist under the same in-
compartment may be equipped with ternal pressure in the wall of a tank of
one separate air connection. circular cross section designed in ac-
(b) When the characteristics of the cordance with 179.2006 (a) and (d). In
commodity for which the car is author- no case shall the wall thickness be less
ized are such that these devices must than that specified in 179.2011.
be equipped with valves or fittings to (f) When top loading and discharge
permit the loading and unloading of devices, or venting and air inlet de-
the contents, these devices, including vices are installed with exposed piping
valves, shall be of an approved design, to a removed location, shutoff valves
and be provided with a protective hous- must be applied directly to reinforcing
ing except when plug or ball type pads or nozzles at their communication
valves with operating handles removed through the tank shell, and must be
are used. Provision shall be made for enclosed in a protective housing with
closing pipe connections of valves. provision for a seal. The piping must
(c) A tank may be equipped with a include breakage grooves, and suitable
vacuum relief valve of an approved de- bracing. Relief valves must be applied
sign. Protective housing is not re- to liquid lines for protection in case
quired. lading is trapped. Provision must be
(d) When using a visual gauging de- made to insure closure of the valves
vice on a car with a hinged manway while the car is in transit.
cover, an outage scale visible through (g) Protective housing, when re-
the manway opening shall be provided. quired, must be fabricated of approved
If loading devices are applied to permit material and have cover and sidewalls
tank loading with cover closed, a tell- not less than 0.119 inch in thickness.
tale pipe may be provided. Telltale pipe
[29 FR 18995, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32
shall be capable of determining that re-
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
282
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00292 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 179.20017
283
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00293 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
179.20019 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
body on exterior valves may be steam tank, a V-shaped breakage groove shall
jacketed, in which case the breakage be cut (not cast) in the upper part of
groove or its equivalent must be below the nozzle at a point immediately
the steam chamber but above the bot- below the lowest part of the inside clo-
tom of center sill construction. If the sure seat or plug. In no case may the
outlet nozzle is not a single piece, or if nozzle wall thickness at the root of the
exterior valves are applied, provisions V be more than 14 inch. Where the
shall be made for the equivalent of the nozzle is not a single piece, provisions
breakage groove. On cars without con- shall be made for the equivalent of the
tinuous center sills, the breakage breakage groove. The nozzle must be of
groove or its equivalent must be no a thickness to insure that accidental
more than 15 inches below the tank breakage will occur at or below the
shell. On cars with continuous center V groove or its equivalent. On cars
sills, the breakage groove or its equiva- without continuous center sills, the
lent must be above the bottom of the
breakage groove or its equivalent may
center sill construction.
not be more than 15 inches below the
(8) The flange on the outlet nozzle or
outer shell. On cars with continuous
the valve body of exterior valves must
be of a thickness which will prevent center sills, the breakage groove or its
distortion of the valve seat or valve by equivalent must be above the bottom
any change in contour of the shell re- of the center sill construction.
sulting from expansion of lading, or (4) The closure plug and seat must be
other causes, and which will insure readily accessible or removable for re-
that accidental breakage of the outlet pairs, including grinding.
nozzle will occur at or below the V (5) The closure of the washout nozzle
groove, or its equivalent. must be equipped with a 34-inch solid
(9) The valve must have no wings or screw plug. Plug must be attached by
stem projecting below the V groove at least a 14-inch chain.
or its equivalent. The valve and seat (6) Joints between closures and their
must be readily accessible or remov- seats may be gasketed with suitable
able for repairs, including grinding. material.
(10) The valve operating mechanism
on interior valves must have means for [29 FR 18995, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32
FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, and amended by Amdt.
compensating for variation in the
17910, 36 FR 21351, Nov. 6, 1971; Amdt. 17940,
vertical diameter of the tank produced 52 FR 13047, Apr. 20, 1987; 68 FR 75762, Dec. 31,
by expansion, weight of the liquid con- 2003]
tents, or other causes, and may operate
from the interior of the tank, but in 179.20019 Reinforcements, when
the event the rod is carried through used, and appurtenances not other-
the dome, or tank shell, leakage must wise specified.
be prevented by packing in stuffing box
(a) All attachments to tank and
or other suitable seals and a cap.
dome shall be applied by approved
(b) If indicated in 179.2011, tank
means. Rivets if used shall be caulked
may be equipped with bottom washout
of approved construction. If applied, inside and outside.
bottom washout shall be in accordance (b) Reinforcing pads must be used be-
with the following requirements: tween external brackets and shells if
(1) The extreme projection of the bot- the attachment welds exceed 6 lineal
tom washout equipment may not be inches of 14-inch fillet or equivalent
more than that allowed by appendix E weld per bracket or bracket leg. When
of the AAR Specifications for Tank reinforcing pads are used, they must
Cars. not be less than one-fourth inch in
(2) Bottom washout shall be of cast, thickness, have each corner rounded to
forged or fabricated metal. If welded to a 1 inch minimum radius, and be at-
tank, they shall be of good weldable tached to the tank by continuous fillet
quality in conjunction with metal of welds except for venting provisions.
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
284
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00294 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 179.2011
285
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00295 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8016 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
179.2012 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
Minimum
Bursting Test
DOT Specifica- plate Bottom Bottom References
Insulation pressure pressure
tion 1 thickness outlet washout (179.201 - ***)
(psig) (psig)
(inches)
111A60ALW1 ... Optional .......... 240 12 60 Optional .......... Optional .......... 6(a).
111A60ALW2 ... Optional .......... 240 12 60 No ................... Optional.
111A60W1 ....... Optional .......... 240
7 16 60 Optional .......... Optional .......... 6(a).
111A60W2 ....... Optional .......... 240
7 16 60 No ................... Optional.
111A60W5 ....... Optional .......... 240
7 16 60 No ................... No ................... 3, 6(b).
111A60W6 ....... Optional .......... 240 716 60 Optional .......... Optional .......... 4, 5, 6(a), 6(c).
111A60W7 ....... Optional .......... 240 716 60 No ................... No ................... 4, 5, 6(a).
111A100ALW1 Optional .......... 500 58 100 Optional .......... Optional .......... 6(a).
111A100ALW2 Optional .......... 500 58 100 No ................... Optional.
111A100W1 ..... Optional .......... 500 716 100 Optional .......... Optional .......... 6(a).
111A100W2 ..... Optional .......... 500 716 100 No ................... Optional.
111A100W3 ..... Yes ................. 500 716 100 Optional .......... Optional .......... 6(a).
111A100W4 ..... Yes (see 500 716 100 No ................... No ................... 6(a), 8, 10.
179.20111).
111A100W5 ..... Optional .......... 500
7 16 100 No ................... No ................... 3.
111A100W6 ..... Optional .......... 500
7 16 100 Optional .......... Optional .......... 4, 5, 6(a) and 6(c).
111A100W7 ..... Optional .......... 500
7 16 100 No ................... No ................... 4, 5, 6(c).
1 Tanks marked ALW are constructed from aluminum alloy plate; AN nickel plate; CW, DW, EW, W6, and W7
high alloy steel or manganese-molybdenum steel plate; and those marked BW or W5 must have an interior lining that con-
forms to 179.2013.
[Amdt. 17952, 61 FR 28680, June 5, 1996, as amended by 66 FR 45390, Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR 48571,
Aug. 14, 2003]
under tension when applied except due calked. All projecting edges of plates,
to conformation over rivet heads. Inte- castings and rivet heads on the inside
rior of tank must be free from scale, of the tank must be rounded and free
286
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00296 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 179.2018
from fins and other irregular projec- 7(d), Footnote 2. Tanks and attach-
tions. Castings must be free from po- ments welded directly thereto, fab-
rosity. ricated from ASTM A 240/A 240M Type
(d) All surfaces of attachments or fit- 304L or Type 316L materials are not re-
tings and their closures exposed to the quired to be postweld heat treated.
lading must be covered with at least 18- (b) Tanks and attachments welded di-
inch acid resistant material. Attach- rectly thereto, fabricated from ASTM
ments made of metal not affected by A 240/A 240M Type 304L and Type 316
the lading need not be covered with materials must be tested to dem-
rubber or other acid resistant material. onstrate that they possess the corro-
(e) Hard rubber or polyvinyl chloride sion resistance specified in 179.200
may be used for pressure retaining 7(d), Footnote 2.
parts of safety vents provided the ma- [68 FR 75762, Dec. 31, 2003]
terial is resistant to the corrosive or
solvent action of the lading in the liq- 179.2016 Manways and manway clo-
uid or gas phase and is suitable for the sures.
service temperatures. (a) The manway cover for spec. DOT
(f) Polyvinyl chloride lined tanks. 104W, 111A60ALW1, 111A60W1,
Tank car tanks or each compartment 111A100ALW1, 111A100W1, 111A100W3,
thereof may be lined with elastomeric or 111A100W6 must be designed to make
polyvinyl chloride having a minimum it impossible to remove the cover while
lining thickness of three thirty-seconds the interior of the tank is subjected to
inch. pressure.
(g) Polyurethane lined tanks. Tank (b) The manway cover for spec. DOT
car tanks or each compartment thereof 11A60W5, or 111A100W5 must be made of
may be lined with elastomeric poly- a suitable metal. The top, bottom and
urethane having a minimum lining edge of manway cover must be acid re-
thickness of one-sixteenth inch. sistant material covered as prescribed
in 179.2013. Through-bolt holes must
[Amdt. 17910, 36 FR 21352, Nov. 6, 1971, as
amended at 66 FR 45186, Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR be lined with acid resistant material at
48571, Aug. 14, 2003] least one-eighth inch in thickness.
Cover made of metal not affected by
179.2014 Material. the lading need not be acid resistant
material covered.
All fittings, tubes, and castings and
(c) The manway ring and cover for
all projections and their closures, ex-
specifications DOT-103CW, 103DW,
cept for protective housing, must also
103EW, 111360W7, or 11A100W6 must be
meet the requirements specified in
made of the metal and have the same
ASTM A 262 (IBR, see 171.7 of this sub-
inspection procedures specified in AAR
chapter), except that when preparing
Specifications for Tank Cars, appendix
the specimen for testing the carburized
M, M3.03 (IBR, see 171.7 of this sub-
surface may be finished by grinding or chapter).
machining.
[Amdt. 17910, 36 FR 21353, Nov. 6, 1971; 66 FR
[68 FR 75762, Dec. 31, 2003] 45186, Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR 48571, Aug. 14, 2003;
68 FR 75762, Dec. 31, 2003]
179.2015 Postweld heat treatment
and corrosion resistance. 179.2018 Sampling device and ther-
(a) Tanks and attachments welded di- mometer well.
rectly thereto must be postweld heat (a) Sampling valve and thermometer
treated as a unit at the proper tem- well are not specification require-
perature except as indicated below. ments. When used, they must be of ap-
Tanks and attachments welded directly proved design, made of metal not sub-
thereto fabricated from ASTM A 240/A ject to rapid deterioration by lading,
240M (IBR, see 171.7 of this sub- and must withstand a pressure of 100
chapter) Type 430A, Type 304 and Type psig without leakage. Interior pipes of
316 materials must be postweld heat the sampling valve must be equipped
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
treated as a unit and must be tested to with excess flow valves of an approved
demonstrate that they possess the cor- design. Interior pipe of thermometer
rosion resistance specified in 179.200 well must be closed by an approved
287
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00297 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
179.2019 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
WATER CAPACITY
The wall thickness after the forming
of the tank shell and heads must be, at
000000 Pounds a minimum, 9/16 of an inch AAR TC128
Grade B, normalized steel, in accord-
(b) After July 25, 2012, authorized ance with 179.2007(b).
DOT non-pressure tank cars that com-
ply with this section and are equipped [80 FR 26749, May 8, 2015]
with stainless steel identification
plates may have the water capacity of 179.2025 Tank head puncture resist-
the tank in pounds prescribed in the ance system.
first sentence of paragraph (a) of this The DOT117 specification tank car
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
section stamped plainly and perma- must have a tank head puncture resist-
nently on their identification plate in ance system in conformance with
conformance with the applicable mark- 179.16(c). The full height head shields
288
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00298 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 179.20212
289
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00299 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
179.20213 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
290
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00300 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 179.2203
any unused pressure relief device noz- into compartments, each compartment
zle may not exceed the tank car jacket must be considered a separate con-
by more than six (6) inches. tainer.
291
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00301 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
179.2204 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
(c) The outer shell must be a fusion the outer shell must be not less than
welded tank with formed heads de- seven-sixteenths of an inch.
signed convex outward. (d) See 179.2209 for plate thickness
[Amdt. 1799, 36 FR 21340, Nov. 6, 1971]
requirements for inner container when
divided into compartments.
179.2204 Insulation. [Amdt. 1799, 36 FR 21340, Nov. 6, 1971, as
The annular space between the inner amended at 66 FR 45390, Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR
container and the outer shell must con- 75762, Dec. 31, 2003]
tain an approved insulation material.
179.2207 Materials.
[Amdt. 1799, 36 FR 21340, Nov. 6, 1971]
(a) The plate material used to fab-
179.2206 Thickness of plates. ricate the inner container and nozzles
must meet one of the following speci-
(a) The wall thickness, after forming fications and with the indicated min-
of the inner container shell and 2:1 el- imum tensile strength and elongation
lipsoidal heads must be not less than in the welded condition.
specified in 179.2211, or not less than (b) Carbon steel plate: The maximum
that calculated by the following for- allowable carbon content must be 0.31
mula: percent when the individual specifica-
tion allows carbon content greater
Pd than this amount. The plates may be
t=
clad with other approved materials.
2 SE
Where: Minimum
Minimum
d = Inside diameter in inches; elongation
tensile in 2 inches
E = 0.9 welded joint efficiency; except E = 1.0 strength
Specifications (percent)
(p.s.i.)
for seamless heads; welded weld metal
P = Minimum required bursting pressure in (longitu-
condition 1 dinal)
psig;
S = Minimum tensile strength of plate mate- AAR TC 128, Gr. B ....................... 81,000 19
rial in p.s.i. as prescribed in AAR Speci- ASTM A 516 2, Gr. 70 ................... 70,000 20
fications for Tank Cars, appendix M, 1 Maximum stresses to be used in calculations.
Table M1; 2 This specification is incorporated by reference (IBR, see
after forming.
EC13NO91.036</MATH>
292
EC13NO91.035</MATH>
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00302 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 179.2209
293
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00303 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
179.22010 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
must be not less than 112 inches or (e) A seal must be provided between
three times the plate thickness, which- the inner container manway nozzle and
ever is greater. the opening in the outer shell.
[Amdt. 1799, 36 FR 21341, Nov. 6, 1971] [Amdt. 1799, 36 FR 21341, Nov. 6, 1971]
294
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00304 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 179.22018
bowl must be of good welding quality mentary exterior fittings shall be ap-
in conjunction with the metal of the proved by the AAR Committee on Tank
tank shell. When the sump or siphon Cars.
295
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00305 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
179.22018 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
(2) Each bottom outlet must be pro- or its equivalent. The valve and seat
vided with a liquid tight closure at its must be readily accessible or remov-
lower end. able for repairs, including grinding.
(3) The valve and its operating mech- (b) Inner container may be equipped
anism must be applied to the outside with bottom washout of approved de-
bottom of the inner container. The sign. If applied, bottom washout must
valve operating mechanism must be comply with the following require-
provided with a suitable locking ar- ments:
rangement to insure positive closure
(1) The extreme projection of the bot-
during transportation.
(4) Valve outlet nozzle and valve body tom washout equipment may not be
must be of cast, fabricated or forged more than that allowed by appendix E
metal. If welded to inner container, of the AAR Specifications for Tank
they must be of good weldable quality Cars.
in conjunction with metal of tank. (2) Bottom washout must be of cast,
(5) To provide for the attachment of forged or fabricated metals. If it is
unloading connections, the bottom of welded to the inner container, it must
the main portion of the outlet nozzle or be of good weldable quality in conjunc-
valve body, or some fixed attachment tion with metal of tank.
thereto, must be provided with thread- (3) If washout nozzle extends below
ed cap closure arrangement or bolted the bottom of the outer shell, a V-
flange closure arrangement having shaped breakage groove shall be cut
minimum 1-inch threaded pipe plug. (not cast) in the upper part of the noz-
(6) If outlet nozzle and its closure ex- zle at a point immediately below the
tends below the bottom of the outer
lowest part of the inside closure seat or
shell, a V-shaped breakage groove shall
plug. In no case may the nozzle wall
be cut (not cast) in the upper part of
the outlet nozzle at a point imme- thickness at the root of the V be
diately below the lowest part of the more than 14-inch. Where the nozzle is
valve closest to the tank. In no case not a single piece, provisions shall be
may the nozzle wall thickness at the made for the equivalent of the break-
root of the V be more than 14-inch. age groove. The nozzle must be of a
The outlet nozzle or the valve body thickness to insure that accidental
may be steam jacketed, in which case breakage will occur at or below the
the breakage groove or its equivalent V groove or its equivalent. On cars
must be below the steam chamber but without a continuous center sill, the
above the bottom of the center sill con- breakage groove or its equivalent may
struction. If the outlet nozzle is not a not be more than 15 inches below the
single piece or its exterior valves are outer shell. On cars with continuous
applied, provision shall be made for the center sills, the breakage groove or its
equivalent of the breakage groove. On equivalent must be above the bottom
cars without continuous center sills, of the center sill construction.
the breakage groove or its equivalent
(4) The closure plug and seat must be
may not be more than 15 inches below
readily accessible or removable for re-
the outer shell. On cars with contin-
uous center sills, the breakage groove pairs.
or its equivalent must be above the (5) The closure of the washout nozzle
bottom of the center sill construction. must be equipped with a 34-inch solid
(7) The valve body must be of a thick- screw plug. Plug must be attached by
ness which will prevent distortion of at least a 14-inch chain.
the valve seat or valve by any change (6) Joints between closures and their
in contour of the shell resulting from seats may be gasketed with suitable
expansion of lading, or other causes, material.
and which will insure that accidental
breakage of the outlet nozzle will occur [Amdt. 1799, 36 FR 21342, Nov. 6, 1971, as
at or below the V groove, or its amended by Amdt. 17940, 52 FR 13048, Apr.
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
296
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00306 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 179.221
179.15 before being put into service. quirements applicable to tank car
tanks consisting of an inner con-
[Amdt. 1799, 36 FR 21343, Nov. 6, 1971, as tainer supported within an outer
amended at 62 FR 51561, Oct. 1, 1997] shell.
297
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00307 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
179.2211 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
[Amdt. 17052, 61 FR 28681, June 5, 1996, as amended at 62 FR 51561, Oct. 1, 1997; 66 FR 45390,
Aug. 28, 2001]
298
EC13NO91.037</MATH>
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00308 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 179.30012
299
EC13NO91.038</MATH>
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00309 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
179.30013 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
fittings or attachment to the head in- tures and appurtenances, except as spe-
cluding the housing referred to in cifically provided for, are prohibited.
179.30012(b). Tank ends shall slope or
[Amdt. 17910, 36 FR 21355, Nov. 6, 1971]
curve inward toward the axis so that
the diameter at each end is at least 2 179.30015 Pressure relief devices.
inches less than the maximum diame-
ter. (a) Unless prohibited in part 173 of
this subchapter, tanks shall be
(b) Loading and unloading valves
equipped with one or more relief de-
shall be protected by a detachable pro-
vices of approved type, made of metal
tective housing of approved design not subject to rapid deterioration by
which shall not project beyond the end the lading and screwed directly into
of the tank and shall be securely fas- tank heads or attached to tank heads
tened to the tank head. Pressure relief by other approved methods. The total
devices shall not be covered by the discharge capacity shall be sufficient
housing. to prevent building up pressure in tank
[29 FR 18995, Dec. 29, 1964, as amended at 68 in excess of 82.5 percent of the tank
FR 57634, Oct. 6, 2003] test pressure. When relief devices of
the fusible plug type are used, the re-
179.30013 Venting, loading and un- quired discharge capacity shall be
loading valves. available in each head. See AAR Speci-
(a) Valves shall be of approved type, fications for Tank Cars, appendix A
made of metal not subject to rapid de- (IBR, see 171.7 of this subchapter), for
terioration by lading, and shall with- the formula for calculating discharge
capacity.
stand tank test pressure without leak-
age. The valves shall be screwed di- (b) Threads for openings shall be Na-
tional Gas Taper Threads (NGT) tapped
rectly into or attached by other ap-
to gage, clean cut, even and without
proved methods to one tank head. Pro-
checks.
vision shall be made for closing outlet
(c) Pressure relief devices shall be set
connections of the valves.
for start-to-discharge and rupture discs
(b) Threads for openings must be Na-
shall burst at a pressure not exceeding
tional Gas Taper Threads (NGT) tapped
that specified in 179.301.
to gauge, clean cut, even and without
(d) Fusible plugs shall function at a
checks. Taper threads must comply
temperature not exceeding 175 F. and
with 178.61(h)(3)(i) and (h)(3)(ii).
shall be vapor-tight at a temperature
Threads for the clean-out/inspection
of not less than 130 F.
ports of DOT Specification 110A multi-
unit tank car tanks may be straight [29 FR 18995, Dec. 29, 1964, as amended at 64
threads instead of taper threads. The FR 51920, Sept. 27, 1999; 66 FR 45390, Aug. 28,
straight threads must meet the re- 2001; 68 FR 75763, Dec. 31, 2003]
quirements of 178.61(h)(3)(i) and
179.30016 Tests of tanks.
(h)(3)(iii). Hex plugs may be secured to
threaded boss ports using stainless (a) After postweld heat treatment,
steel safety wire that must not fail tanks shall be subjected to hydrostatic
during its intended use. expansion test in a water jacket, or by
other approved methods. No tank shall
[29 FR 18995, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32 have been subjected previously to in-
FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967. Amended at 77 FR 37986, ternal pressure within 100 pounds of
June 25, 2012] the test pressure. Each tank shall be
tested to the pressure prescribed in
179.30014 Attachments not other-
wise specified. 179.301. Pressure shall be maintained
for 30 seconds and sufficiently longer to
Siphon pipes and their couplings on insure complete expansion of tank.
the inside of the tank head and lugs on Pressure gage shall permit reading to
the outside of the tank head for attach- accuracy of one percent. Expansion
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
ing the valve protective housing must gage shall permit reading of total ex-
be fusion-welded in place prior to pansion to accuracy of one percent. Ex-
postweld heat treatment. All other fix- pansion shall be recorded in cubic cm.
300
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00310 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 179.30020
(1) No leaks shall appear and perma- (2) Material and cladding material if
nent volumetric expansion shall not any (immediately below the specifica-
exceed 10 percent of total volumetric tion number).
expansion at test pressure. (3) Owners or builders identifying
(2) [Reserved] symbol and serial number (imme-
(b) After all fittings have been in- diately below the material identifica-
stalled, each tank shall be subjected to tion). The symbol shall be registered
interior air pressure test of at least 100 with the Bureau of Explosives, duplica-
psig under conditions favorable to de- tions are not authorized.
tection of any leakage. No leaks shall (4) Inspectors official mark (imme-
appear. diately below the owners or builders
(c) Repairs of leaks detected in man- symbol).
ufacture or in foregoing tests shall be (5) Date of original tank test (month
made by the same process as employed and year, such as 164 for January
in manufacture of tank. Caulking, sol- 1964). This should be so placed that
dering, or similar repairing is prohib-
dates of subsequent tests may easily be
ited.
added thereto.
[29 FR 18995, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32 (6) Water capacity0000 pounds.
FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, and amended by Amdt. (b) A copy of the above stamping in
17910, 36 FR 21355, Nov. 6, 1971; 66 FR 45390,
letters and figures of the prescribed
Aug. 28, 2001]
size stamped on a brass plate secured
179.30017 Tests of pressure relief de- to one of the tank heads is authorized.
vices.
179.30019 Inspection.
(a) Each valve shall be tested by air
or gas before being put into service. (a) Tank shall be inspected within
The valve shall open and be vapor-tight the United States and Canada by a
at the pressure prescribed in 179.301. competent and impartial inspector as
(b) Rupture disks of non-reclosing approved by the Associate Adminis-
pressure relief devices must be tested trator of Safety, FRA. For tanks made
and qualified as prescribed in appendix outside the United States or Canada,
A, Paragraph 5, of the AAR Manual of the specified inspection shall be made
Standards and Recommended Prac- within the United States.
tices, Section CPart III, AAR Speci- (b) The inspector shall carefully in-
fications for Tank Cars (IBR, see 171.7 spect all plates from which tanks are
of this subchapter). to be made and secure records certi-
(c) For pressure relief devices of the fying that plates comply with the spec-
fusible plug type, a sample of the plug ification. Plates which do not comply
used shall function at the temperatures with 179.3007 shall be rejected.
prescribed in 179.30015. (c) The inspector shall make such in-
(d) The start-to-discharge and vapor- spection as may be necessary to see
tight pressures shall not be affected by that all the requirements of this speci-
any auxiliary closure or other com- fication, including markings, are fully
bination. complied with; shall see that the fin-
[29 FR 18995, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32 ished tanks are properly stress relieved
FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, and amended by Amdt. and tested.
17910, 36 FR 21355, Nov. 6, 1971; 66 FR 45390, (d) The inspector shall stamp his offi-
Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR 48572, Aug. 14, 2003; 68 FR cial mark on each accepted tank as re-
75763, Dec. 31, 2003]
quired in 179.30018, and render the re-
179.30018 Stamping. port required in 179.30020.
(a) To certify that the tank complies [29 FR 18995, Dec. 29, 1964, as amended at 72
with all specification requirements, FR 55696, Oct. 1, 2007]
each tank shall be plainly and perma-
nently stamped in letters and figures 38 179.30020 Reports.
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
inch high into the metal of valve end (a) Before a tank is placed in service,
chime as follows: the inspector shall furnish to the build-
(1) DOT Specification number. er, tank owner, Bureau of Explosives
301
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00311 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
179.301 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
and the Secretary, Mechanical Divi- (b) For builders Certificate of Con-
sion, Association of American Rail- struction, see 179.5 (b), (c), and (d).
roads, a report in approved form certi-
[29 FR 18995, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32
fying that the tank and its equipment
FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, and amended by Amdt.
comply with all the requirements of 17910, 36 FR 21355, Nov. 5, 1971]
this specification.
(b) [Reserved]
[29 FR 18995, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, and amended by Amdt.
17910, 36 FR 21355, Nov. 6, 1971; Amdt. 17940, 52 FR 13049, Apr. 20, 1987; 65 FR 58632, Sept. 29,
2000; 66 FR 45390, Aug. 28, 2001]
tially concentric within an outer jack- (1) Standard Heat Transfer Rate
et of circular cross section, with the (SHTR), expressed in Btu/day/lb of
out of roundness of both the inner tank water capacity, means the rate of heat
302
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00312 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 179.4005
transfer used for determining the satis- of this subchapter prior to performing
factory performance of the insulation the NER test; and
system of a cryogenic tank car tank in (2) Have a CHTR equal to or less than
cryogenic liquid service (see 179.4011 the SHTR specified in 179.4011 table
table). for a DOT-113A60W tank car.
(2) Test cryogenic liquid means the (c) DOT-113C120W tank cars must
cryogenic liquid, which may be dif- (1) Be filled with ethylene, cryogenic
ferent from the lading intended to be liquid to the maximum permitted fill
shipped in the tank, being used during density specified in 173.319(d)(2) table
the performance tests of the insulation of this subchapter prior to performing
system. the NER test, or be filled with nitro-
(3) Normal evaporation rate (NER), ex- gen, cryogenic liquid to 90 percent of
pressed in lbs. (of the cryogenic liquid)/ the volumetric capacity of the inner
day, means the rate of evaporation, de- tank prior to performing the NER test;
termined by test of a test cryogenic and
liquid in a tank maintained at a pres- (2) Have a CHTR equal to or less than
sure of approximately one atmosphere, 75 percent of the SHTR specified in
absolute. This determination of the 179.4011 table for a DOT-113C120W
NER is the NER test. tank car.
(4) Stabilization period means the (d) Insulating materials must be ap-
elapsed time after a tank car tank is proved.
filled with the test cryogenic liquid (e) If the insulation consists of a pow-
until the NER has stabilized, or 24 der having a tendency to settle, the en-
hours has passed, whichever is greater. tire top of the cylindrical portion of
(5) Calculated heat transfer rate. The the inner tank must be insulated with
calculated heat transfer rate (CHTR) is a layer of glass fiber insulation at least
determined by the use of test data ob- one-inch nominal thickness, or equiva-
tained during the NER test in the for- lent, suitably held in position and cov-
mula: ering an area extending 25 degrees to
each side of the top center line of the
q = [N(D h)(90-tl)] / [V(8.32828)(ts-tf)] inner tank.
Where: (f) The outer jacket must be provided
q = CHTR, in Btu/day/lb., of water capacity; with fittings to permit effective evacu-
N = NER, determined by NER test, in lbs./ ation of the annular space between the
day; outer jacket and the inner tank.
Dh = latent heat of vaporization of the test (g) A device to measure the absolute
cryogenic liquid at the NER test pressure pressure in the annular space must be
of approximately one atmosphere, abso- provided. The device must be portable
lute, in Btu/lb.; with an easily accessible connection or
90 = ambient temperature at 90 F.;
permanently positioned where it is
V = gross water volume at 60 F. of the inner
tank, in gallons; readily visible to the operator.
tl = equilibrium temperature of intended lad- [Amdt. 17932, 48 FR 27708, June 16, 1983, as
ing at maximum shipping pressure, in amended at 49 FR 24318, June 12, 1984; 66 FR
F.; 45186, Aug. 28, 2001]
8.32828 = constant for converting gallons of
water at 60 F. to lbs. of water at 60 F., 179.4005 Materials.
in lbs./gallon;
ts = average temperature of outer jacket, de- (a) Stainless steel of ASTM A 240/A
termined by averaging jacket tempera- 240M (IBR, see 171.7 of this sub-
tures at various locations on the jacket chapter), Type 304 or 304L must be used
at regular intervals during the NER test, for the inner tank and its appur-
in F.; tenances, as specified in AAR Speci-
tf = equilibrium temperature of the test fications for Tank Cars, appendix M
cryogenic liquid at the NER test pressure (IBR, see 171.7 of this subchapter), and
of approximately, one atmosphere, abso-
must be
lute, in F.
(1) In the annealed condition prior to
(b) DOT-113A60W tank cars must fabrication, forming and fusion weld-
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
303
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00313 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
179.4006 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
(3) Compatible with the lading. (2) An inside knuckle radius of not
(b) Any steel casting, steel forging, less than 6 percent of the outside di-
steel structural shape or carbon steel ameter of the straight flange; and
plate used to fabricate the outer jacket (3) An inside knuckle radius of at
or heads must be as specified in AAR least three times the head thickness.
Specifications for Tank Cars, appendix
M. 179.4008 Thickness of plates.
(c) Impact tests must be (a) The minimum wall thickness,
(1) Conducted in accordance with after forming, of the inner shell and
AAR Specifications for Tank Cars, ap- any 2:1 ellipsoidal head for the inner
pendix W, W9.01; tank must be that specified in 179.401
(2) Performed on longitudinal speci- 1, or that calculated by the following
mens of the material; formula, whichever is greater:
(3) Conducted at the tank design t = Pd / 2SE
service temperature or colder; and Where:
(4) Performed on test plate welds and t = minimum thickness of plate, after form-
materials used for inner tanks and ap- ing, in inches;
purtenances and which will be sub- P = minimum required bursting pressure in
jected to cryogenic temperatures. psig;
(d) Impact test values must be equal d = inside diameter, in inches;
to or greater than those specified in S = minimum tensile strength of the plate
material, as prescribed in AAR Specifica-
AAR Specifications for Tank Cars, ap- tions for Tank Cars, appendix M, Table
pendix W. The report of impact tests M1 (IBR, see 171.7 of this subchapter), in
must include the test values and lat- psi;
eral expansion data. E = 0.9, a factor representing the efficiency
of welded joints, except that for seamless
[Amdt. 17932, 48 FR 27708, June 16, 1983, as heads, E = 1.0.
amended at 67 FR 51660, Aug. 8, 2002; 68 FR
75763, Dec. 31, 2003] (b) The minimum wall thickness,
after forming, of any 3:1 ellipsoidal
179.4006 Bursting and buckling head for the inner tank must be that
pressure. specified in 179.4011, or that cal-
(a) [Reserved] culated by the following formula,
(b) The outer jacket of the required whichever is greater:
evacuated insulation system must be t = 1.83 Pd / 2SE
designed in accordance with 179.400
Where:
8(d) and in addition must comply with
the design loads specified in Section 6.2 t = minimum thickness of plate, after form-
ing, in inches;
of the AAR Specifications for Tank P = minimum required bursting pressure in
Cars (IBR, see 171.7 of this sub- psig;
chapter). The designs and calculations d = inside diameter, in inches;
must provide for the loadings trans- S = minimum tensile strength of the plate
ferred to the outer jacket through the material, as prescribed in AAR Specifica-
support system. tions for Tank Cars, Appendix M, Table
M1, in psi;
[Amdt. 17932, 48 FR 27708, June 16, 1983, as E = 0.9, a factor representing the efficiency
amended by Amdt. 17951, 61 FR 18934, Apr. of welded joints, except that for seamless
29, 1996; 65 FR 58632, Sept. 29, 2000; 68 FR heads, E = 1.0.
75763, Dec. 31, 2003]
(c) The minimum wall thickness,
179.4007 Tank heads. after forming, of a flanged and dished
head for the inner tank must be that
(a) Tank heads of the inner tank and specified in 179.4011, or that cal-
outer jacket must be flanged and culated by the following formula,
dished, or ellipsoidal. whichever is greater:
(b) Flanged and dished heads must
have t = [PL(3 + (L/r))] / (8SE)
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
304
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00314 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 179.4009
P = minimum required bursting pressure in (b) A portion of the outer jacket may
psig; be included when calculating the mo-
L = main inside radius of dished head, in ment of inertia of the ring. The effec-
inches;
r = inside knuckle radius, in inches;
tive width of jacket plate on each side
S = minimum tensile strength of plate mate- of the attachment of the stiffening ring
rial, as prescribed in AAR Specifications is given by the following formula:
for Tank Cars, appendix M, table M1, in W = 0.78(Rt)0.5
psi;
E = 0.9, a factor representing the efficiency Where:
of welded joints, except that for seamless W = width of jacket effective on each side of
heads, E = 1.0. the stiffening ring, in inches;
(d) The minimum wall thickness, R = outside radius of the outer jacket, in
inches;
after forming, of the outer jacket shell t = plate thickness of the outer jacket, after
may not be less than 716 inch. The min- forming, in inches.
imum wall thickness, after forming, of
the outer jacket heads may not be less (c) Where a stiffening ring is used
than 12 inch and they must be made that consists of a closed section having
from steel specified in 179.16(c). The two webs attached to the outer jacket,
annular space is to be evacuated, and the jacket plate between the webs may
the cylindrical portion of the outer be included up to the limit of twice the
jacket between heads, or between stiff- value of W, as defined in paragraph
ening rings if used, must be designed to (b) of this section. The outer flange of
withstand an external pressure of 37.5 the closed section, if not a steel struc-
psig (critical collapsing pressure), as tural shape, is subject to the same lim-
determined by the following formula: itations with W based on the R
and t values of the flange. Where two
Pc = [2.6E(t/D)2.5] / [(L/D) 0.45(t/D)0.5] separate members such as two angles,
Where: are located less than 2W apart they
Pc = Critical collapsing pressure (37.5 psig may be treated as a single stiffening
minimum) in psig; ring member. (The maximum length of
E = modulus of elasticity of jacket material, plate which may be considered effec-
in psi; tive is 4W.) The closed section between
t = minimum thickness of jacket material, an external ring and the outer jacket
after forming, in inches; must be provided with a drain opening.
D = outside diameter of jacket, in inches;
(d) The stiffening ring must have a
L = distance between stiffening ring centers
in inches. (The heads may be considered moment of inertia large enough to sup-
as stiffening rings located 13 of the head port the critical collapsing pressure, as
depth from the head tangent line.) determined by either of the following
formulas:
[Amdt. 17932, 48 FR 27708, June 16, 1983; 49
FR 42736, Oct. 24, 1984; 64 FR 51920, Sept. 27, I = [0.035D3 LPc] / E,
1999, as amended at 66 FR 45390, Aug. 28, 2001;
68 FR 75763, Dec. 31, 2003] or
I = [0.046D3 LPc] / E
179.4009 Stiffening rings.
(a) If stiffening rings are used in de- Where:
signing the cylindrical portion of the I = required moment of inertia of stiffening
outer jacket for external pressure, they ring about the centroidal axis parallel to
the vessel axis, in inches to the fourth
must be attached to the jacket by power;
means of fillet welds. Outside stiff- I = required moment of inertia of combined
ening ring attachment welds must be section of stiffening ring and effective
continuous on each side of the ring. In- width of jacket plate about the cen-
side stiffening ring attachment welds troidal axis parallel to the vessel axis, in
may be intermittent welds on each side inches to the fourth power;
of the ring with the total length of D = outside diameter of the outer jacket, in
inches;
weld on each side not less than one-
L = one-half of the distance from the center-
third of the circumference of the tank.
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
305
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00315 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
179.40010 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
stiffening ring. Both distances are meas- (d) Each welding procedure, welder,
ured parallel to the axis of the vessel, in and fabricator must be approved.
inches. (A line of support is:
(1) A stiffening ring which meets the re- [Amdt. 17932, 48 FR 27708, June 16, 1983, as
quirements of this paragraph, or amended at 68 FR 75763, Dec. 31, 2003]
(2) A circumferential line of a head at
one-third the depth of the head from 179.40012 Postweld heat treatment.
the tangent line); (a) Postweld heat treatment of the
Pc = critical collapsing pressure (37.5 psig inner tank is not required.
minimum) in psig; (b) The cylindrical portion of the
E = modulus of elasticity of stiffening ring outer jacket, with the exception of the
material, in psi. circumferential closing seams, must be
(e) Where loads are applied to the postweld heat treated as prescribed in
outer jacket or to stiffening rings from AAR Specifications for Tank Cars, ap-
the system used to support the inner pendix W (IBR, see 171.7 of this sub-
tank within the outer jacket, addi- chapter). Any item to be welded to this
tional stiffening rings, or an increased portion of the outer jacket must be at-
moment of inertia of the stiffening tached before postweld heat treatment.
rings designed for the external pres- Welds securing the following need not
sure, must be provided to carry the be postweld heat treated when it is not
support loads. practical due to final assembly proce-
dures:
[Amdt. 17932, 48 FR 27708, June 16, 1983, as (1) the inner tank support system to
amended at 66 FR 45391, Aug. 28, 2001] the outer jacket,
(2) connections at piping penetra-
179.40010 Sump or siphon bowl.
tions,
A sump or siphon bowl may be in the (3) closures for access openings, and
bottom of the inner tank shell if (4) circumferential closing joints of
(a) It is formed directly into the head to shell joints.
inner tank shell, or is formed and weld- (c) When cold formed heads are used
ed to the inner tank shell and is of on the outer jacket they must be heat
weldable quality metal that is compat- treated before welding to the jacket
ible with the inner tank shell; shell if postweld heat treatment is not
(b) The stress in any orientation practical due to assembly procedures.
under any condition does not exceed [Amdt. 17932, 48 FR 27708, June 16, 1983, as
the circumferential stress in the inner amended at 68 FR 75763, Dec. 31, 2003]
tank shell; and
(c) The wall thickness is not less 179.40013 Support system for inner
than that specified in 179.4011. tank.
(a) The inner tank must be supported
179.40011 Welding.
within the outer jacket by a support
(a) Except for closure of openings and system of approved design. The system
a maximum of two circumferential and its areas of attachment to the
closing joints in the cylindrical portion outer jacket must have adequate
of the outer jacket, each joint of an strength and ductility at operating
inner tank and the outer jacket must temperatures to support the inner tank
be a fusion double welded butt joint. when filled with the lading to any level
(b) The closure for openings and the incident to transportation.
circumferential closing joints in the (b) The support system must be de-
cylindrical portion of the outer jacket, signed to support, without yielding,
including head to shell joints, may be a impact loads producing accelerations
single welded butt joint using a back- of the following magnitudes and direc-
ing strip on the inside of the joint. tions when the inner tank is fully load-
(c) Each joint must be welded in ac- ed and the car is equipped with a con-
cordance with the requirements of ventional draft gear:
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
306
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00316 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 179.40017
307
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00317 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
179.40018 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
the vapor space of the inner tank to fa- in suitable protective housings. A liq-
cilitate unloading the liquid lading uid level gage and a vapor phase pres-
must be approved. sure gage must be provided as follows:
(1) Liquid level gage. (i) A gage of ap-
[Amdt. 17932, 48 FR 27708, June 16, 1983, as
amended at 66 FR 45391, Aug. 28, 2001] proved design to indicate the quantity
of liquefied lading within the inner
179.40018 Test of inner tank. tank, mounted where it will be readily
visible to an operator during transfer
(a) After all items to be welded to the
operations or storage, or a portable
inner tank have been welded in place,
gage with a readily accessible connec-
the inner tank must be pressure tested
tion, or
at the test pressure prescribed in (ii) A fixed length dip tube, with a
179.4011. The temperature of the pres-
manually operated shut-off valve lo-
surizing medium may not exceed 38 C
cated as close as practicable to the
(100 F) during the test. The inner tank
outer jacket. The dip tube must indi-
must hold the prescribed pressure for a
cate the maximum liquid level for the
period of not less than ten minutes
allowable filling density. The inner end
without leakage or distortion. In a
of the dip tube must be located on the
pneumatic test, due regard for the pro-
longitudinal centerline of the inner
tection of all personnel should be taken
tank and within four feet of the trans-
because of the potential hazard in-
verse centerline of the inner tank.
volved. After a hydrostatic test the (2) Vapor phase pressure gage. A vapor
container and piping must be emptied phase pressure gage of approved design,
of all water and purged of all water with a manually operated shut-off
vapor. valve located as close as practicable to
(b) Caulking of welded joints to stop the outer jacket. The gage must indi-
leaks developed during the test is pro- cate the vapor pressure within the
hibited. Repairs to welded joints must inner tank and must be mounted where
be made as prescribed in AAR Speci- it will be readily visible to an operator.
fications for Tank Cars, appendix W An additional fitting for use of a test
(IBR, see 171.7 of this subchapter). gage must be provided.
[Amdt. 17932, 48 FR 27708, June 16, 1983, as
amended at 68 FR 75763, Dec. 31, 2003; 73 FR 179.40020 Pressure relief devices.
57008, Oct. 1, 2008] (a) The tank must be provided with
pressure relief devices for the protec-
179.40019 Valves and gages.
tion of the tank assembly and piping
(a) Valves. Manually operated shut- system. The discharge from these de-
off valves and control valves must be vices must be directed away from oper-
provided wherever needed for control of ating personnel, principal load bearing
vapor phase pressure, vapor phase vent- members of the outer jacket, car struc-
ing, liquid transfer and liquid flow ture, trucks and safety appliances.
rates. All valves must be made from Vent or weep holes in pressure relief
approved materials compatible with devices are prohibited. All main pres-
the lading and having satisfactory sure relief devices must discharge to
properties at the lading temperature. the outside of the protective housings
(1) Liquid control valves must be of in which they are located, except that
extended stem design. this requirement does not apply to
(2) Packing, if used, must be satisfac- pressure relief valves installed to pro-
tory for use in contact with the lading tect isolated sections of lines between
and of approved materials that will ef- the final valve and end closure.
fectively seal the valve stem without (b) Materials. Materials used in pres-
causing difficulty of operation. sure relief devices must be suitable for
(3) Each control valve and shut-off use at the temperature of the lading
valve must be readily operable. These and otherwise compatible with the lad-
valves must be mounted so that their ing in both the liquid and vapor phases.
operation will not transmit excessive (c) Inner tank. Pressure relief devices
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
forces to the piping system. for the inner tank must be attached to
(b) Gages. Gages, except portable vapor phase piping and mounted so as
units, must be securely mounted with- to remain at ambient temperature
308
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00318 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 179.40020
prior to operation. The inner tank be at least equal to the combined out-
must be equipped with one or more let areas of the pressure relief devices.
pressure relief valves and one or more (iii) Duplicate pressure relief devices
safety vents (except as noted in para- may be used when an approved 3-way
graph (c)(3)(iv) of this section), and in- selector valve is installed to provide
stalled without an intervening shut-off for relief through either duplicate pres-
valve (except as noted in paragraph sure relief device. The 3-way valve
(c)(3)(iii) of this section). Additional re- must be included in the mounting pre-
quirements are as follows: scribed by AAR Specifications for Tank
(1) Safety vent. The safety vent shall Cars, appendix A, A6.02(g), when con-
function at the pressure specified in ducting the flow capacity test on the
179.4011. The safety vent must be flow safety vent prescribed by AAR Speci-
rated in accordance with the applicable fications for Tank Cars, appendix A,
provisions of AAR Specifications for A6.01. Flow capacity tests must be per-
Tank Cars, appendix A (IBR, see 171.7 formed with the 3-way valve at both of
of this subchapter), and provide suffi- the extreme positions as well as at the
cient capacity to meet the require- mid-position and the flow capacity
ments of AAR Specifications for Tank must be in accordance with AAR Speci-
Cars, appendix A, A8.07(a). fications for Tank Cars, appendix A,
(2) Pressure relief valve. The pressure A8.07(a).
relief valve must: (iv) An alternate pressure relief
(i) be set to start-to-discharge at the valve, set as required in 179.4011, may
pressure specified in 179.4011, and be used in lieu of the safety vent, pro-
(ii) meet the requirements of AAR vided it meets the flow capacity pre-
Specifications for Tank Cars, appendix scribed in AAR Specifications for Tank
A, A8.07(b). Cars, appendix A at a flow rating pres-
(3) Installation of safety vent and pres- sure of 110 percent of its start-to-dis-
sure relief valve(i) Inlet piping. (A) The charge pressure. Installation must
opening through all piping and fittings (A) Prevent moisture accumulation
between the inner tank and its pres- at the seat by providing drainage away
sure relief devices must have a cross- from that area,
sectional area at least equal to that of (B) Permit periodic drainage of the
the pressure relief device inlet, and the vent piping, and
flow characteristics of this upstream (C) Prevent accumulation of foreign
system must be such that the pressure material in the vent system.
drop will not adversely affect the re- (4) Evaporation control. The routine
lieving capacity or the proper oper- release of vaporized lading may be con-
ation of the pressure relief device. trolled with a pressure controlling and
(B) When the required relief capacity mixing device, except that a pressure
is met by the use of multiple pressure controlling and mixing device is re-
relief device placed on one connection, quired on each DOT-113A60W car. Any
the inlet internal cross-sectional area pressure controlling and mixing device
of this connection must be sufficient to must
provide the required flow capacity for (i) Be set to start-to-discharge at a
the proper operation of the pressure re- pressure not greater than that speci-
lief device system. fied in 179.4011;
(ii) Outlet piping. (A) The opening (ii) Have sufficient capacity to limit
through the discharge lines must have the pressure within the inner tank to
a cross-sectional area at least equal to that pressure specified in 179.4011,
that of the pressure relief device outlet when the discharge is equal to twice
and may not reduce the relieving ca- the normal venting rate during trans-
pacity below that required to properly portation, with normal vacuum and the
protect the inner tank. outer shell at 130 F; and
(B) When the required relieving ca- (iii) Prevent the discharge of a gas
pacity is met by use of multiple pres- mixture exceeding 50% of the lower
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
309
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00319 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
179.40021 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
(5) Safety interlock. If a safety inter- ation, inspection and maintenance and
lock is provided for the purpose of al- so that vapor concentrations cannot
lowing transfer of lading at a pressure build up to a dangerous level inside the
higher than the pressure control valve housing in the event of valve leakage
setting but less than the pressure relief or pressure relief valve operation. All
valve setting, the design must be such equipment within the protective hous-
that the safety interlock will not affect ing must be operable by personnel
the discharge path of the pressure re- wearing heavy gloves and must incor-
lief value or safety vent at any time. porate provisions for locks or seals. A
The safety interlock must automati- protective housing and its cover must
cally provide an unrestricted discharge be constructed of metal not less than
path for the pressure control device at 0.119 inch thick.
all times when the tank car is in trans-
port service. 179.40023 Operating instructions.
(d) Outer jacket. The outer jacket All valves and gages must be clearly
must be provided with a suitable sys- identified with corrosion-resistant
tem to prevent buildup of annular nameplates. A plate of corrosion-resist-
space pressure in excess of 16 psig or ant material bearing precautionary in-
the external pressure for which the structions for the safe operation of the
inner tank was designed, whichever is equipment during storage and transfer
less. The total relief area provided by operations must be securely mounted
the system must be a minimum of 25 so as to be readily visible to an oper-
square inches, and means must be pro- ator. The instruction plate must be
vided to prevent clogging of any sys- mounted in each housing containing
tem opening, as well as to ensure ade- operating equipment and controls for
quate communication to all areas of product handling. These instructions
the insulation space. If a safety vent is must include a diagram of the tank and
a part of the system, it must be de- its piping system with the various
signed to prevent distortion of the rup- gages, control valves and pressure re-
ture disc when the annular space is lief devices clearly identified and lo-
evacuated. cated.
(e) Piping system. Where a piping cir-
cuit can be isolated by closing a valve, 179.40024 Stamping.
means for pressure relief must be pro-
vided. (a) A tank that complies with all
specification requirements must have
[Amdt. 17932, 48 FR 27708, June 16, 1983, as the following information plainly and
amended at 66 FR 45391, Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR
permanently stamped into the metal
75763, Dec. 31, 2003]
near the center of the head of the outer
179.40021 Test of pressure relief jacket at the B end of the car, in let-
valves. ters and figures at least 38-inch high, in
Each valve must be tested with air or the following order:
gas for compliance with 179.4011 be- Example of re-
fore being put into service. quired stamping
310
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00320 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 179.5003
311
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00321 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
179.5004 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
are necked-down and, after necking- U = Tensile strength of that specimen which
down, the ends shall be machined to shows the lower tensile strength of the
size on the ends and outside diameter. two specimens taken from the tank and
Machining not necessary on inside or tested as prescribed in 179.5007(b).
3 = Factor of safety.
outside of seamless steel tubing, but
required on ends after necking-down. (D2 d2/(D2 + d2) = The smaller value ob-
(b) For tanks made in foreign coun- tained for this factor by the operations
tries, chemical analysis of material specified in 179.5004(c).
and all tests as specified must be car- (c) Measure at one end, in a plane
ried out within the limits of the United perpendicular to the longitudinal axis
States under supervision of a com- of the tank and at least 18 inches from
petent and disinterested inspector; in that end before necking-down:
addition to which, provisions in
179.50018 (b) and (c) shall be carried d = Maximum inside diameter (inches) for
out at the point of manufacture by a the location under consideration; to be
recognized inspection bureau with prin- determined by direct measurement to an
cipal office in the United States. accuracy of 0.05 inch.
t = Minimum thickness of wall for the loca-
(c) The term marked end and
tion under consideration; to be deter-
marked test pressure used through- mined by direct measurement to an accu-
out this specification are defined as racy of 0.001 inch.
follows: Take D = d + 2t.
(1) Marked end is that end of the Calculate the value of (D2d2)/(D2 + d2)
tank on which marks prescribed in
179.50017 are stamped. (1) Make similar measurements and
(2) Marked test pressure is that calculation for a corresponding loca-
pressure in psig which is indicated by tion at the other end of the tank.
the figures substituted for the **** in (2) Use the smaller result obtained,
the marking DOT-107A **** stamped on from the foregoing, in making calcula-
the marked end of tank. tions prescribed in paragraph (b) of this
(d) The gas pressure at 130 F in the section.
tank shall not exceed 710 of the marked [29 FR 18995, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32
test pressure of the tank. FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, and amended by Amdt.
[Amdt. 17932, 48 FR 27708, June 16, 1983, as 17931, 47 FR 43067, Sept. 30, 1982; 66 FR 45391,
amended at 66 FR 45186, 45391, Aug. 28, 2001] Aug. 28, 2001]
312
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00322 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 179.5008
Designation Class I Class II Class III each end of each necked-down tank.
(percent) (percent) (percent) These test specimen ring sections or
Sum of manganese and prolongations shall be heat treated,
carbon not over .......... 2.10 2.10 ................ with the necked-down tank which they
Note 1:Alternate steel containing other alloying elements represent. The width of the test speci-
may be used if approved. men ring section must be at least its
(1) For instructions as to the obtain- wall thickness. Only when diameters
ing and checking of chemical analysis, and wall thickness will not permit re-
see 179.50018(b)(3). moval of 0.505 by 2-inch tensile test
(2) [Reserved] bar, laid in the transverse direction,
may test bar cut in the longitudinal di-
179.5006 Heat treatment. rection be substituted. When the thick-
(a) Each necked-down tank shall be ness will not permit obtaining a 0.505
uniformly heat treated. Heat treat- specimen, then the largest diameter
ment shall consist of annealing or nor- specimen obtainable in the longitu-
malizing and tempering for Class I, dinal direction shall be used. Speci-
Class II and Class III steel or oil mens shall have bright surface and a
quenching and tempering for Class III reduced section. When 0.505 specimen is
steel. Tempering temperatures shall not used the gauge length shall be a
not be less than 1000 F. Heat treat- ratio of 4 to 1 length to diameter.
ment of alternate steels shall be ap- (b) Elastic limit as determined by ex-
proved. All scale shall be removed from tensometer, shall not exceed 70 percent
outside of tank to an extent sufficient of tensile strength for class I steel or 85
to allow proper inspection. percent of tensile strength for class II
(b) To check uniformity of heat and class III steel. Determination shall
treatment, Brinnel hardness tests shall be made at cross head speed of not
be made at 18 inch intervals on the en- more than 0.125 inch per minute with
tire longitudinal axis. The hardness an extensometer reading to 0.0002 inch.
shall not vary more than 35 points in The extensometer shall be read at in-
the length of the tank. No hardness crements of stress not exceeding 5,000
tests need be taken within 12 inches psi. The stress at which the strain first
from point of head to shell tangency. exceeds
(c) A magnetic particle inspection
shall be performed after heat treat- stress (psi) /30,000,000 (psi) + 0.005 (inches per
ment on all tanks subjected to a inch)
quench and temper treatment to detect
the presence of quenching cracks. shall be recorded as the elastic limit.
Cracks shall be removed to sound (1) Elongation shall be at least 18 per-
metal by grinding and the surface ex- cent and reduction of area at least 35
posed shall be blended smoothly into percent.
the surrounding area. A wall thickness NOTE 1: Upon approval, the ratio of elastic
check shall then be made of the af- limit to ultimate strength may be raised to
fected area by ultrasonic equipment or permit use of special alloy steels of definite
other suitable means acceptable to the composition that will give equal or better
inspector and if the remaining wall physical properties than steels herein speci-
thickness is less than the minimum re- fied.
corded thickness as determined by (2) [Reserved]
179.5004(b) it shall be used for making
the calculation prescribed in paragraph [Amdt. 1798, 36 FR 18470, Sept. 15, 1971, as
(b) of this section. amended at 66 FR 45391, Aug. 28, 2001]
section cut from each end of each tank. Covers shall be of a thickness
forged or drawn tube before necking- sufficient to meet test requirements of
down, or one from each prolongation at 179.50012 and to compensate for the
313
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00323 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
179.50010 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
or more pressure relief devices of ap- nent volumetric expansion shall not
proved type and discharge area, mount- exceed 10 percent of the total volu-
ed on the cover or threaded into the metric expansion at test pressure.
314
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00324 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 179.50018
315
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00325 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
179.50018 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
this section) to builder, to company or each location was calculated and recorded;
person for whose use tanks are being maximum fiber stress in wall at location
made, to builder of car structure on showing larger value for
which tanks are to be mounted, to the (D2 + d2)/(D2d2)
Bureau of Explosives, and to the Sec- was calculated for 710 the marked test pres-
retary, Mechanical Division, Associa- sure and recorded. Calculations were made
tion of American Railroads. by the formula:
(c) Inspectors report required herein S=[0.7P(D2d2)/(D2 + d2)]
shall be in the following form: Hydrostatic tests, tensile test of material,
and other tests as prescribed in this speci-
(Place) lllllllllllllll
fication, were made in the presence of the in-
(Date) llllllllllllllll
spector, and all material and tanks accepted
STEEL TANKS were found to be in compliance with the re-
quirements of this specification. Records
It is hereby certified that drawings were thereof are attached hereto.
submitted for these tanks under AAR Appli- I hereby certify that all of these tanks
cation for Approval llllll and approved proved satisfactory in every way and comply
by the AAR Committee on Tank Cars under with the requirements of Department of
date of llllll. Transportation Specification No.
Built for llllllllllll Company 107A* * * *.
Location at lllllllllllllllll
Built by llllllllllll Company (Signed) lllllllllllllll
Location at lllllllllllllllll (Inspector)
Consigned to lllllllll Company (Place) lllllllllllllll
Location at lllllllllllllllll (Date) llllllllllllllll
Quantity llllllllllllllllll
Length (inches) lllllllllllllll RECORD OF CHEMICAL ANALYSIS OF STEEL FOR
Outside diameter (inches) llllllllll TANKS
Marks stamped into tank as required in Numbered llll to llll inclusive
179.50017 are: Size l inches outside diameter by l inches
long
DOT-107A* * * *
Built by llllllllllll Company
NOTE 1: The marked test pressure sub- For lllllllllllllll Company
stituted for the * * * * on each tank is shown
on Record of General Data on Tanks at- Tanks rep- Chemical analysis
resented
tached hereto. Heat No. (serial C Mn P S Si Ni Cr Mo
Nos.)
Serial numbers ll to ll inclusive
Inspectors mark llllllllllllll
Owners mark llllllllllllllll
Test date llllllllllllllllll
Water capacity (see Record of Hydrostatic These analyses were made by
Tests). (Signed) lllllllllllll
Tare weights (yes or no) (see Record of Hy-
(Place) lllllllllllll
drostatic Tests).
(Date) llllllllllllll
These tanks were made by process of llll
Steel used was identified as indicated by RECORD OF CHEMICAL ANALYSIS OF STEEL IN
the attached list showing the serial number TANKS
of each tank, followed by the heat number.
Steel used was verified as to chemical Numbered llll to llll inclusive
analysis and record thereof is attached here- Size ll inches outside by ll inches long
to. Heat numbers were stamped into metal. Built by llllllllllll Company
All material was inspected and each tank For lllllllllllllll Company
was inspected both before and after closing
in ends; all material accepted was found free Tanks
rep- Elon- Reduc-
from seams, cracks, laminations, and other resent- Elastic Tensile gation tion of
Heat
defects which might prove injurious to No. ed by limit strength (percent area
strength of tank. Processes of manufacture test (se- (psi) (psi) in 2 (per-
rial inches) cent)
and heat-treatment of tanks were witnessed Nos.)
and found to be efficient and satisfactory.
Before necking-down ends, each tank was
measured at each location prescribed in
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
316
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00326 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT Pt. 179, App. A
Percent ratio of
Permanent ex- Capacity in
Serial Nos. of Actual test pres- Total expansion permanent ex- Tare weight
pansion (cubic (pounds) 2 pounds of water
tanks sure (psig) (cubic cm) pansion to total at 60 F
cm) expansion 1
1 If tests are made by method involving measurement of amount of liquid forced into tank by test pressure, then the basic data
on which calculations are made, such as pump factors, temperature of liquid, coefficient of compressibility of liquid, etc., must
also be given.
2 Do not include protective housing, but state whether with or without valves.
(Place) llllllllllllllllll
(Signed) llllllllllllllllll
[Amdt. 17932, 48 FR 27708, June 16, 1983, as amended by 66 FR 45391, Aug. 28, 2001]
APPENDIX A TO PART 179PROCEDURES a. The ram car used must weigh at least
FOR TANK-HEAD PUNCTURE-RESIST- 119,295 kg (263,000 pounds), be equipped with a
ANCE TEST coupler, and duplicate the condition of a con-
ventional draft sill including the draft yoke
1. This test procedure is designed to verify and draft gear. The coupler must protrude
the integrity of new or untried tank-head from the end of the ram car so that it is the
puncture-resistance systems and to test for leading location of perpendicular contact
system survivability after coupler-to-tank- with the impacted test car.
head impacts at relative speeds of 29 km/ b. The impacted test car must be loaded
hour (18 mph). Tank-head puncture-resist- with water at six percent outage with inter-
ance is a function of one or more of the fol- nal pressure of at least 6.9 Bar (100 psig) and
lowing: Head thickness, jacket thickness, in- coupled to one or more backup cars which
sulation thickness, and material of construc- have a total weight of 217,724 kg (480,000
tion. pounds) with hand brakes applied on the last
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
317
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00327 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pt. 179, App. B 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
c. At least two separate tests must be con- (3) The pool-fire simulator must be con-
ducted with the coupler on the vertical cen- structed in a manner that results in total
terline of the ram car. One test must be con- flame engulfment of the front surface of the
ducted with the coupler at a height of 53.3 bare plate. The apex of the flame must be di-
cm (21 inches), plus-or-minus 2.5 cm (1 inch), rected at the center of the plate.
above the top of the sill; the other test must (4) The bare plate holder must be con-
be conducted with the coupler height at 79 structed in such a manner that the only heat
cm (31 inches), plus-or-minus 2.5 cm (1 inch), transfer to the back side of the bare plate is
above the top of the sill. If the combined by heat conduction through the plate and
thickness of the tank head and any addi- not by other heat paths.
tional shielding material is less than the (5) Before the bare plate is exposed to the
combined thickness on the vertical center- simulated pool fire, none of the temperature
line of the car, a third test must be con- recording devices may indicate a plate tem-
ducted with the coupler positioned so as to perature in excess of 37.8 C (100 F) nor less
strike the thinnest point of the tank head. than 0 C (32 F).
3. One of the following test conditions (6) A minimum of two thermocouple de-
must be applied: vices must indicate 427 C (800 F) after 13
minutes, plus-or-minus one minute, of simu-
Minimum weight of Minimum ve- lated pool-fire exposure.
locity of impact b. A thermal protection system must be
attached ram cars in Restrictions
in km/hour
kg (pounds) tested in the simulated pool-fire environ-
(mph)
ment described in paragraph 2a of this ap-
119,295 (263,000) ... 29 (18) ........... One ram car only. pendix in the following manner:
155,582 (343,000) ... 25.5 (16) ........ One ram car or one (1) The thermal protection system must
car plus one rigidly cover one side of a bare plate as described in
attached car.
paragraph 2a(2) of this appendix.
311,164 (686,000) ... 22.5 (14) ........ One ram car plus
one or more rigidly
(2) The non-protected side of the bare plate
attached cars. must be instrumented with not less than
nine thermocouples placed as described in
4. A test is successful if there is no visible paragraph 2a(2) of this appendix to record
leak from the standing tank car for at least the thermal response of the plate.
one hour after impact. (3) Before exposure to the pool-fire simula-
tion, none of the thermocouples on the ther-
[Amdt. 17950, 60 FR 49078, Sept. 21, 1995, as mal protection system configuration may in-
amended by Amdt. 17950, 61 FR 33256, June dicate a plate temperature in excess of 37.8
26, 1996; 66 FR 45390, Aug. 28, 2001] C (100 F) nor less than 0 C (32 F).
(4) The entire surface of the thermal pro-
APPENDIX B TO PART 179PROCEDURES tection system must be exposed to the simu-
FOR SIMULATED POOL AND TORCH- lated pool fire.
FIRE TESTING (5) A pool-fire simulation test must run for
a minimum of 100 minutes. The thermal pro-
1. This test procedure is designed to meas- tection system must retard the heat flow to
ure the thermal effects of new or untried the plate so that none of the thermocouples
thermal protection systems and to test for on the non-protected side of the plate indi-
system survivability when exposed to a 100- cate a plate temperature in excess of 427 C
minute pool fire and a 30-minute torch fire. (800 F).
2. Simulated pool fire test. (6) A minimum of three consecutive suc-
a. A pool-fire environment must be simu- cessful simulation fire tests must be per-
lated in the following manner: formed for each thermal protection system.
(1) The source of the simulated pool fire 3. Simulated torch fire test.
must be hydrocarbon fuel with a flame tem- a. A torch-fire environment must be simu-
perature of 871 C plus or minus 55.6 C (1600 lated in the following manner:
F plus-or-minus 100 F) throughout the du- (1) The source of the simulated torch must
ration of the test. be a hydrocarbon fuel with a flame tempera-
(2) A square bare plate with thermal prop- ture of 1,204 C plus-or-minus 55.6 C (2,200 F
erties equivalent to the material of construc- plus or minus 100 F), throughout the dura-
tion of the tank car must be used. The plate tion of the test. Furthermore, torch veloci-
dimensions must be not less than one foot by ties must be 64.4 km/h 16 km/h (40 mph 10
one foot by nominal 1.6 cm (0.625 inch) thick. mph) throughout the duration of the test.
The bare plate must be instrumented with (2) A square bare plate with thermal prop-
not less than nine thermocouples to record erties equivalent to the material of construc-
the thermal response of the bare plate. The tion of the tank car must be used. The plate
thermocouples must be attached to the sur- dimensions must be at least four feet by four
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
face not exposed to the simulated pool fire feet by nominal 1.6 cm (0.625 inch) thick. The
and must be divided into nine equal squares bare plate must be instrumented with not
with a thermocouple placed in the center of less than nine thermocouples to record the
each square. thermal response of the plate. The
318
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00328 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT Pt. 180
thermocouples must be attached to the sur- Subpart B [Reserved]
face not exposed to the simulated torch and
must be divided into nine equal squares with Subpart CQualification, Maintenance
a thermocouple placed in the center of each and Use of Cylinders
square.
(3) The bare plate holder must be con- 180.201 Applicability.
structed in such a manner that the only heat 180.203 Definitions.
transfer to the back side of the plate is by 180.205 General requirements for requali-
heat conduction through the plate and not fication of specification cylinders.
by other heat paths. The apex of the flame 180.207 Requirements for requalification of
must be directed at the center of the plate. UN pressure receptacles.
(4) Before exposure to the simulated torch, 180.209 Requirements for requalification of
none of the temperature recording devices specification cylinders.
may indicate a plate temperature in excess 180.211 Repair, rebuilding and reheat treat-
of 37.8 C (100 F) or less than 0 C (32 F). ment of DOT-4 series specification cyl-
(5) A minimum of two thermocouples must inders.
indicate 427 C (800 F) in four minutes, plus- 180.212 Repair of seamless DOT 3-series
or-minus 30 seconds, of torch simulation ex- specification cylinders and seamless UN
posure. pressure receptacles.
b. A thermal protection system must be 180.213 Requalification markings.
tested in the simulated torch-fire environ- 180.215 Reporting and record retention re-
ment described in paragraph 3a of this ap- quirements.
pendix in the following manner: 180.217 Requalification requirements for
(1) The thermal protection system must MEGCs.
cover one side of the bare plate identical to
that used to simulate a torch fire under Subpart DQualification and Maintenance
paragraph 3a(2) of this appendix. of IBCs
(2) The back of the bare plate must be in-
strumented with not less than nine 180.350 Applicability and definitions.
thermocouples placed as described in para- 180.351 Qualification of IBCs.
graph 3a(2) of this appendix to record the 180.352 Requirements for retest and inspec-
thermal response of the material. tion of IBCs.
(3) Before exposure to the simulated torch,
none of the thermocouples on the back side Subpart EQualification and Maintenance
of the thermal protection system configura- of Cargo Tanks
tion may indicate a plate temperature in ex-
cess of 37.8 C (100 F) nor less than 0 C (32 180.401 Applicability.
F). 180.403 Definitions.
(4) The entire outside surface of the ther- 180.405 Qualification of cargo tanks.
mal protection system must be exposed to 180.407 Requirements for test and inspection
the simulated torch-fire environment. of specification cargo tanks.
(5) A torch-simulation test must be run for 180.409 Minimum qualifications for inspec-
a minimum of 30 minutes. The thermal pro- tors and testers.
tection system must retard the heat flow to 180.411 Acceptable results of tests and in-
the plate so that none of the thermocouples spections.
on the backside of the bare plate indicate a 180.413 Repair, modification, stretching, re-
plate temperature in excess of 427 C (800 F). barrelling, or mounting of specification
(6) A minimum of two consecutive success- cargo tanks.
ful torch-simulation tests must be performed 180.415 Test and inspection markings.
for each thermal protection system. 180.416 Discharge system inspection and
maintenance program for cargo tanks
[Amdt. 17950, 60 FR 49078, Sept. 21, 1995, as transporting liquefied compressed gases.
amended at 75 FR 53597, Sept. 1, 2010; 77 FR 180.417 Reporting and record retention re-
60945, Oct. 5, 2012] quirements.
319
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00329 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
180.1 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
180.513 Repairs, alterations, conversions, (2) Reintroduces into commerce a
and modifications. packaging that bears markings indi-
180.515 Markings. cating compliance with this part.
180.517 Reporting and record retention re-
quirements. [Amdt. 1802, 54 FR 25032, June 12, 1989, as
180.519 Periodic retest and inspection of amended by Amdt. 1802, 56 FR 27877, June
tank cars other than single-unit tank car 17, 1991]
tanks.
180.3 General requirements.
Subpart GQualification and
Maintenance of Portable Tanks (a) No person may represent, mark,
certify, sell, or offer a packaging or
180.601 Applicability. container as meeting the requirements
180.603 Qualification of portable tanks. of this part, or a special permit per-
180.605 Requirements for periodic testing, taining to this part issued under sub-
inspection and repair of portable tanks. chapter A of this chapter, whether or
APPENDIX A TO PART 180INTERNAL SELF- not the packaging or container is in-
CLOSING STOP VALVE EMERGENCY CLO-
tended to be used for the transpor-
SURE TEST FOR LIQUEFIED COMPRESSED
GASES tation of a hazardous material, unless
APPENDIX B TO PART 180ACCEPTABLE INTER- it is marked, maintained, recondi-
NAL SELF-CLOSING STOP VALVE LEAKAGE tioned, repaired, or retested, as appro-
TESTS FOR CARGO TANKS TRANSPORTING priate, in accordance with this part, an
LIQUEFIED COMPRESSED GASES approval issued thereunder, or a special
APPENDIX C TO PART 180EDDY CURRENT EX- permit issued under subchapter A of
AMINATION WITH VISUAL INSPECTION FOR
this chapter.
DOT 3AL CYLINDERS MANUFACTURED OF
ALUMINUM ALLOY 6351T6 (b) The representations, markings,
APPENDIX D TO PART 180HAZARDOUS MATE- and certifications subject to the prohi-
RIALS CORROSIVE TO TANKS OR SERVICE bitions of paragraph (a) of this section
EQUIPMENT include:
AUTHORITY: 49 U.S.C. 51015128; 49 CFR 1.81 (1) Identifications that include the
and 1.97. letters DOT, MC, ICC, or UN;
SOURCE: Amdt. 1802, 54 FR 25032, June 12, (2) Special permit, approval, and reg-
1989, unless otherwise noted. istration numbers that include the let-
ters DOT;
Subpart AGeneral (3) Test dates displayed in associa-
tion with specification, registration,
180.1 Purpose and scope. approval, or exemption markings indi-
cating conformance to a test or retest
This part prescribes requirements
pertaining to the maintenance, recon- requirement of this subchapter, an ap-
ditioning, repair, inspection and test- proval issued thereunder, or a special
ing of packagings, and any other func- permit issued under subchapter A of
tion having an effect on the continuing this chapter;
qualification and use of a packaging (4) Documents indicating conform-
under the requirements of this sub- ance to the testing, inspection, mainte-
chapter. nance or other continuing qualification
requirements of this part; and
180.2 Applicability. (5) Sales literature, including adver-
(a) Any person who performs a func- tising, indicating that the packaging
tion prescribed in this part shall per- or container represented therein con-
form that function in accordance with forms to requirements contained in
this part. subchapter A or C of this chapter.
(b) Any person who performs a func- [Amdt. 1802, 54 FR 25032, June 12, 1989, as
tion prescribed in this part is consid- amended by Amdt. 1803, 58 FR 33306, June
ered subject to the regulations of this 16, 1993; 70 FR 73166, Dec. 9, 2005]
subchapter when that person
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
320
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00330 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 180.203
321
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00331 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
180.205 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
a cylinders total and permanent ex- becomes due may remain in service
pansion by measuring the amount of until it is emptied. A cylinder with a
water forced into a cylinder at test specified service life may not be re-
pressure, adjusted for the compress- filled and offered for transportation
ibility of water, as a means of deter- after its authorized service life has ex-
mining the expansion. pired.
[67 FR 51660, Aug. 8, 2002, as amended at 71 (1) Each cylinder that is requalified
FR 33894, June 12, 2006] in accordance with the requirements
specified in this section must be
180.205 General requirements for re- marked in accordance with 180.213.
qualification of specification cyl- (2) Each cylinder that fails requali-
inders. fication must be:
(a) General. Each cylinder used for (i) Rejected and may be repaired or
the transportation of hazardous mate- rebuilt in accordance with 180.211 or
rials must be an authorized packaging. 180.212, as appropriate; or
To qualify as an authorized packaging, (ii) Condemned in accordance with
each cylinder must conform to this paragraph (i) of this section.
subpart, the applicable requirements (3) For DOT specification cylinders,
specified in part 173 of this subchapter, the marked service pressure may be
and the applicable requirements of sub- changed upon approval of the Associate
part C of part 178 of this subchapter. Administrator and in accordance with
(b) Persons performing requalification written procedures specified in the ap-
functions. No person may represent proval.
that a repair or requalification of a
(4) For a specification 3, 3A, 3AA,
cylinder has been performed in accord-
3AL, 3AX, 3AXX, 3B, 3BN, or 3T cyl-
ance with the requirements in this sub-
inder filled with gases in other than Di-
chapter unless that person holds a cur-
vision 2.2, from the first requalification
rent approval issued under the proce-
due on or after December 31, 2003, the
dural requirements prescribed in sub-
burst pressure of a CG1, CG4, or CG
part I of part 107 of this chapter. No
5 pressure relief device must be at test
person may mark a cylinder with a
pressure with a tolerance of plus zero
RIN and a requalification date or oth-
to minus 10%. An additional 5% toler-
erwise represent that a DOT specifica-
ance is allowed when a combined rup-
tion or special permit cylinder has
ture disc is placed inside a holder. This
been requalified unless all applicable
requirement does not apply if a CG2,
requirements of this subpart have been
CG3 or CG9 thermally activated relief
met. A person who requalifies cylinders
device or a CG7 reclosing pressure
must maintain the records prescribed
valve is used on the cylinder.
in 180.215 at each location at which it
inspects, tests, or marks cylinders. (d) Conditions requiring test and inspec-
(c) Periodic requalification of cylinders. tion of cylinders. Without regard to any
Each cylinder bearing a DOT specifica- other periodic requalification require-
tion marking must be requalified and ments, a cylinder must be tested and
marked as specified in the Requalifica- inspected in accordance with this sec-
tion Table in this subpart. Each cyl- tion prior to further use if
inder bearing a DOT special permit (1) The cylinder shows evidence of
number must be requalified and dents, corrosion, cracked or abraded
marked in conformance with this sec- areas, leakage, thermal damage, or any
tion and the terms of the applicable other condition that might render it
special permit. No cylinder may be unsafe for use in transportation;
filled with a hazardous material and of- (2) The cylinder has been in an acci-
fered for transportation in commerce dent and has been damaged to an ex-
unless that cylinder has been success- tent that may adversely affect its lad-
fully requalified and marked in accord- ing retention capability;
ance with this subpart. A cylinder may (3) The cylinder shows evidence of or
be requalified at any time during or be- is known to have been over-heated; or
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
fore the month and year that the re- (4) The Associate Administrator de-
qualification is due. However, a cyl- termines that the cylinder may be in
inder filled before the requalification an unsafe condition.
322
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00332 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 180.205
(e) Cylinders containing Class 8 (corro- uled 5-year requalification period after
sive) liquids. A cylinder previously con- January 1, 2007, and every five years
taining a Class 8 (corrosive) liquid may thereafter.
not be used to transport a Class 2 ma- (g) Pressure test. (1) Unless otherwise
terial in commerce unless the cylinder provided, each cylinder required to be
is retested under this subpart must be re-
(1) Visually inspected, internally and tested by means suitable for measuring
externally, in accordance with para- the expansion of the cylinder under
graph (f) of this section and the inspec- pressure. Bands and other removable
tion is recorded as prescribed in attachments must be loosened or re-
180.215; moved before testing so that the cyl-
(2) Requalified in accordance with inder is free to expand in all directions.
this section, regardless of the date of (2) The pressure indicating device of
the previous requalification; the testing apparatus must permit
(3) Marked in accordance with reading of pressures to within 1% of
180.213; and the minimum prescribed test pressure
(4) Decontaminated to remove all sig- of each cylinder tested, except that for
nificant residue or impregnation of the an analog device, interpolation to 12 of
Class 8 material. the marked gauge divisions is accept-
(f) Visual inspection. Except as other- able. The expansion-indicating device
wise provided in this subpart, each of the testing apparatus must also per-
time a cylinder is pressure tested, it mit incremental reading of the cyl-
must be given an internal and external inder expansion to 1% of the total ex-
visual inspection. pansion of each cylinder tested or 0.1
(1) The visual inspection must be per- cc, whichever is larger. Midpoint visual
formed in accordance with the fol- interpolation is permitted.
lowing CGA Pamphlets: C6 for steel (3) Each day before retesting, the re-
and nickel cylinders (IBR, see 171.7 of tester shall confirm, by using a cali-
this subchapter); C6.1 for seamless brated cylinder or other method au-
aluminum cylinders (IBR, see 171.7 of thorized in writing by the Associate
this subchapter); C6.2 for fiber rein- Administrator, that:
forced composite special permit cyl- (i) The pressure-indicating device, as
inders (IBR, see 171.7 of this sub- part of the retest apparatus, is accu-
chapter); C6.3 for low pressure alu- rate within 1.0% of the prescribed test
minum cylinders (IBR, see 171.7 of pressure of any cylinder tested that
this subchapter); C8 for DOT 3HT cyl- day. The pressure indicating device,
inders (IBR, see 171.7 of this sub- itself, must be certified as having an
chapter); and C13 for DOT 8 series cyl- accuracy of 0.5%, or better, of its full
inders (IBR, see 171.7 of this sub- range, and must permit readings of
chapter). pressure from 90%-110% of the min-
(2) For each cylinder with a coating imum prescribed test pressure of the
or attachments that would inhibit in- cylinder to be tested. The accuracy of
spection of the cylinder, the coating or the pressure indicating device within
attachments must be removed before the test system can be demonstrated at
performing the visual inspection. any point within 500 psig of the actual
(3) Each cylinder subject to visual in- test pressure for test pressures at or
spection must be approved, rejected, or above 3000 psig, or 10% of the actual
condemned according to the criteria in test pressure for test pressures below
the applicable CGA pamphlet. 3000 psig.
(4) In addition to other requirements (ii) The expansion-indicating device,
prescribed in this paragraph (f), each as part of the retest apparatus, gives a
specification cylinder manufactured of stable reading of expansion and is accu-
aluminum alloy 6351T6 and used in rate to 1.0% of the total expansion of
self-contained underwater breathing any cylinder tested or 0.1 cc, whichever
apparatus (SCUBA), self-contained is larger. The expansion-indicating de-
breathing apparatus (SCBA), or oxygen vice itself must have an accuracy of
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
service must be inspected for sustained 0.5%, or better, of its full scale.
load cracking in accordance with Ap- (4) The test equipment must be
pendix C of this part at the first sched- verified to be accurate within 1.0% of
323
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00333 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
180.205 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
324
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00334 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 180.207
10 ................... Pressure receptacles for all hazardous materials except as noted below (also for dissolved acetylene, see
paragraph (d)(3) of this section):
5 ..................... Composite pressure receptacles.
5 ..................... Metal hydride storage systems
5 ..................... Pressure receptacles used for:
All Division 2.3 materials.
UN1013, Carbon dioxide.
UN1043, Fertilizer ammoniating solution with free ammonia.
UN1051, Hydrogen cyanide, stabilized containing less than 3% water.
UN1052, Hydrogen fluoride, anhydrous.
UN1745, Bromine pentafluoride.
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
325
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00335 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
180.209 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
180.209(g)).
4B, 4BA, 4BW, 4B240ET ....................... 2 times service pressure, except non- 5, 10, or 12 (see 180.209(e), (f), and
corrosive service (see 180.209(g)). (j)).
4D, 4DA, 4DS .......................................... 2 times service ......................................... 5.
326
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00336 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 180.209
(b) DOT 3A or 3AA cylinders. (1) A cyl- identified in paragraph (b)(1)(ii) of this
inder conforming to specification DOT section, but currently conforms with
3A or 3AA with a water capacity of 56.7 all other provisions of paragraph (b)(1)
kg (125 lb) or less that is removed from of this section, it may be requalified
any cluster, bank, group, rack, or vehi- every 10 years instead of every five
cle each time it is filled, may be re- years, provided it is first requalified
qualified every ten years instead of and examined as prescribed by
every five years, provided the cylinder 173.302a(b) (2), (3) and (4) of this sub-
conforms to all of the following condi- chapter.
tions: (3) Except as specified in paragraph
(i) The cylinder was manufactured (b)(2) of this section, if a cylinder,
after December 31, 1945. marked with a star, is filled with a
(ii) The cylinder is used exclusively compressed gas other than as specified
for air; argon; cyclopropane; ethylene; in paragraph (b)(1)(ii) of this section,
helium; hydrogen; krypton; neon; ni- the star following the most recent test
trogen; nitrous oxide; oxygen; sulfur date must be obliterated. The cylinder
hexafluoride; xenon; chlorinated hydro- must be requalified five years from the
carbons, fluorinated hydrocarbons, liq- marked test date, or prior to the first
uefied hydrocarbons, and mixtures filling with a compressed gas, if the re-
thereof that are commercially free quired five-year requalification period
from corroding components; permitted has passed.
mixtures of these gases (see 173.301(d) (c) DOT 4-series cylinders. A DOT 4-se-
of this subchapter); and permitted mix- ries cylinder, except a 4L cylinder, that
tures of these gases with up to 30 per- at any time shows evidence of a leak or
cent by volume of carbon dioxide, pro- of internal or external corrosion, dent-
vided the gas has a dew point at or ing, bulging or rough usage to the ex-
below minus (52 F) at 1 atmosphere. tent that it is likely to be weakened
(iii) Before each refill, the cylinder is appreciably, or that has lost five per-
removed from any cluster, bank, group, cent or more of its official tare weight
rack or vehicle and passes the hammer must be requalified before being re-
test specified in CGA Pamphlet C6 filled and offered for transportation.
(IBR, see 171.7 of this subchapter). (Refer to CGA Pamphlet C6 or C6.3,
(iv) The cylinder is dried imme- as applicable, regarding cylinder weak-
diately after hydrostatic testing to re- ening.) After testing, the actual tare
move all traces of water. weight must be recorded as the new
(v) The cylinder is not used for un- tare weight.
derwater breathing. (d) Cylinders 5.44 kg (12 lb) or less with
(vi) Each cylinder is stamped with a service pressures of 300 psig or less. A cyl-
five-pointed star at least one-fourth of inder of 5.44 (12 lb) or less water capac-
an inch high immediately following the ity authorized for service pressure of
test date. 300 psig or less must be given a com-
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
(2) If, since the last required requali- plete external visual inspection at the
fication, a cylinder has not been used time periodic requalification becomes
exclusively for the gases specifically due. External visual inspection must be
327
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00337 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
180.209 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
DOT 3A, DOT 3AA, DOT 3A480X, DOT 4AA480 ...................... Anhydrous ammonia of at least 99.95% purity.
DOT 3A, DOT 3AA, DOT 3A480X, DOT 3B, DOT 4B, DOT Butadiene, inhibited, that is commercially free from corroding
4BA, DOT 4BW. components.
DOT 3A, DOT 3A480X, DOT 3AA, DOT 3B, DOT 4AA480, Cyclopropane that is commercially free from corroding compo-
DOT 4B, DOT 4BA, DOT 4BW. nents.
DOT 3A, DOT 3AA, DOT 3A480X, DOT 4B, DOT 4BA, DOT Chlorinated hydrocarbons and mixtures thereof that are com-
4BW, DOT 4E. mercially free from corroding components.
DOT 3A, DOT 3AA, DOT 3A480X, DOT 4B, DOT 4BA, DOT Fluorinated hydrocarbons and mixtures thereof that are com-
4BW, DOT 4E. mercially free from corroding components.
DOT 3A, DOT 3AA, DOT 3A480X, DOT 3B, DOT 4B, DOT Liquefied hydrocarbon gas that is commercially free from cor-
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
328
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00338 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 180.209
DOT 3A, DOT 3AA, DOT 3A480X, DOT 3B, DOT 4B, DOT Liquefied petroleum gas that meets the detail requirements lim-
4BA, DOT 4BW, DOT 4E. its in Table 1 of ASTM 1835, Standard Specification for Liq-
uefied Petroleum (LP) Gases (incorporated by reference;
see 171.7 of this subchapter) or an equivalent standard
containing the same limits.
DOT 3A, DOT 3AA, DOT 3B, DOT 4B, DOT 4BA, DOT 4BW, Methylacetylene-propadiene, stabilized, that is commercially
DOT 4E. free from corroding components.
DOT 3A, DOT 3AA, DOT 3B, DOT 4B, DOT 4BA, DOT 4BW .. Anhydrous mono, di,trimethylamines that are commercially free
from corroding components.
DOT 4B240, DOT 4BW240 ......................................................... Ethyleneimine, stabilized.
DOT 4BW .................................................................................... Alkali metal alloys, liquid, n.o.s., Alkali metal dispersions or Al-
kaline earth metal dispersions, Potassium, Potassium So-
dium alloys and Sodium that are commercially free of cor-
roding components.
(h) Cylinders containing anhydrous am- (i) Requalification of DOT-8 series cyl-
monia. A cylinder conforming to speci- inders. (1) Each owner of a DOT-8 series
fication DOT 3A, 3A480X, or 4AA480 cylinder used to transport acetylene
used exclusively for anhydrous ammo- must have the cylinder shell and the
nia, commercially free from corroding porous filler requalified in accordance
components, and protected externally with CGA Pamphlet C13 (IBR, see
by a suitable corrosion-resistant coat- 171.7 of this subchapter). Requalifica-
ing (such as paint) may be requalified tion must be performed in accordance
every 10 years instead of every five with the following schedule:
years.
Shell (visual inspection) requalification Porous filler requalification
Date of cylinder manu-
facture Initial Subsequent Intial Subsequent
Before January 1, 1991 Before January 1, 2001 10 years ....................... Before January 1, 2011 Not required.
On or after January 1, 10 years 1 ..................... 10 years ....................... 5 to 20 years 2 ............. Not required.
1991.
1 Years from the date of cylinder manufacture.
2 No sooner than 5 years, and no later than 20 years from the date of manufacture.
(2) Unless requalified and marked in (i) For a cylinder with a water capac-
accordance with CGA Pamphlet C13 ity of 5.44 kg (12 lb) or less, by volu-
before October 1, 1994, an acetylene cyl- metric expansion test using the water
inder must be requalified by a person jacket method or by proof pressure
who holds a current RIN. test. A requalification must be per-
(3) If a cylinder valve is replaced, a formed by the end of 12 years after the
cylinder valve of the same weight must original test date and at 12-year inter-
be used or the tare weight of the cyl- vals thereafter.
inder must be adjusted to compensate (ii) For a cylinder having a water ca-
for valve weight differential. pacity over 5.44 kg (12 lb)
(4) The person performing a visual in- (A) By proof pressure test. A requali-
spection or requalification must record fication must be performed by the end
the results as specified in 180.215. of 12 years after the original test date
(5) The person performing a visual in- and at 7-year intervals; or
spection or requalification must mark (B) By volumetric expansion test using
the cylinder as specified in 180.213. the water jacket method. A requalifica-
(j) Cylinder used as a fire extinguisher. tion must be performed 12 years after
Only a DOT specification cylinder used the original test date and at 12-year in-
as a fire extinguisher and meeting the tervals thereafter.
requirements of 173.309(a) of this sub- (2) A DOT 3A, 3AA, or 3AL cylinder
chapter may be requalified in accord- must be requalified by volumetric ex-
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
ance with this paragraph (j). pansion test using the water jacket
(1) A DOT 4B, 4BA, 4B240ET or 4BW method. A requalification must be per-
cylinder may be tested as follows: formed 12 years after the original test
329
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00339 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
180.211 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
Eddy current examination combined Eddy currentIn accordance with Any crack in the neck or shoulder 5
with visual inspection. Appendix C of this part. of 2 thread lengths or more.
Visual inspectionIn accordance
with CGA Pamphlet C6.1 (IBR;
see 171.7 of this subchapter).
1 The requalifier performing eddy current must be familiar with the eddy current equipment and must standardize (calibrate) the
system in accordance with the requirements provided in Appendix C to this part.
2 The eddy current must be applied from the inside of the cylinders neck to detect any sustained load cracking that has ex-
panded into the neck threads.
330
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00340 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 180.211
(2) The person performing the repair welded to this remaining piece of the
must use the procedure, equipment, original neck tube.
and filler metal or brazing material as (iii) The replacement of material
authorized by the approval issued such as, but not limited to, the insu-
under 107.805 of this chapter. lating material and the piping system
(3) Welding and brazing must be per- within the insulation space is author-
formed on an area free from contami- ized. The replacement material must
nants. be equivalent to that used at the time
(4) A weld defect, such as porosity in of original manufacture.
a pressure retaining seam, must be (iv) Other welding procedures that
completely removed before re-welding. are permitted by CGA Pamphlet C3
Puddling may be used to remove a weld (IBR, see 171.7 of this subchapter), and
defect only by the tungsten inert gas not excluded by the definition of re-
shielded arc process.
build, are authorized.
(5) After removal of a non-pressure
(2) After repair, the cylinder must
attachment and before its replacement,
be
the cylinder must be given a visual in-
spection in accordance with 180.205(f). (i) Pressure tested in accordance with
(6) Reheat treatment of DOT 4B, 4BA the specifications under which the cyl-
or 4BW specification cylinders after re- inder was originally manufactured;
placement of non-pressure attachments (ii) Leak tested before and after as-
is not required when the total weld ma- sembly of the insulation jacket using a
terial does not exceed 20.3 cm (8 mass spectrometer detection system;
inches). Individual welds must be at and
least 7.6 cm (3 inches) apart. (iii) Tested for heat conductivity re-
(7) After repair of a DOT 4B, 4BA or quirements.
4BW cylinder, the weld area must be (d) General rebuilding requirements. (1)
leak tested at the service pressure of The rebuilding of a DOT 4-series cyl-
the cylinder. inder must be made in accordance with
(8) Repair of weld defects must be the following requirements:
free of cracks. (i) The person rebuilding the cylinder
(9) When a non-pressure attachment must use the procedures and equipment
with the original cylinder specification as authorized by the approval issued
markings is replaced, all markings under 107.805 of this chapter.
must be transferred to the attachment (ii) After removal of a non-pressure
on the repaired cylinder. component and before replacement of
(10) Walls, heads or bottoms of cyl- any non-pressure component, the cyl-
inders with defects or leaks in base inder must be visually inspected in ac-
metal may not be repaired, but may be cordance with CGA Pamphlet C6 (IBR,
replaced as provided for in paragraph see 171.7 of this subchapter).
(d) of this section. (iii) The rebuilder may rebuild a DOT
(c) Additional repair requirements for 4B, 4BA or 4BW cylinder having a
4L cylinders. (1) Repairs to a DOT 4L water capacity of 9.07 kg (20 lb) or
cylinder must be performed in accord-
greater by replacing a head of the cyl-
ance with paragraphs (a) and (b) of this
inder using a circumferential joint.
section and are limited to the fol-
lowing: When this weld joint is located at other
than an original welded joint, a nota-
(i) The removal of either end of the
insulation jacket to permit access to tion of this modification must be
the cylinder, piping system, or neck shown on the Manufacturers Report of
tube. Rebuilding in 180.215(c)(2). The weld
(ii) The replacement of the neck joint must be on the cylindrical section
tube. At least a 13 mm (0.51 inch) piece of the cylinder.
of the original neck tube must be pro- (iv) Any welding and the inspection
truding above the cylinders top end. of the rebuilt cylinder must be in ac-
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
The original weld attaching the neck cordance with the requirements of the
tube to the cylinder must be sound and applicable cylinder specification and
the replacement neck tube must be the following requirements:
331
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00341 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
180.212 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
332
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00342 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 180.213
(b) Repairs not requiring prior ap- marked on the metal of the cylinder as
proval. Approval is not required for the permitted by the applicable specifica-
following specific repairs: tion. Unless authorized by the cylinder
(1) The removal and replacement of a specification, marking on the cylinder
neck ring or foot ring on a DOT 3A, sidewall is prohibited.
3AA or 3B cylinder or a UN pressure re- (1) Requalification and required spec-
ceptacle that does not affect a pressure ification markings must be legible so
part of the cylinder when the repair is as to be readily visible at all times. Il-
performed by a repair facility or a cyl- legible specification markings may be
inder manufacturer of these types of remarked on the cylinder as provided
cylinders. The repair may be made by by the original specification. Requali-
welding or brazing in conformance with fication markings may be placed on
the original specification. After re- any portion of the upper end of the cyl-
moval and before replacement, the cyl- inder excluding the sidewall, as pro-
inder must be visually inspected and vided in this section. Requalification
any defective cylinder must be re- and required specification markings
jected. The heat treatment, testing and that are illegible may be reproduced on
inspection of the repair must be per- a metal plate and attached as provided
formed under the supervision of an in- by the original specification.
spector and must be performed in ac- (2) Previous requalification markings
cordance with the original specifica- may not be obliterated, except that,
tion. when the space originally provided for
(2) External re-threading of DOT requalification dates becomes filled,
3AX, 3AAX or 3T specification cyl- additional dates may be added as fol-
inders or a UN pressure receptacle lows:
mounted in a MEGC; or the internal re- (i) All preceding requalification dates
threading of a DOT3 series cylinder or may be removed by peening provided
a seamless UN pressure receptacle that
when performed by a cylinder manufac- (A) Permission is obtained from the
turer of these types of cylinders. The cylinder owner;
repair work must be performed under (B) The minimum wall thickness is
the supervision of an independent in- maintained in accordance with manu-
spection agency. Upon completion of facturing specifications for the cyl-
the re-threading, the threads must be inder; and
gauged in accordance with Federal (C) The original manufacturing test
Standard H28 or an equivalent stand- date is not removed.
ard containing the same specification (ii) When the cylinder is fitted with a
limits. The re-threaded cylinder must footring, additional dates may be
be stamped clearly and legibly with the marked on the external surface of the
words RETHREAD on the shoulder, footring.
top head, or neck. No DOT specifica- (c) Requalification marking method.
tion cylinder or UN cylinder may be re- The depth of requalification markings
threaded more than one time without may not be greater than specified in
approval of the Associate Adminis- the applicable specification. The mark-
trator. ings must be made by stamping, en-
[71 FR 33895, June 12, 2006, as amended at 71 graving, scribing, or applying a label
FR 54398, Sept. 14, 2006; 72 FR 55697, Oct. 1, embedded in epoxy that will remain
2007] legible and durable throughout the life
of the cylinder, or by other methods
180.213 Requalification markings. that produce a legible, durable mark.
(a) General. Each cylinder or UN pres- (1) A cylinder used as a fire extin-
sure receptacle requalified in accord- guisher ( 180.209(j)) may be marked by
ance with this subpart with acceptable using a pressure sensitive label.
results must be marked as specified in (2) For a DOT 3HT cylinder, the test
this section. Required specification date and RIN must be applied by low-
markings may not be altered or re- stress steel stamps to a depth no great-
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
333
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00343 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
180.213 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
(3) For a composite cylinder, the re- (1) For designation of the 5-year volu-
qualification markings must be applied metric expansion test, 10-year volu-
on a pressure sensitive label, securely metric expansion test for UN cylinders
affixed in a manner prescribed by the and cylinders conforming to 180.209(f)
cylinder manufacturer, near the origi- and (h), or 12-year volumetric expan-
nal manufacturers label. Stamping of sion test for fire extinguishers con-
the composite surface is not author- forming to 173.309(a) of this sub-
ized. chapter and cylinders conforming to
(d) Requalification markings. Each cyl- 180.209(e) and (g), the marking is as il-
inder successfully passing requalifica- lustrated in paragraph (d) of this sec-
tion must be marked with the RIN set tion.
in a square pattern, between the month (2) For designation of the 10-year vol-
and year of the requalification date.
umetric expansion test for cylinders
The first character of the RIN must ap-
conforming to 180.209(b), the marking
pear in the upper left corner of the
square pattern; the second in the upper is as illustrated in paragraph (d) of this
right; the third in the lower right; and section, except that the X is re-
the fourth in the lower left. Example: placed with a five-point star.
A cylinder requalified in September (3) For designation of special filling
2006, and approved by a person who has limits up to 10% in excess of the
been issued RIN A123, would be marked service pressure for cylinders
marked plainly and permanently into conforming to 173.302a(b) of this sub-
the metal of the cylinder in accordance chapter, the marking is as illustrated
with location requirements of the cyl- in paragraph (d) of this section, except
inder specification or on a metal plate that the X is replaced with a plus
permanently secured to the cylinder in sign + .
accordance with paragraph (b) of this (4) For designation of the proof pres-
section. An example of the markings sure test, the marking is as illustrated
prescribed in this paragraph (d) is as in paragraph (d) of this section, except
follows: that the X is replaced with the letter
A1 S.
(5) For designation of the 5-year ex-
9 06 X ternal visual inspection for cylinders
32 conforming to 180.209(g), the marking
is as illustrated in paragraph (d) of this
Where: section, except that the X is re-
9 is the month of requalification placed with the letter E.
A123 is the RIN (6) For designation of DOT 8 series
06 is the year of requalification, and cylinder shell requalification only, the
X represents the symbols described in
paragraphs (f)(2) through (f)(8) of this
marking is as illustrated in paragraph
section. (d) of this section, except that the X
is replaced with the letter S.
(1) Upon written request, variation (7) For designation of DOT 8 series
from the marking requirement may be and UN cylinder shell and porous filler
approved by the Associate Adminis- requalification, the marking is as illus-
trator.
trated in paragraph (d) of this section,
(2) Exception. A cylinder subject to except that the X is replaced with
the requirements of 171.23(a)(4) of this
the letters FS.
subchapter may not be marked with a
(8) For designation of a non-
RIN.
destructive examination combined
(e) Size of markings. The size of the
markings must be at least 6.35 mm (14 with a visual inspection, the marking
in.) high, except RIN characters must is as illustrated in paragraph (d) of this
be at least 3.18 mm (18 in.) high. section, except that the X is re-
(f) Marking illustrations. Examples of placed with the type of test performed,
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
required requalification markings for for example the letters AE for acous-
DOT specification and special permit tic emission or UE for ultrasonic ex-
cylinders are illustrated as follows: amination.
334
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00344 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 180.215
(9) For designation of the eddy cur- present; and test operator. Blank
rent examination combined with a vis- spaces may not be used to indicate rep-
ual inspection, the marking is as illus- etition of a prior entry. The records
trated in paragraph (d) of this section, must include the following informa-
except the X is replaced with the let- tion:
ters VE. (1) Calibration test records. For each
test to demonstrate calibration, the
[67 FR 51660, Aug. 8, 2002, as amended at 70
FR 73166, Dec. 9, 2005; 71 FR 33896, June 12, date; serial number of the calibrated
2006; 71 FR 51128, Aug. 29, 2006; 71 FR 78635, cylinder; calibration test pressure;
Dec. 29, 2006; 75 FR 53597, Sept. 1, 2010; 80 FR total, elastic and permanent expan-
72929, Nov. 23, 2015; 81 FR 3686, Jan. 21, 2016] sions; and legible identification of test
operator. The test operator must be
180.215 Reporting and record reten- able to demonstrate that the results of
tion requirements. the daily calibration verification cor-
(a) Facility records. A person who re- respond to the hydrostatic tests per-
qualifies, repairs or rebuilds cylinders formed on that day. The daily
must maintain the following records verification of calibration(s) may be re-
where the requalification is performed: corded on the same sheets as, and with,
(1) Current RIN issuance letter; test records for that date.
(2) If the RIN has expired and renewal (2) Pressure test and visual inspection
is pending, a copy of the renewal re- records. The date of requalification; se-
quest; rial number; DOT specification or spe-
(3) Copies of notifications to Asso- cial permit number; marked pressure;
ciate Administrator required under actual dimensions; manufacturers
107.805 of this chapter; name or symbol; owners name or sym-
(4) Current copies of those portions of bol, if present; result of visual inspec-
this subchapter applicable to its cyl- tion; actual test pressure; total, elastic
inder requalification and marking ac- and permanent expansions; percent
tivities at that location; permanent expansion; disposition, with
(5) Current copies of all special per- reason for any repeated test, rejection
mits governing exemption cylinders re- or condemnation; and legible identi-
qualified or marked by the requalifier fication of test operator. For each cyl-
at that location; and inder marked pursuant to
(6) The information contained in each 173.302a(b)(5) of this subchapter, the
applicable CGA or ASTM standard in- test sheet must indicate the method by
corporated by reference in 171.7 of this which any average or maximum wall
subchapter applicable to the requali- stress was computed. Records must be
fiers activities. This information must kept for all completed, as well as un-
be the same as contained in the edition successful tests. The entry for a second
incorporated by reference in 171.7 of test after a failure to hold test pressure
this subchapter. must indicate the date of the earlier
(b) Requalification records. Daily test.
records of visual inspection, pressure (3) Wall stress. Calculations of aver-
test, and ultrasonic examination if per- age and maximum wall stress pursuant
mitted under a special permit, as appli- to 173.302a(b)(3) of this subchapter, if
cable, must be maintained by the per- performed.
son who performs the requalification (4) Calibration certificates. The most
until either the expiration of the re- recent certificate of calibration must
qualification period or until the cyl- be maintained for each calibrated cyl-
inder is again requalified, whichever inder.
occurs first. A single date may be used (c) Repair, rebuilding or reheat treat-
for each test sheet, provided each test ment records. (1) Records covering weld-
on the sheet was conducted on that ing or brazing repairs, rebuilding or re-
date. Ditto marks or a solid vertical heat treating shall be retained for a
line may be used to indicate repetition minimum of fifteen years by the ap-
of the preceding entry for the following proved facility.
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
335
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00345 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
180.217 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
336
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00346 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 180.350
tained during the period the MEGC is facturers specifications provided that
in service and for one year thereafter. the leaktightness of the IBC is verified;
These records must be made available or
337
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00347 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
180.351 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
338
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00348 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 180.352
the IBC is free from damage and to en- Where staples are used, the joints must
sure that the IBC is capable of with- be inspected for protruding staple-ends
standing the applicable design quali- which could puncture or abrade the
fication tests. inner liner. All such ends must be pro-
(i) The IBC must be internally in- tected before the IBC is authorized for
spected for cracks, warpage, and corro- hazardous materials service.
sion or any other defect that might (iii) Each wooden IBC must be in-
render the IBC unsafe for transpor- spected to ensure that:
tation. An IBC found with such defects (A) End joints are secured in the
must be removed from hazardous mate- manner prescribed by the design.
rials service until restored to the origi- (B) IBC walls are free from defects in
nal design type of the IBC. wood. Inner protrusions which could
(ii) Metal IBCs must be inspected to puncture or abrade the liner must be
ensure the minimum wall thickness re- covered.
quirements in 178.705(c)(1)(iv) of this (d) Requirements applicable to repair of
subchapter are met. Metal IBCs not IBCs. (1) Except for flexible and fiber-
conforming to minimum wall thickness board IBCs and the bodies of rigid plas-
requirements must be removed from tic and composite IBCs, damaged IBCs
hazardous materials service. may be repaired and the inner recep-
(c) Visual inspection for flexible, fiber- tacles of composite packagings may be
board, or wooden IBCs. Each IBC must replaced and returned to service pro-
be visually inspected prior to first use vided:
and permitted reuse, by the person who (i) The repaired IBC conforms to the
places hazardous materials in the IBC, original design type, is capable of with-
to ensure that: standing the applicable design quali-
(1) The IBC is marked in accordance fication tests, and is retested and in-
with requirements in 178.703 of this spected in accordance with the applica-
subchapter. Additional marking al- ble requirements of this section;
lowed for each design type may be (ii) An IBC intended to contain liq-
present. Required markings that are uids or solids that are loaded or dis-
missing, damaged or difficult to read charged under pressure is subjected to
must be restored or returned to origi- a leakproofness test as specified in
nal condition. 178.813 of this subchapter and is
(2) Proper construction and design marked with the date of the test; and
specifications have been met. (iii) The IBC is subjected to the inter-
(i) Each flexible IBC must be in- nal and external inspection require-
spected to ensure that: ments as specified in paragraph (b) of
(A) Lifting straps if used, are se- this section.
curely fastened to the IBC in accord- (iv) The person performing the tests
ance with the design type. and inspections after the repair must
(B) Seams are free from defects in durably mark the IBC near the
stitching, heat sealing or gluing which manfacturers UN design type marking
would render the IBC unsafe for trans- to show the following:
portation of hazardous materials. All (A) The country in which the tests
stitched seam-ends must be secure. and inspections were performed;
(C) Fabric used to construct the IBC (B) The name or authorized symbol of
is free from cuts, tears and punctures. the person performing the tests and in-
Additionally, fabric must be free from spections; and
scoring which may render the IBC un- (C) The date (month, year) of the
safe for transport. tests and inspections.
(ii) Each fiberboard IBC must be in- (v) Retests and inspections performed
spected to ensure that: in accordance with paragraphs (d)(1)(i)
(A) Fluting or corrugated fiberboard and (ii) of this section may be used to
is firmly glued to facings. satisfy the requirements for the 2.5 and
(B) Seams are creased and free from five year periodic tests and inspections
scoring, cuts, and scratches. required by paragraph (b) of this sec-
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
339
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00349 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
180.401 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
IBC may be repaired and returned to tests are successfully performed again
service provided: or for at least 2.5 years from the date
(i) The repaired IBC conforms to the of the last test. These records must be
original design type and is capable of made available for inspection by a rep-
withstanding the applicable design resentative of the Department on re-
qualification tests; and quest.
(ii) The IBC is subjected to the inter-
[Amdt. 1805, 59 FR 38079, July 26, 1994, as
nal and external inspection require- amended at 64 FR 10782, Mar. 5, 1999; 65 FR
ments as specified in paragraph (b) of 58632, Sept. 29, 2000; 66 FR 45186, 45391, Aug.
this section. 28, 2001; 68 FR 45042, July 31, 2003; 69 FR 76186,
(3) Service equipment may be re- Dec. 20, 2004; 70 FR 34399, June 14, 2005; 70 FR
placed provided: 56099, Sept. 23, 2005; 71 FR 78635, Dec. 29, 2006]
(i) The repaired IBC conforms to the
original design type and is capable of Subpart EQualification and
withstanding the applicable design Maintenance of Cargo Tanks
qualification tests;
(ii) The IBC is subjected to the exter- 180.401 Applicability.
nal visual inspection requirements as This subpart prescribes require-
specified in paragraph (b) of this sec- ments, in addition to those contained
tion; and in parts 107, 171, 172, 173 and 178 of this
(iii) The proper functioning and leak subchapter, applicable to any person
tightness of the service equipment, if responsible for the continuing quali-
applicable, is verified. fication, maintenance or periodic test-
(e) Requirements applicable to routine ing of a cargo tank.
maintenance of IBCs. Except for routine
maintenance of metal, rigid plastics [Amdt. 1802, 54 FR 25032, June 12, 1989, as
and composite IBCs performed by the amended at 55 FR 37065, Sept. 7, 1990]
owner of the IBC, whose State and
name or authorized symbol is durably 180.403 Definitions.
marked on the IBC, the party per- In addition to the definitions con-
forming the routine maintenance shall tained in 171.8, 178.320(a) and 178.345
durably mark the IBC near the manu- 1 of this subchapter, the following defi-
facturers UN design type marking to nitions apply to this subpart:
show the following: Corroded or abraded means any visible
(1) The country in which the routine reduction in the material thickness of
maintenance was carried out; and the cargo tank wall or valve due to pit-
(2) The name or authorized symbol of ting, flaking, gouging, or chemical re-
the party performing the routine main- action to the material surface that ef-
tenance. fects the safety or serviceability of the
(f) Retest date. The date of the most cargo tank. The term does not include
recent periodic retest must be marked cosmetic or minor surface degradation
as provided in 178.703(b) of this sub- that does not effect the safety or serv-
chapter. iceability of the cargo tank
(g) Record retention. (1) The owner or Corrosive to the tank or valve means
lessee of the IBC must keep records of that the lading has been shown through
periodic retests, initial and periodic in- experience or test data to reduce the
spections, and tests performed on the thickness of the material of construc-
IBC if it has been repaired or remanu- tion of the tank wall or valve.
factured. Delivery hose assembly means a liquid
(2) Records must include design types delivery hose and its attached cou-
and packaging specifications, test and plings.
inspection dates, name and address of Modification means any change to the
test and inspection facilities, names or original design and construction of a
name of any persons conducting test or cargo tank or a cargo tank motor vehi-
inspections, and test or inspection spe- cle that affects its structural integrity
cifics and results. or lading retention capability includ-
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
(3) Records must be kept for each ing changes to equipment certified as
packaging at each location where peri- part of an emergency discharge control
odic tests are conducted, until such system required by 173.315(n)(2) of this
340
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00350 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 180.405
subchapter. Any modification that in- tank, or any change to a cargo tank
volves welding on the cargo tank wall motor vehicles undercarriage that
must also meet all requirements for may affect the cargo tanks structural
Repair as defined in this section. Ex- integrity.
cluded from this category are the fol-
lowing: [Amdt. 1802, 54 FR 25032, June 12, 1989, as
amended at 55 FR 37065, Sept. 7, 1990; Amdt.
(1) A change to motor vehicle equip-
1803, 57 FR 45466, Oct. 1, 1992; Amdt. 1807, 59
ment such as lights, truck or tractor FR 55177, Nov. 3, 1994; 60 FR 17402, Apr. 5,
power train components, steering and 1995; Amdt. 18010, 61 FR 51342, Oct. 1, 1996; 63
brake systems, and suspension parts, FR 52850, Oct. 1, 1998; 64 FR 28050, May 24,
and changes to appurtenances, such as 1999; 68 FR 19286, Apr. 18, 2003; 69 FR 54047,
fender attachments, lighting brackets, Sept. 7, 2004]
ladder brackets; and
(2) Replacement of components such 180.405 Qualification of cargo tanks.
as valves, vents, and fittings with a (a) General. Unless otherwise pro-
component of a similar design and of vided in this subpart, each cargo tank
the same size. used for the transportation of haz-
Owner means the person who owns a
ardous material must be an authorized
cargo tank motor vehicle used for the
packaging.
transportation of hazardous materials,
or that persons authorized agent. (b) Cargo tank specifications. (1) To
Piping system means any component qualify as an authorized packaging,
of a cargo tank delivery system, other each cargo tank must conform to this
than a delivery hose assembly, that subpart, the applicable requirements
contains product during loading or un- specified in part 173 of this subchapter
loading. for the specific lading, and where a
Rebarrelling means replacing more DOT specification cargo tank is re-
than 50 percent of the combined shell quired, an applicable specification in
and head material of a cargo tank. effect on the date initial construction
Repair means any welding on a cargo began: MC 300, MC 301, MC 302, MC 303,
tank wall done to return a cargo tank MC 304, MC 305, MC 306, MC 307, MC 310,
or a cargo tank motor vehicle to its MC 311, MC 312, MC 330, MC 331, MC 338,
original design and construction speci- DOT 406, DOT 407, or DOT 412 ( 178.337,
fication, or to a condition prescribed 178.338, 178.345, 178.346, 178.347, 178.348 of
for a later equivalent specification in this subchapter). However, except as
effect at the time of the repair. Ex- provided in paragraphs (b)(2), (d), (e),
cluded from this category are the fol- (f)(5), and (f)(6) of this section, no cargo
lowing: tank may be marked or certified after
(1) A change to motor vehicle equip- August 31, 1995, to the applicable MC
ment such as lights, truck or tractor 306, MC 307, MC 312, MC 331, or MC 338
power train components, steering and specification in effect on December 30,
brake systems, and suspension parts, 1990.
and changes to appurtenances, such as (2) Exception. A cargo tank originally
fender attachments, lighting brackets, manufactured to the MC 306, MC 307, or
ladder brackets; and
MC 312 specification may be recertified
(2) Replacement of components such
to the original specification provided:
as valves, vents, and fittings with a
component of a similar design and of (i) Records are available verifying
the same size. the cargo tank was originally manufac-
(3) Replacement of an appurtenance tured to the specification;
by welding to a mounting pad. (ii) If the cargo tank was stretched,
Replacement of a barrel means to re- rebarrelled, or modified, records are
place the existing tank on a motor ve- available verifying that the stretching,
hicle chassis with an unused (new) rebarrelling, or modification was per-
tank. For the definition of tank, see formed in accordance with the Na-
178.320, 178.345, or 178.3381 of this tional Board Inspection Code and this
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
341
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00351 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
180.405 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
to conform with a Specification MC 306 tured to the same design type (see
or DOT 406 cargo tank (See 178.3463 178.320), if not individually tested,
and 178.3464 of this subchapter). must have the optional test regimen
342
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00352 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 180.405
performed during the first shipment designed for a minimum external de-
(see 178.3389 (b) and (c) of this sub- sign pressure of 15 psig.
chapter). (ii) An outlet equipped with a self-
(2) The holding time determined by closing system which includes an ex-
test for one authorized cryogenic liquid ternal stop-valve must have the stop
may be used as the basis for estab- valve and associated piping protected
lishing the holding time for other au- within the vehicles rear-end tank pro-
thorized cryogenic liquids. tection device, vehicle frame or an
(e) MC 331 cargo tanks. The owner of equally adequate accident damage pro-
a MC 331 ( 178.337 of this subchapter) tection device (See 178.3458 of this
cargo tank that conforms to and was subchapter.) The self-closing system
used under an exemption issued before (See 178.34511 of this subchapter)
October 1, 1984, that authorizes the must be equipped with a remotely ac-
transportation of ethane, refrigerated tuated means of closure as follows:
liquid; ethane-propane mixture, refrig- (A) For a cargo tank used in other
erated liquid; or hydrogen chloride, re- than corrosive service, the remote
frigerated liquid shall remove the ex- means of closure must be activated for
emption number stenciled on the cargo closure by manual or mechanical
tank and stamp the exemption number means and, in case of fire, by an auto-
on the specification plate (or a plate matic heat activated means.
placed adjacent to the specification (B) For a cargo tank used in corro-
plate), immediately after the DOT sive service, the remote means of clo-
Specification, for example, DOT MC sure may be actuated by manual or me-
331E * * * *. (Asterisks to be replaced chanical means only.
by the exemption number.) The cargo (iii) A cargo tank having an
tank must be remarked prior to the ex- unreinforced portion of the shell ex-
piration date of the exemption. During ceeding 60 inches must have the cir-
the period the cargo tank is in service, cumferential reinforcement located so
the owner of a cargo tank that is re- that the thickness and tensile strength
marked in this manner must retain at of shell material in combination with
the owners principal place of business the frame and circumferential rein-
a copy of the last exemption in effect. forcement produces a structural integ-
(f) MC 306, MC 307, MC 312 cargo tanks. rity at least equal to that prescribed in
Either a Registered Inspector or a De- 178.3453 of this subchapter or the
sign Certifying Engineer and the owner specification in effect at time of manu-
of a MC 306, MC 307 or MC 312 cargo facture.
tank motor vehicle constructed in ac- (iv) A cargo tank having a projection
cordance with and used under an ex- from the tank shell or head that may
emption issued before December 31, contain lading in any tank position is
1990, that authorizes a condition speci- authorized, provided such projection is
fied in this paragraph shall examine as strong as the tank shell or head and
the cargo tank motor vehicle and its is located within the motor vehicles
design to determine if it meets the re- rear-end tank protection or other ap-
quirements of the applicable MC 306, propriate accident damage protection
MC 307 or MC 312 specification in effect device.
at the time of manufacture, except as (v) A cargo tank may be constructed
specified herein. of nickel, titanium, or other ASME
(1) A cargo tank motor vehicle con- sheet or plate materials in accordance
structed after August 1, 1981, or the with an exemption.
date specified in the applicable exemp- (2) A vacuum-loaded cargo tank con-
tion, in conformance with the fol- structed after August 1, 1981, or the
lowing conditions that apply, may be date specified in the applicable exemp-
remarked and certified in accordance tion, in conformance with paragraph
with paragraphs (f) (5) and (6) of this (f)(1) of this section, except that an
section: outlet equipped with an external valve
(i) A vacuum-loaded cargo tank must which is not part of a self-closing sys-
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
343
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00353 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
180.405 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
344
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00354 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 180.405
on MC-specification cargo tanks is au- tificate for at least 1 year after with-
thorized subject to the following re- drawal of the certification.
quirements: (k) DOT-specification cargo tank with
(1) Until August 31, 1998, the owner of no marked design pressure or a marked
a cargo tank may replace a reclosing design pressure of less than 3 psig. The
pressure relief device with a device owner of an MC 300, MC 301, MC 302, MC
which is in compliance with the re- 303, MC 305, MC 306, or MC 312 cargo
quirements for pressure relief devices tank with a pressure relief system set
in effect at the time the cargo tank at 3 psig, must mark or remark the
specification became superseded. If the cargo tank with an MAWP or design
pressure relief device is installed as an pressure of not less than 3 psig.
integral part of a manhole cover as- (l) MC 300, MC 301, MC 302, MC 303,
sembly, the manhole cover must com- MC 305, MC 306 cargo tankRear acci-
ply with the requirements of paragraph dent damage protection. (1) Notwith-
(g) of this section. standing the requirements in
(2) After August 31, 1998, replacement 180.405(b), the applicable specification
for any reclosing pressure relief valve requirement for a rear bumper or rear-
must be capable of reseating to a leak- end tank protection device on MC 300,
tight condition after a pressure surge, MC 301, MC 302, MC 303, MC 305, and MC
and the volume of lading released may 306 cargo tanks does not apply to a
not exceed 1 L. Specific performance cargo tank truck (power unit) until
requirements for these pressure relief July 1, 1992, if the cargo tank truck
valves are set forth in 178.34510(b)(3)
(i) Was manufactured before July 1,
of this subchapter.
1989;
(3) As provided in paragraph (c)(2) of
(ii) Is used to transport gasoline or
this section, the owner of a cargo tank
any other petroleum distillate product;
may elect to modify reclosing pressure
and
relief devices to more recent cargo
tank specifications. However, replace- (iii) Is operated in combination with
ment devices constructed to the re- a cargo tank full trailer. However, an
quirements of 178.34510 of this sub- empty cargo tank truck, without a
chapter must provide the minimum cargo tank full trailer attached, may
venting capacity required by the origi- be operated without the required rear
nal specification to which the cargo bumper or rear-end tank protection de-
tank was designed and constructed. vice on a one-time basis while being
(i) Flammable cryogenic liquids. Each transported to a repair facility for in-
cargo tank used to transport a flam- stallation of a rear bumper or rear-end
mable cryogenic liquid must be exam- protection device.
ined after each shipment to determine (2) Each cargo tank shall be provided
its actual holding time (See with a rear accident damage protection
173.318(g)(3) of this subchapter.) device to protect the tank and piping
(j) Withdrawal of certification. A speci- in the event of a rear-end collision and
fication cargo tank that for any reason reduce the likelihood of damage which
no longer meets the applicable speci- could result in the loss of lading. The
fication may not be used to transport rear-end protection device must be in
hazardous materials unless the cargo the form of a rear-end tank protection
tank is repaired and retested in accord- device meeting the requirements of
ance with 180.413 and 180.407 prior to 178.3458(d) or a rear bumper meeting
being returned to hazardous materials the following:
service. If the cargo tank is not in con- (i) The bumper shall be located at
formance with the applicable specifica- least 6 inches to the rear of any vehicle
tion requirements, the specification component used for loading or unload-
plate on the cargo tank must be re- ing or that may contain lading while
moved, obliterated or securely covered. the vehicle is in transit.
The details of the conditions necessi- (ii) The dimensions of the bumper
tating withdrawal of the certification shall conform to 393.86 of this title.
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
must be recorded and signed on the (iii) The structure of the bumper
written certificate for that cargo tank. must be designed in accordance with
The vehicle owner shall retain the cer- 178.3458(d)(3) of this subchapter.
345
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00355 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
180.407 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
(m) Specification MC 330, MC 331 cargo test after July 1, 1999, each specifica-
tank motor vehicles, and nonspecification tion MC 330 or MC 331 cargo tank
cargo tank motor vehicles conforming to motor vehicle and each nonspecifica-
173.315(k) of this subchapter, intended tion cargo tank motor vehicle con-
for use in the transportation of liquefied forming to 173.315(k) of this sub-
compressed gases. (1) No later than the chapter, marked and certified before
date of its first scheduled pressure test July 1, 1999, that is used to transport a
after July 1, 2001, each specification liquefied compressed gas, other than
MC 330 and MC 331 cargo tank motor carbon dioxide and chlorine, that has a
vehicle, and each nonspecification water capacity of 13,247.5 L (3,500 gal-
cargo tank motor vehicle conforming lons) or less must be equipped with a
to 173.315(k) of this subchapter, means of thermal activation for the in-
marked and certified before July 1, ternal self-closing stop valve as speci-
2001, that is used to transport a Divi- fied in 178.3378(a)(4) of this sub-
sion 2.1 material, a Division 2.2 mate- chapter.
rial with a subsidiary hazard, a Divi- (o) On-truck remote control of self-clos-
sion 2.3 material, or anhydrous ammo- ing stop valvesMC 330, MC 331, and MC
nia must have an emergency discharge 338. On or before October 2, 2006
control capability as specified in (1) Each owner of an MC 330 or MC 331
173.315(n) of this subchapter. Each cargo tank motor vehicle marked or
passive shut-off system installed prior certified before January 1, 1995, must
to July 1, 2001, must be certified by a equip the cargo tank with an on-vehi-
Design Certifying Engineer that it cle remote means of closure of the in-
meets the requirements of 173.315(n)(2) ternal self-closing stop valve in con-
of this subchapter. formance with 178.3378(a)(4) of this
(2) The requirement in paragraph subchapter. This requirement does not
(m)(1) of this section does not apply to apply to cargo tanks used only for car-
a cargo tank equal to or less than bon dioxide and marked For carbon
13,247.5 L (3,500 gallons) water capacity dioxide only or intended for use in
transporting in metered delivery serv- chlorine service only.
ice a Division 2.1 material, a Division (2) Each owner of an MC 338 cargo
2.2 material with a subsidiary hazard, tank motor vehicle marked or certified
or anhydrous ammonia equipped with before January 1, 1995, must equip each
an off-truck remote shut-off device remotely controlled shutoff valve with
that was installed prior to July 1, 2000. an on-vehicle remote means of auto-
The device must be capable of stopping matic closure in conformance with
the transfer of lading by operation of a 178.33811(c) of this subchapter. This
transmitter carried by a qualified per- requirement does not apply to cargo
son attending unloading of the cargo tanks used for the transportation of
tank. The device is subject to the re- argon, carbon dioxide, helium, kryp-
quirement in 177.840(o) of this sub- ton, neon, nitrogen, or xenon, or mix-
chapter for a daily test at 45.72 meters tures thereof.
(150 feet).
(3) Each specification MC 330 and MC [Amdt. 1802, 54 FR 25032, June 12, 1989]
331 cargo tank in metered delivery EDITORIAL NOTE: For FEDERAL REGISTER ci-
service of greater than 13,247.5 L (3,500 tations affecting 180.405, see the List of CFR
gallons) water capacity transporting a Sections Affected, which appears in the
Division 2.1 material, a Division 2.2 Finding Aids section of the printed volume
material with a subsidiary hazard, or and at www.fdsys.gov.
anhydrous ammonia, marked and cer-
tified before July 1, 1999, must have an 180.407 Requirements for test and in-
emergency discharge control capability spection of specification cargo
as specified in 173.315(n) and 177.840 of tanks.
this subchapter no later than the date (a) General. (1) A cargo tank con-
of its first scheduled pressure test after structed in accordance with a DOT
July 1, 2001, or July 1, 2003, whichever specification for which a test or inspec-
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
346
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00356 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 180.407
the test or inspection has been success- the procedures set forth in paragraphs
fully completed. This paragraph does (i)(2), (i)(3), (i)(5), and (i)(6) of this sec-
not apply to any cargo tank filled prior tion and evaluated in accordance with
to the test or inspection due date. the criteria prescribed in 180.411. Any
(2) Except during a pressure test, a signs of leakage must be repaired in ac-
cargo tank may not be subjected to a cordance with 180.413. The suitability
pressure greater than its design pres- of any repair affecting the structural
sure or MAWP. integrity of the cargo tank must be de-
(3) A person witnessing or performing termined either by the testing required
a test or inspection specified in this in the applicable manufacturing speci-
section must meet the minimum quali- fication or in paragraph (g)(1)(iv) of
fications prescribed in 180.409. this section.
(4) Each cargo tank must be evalu- (2) The cargo tank has sustained
ated in accordance with the acceptable damage to an extent that may ad-
results of tests and inspections pre- versely affect its lading retention capa-
scribed in 180.411. bility. A damaged cargo tank must be
(5) Each cargo tank which has suc- pressure tested in accordance with the
cessfully passed a test or inspection procedures set forth in paragraph (g) of
specified in this section must be this section.
marked in accordance with 180.415. (3) The cargo tank has been out of
(6) A cargo tank which fails a pre- hazardous materials transportation
scribed test or inspection must: service for a period of one year or
(i) Be repaired and retested in accord- more. Each cargo tank that has been
ance with 180.413; or out of hazardous materials transpor-
(ii) Be removed from hazardous mate- tation service for a period of one year
rials service and the specification plate or more must be pressure tested in ac-
removed, obliterated or covered in a se- cordance with 180.407(g) prior to fur-
cure manner. ther use.
(b) Conditions requiring test and inspec- (4) [Reserved]
tion of cargo tanks. Without regard to (5) The Department so requires based
any other test or inspection require- on the existence of probable cause that
ments, a specification cargo tank must the cargo tank is in an unsafe oper-
be tested and inspected in accordance ating condition.
with this section prior to further use if: (c) Periodic test and inspection. Each
(1) The cargo tank shows evidence of specification cargo tank must be tested
dents, cuts, gouges, corroded or ab- and inspected as specified in the fol-
raded areas, leakage, or any other con- lowing table by an inspector meeting
dition that might render it unsafe for the qualifications in 180.409. The
hazardous materials service. At a min- retest date shall be determined from
imum, any area of a cargo tank show- the specified interval identified in the
ing evidence of dents, cuts, digs, goug- following table from the most recent
es, or corroded or abraded areas must inspection or the CTMV certification
be thickness tested in accordance with date.
COMPLIANCE DATESINSPECTIONS AND TEST UNDER 180.407(C)
Interval pe-
Date by which first test must be
Test or inspection (cargo tank specification, configuration, and service) riod after first
completed (see note 1) test
347
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00357 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
180.407 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
Leakage Test:
MC 330 and MC 331 cargo tanks in chlorine service ................... September 1, 1991 ........................... 2 years.
All other cargo tanks except MC 338 ............................................ September 1, 1991 ........................... 1 year.
Pressure Test (Hydrostatic or pneumatic) (See Notes 2 and 3):
All cargo tanks which are insulated with no manhole or insulated September 1, 1991 ........................... 1
and lined, except MC 338.
All cargo tanks designed to be loaded by vacuum with full open- September 1, 1992 ........................... 2
ing rear heads.
MC 330 and MC 331 cargo tanks in chlorine service ................... September 1, 1992 ........................... 2
MC 331 cargo tanks less than 3,500 gallons water capacity in September 1, 2017 ........................... 10
dedicated propane service constructed of nonquenched and
tempered NQT steel (See Note 5).
All other cargo tanks ...................................................................... September 1, 1995 ........................... 5
Thickness Test:
All unlined cargo tanks transporting material corrosive to the September 1, 1992 ........................... 2 years.
tank, except MC 338.
Note 1: If a cargo tank is subject to an applicable inspection or test requirement under the regulations in effect on December 30,
1990, and the due date (as specified by a requirement in effect on December 30, 1990) for completing the required inspection or
test occurs before the compliance date listed in table I, the earlier date applies.
Note 2: Pressure testing is not required for MC 330 and MC 331 cargo tanks in dedicated sodium metal service.
Note 3: Pressure testing is not required for uninsulated lined cargo tanks, with a design pressure or MAWP 15 psig or less,
which receive an external visual inspection and lining inspection at least once each year.
Note 4: Insulated cargo tanks equipped with manholes or inspection openings may perform either an internal visual inspection in
conjunction with the external visual inspection or a hydrostatic or pneumatic pressure-test of the cargo tank.
Note 5: A 10-year inspection interval period also applies to cargo tanks constructed of NQT SA202, NQT SA455, or NQT
SA612 steels provided the materials have full-size equivalent (FSE) Charpy vee notch (CVN) energy test data that dem-
onstrated 75% shear-area ductility at 32 F with an average of 3 or more samples >15 ft-lb FSE with no sample <10 ft-lb FSE.
(d) External visual inspection and test- areas, dents, distortions, defects in
ing. The following applies to the exter- welds and any other conditions, includ-
nal visual inspection and testing of ing leakage, that might render the
cargo tanks: tank unsafe for transportation service;
(1) Where insulation precludes a com- (ii) The piping, valves, and gaskets
plete external visual inspection as re- must be carefully inspected for cor-
quired by paragraphs (d)(2) through roded areas, defects in welds, and other
(d)(6) of this section, the cargo tank conditions, including leakage, that
also must be given an internal visual might render the tank unsafe for trans-
inspection in accordance with para- portation service;
graph (e) of this section. If external (iii) All devices for tightening man-
visual inspection is precluded because hole covers must be operative and
any part of the cargo tank wall is ex- there must be no evidence of leakage at
ternally lined, coated, or designed to manhole covers or gaskets;
prevent an external visual inspection,
(iv) All emergency devices and valves
those areas of the cargo tank must be
including self-closing stop valves, ex-
internally inspected. If internal visual
inspection is precluded because the cess flow valves and remote closure de-
cargo tank is lined, coated, or designed vices must be free from corrosion, dis-
so as to prevent access for internal in- tortion, erosion and any external dam-
spection, the tank must be age that will prevent safe operation.
hydrostatically or pneumatically test- Remote closure devices and self-closing
ed in accordance with paragraph stop valves must be functioned to dem-
(g)(1)(iv) of this section. Those items onstrate proper operation;
able to be externally inspected must be (v) Missing bolts, nuts and fusible
externally inspected and noted in the links or elements must be replaced,
inspection report. and loose bolts and nuts must be tight-
(2) The external visual inspection and ened;
testing must include as a minimum the (vi) All markings on the cargo tank
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
348
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00358 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 180.407
(viii) All major appurtenances and dures set forth in paragraphs (i)(2),
structural attachments on the cargo (i)(3), (i)(5) and (i)(6) of this section.
tank including, but not limited to, sus- (6) The gaskets on any full opening
pension system attachments, con- rear head must be:
necting structures, and those elements (i) Visually inspected for cracks or
of the upper coupler (fifth wheel) as- splits caused by weather or wear; and
sembly that can be inspected without (ii) Replaced if cuts or cracks which
dismantling the upper coupler (fifth are likely to cause leakage, or are of a
wheel) assembly must be inspected for depth one-half inch or more, are found.
any corrosion or damage which might (7) The inspector must record the re-
prevent safe operation; sults of the external visual examina-
(ix) For cargo tanks transporting lad- tion as specified in 180.417(b).
ing corrosive to the tank, areas cov- (e) Internal visual inspection. (1) When
ered by the upper coupler (fifth wheel) the cargo tank is not equipped with a
assembly must be inspected at least manhole or inspection opening, or the
once in each two year period for cor- cargo tank design precludes an internal
roded and abraded areas, dents, distor- inspection, the tank shall be
tions, defects in welds, and any other hydrostatically or pneumatically test-
condition that might render the tank ed in accordance with 180.407(c) and (g).
unsafe for transportation service. The (2) The internal visual inspection
upper coupler (fifth wheel) assembly must include as a minimum the fol-
must be removed from the cargo tank lowing:
for this inspection. (i) The tank shell and heads must be
inspected for corroded and abraded
(3) All reclosing pressure relief valves
areas, dents, distortions, defects in
must be externally inspected for any
welds, and any other condition that
corrosion or damage which might pre-
might render the tank unsafe for trans-
vent safe operation. All reclosing pres-
portation service.
sure relief valves on cargo tanks car-
(ii) Tank liners must be inspected as
rying lading corrosive to the valve
specified in 180.407(f).
must be removed from the cargo tank
(3) Corroded or abraded areas of the
for inspection and testing. Each re-
cargo tank wall must be thickness
closing pressure relief valve required to
tested in accordance with paragraphs
be removed and tested must be tested (i)(2), (i)(3), (i)(5) and (i)(6) of this sec-
according to the requirements set forth tion.
in paragraph (j) of this section. (4) The inspector must record the re-
(4) Ring stiffeners or other appur- sults of the internal visual inspection
tenances, installed on cargo tanks con- as specified in 180.417(b).
structed of mild steel or high-strength, (f) Lining inspection. The integrity of
low-alloy steel, that create air cavities the lining on all lined cargo tanks,
adjacent to the tank shell that do not when lining is required by this sub-
allow for external visual inspection chapter, must be verified at least once
must be thickness tested in accordance each year as follows:
with paragraphs (i)(2) and (i)(3) of this (1) Rubber (elastomeric) lining must
section, at least once every 2 years. At be tested for holes as follows:
least four symmetrically distributed (i) Equipment must consist of:
readings must be taken to establish an (A) A high frequency spark tester ca-
average thickness for the ring stiffener pable of producing sufficient voltage to
or appurtenance. If any thickness read- ensure proper calibration;
ing is less than the average thickness (B) A probe with an L shaped 2.4
by more than 10%, thickness testing in mm (0.09 inch) diameter wire with up
accordance with paragraphs (i)(2) and to a 30.5 cm (12-inch) bottom leg (end
(i)(3) of this section must be conducted bent to a 12.7 mm (0.5 inch) radius), or
from the inside of the cargo tank on equally sensitive probe; and
the area of the tank wall covered by (C) A steel calibration coupon 30.5 cm
the appurtenance or ring stiffener. 30.5 cm (12 inches 12 inches) covered
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
(5) Corroded or abraded areas of the with the same material and thickness
cargo tank wall must be thickness as that to be tested. The material on
tested in accordance with the proce- the coupon shall have a test hole to the
349
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00359 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
180.407 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
metal substrate made by puncturing tion and testing according to the re-
the material with a 22 gauge hypo- quirements in paragraph (j) of this sec-
dermic needle or comparable piercing tion.
tool. (A) Each self-closing pressure relief
(ii) The probe must be passed over valve that is an emergency relief vent
the surface of the calibration coupon in must open at no less than the required
a constant uninterrupted manner until set pressure and no more than 110 per-
the hole is found. The hole is detected cent of the required set pressure, and
by the white or light blue spark must reseat to a leak-tight condition
formed. (A sound lining causes a dark at no less than 90 percent of the start-
blue or purple spark.) The voltage must to-discharge pressure or the pressure
be adjusted to the lowest setting that prescribed for the applicable cargo
will produce a minimum 12.7 mm (0.5 tank specification.
inch) spark measured from the top of (B) Normal vents (1 psig vents) must
the lining to the probe. To assure that be tested according to the testing cri-
the setting on the probe has not teria established by the valve manufac-
changed, the spark tester must be cali- turer.
brated periodically using the test cali- (C) Self-closing pressure relief de-
bration coupon, and the same power vices not tested or failing the tests in
source, probe, and cable length. this paragraph (g)(1)(ii) must be re-
(iii) After calibration, the probe must paired or replaced.
be passed over the lining in an uninter- (iii) Except for cargo tanks carrying
rupted stroke. lading corrosive to the tank, areas cov-
(iv) Holes that are found must be re- ered by the upper coupler (fifth wheel)
paired using equipment and procedures assembly must be inspected for cor-
prescribed by the lining manufacturer roded and abraded areas, dents, distor-
or lining installer. tions, defects in welds, and any other
(2) Linings made of other than rubber condition that might render the tank
(elastomeric material) must be tested unsafe for transportation service. The
using equipment and procedures pre- upper coupler (fifth wheel) assembly
scribed by the lining manufacturer or must be removed from the cargo tank
lining installer. for this inspection.
(3) Degraded or defective areas of the (iv) Each cargo tank must be tested
cargo tank liner must be removed and hydrostatically or pneumatically to
the cargo tank wall below the defect the internal pressure specified in the
must be inspected. Corroded areas of following table. At no time during the
the tank wall must be thickness tested pressure test may a cargo tank be sub-
in accordance with paragraphs (i)(2), ject to pressures that exceed those
(i)(3), (i)(5) and (i)(6) of this section. identified in the following table:
(4) The inspector must record the re-
Specification Test pressure
sults of the lining inspection as speci-
fied in 180.417(b). MC 300, 301, 302, 303, 305, 20.7 kPa (3 psig) or design
(g) Pressure test. All components of 306. pressure, whichever is
the cargo tank wall, as defined in greater.
MC 304, 307 .......................... 275.8 kPa (40 psig) or 1.5
178.320(a) of this subchapter, must be times the design pressure,
pressure tested as prescribed by this whichever is greater.
paragraph. MC 310, 311, 312 .................. 20.7 kPa (3 psig) or 1.5 times
the design pressure, which-
(1) Test Procedure(i) As part of the ever is greater.
pressure test, the inspector must per- MC 330, 331 .......................... 1.5 times either the MAWP or
form an external and internal visual the re-rated pressure,
inspection, except that on an MC 338 whichever is applicable.
MC 338 .................................. 1.25 times either the MAWP
cargo tank, or a cargo tank not or the re-rated pressure,
equipped with a manhole or inspection whichever is applicable.
opening, an internal inspection is not DOT 406 ................................ 34.5 kPa (5 psig) or 1.5 times
the MAWP, whichever is
required. greater.
(ii) All self-closing pressure relief
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
350
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00360 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 180.407
joints under pressure with a solution of tested at least once every 5 years. The
soap and water, or using other equally test pressure must be at least the max-
sensitive methods. imum system design operating pressure
351
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00361 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
180.407 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
and must be maintained for five min- externally inspected for leaks during
utes. A heating system employing flues the leakage test. Suitable safeguards
for heating the lading must be tested must be provided to protect personnel
to ensure against lading leakage into should a failure occur. Cargo tanks
the flues or into the atmosphere. may be leakage tested with hazardous
(5) Exceptions. (i) Pressure testing is materials contained in the cargo tank
not required for MC 330 and MC 331 during the test. Leakage test pressure
cargo tanks in dedicated sodium metal must be no less than 80% of MAWP
service. marked on the specification plate ex-
(ii) Pressure testing is not required cept as follows:
for uninsulated lined cargo tanks, with (i) A cargo tank with an MAWP of 690
a design pressure or MAWP of 15 psig kPa (100 psig) or more may be leakage
or less, which receive an external vis- tested at its maximum normal oper-
ual inspection and a lining inspection ating pressure provided it is in dedi-
at least once each year. cated service or services; or
(6) Acceptance criteria. A cargo tank (ii) An MC 330 or MC 331 cargo tank
that leaks, fails to retain test pressure in dedicated liquified petroleum gas
or pneumatic inspection pressure, service may be leakage tested at not
shows distortion, excessive permanent less than 414 kPa (60 psig).
expansion, or other evidence of weak- (iii) An operator of a specification
ness that might render the cargo tank
MC 330 or MC 331 cargo tank, and a
unsafe for transportation service, may
nonspecification cargo tank authorized
not be returned to service, except as
under 173.315(k) of this subchapter,
follows: A cargo tank with a heating
equipped with a meter may check leak
system which does not hold pressure
tightness of the internal self-closing
may remain in service as an unheated
stop valve by conducting a meter creep
cargo tank if:
test. (See appendix B to this part.)
(i) The heating system remains in
place and is structurally sound and no (iv) An MC 330 or MC 331 cargo tank
lading may leak into the heating sys- in dedicated service for anhydrous am-
tem, and monia may be leakage tested at not
(ii) The specification plate heating less than 414 kPa (60 psig).
system information is changed to indi- (v) A non-specification cargo tank re-
cate that the cargo tank has no work- quired by 173.8(d) of this subchapter to
ing heating system. be leakage tested, must be leakage
(7) The inspector must record the re- tested at not less than 16.6 kPa (2.4
sults of the pressure test as specified in psig), or as specified in paragraph (h)(2)
180.417(b). of this section.
(h) Leakage test. The following re- (2) Cargo tanks used to transport pe-
quirements apply to cargo tanks re- troleum distillate fuels that are
quiring a leakage test: equipped with vapor collection equip-
(1) Each cargo tank must be tested ment may be leak tested in accordance
for leaks in accordance with paragraph with the Environmental Protection
(c) of this section. The leakage test Agencys Method 27Determination
must include testing product piping of Vapor Tightness of Gasoline Deliv-
with all valves and accessories in place ery Tank Using Pressure-Vacuum
and operative, except that any venting Test, as set forth in Appendix A to 40
devices set to discharge at less than CFR part 60. Test methods and proce-
the leakage test pressure must be re- dures and maximum allowable pressure
moved or rendered inoperative during and vacuum changes are in 40 CFR
the test. All internal or external self- 63.425(e). The hydrostatic test alter-
closing stop valves must be tested for native, using liquid in Environmental
leak tightness. Each cargo tank of a Protection Agencys Method 27De-
multi-cargo tank motor vehicle must termination of Vapor Tightness of Gas-
be tested with adjacent cargo tanks oline Delivery Tank Using Pressure-
empty and at atmospheric pressure. Vacuum Test, may not be used to sat-
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
Test pressure must be maintained for isfy the leak testing requirements of
at least 5 minutes. Cargo tanks in liq- this paragraph. The test must be con-
uefied compressed gas service must be ducted using air.
352
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00362 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 180.407
(3) A cargo tank that fails to retain (v) Areas around shell reinforce-
leakage test pressure may not be re- ments;
turned to service as a specification (vi) Areas around appurtenance at-
cargo tank, except under conditions tachments;
specified in 180.411(d). (vii) Areas near upper coupler (fifth
(4) After July 1, 2000, Registered In- wheel) assembly attachments;
spectors of specification MC 330 and MC (viii) Areas near suspension system
331 cargo tanks, and nonspecification attachments and connecting struc-
cargo tanks authorized under tures;
173.315(k) of this subchapter must vis- (ix) Known thin areas in the tank
ually inspect the delivery hose assem- shell and nominal liquid level lines;
bly and piping system while the assem- and
bly is under leakage test pressure uti- (x) Connecting structures joining
lizing the rejection criteria listed in multiple cargo tanks of carbon steel in
180.416(g). Delivery hose assemblies a self-supporting cargo tank motor ve-
not permanently attached to the cargo hicle.
tank motor vehicle may be inspected (5) Minimum thicknesses for MC 300,
separately from the cargo tank motor MC 301, MC 302, MC 303, MC 304, MC 305,
vehicle. In addition to a written record MC 306, MC 307, MC 310, MC 311, and MC
of the inspection prepared in accord- 312 cargo tanks are determined based
ance with 180.417(b), the Registered on the definition of minimum thick-
Inspector conducting the test must ness found in 178.320(a) of this sub-
note the hose identification number, chapter. The following Tables I and II
the date of the test, and the condition identify the In-Service Minimum
of the hose assembly and piping system Thickness values to be used to deter-
tested. mine the minimum thickness for the
(5) The inspector must record the re- referenced cargo tanks. The column
sults of the leakage test as specified in headed Minimum Manufactured
180.417(b). Thickness indicates the minimum
values required for new construction of
(i) Thickness testing. (1) The shell and
DOT 400 series cargo tanks, found in
head thickness of all unlined cargo
Tables I and II of 178.3462, 178.3472,
tanks used for the transportation of
and 178.3482 of this subchapter. In-
materials corrosive to the tank must
Service Minimum Thicknesses for MC
be measured at least once every 2
300, MC 301, MC 302, MC 303, MC 304, MC
years, except that cargo tanks meas-
305, MC 306, MC 307, MC 310, MC 311, and
uring less than the sum of the min-
MC 312 cargo tanks are based on 90 per-
imum prescribed thickness, plus one-
cent of the manufactured thickness
fifth of the original corrosion allow-
specified in the DOT specification,
ance, must be tested annually.
rounded to three places.
(2) Measurements must be made
using a device capable of accurately TABLE IIN-SERVICE MINIMUM THICKNESS FOR
measuring thickness to within 0.002 of MC 300, MC 303, MC 304, MC 306, MC
an inch. 307, MC 310, MC 311, AND MC 312 SPECI-
(3) Any person performing thickness FICATION CARGO TANKS CONSTRUCTED OF
testing must be trained in the proper STEEL AND STEEL ALLOYS
use of the thickness testing device used
Nominal In-service
in accordance with the manufacturers decimal minimum
Minimum manufactured thickness
instruction. (US gauge or inches) equiva- thickness
lent for reference
(4) Thickness testing must be per- (inches) (inches)
formed in the following areas of the
19 ....................................................... 0.0418 0.038
cargo tank wall, as a minimum: 18 ....................................................... 0.0478 0.043
(i) Areas of the tank shell and heads 17 ....................................................... 0.0538 0.048
and shell and head area around any 16 ....................................................... 0.0598 0.054
15 ....................................................... 0.0673 0.061
piping that retains lading; 14 ....................................................... 0.0747 0.067
(ii) Areas of high shell stress such as 13 ....................................................... 0.0897 0.081
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
353
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00363 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
180.407 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
TABLE IIN-SERVICE MINIMUM THICKNESS FOR tion may not return the cargo tank to
MC 300, MC 303, MC 304, MC 306, MC hazardous materials service. The
307, MC 310, MC 311, AND MC 312 SPECI- tanks specification plate must be re-
FICATION CARGO TANKS CONSTRUCTED OF moved, obliterated or covered in a se-
STEEL AND STEEL ALLOYSContinued cure manner.
Nominal In-service
(8) The inspector must record the re-
Minimum manufactured thickness decimal minimum sults of the thickness test as specified
equiva- thickness in 180.417(b).
(US gauge or inches) lent for reference
(inches) (inches) (9) For MC 331 cargo tanks con-
8 ......................................................... 0.1644 0.148
structed before October 1, 2003, min-
7 ......................................................... 0.1793 0.161 imum thickness shall be determined by
3/16 .................................................... 0.1875 0.169 the thickness indicated on the U1A
1/4 ...................................................... 0.2500 0.225
5/16 .................................................... 0.3125 0.281
form minus any corrosion allowance.
3/8 ...................................................... 0.3750 0.338 For MC 331 cargo tanks constructed
after October 1, 2003, the minimum
TABLE IIIN-SERVICE MINIMUM THICKNESS FOR thickness will be the value indicated
MC 301, MC 302, MC 304, MC 305, MC on the specification plate. If no corro-
306, MC 307, MC 311, AND MC 312 SPECI- sion allowance is indicated on the U1A
FICATION CARGO TANKS CONSTRUCTED OF
form then the thickness of the tank
ALUMINUM AND ALUMINUM ALLOYS shall be the thickness of the material
of construction indicated on the UIA
In-service form with no corrosion allowance.
minimum
Minimum manufactured thickness thickness (10) For 400-series cargo tanks, min-
(inches) imum thickness is calculated accord-
0.078 ...................................................................... 0.070 ing to tables in each applicable section
0.087 ...................................................................... 0.078 of this subchapter for that specifica-
0.096 ...................................................................... 0.086 tion: 178.3462 for DOT 406 cargo
0.109 ...................................................................... 0.098
0.130 ...................................................................... 0.117
tanks, 178.3472 for DOT 407 cargo
0.141 ...................................................................... 0.127 tanks, and 178.3482 for DOT 412 cargo
0.151 ...................................................................... 0.136 tanks.
0.172 ...................................................................... 0.155
0.173 ...................................................................... 0.156 (j) Pressure vent bench test. When re-
0.194 ...................................................................... 0.175 quired by this section, pressure relief
0.216 ...................................................................... 0.194 valves must be tested for proper func-
0.237 ...................................................................... 0.213
0.270 ...................................................................... 0.243 tion as follows:
0.360 ...................................................................... 0.324 (1) Each self-closing pressure relief
0.450 ...................................................................... 0.405 valve must open and reseat to a
0.540 ...................................................................... 0.486
leaktight condition at the pressures
(6) An owner of a cargo tank that no prescribed for the applicable cargo
longer conforms to the minimum tank specification or at the following
thickness prescribed for the design as pressures:
manufactured may use the cargo tank (i) For MC 306 cargo tanks:
to transport authorized materials at (A) With MC 306 reclosing pressure
reduced maximum weight of lading or relief valves, it must open at not less
reduced maximum working pressure, or than 3 psi and not more than 4.4 psi and
combinations thereof, provided the fol- must reseat to a leak tight-condition
lowing conditions are met: at no less than 2.7 psi.
(i) A Design Certifying Engineer (B) With reclosing pressure relief
must certify that the cargo tank de- valves modified as provided in
sign and thickness are appropriate for 180.405(c) to conform with DOT 406
the reduced loading conditions by specifications, according to the pres-
issuance of a revised manufacturers sures set forth for a DOT 406 cargo
certificate, and tank in 178.3463 of this subchapter.
(ii) The cargo tank motor vehicles (ii) For MC 307 cargo tanks:
nameplate must reflect the revised (A) With MC 307 reclosing pressure
service limits. relief valves, it must open at not less
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
(7) An owner of a cargo tank that no than the cargo tank MAWP and not
longer conforms with the minimum more than 110% of the cargo tank
thickness prescribed for the specifica- MAWP and must reseat to a leak tight-
354
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00364 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 180.409
355
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00365 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
180.411 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
perform them as required by this sub- (c) Weld or structural defects. Any
chapter. cargo tank with a weld defect such as
(d) A motor carrier or cargo tank a crack, pinhole, or incomplete fusion,
owner who meets the requirements of or a structural defect must be taken
paragraph (a) of this section may use out of hazardous materials service
an employee who is not a Registered until repaired.
Inspector to perform a portion of the (d) Leakage. All sources of leakage
pressure retest required by 180.407(g). must be properly repaired prior to re-
External and internal visual inspec- turning a tank to hazardous materials
tions must be accomplished by a Reg- service.
istered Inspector, but the hydrostatic (e) Relief valves. Any pressure relief
or pneumatic pressure test, as set forth valve that fails to open and reclose at
in 180.407(g)(1)(viii) and (ix), respec- the prescribed pressure must be re-
tively, may be done by an employee paired or replaced.
who is not a Registered Inspector pro- (f) Liner integrity. Any defect shown
vided that by the test must be properly repaired.
(1) The employee is familiar with the (g) Pressure test. Any tank that fails
cargo tank and is trained and experi- to meet the acceptance criteria found
enced in the use of the inspection and in the individual specification that ap-
testing equipment used; plies must be properly repaired.
(2) The employer submits certifi- [Amdt. 1802, 54 FR 25032, June 12, 1989, as
cation that such employee meets the amended at 68 FR 75764, Dec. 31, 2003]
qualification requirements to the Asso-
ciate Administrator, Attn: (PHH32), 180.413 Repair, modification, stretch-
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safe- ing, rebarrelling, or mounting of
ty Administration, Department of specification cargo tanks.
Transportation, East Building, 1200 (a) General. Any repair, modification,
New Jersey Avenue, SE., Washington, stretching, rebarrelling, or mounting
DC 20590; and of a cargo tank must be performed in
(3) The employer retains a copy of conformance with the requirements of
the testers qualifications with the doc- this section.
uments required by 180.417(b). (1) Except as otherwise provided in
this section, each repair, modification,
[Amdt. 1802, 55 FR 37069, Sept. 7, 1990, as
amended by Amdt. 1803, 56 FR 66287, Dec. 20, stretching, or rebarrelling of a speci-
1991; 57 FR 45466, Oct. 1, 1992; Amdt. 18011, 62 fication cargo tank must be performed
FR 1217, Jan. 8, 1997; 66 FR 45391, Aug. 28, by a repair facility holding a valid Na-
2001; 68 FR 19288, Apr. 18, 2003; 70 FR 56100, tional Board Certificate of Authoriza-
Sept. 23, 2005; 72 FR 55697, Oct. 1, 2007] tion for use of the National Board R
stamp and must be made in accordance
180.411 Acceptable results of tests with the edition of the National Board
and inspections. Inspection Code in effect at the time
(a) Corroded or abraded areas. The the work is performed.
minimum thickness may not be less (i) Repairs, modifications,
than that prescribed in the applicable stretchings, and rebarrellings per-
specification. formed on non-ASME stamped speci-
(b) Dents, cuts, digs and gouges. For fication cargo tanks may be performed
evaluation procedures, see CGA C6 by:
(IBR, see 171.7 of this subchapter). (A) A cargo tank manufacturer hold-
(1) For dents at welds or that include ing a valid ASME Certificate of Au-
a weld, the maximum allowable depth thorization for the use of the ASME
is 12 inch. For dents away from welds, U stamp using the quality control
the maximum allowable depth is 110 of procedures used to obtain the Certifi-
the greatest dimension of the dent, but cate of Authorization; or
in no case may the depth exceed one (B) A repair facility holding a valid
inch. National Board Certificate of Author-
(2) The minimum thickness remain- ization for use of the National Board
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
ing beneath a cut, dig, or gouge may R stamp using the quality control
not be less than that prescribed in the procedures used to obtain the Certifi-
applicable specification. cate of Authorization.
356
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00366 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 180.413
(ii) A repair, modification, stretch- (5) MC 338 cargo tanks must be re-
ing, or rebarrelling of a non-ASME paired in accordance with the speci-
stamped cargo tank may be done with- fication requirements in effect at the
out certification by an Authorized In- time of repair; and
spector, completion of the R1 form, or (6) MC 330 and MC 331 cargo tanks
being stamped with the R stamp. must be repaired in accordance with
(2) Prior to each repair, modification, the repair procedures described in CGA
stretching, rebarrelling, or mounting, Technical Bulletin TB2 (IBR, see
the cargo tank motor vehicle must be 171.7 of this subchapter) and the Na-
emptied of any hazardous material lad- tional Board Inspection Code (IBR, see
ing. In addition, cargo tank motor ve- 171.7 of this subchapter). Each cargo
hicles used to transport flammable or tank having cracks or other defects re-
toxic lading must be sufficiently quiring welded repairs must meet all
cleaned of residue and purged of vapors inspection, test, and heat treatment re-
so any potential hazard is removed, in- quirements in 178.33716 of this sub-
cluding void spaces between double chapter in effect at the time of the re-
bulkheads, piping and vapor recovery pair, except that postweld heat treat-
systems. ment after minor weld repairs is not
(3) Each person performing a repair, required. When a repair is made of de-
modification, stretching, rebarrelling fects revealed by the wet fluorescent
or mounting of a DOT specification magnetic particle inspection, including
cargo tank must be registered in ac- those repaired by grinding, the affected
cordance with subpart F of part 107 of area of the cargo tank must again be
this chapter. examined by the wet fluorescent mag-
netic particle method after hydrostatic
(b) Repair. The suitability of each re-
testing to assure that all defects have
pair affecting the structural integrity
been removed.
or lading retention capability of the
(c) Maintenance or replacement of pip-
cargo tank must be determined by the
ing, valves, hoses, or fittings. After each
testing required either in the applica-
repair, maintenance or replacement of
ble manufacturing specification or in
a pipe, valve, hose, or fitting on a cargo
180.407(g)(1)(iv). Each repair of a cargo tank, that component must be in-
tank involving welding on the shell or stalled in accordance with the provi-
head must be certified by a Registered sions of the applicable specification be-
Inspector. The following provisions fore the cargo tank is returned to serv-
apply to specific cargo tank repairs: ice.
(1) DOT 406, DOT 407, and DOT 412 (1) After maintenance or replacement
cargo tanks must be repaired in ac- that does not involve welding on the
cordance with the specification re- cargo tank wall, the repaired or re-
quirements in effect at the time of re- placed piping, valve, hose, or fitting
pair; must be tested for leaks. This require-
(2) MC 300, MC 301, MC 302, MC 303, ment is met when the piping, valve,
MC 305, and MC 306 cargo tanks must hose, or fitting is tested after installa-
be repaired in accordance with either tion in accordance with 180.407(h)(1).
the most recent revision of the original A hose may be tested before or after in-
specification or with the DOT 406 speci- stallation on the cargo tank.
fication in effect at the time of repair; (2) After repair or replacement of pip-
(3) MC 304 and MC 307 cargo tanks ing, valves, or fittings that involves
must be repaired in accordance with ei- welding on the cargo tank wall, the
ther the most recent revision of the cargo tank must be pressure tested in
original specification or with the DOT accordance with the applicable manu-
407 specification in effect at the time of facturing specification or
repair; 180.407(g)(1)(iv). In addition, the af-
(4) MC 310, MC 311, and MC 312 cargo fected piping, valve, or fitting must be
tanks must be repaired in accordance tested in accordance with paragraph
with either the most recent revision of (c)(1) of this section.
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
the original specification or with the (3) Hoses on cargo tanks in dedicated
DOT 412 specification in effect at the liquefied compressed gas, except car-
time of repair; bon dioxide, service are excepted from
357
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00367 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
180.413 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
these testing requirements, but must (i) Have knowledge of the original de-
be tested in accordance with 180.416(f). sign concept, particularly with respect
(d) Modification, stretching, or rebarrel- to structural design analysis, material
ling. Modification, stretching or re- and welding procedures.
barrelling of a cargo tank motor vehi- (ii) Assure compliance of the rebuilt
cle must conform to the following pro- cargo tanks structural integrity, vent-
visions: ing, and accident damage protection
(1) The design of the modified, with the applicable specification re-
stretched, or rebarrelled cargo tank quirements.
motor vehicle must be certified in (iii) Assure compliance with all ap-
writing by a Design Certifying Engi- plicable Federal Motor Carrier Safety
neer as meeting the structural integ- Regulations for all newly installed
rity and accident damage protection safety equipment.
requirements of the applicable speci- (iv) Assure the suitability of each
fication. modification, stretching and rebarrel-
(2) Except as provided in paragraph ling that affects the lading retention
(d)(2)(v) of this section, all new mate- capability of the cargo tank by per-
rial and equipment affected by modi- forming the tests required in the appli-
fication, stretching, or rebarrelling cable specification or 180.407(g)(1)(iv).
must meet the requirements of the (v) Any modification that changes in-
specification in effect at the time such formation displayed on the specifica-
work is performed, and all applicable tion plate requires the installation of a
structural integrity requirements supplemental specification plate,
( 178.3373, 178.3383, or 178.3453 of nameplate, or both containing the in-
this subchapter). The work must con- formation that reflects the cargo tank
form to the requirements of the appli- as modified, stretched or rebarrelled.
cable specification as follows: The plate must include the name of the
(i) For specification MC 300, MC 301, person or facility doing the work, DOT
MC 302, MC 303, MC 305 and MC 306 registration number, date work is com-
cargo tanks, the provisions of either pleted, retest information, and any
specification MC 306 or DOT 406 until other information that differs from the
August 31, 1995 and, thereafter to speci- original plate. The supplemental plates
fication DOT 406 only; must be installed immediately adja-
(ii) For specification MC 304 and MC cent to the existing plate or plates.
307 cargo tanks, the provisions of ei- (vi) On a variable specification cargo
ther specification MC 307 or DOT 407 tank, install a supplemental or new
until August 31, 1995 and, thereafter to variable specification plate, and re-
specification DOT 407 only; place the specification listed on the
(iii) For specification MC 310, MC 311, original specification plate with the
and MC 312 cargo tanks, the provisions words see variable specification
of either specification MC 312 or DOT plate.
412 until August 31, 1995 and, thereafter (4) A Registered Inspector must cer-
to specification DOT 412 only; tify that the modified, stretched, or
(iv) For specification MC 330 cargo rebarrelled cargo tank conforms to the
tanks, the provisions of specification requirements of this section and the
MC 331; and applicable specification by issuing a
(v) For specification MC 338 cargo supplemental certificate of compliance.
tanks, the provisions of specification The registration number of the Reg-
MC 338. However, structural modifica- istered Inspector must be entered on
tions to MC 338 cargo tanks authorized the certificate.
under 180.405(d) may conform to appli- (e) Mounting of cargo tanks. Mounting
cable provisions of the ASME Code in- a cargo tank on a cargo tank motor ve-
stead of specification MC 338, provided hicle must be:
the structural integrity of the modified (1) Performed as required by para-
cargo tank is at least equivalent to graph (d)(2) of this section and certified
that of the original cargo tank. by a Design Certifying Engineer if the
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
(3) The person performing the modi- mounting of a cargo tank on a motor
fication, stretching, or rebarrelling vehicle chassis involves welding on the
must: cargo tank head or shell or any change
358
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00368 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 180.416
(ii) I for internal visual inspection; (b) Hose identification. By July 1, 2000,
(iii) P for pressure test; the operator must assure that each de-
(iv) L for lining inspection; livery hose assembly is permanently
359
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00369 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
180.416 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
marked with a unique identification tained until the next test of the same
number and maximum working pres- type is successfully completed.
sure. (e) Annual hose leakage test. The
(c) Post-delivery hose check. After each owner of a delivery hose assembly that
unloading, the operator must visually is not permanently attached to a cargo
check that portion of the delivery hose tank motor vehicle must ensure that
assembly deployed during the unload- the hose assembly is annually tested in
ing. accordance with 180.407(h)(4).
(d) Monthly inspections and tests. (1) (f) New or repaired delivery hose assem-
The operator must visually inspect blies. Each operator of a cargo tank
each delivery hose assembly at least must ensure each new and repaired de-
once each calendar month the delivery livery hose assembly is tested at a min-
hose assembly is in service. imum of 120 percent of the hose max-
(2) The operator must visually in- imum working pressure.
spect the piping system at least once (1) The operator must visually exam-
each calendar month the cargo tank is ine the delivery hose assembly while it
in service. The inspection must include is under pressure.
fusible elements and all components of (2) Upon successful completion of the
the piping system, including bolts, con- pressure test and inspection, the oper-
nections, and seals. ator must assure that the delivery hose
(3) At least once each calendar month assembly is permanently marked with
a cargo tank is in service, the operator the month and year of the test.
must actuate all emergency discharge (3) After July 1, 2000, the operator
control devices designed to close the must complete a record documenting
internal self-closing stop valve to as- the test and inspection, including the
sure that all linkages operate as de- date, the signature of the inspector,
signed. appendix A to this part outlines the hose owner, the hose identification
acceptable procedures that may be number, the date of original delivery
used for this test. hose assembly and test, notes of any
(4) The operator of a cargo tank must defects observed and repairs made, and
check the internal self-closing stop an indication that the delivery hose as-
valve in the liquid discharge opening sembly passed or failed the tests and
for leakage through the valve at least inspections. A copy of each test and in-
once each calendar month the cargo spection record must be retained by
tank is in service. On cargo tanks the operator at its principal place of
equipped with a meter, the meter creep business or where the vehicle is housed
test as outlined in appendix B to this or maintained until the next test of the
part or a test providing equivalent ac- same type is successfully completed.
curacy is acceptable. For cargo tanks (g) Rejection criteria. (1) No operator
that are not equipped with a meter, ap- may use a delivery hose assembly de-
pendix B to this part outlines one ac- termined to have any condition identi-
ceptable method that may be used to fied below for unloading liquefied com-
check internal self-closing stop valves pressed gases. An operator may remove
for closure. and replace damaged sections or cor-
(5) The operator must note each in- rect defects discovered. Repaired hose
spection in a record. That record must assemblies may be placed back in serv-
include the inspection date, the name ice if retested successfully in accord-
of the person performing the inspec- ance with paragraph (f) of this section.
tion, the hose assembly identification (i) Damage to the hose cover that ex-
number, the manufacturer of the hose poses the reinforcement.
assembly, the date the hose was assem- (ii) Wire braid reinforcement that
bled and tested, and an indication that has been kinked or flattened so as to
the delivery hose assembly and piping permanently deform the wire braid.
system passed or failed the tests and (iii) Soft spots when not under pres-
inspections. The operator must retain sure, bulging under pressure, or loose
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
360
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00370 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 180.417
(v) Loose or missing bolts or fas- tank motor vehicle must also retain a
tenings on bolted hose coupling assem- copy of the vehicle certification report
blies. for as long as the cargo tank motor ve-
(2) No operator may use a cargo tank hicle is used by that carrier and for one
with a piping system found to have any year thereafter. The information re-
condition identified in this paragraph quired by this section must be main-
(g)(2) for unloading liquefied com- tained at the companys principal place
pressed gases. of business or at the location where the
(i) Any external leak identifiable vehicle is housed or maintained. The
without the use of instruments. provisions of this section do not apply
(ii) Bolts that are loose, missing, or to a motor carrier who leases a cargo
severely corroded. tank for less than 30 days.
(iii) Manual stop valves that will not (3) DOT Specification cargo tanks man-
actuate. ufactured before September 1, 1995(i)
(iv) Rubber hose flexible connectors Non-ASME Code stamped cargo tanksIf
with any condition outlined in para- an owner does not have a manufactur-
graph (g)(1) of this section. ers certificate for a cargo tank and he
(v) Stainless steel flexible connectors wishes to certify it as a specification
with damaged reinforcement braid. cargo tank, the owner must perform
(vi) Internal self-closing stop valves appropriate tests and inspections,
that fail to close or that permit leak- under the direct supervision of a Reg-
age through the valve detectable with- istered Inspector, to determine if the
out the use of instruments. cargo tank conforms with the applica-
(vii) Pipes or joints that are severely ble specification. Both the owner and
corroded. the Registered Inspector must certify
[64 FR 28051, May 24, 1999, as amended at 78 that the cargo tank fully conforms to
FR 15330, Mar. 11, 2013] the applicable specification. The owner
must retain the certificate, as specified
180.417 Reporting and record reten- in this section.
tion requirements. (ii) ASME Code Stamped cargo tanks. If
(a) Vehicle certification. (1) Each the owner does not have the manufac-
owner of a specification cargo tank turers certificate required by the spec-
must retain the manufacturers certifi- ification and the manufacturers data
cate, the manufacturers ASME U1A report required by the ASME, the
data report, where applicable, and re- owner may contact the National Board
lated papers certifying that the speci- for a copy of the manufacturers data
fication cargo tank identified in the report, if the cargo tank was registered
documents was manufactured and test- with the National Board, or copy the
ed in accordance with the applicable information contained on the cargo
specification. This would include any tanks identification and ASME Code
certification of emergency discharge plates. Additionally, both the owner
control systems required by 173.315(n) and the Registered Inspector must cer-
of this subchapter or 180.405(m). The tify that the cargo tank fully conforms
owner must retain the documents to the specification. The owner must
throughout his ownership of the speci- retain such documents, as specified in
fication cargo tank and for one year this section.
thereafter. In the event of a change in (b) Test or inspection reporting. Each
ownership, the prior owner must retain person performing a test or inspection
non-fading photo copies of these docu- as specified in 180.407 must prepare a
ments for one year. written report, in English, in accord-
(2) Each motor carrier who uses a ance with this paragraph.
specification cargo tank motor vehicle (1) Each test or inspection report
must obtain a copy of the manufactur- must include the following informa-
ers certificate and related papers or tion:
the alternative report authorized by (i) Owners and manufacturers
paragraph (a)(3)(i) or (ii) of this section unique serial number for the cargo
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
361
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00371 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
180.417 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
(iii) Cargo tank DOT or MC specifica- (x) Dated signature of the registered
tion number; inspector and the cargo tank owner.
(iv) MAWP of the cargo tank; (3) The owner and the motor carrier,
(v) Minimum thickness of the cargo if not the owner, must each retain a
tank shell and heads when the cargo copy of the test and inspection reports
tank is thickness tested in accordance until the next test or inspection of the
with 180.407(d)(5), 180.407(e)(3), same type is successfully completed.
180.407(f)(3), or 180.407(i); This requirement does not apply to a
(vi) Indication of whether the cargo motor carrier leasing a cargo tank for
tank is lined, insulated, or both; and fewer than 30 days.
(vii) Indication of special service of (c) Additional requirements for Speci-
the cargo tank (e.g., transports mate- fication MC 330 and MC 331 cargo tanks.
rial corrosive to the tank, dedicated (1) After completion of the pressure
service, etc.) test specified in 180.407(g)(3), each
(2) Each test or inspection report motor carrier operating a Specification
must include the following specific in- MC 330 or MC 331 cargo tank in anhy-
formation as appropriate for each indi- drous ammonia, liquefied petroleum
vidual type of test or inspection: gas, or any other service that may
(i) Type of test or inspection per- cause stress corrosion cracking, must
formed; make a written report containing the
(ii) Date of test or inspection (month following information:
and year); (i) Carriers name, address of prin-
(iii) Listing of all items tested or in- cipal place of business, and telephone
spected, including information about number;
pressure relief devices that are re- (ii) Complete identification plate
moved, inspected and tested or re- data required by Specification MC 330
placed, when applicable (type of device, or MC 331, including data required by
set to discharge pressure, pressure at ASME Code;
which device opened, pressure at which (iii) Carriers equipment number;
device re-seated, and a statement of (iv) A statement indicating whether
disposition of the device (e.g., re- or not the tank was stress relieved
installed, repaired, or replaced)); infor- after fabrication;
mation regarding the inspection of (v) Name and address of the person
upper coupler assemblies, when appli- performing the test and the date of the
cable (visually examined in place, or test;
removed for examination); and, infor- (vi) A statement of the nature and se-
mation regarding leakage and pressure verity of any defects found. In par-
testing, when applicable (pneumatic or ticular, information must be furnished
hydrostatic testing method, identifica- to indicate the location of defects de-
tion of the fluid used for the test, test tected, such as in weld, heat-affected
pressure, and holding time of test); zone, the liquid phase, the vapor phase,
(iv) Location of defects found and or the head-to-shell seam. If no defect
method of repair; or damage was discovered, that fact
(v) ASME or National Board Certifi- must be reported;
cate of Authorization number of facil- (vii) A statement indicating the
ity performing repairs, if applicable; methods employed to make repairs,
(vi) Name and address of person per- who made the repairs, and the date
forming test; they were completed. Also, a statement
(vii) Registration number of the fa- of whether or not the tank was stress
cility or person performing the test; relieved after repairs and, if so, wheth-
(viii) Continued qualification state- er full or local stress relieving was per-
ment, such as cargo tank meets the formed;
requirements of the DOT specification (viii) A statement of the disposition
identified on this report or cargo of the cargo tank, such as cargo tank
tank fails to meet the requirements of scrapped or cargo tank returned to
the DOT specification identified on service; and
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
362
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00372 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 180.503
any other service that may cause this subchapter, applicable to any per-
stress corrosion cracking. Also, if the son who manufactures, fabricates,
cargo tank has been used in anhydrous marks, maintains, repairs, inspects, or
ammonia service since the last report, services tank cars to ensure continuing
a statement indicating whether each qualification.
shipment of ammonia was certified by (b) This subpart also establishes the
its shipper as containing 0.2 percent minimum acceptable framework for an
water by weight. owners qualification program for tank
(2) A copy of the report must be re- cars and components. Owners should
tained by the carrier at its principal follow this subpart in developing their
place of business during the period the written procedures (work instructions),
cargo tank is in the carriers service as required under 179.7(d), for use by
and for one year thereafter. Upon a tank car facility employees. The own-
written request to, and with the ap- ers qualification program for each
proval of, the Field Administrator, Re- tank car, or a fleet of tank cars, must
gional Service Center, Federal Motor identify where to inspect, how to in-
Carrier Safety Administration for the spect, and the acceptance criteria. Al-
region in which a motor carrier has its ternative inspection and test proce-
principal place of business, the carrier dures or intervals based on a damage-
may maintain the reports at a regional tolerance analysis or service reliability
or terminal office. assessment must be approved by the
(3) The requirement in paragraph Associate Administrator for Railroad
(c)(1) of this section does not apply to Safety in accordance with 180.509(l).
a motor carrier leasing a cargo tank Tank car facilities must incorporate
for less than 30 days. the owners qualification program in
(d) Supplying certificates and reports. their quality assurance program, as re-
Each person offering a DOT-specifica- quired under 179.7(a)(2), (b)(3), (b)(5),
tion cargo tank for sale or lease must and (d).
provide the purchaser or lessee a copy (c) Any person who performs a func-
of the cargo tank certificate of compli- tion prescribed in this part shall per-
ance, records of repair, modification, form that function in accordance with
stretching, or rebarrelling; and the this part.
most recent inspection and test reports (d) Where, in this subpart, a person is
made under this section. Copies of such required to make documents available
reports must be provided to the lessee to FRA upon request, such request
if the cargo tank is leased for more means that credentialed FRA per-
than 30 days. sonnel or an authorized representative
of the Department may view the docu-
[Amdt. 1802, 54 FR 25032, June 12, 1989, as ments and make copies of them. The
amended at 55 FR 21038, May 22, 1990; 55 FR document owners may seek confiden-
37069, Sept. 7, 1990; 56 FR 27879, June 17, 1991;
58 FR 12905, Mar. 8, 1993; Amdt. 1802, 59 FR
tial treatment of the documents pre-
1786, Jan. 12, 1994; Amdt. 18010, 61 FR 51343, sented. See 105.30.
Oct. 1, 1996; 63 FR 52850, Oct. 1, 1998; 64 FR [Amdt. 1808, 60 FR 49079, Sept. 21, 1995, as
28052, May 24, 1999; 65 FR 50463, Aug. 18, 2000; amended by Amdt. 17950, 61 FR 33256, June
67 FR 61016, Sept. 27, 2002; 68 FR 19290, Apr. 26, 1996; 77 FR 37986, June 25, 2012]
18, 2003; 68 FR 52372, Sept. 3, 2003; 69 FR 54047,
Sept. 7, 2004; 70 FR 34077, June 13, 2005; 76 FR 180.503 Definitions.
43532, July 20, 2011]
The following definitions and those
contained in 171.8 and 179.2 of this
Subpart FQualification and subchapter apply:
Maintenance of Tank Cars Coating/lining owner means the person
with the financial responsibility for
SOURCE: Amdt. 1808, 60 FR 49079, Sept. 21, purchasing and maintaining the integ-
1995, unless otherwise noted. rity of the interior coating or lining.
Corrosive to the tank or service equip-
180.501 Applicability. ment means a material identified in Ap-
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
363
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00373 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
180.503 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
corrosion rate on steel greater than 2.5 specification, has a signed test report,
milli-inch per year (mpy) (0.0025 inch is marked to denote this passage, and
per year). is considered qualified for hazardous
Defects mean abrasions; corrosion; materials transportation under this
cracks; dents; flaws in welds; distor- subchapter.
tions; erosion; missing, damaged, leak-
Tests and inspec-
ing or loose components and fasteners; Qualification of tions 180.509(*)
and other conditions or imperfections
that may make a tank car unsafe for Tank .......................... Visual Inspection ...... d
Structural Integrity In- e
transportation and/or require it to be spection.
removed from service. Thickness Test: Note f
Design level of reliability and safety 1.
means the level of reliability and safe- Safety System In- h
spection.
ty built into the tank car and, there- Service Equipment ... Service Equipment ... k
fore, inherent in its specification, de- Coating/lining ............ Internal Coatings and i
sign, and manufacture. Linings.
Inspection and test means a careful
and critical examination of a tank car NOTE 1: Subparagraph (f)(2) may require
thickness tests at an interval different from
and its appurtenances performed by
the other items for qualification of the tank.
qualified personnel following the own-
ers qualified procedures. Railworthy, Railworthiness for a tank
Interior heater system means a piping car means that the tank, service equip-
system located within the tank shell ment, safety systems, and all other
that uses a fluid medium to heat the components covered by this subchapter
lading for the purposes of unloading. conform to the HMR, and are otherwise
Maintenance means upkeep, or preser- suitable for continued service and ca-
vation, including repairs necessary and pable of performing their intended
proper to ensure an in-operation tank function until their next qualification.
cars specification until its next quali- Reactive to the tank or service equip-
fication. ment means a material that, in contact
Modification means any change to a with the inner shell of the tank, or
tank car that affects the certificate of with the service equipment, may react
construction prescribed in 179.5, in- to produce heat, gases, and/or pressure
cluding an alteration prescribed in which could substantially reduce the
179.6, or conversion. effectiveness of the packaging or the
Objectively reasonable and articulable safety of its use.
belief means a belief based on particu- Reinforced tank shell butt weld means
larized and identifiable facts that pro- the portion of a butt weld covered by a
vide an objective basis to believe or reinforcing pad.
suspect that a tank car or a class or de- Reinforcing pad means an attachment
sign of tank cars may be in an unsafe welded directly to the tank supporting
operating condition. major structural components for the
Qualification, as relevant to a tank purpose of preventing damage to the
car, means the car and its components tank through fatigue, overstressing,
conforms to the specification to which denting, puncturing, or tearing.
it was designed, manufactured, or Reliability means the quantified abil-
modified to the requirements of this ity of an item or structure to operate
subpart, to the applicable requirements without failure for the specified period
of the AAR Specifications for Tank of its design life or until its next quali-
Cars (IBR, see 171.7 of this sub- fication.
chapter), and to the owners acceptance Representation means attesting
criteria. Qualification is accomplished through documenting, in writing or by
by careful and critical examination marking on the tank (or jacket), that a
that verifies conformance using inspec- tank car is qualified and railworthy.
tions and tests based on a written pro- See also 180.511 and 180.517(b).
gram approved by the tank car owner Safety system means one or more of
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
364
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00374 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 180.509
vertical restraint systems, and systems Specification pre- Other specifications per-
used to protect discontinuities (e.g., scribed in the current Notes
mitted
regulations
skid protection and protective
housings) as required under this sub- 105A600W .................. 105A600.
106A500X ................... ICC27, BE27, 106A500.
chapter.
106A800X ................... 106A800.
Service equipment means equipment 107A * * * * ............... ............................................. 2
used for loading and unloading (includ- Note 1: Tanks built as Specification DOT 105A100W or DOT
ing an interior heating system), sam- 105A100ALW may be altered and converted to DOT
pling, venting, vacuum relief, pressure 105A200W and DOT 105A200ALW, respectively.
Note 2: The test pressures of tanks built in the United States
relief, and measuring the amount of between January 1, 1941 and December 31, 1955, may be in-
lading or the lading temperature. creased to conform to Specification 107A. Original and re-
vised test pressure markings must be indicated and may be
Service equipment owner means the shown on the tank or on a plate attached to the bulkhead of
party responsible for bearing the cost the car. Tanks built before 1941 are not authorized.
of the maintenance of the service (2) [Reserved]
equipment. (3) Specification DOT-113A175W,
Tank car owner means the person to DOT-113C60W, DOT-113D60W, and DOT-
whom a rail cars reporting marks are 113D120W tank cars may continue in
assigned, as listed in the Universal Ma- use, but new construction is not au-
chine Language Equipment Register thorized.
(UMLER).
(4) Class DOT 105A and 105S tank cars
Tank car tank means the shell, heads,
used to transport hydrogen chloride,
tank shell and head weld joints, at-
refrigerated liquid under the terms of
tachment welds, sumps, nozzles,
DOT-E 3992 may continue in service,
flanges, and all other components weld-
but new construction is not authorized.
ed thereto that are either in contact
(5) Specification DOT-103A-ALW,
with the lading or contain the lading.
103AW, 103ALW, 103ANW, 103BW,
Train consist means a written record
103CW, 103DW, 103EW, and 104W tank
of the contents and location of each
cars may continue in use, but new con-
rail car in a train.
struction is not authorized.
[77 FR 37986, June 25, 2012, as amended at 81
FR 35546, June 2, 2016] [Amdt. 1808, 60 FR 49079, Sept. 21, 1995, as
amended at 68 FR 48572, Aug. 14, 2003; 77 FR
180.505 Quality assurance program. 37987, June 25, 2012]
365
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00375 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
180.509 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
coating or lining must ensure an appro- class or design of tank cars may be in
priate inspection and test according to an unsafe operating condition.
the type of defect and the type of main- (c) Frequency of inspection and tests.
tenance or repair performed if: Each tank car shall have an inspection
(1) The tank car shows evidence of and test according to the requirements
abrasion, corrosion, cracks, dents, dis- of this paragraph.
tortions, defects in welds, or any other (1) For Class 107 tank cars and tank
condition that may make the tank car cars of riveted construction, the tank
unsafe for transportation, car must have a hydrostatic pressure
(2) The tank car was in an accident test and visual inspection conforming
and shows evidence of damage to an ex- to the requirements in effect prior to
tent that may adversely affect its ca- July 1, 1996, for the tank specification.
pability to retain its contents or to (2) For Class DOT 113 tank cars, see
otherwise remain railworthy. 173.319(e) of this subchapter.
(3) The tank bears evidence of dam- (3) Fusion welded tank cars must be
age caused by fire. (4) The Associate inspected and tested to be qualified and
Administrator for Railroad Safety, maintained in accordance with the fol-
FRA, requires it based on the existence lowing table. All qualification require-
of an objectively reasonable and ments need not be done at the same
articulable belief that a tank car or a time or at the same facility.
FREQUENCY OF QUALIFICATION INSPECTION AND TESTS
Section 180.509(*) Description Maximum interval
366
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00376 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 180.509
(7) An inspection of the required or application for tank cars with an in-
markings on the tank car for legibility. ternal lead, glass, or rubber lining.
(e) Structural integrity inspections and (4) Each tank car facility must in-
tests. (1) Each tank car owner must en- spect and test the elements identified
sure the structural elements on the in paragraph (e)(1) of this section by
tank car qualify with the applicable re- one or more of the following methods:
quirements of this subchapter. At a (i) Dye penetrant testing (PT);
minimum, the structural integrity in- (ii) Radiographic examination (RT);
spection and test must include: (iii) Magnetic particle testing (MT);
(i) All transverse fillet welds greater (iv) Ultrasonic testing (UT); and
than 0.64 cm (0.25 inch) within 121.92 cm (v) Direct, remote, or enhanced vis-
(4 feet) of the bottom longitudinal cen- ual inspection, using, for example,
terline except body bolster pad attach- magnifiers, fiberscopes, borescopes,
ment welds; and/or machine vision technology (VT).
(ii) The termination of longitudinal (f) Thickness tests. (1) The tank car
fillet welds greater than 0.64 cm (0.25 owner must ensure that each tank car
inch) within 121.92 cm (4 feet) of the facility measures the thickness of the
bottom longitudinal centerline; and tank car shell, heads, sumps, protec-
(iii) The tank shell butt welds within tive housing (i.e., domes), and nozzles
60.96 cm (2 feet) of the bottom longitu- on each tank car by using a device ca-
dinal centerline, unless the tank car pable of accurately measuring the
owner can determine by analysis (e.g., thickness to within 0.05 mm (0.002
finite element analysis, damage-toler- inch).
ance analysis, or service reliability as- (2) The tank car owner must ensure
sessment) that the structure will not that each tank car has a thickness test
develop defects that reduce the design measurement:
level of safety and reliability or fail (i) At the time of an internal coating
within its operational life or prior to or lining application or replacement,
the next required inspection. The or
owner must maintain all documenta- (ii) At least once every ten (10) years
tion used to make such determination for a tank that does not have an inter-
at its principal place of business and nal coating or lining, or
make the data available to FRA or an (iii) At least once every five (5) years
authorized representative of the De- for a tank that does not have an inter-
partment upon request. nal coating or lining when:
(2) For DOT 115 class tanks, para- (A) The tank is used to transport a
graphs (e)(1)(i) through (iii) of this sec- material that is corrosive or reactive
tion apply only to the outer shell fillet to the tank (see Appendix D of this
welds and to the non-reinforced ex- part) or service equipment as defined
posed outer shell butt welds. 180.503, and
(3) The inspection requirements of (B) The remaining shell and head
paragraph (e)(1)(iii) of this section do thickness is tested and determined to
not apply to reinforced tank shell butt be at or below line C in Figure A of this
welds until the time of lining removal paragraph.
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
367
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00377 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
180.509 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
368
ER25JN12.000</GPH>
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00378 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 180.509
tank car coating or lining is removed, of tank cars used to transport haz-
a qualified individual must measure ardous materials must ensure the lin-
the thickness of the tank in the area of ing complies with 173.24(b)(2) and
reduced thickness to ensure that the (b)(3) of this subchapter.
thickness of the tank conforms to (2) The owner of the internal coating
paragraph (g) of this section. or lining must establish and maintain
(g) Service life thickness allowance. (1) a record of the service life of the coat-
A tank car found with a thickness ing or lining and commodity combina-
below the required minimum thickness tion, that is, the specific hazardous
after forming for its specification, as materials that were loaded into a tank
stated in part 179 of this subchapter, and the coating or lining in place at
may continue in service if any reduc- the time of loading. The owner of the
tion in the required minimum thick- internal coating or lining must use its
ness is not more than that provided in knowledge of the service life of each
the following table: coating or lining and commodity com-
bination to establish an appropriate in-
ALLOWABLE SHELL THICKNESS REDUCTIONS spection interval for that coating or
Marked tank test Top shell and tank
lining and commodity combination.
Bottom shell This interval must not exceed eight (8)
pressure head
years, unless the coating or lining
60 psig <200 psig 3.17 mm ............... 1.58 mm.
18 inch .................. inch.
1 16 owner can establish, document, and
200 psig .............. 0.79 mm ............... 0.79 mm. show that the service history or sci-
132 inch ................ 132 inch.
entific analysis of the coating or lining
and commodity pairing supports a
NOTE 1. A tank car owner may add an extra longer inspection interval. The owner
1.58 mm (116 inch) to the values in the table
for local reductions. Local reductions are
must maintain at its principal place of
those that do not exceed 20.32 linear centi- business a written procedure for col-
meters (8 linear inches) measured at the lecting and documenting the perform-
longest diameter, and are separated from the ance of the coating or lining applied
other local reductions by at least 40.64 cm (16 within the tank car for its service life.
inches). The internal coating or lining owner
NOTE 2. Any reduction in the tank car shell must provide this documentation, in-
thickness may not affect the structural cluding inspection and test, repair, re-
strength of the tank car to the extent that
the tank car no longer conforms to the appli-
moval, and application procedures, to
cable provisions of Section 6.2 of the AAR the FRA or car owner upon request.
Specifications for Tank Cars (IBR, see 171.7 Further, the offeror must provide com-
of this subchapter). modity information to the car owner
NOTE 3. For DOT 115 class tank cars, shell and the owner of the internal coating
thickness reductions apply only to the outer or lining upon request.
shell of the tank car. There is no shell or (3) The owner of the internal coating
head thickness reduction authorized for the or lining must provide the test method
inner tank.
and acceptance criteria to the tank car
(2) [Reserved] owner and to the person responsible for
(h) Safety system inspections. Each qualifying the coating or lining. The
tank car owner must ensure qualifica- tank car facility inspecting and testing
tion of the tank car safety systems. the internal coating or lining must fol-
However, inspections of foam or cork low the inspection and test procedure,
insulation systems are not required. including the acceptance requirements,
(i) Internal coating and lining inspec- established by the internal coating or
tion and test. (1) At a minimum, the lining owner.
owner of an internal coating or lining (j) Leakage pressure test. Unless the
applied to protect a tank used to trans- design of the service equipment ar-
port a material that is corrosive or re- rangement precludes it (e.g., there is
active to the tank must ensure an in- no fitting to pressurize the tank), each
spection adequate enough to detect de- owner of a tank car must ensure that
fects or other conditions that could re- the tank, service equipment, and clo-
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
duce the design level of reliability and sures installed, replaced, or reinstalled
safety of the tank is performed. In ad- on the tank car are leak tested. The
dition, the owner of a coating or lining test may be conducted with the lading
369
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00379 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
180.511 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
in the tank. When the test pressure ex- an inspection and test conforming to
ceeds the start-to-discharge or burst this section no later than the date the
pressure of a pressure relief device, the tank car requires a periodic hydro-
device must be rendered inoperative. static pressure test (i.e., the marked
The written procedures and test meth- due date on the tank car for the hydro-
od for leak testing must ensure the static test).
sensitivity and reliability of the test (2) After July 1, 1998, each tank car
method to prevent premature failure. without a metal jacket shall have an
This section does not apply to facilities inspection and test conforming to this
that remove closures for the sole pur- section no later than the date the tank
pose of loading or unloading the lading car requires a periodic hydrostatic
(e.g., blind flanges, pipe plugs, etc.). pressure test (i.e., the marked due date
(k) Service equipment inspection and on the tank car for the hydrostatic
test. (1) Each tank car owner must en- test).
sure the qualification of tank car serv- (3) For tank cars on a 20-year peri-
ice equipment at least once every ten odic hydrostatic pressure test interval
(10) years. The tank car owner must (i.e., Class DOT 103W, 104W, 111A60W1,
analyze the service equipment inspec- 111A100W1, and 111A100W3 tank cars),
tion and test results for any given lad- the next inspection and test date is the
ing and, based on the analysis, adjust midpoint between the compliance date
the inspection and test frequency to in paragraph (l)(1) or (2) of this section
ensure that the design level of reli- and the remaining years until the tank
ability and safety of the equipment is would have had a hydrostatic pressure
met. The owner must maintain at its test.
principal place of business all sup-
[Amdt. 1808, 60 FR 49079, Sept. 21, 1995, as
porting documentation used to make amended by Amdt. 17950, 61 FR 33256, June
such analyses and inspection and test 26, 1996; 62 FR 51561, Oct. 1, 1997; 63 FR 52851,
frequency adjustments. The supporting Oct. 1, 1998; 66 FR 45391, Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR
documentation must be made available 75765, Dec. 31, 2003; 71 FR 54398, Sept. 14, 2006;
to FRA or an authorized representative 77 FR 37987, June 25, 2012]
of the Department upon request.
(2) Each tank car facility must qual- 180.511 Acceptable results of inspec-
ify service equipment, including re- tions and tests.
closing pressure relief devices and inte- Provided it conforms to other appli-
rior heater systems in accordance with cable requirements of this subchapter,
the applicable provisions of Appendix D a tank car is qualified for use if it suc-
of the AAR Specifications for Tank cessfully passes the inspections and
Cars (IBR, see 171.7 of this sub- tests set forth below conducted in ac-
chapter). cordance with this subpart. A represen-
(l) Alternative inspection and test pro- tation of that qualification must con-
cedures. When approved by the Asso- sist of marking the tank in accordance
ciate Administrator for Railroad Safe- with 180.515.
ty, FRA, a tank car owner, or a coating (a) Visual inspection. A tank car suc-
or lining owner may use an alternative cessfully passes the visual inspection
inspection and test procedure or inter- when the inspection shows no struc-
val based on a damage-tolerance anal- tural defect that may cause leakage
ysis (that must include a determina- from or failure of the tank before the
tion of the probable locations and next inspection and test interval.
modes of damage due to fatigue, corro- (b) Structural integrity inspection and
sion, and accidental damage), or based test. A tank car successfully passes the
on a service reliability assessment structural integrity inspection and test
(that must be supported by analysis of when it shows no structural defect that
systematically collected data) in lieu may initiate cracks or propagate
of the other requirements of this sec- cracks and cause failure of the tank be-
tion. fore the next inspection and test inter-
(m) Inspection and test compliance date val.
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
for tank cars. (1) After July 1, 2000, each (c) Service life shell thickness. A tank
tank car with a metal jacket or with a car successfully passes the service life
thermal protection system shall have shell thickness inspection when the
370
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00380 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 180.515
tank shell and heads show no thickness (b) Responsibilities of Tank Car Facil-
reduction below that allowed in ity. A tank car facility must obtain the
180.509(g). permission of the equipment owner be-
(d) Safety system inspection. A tank fore performing work affecting alter-
car successfully passes the safety sys- ation, conversion, repair, or qualifica-
tem inspection when each thermal pro- tion of the owners equipment. For the
tection system, tank head puncture re- purposes of qualification and mainte-
sistance system, coupler vertical re- nance, the tank car facility must use
straint system, and system used to pro- the written instructions furnished by
tect discontinuities (e.g., breakage the owner or have written confirma-
grooves on bottom outlets and protec- tion from the owner allowing the use of
tive housings) on the tank car conform written instructions furnished by the
to this subchapter and show no indica- owner or have written confirmation
tion of a defect that may reduce reli- from the owner allowing the use of
ability before the next inspection and written instructions furnished by an-
test interval. other. A tank car facility must not use,
copy distribute, forward or provide to
(e) Lining and coating inspection. A
another person the owners confiden-
tank car successfully passes the lining
tial and proprietary written instruc-
and coating inspection and test when tions, procedures, manuals, and records
the lining or coating conforms to the without the owners permission. A
owners acceptance criteria. tank car facility must report all work
(f) Leakage pressure test. A tank car performed to the owner. The tank car
successfully passes the leakage pres- facility must also report observed dam-
sure test when all product piping, fit- age, deterioration, failed components,
tings and closures show no indication or non-compliant parts to the owner. A
of leakage. tank car facility must incorporate the
(g) Hydrostatic test. A Class 107 tank owners Quality Assurance Program
car, the inner tank of a Class 115 tank into their own Quality Assurance Pro-
car, or a riveted tank car successfully gram.
passes the hydrostatic test when it (c) Unless the exterior tank car shell
shows no leakage, distortion, excessive or interior tank car jacket has a pro-
permanent expansion, or other evi- tective coating, after a repair that re-
dence of weakness that might render quires the complete removal of the
the tank car unsafe for transportation tank car jacket, the exterior tank car
service. shell and the interior tank car jacket
(h) Service equipment. A tank car suc- must have a protective coating applied
cessfully passes the service equipment to prevent the deterioration of the
inspection and test when this equip- tank shell and tank jacket. Previously
ment conforms to this subchapter and applied coatings that still provide ef-
applicable provisions of Appendix D of fective protection need not be covered
the AAR Specifications for Tank Cars over.
(IBR, see 171.7 of this subchapter), and (d) After repair, replacement, or
shows no indication of a defect that qualification of tank car service equip-
may reduce reliability during the qual- ment, the tank service equipment must
ification interval. successfully pass the leak test pre-
scribed in 180.509(j).
[Amdt. 1808, 60 FR 49079, Sept. 21, 1995, as
amended by Amdt. 17950, 61 FR 33256, June [77 FR 37990, June 25, 2012]
26, 1996; 66 FR 45187, Aug. 28, 2001; 77 FR 37990,
June 25, 2012] 180.515 Markings.
(a) When a tank car passes the re-
180.513 Repairs, alterations, conver- quired inspection and test with accept-
sions, and modifications. able results, the tank car facility must
(a) To work on tank cars, a tank car mark the date of the inspection and
facility must comply with the applica- test and due date of the next inspection
ble requirements of this subpart, the and test qualified on the tank car in
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
AAR Specifications for Tank Cars accordance with the applicable provi-
(IBR, see 171.7 of this subchapter), and sions of Appendix C of the AAR Speci-
the owners requirements. fications for Tank Cars (IBR, see 171.7
371
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00381 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
180.517 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
of this subchapter). When a tank car prescribed in Section 1.3.15 of the AAR
facility performs multiple inspections Specifications for Tank Cars (IBR, see
and tests at the same time, one date 171.7 of this subchapter) apply. The
may be used to satisfy the require- builder of the car or a facility per-
ments of this section. One date also forming work on the car may retain
may be shown when multiple inspec- copies of relevant records.
tions and tests have the same due date. (b) Inspection and test reporting. Each
Dates displayed on the consolidated tank car that is inspected and tested as
stencil (see the applicable provisions specified in 180.509 must have a writ-
of Appendix C of the AAR Specifica- ten report, in English, prepared accord-
tions for Tank Cars) take precedence ing to this paragraph. Marking the
over dates modified, and not stenciled, tank car with the specification (or re-
pursuant to interval adjustments for taining the specification marking on
service equipment, linings, and granted the tank) is the representation that all
alternative inspection intervals. of the appropriate inspections and tests
(b) Converted DOT 105, 109, 112, 114, or were performed and the results meet
120 class tank cars must have the new the tank car owners acceptance cri-
specification and conversion date per- teria to qualify the car for continued
manently marked in letters and figures use. The report may be created and re-
at least 0.95 cm (0.375 inch) high on the tained electronically, but, upon request
outside of the manway nozzle or the by FRA for a copy of the report, it
edge of the manway nozzle flange on must be made available in common
the left side of the car. The marking readable form. The owner must retain
may have the last numeral of the speci- a copy of the inspection and test re-
fication number omitted (e.g., DOT ports until successfully completing the
111A100W instead of DOT next inspection and test of the same
111A100W1). type. The inspection and test report
(c) When qualified within six months must include the following:
of installation and protected from de- (1) Type of inspection and test per-
terioration, the test date marking of a formed (a checklist is acceptable);
reclosing pressure relief device is the (2) The results of each inspection and
installation date on the tank car. test performed;
(3) Tank car reporting mark and
[Amdt. 1808, 60 FR 49079, Sept. 21, 1995, as
amended by Amdt. 17950, 61 FR 33256, June number;
26, 1996; 63 FR 52851, Oct. 1, 1998; 66 FR 45391, (4) Tank car specification;
Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR 75765, Dec. 31, 2003; 77 FR (5) Inspection and test date (month
37991, June 25, 2012] and year);
(6) Location and description of de-
180.517 Reporting and record reten- fects found and method used to repair
tion requirements. each defect;
(a) Certification and representation. (7) The name and address of the tank
Each owner of a specification tank car car facility and the name and signature
must retain the certificate of construc- of inspector; and
tion (AAR Form 42) and related papers (8) The unique code (station stencil)
certifying that the manufacture of the identifying the facility.
specification tank car identified in the [Amdt. 1802, 54 FR 25032, June 12, 1989, as
documents is in accordance with the amended at 68 FR 75765, Dec. 31, 2003; 77 FR
applicable specification. The builders 37991, June 25, 2012]
signature on the certificate of con-
struction and the marking of the tank 180.519 Periodic retest and inspec-
car with the tank specification is the tion of tank cars other than single-
representation that all of the appro- unit tank car tanks.
priate inspections and tests were suc- (a) General. Unless otherwise pro-
cessfully performed to qualify the tank vided in this subpart, tanks designed to
for use. The owner must retain the doc- be removed from cars for filling and
uments throughout the period of own- emptying and tanks built to a Class
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
ership of the specification tank car and DOT 107A specification and their safety
for one year thereafter. Upon a change relief devices must be retested periodi-
of ownership, the applicable provisions cally as specified in Retest Table 1 of
372
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00382 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 180.519
paragraph (b)(5) of this section. Retests (2) Each tank, except tanks built to
may be made at any time during the specification DOT 107A, must also be
calendar year the retest falls due. subjected to interior air pressure test
(b) Pressure test. (1) Each tank must of at least 100 psig under conditions fa-
be subjected to the specified hydro- vorable to detection of any leakage. No
static pressure and its permanent ex- leaks may appear.
pansion determined. Pressure must be (3) Safety relief valves must be re-
maintained for 30 seconds and for as tested by air or gas, must start-to-dis-
long as necessary to secure complete charge at or below the prescribed pres-
expansion of the tank. Before testing,
sure and must be vapor tight at or
the pressure gauge must be shown to be
above the prescribed pressure.
accurate within 1 percent at test meas-
ure. The expansion gauge must be (4) Rupture discs and fusible plugs
shown to be accurate, at test pressure, must be removed from the tank and
to within 1 percent. Expansion must be visually inspected.
recorded in cubic cm. Permanent volu- (5) Tanks must be retested as speci-
metric expansion may not exceed 10 fied in Retest Table 1 of this paragraph
percent of total volumetric expansion (b)(5), and before returning to service
at test pressure and the tank must not after repairs involving welding or heat
leak or show evidence of distress. treatment:
RETEST TABLE 1
Retest intervalyears Minimum Retest Pressure relief valve
pressurepsig pressurepsig
Specification Pressure re- Tank hydro-
Tank Start-to-
lief devices d static Tank air test Vapor tight
discharge
expansion c
(6) The month and year of test, fol- Dates of previous tests and all pre-
lowed by a V if visually inspected as scribed markings must be kept legible.
described in paragraph (c) of this sec- (c) Visual inspection. Tanks of Class
tion, must be plainly and permanently DOT 106A and DOT 110A-W specifica-
stamped into the metal of one head or tions ( 179.300 and 179.301 of this sub-
chime of each tank with successful test chapter) used exclusively for trans-
results; for example, 0190 for January porting fluorinated hydrocarbons and
1990. On DOT 107A**** tanks, the date mixtures thereof, and that are free
must be stamped into the metal of the from corroding components, may be
marked end, except that if all tanks given a periodic complete internal and
mounted on a car have been tested, the
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
373
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00383 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
180.601 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
inspections shall be made only by com- form to the requirements of this sub-
petent persons. The tank must be ac- chapter and the applicable design spec-
cepted or rejected in accordance with ification to which the portable tank
the criteria in CGA C6 (IBR, see 171.7 was constructed.
of this subchapter). (c) The following portable tanks are
(d) Written records. The results of the authorized for use provided they con-
pressure test and visual inspection form to all applicable safety require-
must be recorded on a suitable data ments of this subchapter: 51, 56, 57, 60,
sheet. Completed copies of these re- IM 101, IM 102 and UN portable tanks.
ports must be retained by the owner (d) A portable tank that also meets
and by the person performing the pres- the definition of container in 49 CFR
sure test and visual inspection as long 450.3(a)(3) must conform to the require-
as the tank is in service. The informa- ments in parts 450 through 453 of this
tion to be recorded and checked on title for compliance with Annex II of
these data sheets are: Date of test and the Convention for Safe Containers
inspection; DOT specification number; (CSC).
tank identification (registered symbol (e) Exemption portable tanks based on
and serial number, date of manufacture DOT 51 portable tanks. The owner of a
and ownership symbol); type of protec- portable tank constructed in accord-
tive coating (painted, etc., and state- ance with and used under an exemption
ment as to need for refinishing or re- issued prior to August 31, 1996, which
coating); conditions checked (leakage, was in conformance with the require-
corrosion, gouges, dents or digs, broken ments for Specification DOT 51 port-
or damaged chime or protective ring, able tanks with the exception of the lo-
fire, fire damage, internal condition); cation of fill and discharge outlets,
test pressure; results of tests; and dis- shall examine the portable tank and its
position of tank (returned to service, design to determine if it meets the out-
returned to manufacturer for repair, or let requirements in effect on October 1,
scrapped); and identification of the per- 1996. If the owner determines that the
son conducting the retest or inspec- portable tank is in compliance with all
tion. requirements of the DOT 51 specifica-
[Amdt. 1808, 60 FR 49079, Sept. 21, 1995, as tion, the exemption number stenciled
amended by Amdt. 17950, 61 FR 33257, June on the portable tank shall be removed
26, 1996; 65 FR 58633, Sept. 29, 2000; 66 FR and the specification plate (or a plate
45187, 45392, Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR 75765, Dec. 31, placed adjacent to the specification
2003]
plate) shall be durably marked DOT
51E***** (where ***** is to be re-
Subpart GQualification and placed by the exemption number). Dur-
Maintenance of Portable Tanks ing the period the portable tank is in
service, and for one year thereafter,
SOURCE: 66 FR 33453, June 21, 2001, unless the owner of the portable tank must
otherwise noted. retain on file, at its principal place of
business, a copy of the last exemption
180.601 Applicability. in effect.
This subpart prescribes require-
ments, in addition to those contained 180.605 Requirements for periodic
in parts 107, 171, 172, 173, and 178 of this testing, inspection and repair of
subchapter, applicable to any person portable tanks.
responsible for the continuing quali- (a) A portable tank constructed in
fication, maintenance or periodic re- accordance with a DOT specification
testing of a portable tank. for which a test or inspection specified
in this subpart has become due, must
180.603 Qualification of portable be tested or inspected prior to being re-
tanks. turned for transportation.
(a) Each portable tank used for the (b) Conditions requiring test and inspec-
transportation of hazardous materials tion of portable tanks. Without regard to
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
374
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00384 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 180.605
accordance with this section prior to the portable tank and its fittings tak-
further use if any of the following con- ing into account the hazardous mate-
ditions exist: rials intended to be transported; a
(1) The portable tank shows evidence leakage test; and a test of the satisfac-
of dents, corroded or abraded areas, tory operation of all service equip-
leakage, or any other condition that ment. Sheathing, thermal insulation,
might render it unsafe for transpor- etc. need only be removed to the extent
tation service. required for reliable appraisal of the
(2) The portable tank has been in an condition of the portable tank. For
accident and has been damaged to an portable tanks intended for the trans-
extent that may adversely affect its portation of a single hazardous mate-
ability to retain the hazardous mate-
rial, the internal examination may be
rial.
waived if it is leakage tested in accord-
(3) The portable tank has been out of
hazardous materials transportation ance with the procedures in paragraph
service for a period of one year or (h) of this section prior to each filling,
more. or if approved by the Associate Admin-
(4) The portable tank has been modi- istrator. Portable tanks used for dedi-
fied from its original design specifica- cated transportation of refrigerated
tion. liquefied gases that are not fitted with
(5) The portable tank is in an unsafe inspection openings are excepted from
operating condition based on the exist- the internal inspection requirement.
ence of probable cause. (e) Periodic inspection and test. The 5
(c) Schedule for periodic inspections year periodic inspection and test must
and tests. Each Specification portable include an internal and external exam-
tank must be tested and inspected in ination and, unless excepted, a pressure
accordance with the following sched- test as specified in this section.
ule: Sheathing, thermal insulation, etc.
(1) Each IM or UN portable tank need only to be removed to the extent
must be given an initial inspection and required for reliable appraisal of the
test before being placed into service, a condition of the portable tank. Except
periodic inspection and test at least for DOT Specification 56 and 57 port-
once every 5 years, and an inter- able tanks, reclosing pressure relief de-
mediate periodic inspection and test at
vices must be removed from the tank
least every 2.5 years following the ini-
and tested separately unless they can
tial inspection and the last 5 year peri-
be tested while installed on the port-
odic inspection and test.
(2) Each Specification 51 portable able tank. For portable tanks where
tank must be given a periodic inspec- the shell and equipment have been
tion and test at least once every five pressure-tested separately, after as-
years. sembly they must be subjected to-
(3) Each Specification 56 or 57 port- gether to a leakage test and effectively
able tank must be given a periodic in- tested and inspected for corrosion.
spection and test at least once every Portable tanks used for the transpor-
2.5 years. tation of refrigerated, liquefied gases
(4) Each Specification 60 portable are excepted from the requirement for
tank must be given a periodic inspec- internal inspection and the hydraulic
tion and test at the end of the first 4- pressure test during the 5-year periodic
year period after the original test; at inspection and test, if the portable
least once every 2 years thereafter up tanks were pressure tested to a min-
to a total of 12 years of service; and at imum test pressure of 1.3 times the de-
least once annually thereafter. Re- sign pressure using an inert gas as pre-
testing is not required on a rubber- scribed in 178.33816(a) and (b) of this
lined tank except before each relining. subchapter before putting the portable
(d) Intermediate periodic inspection and tank into service initially and after
test. For IM and UN portable tanks the
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
375
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00385 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
180.605 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
(f) Exceptional inspection and test. The pressure (air or hydrostatic) of at least
exceptional inspection and test is nec- 2 psig or at least one and one-half
essary when a portable tank shows evi- times the design pressure (maximum
dence of damaged or corroded areas, or allowable working pressure, or re-rated
leakage, or other conditions that indi- pressure) of the tank, whichever is
cate a deficiency that could affect the greater. The leakage test for portable
integrity of the portable tank. The ex- tanks used for refrigerated liquefied
tent of the exceptional inspection and gas must be performed at 90% of
test must depend on the amount of MAWP. Leakage tests for all other
damage or deterioration of the portable portable tanks must be at a pressure of
tank. It must include at least the in- at least 25% of MAWP. During each air
spection and a pressure test according pressure test, the entire surface of all
to paragraph (e) of this section. Pres- joints under pressure must be coated
sure relief devices need not be tested or with or immersed in a solution of soap
replaced unless there is reason to be- and water, heavy oil, or other material
lieve the relief devices have been af- suitable for the purpose of detecting
fected by the damage or deterioration. leaks. The pressure must be held for a
(g) Internal and external examination. period of time sufficiently long to as-
The internal and external examina- sure detection of leaks, but in no case
tions must ensure that: less than five minutes. During the air
(1) The shell is inspected for pitting, or hydrostatic test, relief devices may
corrosion, or abrasions, dents, distor- be removed, but all the closure fittings
tions, defects in welds or any other must be in place and the relief device
conditions, including leakage, that openings plugged. Lagging need not be
might render the portable tank unsafe removed from a lagged tank if it is pos-
for transportation; sible to maintain the required test
(2) The piping, valves, and gaskets pressure at constant temperature with
are inspected for corroded areas, de- the tank disconnected from the source
fects, and other conditions, including of pressure.
leakage, that might render the port- (2) Each Specification 60 portable
able tank unsafe for filling, discharge tank must be retested by completely
or transportation; filling the tank with water or other liq-
(3) Devices for tightening manhole uid having a similar viscosity, the tem-
covers are operative and there is no perature of the liquid must not exceed
leakage at manhole covers or gaskets; 37.7 C (100 F) during the test, and ap-
(4) Missing or loose bolts or nuts on plying a pressure of 60 psig. The port-
any flanged connection or blank flange able tank must be capable of holding
are replaced or tightened; the prescribed pressure for at least 10
(5) All emergency devices and valves minutes without leakage, evidence of
are free from corrosion, distortion and impending failure, or failure. All clo-
any damage or defect that could pre- sures shall be in place while the test is
vent their normal operation. Remote made and the pressure shall be gauged
closure devices and self-closing stop- at the top of the tank. Safety devices
valves must be operated to dem- and/or vents shall be plugged during
onstrate proper operation; this test.
(6) Required markings on the port- (3) Each Specification IM or UN port-
able tank are legible and in accordance able tank, except for UN portable
with the applicable requirements; and tanks used for non-refrigerated and re-
(7) The framework, the supports and frigerated liquefied gases, and all pip-
the arrangements for lifting the port- ing, valves and accessories, except
able tank are in satisfactory condition. pressure relief devices, must be
(h) Pressure test procedures for speci- hydrostatically tested with water, or
fication 51, 56, 57, 60, IM or UN portable other liquid of similar density and vis-
tanks. (1) Each Specification 57 port- cosity, to a pressure not less than 150%
able tank must be leak tested by a of its maximum allowable working
minimum sustained air pressure of at pressure. UN portable tanks used for
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
376
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00386 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 180.605
similar density and viscosity, to a pres- agency. The repaired tank must be re-
sure not less than 130% of its maximum tested to the original pressure test re-
allowable working pressure. UN port- quirements. Upon successful comple-
able tanks used for the transportation tion of the hydrostatic or pneumatic
of refrigerated liquefied gases may be test, as applicable, the witnessing ap-
tested hydrostatically or pneumati- proval agency shall apply its name,
cally using an inert gas to a pressure identifying mark or identifying num-
not less than 1.3 times the design pres- ber in accordance with paragraph (k) of
sure. For pneumatic testing, due re- this section.
gard for protection of all personnel (i) Rejection criteria. When evidence of
must be taken because of the potential any unsafe condition is discovered, the
hazard involved in such a test. The portable tank may not be returned to
pneumatic test pressure in the portable service until it has been repaired and
tank must be reached by gradually in- the pressure test is repeated and
creasing the pressure to one-half of the passed.
test pressure. Thereafter, the test pres- (j) Repair. The repair of a portable
sure must be increased in steps of ap- tank is authorized, provided such re-
proximately one-tenth of the test pres- pairs are made in accordance with the
sure until the required test pressure requirements prescribed in the speci-
has been reached. The pressure must fication for the tanks original design
then be reduced to a value equal to and construction. In addition to any
four-fifths of the test pressure and held other provisions of the specification,
for a sufficient time to permit inspec- no portable tank may be repaired so as
tion of the portable tank for leaks. The to cause leakage or cracks or so as to
minimum test pressure for a portable increase the likelihood of leakage or
tank is determined on the basis of the cracks near areas of stress concentra-
hazardous materials that are intended tion due to cooling metal shrinkage in
to be transported in the portable welding operations, sharp fillets, rever-
tanks. For liquid, solid and non-refrig- sal of stresses, or otherwise. No field
erated liquefied gases, the minimum welding may be done except to non-
test pressure for specific hazardous ma- pressure parts. Any cutting, burning or
terials are specified in the applicable T welding operations on the shell of an
Codes assigned to a particular haz- IM or UN portable tank must be done
ardous material in the 172.101 Table of with the approval of the approval agen-
this subchapter. While under pressure cy and be done in accordance with the
the tank shall be inspected for leakage, requirements of this subchapter, tak-
distortion, or any other condition ing into account the pressure vessel
which might render the tank unsafe for code used for the construction of the
service. A portable tank fails to meet shell. A pressure test to the original
the requirements of the pressure test test pressure must be performed after
if, during the test, there is permanent the work is completed.
distortion of the tank exceeding that (k) Inspection and test markings. (1)
permitted by the applicable specifica- Each IM or UN portable tank must be
tion; if there is any leakage; or if there durably and legibly marked, in
are any deficiencies that would render English, with the date (month and
the portable tank unsafe for transpor- year) of the last pressure test, the iden-
tation. Any portable tank that fails tification markings of the approval
must be rejected and may not be used agency witnessing the test, when re-
again for the transportation of a haz- quired, and the date of the last visual
ardous material unless the tank is ade- inspection. The marking must be
quately repaired, and, thereafter, a placed on or near the metal identifica-
successful test is conducted in accord- tion plate, in letters and numerals of
ance with the requirements of this not less than 3 mm (0.118 inches) high
paragraph. An approval agency shall when on the metal identification plate,
witness the hydrostatic or pneumatic and 12 mm (0.47 inches) high when on
test. Any damage or deficiency that the portable tank.
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
might render the portable tank unsafe (2) Each Specification DOT 51, 56, 57
for service shall be repaired to the sat- or 60 portable tank must be durably
isfaction of the witnessing approval and legibly marked, in English, with
377
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00387 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pt. 180, App. A 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
the date (month and year) of the most APPENDIX B TO PART 180ACCEPTABLE
recent periodic retest. The marking INTERNAL SELF-CLOSING STOP
must be placed on or near the metal VALVE LEAKAGE TESTS FOR CARGO
certification plate and must be in ac- TANKS TRANSPORTING LIQUEFIED
cordance with 178.3 of this subchapter. COMPRESSED GASES
The letters and numerals must not be
less than 3 mm (0.118 inches) high when For internal self-closing stop valve leakage
on the metal certification plate, and 12 testing, leakage is defined as any leakage
mm (0.47 inches) high when on the through the internal self-closing valve or to
portable tank, except that a portable the atmosphere that is detectable when the
tank manufactured under a previously valve is in the closed position. On some
authorized specification may continue valves this will require the closure of the
pressure by-pass port.
to be marked with smaller markings if
originally authorized under that speci- (a) Meter Creep Test.
fication (for example, DOT Specifica-
tion 57 portable tanks). 1. An operator of a cargo tank equipped
(l) Record retention. The owner of each with a calibrated meter may check the inter-
nal self-closing stop valve for leakage
portable tank or his authorized agent
through the valve seat using the meter as a
shall retain a written record of the
flow measurement indicator. The test is ini-
date and results of all required inspec- tiated by starting the delivery process or re-
tions and tests, including an ASME turning product to the cargo tank through
manufacturers date report, if applica- the delivery system. This may be performed
ble, and the name and address of the at an idle. After the flow is established, the
person performing the inspection or operator closes the internal self-closing stop
test, in accordance with the applicable valve and monitors the meter flow. The
specification. The manufacturers data meter flow must stop within 30 seconds with
report, including a certificate(s) signed no meter creep within 5 seconds after the
by the manufacturer, and the author- meter stops.
ized design approval agency, as appli- 2. On pump-actuated pressure differential
cable, indicating compliance with the internal self-closing stop valves, the valve
applicable specification of the portable must be closed with the remote actuator to
tank, must be retained in the files of assure that it is functioning. On other types
the owner, or his authorized agent, of internal self-closing stop valves, the
during the time that such portable valve(s) may be closed using either the nor-
tank is used for such service, except for mal valve control or the discharge control
system (e.g., remote).
Specifications 56 and 57 portable tanks.
3. Rejection criteria: Any detectable meter
[Amdt. 1802, 54 FR 25032, June 12, 1989, as creep within the first five seconds after ini-
amended at 67 FR 15744, Apr. 3, 2002; 68 FR tial meter stoppage.
45042, July 31, 2003; 74 FR 53189, Oct. 16, 2009]
(b) Internal Self-Closing Stop Valve Test.
APPENDIX A TO PART 180INTERNAL
An operator of a cargo tank that is not
SELF-CLOSING STOP VALVE EMER-
equipped with a meter may check the inter-
GENCY CLOSURE TEST FOR LIQUEFIED
nal self-closing stop valve(s) for leakage as
COMPRESSED GASES follows:
1. In performing this test, all internal self- 1. The internal self-closing stop valve must
closing stop valves must be opened. Each be in the closed position.
emergency discharge control remote actu- 2. All of the material in the downstream
ator (on-truck and off-truck) must be oper- piping must be evacuated, and the piping
ated to ensure that each internal self-closing must be returned to atmospheric tempera-
stop valves lever, piston, or other valve indi- ture and pressure.
cator has moved to the closed position. 3. The outlet must be monitored for 30 sec-
2. On pump-actuated pressure differential
onds for detectable leakage.
internal valves, the three-way toggle valve
handle or its cable attachment must be acti- 4. Rejection criteria. Any detectable leak-
vated to verify that the toggle handle moves age is considered unacceptable.
to the closed position.
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
378
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00388 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT Pt. 180, App. D
ring used to perform the eddy current exam- Ferric chloride, solution
ination. Fertilizer ammoniating solution (Nitrogen
(ii) DOT specification or exemption num- fertilizer solution)
ber of the cylinder; manufacturers name or Fluoroboric acid
379
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00389 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pt. 180, App. D 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
Fluorosilicic acid Zinc chloride, solution
Formaldehyde, solutions, flammable
Formaldehyde, solutions Materials Transported Under an N.O.S.
Hydrobromic acid Description
Hydrochloric acid Benzoic acid (Environmentally hazardous
Hydrochloric acid solution substance, liquid, n.o.s., (RQ 5,000 pounds)
Hydrofluoric acid and Sulfuric acid mixtures Bisulphites, aqueous solution, n.o.s. (Ammo-
Hydrofluoric acid nium bisulfide)
Hydrogen peroxide and peroxyacetic acid Black liquor (Corrosive liquids, n.o.s. (con-
mixtures, stabilized tains sulfuric acid))
Hydrogen, peroxide, aqueous solutions Calcium lignosulfonate (not regulated under
Hydrogen peroxide, stabilized or Hydrogen this subchapter)
peroxide aqueous solutions, stabilized Hexanoic acid (Corrosive liquids, n.o.s. (con-
Hypochlorite solutions tains hexanoic acid))
Nitric acid Lignin liquor (not regulated under this sub-
Phenyl phosphorus dichloride chapter)
Phenyl phosphorus thiodichloride Lithium chloride (not regulated under this
Phosphoric acid solution subchapter)
Phosphoric acid, solid Sodium polyacrylate (not regulated under
Phosphorus trichloride (Phosphorus chloride) this subchapter)
Sodium chlorate Titanium sulfate solution (Corrosive liquids,
Sodium chlorate, aqueous solution n.o.s. (contains sulfuric acid))
Sodium hydrosulfide White liquor (not regulated under this sub-
Sulfur, molten chapter)
Sulfuric acid
[77 FR 37991, June 25, 2012]
Sulfuric acid, fuming
Sulfuric acid, spent
Zinc chloride, anhydrous PARTS 181185 [RESERVED]
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
380
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00390 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
SUBCHAPTER DPIPELINE SAFETY
381
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00391 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
190.5 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
382
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00392 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 190.9
383
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00393 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
190.11 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
comments are requested and delay is lines are not staffed, individuals may
expected, of the date by which action leave a recorded voicemail message or
will be taken. post a message on the OPS Web site.
(1) For operators seeking a finding or The telephone number for the OPS in-
approval involving intrastate pipeline formation line is (202) 3664595 and the
transportation, petitions must be sent OPS Web site can be accessed via the
to: Internet at http://phmsa.dot.gov/pipeline.
(i) The State agency certified to par- (b) Availability of written interpreta-
ticipate under 49 U.S.C. 60105. tions. A written regulatory interpreta-
(ii) Where there is no state agency tion, response to a question, or an
certified to participate, the Adminis- opinion concerning a pipeline safety
trator, Pipeline and Hazardous Mate-
issue may be obtained by submitting a
rials Safety Administration, 1200 New
written request to the Office of Pipe-
Jersey Avenue, SE, Washington, DC
line Safety (PHP30), PHMSA, U.S. De-
20590.
(2) For operators seeking a finding or partment of Transportation, 1200 New
approval involving interstate pipeline Jersey Avenue SE., Washington, DC
transportation, petitions must be sent 205900001. The requestor must include
to the Administrator, Pipeline and his or her return address and should
Hazardous Materials Safety Adminis- also include a daytime telephone num-
tration, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE, ber. Written requests should be sub-
Washington, DC 20590. mitted at least 120 days before the time
(c) All petitions must be received at the requestor needs a response.
least 90 days prior to the date by which [Amdt. 19016, 78 FR 58909, Sept. 25, 2013]
the operator requests the finding or ap-
proval to be made.
(d) The Administrator will make all Subpart BEnforcement
findings or approvals of petitions initi-
190.201 Purpose and scope.
ated under this section. A participating
state agency receiving petitions initi- (a) This subpart describes the en-
ated under this section shall provide forcement authority and sanctions ex-
the Administrator a written rec- ercised by the Associate Administrator
ommendation as to the disposition of for achieving and maintaining pipeline
any petition received by them. Where safety and compliance under 49 U.S.C.
the Administrator does not reverse or 60101 et seq., 33 U.S.C. 1321(j), and any
modify a recommendation made by a regulation or order issued thereunder.
state agency within 10 business days of It also prescribes the procedures gov-
its receipt, the recommended disposi- erning the exercise of that authority
tion shall constitute the Administra- and the imposition of those sanctions.
tors decision on the petition. (b) A person who is the subject of ac-
[Amdt. 1905, 59 FR 17280, Apr. 12, 1994, as tion pursuant to this subpart may be
amended by Amdt. 1906, 61 FR 18513, Apr. 26, represented by legal counsel at all
1996; 70 FR 11137, Mar. 8, 2005; 73 FR 16566, stages of the proceeding.
Mar. 28, 2008]
[45 FR 20413, Mar. 27, 1980, as amended by
190.11 Availability of informal guid- Amdt. 1906, 61 FR 18513, Apr. 26, 1996; Amdt.
ance and interpretive assistance. 19016, 78 FR 58909, Sept. 25, 2013]
(a) Availability of telephonic and Inter-
190.203 Inspections and investiga-
net assistance. PHMSA has established tions.
a Web site and a telephone line to OPS
headquarters where information on and (a) Officers, employees, or agents au-
advice about compliance with the pipe- thorized by the Associate Adminis-
line safety regulations specified in 49 trator for Pipeline Safety, PHMSA,
CFR parts 190199 is available. The Web upon presenting appropriate creden-
site and telephone line are staffed by tials, are authorized to enter upon, in-
personnel from PHMSAs OPS from 9:00 spect, and examine, at reasonable
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
a.m. through 5:00 p.m., Eastern Time, times and in a reasonable manner, the
Monday through Friday, with the ex- records and properties of persons to the
ception of Federal holidays. When the extent such records and properties are
384
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00394 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 190.206
propriate, the National Transportation under parts 192, 193, 195, and 199 of this
Safety Board for performing the test- subchapter are inadequate to assure
ing. safe operation of a pipeline facility by
385
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00395 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
190.207 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
issuing a notice of amendment. The no- penalty for which respondent is liable
tice will specify the alleged inadequa- under law; and
cies and the proposed revisions of the (4) If a compliance order is proposed
plans or procedures and provide an op- under 190.217, a statement of the re-
portunity to respond. The notice will medial action being sought in the form
allow the operator 30 days following re- of a proposed compliance order.
ceipt of the notice to submit written (c) The Regional Director may amend
comments, revised procedures, or a re- a notice of probable violation at any
quest for a hearing under 190.211. time prior to issuance of a final order
(b) After considering all material under 190.213. If an amendment in-
presented in writing or at the hearing, cludes any new material allegations of
if applicable, the Associate Adminis- fact, proposes an increased civil pen-
trator determines whether the plans or alty amount, or proposes new or addi-
procedures are inadequate as alleged. tional remedial action under 190.217,
The Associate Administrator issues an the respondent will have the oppor-
order directing amendment of the plans tunity to respond under 190.208.
or procedures if they are inadequate, or
[45 FR 20413, Mar. 27, 1980, as amended by
withdraws the notice if they are not. In Amdt. 1906, 61 FR 18513, Apr. 26, 1996; Amdt.
determining the adequacy of an opera- 19016, 78 FR 58910, Sept. 25, 2013]
tors plans or procedures, the Associate
Administrator may consider: 190.208 Response options.
(1) Relevant pipeline safety data; Within 30 days of receipt of a notice
(2) Whether the plans or procedures of probable violation, the respondent
are appropriate for the particular type must answer the Regional Director
of pipeline transportation or facility,
who issued the notice in the following
and for the location of the facility;
manner:
(3) The reasonableness of the plans or
(a) When the notice contains a pro-
procedures; and
posed civil penalty
(4) The extent to which the plans or
(1) If the respondent is not contesting
procedures contribute to public safety.
an allegation of probable violation, pay
(c) An order directing amendment of
the proposed civil penalty as provided
an operators plans or procedures pre-
in 190.227 and advise the Regional Di-
scribed in this section may be in addi-
rector of the payment. The payment
tion to, or in conjunction with, other
authorizes the Associate Administrator
appropriate enforcement actions pre-
to make a finding of violation and to
scribed in this subpart.
issue a final order under 190.213;
[Amdt. 19016, 78 FR 58910, Sept. 25, 2013] (2) If the respondent is not contesting
an allegation of probable violation but
190.207 Notice of probable violation. wishes to submit a written expla-
(a) Except as otherwise provided by nation, information, or other materials
this subpart, a Regional Director be- the respondent believes may warrant
gins an enforcement proceeding by mitigation or elimination of the pro-
serving a notice of probable violation posed civil penalty, the respondent
on a person charging that person with may submit such materials. This au-
a probable violation of 49 U.S.C. 60101 et thorizes the Associate Administrator
seq., 33 U.S.C. 1321(j), or any regulation to make a finding of violation and to
or order issued thereunder. issue a final order under 190.213;
(b) A notice of probable violation (3) If the respondent is contesting one
issued under this section shall include: or more allegations of probable viola-
(1) Statement of the provisions of the tion but is not requesting a hearing
laws, regulations or orders which the under 190.211, the respondent may sub-
respondent is alleged to have violated mit a written response in answer to the
and a statement of the evidence upon allegations; or
which the allegations are based; (4) The respondent may request a
(2) Notice of response options avail- hearing under 190.211.
able to the respondent under 190.208; (b) When the notice contains a pro-
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
386
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00396 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 190.210
387
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00397 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
190.211 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
issues, such as for scheduling a hear- testimony or other evidence that is rel-
ing. evant and material to the issues under
[Amdt. 19016, 78 FR 58911, Sept. 25, 2013]
consideration. The parties may call
witnesses on their own behalf and ex-
190.211 Hearing. amine the evidence and witnesses pre-
sented by the other party. After the
(a) General. This section applies to
evidence in the case has been pre-
hearings conducted under this part re-
sented, the Presiding Official will per-
lating to civil penalty assessments,
mit reasonable discussion of the issues
compliance orders, orders directing
under consideration.
amendment, safety orders, and correc- (f) Written transcripts. If a respondent
tive action orders. The Presiding Offi- elects to transcribe a hearing, the re-
cial will convene hearings conducted spondent must make arrangements
under this section. with a court reporter at cost to the re-
(b) Hearing request and statement of
spondent and submit a complete copy
issues. A request for a hearing must be
of the transcript for the case file. The
accompanied by a statement of the
respondent must notify the Presiding
issues that the respondent intends to
Official in advance if it intends to tran-
raise at the hearing. The issues may re-
scribe a hearing.
late to the allegations in the notice, (g) Post-hearing submission. The re-
the proposed corrective action, or the spondent and OPS may request an op-
proposed civil penalty amount. A re- portunity to submit further written
spondents failure to specify an issue material after the hearing for inclusion
may result in waiver of the respond- in the record. The Presiding Official
ents right to raise that issue at the will allow a reasonable time for the
hearing. The respondents request must submission of the material and will
also indicate whether or not the re- specify the submission date. If the ma-
spondent will be represented by counsel terial is not submitted within the time
at the hearing. The respondent may prescribed, the case will proceed to
withdraw a request for a hearing in
final action without the material.
writing and provide a written response. (h) Preparation of decision. After con-
(c) Telephonic and in-person hearings.
sideration of the case file, the Pre-
A telephone hearing will be held if the
siding Official prepares a recommended
amount of the proposed civil penalty or
decision in the case, which is then for-
the cost of the proposed corrective ac-
warded to the Associate Administrator
tion is less than $25,000, unless the re-
for issuance of a final order.
spondent or OPS submits a written re-
quest for an in-person hearing. In-per- [Amdt. 19016, 78 FR 58911, Sept. 25, 2013]
son hearings will normally be held at
the office of the appropriate OPS Re- 190.212 Presiding official, powers,
gion. Hearings may be held by video and duties.
teleconference if the necessary equip- (a) General. The Presiding Official for
ment is available to all parties. a hearing conducted under 190.211 is
(d) Pre-hearing submissions. If OPS or an attorney on the staff of the Deputy
the respondent intends to introduce Chief Counsel who is not engaged in
material, including records, docu- any investigative or prosecutorial
ments, and other exhibits not already functions, such as the issuance of no-
in the case file, the material must be tices under this subpart. If the des-
submitted to the Presiding Official and ignated Presiding Official is unavail-
the other party at least 10 days prior to able, the Deputy Chief Counsel may
the date of the hearing, unless the Pre- delegate the powers and duties speci-
siding Official sets a different deadline fied in this section to another attorney
or waives the deadline for good cause. in the Office of Chief Counsel who is
(e) Conduct of the hearing. The hear- not engaged in any investigative or
ing is conducted informally without prosecutorial functions under this sub-
strict adherence to rules of evidence. part.
The Presiding Official regulates the (b) Time and place of the hearing. The
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
course of the hearing and gives each Presiding Official will set the date,
party an opportunity to offer facts, time and location of the hearing. To
statements, explanations, documents, the extent practicable, the Presiding
388
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00398 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 190.219
Official will accommodate the parties by which such actions must be accom-
schedules when setting the hearing. plished.
Reasonable notice of the hearing will (b) In cases where a substantial delay
be provided to all parties. is expected in the issuance of a final
(c) Powers and duties of Presiding Offi- order, notice of that fact and the date
cial. The Presiding Official will conduct by which it is expected that action will
a fair and impartial hearing and take be taken is provided to the respondent
all action necessary to avoid delay in upon request and whenever practicable.
the disposition of the proceeding and [Amdt. 19016, 78 FR 58911, Sept. 25, 2013]
maintain order. The Presiding Official
has all powers necessary to achieve 190.215 [Reserved]
those ends, including, but not limited
to the power to: COMPLIANCE ORDERS
(1) Regulate the course of the hearing
and conduct of the parties and their 190.217 Compliance orders generally.
counsel; When a Regional Director has reason
(2) Receive evidence and inquire into to believe that a person is engaging in
the relevant and material facts; conduct that violates 49 U.S.C. 60101 et
(3) Require the submission of docu- seq., 33 U.S.C. 1321(j), or any regulation
ments and other information; or order issued thereunder, and if the
(4) Direct that documents or briefs nature of the violation and the public
relate to issues raised during the interest so warrant, the Regional Di-
course of the hearing; rector may initiate proceedings under
(5) Set the date for filing documents, 190.207 through 190.213 to determine
briefs, and other items; the nature and extent of the violations
(6) Prepare a recommended decision; and for the issuance of an order direct-
and ing compliance.
(7) Exercise the authority necessary
[Amdt. 19016, 78 FR 58912, Sept. 25, 2013]
to carry out the responsibilities of the
Presiding Official under this subpart. 190.219 Consent order.
[Amdt. 19016, 78 FR 58911, Sept. 25, 2013] (a) At any time prior to the issuance
of a compliance order under 190.217, a
190.213 Final order.
corrective action order under 190.233,
(a) In an enforcement proceeding or a safety order under 190.239, the Re-
commenced under 190.207, an attorney gional Director and the respondent
from the Office of Chief Counsel pre- may agree to resolve the case by execu-
pares a recommended decision after ex- tion of a consent agreement and order,
piration of the 30-day response period which may be jointly executed by the
prescribed in 190.208. If a hearing is parties and issued by the Associate Ad-
held, the Presiding Official prepares ministrator. Upon execution, the con-
the recommended decision as set forth sent order is considered a final order
in 190.211. The recommended decision under 190.213.
is forwarded to the Associate Adminis- (b) A consent order executed under
trator who considers the case file and paragraph (a) of this section shall in-
issues a final order. The final order in- clude:
cludes (1) An admission by the respondent of
(1) A statement of findings and deter- all jurisdictional facts;
minations on all material issues, in- (2) An express waiver of further pro-
cluding a determination as to whether cedural steps and of all right to seek
each alleged violation has been proved; judicial review or otherwise challenge
(2) If a civil penalty is assessed, the or contest the validity of that order;
amount of the penalty and the proce- (3) An acknowledgement that the no-
dures for payment of the penalty, pro- tice of probable violation may be used
vided that the assessed civil penalty to construe the terms of the consent
may not exceed the penalty proposed in order; and
the notice of probable violation; and (4) A statement of the actions re-
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
(3) If a compliance order is issued, a quired of the respondent and the time
statement of the actions required to be by which such actions shall be accom-
taken by the respondent and the time plished.
389
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00399 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
190.221 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
(c) Prior to the execution of a con- (e) Separate penalties for violating a
sent agreement and order arising out of regulation prescribed under this sub-
a corrective action order under chapter and for violating an order
190.233, the Associate Administrator issued under 190.206, 190.213, 190.233,
will notify any appropriate State offi- or 190.239 may not be imposed under
cial in accordance with 49 U.S.C. this section if both violations are based
60112(c). on the same act.
[45 FR 20413, Mar. 27, 1980, as amended by [Amdt. 19016, 78 FR 58912, Sept. 25, 2013, as
Amdt. 1906, 61 FR 18514, Apr. 26, 1996; Amdt. amended at 81 FR 42566, June 30, 2016]
19016, 78 FR 58912, Sept. 25, 2013]
190.225 Assessment considerations.
CIVIL PENALTIES In determining the amount of a civil
190.221 Civil penalties generally. penalty under this part,
(a) The Associate Administrator will
When a Regional Director has reason consider:
to believe that a person has committed (1) The nature, circumstances and
an act violating 49 U.S.C. 60101 et seq., gravity of the violation, including ad-
33 U.S.C. 1321(j), or any regulation or verse impact on the environment;
order issued thereunder, the Regional (2) The degree of the respondents
Director may initiate proceedings culpability;
under 190.207 through 190.213 to deter- (3) The respondents history of prior
mine the nature and extent of the vio- offenses;
lations and appropriate civil penalty. (4) Any good faith by the respondent
[Amdt. 19016, 78 FR 58912, Sept. 25, 2013] in attempting to achieve compliance;
(5) The effect on the respondents
190.223 Maximum penalties. ability to continue in business; and
(b) The Associate Administrator may
(a) Any person found to have violated
consider:
a provision of 49 U.S.C. 60101 et seq., or
(1) The economic benefit gained from
any regulation or order issued there-
violation, if readily ascertainable,
under is subject to an administrative
without any reduction because of sub-
civil penalty not to exceed $205,638 for
sequent damages; and
each violation for each day the viola-
(2) Such other matters as justice may
tion continues, except that the max-
require.
imum administrative civil penalty may
not exceed $2,056,380 for any related se- [Amdt. 19016, 78 FR 58912, Sept. 25, 2013]
ries of violations.
(b) Any person found to have violated 190.227 Payment of penalty.
a provision of 33 U.S.C. 1321(j) or any (a) Except for payments exceeding
regulation or order issued thereunder $10,000, payment of a civil penalty pro-
is subject to an administrative civil posed or assessed under this subpart
penalty under 33 U.S.C. 1321(b)(6), as may be made by certified check or
adjusted by 40 CFR 19.4. money order (containing the CPF Num-
(c) Any person found to have violated ber for the case), payable to U.S. De-
any standard or order under 49 U.S.C. partment of Transportation, to the
60103 is subject to an administrative Federal Aviation Administration, Mike
civil penalty not to exceed $75,123, Monroney Aeronautical Center, Finan-
which may be in addition to other pen- cial Operations Division (AMZ341),
alties to which such person may be P.O. Box 25770, Oklahoma City, OK
subject under paragraph (a) of this sec- 73125, or by wire transfer through the
tion. Federal Reserve Communications Sys-
(d) Any person who is determined to tem (Fedwire) to the account of the
have violated any standard or order U.S. Treasury, or via https://
under 49 U.S.C. 60129 is subject to an www.pay.gov. Payments exceeding
administrative civil penalty not to ex- $10,000 must be made by wire transfer.
ceed $1,194, which may be in addition to (b) Payment of a civil penalty as-
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
other penalties to which such person sessed in a final order issued under
may be subject under paragraph (a) of 190.213 or affirmed in a decision on a
this section. petition for reconsideration must be
390
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00400 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 190.233
made within 20 days after receipt of the (1) Written notice that OPS intends
final order or decision. Failure to do so to issue an order under this section
will result in the initiation of collec- will be served upon the owner or oper-
tion action, including the accrual of in- ator of an alleged hazardous facility in
terest and penalties, in accordance accordance with 190.5. The notice
with 31 U.S.C. 3717 and 49 CFR part 89. must allege the existence of a haz-
ardous facility and state the facts and
[Amdt. 1907, 61 FR 27792, June 3, 1996, as
amended at 70 FR 11138, Mar. 8, 2005; 73 FR circumstances supporting the issuance
16567, Mar. 28, 2008; Amdt. 19016, 78 FR 58912, of a corrective action order. The notice
Sept. 25, 2013] must provide the owner or operator
with an opportunity to respond within
190.229190.231 [Reserved] 10 days of receipt.
(2) An owner or operator that elects
SPECIFIC RELIEF to exercise its opportunity for a hear-
ing under this section must notify the
190.233 Corrective action orders. Associate Administrator of that elec-
(a) Generally. Except as provided by tion in writing within 10 days of re-
paragraph (b) of this section, if the As- ceipt of the notice provided under para-
sociate Administrator finds, after rea- graph (c)(1) of this section, or the order
sonable notice and opportunity for under paragraph (b) of this section
hearing in accord with paragraph (c) of when applicable. The absence of such
this section, a particular pipeline facil- written notification waives an owner
ity is or would be hazardous to life, or operators opportunity for a hearing.
property, or the environment, the As- (3) At any time after issuance of a
sociate Administrator may issue an notice or order under this section, the
order pursuant to this section requir- respondent may request a copy of the
ing the operator of the facility to take case file as set forth in 190.209.
corrective action. Corrective action (4) A hearing under this section is
may include suspended or restricted conducted pursuant to 190.211. The
use of the facility, physical inspection, hearing should be held within 15 days
testing, repair, replacement, or other of receipt of the respondents request
appropriate action. for a hearing.
(b) Waiver of notice and expedited re- (5) After conclusion of a hearing
view. The Associate Administrator may under this section, the Presiding Offi-
waive the requirement for notice and cial submits a recommended decision
opportunity for hearing under para- to the Associate Administrator as to
graph (a) of this section before issuing whether or not the facility is or would
an order whenever the Associate Ad- be hazardous to life, property, or the
ministrator determines that the failure environment, and if necessary, requir-
to do so would result in the likelihood ing expeditious corrective action. If a
of serious harm to life, property, or the notice or order is contested in writing
environment. When an order is issued without a hearing, an attorney from
under this paragraph, a respondent the Office of Chief Counsel prepares the
that contests the order may obtain ex- recommended decision. The rec-
pedited review of the order either by ommended decision should be sub-
answering in writing to the order with- mitted to the Associate Administrator
in 10 days of receipt or requesting a within five business days after conclu-
hearing under 190.211 to be held as sion of the hearing or after receipt of
soon as practicable in accordance with the respondents written objection if no
paragraph (c)(2) of this section. For hearing is held. Upon receipt of the rec-
purposes of this section, the term ex- ommendation, the Associate Adminis-
pedited review is defined as the proc- trator will proceed in accordance with
ess for making a prompt determination paragraphs (d) through (h) of this sec-
of whether the order should remain in tion. If the Associate Administrator
effect or be amended or terminated. finds the facility is or would be haz-
The expedited review of an order issued ardous to life, property, or the environ-
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
391
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00401 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
190.235 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
(or amends) the corrective action order issued in connection with any inves-
issued under paragraph (b) of this sec- tigation conducted by the Board; and
tion. If the Associate Administrator (5) Such other factors as the Asso-
does not find the facility is or would be ciate Administrator may consider ap-
hazardous to life, property, or the envi- propriate.
ronment, the Associate Administrator (f) A corrective action order shall
withdraws the notice or terminates the contain the following information:
order issued under paragraph (b) of this (1) A finding that the pipeline facility
section, and promptly notifies the op- is or would be hazardous to life, prop-
erator in writing by service as pre- erty, or the environment.
scribed in 190.5. (2) The relevant facts which form the
(d) The Associate Administrator may basis of that finding.
find a pipeline facility to be hazardous (3) The legal basis for the order.
under paragraph (a) of this section: (4) The nature and description of any
(1) If under the facts and cir- particular corrective action required of
cumstances the Associate Adminis- the respondent.
trator determines the particular facil- (5) The date by which the required
ity is hazardous to life, property, or corrective action must be taken or
the environment; or completed and, where appropriate, the
(2) If the pipeline facility or a compo- duration of the order.
nent thereof has been constructed or (6) If the opportunity for a hearing
operated with any equipment, mate- was waived pursuant to paragraph (b)
rial, or technique which the Associate of this section, a statement that an op-
Administrator determines is hazardous portunity for a hearing will be avail-
to life, property, or the environment, able at a particular time and location
unless the operator involved dem- after issuance of the order.
onstrates to the satisfaction of the As- (g) The Associate Administrator will
sociate Administrator that, under the terminate a corrective action order
particular facts and circumstances in- whenever the Associate Administrator
volved, such equipment, material, or determines that the facility is no
technique is not hazardous. longer hazardous to life, property, or
(e) In making a determination under the environment. If appropriate, how-
paragraph (d) of this section, the Asso- ever, a notice of probable violation
ciate Administrator shall consider, if may be issued under 190.207.
relevant: (h) At any time after a corrective ac-
(1) The characteristics of the pipe tion order issued under this section has
and other equipment used in the pipe- become effective, the Associate Admin-
line facility involved, including its age, istrator may request the Attorney
manufacturer, physical properties (in- General to bring an action for appro-
cluding its resistance to corrosion and priate relief in accordance with
deterioration), and the method of its 190.235.
manufacture, construction or assem- (i) Upon petition by the Attorney
bly; General, the District Courts of the
(2) The nature of the materials trans- United States shall have jurisdiction to
ported by such facility (including their enforce orders issued under this section
corrosive and deteriorative qualities), by appropriate means.
the sequence in which such materials [70 FR 11138, Mar. 8, 2005, as amended by
are transported, and the pressure re- Amdt. 19016, 78 FR 58912, Sept. 25, 2013]
quired for such transportation;
(3) The characteristics of the geo- 190.235 Civil actions generally.
graphical areas in which the pipeline Whenever it appears to the Associate
facility is located, in particular the cli- Administrator that a person has en-
matic and geologic conditions (includ- gaged, is engaged, or is about to engage
ing soil characteristics) associated in any act or practice constituting a
with such areas, and the population violation of any provision of 49 U.S.C.
density and population and growth pat- 60101 et seq., or any regulations issued
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
392
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00402 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 190.239
General to bring an action in the ap- safety order. Such informal consulta-
propriate U.S. District Court for such tion shall commence within 30 days,
relief as is necessary or appropriate, in- provided that PHMSA may extend this
cluding mandatory or prohibitive in- time by request or otherwise for good
junctive relief, interim equitable relief, cause. Informal consultation provides
civil penalties, and punitive damages an opportunity for the respondent to
as provided under 49 U.S.C. 60120 and 49 explain the circumstances associated
U.S.C. 5123. with the risk condition(s) identified in
[70 FR 11139, Mar. 8, 2005] the notice and, where appropriate, to
present a proposal for corrective ac-
190.237 [Reserved] tion, without prejudice to the opera-
tors position in any subsequent hear-
190.239 Safety orders. ing. If the respondent and Regional Di-
(a) When may PHMSA issue a safety rector agree within 30 days of the infor-
order? If the Associate Administrator mal consultation on a plan for the op-
finds, after notice and an opportunity erator to address each risk condition,
for hearing under paragraph (b) of this they may enter into a written consent
section, that a particular pipeline fa- agreement and the Associate Adminis-
cility has a condition or conditions trator may issue a consent order incor-
that pose a pipeline integrity risk to porating the terms of the agreement. If
public safety, property, or the environ- a consent agreement is reached, no fur-
ment, the Associate Administrator ther hearing will be provided in the
may issue an order requiring the oper- matter and any pending hearing re-
ator of the facility to take necessary quest will be considered withdrawn. If
corrective action. Such action may in- a consent agreement is not reached
clude physical inspection, testing, re- within 30 days of the informal con-
pair or other appropriate action to sultation (or if informal consultation is
remedy the identified risk condition. not requested), the Associate Adminis-
(b) How is an operator notified of the trator may proceed under paragraphs
proposed issuance of a safety order and (b)(3) through (5) of this section. If
what are its responses options? (1) Notice PHMSA subsequently determines that
of proposed safety order. PHMSA will an operator has failed to comply with
serve written notice of a proposed safe- the terms of a consent order, PHMSA
ty order under 190.5 to an operator of may obtain any administrative or judi-
the pipeline facility. The notice will al- cial remedies available under 49 U.S.C.
lege the existence of a condition that 60101 et seq. and this part. If a consent
poses a pipeline integrity risk to public agreement is not reached, any admis-
safety, property, or the environment, sions made by the operator during the
and state the facts and circumstances informal consultation shall be excluded
that support issuing a safety order for from the record in any subsequent
the specified pipeline or portion there- hearing. Nothing in this paragraph (b)
of. The notice will also specify pro- precludes PHMSA from terminating
posed testing, evaluations, integrity the informal consultation process if it
assessment, or other actions to be has reason to believe that the operator
taken by the operator and may propose is not engaging in good faith discus-
that the operator submit a work plan sions or otherwise concludes that fur-
and schedule to address the conditions ther consultation would not be produc-
identified in the notice. The notice will tive or in the public interest.
also provide the operator with its re- (3) Hearing. An operator receiving a
sponse options, including procedures notice of proposed safety order may
for requesting informal consultation contest the notice, or any portion
and a hearing. An operator receiving a thereof, by filing a written request for
notice will have 30 days to respond to a hearing within 30 days following re-
the PHMSA official who issued the no- ceipt of the notice or within 10 days
tice. following the conclusion of informal
(2) Informal consultation. Upon timely consultation that did not result in a
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
393
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00403 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
190.239 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
may issue a safety order in the form of pipeline integrity risk to public safety,
the proposed order in accordance with property, or the environment.
paragraphs (c) through (g) of this sec- (c) How is the determination made that
tion. a pipeline facility has a condition that
(4) Conduct of hearing. An attorney poses an integrity risk? The Associate
from the Office of Chief Counsel, will Administrator may find a pipeline fa-
serve as the Presiding Official in a cility to have a condition that poses a
hearing under this section. The hearing pipeline integrity risk to public safety,
will be conducted informally, without property, or the environment under
strict adherence to formal rules of evi- paragraph (a) of this section:
dence in accordance with 190.211. The (1) If under the facts and cir-
respondent may submit any relevant cumstances the Associate Adminis-
information or materials, call wit- trator determines the particular facil-
nesses, and present arguments on the ity has such a condition; or
issue of whether a safety order should (2) If the pipeline facility or a compo-
be issued to address the alleged pres- nent thereof has been constructed or
ence of a condition that poses a pipe- operated with any equipment, mate-
line integrity risk to public safety, rial, or technique with a history of
property, or the environment. being susceptible to failure when used
in pipeline service, unless the operator
(5) Post-hearing action. Following a
involved demonstrates that such equip-
hearing under this section, the Pre-
ment, material, or technique is not
siding Official will submit a rec-
susceptible to failure given the manner
ommendation to the Associate Admin-
it is being used for a particular facil-
istrator concerning issuance of a final
ity.
safety order. Upon receipt of the rec-
(d) What factors must PHMSA consider
ommendation, the Associate Adminis- in making a determination that a risk
trator may proceed under paragraphs condition is present? In making a deter-
(c) through (g) of this section. If the mination under paragraph (c) of this
Associate Administrator finds the fa- section, the Associate Administrator
cility to have a condition that poses a shall consider, if relevant:
pipeline integrity risk to public safety, (1) The characteristics of the pipe
property, or the environment, the As- and other equipment used in the pipe-
sociate Administrator will issue a safe- line facility involved, including its age,
ty order under this section. If the Asso- manufacturer, physical properties (in-
ciate Administrator does not find that cluding its resistance to corrosion and
the facility has such a condition, or deterioration), and the method of its
concludes that a safety order is other- manufacture, construction or assem-
wise not warranted, the Associate Ad- bly;
ministrator will withdraw the notice (2) The nature of the materials trans-
and promptly notify the operator in ported by such facility (including their
writing by service as prescribed in corrosive and deteriorative qualities),
190.5. Nothing in this subsection pre- the sequence in which such materials
cludes PHMSA and the operator from are transported, and the pressure re-
entering into a consent agreement at quired for such transportation;
any time before a safety order is (3) The characteristics of the geo-
issued. graphical areas where the pipeline fa-
(6) Termination of safety order. Once cility is located, in particular the cli-
all remedial actions set forth in the matic and geologic conditions (includ-
safety order and associated work plans ing soil characteristics) associated
are completed, as determined by with such areas;
PHMSA, the Associate Administrator (4) For hazardous liquid pipelines, the
will notify the operator that the safety proximity of the pipeline to an unusu-
order has been lifted. The Associate ally sensitive area;
Administrator shall suspend or termi- (5) The population density and
nate a safety order whenever the Asso- growth patterns of the area in which
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
394
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00404 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 190.243
395
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00405 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
190.291 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
after the issuance of the decision in ac- ily harm, or property damage exceed-
cordance with 49 U.S.C. 60119(a). ing $50,000;
(h) Judicial review of agency action (2) Subsequently damages a pipeline
under 49 U.S.C. 60119(a) will apply the facility and knows or has reason to
standards of review established in 5 know of the damage but fails to
U.S.C. 706. promptly report the damage to the op-
erator and to the appropriate authori-
[Amdt. 19016, 78 FR 58913, Sept. 25, 2013] ties; or
(3) Subsequently damages a haz-
Subpart CCriminal Enforcement ardous liquid pipeline facility that re-
sults in the release of more than 50 bar-
SOURCE: Amdt. 19016, 78 FR 58914, Sept. 25, rels of product; will, upon conviction,
2013, unless otherwise noted. be subject to a fine under title 18,
United States Code, imprisonment for
190.291 Criminal penalties generally. a term not to exceed 5 years, or both,
for each offense.
(a) Any person who willfully and
(e) No person shall be subject to
knowingly violates a provision of 49
criminal penalties under paragraph (a)
U.S.C. 60101 et seq. or any regulation or
of this section for violation of any reg-
order issued thereunder will upon con-
ulation and the violation of any order
viction be subject to a fine under title issued under 190.217, 190.219 or 190.291
18, United States Code, and imprison- if both violations are based on the
ment for not more than five years, or same act.
both, for each offense.
(b) Any person who willfully and 190.293 Referral for prosecution.
knowingly injures or destroys, or at- If a PHMSA employee becomes aware
tempts to injure or destroy, any inter- of any actual or possible activity sub-
state transmission facility, any inter- ject to criminal penalties under
state pipeline facility, or any intra- 190.291, the employee reports it to the
state pipeline facility used in inter- Office of Chief Counsel, Pipeline and
state or foreign commerce or in any ac- Hazardous Materials Safety Adminis-
tivity affecting interstate or foreign tration, and to his or her supervisor.
commerce (as those terms are defined The Chief Counsel may refer the report
in 49 U.S.C. 60101 et seq.) will, upon con- to OPS for investigation. If appro-
viction, be subject to a fine under title priate, the Chief Counsel refers the re-
18, United States Code, imprisonment port to the Department of Justice for
for a term not to exceed 20 years, or criminal prosecution of the offender.
both, for each offense.
(c) Any person who willfully and Subpart DProcedures for
knowingly defaces, damages, removes,
or destroys any pipeline sign, right-of- Adoption of Rules
way marker, or marine buoy required
by 49 U.S.C. 60101 et seq. or any regula- SOURCE: Amdt. 1908, 61 FR 50909, Sept. 27,
tion or order issued thereunder will, 1996, unless otherwise noted.
upon conviction, be subject to a fine 190.301 Scope.
under title 18, United States Code, im-
prisonment for a term not to exceed 1 This subpart prescribes general rule-
year, or both, for each offense. making procedures for the issue,
(d) Any person who willfully and amendment, and repeal of Pipeline
knowingly engages in excavation activ- Safety Program regulations of the
ity without first using an available Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safe-
one-call notification system to estab- ty Administration of the Department
lish the location of underground facili- of Transportation.
ties in the excavation area; or without [Amdt. 1908, 61 FR 50909, Sept. 27, 1996, as
considering location information or amended at 70 FR 11137, Mar. 8, 2005]
markings established by a pipeline fa-
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
396
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00406 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 190.315
397
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00407 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
190.317 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
398
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00408 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 190.335
is held is not necessarily based exclu- (1) The costs and benefits to society
sively on the record of the hearing. and identifiable groups within society,
(c) The Administrator designates a quantifiable and otherwise;
representative to conduct any hearing (2) The direct effects (including pre-
held under this subpart. The Chief emption effects) of the proposed action
Counsel designates a member of his or on States, on the relationship between
her staff to serve as legal officer at the the Federal Government and the
hearing. States, and on the distribution of
power and responsibilities among the
[Amdt. 1908, 61 FR 50909, Sept. 27, 1996. Re- various levels of government;
designated and amended by Amdt. 19016, 78
FR 58914, Sept. 25, 2013] (3) The regulatory burden on small
businesses, small organizations and
190.329 Adoption of final rules. small governmental jurisdictions;
(4) The recordkeeping and reporting
Final rules are prepared by rep- requirements and to whom they would
resentatives of the Office of Pipeline apply; and
Safety and the Office of the Chief (5) Impacts on the quality of the nat-
Counsel. The regulation is then sub- ural and social environments.
mitted to the Administrator for consid-
(d) The Associate Administrator or
eration. If the Administrator adopts
Chief Counsel may return a petition
the regulation, it is published in the
that does not comply with the require-
FEDERAL REGISTER, unless all persons
ments of this section, accompanied by
subject to it are named and are person-
a written statement indicating the de-
ally served with a copy of it. ficiencies in the petition.
190.331 Petitions for rulemaking. 190.333 Processing of petition.
(a) Any interested person may peti- (a) General. Unless the Associate Ad-
tion the Associate Administrator for ministrator or the Chief Counsel other-
Pipeline Safety to establish, amend, or wise specifies, no public hearing, argu-
repeal a substantive regulation, or may ment, or other proceeding is held di-
petition the Chief Counsel to establish, rectly on a petition before its disposi-
amend, or repeal a procedural regula- tion under this section.
tion. (b) Grants. If the Associate Adminis-
(b) Each petition filed under this sec- trator or the Chief Counsel determines
tion must that the petition contains adequate
(1) Summarize the proposed action justification, he or she initiates rule-
and explain its purpose; making action under this subpart.
(2) State the text of the proposed rule (c) Denials. If the Associate Adminis-
or amendment, or specify the rule pro- trator or the Chief Counsel determines
posed to be repealed; that the petition does not justify rule-
(3) Explain the petitioners interest making, the petition is denied.
in the proposed action and the interest (d) Notification. The Associate Admin-
of any party the petitioner represents; istrator or the Chief Counsel will no-
and tify a petitioner, in writing, of the de-
(4) Provide information and argu- cision to grant or deny a petition for
ments that support the proposed ac- rulemaking.
tion, including relevant technical, sci-
entific or other data as available to the 190.335 Petitions for reconsideration.
petitioner, and any specific known (a) Except as provided in 190.339(d),
cases that illustrate the need for the any interested person may petition the
proposed action. Associate Administrator for reconsid-
(c) If the potential impact of the pro- eration of any regulation issued under
posed action is substantial, and infor- this subpart, or may petition the Chief
mation and data related to that impact Counsel for reconsideration of any pro-
are available to the petitioner, the As- cedural regulation issued under this
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
399
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00409 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
190.337 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
400
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00410 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 190.341
the Administrator will issue a con- be submitted at least 120 days before
firmation document, generally within the requested effective date using any
15 days after the close of the comment of the following methods:
period, advising the public that the di- (1) Direct fax to PHMSA at: 202366
rect final rule will either become effec- 4566; or
tive on the date stated in the direct (2) Mail, express mail, or overnight
final rule or at least 30 days after the courier to the Associate Administrator
publication date of the confirmation for Pipeline Safety, Pipeline and Haz-
document, whichever is later. ardous Materials Safety Administra-
(c) For purposes of this section, an tion, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., East
adverse comment is one which explains Building, Washington, DC 20590.
why the rule would be inappropriate, (c) What information must be contained
including a challenge to the rules un- in the application? Applications must
derlying premise or approach, or would contain the following information:
be ineffective or unacceptable without (1) The name, mailing address, and
a change. Comments that are frivolous telephone number of the applicant and
or insubstantial will not be considered whether the applicant is an operator;
adverse under this procedure. A com- (2) A detailed description of the pipe-
ment recommending a rule change in line facilities for which the special per-
addition to the rule will not be consid- mit is sought, including:
ered an adverse comment, unless the (i) The beginning and ending points
commenter states why the rule would of the pipeline mileage to be covered
be ineffective without the additional and the Counties and States in which it
change. is located;
(d) Only parties who filed comments (ii) Whether the pipeline is interstate
to a direct final rule issued under this or intrastate and a general description
section may petition under 190.335 for of the right-of-way including proximity
reconsideration of that direct final of the affected segments to populated
rule. areas and unusually sensitive areas;
(e) If an adverse comment or notice (iii) Relevant pipeline design and
of intent to file an adverse comment is construction information including the
received, a timely document will be year of installation, the material,
published in the FEDERAL REGISTER ad- grade, diameter, wall thickness, and
vising the public and withdrawing the coating type; and
direct final rule in whole or in part. (iv) Relevant operating information
The Administrator may then incor- including operating pressure, leak his-
porate the adverse comment into a sub- tory, and most recent testing or assess-
sequent direct final rule or may pub- ment results;
lish a notice of proposed rulemaking. A (3) A list of the specific regulation(s)
notice of proposed rulemaking will pro- from which the applicant seeks relief;
vide an opportunity for public com- (4) An explanation of the unique cir-
ment, generally a minimum of 60 days, cumstances that the applicant believes
and will be processed in accordance make the applicability of that regula-
with 190.311190.329. tion or standard (or portion thereof)
unnecessary or inappropriate for its fa-
190.341 Special permits. cility;
(a) What is a special permit? A special (5) A description of any measures or
permit is an order by which PHMSA activities the applicant proposes to un-
waives compliance with one or more of dertake as an alternative to compli-
the Federal pipeline safety regulations ance with the relevant regulation, in-
under the standards set forth in 49 cluding an explanation of how such
U.S.C. 60118(c) and subject to condi- measures will mitigate any safety or
tions set forth in the order. A special environmental risks;
permit is issued to a pipeline operator (6) A description of any positive or
(or prospective operator) for specified negative impacts on affected stake-
facilities that are or, absent waiver, holders and a statement indicating how
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
401
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00411 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
190.341 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
consistent with pipeline safety, and is gency special permit is in the public
necessary to address an actual or im- interest (e.g., continuity of service,
pending emergency involving pipeline service restoration);
402
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00412 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 190.341
(4) A description of any proposed al- (3) If necessary to avoid a risk of sig-
ternatives to compliance with the reg- nificant harm to persons, property, or
ulation (e.g., additional inspections the environment, PHMSA may in the
and tests, shortened reassessment in- notification declare the proposed ac-
tervals); and tion immediately effective.
(5) A description of any measures to (4) Unless otherwise specified, the
be taken after the emergency situation terms and conditions of a corrective
or permit expireswhichever comes action order, compliance order, or
firstto confirm long-term operational
other order applicable to a pipeline fa-
reliability of the pipeline facility.
cility covered by a special permit will
NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (g): If PHMSA deter- take precedence over the terms of the
mines that handling of the application on an special permit.
emergency basis is not warranted, PHMSA
will notify the applicant and process the ap- (5) A special permit holder may seek
plication under normal special permit proce- reconsideration of a decision under
dures of this section. paragraph (h) of this section as pro-
(h) In what circumstances will PHMSA vided in paragraph (i) of this section.
revoke, suspend, or modify a special per- (i) Can a denial of a request for a spe-
mit? (1) PHMSA may revoke, suspend, cial permit or a revocation of an existing
or modify a special permit on a finding special permit be appealed? Reconsider-
that: ation of the denial of an application for
(i) Intervening changes in Federal a special permit or a revocation of an
law mandate revocation, suspension, or existing special permit may be sought
modification of the special permit; by petition to the Associate Adminis-
(ii) Based on a material change in trator. Petitions for reconsideration
conditions or circumstances, continued must be received by PHMSA within 20
adherence to the terms of the special calendar days of the notice of the grant
permit would be inconsistent with safe- or denial and must contain a brief
ty; statement of the issue and an expla-
(iii) The application contained inac- nation of why the petitioner believes
curate or incomplete information, and that the decision being appealed is not
the special permit would not have been in the public interest. The Associate
granted had the application been accu- Administrator may grant or deny, in
rate and complete;
whole or in part, any petition for re-
(iv) The application contained delib-
consideration without further pro-
erately inaccurate or incomplete infor-
mation; or ceedings. The Associate Administra-
(v) The holder has failed to comply tors decision is the final administra-
with any material term or condition of tive action.
the special permit. (j) Are documents related to an applica-
(2) Except as provided in paragraph tion for a special permit available for pub-
(h)(3) of this section, before a special lic inspection? Documents related to an
permit is modified, suspended or re- application, including the application
voked, PHMSA will notify the holder itself, are available for public inspec-
in writing of the proposed action and tion on regulations.gov or the Docket
the reasons for it, and provide an op- Operations Facility to the extent such
portunity to show cause why the pro- documents do not include information
posed action should not be taken. exempt from public disclosure under 5
(i) The holder may file a written re- U.S.C. 552(b). Applicants may request
sponse that shows cause why the pro- confidential treatment under part 7 of
posed action should not be taken with- this title.
in 30 days of receipt of notice of the (k) Am I subject to enforcement action
proposed action. for non-compliance with the terms and
(ii) After considering the holders
conditions of a special permit? Yes.
written response, or after 30 days have
PHMSA inspects for compliance with
passed without response since receipt
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
of the notice, PHMSA will notify the the terms and conditions of special per-
holder in writing of the final decision mits and if a probable violation is iden-
with a brief statement of reasons. tified, PHMSA will initiate one or
403
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00413 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pt. 191 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
of each facility where hydrocarbons are frigerant gas, or gas from an LNG facil-
produced or where produced hydro- ity, and that results in one or more of
carbons are first separated, dehy- the following consequences:
404
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00414 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 191.5
405
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00415 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
191.7 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
406
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00416 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 191.21
an operator must also report this infor- after a report is submitted under para-
mation to the State pipeline safety au- graph (a) or (b) of this section, the op-
thority if a State has obtained regu- erator must make a supplemental re-
latory authority over the operators port as soon as practicable with a clear
pipeline. reference by date to the original re-
port.
[76 FR 5499, Feb. 1, 2011]
[75 FR 72905, Nov. 26, 2010]
191.13 Distribution systems reporting
transmission pipelines; trans- 191.17 Transmission systems; gath-
mission or gathering systems re- ering systems; and liquefied natural
porting distribution pipelines. gas facilities: Annual report.
Each operator, primarily engaged in (a) Transmission or Gathering. Each
gas distribution, who also operates gas operator of a transmission or a gath-
transmission or gathering pipelines ering pipeline system must submit an
shall submit separate reports for these annual report for that system on DOT
pipelines as required by 191.15 and Form PHMSA 7100.2.1. This report
191.17. Each operator, primarily en- must be submitted each year, not later
gaged in gas transmission or gathering, than March 15, for the preceding cal-
who also operates gas distribution endar year, except that for the 2010 re-
pipelines shall submit separate reports porting year the report must be sub-
for these pipelines as required by mitted by June 15, 2011.
191.9 and 191.11. (b) LNG. Each operator of a liquefied
[Amdt. 1915, 49 FR 18961, May 3, 1984]
natural gas facility must submit an an-
nual report for that system on DOT
191.15 Transmission systems; gath- Form PHMSA 7100.31 This report must
ering systems; and liquefied natural be submitted each year, not later than
gas facilities: Incident report. March 15, for the preceding calendar
(a) Transmission or Gathering. Each year, except that for the 2010 reporting
operator of a transmission or a gath- year the report must be submitted by
ering pipeline system must submit June 15, 2011.
DOT Form PHMSA F 7100.2 as soon as [75 FR 72905, Nov. 26, 2010]
practicable but not more than 30 days
after detection of an incident required 191.21 OMB control number assigned
to be reported under 191.5 of this part. to information collection.
(b) LNG. Each operator of a liquefied This section displays the control
natural gas plant or facility must sub- number assigned by the Office of Man-
mit DOT Form PHMSA F 7100.3 as soon agement and Budget (OMB) to the in-
as practicable but not more than 30 formation collection requirements in
days after detection of an incident re- this part. The Paperwork Reduction
quired to be reported under 191.5 of Act requires agencies to display a cur-
this part. rent control number assigned by the
(c) Supplemental report. Where addi- Director of OMB for each agency infor-
tional related information is obtained mation collection requirement.
OMB CONTROL NUMBER 21370522
Section of 49 CFR Part 191 where identified Form No.
407
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00417 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
191.22 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
191.22 National Registry of Pipeline (iii) A change in the entity (e.g., com-
and LNG operators. pany, municipality) responsible for an
(a) OPID Request. Effective January existing pipeline, pipeline segment,
1, 2012, each operator of a gas pipeline, pipeline facility, or LNG facility;
gas pipeline facility, LNG plant or LNG (iv) The acquisition or divestiture of
facility must obtain from PHMSA an 50 or more miles of a pipeline or pipe-
Operator Identification Number line system subject to Part 192 of this
(OPID). An OPID is assigned to an op- subchapter; or
erator for the pipeline or pipeline sys- (v) The acquisition or divestiture of
tem for which the operator has pri- an existing LNG plant or LNG facility
mary responsibility. To obtain on subject to Part 193 of this subchapter.
OPID, an operator must complete an (d) Reporting. An operator must use
OPID Assignment Request DOT Form the OPID issued by PHMSA for all re-
PHMSA F 1000.1 through the National porting requirements covered under
Registry of Pipeline and LNG Opera- this subchapter and for submissions to
tors in accordance with 191.7. the National Pipeline Mapping System.
(b) OPID validation. An operator who [Amdt. 19121, 75 FR 72906, Nov. 26, 2010]
has already been assigned one or more
OPID by January 1, 2011, must validate 191.23 Reporting safety-related con-
the information associated with each ditions.
OPID through the National Registry of (a) Except as provided in paragraph
Pipeline and LNG Operators at http:// (b) of this section, each operator shall
opsweb.phmsa.dot.gov, and correct that report in accordance with 191.25 the
information as necessary, no later than existence of any of the following safe-
June 30, 2012. ty-related conditions involving facili-
(c) Changes. Each operator of a gas ties in service:
pipeline, gas pipeline facility, LNG (1) In the case of a pipeline (other
plant or LNG facility must notify than an LNG facility) that operates at
PHMSA electronically through the Na- a hoop stress of 20 percent or more of
tional Registry of Pipeline and LNG its specified minimum yield strength,
Operators at http://opsweb.phmsa.dot.gov general corrosion that has reduced the
of certain events. wall thickness to less than that re-
(1) An operator must notify PHMSA quired for the maximum allowable op-
of any of the following events not later erating pressure, and localized corro-
than 60 days before the event occurs: sion pitting to a degree where leakage
(i) Construction or any planned reha- might result.
bilitation, replacement, modification, (2) Unintended movement or abnor-
upgrade, uprate, or update of a facility, mal loading by environmental causes,
other than a section of line pipe, that such as an earthquake, landslide, or
costs $10 million or more. If 60 day no- flood, that impairs the serviceability of
tice is not feasible because of an emer- a pipeline or the structural integrity or
gency, an operator must notify PHMSA reliability of an LNG facility that con-
as soon as practicable; tains, controls, or processes gas or
(ii) Construction of 10 or more miles LNG.
of a new pipeline; or (3) Any crack or other material de-
(iii) Construction of a new LNG plant fect that impairs the structural integ-
or LNG facility. rity or reliability of an LNG facility
(2) An operator must notify PHMSA that contains, controls, or processes
of any of the following events not later gas or LNG.
than 60 days after the event occurs: (4) Any material defect or physical
(i) A change in the primary entity re- damage that impairs the serviceability
sponsible (i.e., with an assigned OPID) of a pipeline that operates at a hoop
for managing or administering a safety stress of 20 percent or more of its speci-
program required by this part covering fied minimum yield strength.
pipeline facilities operated under mul- (5) Any malfunction or operating
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
408
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00418 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 191.29
its maximum allowable operating pres- the day a representative of the oper-
sure (or working pressure for LNG fa- ator discovers the condition. Separate
cilities) plus the build-up allowed for conditions may be described in a single
operation of pressure limiting or con- report if they are closely related. Re-
trol devices. ports may be transmitted by electronic
(6) A leak in a pipeline or LNG facil- mail to
ity that contains or processes gas or InformationResourcesManager@dot.gov
LNG that constitutes an emergency. or by facsimile at (202) 3667128.
(7) Inner tank leakage, ineffective in- (b) The report must be headed Safe-
sulation, or frost heave that impairs ty-Related Condition Report and pro-
the structural integrity of an LNG vide the following information:
storage tank. (1) Name and principal address of op-
(8) Any safety-related condition that erator.
could lead to an imminent hazard and (2) Date of report.
causes (either directly or indirectly by (3) Name, job title, and business tele-
remedial action of the operator), for phone number of person submitting the
purposes other than abandonment, a 20 report.
percent or more reduction in operating (4) Name, job title, and business tele-
pressure or shutdown of operation of a phone number of person who deter-
pipeline or an LNG facility that con- mined that the condition exists.
tains or processes gas or LNG. (5) Date condition was discovered and
(b) A report is not required for any date condition was first determined to
safety-related condition that exist.
(1) Exists on a master meter system (6) Location of condition, with ref-
or a customer-owned service line; erence to the State (and town, city, or
(2) Is an incident or results in an in- county) or offshore site, and as appro-
cident before the deadline for filing the priate, nearest street address, offshore
safety-related condition report; platform, survey station number, mile-
(3) Exists on a pipeline (other than an post, landmark, or name of pipeline.
LNG facility) that is more than 220 (7) Description of the condition, in-
yards (200 meters) from any building cluding circumstances leading to its
intended for human occupancy or out- discovery, any significant effects of the
door place of assembly, except that re- condition on safety, and the name of
ports are required for conditions within the commodity transported or stored.
the right-of-way of an active railroad, (8) The corrective action taken (in-
paved road, street, or highway; or cluding reduction of pressure or shut-
(4) Is corrected by repair or replace- down) before the report is submitted
ment in accordance with applicable and the planned follow-up or future
safety standards before the deadline for corrective action, including the antici-
filing the safety-related condition re- pated schedule for starting and con-
port, except that reports are required cluding such action.
for conditions under paragraph (a)(1) of
this section other than localized corro- [Amdt. 1916, 53 FR 24949, July 1, 1988; 53 FR
sion pitting on an effectively coated 29800, Aug. 8, 1988, as amended by Amdt. 191
7, 54 FR 32344, Aug. 7, 1989; Amdt. 1918, 54 FR
and cathodically protected pipeline. 40878, Oct. 4, 1989; Amdt. 19110, 61 FR 18516,
[Amdt. 1916, 53 FR 24949, July 1, 1988, as Apr. 26, 1996; Amdt. 19123, 80 FR 12777, Mar.
amended by Amdt. 19114, 63 FR 37501, July 11, 2015]
13, 1998]
191.29 National Pipeline Mapping
191.25 Filing safety-related condition System.
reports. (a) Each operator of a gas trans-
(a) Each report of a safety-related mission pipeline or liquefied natural
condition under 191.23(a) must be filed gas facility must provide the following
(received by OPS within five working geospatial data to PHMSA for that
days, not including Saturday, Sunday, pipeline or facility:
or Federal Holidays) after the day a (1) Geospatial data, attributes,
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
representative of the operator first de- metadata and transmittal letter appro-
termines that the condition exists, but priate for use in the National Pipeline
not later than 10 working days after Mapping System. Acceptable formats
409
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00419 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pt. 192 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
tilation.
192.51 Scope. 192.189 Vaults: Drainage and waterproofing.
192.53 General. 192.191 Design pressure of plastic fittings.
192.55 Steel pipe. 192.193 Valve installation in plastic pipe.
410
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00420 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT Pt. 192
192.195 Protection against accidental over- Subpart HCustomer Meters, Service
pressuring. Regulators, and Service Lines
192.197 Control of the pressure of gas deliv-
ered from high-pressure distribution sys- 192.351 Scope.
tems. 192.353 Customer meters and regulators: Lo-
192.199 Requirements for design of pressure cation.
relief and limiting devices. 192.355 Customer meters and regulators:
192.201 Required capacity of pressure reliev- Protection from damage.
ing and limiting stations. 192.357 Customer meters and regulators: In-
192.203 Instrument, control, and sampling stallation.
pipe and components. 192.359 Customer meter installations: Oper-
ating pressure.
Subpart EWelding of Steel in Pipelines 192.361 Service lines: Installation.
192.363 Service lines: Valve requirements.
192.221 Scope. 192.365 Service lines: Location of valves.
192.225 Welding procedures. 192.367 Service lines: General requirements
192.227 Qualification of welders and welding for connections to main piping.
operators. 192.369 Service lines: Connections to cast
192.229 Limitations on welders and welding iron or ductile iron mains.
operators. 192.371 Service lines: Steel.
192.229 Limitations on welders. 192.373 Service lines: Cast iron and ductile
192.231 Protection from weather. iron.
192.233 Miter joints. 192.375 Service lines: Plastic.
192.377 Service lines: Copper.
192.235 Preparation for welding.
192.379 New service lines not in use.
192.241 Inspection and test of welds.
192.381 Service lines: Excess flow valve per-
192.243 Nondestructive testing. formance standards.
192.245 Repair or removal of defects. 192.383 Excess flow valve installation.
411
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00421 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pt. 192 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
192.481 Atmospheric corrosion control: Mon- 192.620 Alternative maximum allowable op-
itoring. erating pressure for certain steel pipe-
192.483 Remedial measures: General. lines.
192.485 Remedial measures: Transmission 192.621 Maximum allowable operating pres-
lines. sure: High-pressure distribution systems.
192.487 Remedial measures: Distribution 192.623 Maximum and minimum allowable
lines other than cast iron or ductile iron operating pressure; Low-pressure dis-
lines. tribution systems.
192.489 Remedial measures: Cast iron and 192.625 Odorization of gas.
ductile iron pipelines. 192.627 Tapping pipelines under pressure.
192.490 Direct assessment. 192.629 Purging of pipelines.
192.491 Corrosion control records. 192.631 Control room management.
412
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00422 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 192.1
192.807 Recordkeeping. Subpart PGas Distribution Pipeline
192.809 General. Integrity Management (IM)
Subpart OGas Transmission Pipeline 192.1001 What definitions apply to this sub-
Integrity Management part?
192.1003 What do the regulations in this sub-
192.901 What do the regulations in this sub- part cover?
part cover? 192.1005 What must a gas distribution oper-
192.903 What definitions apply to this sub- ator (other than a master meter or small
part? LPG operator) do to implement this sub-
192.905 How does an operator identify a high part?
consequence area? 192.1007 What are the required elements of
192.907 What must an operator do to imple- an integrity management plan?
ment this subpart? 192.1009 What must an operator report when
192.909 How can an operator change its in- a mechanical fitting fails?
tegrity management program? 192.1011 What records must an operator
keep?
192.911 What are the elements of an integ-
192.1013 When may an operator deviate from
rity management program?
required periodic inspections of this
192.913 When may an operator deviate its
part?
program from certain requirements of
192.1015 What must a master meter or small
this subpart?
liquefied petroleum gas (LPG) operator
192.915 What knowledge and training must do to implement this subpart?
personnel have to carry out an integrity
management program? APPENDIX A TO PART 192 [RESERVED]
192.917 How does an operator identify poten- APPENDIX B TO PART 192QUALIFICATION OF
tial threats to pipeline integrity and use PIPE
the threat identification in its integrity APPENDIX C TO PART 192QUALIFICATION OF
program? WELDERS FOR LOW STRESS LEVEL PIPE
APPENDIX D TO PART 192CRITERIA FOR CA-
192.919 What must be in the baseline assess-
THODIC PROTECTION AND DETERMINATION
ment plan?
OF MEASUREMENTS
192.921 How is the baseline assessment to be
APPENDIX E TO PART 192GUIDANCE ON DE-
conducted?
TERMINING HIGH CONSEQUENCE AREAS AND
192.923 How is direct assessment used and ON CARRYING OUT REQUIREMENTS IN THE
for what threats? INTEGRITY MANAGEMENT RULE
192.925 What are the requirements for using
External Corrosion Direct Assessment AUTHORITY: 49 U.S.C. 5103, 60102, 60104,
(ECDA)? 60108, 60109, 60110, 60113, 60116 and 60118, 60137;
192.927 What are the requirements for using and 49 CFR 1.97.
Internal Corrosion Direct Assessment SOURCE: 35 FR 13257, Aug. 19, 1970, unless
(ICDA)? otherwise noted.
192.929 What are the requirements for using
Direct Assessment for Stress Corrosion EDITORIAL NOTE: Nomenclature changes to
Cracking (SCCDA)? part 192 appear at 71 FR 33406, June 9, 2006.
192.931 How may Confirmatory Direct As-
sessment (CDA) be used? Subpart AGeneral
192.933 What actions must be taken to ad-
dress integrity issues? 192.1 What is the scope of this part?
192.935 What additional preventive and
mitigative measures must an operator
(a) This part prescribes minimum
take? safety requirements for pipeline facili-
192.937 What is a continual process of eval- ties and the transportation of gas, in-
uation and assessment to maintain a cluding pipeline facilities and the
pipelines integrity? transportation of gas within the limits
192.939 What are the required reassessment of the outer continental shelf as that
intervals? term is defined in the Outer Conti-
192.941 What is a low stress reassessment? nental Shelf Lands Act (43 U.S.C. 1331).
192.943 When can an operator deviate from (b) This part does not apply to
these reassessment intervals?
(1) Offshore gathering of gas in State
192.945 What methods must an operator use
to measure program effectiveness?
waters upstream from the outlet flange
192.947 What records must an operator of each facility where hydrocarbons are
produced or where produced hydro-
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
keep?
192.949 How does an operator notify carbons are first separated, dehy-
PHMSA? drated, or otherwise processed, which-
192.951 Where does an operator file a report? ever facility is farther downstream;
413
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00423 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
192.3 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
corrosion that, unless controlled, could ured from the mean low water.
result in a condition that is detri- Hazard to navigation means, for the
mental to public safety. purposes of this part, a pipeline where
414
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00424 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 192.3
the top of the pipe is less than 12 Person means any individual, firm,
inches (305 millimeters) below the un- joint venture, partnership, corporation,
derwater natural bottom (as deter- association, State, municipality, coop-
mined by recognized and generally ac- erative association, or joint stock asso-
cepted practices) in waters less than 15 ciation, and including any trustee, re-
feet (4.6 meters) deep, as measured ceiver, assignee, or personal represent-
from the mean low water. ative thereof.
High-pressure distribution system Petroleum gas means propane, pro-
means a distribution system in which pylene, butane, (normal butane or
the gas pressure in the main is higher isobutanes), and butylene (including
than the pressure provided to the cus- isomers), or mixtures composed pre-
tomer. dominantly of these gases, having a
Line section means a continuous run vapor pressure not exceeding 208 psi
of transmission line between adjacent (1434 kPa) gage at 100 F (38 C).
compressor stations, between a com- Pipe means any pipe or tubing used in
pressor station and storage facilities, the transportation of gas, including
between a compressor station and a pipe-type holders.
block valve, or between adjacent block Pipeline means all parts of those
valves. physical facilities through which gas
Listed specification means a specifica- moves in transportation, including
tion listed in section I of appendix B of
pipe, valves, and other appurtenance
this part.
attached to pipe, compressor units, me-
Low-pressure distribution system means
tering stations, regulator stations, de-
a distribution system in which the gas
livery stations, holders, and fabricated
pressure in the main is substantially
assemblies.
the same as the pressure provided to
the customer. Pipeline environment includes soil re-
Main means a distribution line that sistivity (high or low), soil moisture
serves as a common source of supply (wet or dry), soil contaminants that
for more than one service line. may promote corrosive activity, and
Maximum actual operating pressure other known conditions that could af-
means the maximum pressure that oc- fect the probability of active corrosion.
curs during normal operations over a Pipeline facility means new and exist-
period of 1 year. ing pipelines, rights-of-way, and any
Maximum allowable operating pressure equipment, facility, or building used in
(MAOP) means the maximum pressure the transportation of gas or in the
at which a pipeline or segment of a treatment of gas during the course of
pipeline may be operated under this transportation.
part. Service line means a distribution line
Municipality means a city, county, or that transports gas from a common
any other political subdivision of a source of supply to an individual cus-
State. tomer, to two adjacent or adjoining
Offshore means beyond the line of or- residential or small commercial cus-
dinary low water along that portion of tomers, or to multiple residential or
the coast of the United States that is small commercial customers served
in direct contact with the open seas through a meter header or manifold. A
and beyond the line marking the sea- service line ends at the outlet of the
ward limit of inland waters. customer meter or at the connection to
Operator means a person who engages a customers piping, whichever is fur-
in the transportation of gas. ther downstream, or at the connection
Outer Continental Shelf means all sub- to customer piping if there is no meter.
merged lands lying seaward and out- Service regulator means the device on
side the area of lands beneath navi- a service line that controls the pres-
gable waters as defined in Section 2 of sure of gas delivered from a higher
the Submerged Lands Act (43 U.S.C. pressure to the pressure provided to
1301) and of which the subsoil and sea- the customer. A service regulator may
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
bed appertain to the United States and serve one customer or multiple cus-
are subject to its jurisdiction and con- tomers through a meter header or
trol. manifold.
415
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00425 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
192.5 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
416
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00426 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 192.7
417
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00427 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
192.7 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
418
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00428 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 192.7
419
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00429 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
192.8 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
A ......... Metallic and the MAOP produces a Class 2, 3, or 4 location (see 192.5) None.
hoop stress of 20 percent or more
of SMYS. If the stress level is un-
known, an operator must determine
the stress level according to the
applicable provisions in subpart C
of this part.
Non-metallic and the MAOP is
more than 125 psig (862 kPa).
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
420
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00430 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 192.9
B ......... Metallic and the MAOP produces a Area 1. Class 3 or 4 location ............. If the gathering line is in Area 2(b) or
hoop stress of less than 20 percent Area 2. An area within a Class 2 lo- 2(c), the additional lengths of line
of SMYS. If the stress level is un- cation the operator determines by extend upstream and downstream
known, an operator must determine using any of the following three from the area to a point where the
the stress level according to the methods: line is at least 150 feet (45.7 m)
applicable provisions in subpart C (a) A Class 2 location. ........................ from the nearest dwelling in the
of this part. (b) An area extending 150 feet (45.7 area. However, if a cluster of dwell-
Non-metallic and the MAOP is 125 m) on each side of the centerline of ings in Area 2 (b) or 2(c) qualifies a
psig (862 kPa) or less. any continuous 1 mile (1.6 km) of line as Type B, the Type B classi-
pipeline and including more than 10 fication ends 150 feet (45.7 m)
but fewer than 46 dwellings. from the nearest dwelling in the
(c) An area extending 150 feet (45.7 cluster.
m) on each side of the centerline of
any continous 1000 feet (305 m) of
pipeline and including 5 or more
dwellings.
[Amdt. 192102, 71 FR 13302, Mar. 15, 2006] (3) Carry out a damage prevention
program under 192.614;
192.9 What requirements apply to (4) Establish a public education pro-
gathering lines? gram under 192.616;
(a) Requirements. An operator of a (5) Establish the MAOP of the line
gathering line must follow the safety under 192.619; and
requirements of this part as prescribed (6) Install and maintain line markers
by this section. according to the requirements for
(b) Offshore lines. An operator of an transmission lines in 192.707.
offshore gathering line must comply (7) Conduct leakage surveys in ac-
with requirements of this part applica- cordance with 192.706 using leak de-
ble to transmission lines, except the re- tection equipment and promptly repair
quirements in 192.150 and in subpart O hazardous leaks that are discovered in
of this part. accordance with 192.703(c).
(c) Type A lines. An operator of a (e) Compliance deadlines. An operator
Type A regulated onshore gathering of a regulated onshore gathering line
line must comply with the require- must comply with the following dead-
ments of this part applicable to trans- lines, as applicable.
mission lines, except the requirements (1) An operator of a new, replaced, re-
in 192.150 and in subpart O of this located, or otherwise changed line
part. However, an operator of a Type A must be in compliance with the appli-
regulated onshore gathering line in a cable requirements of this section by
Class 2 location may demonstrate com- the date the line goes into service, un-
pliance with subpart N by describing less an exception in 192.13 applies.
the processes it uses to determine the (2) If a regulated onshore gathering
qualification of persons performing op- line existing on April 14, 2006 was not
erations and maintenance tasks. previously subject to this part, an op-
(d) Type B lines. An operator of a erator has until the date stated in the
Type B regulated onshore gathering second column to comply with the ap-
line must comply with the following plicable requirement for the line listed
requirements: in the first column, unless the Admin-
(1) If a line is new, replaced, relo- istrator finds a later deadline is justi-
cated, or otherwise changed, the de- fied in a particular case:
sign, installation, construction, initial
inspection, and initial testing must be Requirement Compliance deadline
in accordance with requirements of Control corrosion according to April 15, 2009.
this part applicable to transmission Subpart I requirements for
lines; transmission lines.
(2) If the pipeline is metallic, control Carry out a damage preven- October 15, 2007.
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
421
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00431 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
192.10 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
422
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00432 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 192.16
plans, procedures, and programs that it (1) Words importing the singular in-
is required to establish under this part. clude the plural;
[35 FR 13257, Aug. 19, 1970, as amended by
(2) Words importing the plural in-
Amdt. 19227, 41 FR 34605, Aug. 16, 1976; clude the singular; and
Amdt. 19230, 42 FR 60148, Nov. 25, 1977; (3) Words importing the masculine
Amdt. 192102, 71 FR 13303, Mar. 15, 2006] gender include the feminine.
Shall is used in the mandatory and 1996, or 90 days after the customer first
imperative sense. receives gas at a particular location,
(b) In this part: whichever is later. However, operators
423
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00433 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
192.51 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
424
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00434 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 192.101
(2) It is resistant to chemicals with fore November 12, 1970, that meet all of
which contact may be anticipated; the following:
(3) It has been used only in natural (1) The item is identifiable as to type,
gas service; manufacturer, and model.
(4) Its dimensions are still within the (2) Specifications or standards giving
tolerances of the specification to which pressure, temperature, and other ap-
it was manufactured; and propriate criteria for the use of items
(5) It is free of visible defects. are readily available.
(c) For the purpose of paragraphs
(a)(1) and (b)(1) of this section, where [Amdt. 1921, 35 FR 17660, Nov. 17, 1970, as
pipe of a diameter included in a listed amended by Amdt. 19231, 43 FR 883, Apr. 3,
specification is impractical to use, pipe 1978; Amdt. 19261, 53 FR 36793, Sept. 22, 1988;
of a diameter between the sizes in- Amdt. 19262, 54 FR 5627, Feb. 6, 1989; Amdt.
cluded in a listed specification may be 19261A, 54 FR 32642, Aug. 9, 1989; 58 FR 14521,
Mar. 18, 1993; Amdt. 19276, 61 FR 26122, May
used if it:
24, 1996; 61 FR 36826, July 15, 1996; Amdt. 192
(1) Meets the strength and design cri-
114, 75 FR 48603, Aug. 11, 2010; Amdt. 192119,
teria required of pipe included in that 80 FR 180, Jan. 5, 2015]
listed specification; and
(2) Is manufactured from plastic com- 192.65 Transportation of pipe.
pounds which meet the criteria for ma-
terial required of pipe included in that (a) Railroad. In a pipeline to be oper-
listed specification. ated at a hoop stress of 20 percent or
(d) Rework and/or regrind material is more of SMYS, an operator may not in-
not allowed in plastic pipe produced stall pipe having an outer diameter to
after March 6, 2015 used under this wall thickness of 70 to 1, or more, that
part. is transported by railroad unless the
transportation is performed by API RP
[35 FR 13257, Aug. 19, 1970, as amended by
Amdt. 19219, 40 FR 10472, Mar. 6, 1975; Amdt. 5L1 (incorporated by reference, see
19258, 53 FR 1635, Jan. 21, 1988; Amdt. 192119, 192.7).
80 FR 180, Jan. 5, 2015] (b) Ship or barge. In a pipeline to be
operated at a hoop stress of 20 percent
192.61 [Reserved] or more of SMYS, an operator may not
192.63 Marking of materials. use pipe having an outer diameter to
wall thickness ratio of 70 to 1, or more,
(a) Except as provided in paragraph that is transported by ship or barge on
(d) of this section, each valve, fitting, both inland and marine waterways un-
length of pipe, and other component less the transportation is performed in
must be marked
accordance with API RP 5LW (incor-
(1) As prescribed in the specification
porated by reference, see 192.7).
or standard to which it was manufac-
tured, except that thermoplastic pipe (c) Truck. In a pipeline to be operated
and fittings made of plastic materials at a hoop stress of 20 percent or more
other than polyethylene must be of SMYS, an operator may not use pipe
marked in accordance with ASTM having an outer diameter to wall
D251387 (incorporated by reference, see thickness ratio of 70 to 1, or more, that
192.7); is transported by truck unless the
(2) To indicate size, material, manu- transportation is performed in accord-
facturer, pressure rating, and tempera- ance with API RP 5LT (incorporated by
ture rating, and as appropriate, type, reference, see 192.7).
grade, and model.
[Amdt. 192114, 75 FR 48603, Aug. 11, 2010, as
(b) Surfaces of pipe and components amended by Amdt. 192119, 80 FR 180, Jan. 5,
that are subject to stress from internal 2015; Amdt. 192120, 80 FR 12777, Mar. 11, 2015]
pressure may not be field die stamped.
(c) If any item is marked by die
stamping, the die must have blunt or Subpart CPipe Design
rounded edges that will minimize
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
192.101 Scope.
stress concentrations.
(d) Paragraph (a) of this section does This subpart prescribes the minimum
not apply to items manufactured be- requirements for the design of pipe.
425
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00435 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
192.103 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
426
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00436 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 192.112
design formula in 192.105 is deter- (c) For Class 2 locations, a design fac-
mined in accordance with the following tor of 0.50, or less, must be used in the
table: design formula in 192.105 for uncased
steel pipe that crosses the right-of-way
Design
Class location factor (F) of a hard surfaced road, a highway, a
public street, or a railroad.
1 ........................................................................... 0.72 (d) For Class 1 and Class 2 locations,
2 ........................................................................... 0.60
3 ........................................................................... 0.50 a design factor of 0.50, or less, must be
4 ........................................................................... 0.40 used in the design formula in 192.105
for
(b) A design factor of 0.60 or less (1) Steel pipe in a compressor station,
must be used in the design formula in regulating station, or measuring sta-
192.105 for steel pipe in Class 1 loca- tion; and
tions that: (2) Steel pipe, including a pipe riser,
(1) Crosses the right-of-way of an un- on a platform located offshore or in in-
improved public road, without a casing; land navigable waters.
(2) Crosses without a casing, or [35 FR 13257, Aug. 19, 1970, as amended by
makes a parallel encroachment on, the Amdt. 19227, 41 FR 34605, Aug. 16, 1976]
right-of-way of either a hard surfaced
road, a highway, a public street, or a 192.112 Additional design require-
railroad; ments for steel pipe using alter-
(3) Is supported by a vehicular, pedes- native maximum allowable oper-
trian, railroad, or pipeline bridge; or ating pressure.
(4) Is used in a fabricated assembly, For a new or existing pipeline seg-
(including separators, mainline valve ment to be eligible for operation at the
assemblies, cross-connections, and alternative maximum allowable oper-
river crossing headers) or is used with- ating pressure (MAOP) calculated
in five pipe diameters in any direction under 192.620, a segment must meet
from the last fitting of a fabricated as- the following additional design require-
sembly, other than a transition piece ments. Records for alternative MAOP
or an elbow used in place of a pipe bend must be maintained, for the useful life
which is not associated with a fab- of the pipeline, demonstrating compli-
ricated assembly. ance with these requirements:
To address this design issue: The pipeline segment must meet these additional requirements:
(a) General standards for the (1) The plate, skelp, or coil used for the pipe must be micro-alloyed, fine grain, fully killed, con-
steel pipe. tinuously cast steel with calcium treatment.
(2) The carbon equivalents of the steel used for pipe must not exceed 0.25 percent by weight,
as calculated by the Ito-Bessyo formula (Pcm formula) or 0.43 percent by weight, as cal-
culated by the International Institute of Welding (IIW) formula.
(3) The ratio of the specified outside diameter of the pipe to the specified wall thickness must
be less than 100. The wall thickness or other mitigative measures must prevent denting and
ovality anomalies during construction, strength testing and anticipated operational stresses.
(4) The pipe must be manufactured using API Spec 5L, product specification level 2 (incor-
porated by reference, see 192.7) for maximum operating pressures and minimum and
maximum operating temperatures and other requirements under this section.
(b) Fracture control ................... (1) The toughness properties for pipe must address the potential for initiation, propagation and
arrest of fractures in accordance with:
(i) API Spec 5L (incorporated by reference, see 192.7); or
(ii) American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) B31.8 (incorporated by reference, see
192.7); and
(iii) Any correction factors needed to address pipe grades, pressures, temperatures, or gas
compositions not expressly addressed in API Spec 5L , product specification level 2 or
ASME B31.8 (incorporated by reference, see 192.7).
(2) Fracture control must:
(i) Ensure resistance to fracture initiation while addressing the full range of operating tempera-
tures, pressures, gas compositions, pipe grade and operating stress levels, including max-
imum pressures and minimum temperatures for shut-in conditions, that the pipeline is ex-
pected to experience. If these parameters change during operation of the pipeline such that
they are outside the bounds of what was considered in the design evaluation, the evaluation
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
must be reviewed and updated to assure continued resistance to fracture initiation over the
operating life of the pipeline;
(ii) Address adjustments to toughness of pipe for each grade used and the decompression be-
havior of the gas at operating parameters;
427
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00437 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
192.112 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
To address this design issue: The pipeline segment must meet these additional requirements:
(iii) Ensure at least 99 percent probability of fracture arrest within eight pipe lengths with a
probability of not less than 90 percent within five pipe lengths; and
(iv) Include fracture toughness testing that is equivalent to that described in supplementary re-
quirements SR5A, SR5B, and SR6 of API Specification 5L (incorporated by reference, see
192.7) and ensures ductile fracture and arrest with the following exceptions:
(A) The results of the Charpy impact test prescribed in SR5A must indicate at least 80 percent
minimum shear area for any single test on each heat of steel; and
(B) The results of the drop weight test prescribed in SR6 must indicate 80 percent average
shear area with a minimum single test result of 60 percent shear area for any steel test
samples. The test results must ensure a ductile fracture and arrest.
(3) If it is not physically possible to achieve the pipeline toughness properties of paragraphs
(b)(1) and (2) of this section, additional design features, such as mechanical or composite
crack arrestors and/or heavier walled pipe of proper design and spacing, must be used to
ensure fracture arrest as described in paragraph (b)(2)(iii) of this section.
(c) Plate/coil quality control ...... (1) There must be an internal quality management program at all mills involved in producing
steel, plate, coil, skelp, and/or rolling pipe to be operated at alternative MAOP. These pro-
grams must be structured to eliminate or detect defects and inclusions affecting pipe quality.
(2) A mill inspection program or internal quality management program must include (i) and ei-
ther (ii) or (iii):
(i) An ultrasonic test of the ends and at least 35 percent of the surface of the plate/coil or pipe
to identify imperfections that impair serviceability such as laminations, cracks, and inclu-
sions. At least 95 percent of the lengths of pipe manufactured must be tested. For all pipe-
lines designed after December 22, 2008, the test must be done in accordance with ASTM
A578/A578M Level B, or API Spec 5L Paragraph 7.8.10 (incorporated by reference, see
192.7) or equivalent method, and either
(ii) A macro etch test or other equivalent method to identify inclusions that may form centerline
segregation during the continuous casting process. Use of sulfur prints is not an equivalent
method. The test must be carried out on the first or second slab of each sequence graded
with an acceptance criteria of one or two on the Mannesmann scale or equivalent; or
(iii) A quality assurance monitoring program implemented by the operator that includes audits
of: (a) all steelmaking and casting facilities, (b) quality control plans and manufacturing pro-
cedure specifications, (c) equipment maintenance and records of conformance, (d) applica-
ble casting superheat and speeds, and (e) centerline segregation monitoring records to en-
sure mitigation of centerline segregation during the continuous casting process.
(d) Seam quality control ........... (1) There must be a quality assurance program for pipe seam welds to assure tensile strength
provided in API Spec 5L (incorporated by reference, see 192.7) for appropriate grades.
(2) There must be a hardness test, using Vickers (Hv10) hardness test method or equivalent
test method, to assure a maximum hardness of 280 Vickers of the following:
(i) A cross section of the weld seam of one pipe from each heat plus one pipe from each
welding line per day; and
(ii) For each sample cross section, a minimum of 13 readings (three for each heat affected
zone, three in the weld metal, and two in each section of pipe base metal).
(3) All of the seams must be ultrasonically tested after cold expansion and mill hydrostatic
testing.
(e) Mill hydrostatic test ............. (1) All pipe to be used in a new pipeline segment installed after October 1, 2015, must be
hydrostatically tested at the mill at a test pressure corresponding to a hoop stress of 95 per-
cent SMYS for 10 seconds.
(2) Pipe in operation prior to December 22, 2008, must have been hydrostatically tested at the
mill at a test pressure corresponding to a hoop stress of 90 percent SMYS for 10 seconds.
(3) Pipe in operation on or after December 22, 2008, but before October 1, 2015, must have
been hydrostatically tested at the mill at a test pressure corresponding to a hoop stress of
95 percent SMYS for 10 seconds. The test pressure may include a combination of internal
test pressure and the allowance for end loading stresses imposed by the pipe mill hydro-
static testing equipment as allowed by ANSI/API Spec 5L (incorporated by reference, see
192.7).
(f) Coating ................................. (1) The pipe must be protected against external corrosion by a non-shielding coating.
(2) Coating on pipe used for trenchless installation must be non-shielding and resist abrasions
and other damage possible during installation.
(3) A quality assurance inspection and testing program for the coating must cover the surface
quality of the bare pipe, surface cleanliness and chlorides, blast cleaning, application tem-
perature control, adhesion, cathodic disbondment, moisture permeation, bending, coating
thickness, holiday detection, and repair.
(g) Fittings and flanges ............. (1) There must be certification records of flanges, factory induction bends and factory weld
ells. Certification must address material properties such as chemistry, minimum yield
strength and minimum wall thickness to meet design conditions.
(2) If the carbon equivalents of flanges, bends and ells are greater than 0.42 percent by
weight, the qualified welding procedures must include a pre-heat procedure.
(3) Valves, flanges and fittings must be rated based upon the required specification rating
class for the alternative MAOP.
(h) Compressor stations ........... (1) A compressor station must be designed to limit the temperature of the nearest downstream
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
segment operating at alternative MAOP to a maximum of 120 degrees Fahrenheit (49 de-
grees Celsius) or the higher temperature allowed in paragraph (h)(2) of this section unless a
long-term coating integrity monitoring program is implemented in accordance with paragraph
(h)(3) of this section.
428
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00438 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 192.115
To address this design issue: The pipeline segment must meet these additional requirements:
(2) If research, testing and field monitoring tests demonstrate that the coating type being used
will withstand a higher temperature in long-term operations, the compressor station may be
designed to limit downstream piping to that higher temperature. Test results and acceptance
criteria addressing coating adhesion, cathodic disbondment, and coating condition must be
provided to each PHMSA pipeline safety regional office where the pipeline is in service at
least 60 days prior to operating above 120 degrees Fahrenheit (49 degrees Celsius). An op-
erator must also notify a State pipeline safety authority when the pipeline is located in a
State where PHMSA has an interstate agent agreement, or an intrastate pipeline is regu-
lated by that State.
(3) Pipeline segments operating at alternative MAOP may operate at temperatures above 120
degrees Fahrenheit (49 degrees Celsius) if the operator implements a long-term coating in-
tegrity monitoring program. The monitoring program must include examinations using direct
current voltage gradient (DCVG), alternating current voltage gradient (ACVG), or an equiva-
lent method of monitoring coating integrity. An operator must specify the periodicity at which
these examinations occur and criteria for repairing identified indications. An operator must
submit its long-term coating integrity monitoring program to each PHMSA pipeline safety re-
gional office in which the pipeline is located for review before the pipeline segments may be
operated at temperatures in excess of 120 degrees Fahrenheit (49 degrees Celsius). An op-
erator must also notify a State pipeline safety authority when the pipeline is located in a
State where PHMSA has an interstate agent agreement, or an intrastate pipeline is regu-
lated by that State.
[73 FR 62175, Oct. 17, 2008, as amended by Amdt. 192111, 74 FR 62505, Nov. 30, 2009; Amdt. 192
119, 80 FR 180, Jan. 5, 2015; Amdt. 192120, 80 FR 12777, Mar. 11, 2015]
429
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00439 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
192.117192.119 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
t
P = 2S (DF)
(D t)
2S
P= (DF)
(SDR 1)
430
ER30NO09.008</MATH>
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00440 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 192.144
may exceed a gauge pressure of 100 psig erage hydrogen sulfide content of more
(689 kPa) provided that: than 0.3 grains/100 ft3 (6.9/m3) under
(1) The design pressure does not ex- standard conditions. Standard condi-
ceed 125 psig (862 kPa); tions refers to 60 F and 14.7 psia (15.6
(2) The material is a polyethylene C and one atmosphere) of gas.
(PE) pipe with the designation code as
[35 FR 13257, Aug. 19, 1970, as amended by
specified within ASTM D251309a (in- Amdt. 19262, 54 FR 5628, Feb. 6, 1989; Amdt.
corporated by reference, see 192.7); 19285, 63 FR 37502, July 13, 1998]
(3) The pipe size is nominal pipe size
(IPS) 12 or less; and
(4) The design pressure is determined Subpart DDesign of Pipeline
in accordance with the design equation Components
defined in 192.121.
192.141 Scope.
(f) The design pressure for poly-
amide-11 (PA11) pipe produced after This subpart prescribes minimum re-
January 23, 2009 may exceed a gauge quirements for the design and installa-
pressure of 100 psig (689 kPa) provided tion of pipeline components and facili-
that: ties. In addition, it prescribes require-
(1) The design pressure does not ex- ments relating to protection against
ceed 200 psig (1379 kPa); accidental overpressuring.
(2) The pipe size is nominal pipe size
(IPS or CTS) 4-inch or less; and 192.143 General requirements.
(3) The pipe has a standard dimension (a) Each component of a pipeline
ratio of SDR11 or greater (i.e., thicker must be able to withstand operating
pipe wall). pressures and other anticipated load-
[35 FR 13257, Aug. 19, 1970, as amended by
ings without impairment of its service-
Amdt. 19231, 43 FR 13883, Apr. 3, 1978; Amdt. ability with unit stresses equivalent to
19278, 61 FR 28783, June 6, 1996; Amdt. 19285, those allowed for comparable material
63 FR 37502, July 13, 1998; Amdt. 19293, 68 FR in pipe in the same location and kind
53900, Sept. 15, 2003; 69 FR 32894, June 14, 2004; of service. However, if design based
Amdt. 19294, 69 FR 54592, Sept. 9, 2004; Amdt. upon unit stresses is impractical for a
192103, 71 FR 33407, June 9, 2006; 73 FR 79005, particular component, design may be
Dec. 24, 2008; Amdt. 192114, 75 FR 48603, Aug. based upon a pressure rating estab-
11, 2010; Amdt. 192119, 80 FR 181, Jan. 5, 2015]
lished by the manufacturer by pressure
192.125 Design of copper pipe. testing that component or a prototype
of the component.
(a) Copper pipe used in mains must (b) The design and installation of
have a minimum wall thickness of 0.065 pipeline components and facilities
inches (1.65 millimeters) and must be must meet applicable requirements for
hard drawn. corrosion control found in subpart I of
(b) Copper pipe used in service lines this part.
must have wall thickness not less than
that indicated in the following table: [Amdt. 48, 49 FR 19824, May 10, 1984, as
amended at 72 FR 20059, Apr. 23, 2007]
Wall thickness inch (milli-
Standard Nominal meter) 192.144 Qualifying metallic compo-
size inch O.D. inch
(millimeter) (millimeter) Nominal Tolerance nents.
12 (13) .625 (16) .040 (1.06) .0035 (.0889) Notwithstanding any requirement of
58 (16) .750 (19) .042 (1.07) .0035 (.0889) this subpart which incorporates by ref-
34 (19) .875 (22) .045 (1.14) .004 (.102) erence an edition of a document listed
1 (25) 1.125 (29) .050 (1.27) .004 (.102)
114 (32) 1.375 (35) .055 (1.40) .0045 (.1143) in 192.7 or Appendix B of this part, a
112 (38) 1.625 (41) .060 (1.52) .0045 (.1143) metallic component manufactured in
accordance with any other edition of
(c) Copper pipe used in mains and that document is qualified for use
service lines may not be used at pres- under this part if
sures in excess of 100 p.s.i. (689 kPa) (a) It can be shown through visual in-
gage. spection of the cleaned component that
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
(d) Copper pipe that does not have an no defect exists which might impair
internal corrosion resistant lining may the strength or tightness of the compo-
not be used to carry gas that has an av- nent; and
431
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00441 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
192.145 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
(b) The edition of the document nents made of ductile iron may be used
under which the component was manu- at pressures up to 80 percent of the
factured has equal or more stringent pressure ratings for comparable steel
requirements for the following as an valves at their listed temperature, if:
edition of that document currently or (1) The temperature-adjusted service
previously listed in 192.7 or appendix pressure does not exceed 1,000 p.s.i. (7
B of this part: Mpa) gage; and
(1) Pressure testing; (2) Welding is not used on any ductile
(2) Materials; and iron component in the fabrication of
(3) Pressure and temperature ratings. the valve shells or their assembly.
[Amdt. 19245, 48 FR 30639, July 5, 1983, as (e) No valve having shell (body, bon-
amended by Amdt. 19294, 69 FR 32894, June net, cover, and/or end flange) compo-
14, 2004] nents made of cast iron, malleable
iron, or ductile iron may be used in the
192.145 Valves. gas pipe components of compressor sta-
(a) Except for cast iron and plastic tions.
valves, each valve must meet the min-
[35 FR 13257, Aug. 19, 1970, as amended by
imum requirements of ANSI/API Spec
Amdt. 19262, 54 FR 5628, Feb. 6, 1989; Amdt.
6D (incorporated by reference, see 19285, 63 FR 37502, July 13, 1998; Amdt. 192
192.7), or to a national or inter- 94, 69 FR 32894, June 14, 2004; Amdt. 192114,
national standard that provides an 75 FR 48603, Aug. 11, 2010; Amdt. 192119, 80
equivalent performance level. A valve FR 181, Jan. 5, 2015]
may not be used under operating condi-
tions that exceed the applicable pres- 192.147 Flanges and flange acces-
sure-temperature ratings contained in sories.
those requirements. (a) Each flange or flange accessory
(b) Each cast iron and plastic valve (other than cast iron) must meet the
must comply with the following: minimum requirements of ASME/ANSI
(1) The valve must have a maximum B 16.5 and MSS SP44 (incorporated by
service pressure rating for tempera- reference, see 192.7), or the equivalent.
tures that equal or exceed the max- (b) Each flange assembly must be
imum service temperature. able to withstand the maximum pres-
(2) The valve must be tested as part sure at which the pipeline is to be oper-
of the manufacturing, as follows: ated and to maintain its physical and
(i) With the valve in the fully open chemical properties at any tempera-
position, the shell must be tested with ture to which it is anticipated that it
no leakage to a pressure at least 1.5 might be subjected in service.
times the maximum service rating. (c) Each flange on a flanged joint in
(ii) After the shell test, the seat must cast iron pipe must conform in dimen-
be tested to a pressure not less than 1.5 sions, drilling, face and gasket design
times the maximum service pressure to ASME/ANSI B16.1 (incorporated by
rating. Except for swing check valves, reference, see 192.7)and be cast inte-
test pressure during the seat test must grally with the pipe, valve, or fitting.
be applied successively on each side of
the closed valve with the opposite side [35 FR 13257, Aug. 19, 1970, as amended by
open. No visible leakage is permitted. Amdt. 19262, 54 FR 5628, Feb. 6, 1989; 58 FR
(iii) After the last pressure test is 14521, Mar. 18, 1993; Amdt. 192119, 80 FR 181,
completed, the valve must be operated Jan. 5, 2015]
through its full travel to demonstrate
192.149 Standard fittings.
freedom from interference.
(c) Each valve must be able to meet (a) The minimum metal thickness of
the anticipated operating conditions. threaded fittings may not be less than
(d) No valve having shell (body, bon- specified for the pressures and tem-
net, cover, and/or end flange) compo- peratures in the applicable standards
nents made of ductile iron may be used referenced in this part, or their equiva-
at pressures exceeding 80 percent of the lent.
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
pressure ratings for comparable steel (b) Each steel butt-welding fitting
valves at their listed temperature. must have pressure and temperature
However, a valve having shell compo- ratings based on stresses for pipe of the
432
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00442 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 192.151
same or equivalent material. The ac- cable to design and construct to ac-
tual bursting strength of the fitting commodate the passage of instru-
must at least equal the computed mented internal inspection devices.
bursting strength of pipe of the des- (c) An operator encountering emer-
ignated material and wall thickness, as gencies, construction time constraints
determined by a prototype that was or other unforeseen construction prob-
tested to at least the pressure required lems need not construct a new or re-
for the pipeline to which it is being placement segment of a transmission
added. line to meet paragraph (a) of this sec-
tion, if the operator determines and
192.150 Passage of internal inspec- documents why an impracticability
tion devices. prohibits compliance with paragraph
(a) Except as provided in paragraphs (a) of this section. Within 30 days after
(b) and (c) of this section, each new discovering the emergency or construc-
transmission line and each replace- tion problem the operator must peti-
ment of line pipe, valve, fitting, or tion, under 190.9 of this chapter, for
other line component in a transmission approval that design and construction
line must be designed and constructed to accommodate passage of instru-
to accommodate the passage of instru- mented internal inspection devices
mented internal inspection devices. would be impracticable. If the petition
(b) This section does not apply to: (1) is denied, within 1 year after the date
Manifolds; of the notice of the denial, the operator
(2) Station piping such as at com- must modify that segment to allow
pressor stations, meter stations, or passage of instrumented internal in-
regulator stations; spection devices.
(3) Piping associated with storage fa-
[Amdt. 19272, 59 FR 17281, Apr. 12, 1994, as
cilities, other than a continuous run of
amended by Amdt. 19285, 63 FR 37502, July
transmission line between a com- 13, 1998; Amdt. 19297, 69 FR 36029, June 28,
pressor station and storage facilities; 2004]
(4) Cross-overs;
(5) Sizes of pipe for which an instru- 192.151 Tapping.
mented internal inspection device is
(a) Each mechanical fitting used to
not commercially available;
make a hot tap must be designed for at
(6) Transmission lines, operated in
least the operating pressure of the
conjunction with a distribution system
pipeline.
which are installed in Class 4 locations;
(b) Where a ductile iron pipe is
(7) Offshore transmission lines, ex-
tapped, the extent of full-thread en-
cept transmission lines 1034 inches (273
gagement and the need for the use of
millimeters) or more in outside diame-
outside-sealing service connections,
ter on which construction begins after
tapping saddles, or other fixtures must
December 28, 2005, that run from plat-
be determined by service conditions.
form to platform or platform to shore
unless (c) Where a threaded tap is made in
(i) Platform space or configuration is cast iron or ductile iron pipe, the di-
incompatible with launching or re- ameter of the tapped hole may not be
trieving instrumented internal inspec- more than 25 percent of the nominal di-
tion devices; or ameter of the pipe unless the pipe is re-
(ii) If the design includes taps for lat- inforced, except that
eral connections, the operator can (1) Existing taps may be used for re-
demonstrate, based on investigation or placement service, if they are free of
experience, that there is no reasonably cracks and have good threads; and
practical alternative under the design (2) A 114-inch (32 millimeters) tap
circumstances to the use of a tap that may be made in a 4-inch (102 millime-
will obstruct the passage of instru- ters) cast iron or ductile iron pipe,
mented internal inspection devices; without reinforcement.
and However, in areas where climate, soil,
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
(8) Other piping that, under 190.9 of and service conditions may create un-
this chapter, the Administrator finds usual external stresses on cast iron
in a particular case would be impracti- pipe, unreinforced taps may be used
433
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00443 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
192.153 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
only on 6-inch (152 millimeters) or larg- must be tested to at least 1.5 times the
er pipe. MAOP.
[35 FR 13257, Aug. 19, 1970, as amended by [35 FR 13257, Aug. 19, 1970, as amended by
Amdt. 19285, 63 FR 37502, July 13, 1998] Amdt. 1921, 35 FR 17660, Nov. 17, 1970; 58 FR
14521, Mar. 18, 1993; Amdt. 19268, 58 FR 45268,
192.153 Components fabricated by Aug. 27, 1993; Amdt. 19285, 63 FR 37502, July
welding. 13, 1998; Amdt. 192119, 80 FR 181, Jan. 5, 2015;
Amdt. 192120, 80 FR 12778, Mar. 11, 2015;
(a) Except for branch connections Amdt. 192119, 80 FR 46847, Aug. 6, 2015]
and assemblies of standard pipe and fit-
tings joined by circumferential welds, 192.155 Welded branch connections.
the design pressure of each component Each welded branch connection made
fabricated by welding, whose strength to pipe in the form of a single connec-
cannot be determined, must be estab- tion, or in a header or manifold as a se-
lished in accordance with paragraph ries of connections, must be designed
UG101 of the ASME Boiler and Pres- to ensure that the strength of the pipe-
sure Vessel Code (BPVC) (Section VIII, line system is not reduced, taking into
Division 1) (incorporated by reference, account the stresses in the remaining
see 192.7). pipe wall due to the opening in the pipe
(b) Each prefabricated unit that uses or header, the shear stresses produced
plate and longitudinal seams must be by the pressure acting on the area of
designed, constructed, and tested in ac- the branch opening, and any external
loadings due to thermal movement,
cordance with section 1 of the ASME
weight, and vibration.
BPVC (Section VIII, Division 1 or Sec-
tion VIII, Division 2) (incorporated by 192.157 Extruded outlets.
reference, see 192.7), except for the fol-
Each extruded outlet must be suit-
lowing: able for anticipated service conditions
(1) Regularly manufactured butt- and must be at least equal to the de-
welding fittings. sign strength of the pipe and other fit-
(2) Pipe that has been produced and tings in the pipeline to which it is at-
tested under a specification listed in tached.
appendix B to this part.
(3) Partial assemblies such as split 192.159 Flexibility.
rings or collars. Each pipeline must be designed with
(4) Prefabricated units that the man- enough flexibility to prevent thermal
ufacturer certifies have been tested to expansion or contraction from causing
at least twice the maximum pressure excessive stresses in the pipe or compo-
to which they will be subjected under nents, excessive bending or unusual
the anticipated operating conditions. loads at joints, or undesirable forces or
(c) Orange-peel bull plugs and or- moments at points of connection to
ange-peel swages may not be used on equipment, or at anchorage or guide
pipelines that are to operate at a hoop points.
stress of 20 percent or more of the 192.161 Supports and anchors.
SMYS of the pipe.
(a) Each pipeline and its associated
(d) Except for flat closures designed
equipment must have enough anchors
in accordance with the ASME BPVC
or supports to:
(Section VIII, Division 1 or 2), flat clo- (1) Prevent undue strain on con-
sures and fish tails may not be used on nected equipment;
pipe that either operates at 100 p.s.i. (2) Resist longitudinal forces caused
(689 kPa) gage or more, or is more than by a bend or offset in the pipe; and
3 inches in (76 millimeters) nominal di- (3) Prevent or damp out excessive vi-
ameter. bration.
(e) A component having a design (b) Each exposed pipeline must have
pressure established in accordance with enough supports or anchors to protect
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
paragraph (a) or paragraph (b) of this the exposed pipe joints from the max-
section and subject to the strength imum end force caused by internal
testing requirements of 192.505(b) pressure and any additional forces
434
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00444 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 192.165
building from structures on adjacent (b) Each liquid separator used to re-
property. There must be enough open move entrained liquids at a compressor
space around the main compressor station must:
435
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00445 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
192.167 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
(b) If a compressor station supplies ties, their operation may not be af-
gas directly to a distribution system fected by the emergency shutdown sys-
with no other adequate source of gas tem.
436
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00446 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 192.179
(b) Each compressor station prime 192.177 Additional provisions for bot-
mover, other than an electrical induc- tle-type holders.
tion or synchronous motor, must have (a) Each bottle-type holder must be
an automatic device to shut down the (1) Located on a site entirely sur-
unit before the speed of either the rounded by fencing that prevents ac-
prime mover or the driven unit exceeds cess by unauthorized persons and with
a maximum safe speed. minimum clearance from the fence as
(c) Each compressor unit in a com- follows:
pressor station must have a shutdown
or alarm device that operates in the Minimum clear-
Maximum allowable operating pressure ance feet (me-
event of inadequate cooling or lubrica- ters)
tion of the unit.
(d) Each compressor station gas en- Less than 1,000 p.s.i. (7 MPa) gage ........... 25 (7.6)
1,000 p.s.i. (7 MPa) gage or more .............. 100 (31)
gine that operates with pressure gas in-
jection must be equipped so that stop-
(2) Designed using the design factors
page of the engine automatically shuts
set forth in 192.111; and
off the fuel and vents the engine dis-
(3) Buried with a minimum cover in
tribution manifold.
accordance with 192.327.
(e) Each muffler for a gas engine in a
(b) Each bottle-type holder manufac-
compressor station must have vent
tured from steel that is not weldable
slots or holes in the baffles of each
under field conditions must comply
compartment to prevent gas from
with the following:
being trapped in the muffler.
(1) A bottle-type holder made from
192.173 Compressor stations: Ventila- alloy steel must meet the chemical and
tion. tensile requirements for the various
grades of steel in ASTM A372/372M (in-
Each compressor station building
corporated by reference, see 192.7).
must be ventilated to ensure that em-
(2) The actual yield-tensile ratio of
ployees are not endangered by the ac-
the steel may not exceed 0.85.
cumulation of gas in rooms, sumps, at-
(3) Welding may not be performed on
tics, pits, or other enclosed places.
the holder after it has been heat treat-
192.175 Pipe-type and bottle-type ed or stress relieved, except that cop-
holders. per wires may be attached to the small
diameter portion of the bottle end clo-
(a) Each pipe-type and bottle-type
sure for cathodic protection if a local-
holder must be designed so as to pre-
ized thermit welding process is used.
vent the accumulation of liquids in the
(4) The holder must be given a mill
holder, in connecting pipe, or in auxil-
hydrostatic test at a pressure that pro-
iary equipment, that might cause cor-
duces a hoop stress at least equal to 85
rosion or interfere with the safe oper-
percent of the SMYS.
ation of the holder.
(5) The holder, connection pipe, and
(b) Each pipe-type or bottle-type
components must be leak tested after
holder must have minimum clearance
installation as required by subpart J of
from other holders in accordance with
this part.
the following formula:
[35 FR 13257, Aug. 19, 1970, as amended by
C = (D P F)/48.33) (C = (3D P F/ Amdt. 19258, 53 FR 1635, Jan. 21, 1988; Amdt.
1,000)) 19262, 54 FR 5628, Feb. 6, 1989; 58 FR 14521,
in which: Mar. 18, 1993; Amdt. 19285, 63 FR 37503, July
13, 1998; Amdt. 192119, 80 FR 181, Jan. 5, 2015]
C = Minimum clearance between pipe con-
tainers or bottles in inches (millimeters). 192.179 Transmission line valves.
D = Outside diameter of pipe containers or
bottles in inches (millimeters). (a) Each transmission line, other
P = Maximum allowable operating pressure, than offshore segments, must have sec-
p.s.i. (kPa) gage. tionalizing block valves spaced as fol-
F = Design factor as set forth in 192.111 of lows, unless in a particular case the
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
437
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00447 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
192.181 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
(1) Each point on the pipeline in a from the regulator station sufficient to
Class 4 location must be within 212 permit the operation of the valve dur-
miles (4 kilometers)of a valve. ing an emergency that might preclude
(2) Each point on the pipeline in a access to the station.
Class 3 location must be within 4 miles (c) Each valve on a main installed for
(6.4 kilometers) of a valve. operating or emergency purposes must
(3) Each point on the pipeline in a comply with the following:
Class 2 location must be within 712 (1) The valve must be placed in a
miles (12 kilometers) of a valve.
readily accessible location so as to fa-
(4) Each point on the pipeline in a
cilitate its operation in an emergency.
Class 1 location must be within 10
miles (16 kilometers) of a valve. (2) The operating stem or mechanism
(b) Each sectionalizing block valve must be readily accessible.
on a transmission line, other than off- (3) If the valve is installed in a buried
shore segments, must comply with the box or enclosure, the box or enclosure
following: must be installed so as to avoid trans-
(1) The valve and the operating de- mitting external loads to the main.
vice to open or close the valve must be
readily accessible and protected from 192.183 Vaults: Structural design re-
tampering and damage. quirements.
(2) The valve must be supported to (a) Each underground vault or pit for
prevent settling of the valve or move- valves, pressure relieving, pressure
ment of the pipe to which it is at- limiting, or pressure regulating sta-
tached. tions, must be able to meet the loads
(c) Each section of a transmission which may be imposed upon it, and to
line, other than offshore segments, be- protect installed equipment.
tween main line valves must have a
(b) There must be enough working
blowdown valve with enough capacity
to allow the transmission line to be space so that all of the equipment re-
blown down as rapidly as practicable. quired in the vault or pit can be prop-
Each blowdown discharge must be lo- erly installed, operated, and main-
cated so the gas can be blown to the at- tained.
mosphere without hazard and, if the (c) Each pipe entering, or within, a
transmission line is adjacent to an regulator vault or pit must be steel for
overhead electric line, so that the gas sizes 10 inch (254 millimeters), and less,
is directed away from the electrical except that control and gage piping
conductors. may be copper. Where pipe extends
(d) Offshore segments of transmission through the vault or pit structure, pro-
lines must be equipped with valves or vision must be made to prevent the
other components to shut off the flow passage of gases or liquids through the
of gas to an offshore platform in an opening and to avert strains in the
emergency. pipe.
[35 FR 13257, Aug. 19, 1970, as amended by [35 FR 13257, Aug. 19, 1970, as amended by
Amdt. 19227, 41 FR 34606, Aug. 16, 1976; Amdt. 19285, 63 FR 37503, July 13, 1998]
Amdt. 19278, 61 FR 28784, June 6, 1996; Amdt.
19285, 63 FR 37503, July 13, 1998]
192.185 Vaults: Accessibility.
192.181 Distribution line valves. Each vault must be located in an ac-
(a) Each high-pressure distribution cessible location and, so far as prac-
system must have valves spaced so as tical, away from:
to reduce the time to shut down a sec- (a) Street intersections or points
tion of main in an emergency. The where traffic is heavy or dense;
valve spacing is determined by the op- (b) Points of minimum elevation,
erating pressure, the size of the mains, catch basins, or places where the ac-
and the local physical conditions. cess cover will be in the course of sur-
(b) Each regulator station control-
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
438
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00448 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 192.195
439
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00449 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
192.197 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
192.197 Control of the pressure of gas ulator. The upstream regulator may
delivered from high-pressure dis- not be set to maintain a pressure high-
tribution systems. er than 60 p.s.i. (414 kPa) gage. A device
(a) If the maximum actual operating must be installed between the up-
pressure of the distribution system is stream regulator and the service regu-
60 p.s.i. (414 kPa) gage, or less and a lator to limit the pressure on the inlet
service regulator having the following of the service regulator to 60 p.s.i. (414
characteristics is used, no other pres- kPa) gage or less in case the upstream
sure limiting device is required: regulator fails to function properly.
(1) A regulator capable of reducing This device may be either a relief valve
distribution line pressure to pressures or an automatic shutoff that shuts, if
recommended for household appliances. the pressure on the inlet of the service
(2) A single port valve with proper regulator exceeds the set pressure (60
orifice for the maximum gas pressure p.s.i. (414 kPa) gage or less), and re-
at the regulator inlet. mains closed until manually reset.
(3) A valve seat made of resilient ma- (2) A service regulator and a moni-
terial designed to withstand abrasion
toring regulator set to limit, to a max-
of the gas, impurities in gas, cutting by
imum safe value, the pressure of the
the valve, and to resist permanent de-
gas delivered to the customer.
formation when it is pressed against
the valve port. (3) A service regulator with a relief
(4) Pipe connections to the regulator valve vented to the outside atmos-
not exceeding 2 inches (51 millimeters) phere, with the relief valve set to open
in diameter. so that the pressure of gas going to the
(5) A regulator that, under normal customer does not exceed a maximum
operating conditions, is able to regu- safe value. The relief valve may either
late the downstream pressure within be built into the service regulator or it
the necessary limits of accuracy and to may be a separate unit installed down-
limit the build-up of pressure under no- stream from the service regulator. This
flow conditions to prevent a pressure combination may be used alone only in
that would cause the unsafe operation those cases where the inlet pressure on
of any connected and properly adjusted the service regulator does not exceed
gas utilization equipment. the manufacturers safe working pres-
(6) A self-contained service regulator sure rating of the service regulator,
with no external static or control lines. and may not be used where the inlet
(b) If the maximum actual operating pressure on the service regulator ex-
pressure of the distribution system is ceeds 125 p.s.i. (862 kPa) gage. For high-
60 p.s.i. (414 kPa) gage, or less, and a er inlet pressures, the methods in para-
service regulator that does not have all graph (c) (1) or (2) of this section must
of the characteristics listed in para- be used.
graph (a) of this section is used, or if (4) A service regulator and an auto-
the gas contains materials that seri- matic shutoff device that closes upon a
ously interfere with the operation of rise in pressure downstream from the
service regulators, there must be suit- regulator and remains closed until
able protective devices to prevent un- manually reset.
safe overpressuring of the customers
appliances if the service regulator [35 FR 13257, Aug. 19, 1970, as amended by
fails. Amdt. 1921, 35 FR 17660, Nov. 7, 1970; Amdt.
(c) If the maximum actual operating 19285, 63 FR 37503, July 13, 1998; Amdt. 192
93, 68 FR 53900, Sept. 15, 2003]
pressure of the distribution system ex-
ceeds 60 p.s.i. (414 kPa) gage, one of the
192.199 Requirements for design of
following methods must be used to reg- pressure relief and limiting devices.
ulate and limit, to the maximum safe
value, the pressure of gas delivered to Except for rupture discs, each pres-
the customer: sure relief or pressure limiting device
(1) A service regulator having the must:
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
440
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00450 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 192.203
(b) Have valves and valve seats that (i) If the maximum allowable oper-
are designed not to stick in a position ating pressure is 60 p.s.i. (414 kPa) gage
that will make the device inoperative; or more, the pressure may not exceed
(c) Be designed and installed so that the maximum allowable operating
it can be readily operated to determine pressure plus 10 percent, or the pres-
if the valve is free, can be tested to de- sure that produces a hoop stress of 75
termine the pressure at which it will percent of SMYS, whichever is lower;
operate, and can be tested for leakage (ii) If the maximum allowable oper-
when in the closed position; ating pressure is 12 p.s.i. (83 kPa) gage
(d) Have support made of noncombus- or more, but less than 60 p.s.i. (414 kPa)
tible material; gage, the pressure may not exceed the
(e) Have discharge stacks, vents, or maximum allowable operating pressure
outlet ports designed to prevent accu- plus 6 p.s.i. (41 kPa) gage; or
mulation of water, ice, or snow, located (iii) If the maximum allowable oper-
where gas can be discharged into the ating pressure is less than 12 p.s.i. (83
atmosphere without undue hazard; kPa) gage, the pressure may not exceed
(f) Be designed and installed so that the maximum allowable operating
the size of the openings, pipe, and fit- pressure plus 50 percent.
tings located between the system to be (b) When more than one pressure reg-
protected and the pressure relieving de- ulating or compressor station feeds
vice, and the size of the vent line, are into a pipeline, relief valves or other
adequate to prevent hammering of the protective devices must be installed at
valve and to prevent impairment of re- each station to ensure that the com-
lief capacity; plete failure of the largest capacity
(g) Where installed at a district regu- regulator or compressor, or any single
lator station to protect a pipeline sys- run of lesser capacity regulators or
tem from overpressuring, be designed compressors in that station, will not
and installed to prevent any single in- impose pressures on any part of the
cident such as an explosion in a vault pipeline or distribution system in ex-
or damage by a vehicle from affecting cess of those for which it was designed,
the operation of both the overpressure or against which it was protected,
protective device and the district regu- whichever is lower.
lator; and (c) Relief valves or other pressure
(h) Except for a valve that will iso- limiting devices must be installed at or
late the system under protection from near each regulator station in a low-
its source of pressure, be designed to pressure distribution system, with a
prevent unauthorized operation of any capacity to limit the maximum pres-
stop valve that will make the pressure sure in the main to a pressure that will
relief valve or pressure limiting device not exceed the safe operating pressure
inoperative. for any connected and properly ad-
justed gas utilization equipment.
[35 FR 13257, Aug. 19, 1970, as amended by
Amdt. 1921, 35 FR 17660, Nov. 17, 1970] [35 FR 13257, Aug. 19, 1970, as amended by
Amdt. 1929, 37 FR 20827, Oct. 4, 1972; Amdt.
192.201 Required capacity of pres- 19285, 63 FR 37503, July 13, 1998]
sure relieving and limiting stations.
(a) Each pressure relief station or 192.203 Instrument, control, and sam-
pressure limiting station or group of pling pipe and components.
those stations installed to protect a (a) Applicability. This section applies
pipeline must have enough capacity, to the design of instrument, control,
and must be set to operate, to insure and sampling pipe and components. It
the following: does not apply to permanently closed
(1) In a low pressure distribution sys- systems, such as fluid-filled tempera-
tem, the pressure may not cause the ture-responsive devices.
unsafe operation of any connected and (b) Materials and design. All materials
properly adjusted gas utilization equip- employed for pipe and components
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
441
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00451 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
192.221 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
(1) Each takeoff connection and at- (b) This subpart does not apply to
taching boss, fitting, or adapter must welding that occurs during the manu-
be made of suitable material, be able to facture of steel pipe or steel pipeline
withstand the maximum service pres- components.
sure and temperature of the pipe or
equipment to which it is attached, and 192.225 Welding procedures.
be designed to satisfactorily withstand
(a) Welding must be performed by a
all stresses without failure by fatigue.
qualified welder or welding operator in
(2) Except for takeoff lines that can
be isolated from sources of pressure by accordance with welding procedures
other valving, a shutoff valve must be qualified under section 5, section 12, or
installed in each takeoff line as near as Appendix A of API Std 1104 (incor-
practicable to the point of takeoff. porated by reference, see 192.7) or sec-
Blowdown valves must be installed tion IX ASME Boiler and Pressure Ves-
where necessary. sel Code (BPVC) (incorporated by ref-
(3) Brass or copper material may not erence, see 192.7), to produce welds
be used for metal temperatures greater which meet the requirements of this
than 400 F (204 C). subpart. The quality of the test welds
(4) Pipe or components that may con- used to qualify welding procedures
tain liquids must be protected by heat- must be determined by destructive
ing or other means from damage due to testing in accordance with the ref-
freezing. erenced welding standard(s).
(5) Pipe or components in which liq- (b) Each welding procedure must be
uids may accumulate must have drains recorded in detail, including the results
or drips. of the qualifying tests. This record
(6) Pipe or components subject to must be retained and followed when-
clogging from solids or deposits must ever the procedure is used.
have suitable connections for cleaning.
(7) The arrangement of pipe, compo- [Amdt. 19252, 51 FR 20297, June 4, 1986;
nents, and supports must provide safe- Amdt. 19294, 69 FR 32894, June 14, 2004;
ty under anticipated operating Amdt. 192119, 80 FR 181, Jan. 5, 2015; Amdt.
stresses. 192120, 80 FR 12778, Mar. 11, 2015]
(8) Each joint between sections of
192.227 Qualification of welders and
pipe, and between pipe and valves or welding operators.
fittings, must be made in a manner
suitable for the anticipated pressure (a) Except as provided in paragraph
and temperature condition. Slip type (b) of this section, each welder or weld-
expansion joints may not be used. Ex- ing operator must be qualified in ac-
pansion must be allowed for by pro- cordance with section 6, section 12, or
viding flexibility within the system Appendix A of API Std 1104 (incor-
itself. porated by reference, see 192.7), or sec-
(9) Each control line must be pro- tion IX of ASME Boiler and Pressure
tected from anticipated causes of dam- Vessel Code (BPVC) (incorporated by
age and must be designed and installed reference, see 192.7). However, a welder
to prevent damage to any one control or welding operator qualified under an
line from making both the regulator earlier edition than the edition listed
and the over-pressure protective device in 192.7 may weld but may not re-
inoperative. qualify under that earlier edition.
[35 FR 13257, Aug. 19, 1970, as amended by (b) A welder may qualify to perform
Amdt. 19278, 61 FR 28784, June 6, 1996; Amdt. welding on pipe to be operated at a
19285, 63 FR 37503, July 13, 1998] pressure that produces a hoop stress of
less than 20 percent of SMYS by per-
Subpart EWelding of Steel in forming an acceptable test weld, for
Pipelines the process to be used, under the test
set forth in section I of Appendix C of
192.221 Scope. this part. Each welder who is to make
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
442
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00452 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 192.241
C of this part as a requirement of the (i) A production weld cut out, tested,
qualifying test. and found acceptable in accordance
[Amdt. 192120, 80 FR 12778, Mar. 11, 2015]
with the qualifying test; or
(ii) For a welder who works only on
192.229 Limitations on welders and service lines 2 inches (51 millimeters)
welding operators. or smaller in diameter, the welder has
(a) No welder or welding operator had two sample welds tested and found
whose qualification is based on non- acceptable in accordance with the test
destructive testing may weld com- in section III of Appendix C of this
pressor station pipe and components. part.
(b) A welder or welding operator may [Amdt. 192120, 80 FR 12778, Mar. 11, 2015]
not weld with a particular welding
process unless, within the preceding 6 192.231 Protection from weather.
calendar months, the welder or welding The welding operation must be pro-
operator was engaged in welding with tected from weather conditions that
that process. would impair the quality of the com-
(c) A welder or welding operator pleted weld.
qualified under 192.227(a)
(1) May not weld on pipe to be oper- 192.233 Miter joints.
ated at a pressure that produces a hoop
stress of 20 percent or more of SMYS (a) A miter joint on steel pipe to be
unless within the preceding 6 calendar operated at a pressure that produces a
months the welder or welding operator hoop stress of 30 percent or more of
has had one weld tested and found ac- SMYS may not deflect the pipe more
ceptable under either section 6, section than 3.
9, section 12 or Appendix A of API Std (b) A miter joint on steel pipe to be
1104 (incorporated by reference, see operated at a pressure that produces a
192.7). Alternatively, welders or weld- hoop stress of less than 30 percent, but
ing operators may maintain an ongoing more than 10 percent, of SMYS may
qualification status by performing not deflect the pipe more than 1212 and
welds tested and found acceptable must be a distance equal to one pipe di-
under the above acceptance criteria at ameter or more away from any other
least twice each calendar year, but at miter joint, as measured from the
intervals not exceeding 712 months. A crotch of each joint.
welder or welding operator qualified (c) A miter joint on steel pipe to be
under an earlier edition of a standard operated at a pressure that produces a
listed in 192.7 of this part may weld, hoop stress of 10 percent or less of
but may not re-qualify under that ear- SMYS may not deflect the pipe more
lier edition; and, than 90.
(2) May not weld on pipe to be oper-
192.235 Preparation for welding.
ated at a pressure that produces a hoop
stress of less than 20 percent of SMYS Before beginning any welding, the
unless the welder or welding operator welding surfaces must be clean and free
is tested in accordance with paragraph of any material that may be detri-
(c)(1) of this section or re-qualifies mental to the weld, and the pipe or
under paragraph (d)(1) or (d)(2) of this component must be aligned to provide
section. the most favorable condition for depos-
(d) A welder or welding operator iting the root bead. This alignment
qualified under 192.227(b) may not must be preserved while the root bead
weld unless is being deposited.
(1) Within the preceding 15 calendar
months, but at least once each cal- 192.241 Inspection and test of welds.
endar year, the welder or welding oper- (a) Visual inspection of welding must
ator has re-qualified under 192.227(b); be conducted by an individual qualified
or by appropriate training and experience
(2) Within the preceding 712 calendar to ensure that:
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
months, but at least twice each cal- (1) The welding is performed in ac-
endar year, the welder or welding oper- cordance with the welding procedure;
ator has had and
443
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00453 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
192.243 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
(2) The weld is acceptable under para- ator, must be nondestructively tested
graph (c) of this section. over their entire circumference:
(b) The welds on a pipeline to be op- (1) In Class 1 locations, except off-
erated at a pressure that produces a shore, at least 10 percent.
hoop stress of 20 percent or more of (2) In Class 2 locations, at least 15
SMYS must be nondestructively tested percent.
in accordance with 192.243, except that (3) In Class 3 and Class 4 locations, at
welds that are visually inspected and crossings of major or navigable rivers,
approved by a qualified welding inspec- offshore, and within railroad or public
tor need not be nondestructively tested highway rights-of-way, including tun-
if: nels, bridges, and overhead road cross-
(1) The pipe has a nominal diameter ings, 100 percent unless impracticable,
of less than 6 inches (152 millimeters); in which case at least 90 percent. Non-
or destructive testing must be impracti-
(2) The pipeline is to be operated at a cable for each girth weld not tested.
pressure that produces a hoop stress of (4) At pipeline tie-ins, including tie-
less than 40 percent of SMYS and the ins of replacement sections, 100 per-
welds are so limited in number that cent.
nondestructive testing is impractical. (e) Except for a welder or welding op-
erator whose work is isolated from the
(c) The acceptability of a weld that is
principal welding activity, a sample of
nondestructively tested or visually in-
each welder or welding operators work
spected is determined according to the
for each day must be nondestructively
standards in section 9 or Appendix A of
tested, when nondestructive testing is
API Std 1104 (incorporated by ref-
required under 192.241(b).
erence, see 192.7). Appendix A of API
(f) When nondestructive testing is re-
Std 1104 may not be used to accept
quired under 192.241(b), each operator
cracks.
must retain, for the life of the pipeline,
[35 FR 13257, Aug. 19, 1970, as amended by a record showing by milepost, engi-
Amdt. 19237, 46 FR 10160, Feb. 2, 1981; Amdt. neering station, or by geographic fea-
19278, 61 FR 28784, June 6, 1996; Amdt. 19285, ture, the number of girth welds made,
63 FR 37503, July 13, 1998; Amdt. 19294, 69 FR the number nondestructively tested,
32894, June 14, 2004; Amdt. 192119, 80 FR 181,
the number rejected, and the disposi-
Jan. 5, 2015; Amdt. 192120, 80 FR 12778, Mar.
11, 2015] tion of the rejects.
[35 FR 13257, Aug. 19, 1970, as amended by
192.243 Nondestructive testing. Amdt. 19227, 41 FR 34606, Aug. 16, 1976;
Amdt. 19250, 50 FR 37192, Sept. 12, 1985;
(a) Nondestructive testing of welds
Amdt. 19278, 61 FR 28784, June 6, 1996; Amdt.
must be performed by any process, 192120, 80 FR 12779, Mar. 11, 2015]
other than trepanning, that will clear-
ly indicate defects that may affect the 192.245 Repair or removal of defects.
integrity of the weld.
(a) Each weld that is unacceptable
(b) Nondestructive testing of welds under 192.241(c) must be removed or
must be performed: repaired. Except for welds on an off-
(1) In accordance with written proce- shore pipeline being installed from a
dures; and pipeline vessel, a weld must be re-
(2) By persons who have been trained moved if it has a crack that is more
and qualified in the established proce- than 8 percent of the weld length.
dures and with the equipment em- (b) Each weld that is repaired must
ployed in testing. have the defect removed down to sound
(c) Procedures must be established metal and the segment to be repaired
for the proper interpretation of each must be preheated if conditions exist
nondestructive test of a weld to ensure which would adversely affect the qual-
the acceptability of the weld under ity of the weld repair. After repair, the
192.241(c). segment of the weld that was repaired
(d) When nondestructive testing is re- must be inspected to ensure its accept-
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
444
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00454 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 192.281
in accordance with written weld repair (b) Ductile iron pipe may not be
procedures that have been qualified joined by brazing.
under 192.225. Repair procedures must
[35 FR 13257, Aug. 19, 1970, as amended by
provide that the minimum mechanical Amdt. 19262, 54 FR 5628, Feb. 6, 1989]
properties specified for the welding
procedure used to make the original 192.279 Copper pipe.
weld are met upon completion of the
final weld repair. Copper pipe may not be threaded ex-
cept that copper pipe used for joining
[Amdt. 19246, 48 FR 48674, Oct. 20, 1983] screw fittings or valves may be thread-
ed if the wall thickness is equivalent to
Subpart FJoining of Materials the comparable size of Schedule 40 or
Other Than by Welding heavier wall pipe listed in Table C1 of
ASME/ANSI B16.5.
192.271 Scope. [Amdt. 19262, 54 FR 5628, Feb. 6, 1989, as
(a) This subpart prescribes minimum amended at 58 FR 14521, Mar. 18, 1993]
requirements for joining materials in
pipelines, other than by welding. 192.281 Plastic pipe.
(b) This subpart does not apply to (a) General. A plastic pipe joint that
joining during the manufacture of pipe is joined by solvent cement, adhesive,
or pipeline components. or heat fusion may not be disturbed
until it has properly set. Plastic pipe
192.273 General. may not be joined by a threaded joint
(a) The pipeline must be designed and or miter joint.
installed so that each joint will sustain (b) Solvent cement joints. Each solvent
the longitudinal pullout or thrust cement joint on plastic pipe must com-
forces caused by contraction or expan- ply with the following:
sion of the piping or by anticipated ex- (1) The mating surfaces of the joint
ternal or internal loading. must be clean, dry, and free of material
(b) Each joint must be made in ac- which might be detrimental to the
cordance with written procedures that joint.
have been proven by test or experience (2) The solvent cement must conform
to produce strong gastight joints. to ASTM D251399, (incorporated by
(c) Each joint must be inspected to reference, see 192.7).
insure compliance with this subpart. (3) The joint may not be heated to ac-
celerate the setting of the cement.
192.275 Cast iron pipe. (c) Heat-fusion joints. Each heat-fu-
(a) Each caulked bell and spigot joint sion joint on plastic pipe must comply
in cast iron pipe must be sealed with with the following:
mechanical leak clamps. (1) A butt heat-fusion joint must be
(b) Each mechanical joint in cast joined by a device that holds the heater
iron pipe must have a gasket made of a element square to the ends of the pip-
resilient material as the sealing me- ing, compresses the heated ends to-
dium. Each gasket must be suitably gether, and holds the pipe in proper
confined and retained under compres- alignment while the plastic hardens.
sion by a separate gland or follower (2) A socket heat-fusion joint must be
ring. joined by a device that heats the mat-
(c) Cast iron pipe may not be joined ing surfaces of the joint uniformly and
by threaded joints. simultaneously to essentially the same
(d) Cast iron pipe may not be joined temperature.
by brazing. (3) An electrofusion joint must be
joined utilizing the equipment and
[35 FR 13257, Aug. 19, 1970, as amended by techniques of the fittings manufacturer
Amdt. 19262, 54 FR 5628, Feb. 6, 1989] or equipment and techniques shown, by
testing joints to the requirements of
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
445
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00455 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
192.283 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
(4) Heat may not be applied with a or paragraph 9.4 (Joint Integrity Tests)
torch or other open flame. of ASTM F1055 (incorporated by ref-
(d) Adhesive joints. Each adhesive erence, see 192.7).
joint on plastic pipe must comply with (2) For procedures intended for lat-
the following: eral pipe connections, subject a speci-
(1) The adhesive must conform to men joint made from pipe sections
ASTM D 2517 (incorporated by ref- joined at right angles according to the
erence, see 192.7). procedure to a force on the lateral pipe
(2) The materials and adhesive must until failure occurs in the specimen. If
be compatible with each other. failure initiates outside the joint area,
(e) Mechanical joints. Each compres- the procedure qualifies for use; and
sion type mechanical joint on plastic (3) For procedures intended for non-
pipe must comply with the following: lateral pipe connections, follow the
(1) The gasket material in the cou- tensile test requirements of ASTM
pling must be compatible with the D638 (incorporated by reference, see
plastic. 192.7), except that the test may be
(2) A rigid internal tubular stiffener, conducted at ambient temperature and
other than a split tubular stiffener, humidity If the specimen elongates no
must be used in conjunction with the less than 25 percent or failure initiates
coupling. outside the joint area, the procedure
[35 FR 13257, Aug. 19, 1970, as amended by qualifies for use.
Amdt. 19234, 44 FR 42973, July 23, 1979; (b) Mechanical joints. Before any writ-
Amdt. 19258, 53 FR 1635, Jan. 21, 1988; Amdt. ten procedure established under
19261, 53 FR 36793, Sept. 22, 1988; 58 FR 14521, 192.273(b) is used for making mechan-
Mar. 18, 1993; Amdt. 19278, 61 FR 28784, June ical plastic pipe joints that are de-
6, 1996; Amdt. 192114, 75 FR 48603, Aug. 11,
2010; Amdt. 192119, 80 FR 181, Jan. 5, 2015]
signed to withstand tensile forces, the
procedure must be qualified by sub-
192.283 Plastic pipe: Qualifying join- jecting 5 specimen joints made accord-
ing procedures. ing to the procedure to the following
(a) Heat fusion, solvent cement, and ad- tensile test:
hesive joints. Before any written proce- (1) Use an apparatus for the test as
dure established under 192.273(b) is specified in ASTM D 638 (except for
used for making plastic pipe joints by a conditioning), (incorporated by ref-
heat fusion, solvent cement, or adhe- erence, see 192.7).
sive method, the procedure must be (2) The specimen must be of such
qualified by subjecting specimen joints length that the distance between the
made according to the procedure to the grips of the apparatus and the end of
following tests: the stiffener does not affect the joint
(1) The burst test requirements of strength.
(i) In the case of thermoplastic pipe, (3) The speed of testing is 0.20 in (5.0
paragraph 6.6 (Sustained Pressure Test) mm) per minute, plus or minus 25 per-
or paragraph 6.7 (Minimum Hydrostatic cent.
Burst Test) of ASTM D251399 for plas- (4) Pipe specimens less than 4 inches
tic materials other than polyethylene (102 mm) in diameter are qualified if
or ASTM D251309a (incorporated by the pipe yields to an elongation of no
reference, see 192.7) for polyethylene less than 25 percent or failure initiates
plastic materials; outside the joint area.
(ii) In the case of thermosetting plas- (5) Pipe specimens 4 inches (102 mm)
tic pipe, paragraph 8.5 (Minimum Hy- and larger in diameter shall be pulled
drostatic Burst Pressure) or paragraph until the pipe is subjected to a tensile
8.9 (Sustained Static Pressure Test) of stress equal to or greater than the
ASTM D2517 (incorporated by ref- maximum thermal stress that would be
erence, see 192.7); or produced by a temperature change of
(iii) In the case of electrofusion fit- 100 F (38 C) or until the pipe is pulled
tings for polyethylene (PE) pipe and from the fitting. If the pipe pulls from
tubing, paragraph 9.1 (Minimum Hy- the fitting, the lowest value of the five
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
draulic Burst Pressure Test), para- test results or the manufacturers rat-
graph 9.2 (Sustained Pressure Test), ing, whichever is lower must be used in
paragraph 9.3 (Tensile Strength Test), the design calculations for stress.
446
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00456 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 192.305
(6) Each specimen that fails at the (B) Deformed by bending, torque, or
grips must be retested using new pipe. impact, and if failure occurs, it must
(7) Results obtained pertain only to not initiate in the joint area.
the specific outside diameter, and ma- (c) A person must be re-qualified
terial of the pipe tested, except that under an applicable procedure once
testing of a heavier wall pipe may be each calendar year at intervals not ex-
used to qualify pipe of the same mate- ceeding 15 months, or after any produc-
rial but with a lesser wall thickness. tion joint is found unacceptable by
(c) A copy of each written procedure testing under 192.513.
being used for joining plastic pipe must (d) Each operator shall establish a
be available to the persons making and method to determine that each person
inspecting joints. making joints in plastic pipelines in
(d) Pipe or fittings manufactured be- the operators system is qualified in ac-
fore July 1, 1980, may be used in ac- cordance with this section.
cordance with procedures that the
manufacturer certifies will produce a [Amdt. 19234A, 45 FR 9935, Feb. 14, 1980, as
joint as strong as the pipe. amended by Amdt. 19234B, 46 FR 39, Jan. 2,
1981; Amdt. 19293, 68 FR 53900, Sept. 15, 2003;
[Amdt. 19234A, 45 FR 9935, Feb. 14, 1980, as Amdt. 192120, 80 FR 12779, Mar. 11, 2015]
amended by Amdt. 19234B, 46 FR 39, Jan. 2,
1981; 47 FR 32720, July 29, 1982; 47 FR 49973, 192.287 Plastic pipe: Inspection of
Nov. 4, 1982; 58 FR 14521, Mar. 18, 1993; Amdt. joints.
19278, 61 FR 28784, June 6, 1996; Amdt. 19285,
63 FR 37503, July 13, 1998; Amdt. 19294, 69 FR No person may carry out the inspec-
32895, June 14, 2004; Amdt. 19294, 69 FR 54592, tion of joints in plastic pipes required
Sept. 9, 2004; Amdt. 192114, 75 FR 48603, Aug. by 192.273(c) and 192.285(b) unless that
11, 2010; Amdt. 192119, 80 FR 181, Jan. 5, 2015] person has been qualified by appro-
priate training or experience in evalu-
192.285 Plastic pipe: Qualifying per- ating the acceptability of plastic pipe
sons to make joints.
joints made under the applicable join-
(a) No person may make a plastic ing procedure.
pipe joint unless that person has been
qualified under the applicable joining [Amdt. 19234, 44 FR 42974, July 23, 1979]
procedure by:
(1) Appropriate training or experi- Subpart GGeneral Construction
ence in the use of the procedure; and Requirements for Transmission
(2) Making a specimen joint from Lines and Mains
pipe sections joined according to the
procedure that passes the inspection 192.301 Scope.
and test set forth in paragraph (b) of
This subpart prescribes minimum re-
this section.
quirements for constructing trans-
(b) The specimen joint must be:
mission lines and mains.
(1) Visually examined during and
after assembly or joining and found to 192.303 Compliance with specifica-
have the same appearance as a joint or tions or standards.
photographs of a joint that is accept-
able under the procedure; and Each transmission line or main must
(2) In the case of a heat fusion, sol- be constructed in accordance with com-
vent cement, or adhesive joint: prehensive written specifications or
(i) Tested under any one of the test standards that are consistent with this
methods listed under 192.283(a) appli- part.
cable to the type of joint and material
192.305 Inspection: General.
being tested;
(ii) Examined by ultrasonic inspec- Each transmission line or main must
tion and found not to contain flaws be inspected to ensure that it is con-
that would cause failure; or structed in accordance with this part.
(iii) Cut into at least 3 longitudinal EFFECTIVE DATE NOTE: At 80 FR 12779,
straps, each of which is:
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
447
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00457 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
192.307 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
the delayed revised text is set forth as fol- For the purpose of this section a
lows: dent is a depression that produces a
192.305 Inspection: General.
gross disturbance in the curvature of
the pipe wall without reducing the
Each transmission line and main must be
pipe-wall thickness. The depth of a
inspected to ensure that it is constructed in
accordance with this subpart. An operator dent is measured as the gap between
must not use operator personnel to perform the lowest point of the dent and a pro-
a required inspection if the operator per- longation of the original contour of the
sonnel performed the construction task re- pipe.
quiring inspection. Nothing in this section (c) Each arc burn on steel pipe to be
prohibits the operator from inspecting con- operated at a pressure that produces a
struction tasks with operator personnel who hoop stress of 40 percent, or more, of
are involved in other construction tasks. SMYS must be repaired or removed. If
a repair is made by grinding, the arc
192.307 Inspection of materials.
burn must be completely removed and
Each length of pipe and each other the remaining wall thickness must be
component must be visually inspected at least equal to either:
at the site of installation to ensure (1) The minimum wall thickness re-
that it has not sustained any visually quired by the tolerances in the speci-
determinable damage that could im- fication to which the pipe was manu-
pair its serviceability. factured; or
(2) The nominal wall thickness re-
192.309 Repair of steel pipe. quired for the design pressure of the
(a) Each imperfection or damage that pipeline.
impairs the serviceability of a length (d) A gouge, groove, arc burn, or dent
of steel pipe must be repaired or re- may not be repaired by insert patching
moved. If a repair is made by grinding, or by pounding out.
the remaining wall thickness must at (e) Each gouge, groove, arc burn, or
least be equal to either: dent that is removed from a length of
(1) The minimum thickness required pipe must be removed by cutting out
by the tolerances in the specification the damaged portion as a cylinder.
to which the pipe was manufactured; or [35 FR 13257, Aug. 19, 1970, as amended by
(2) The nominal wall thickness re- Amdt. 1921, 35 FR 17660, Nov. 17, 1970; Amdt.
quired for the design pressure of the 19285, 63 FR 37503, July 13, 1998; Amdt. 192
pipeline. 88, 64 FR 69664, Dec. 14, 1999]
(b) Each of the following dents must
192.311 Repair of plastic pipe.
be removed from steel pipe to be oper-
ated at a pressure that produces a hoop Each imperfection or damage that
stress of 20 percent, or more, of SMYS, would impair the serviceability of plas-
unless the dent is repaired by a method tic pipe must be repaired or removed.
that reliable engineering tests and [Amdt. 19293, 68 FR 53900, Sept. 15, 2003]
analyses show can permanently restore
the serviceability of the pipe: 192.313 Bends and elbows.
(1) A dent that contains a stress con- (a) Each field bend in steel pipe,
centrator such as a scratch, gouge, other than a wrinkle bend made in ac-
groove, or arc burn. cordance with 192.315, must comply
(2) A dent that affects the longitu- with the following:
dinal weld or a circumferential weld. (1) A bend must not impair the serv-
(3) In pipe to be operated at a pres- iceability of the pipe.
sure that produces a hoop stress of 40 (2) Each bend must have a smooth
percent or more of SMYS, a dent that contour and be free from buckling,
has a depth of: cracks, or any other mechanical dam-
(i) More than 14 inch (6.4 millimeters) age.
in pipe 1234 inches (324 millimeters) or (3) On pipe containing a longitudinal
less in outer diameter; or weld, the longitudinal weld must be as
(ii) More than 2 percent of the nomi- near as practicable to the neutral axis
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
448
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00458 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 192.319
(ii) The pipe is 12 inches (305 millime- (b) Each aboveground transmission
ters) or less in outside diameter or has line or main, not located offshore or in
a diameter to wall thickness ratio less inland navigable water areas, must be
than 70. protected from accidental damage by
(b) Each circumferential weld of steel vehicular traffic or other similar
pipe which is located where the stress causes, either by being placed at a safe
during bending causes a permanent de- distance from the traffic or by install-
formation in the pipe must be non- ing barricades.
destructively tested either before or
(c) Pipelines, including pipe risers, on
after the bending process.
(c) Wrought-steel welding elbows and each platform located offshore or in in-
transverse segments of these elbows land navigable waters must be pro-
may not be used for changes in direc- tected from accidental damage by ves-
tion on steel pipe that is 2 inches (51 sels.
millimeters) or more in diameter un- [Amdt. 19227, 41 FR 34606, Aug. 16, 1976, as
less the arc length, as measured along amended by Amdt. 19278, 61 FR 28784, June
the crotch, is at least 1 inch (25 milli- 6, 1996]
meters).
[Amdt. 19226, 41 FR 26018, June 24, 1976, as 192.319 Installation of pipe in a
amended by Amdt. 19229, 42 FR 42866, Aug. ditch.
25, 1977; Amdt. 19229, 42 FR 60148, Nov. 25, (a) When installed in a ditch, each
1977; Amdt. 19249, 50 FR 13225, Apr. 3, 1985;
transmission line that is to be operated
Amdt. 19285, 63 FR 37503, July 13, 1998]
at a pressure producing a hoop stress of
192.315 Wrinkle bends in steel pipe. 20 percent or more of SMYS must be
(a) A wrinkle bend may not be made installed so that the pipe fits the ditch
on steel pipe to be operated at a pres- so as to minimize stresses and protect
sure that produces a hoop stress of 30 the pipe coating from damage.
percent, or more, of SMYS. (b) When a ditch for a transmission
(b) Each wrinkle bend on steel pipe line or main is backfilled, it must be
must comply with the following: backfilled in a manner that:
(1) The bend must not have any sharp (1) Provides firm support under the
kinks. pipe; and
(2) When measured along the crotch (2) Prevents damage to the pipe and
of the bend, the wrinkles must be a dis- pipe coating from equipment or from
tance of at least one pipe diameter. the backfill material.
(3) On pipe 16 inches (406 millimeters) (c) All offshore pipe in water at least
or larger in diameter, the bend may
12 feet (3.7 meters) deep but not more
not have a deflection of more than 112
than 200 feet (61 meters) deep, as meas-
for each wrinkle.
(4) On pipe containing a longitudinal ured from the mean low tide, except
weld the longitudinal seam must be as pipe in the Gulf of Mexico and its inlets
near as practicable to the neutral axis under 15 feet (4.6 meters) of water,
of the bend. must be installed so that the top of the
pipe is below the natural bottom unless
[35 FR 13257, Aug. 19, 1970, as amended by the pipe is supported by stanchions,
Amdt. 19285, 63 FR 37503, July 13, 1998]
held in place by anchors or heavy con-
192.317 Protection from hazards. crete coating, or protected by an equiv-
alent means. Pipe in the Gulf of Mexico
(a) The operator must take all prac-
and its inlets under 15 feet (4.6 meters)
ticable steps to protect each trans-
mission line or main from washouts, of water must be installed so that the
floods, unstable soil, landslides, or top of the pipe is 36 inches (914 milli-
other hazards that may cause the pipe- meters) below the seabed for normal
line to move or to sustain abnormal excavation or 18 inches (457 millime-
loads. In addition, the operator must ters) for rock excavation.
take all practicable steps to protect
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
449
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00459 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
192.321 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
450
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00460 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 192.328
(a) Quality assurance ............... (1) The construction of the pipeline segment must be done under a quality assurance plan ad-
dressing pipe inspection, hauling and stringing, field bending, welding, non-destructive ex-
amination of girth welds, applying and testing field applied coating, lowering of the pipeline
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
451
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00461 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
192.351 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
To address this construction The pipeline segment must meet this additional construction requirement:
issue:
(ii) Performed by an individual with the knowledge, skills, and ability to assure effective coating
application.
(b) Girth welds .......................... (1) All girth welds on a new pipeline segment must be non-destructively examined in accord-
ance with 192.243(b) and (c).
(c) Depth of cover ..................... (1) Notwithstanding any lesser depth of cover otherwise allowed in 192.327, there must be at
least 36 inches (914 millimeters) of cover or equivalent means to protect the pipeline from
outside force damage.
(2) In areas where deep tilling or other activities could threaten the pipeline, the top of the
pipeline must be installed at least one foot below the deepest expected penetration of the
soil.
(d) Initial strength testing .......... (1) The pipeline segment must not have experienced failures indicative of systemic material
defects during strength testing, including initial hydrostatic testing. A root cause analysis, in-
cluding metallurgical examination of the failed pipe, must be performed for any failure expe-
rienced to verify that it is not indicative of a systemic concern. The results of this root cause
analysis must be reported to each PHMSA pipeline safety regional office where the pipe is
in service at least 60 days prior to operating at the alternative MAOP. An operator must also
notify a State pipeline safety authority when the pipeline is located in a State where PHMSA
has an interstate agent agreement, or an intrastate pipeline is regulated by that State.
(e) Interference currents ........... (1) For a new pipeline segment, the construction must address the impacts of induced alter-
nating current from parallel electric transmission lines and other known sources of potential
interference with corrosion control.
452
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00462 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 192.363
192.357 Customer meters and regu- so as to drain into the main or into
lators: Installation. drips at the low points in the service
(a) Each meter and each regulator line.
must be installed so as to minimize an- (d) Protection against piping strain and
ticipated stresses upon the connecting external loading. Each service line must
piping and the meter. be installed so as to minimize antici-
(b) When close all-thread nipples are pated piping strain and external load-
used, the wall thickness remaining ing.
after the threads are cut must meet (e) Installation of service lines into
the minimum wall thickness require- buildings. Each underground service
ments of this part. line installed below grade through the
(c) Connections made of lead or other outer foundation wall of a building
easily damaged material may not be must:
used in the installation of meters or (1) In the case of a metal service line,
regulators. be protected against corrosion;
(d) Each regulator that might release (2) In the case of a plastic service
gas in its operation must be vented to line, be protected from shearing action
the outside atmosphere. and backfill settlement; and
(3) Be sealed at the foundation wall
192.359 Customer meter installations:
Operating pressure. to prevent leakage into the building.
(f) Installation of service lines under
(a) A meter may not be used at a buildings. Where an underground serv-
pressure that is more than 67 percent ice line is installed under a building:
of the manufacturers shell test pres-
(1) It must be encased in a gas tight
sure.
conduit;
(b) Each newly installed meter manu-
factured after November 12, 1970, must (2) The conduit and the service line
have been tested to a minimum of 10 must, if the service line supplies the
p.s.i. (69 kPa) gage. building it underlies, extend into a nor-
(c) A rebuilt or repaired tinned steel mally usable and accessible part of the
case meter may not be used at a pres- building; and
sure that is more than 50 percent of the (3) The space between the conduit
pressure used to test the meter after and the service line must be sealed to
rebuilding or repairing. prevent gas leakage into the building
and, if the conduit is sealed at both
[35 FR 13257, Aug. 19, 1970, as amended by ends, a vent line from the annular
Amdt. 1921, 35 FR 17660, Nov. 17, 1970; Amdt.
space must extend to a point where gas
19285, 63 FR 37503, July 13, 1998]
would not be a hazard, and extend
192.361 Service lines: Installation. above grade, terminating in a rain and
insect resistant fitting.
(a) Depth. Each buried service line
must be installed with at least 12 (g) Locating underground service lines.
inches (305 millimeters) of cover in pri- Each underground nonmetallic service
vate property and at least 18 inches line that is not encased must have a
(457 millimeters) of cover in streets and means of locating the pipe that com-
roads. However, where an underground plies with 192.321(e).
structure prevents installation at [35 FR 13257, Aug. 19, 1970, as amended by
those depths, the service line must be Amdt. 19275, 61 FR 18517, Apr. 26, 1996; Amdt.
able to withstand any anticipated ex- 19285, 63 FR 37503, July 13, 1998; Amdt. 192
ternal load. 93, 68 FR 53900, Sept. 15, 2003]
(b) Support and backfill. Each service
line must be properly supported on un- 192.363 Service lines: Valve require-
disturbed or well-compacted soil, and ments.
material used for backfill must be free (a) Each service line must have a
of materials that could damage the service-line valve that meets the appli-
pipe or its coating. cable requirements of subparts B and D
(c) Grading for drainage. Where con- of this part. A valve incorporated in a
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
densate in the gas might cause inter- meter bar, that allows the meter to be
ruption in the gas supply to the cus- bypassed, may not be used as a service-
tomer, the service line must be graded line valve.
453
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00463 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
192.365 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
(b) A soft seat service line valve may 192.369 Service lines: Connections to
not be used if its ability to control the cast iron or ductile iron mains.
flow of gas could be adversely affected (a) Each service line connected to a
by exposure to anticipated heat. cast iron or ductile iron main must be
(c) Each service-line valve on a high- connected by a mechanical clamp, by
pressure service line, installed above drilling and tapping the main, or by
ground or in an area where the blowing another method meeting the require-
of gas would be hazardous, must be de- ments of 192.273.
signed and constructed to minimize the (b) If a threaded tap is being inserted,
possibility of the removal of the core of the requirements of 192.151 (b) and (c)
the valve with other than specialized must also be met.
tools.
192.371 Service lines: Steel.
192.365 Service lines: Location of Each steel service line to be operated
valves.
at less than 100 p.s.i. (689 kPa) gage
(a) Relation to regulator or meter. Each must be constructed of pipe designed
service-line valve must be installed up- for a minimum of 100 p.s.i. (689 kPa)
stream of the regulator or, if there is gage.
no regulator, upstream of the meter. [Amdt. 1921, 35 FR 17660, Nov. 17, 1970, as
(b) Outside valves. Each service line amended by Amdt. 19285, 63 FR 37503, July
must have a shut-off valve in a readily 13, 1998]
accessible location that, if feasible, is
outside of the building. 192.373 Service lines: Cast iron and
(c) Underground valves. Each under- ductile iron.
ground service-line valve must be lo- (a) Cast or ductile iron pipe less than
cated in a covered durable curb box or 6 inches (152 millimeters) in diameter
standpipe that allows ready operation may not be installed for service lines.
of the valve and is supported independ- (b) If cast iron pipe or ductile iron
ently of the service lines. pipe is installed for use as a service
line, the part of the service line which
192.367 Service lines: General re- extends through the building wall must
quirements for connections to main be of steel pipe.
piping. (c) A cast iron or ductile iron service
(a) Location. Each service line con- line may not be installed in unstable
nection to a main must be located at soil or under a building.
the top of the main or, if that is not [35 FR 13257, Aug. 19, 1970, as amended by
practical, at the side of the main, un- Amdt. 19285, 63 FR 37503, July 13, 1998]
less a suitable protective device is in-
stalled to minimize the possibility of 192.375 Service lines: Plastic.
dust and moisture being carried from (a) Each plastic service line outside a
the main into the service line. building must be installed below
(b) Compression-type connection to ground level, except that
main. Each compression-type service (1) It may be installed in accordance
line to main connection must: with 192.321(g); and
(1) Be designed and installed to effec- (2) It may terminate above ground
tively sustain the longitudinal pull-out level and outside the building, if
or thrust forces caused by contraction (i) The above ground level part of the
or expansion of the piping, or by antici- plastic service line is protected against
pated external or internal loading; and deterioration and external damage; and
(2) If gaskets are used in connecting (ii) The plastic service line is not
the service line to the main connection used to support external loads.
fitting, have gaskets that are compat- (b) Each plastic service line inside a
ible with the kind of gas in the system. building must be protected against ex-
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
ternal damage.
[35 FR 13257, Aug. 19, 1970, as amended by
Amdt. 19275, 61 FR 18517, Apr. 26, 1996] [35 FR 13257, Aug. 19, 1970, as amended by
Amdt. 19278, 61 FR 28785, June 6, 1996]
454
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00464 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 192.383
192.377 Service lines: Copper. cubic feet per hour (.01 cubic meters
per hour); and
Each copper service line installed
within a building must be protected (4) Not close when the pressure is less
against external damage. than the manufacturers minimum
specified operating pressure and the
192.379 New service lines not in use. flow rate is below the manufacturers
minimum specified closure flow rate.
Each service line that is not placed
in service upon completion of installa- (b) An excess flow valve must meet
tion must comply with one of the fol- the applicable requirements of Sub-
lowing until the customer is supplied parts B and D of this part.
with gas: (c) An operator must mark or other-
(a) The valve that is closed to pre- wise identify the presence of an excess
vent the flow of gas to the customer flow valve in the service line.
must be provided with a locking device (d) An operator shall locate an excess
or other means designed to prevent the flow valve as near as practical to the
opening of the valve by persons other fitting connecting the service line to
than those authorized by the operator. its source of gas supply.
(b) A mechanical device or fitting (e) An operator should not install an
that will prevent the flow of gas must excess flow valve on a service line
be installed in the service line or in the where the operator has prior experi-
meter assembly. ence with contaminants in the gas
(c) The customers piping must be stream, where these contaminants
physically disconnected from the gas could be expected to cause the excess
supply and the open pipe ends sealed. flow valve to malfunction or where the
excess flow valve would interfere with
[Amdt. 1928, 37 FR 20694, Oct. 3, 1972] necessary operation and maintenance
activities on the service, such as blow-
192.381 Service lines: Excess flow
valve performance standards. ing liquids from the line.
(a) Excess flow valves to be used on [Amdt. 19279, 61 FR 31459, June 20, 1996, as
single residence service lines that oper- amended by Amdt. 19280, 62 FR 2619, Jan. 17,
ate continuously throughout the year 1997; Amdt. 19285, 63 FR 37504, July 13, 1998]
at a pressure not less than 10 p.s.i. (69
192.383 Excess flow valve installa-
kPa) gage must be manufactured and tion.
tested by the manufacturer according
to an industry specification, or the (a) Definitions. As used in this sec-
manufacturers written specification, tion:
to ensure that each valve will: Replaced service line means a gas serv-
(1) Function properly up to the max- ice line where the fitting that connects
imum operating pressure at which the the service line to the main is replaced
valve is rated; or the piping connected to this fitting
(2) Function properly at all tempera- is replaced.
tures reasonably expected in the oper- Service line serving single-family resi-
ating environment of the service line; dence means a gas service line that be-
(3) At 10 p.s.i. (69 kPa) gage: gins at the fitting that connects the
(i) Close at, or not more than 50 per- service line to the main and serves
cent above, the rated closure flow rate only one single-family residence.
specified by the manufacturer; and (b) Installation required. An excess
(ii) Upon closure, reduce gas flow flow valve (EFV) installation must
(A) For an excess flow valve designed comply with the performance stand-
to allow pressure to equalize across the ards in 192.381. The operator must in-
valve, to no more than 5 percent of the stall an EFV on any new or replaced
manufacturers specified closure flow service line serving a single-family res-
rate, up to a maximum of 20 cubic feet idence after February 12, 2010, unless
per hour (0.57 cubic meters per hour); one or more of the following conditions
or is present:
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
(B) For an excess flow valve designed (1) The service line does not operate
to prevent equalization of pressure at a pressure of 10 psig or greater
across the valve, to no more than 0.4 throughout the year;
455
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00465 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
192.451 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
(2) The operator has prior experience (b) Regulated onshore gathering lines.
with contaminants in the gas stream For any regulated onshore gathering
that could interfere with the EFVs op- line under 192.9 existing on April 14,
eration or cause loss of service to a res- 2006, that was not previously subject to
idence; this part, and for any onshore gath-
(3) An EFV could interfere with nec- ering line that becomes a regulated on-
essary operation or maintenance ac- shore gathering line under 192.9 after
tivities, such as blowing liquids from April 14, 2006, because of a change in
the line; or class location or increase in dwelling
(4) An EFV meeting performance density:
standards in 192.381 is not commer- (1) The requirements of this subpart
cially available to the operator. specifically applicable to pipelines in-
stalled before August 1, 1971, apply to
(c) Reporting. Each operator must re-
the gathering line regardless of the
port the EFV measures detailed in the
date the pipeline was actually in-
annual report required by 191.11. stalled; and
[Amdt. 192113, 74 FR 63934, Dec. 4, 2009, as (2) The requirements of this subpart
amended at 75 FR 5244, Feb. 2, 2010; 76 FR specifically applicable to pipelines in-
5499, Feb. 1, 2011] stalled after July 31, 1971, apply only if
the pipeline substantially meets those
Subpart IRequirements for requirements.
Corrosion Control [Amdt. 19230, 42 FR 60148, Nov. 25, 1977, as
amended by Amdt. 192102, 71 FR 13303, Mar.
15, 2006]
SOURCE: Amdt. 1924, 36 FR 12302, June 30,
1971, unless otherwise noted. 192.453 General.
192.451 Scope. The corrosion control procedures re-
quired by 192.605(b)(2), including those
(a) This subpart prescribes minimum for the design, installation, operation,
requirements for the protection of me- and maintenance of cathodic protec-
tallic pipelines from external, internal, tion systems, must be carried out by,
and atmospheric corrosion. or under the direction of, a person
(b) [Reserved] qualified in pipeline corrosion control
[Amdt. 1924, 36 FR 12302, June 30, 1971, as methods.
amended by Amdt. 19227, 41 FR 34606, Aug. [Amdt. 19271, 59 FR 6584, Feb. 11, 1994]
16, 1976; Amdt. 19233, 43 FR 39389, Sept. 5,
1978] 192.455 External corrosion control:
Buried or submerged pipelines in-
192.452 How does this subpart apply stalled after July 31, 1971.
to converted pipelines and regu-
lated onshore gathering lines? (a) Except as provided in paragraphs
(b), (c), and (f) of this section, each bur-
(a) Converted pipelines. Notwith- ied or submerged pipeline installed
standing the date the pipeline was in- after July 31, 1971, must be protected
stalled or any earlier deadlines for against external corrosion, including
compliance, each pipeline which quali- the following:
fies for use under this part in accord- (1) It must have an external protec-
ance with 192.14 must meet the re- tive coating meeting the requirements
quirements of this subpart specifically of 192.461.
applicable to pipelines installed before (2) It must have a cathodic protec-
August 1, 1971, and all other applicable tion system designed to protect the
requirements within 1 year after the pipeline in accordance with this sub-
pipeline is readied for service. How- part, installed and placed in operation
ever, the requirements of this subpart within 1 year after completion of con-
specifically applicable to pipelines in- struction.
stalled after July 31, 1971, apply if the (b) An operator need not comply with
pipeline substantially meets those re- paragraph (a) of this section, if the op-
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
quirements before it is readied for serv- erator can demonstrate by tests, inves-
ice or it is a segment which is replaced, tigation, or experience in the area of
relocated, or substantially altered. application, including, as a minimum,
456
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00466 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 192.459
soil resistivity measurements and tests (2) The fitting is designed to prevent
for corrosion accelerating bacteria, leakage caused by localized corrosion
that a corrosive environment does not pitting.
exist. However, within 6 months after [Amdt. 1924, 36 FR 12302, June 30, 1971, as
an installation made pursuant to the amended at Amdt. 19228, 42 FR 35654, July
preceding sentence, the operator shall 11, 1977; Amdt. 19239, 47 FR 9844, Mar. 8, 1982;
conduct tests, including pipe-to-soil Amdt. 19278, 61 FR 28785, June 6, 1996; Amdt.
potential measurements with respect 19285, 63 FR 37504, July 13, 1998]
to either a continuous reference elec- 192.457 External corrosion control:
trode or an electrode using close spac- Buried or submerged pipelines in-
ing, not to exceed 20 feet (6 meters), stalled before August 1, 1971.
and soil resistivity measurements at (a) Except for buried piping at com-
potential profile peak locations, to pressor, regulator, and measuring sta-
adequately evaluate the potential pro- tions, each buried or submerged trans-
file along the entire pipeline. If the mission line installed before August 1,
tests made indicate that a corrosive 1971, that has an effective external
condition exists, the pipeline must be coating must be cathodically protected
cathodically protected in accordance along the entire area that is effectively
with paragraph (a)(2) of this section. coated, in accordance with this sub-
(c) An operator need not comply with part. For the purposes of this subpart,
paragraph (a) of this section, if the op- a pipeline does not have an effective
erator can demonstrate by tests, inves- external coating if its cathodic protec-
tigation, or experience that tion current requirements are substan-
(1) For a copper pipeline, a corrosive tially the same as if it were bare. The
environment does not exist; or operator shall make tests to determine
(2) For a temporary pipeline with an the cathodic protection current re-
operating period of service not to ex- quirements.
ceed 5 years beyond installation, corro- (b) Except for cast iron or ductile
iron, each of the following buried or
sion during the 5-year period of service
submerged pipelines installed before
of the pipeline will not be detrimental
August 1, 1971, must be cathodically
to public safety.
protected in accordance with this sub-
(d) Notwithstanding the provisions of part in areas in which active corrosion
paragraph (b) or (c) of this section, if a is found:
pipeline is externally coated, it must (1) Bare or ineffectively coated trans-
be cathodically protected in accord- mission lines.
ance with paragraph (a)(2) of this sec- (2) Bare or coated pipes at com-
tion. pressor, regulator, and measuring sta-
(e) Aluminum may not be installed in tions.
a buried or submerged pipeline if that (3) Bare or coated distribution lines.
aluminum is exposed to an environ-
[Amdt. 1924, 36 FR 12302, June 30, 1971, as
ment with a natural pH in excess of 8, amended by Amdt. 19233, 43 FR 39390, Sept.
unless tests or experience indicate its 5, 1978; Amdt. 19293, 68 FR 53900, Sept. 15,
suitability in the particular environ- 2003]
ment involved.
(f) This section does not apply to 192.459 External corrosion control:
Examination of buried pipeline
electrically isolated, metal alloy fit- when exposed.
tings in plastic pipelines, if:
(1) For the size fitting to be used, an Whenever an operator has knowledge
operator can show by test, investiga- that any portion of a buried pipeline is
exposed, the exposed portion must be
tion, or experience in the area of appli-
examined for evidence of external cor-
cation that adequate corrosion control
rosion if the pipe is bare, or if the coat-
is provided by the alloy composition; ing is deteriorated. If external corro-
and sion requiring remedial action under
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
457
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00467 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
192.461 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
exposed portion (by visual examina- (b) If amphoteric metals are included
tion, indirect method, or both) to de- in a buried or submerged pipeline con-
termine whether additional corrosion taining a metal of different anodic po-
requiring remedial action exists in the tential
vicinity of the exposed portion. (1) The amphoteric metals must be
[Amdt. 19287, 64 FR 56981, Oct. 22, 1999] electrically isolated from the remain-
der of the pipeline and cathodically
192.461 External corrosion control: protected; or
Protective coating. (2) The entire buried or submerged
(a) Each external protective coating, pipeline must be cathodically pro-
whether conductive or insulating, ap- tected at a cathodic potential that
plied for the purpose of external corro- meets the requirements of appendix D
sion control must of this part for amphoteric metals.
(1) Be applied on a properly prepared (c) The amount of cathodic protec-
surface; tion must be controlled so as not to
(2) Have sufficient adhesion to the damage the protective coating or the
metal surface to effectively resist pipe.
underfilm migration of moisture;
(3) Be sufficiently ductile to resist 192.465 External corrosion control:
cracking; Monitoring.
(4) Have sufficient strength to resist (a) Each pipeline that is under ca-
damage due to handling and soil stress; thodic protection must be tested at
and least once each calendar year, but with
(5) Have properties compatible with intervals not exceeding 15 months, to
any supplemental cathodic protection. determine whether the cathodic protec-
(b) Each external protective coating tion meets the requirements of
which is an electrically insulating type 192.463. However, if tests at those in-
must also have low moisture absorp- tervals are impractical for separately
tion and high electrical resistance. protected short sections of mains or
(c) Each external protective coating transmission lines, not in excess of 100
must be inspected just prior to low- feet (30 meters), or separately pro-
ering the pipe into the ditch and back- tected service lines, these pipelines
filling, and any damage detrimental to
may be surveyed on a sampling basis.
effective corrosion control must be re-
At least 10 percent of these protected
paired.
structures, distributed over the entire
(d) Each external protective coating
system must be surveyed each calendar
must be protected from damage result-
year, with a different 10 percent
ing from adverse ditch conditions or
checked each subsequent year, so that
damage from supporting blocks.
the entire system is tested in each 10
(e) If coated pipe is installed by bor-
ing, driving, or other similar method, year period.
precautions must be taken to minimize (b) Each cathodic protection rectifier
damage to the coating during installa- or other impressed current power
tion. source must be inspected six times
each calendar year, but with intervals
192.463 External corrosion control: not exceeding 212 months, to insure
Cathodic protection. that it is operating.
(a) Each cathodic protection system (c) Each reverse current switch, each
required by this subpart must provide a diode, and each interference bond
level of cathodic protection that com- whose failure would jeopardize struc-
plies with one or more of the applicable ture protection must be electrically
criteria contained in appendix D of this checked for proper performance six
part. If none of these criteria is appli- times each calendar year, but with in-
cable, the cathodic protection system tervals not exceeding 212 months. Each
must provide a level of cathodic pro- other interference bond must be
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
tection at least equal to that provided checked at least once each calendar
by compliance with one or more of year, but with intervals not exceeding
these criteria. 15 months.
458
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00468 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 192.473
(d) Each operator shall take prompt precautions are taken to prevent arc-
remedial action to correct any defi- ing.
ciencies indicated by the monitoring. (f) Where a pipeline is located in
(e) After the initial evaluation re- close proximity to electrical trans-
quired by 192.455(b) and (c) and mission tower footings, ground cables
192.457(b), each operator must, not less or counterpoise, or in other areas
than every 3 years at intervals not ex- where fault currents or unusual risk of
ceeding 39 months, reevaluate its un- lightning may be anticipated, it must
protected pipelines and cathodically be provided with protection against
protect them in accordance with this damage due to fault currents or light-
subpart in areas in which active corro- ning, and protective measures must
sion is found. The operator must deter- also be taken at insulating devices.
mine the areas of active corrosion by [Amdt. 1924, 36 FR 12302, June 30, 1971, as
electrical survey. However, on distribu- amended by Amdt. 19233, 43 FR 39390, Sept.
tion lines and where an electrical sur- 5, 1978]
vey is impractical on transmission
lines, areas of active corrosion may be 192.469 External corrosion control:
determined by other means that in- Test stations.
clude review and analysis of leak re- Each pipeline under cathodic protec-
pair and inspection records, corrosion tion required by this subpart must
monitoring records, exposed pipe in- have sufficient test stations or other
spection records, and the pipeline envi- contact points for electrical measure-
ronment. ment to determine the adequacy of ca-
[Amdt. 1924, 36 FR 12302, June 30, 1971, as thodic protection.
amended by Amdt. 19233, 43 FR 39390, Sept. [Amdt. 19227, 41 FR 34606, Aug. 16, 1976]
5, 1978; Amdt. 19235A, 45 FR 23441, Apr. 7,
1980; Amdt. 19285, 63 FR 37504, July 13, 1998; 192.471 External corrosion control:
Amdt. 19293, 68 FR 53900, Sept. 15, 2003; Test leads.
Amdt. 192114, 75 FR 48603, Aug. 11, 2010]
(a) Each test lead wire must be con-
192.467 External corrosion control: nected to the pipeline so as to remain
Electrical isolation. mechanically secure and electrically
(a) Each buried or submerged pipe- conductive.
line must be electrically isolated from (b) Each test lead wire must be at-
other underground metallic structures, tached to the pipeline so as to mini-
unless the pipeline and the other struc- mize stress concentration on the pipe.
tures are electrically interconnected (c) Each bared test lead wire and
and cathodically protected as a single bared metallic area at point of connec-
unit. tion to the pipeline must be coated
(b) One or more insulating devices with an electrical insulating material
must be installed where electrical iso- compatible with the pipe coating and
lation of a portion of a pipeline is nec- the insulation on the wire.
essary to facilitate the application of
corrosion control. 192.473 External corrosion control:
Interference currents.
(c) Except for unprotected copper in-
serted in ferrous pipe, each pipeline (a) Each operator whose pipeline sys-
must be electrically isolated from me- tem is subjected to stray currents shall
tallic casings that are a part of the un- have in effect a continuing program to
derground system. However, if isola- minimize the detrimental effects of
tion is not achieved because it is im- such currents.
practical, other measures must be (b) Each impressed current type ca-
taken to minimize corrosion of the thodic protection system or galvanic
pipeline inside the casing. anode system must be designed and in-
(d) Inspection and electrical tests stalled so as to minimize any adverse
must be made to assure that electrical effects on existing adjacent under-
isolation is adequate. ground metallic structures.
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
(e) An insulating device may not be [Amdt. 1924, 36 FR 12302, June 30, 1971, as
installed in an area where a combus- amended by Amdt. 19233, 43 FR 39390, Sept.
tible atmosphere is anticipated unless 5, 1978]
459
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00469 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
192.475 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
460
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00470 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 192.487
iron pipe, each segment of buried or less than that required for the MAOP
submerged pipe that is required to be of the pipeline, or a remaining wall
repaired because of external corrosion thickness less than 30 percent of the
461
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00471 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
192.489 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
grouped as to affect the overall ing damage applies only to pipelines subject to subpart O of
this part.
strength of the pipe is considered gen-
eral corrosion for the purpose of this [Amdt. 192101, 70 FR 61575, Oct. 25, 2005]
paragraph.
(b) Localized corrosion pitting. Except 192.491 Corrosion control records.
for cast iron or ductile iron pipe, each (a) Each operator shall maintain
segment of distribution line pipe with records or maps to show the location of
localized corrosion pitting to a degree cathodically protected piping, cathodic
where leakage might result must be re- protection facilities, galvanic anodes,
placed or repaired. and neighboring structures bonded to
the cathodic protection system.
[Amdt. 1924, 36 FR 12302, June 30, 1971, as Records or maps showing a stated num-
amended by Amdt. 19288, 64 FR 69665, Dec.
ber of anodes, installed in a stated
14, 1999]
manner or spacing, need not show spe-
192.489 Remedial measures: Cast cific distances to each buried anode.
iron and ductile iron pipelines. (b) Each record or map required by
paragraph (a) of this section must be
(a) General graphitization. Each seg- retained for as long as the pipeline re-
ment of cast iron or ductile iron pipe mains in service.
on which general graphitization is (c) Each operator shall maintain a
found to a degree where a fracture or record of each test, survey, or inspec-
any leakage might result, must be re- tion required by this subpart in suffi-
placed. cient detail to demonstrate the ade-
(b) Localized graphitization. Each seg- quacy of corrosion control measures or
ment of cast iron or ductile iron pipe that a corrosive condition does not
on which localized graphitization is exist. These records must be retained
found to a degree where any leakage for at least 5 years, except that records
might result, must be replaced or re- related to 192.465 (a) and (e) and
paired, or sealed by internal sealing 192.475(b) must be retained for as long
methods adequate to prevent or arrest as the pipeline remains in service.
any leakage. [Amdt. 19278, 61 FR 28785, June 6, 1996]
462
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00472 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 192.507
463
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00473 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
192.509 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
(a) The pipeline operator must use a erated at a pressure of at least 1 p.s.i.
test procedure that will ensure dis- (6.9 kPa) gage but not more than 40
covery of all potentially hazardous p.s.i. (276 kPa) gage must be given a
leaks in the segment being tested. leak test at a pressure of not less than
(b) If, during the test, the segment is 50 p.s.i. (345 kPa) gage.
to be stressed to 20 percent or more of (c) Each segment of a service line
SMYS and natural gas, inert gas, or air (other than plastic) intended to be op-
is the test medium erated at pressures of more than 40
(1) A leak test must be made at a p.s.i. (276 kPa) gage must be tested to
pressure between 100 p.s.i. (689 kPa) at least 90 p.s.i. (621 kPa) gage, except
gage and the pressure required to that each segment of a steel service
produce a hoop stress of 20 percent of line stressed to 20 percent or more of
SMYS; or SMYS must be tested in accordance
(2) The line must be walked to check with 192.507 of this subpart.
for leaks while the hoop stress is held
at approximately 20 percent of SMYS. [35 FR 13257, Aug. 19, 1970, as amended by
Amdt. 19274, 61 FR 18517, Apr. 26, 1996; Amdt.
(c) The pressure must be maintained
19285, 63 FR 37504, July 13, 1998]
at or above the test pressure for at
least 1 hour. 192.513 Test requirements for plastic
[35 FR 13257, Aug. 19, 1970, as amended by pipelines.
Amdt. 19258, 53 FR 1635, Jan. 21, 1988; Amdt. (a) Each segment of a plastic pipeline
19285, 63 FR 37504, July 13, 1998]
must be tested in accordance with this
192.509 Test requirements for pipe- section.
lines to operate below 100 p.s.i. (689 (b) The test procedure must insure
kPa) gage. discovery of all potentially hazardous
Except for service lines and plastic leaks in the segment being tested.
pipelines, each segment of a pipeline (c) The test pressure must be at least
that is to be operated below 100 p.s.i. 150 percent of the maximum operating
(689 kPa) gage must be leak tested in pressure or 50 p.s.i. (345 kPa) gage,
accordance with the following: whichever is greater. However, the
(a) The test procedure used must en- maximum test pressure may not be
sure discovery of all potentially haz- more than three times the pressure de-
ardous leaks in the segment being test- termined under 192.121, at a tempera-
ed. ture not less than the pipe temperature
(b) Each main that is to be operated during the test.
at less than 1 p.s.i. (6.9 kPa) gage must (d) During the test, the temperature
be tested to at least 10 p.s.i. (69 kPa) of thermoplastic material may not be
gage and each main to be operated at more than 100 F (38 C), or the tem-
or above 1 p.s.i. (6.9 kPa) gage must be perature at which the materials long-
tested to at least 90 p.s.i. (621 kPa) term hydrostatic strength has been de-
gage. termined under the listed specification,
whichever is greater.
[35 FR 13257, Aug. 19, 1970, as amended by
Amdt. 19258, 53 FR 1635, Jan. 21, 1988; Amdt. [35 FR 13257, Aug. 19, 1970, as amended by
19285, 63 FR 37504, July 13, 1998] Amdt. 19277, 61 FR 27793, June 3, 1996; 61 FR
45905, Aug. 30, 1996; Amdt. 19285, 63 FR 37504,
192.511 Test requirements for service July 13, 1998]
lines.
(a) Each segment of a service line 192.515 Environmental protection
(other than plastic) must be leak test- and safety requirements.
ed in accordance with this section be- (a) In conducting tests under this
fore being placed in service. If feasible, subpart, each operator shall insure
the service line connection to the main that every reasonable precaution is
must be included in the test; if not fea- taken to protect its employees and the
sible, it must be given a leakage test at general public during the testing.
the operating pressure when placed in Whenever the hoop stress of the seg-
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
464
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00474 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 192.555
keep persons not working on the test- (2) Each leak detected must be re-
ing operation outside of the testing paired before a further pressure in-
area until the pressure is reduced to or crease is made, except that a leak de-
below the proposed maximum allow- termined not to be potentially haz-
able operating pressure. ardous need not be repaired, if it is
(b) The operator shall insure that the monitored during the pressure increase
test medium is disposed of in a manner and it does not become potentially haz-
that will minimize damage to the envi- ardous.
ronment. (b) Records. Each operator who
uprates a segment of pipeline shall re-
192.517 Records. tain for the life of the segment a record
(a) Each operator shall make, and re- of each investigation required by this
tain for the useful life of the pipeline, subpart, of all work performed, and of
a record of each test performed under each pressure test conducted, in con-
192.505 and 192.507. The record must nection with the uprating.
contain at least the following informa- (c) Written plan. Each operator who
tion: uprates a segment of pipeline shall es-
(1) The operators name, the name of tablish a written procedure that will
the operators employee responsible for ensure that each applicable require-
making the test, and the name of any ment of this subpart is complied with.
test company used. (d) Limitation on increase in maximum
(2) Test medium used. allowable operating pressure. Except as
(3) Test pressure. provided in 192.555(c), a new maximum
(4) Test duration. allowable operating pressure estab-
(5) Pressure recording charts, or lished under this subpart may not ex-
other record of pressure readings. ceed the maximum that would be al-
(6) Elevation variations, whenever lowed under 192.619 and 192.621 for a
significant for the particular test. new segment of pipeline constructed of
(7) Leaks and failures noted and their the same materials in the same loca-
disposition. tion. However, when uprating a steel
(b) Each operator must maintain a pipeline, if any variable necessary to
record of each test required by determine the design pressure under
192.509, 192.511, and 192.513 for at least the design formula ( 192.105) is un-
5 years. known, the MAOP may be increased as
provided in 192.619(a)(1).
[35 FR 13257, Aug. 19, 1970, as amended by
Amdt. 19293, 68 FR 53901, Sept. 15, 2003] [35 FR 13257, Aug. 10, 1970, as amended by
Amdt. 19278, 61 FR 28785, June 6, 1996; Amdt.
19293, 68 FR 53901, Sept. 15, 2003]
Subpart KUprating
192.555 Uprating to a pressure that
192.551 Scope. will produce a hoop stress of 30 per-
This subpart prescribes minimum re- cent or more of SMYS in steel pipe-
quirements for increasing maximum lines.
allowable operating pressures (a) Unless the requirements of this
(uprating) for pipelines. section have been met, no person may
subject any segment of a steel pipeline
192.553 General requirements. to an operating pressure that will
(a) Pressure increases. Whenever the produce a hoop stress of 30 percent or
requirements of this subpart require more of SMYS and that is above the es-
that an increase in operating pressure tablished maximum allowable oper-
be made in increments, the pressure ating pressure.
must be increased gradually, at a rate (b) Before increasing operating pres-
that can be controlled, and in accord- sure above the previously established
ance with the following: maximum allowable operating pressure
(1) At the end of each incremental in- the operator shall:
crease, the pressure must be held con- (1) Review the design, operating, and
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
stant while the entire segment of pipe- maintenance history and previous test-
line that is affected is checked for ing of the segment of pipeline and de-
leaks. termine whether the proposed increase
465
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00475 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
192.557 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
is safe and consistent with the require- 192.557 Uprating: Steel pipelines to a
ments of this part; and pressure that will produce a hoop
(2) Make any repairs, replacements, stress less than 30 percent of SMYS:
or alterations in the segment of pipe- plastic, cast iron, and ductile iron
pipelines.
line that are necessary for safe oper-
ation at the increased pressure. (a) Unless the requirements of this
(c) After complying with paragraph section have been met, no person may
(b) of this section, an operator may in- subject:
crease the maximum allowable oper- (1) A segment of steel pipeline to an
ating pressure of a segment of pipeline operating pressure that will produce a
constructed before September 12, 1970, hoop stress less than 30 percent of
to the highest pressure that is per- SMYS and that is above the previously
mitted under 192.619, using as test established maximum allowable oper-
pressure the highest pressure to which ating pressure; or
the segment of pipeline was previously (2) A plastic, cast iron, or ductile
iron pipeline segment to an operating
subjected (either in a strength test or
pressure that is above the previously
in actual operation).
established maximum allowable oper-
(d) After complying with paragraph ating pressure.
(b) of this section, an operator that (b) Before increasing operating pres-
does not qualify under paragraph (c) of sure above the previously established
this section may increase the pre- maximum allowable operating pres-
viously established maximum allow- sure, the operator shall:
able operating pressure if at least one (1) Review the design, operating, and
of the following requirements is met: maintenance history of the segment of
(1) The segment of pipeline is suc- pipeline;
cessfully tested in accordance with the (2) Make a leakage survey (if it has
requirements of this part for a new line been more than 1 year since the last
of the same material in the same loca- survey) and repair any leaks that are
tion. found, except that a leak determined
(2) An increased maximum allowable not to be potentially hazardous need
operating pressure may be established not be repaired, if it is monitored dur-
for a segment of pipeline in a Class 1 ing the pressure increase and it does
location if the line has not previously not become potentially hazardous;
been tested, and if: (3) Make any repairs, replacements,
(i) It is impractical to test it in ac- or alterations in the segment of pipe-
cordance with the requirements of this line that are necessary for safe oper-
part; ation at the increased pressure;
(ii) The new maximum operating (4) Reinforce or anchor offsets, bends
pressure does not exceed 80 percent of and dead ends in pipe joined by com-
that allowed for a new line of the same pression couplings or bell and spigot
design in the same location; and joints to prevent failure of the pipe
(iii) The operator determines that joint, if the offset, bend, or dead end is
the new maximum allowable operating exposed in an excavation;
pressure is consistent with the condi- (5) Isolate the segment of pipeline in
tion of the segment of pipeline and the which the pressure is to be increased
design requirements of this part. from any adjacent segment that will
(e) Where a segment of pipeline is continue to be operated at a lower
uprated in accordance with paragraph pressure; and
(6) If the pressure in mains or service
(c) or (d)(2) of this section, the increase
lines, or both, is to be higher than the
in pressure must be made in incre-
pressure delivered to the customer, in-
ments that are equal to:
stall a service regulator on each serv-
(1) 10 percent of the pressure before ice line and test each regulator to de-
the uprating; or termine that it is functioning. Pressure
(2) 25 percent of the total pressure in- may be increased as necessary to test
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
466
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00476 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 192.603
(c) After complying with paragraph ascertained, the operator shall assume
(b) of this section, the increase in max- that cast iron pipe was supported on
imum allowable operating pressure blocks with tamped backfill and that
must be made in increments that are ductile iron pipe was laid without
equal to 10 p.s.i. (69 kPa) gage or 25 per- blocks with tamped backfill.
cent of the total pressure increase, (2) Unless the actual maximum cover
whichever produces the fewer number depth is known, the operator shall
of increments. Whenever the require- measure the actual cover in at least
ments of paragraph (b)(6) of this sec-
three places where the cover is most
tion apply, there must be at least two
approximately equal incremental in- likely to be greatest and shall use the
creases. greatest cover measured.
(d) If records for cast iron or ductile (3) Unless the actual nominal wall
iron pipeline facilities are not com- thickness is known, the operator shall
plete enough to determine stresses pro- determine the wall thickness by cut-
duced by internal pressure, trench ting and measuring coupons from at
loading, rolling loads, beam stresses, least three separate pipe lengths. The
and other bending loads, in evaluating coupons must be cut from pipe lengths
the level of safety of the pipeline when in areas where the cover depth is most
operating at the proposed increased likely to be the greatest. The average
pressure, the following procedures of all measurements taken must be in-
must be followed: creased by the allowance indicated in
(1) In estimating the stresses, if the the following table:
original laying conditions cannot be
Allowance inches (millimeters)
(4) For cast iron pipe, unless the pipe 192.603 General provisions.
manufacturing process is known, the
(a) No person may operate a segment
operator shall assume that the pipe is
of pipeline unless it is operated in ac-
pit cast pipe with a bursting tensile
cordance with this subpart.
strength of 11,000 p.s.i. (76 MPa) gage
(b) Each operator shall keep records
and a modulus of rupture of 31,000 p.s.i.
necessary to administer the procedures
(214 MPa) gage.
established under 192.605.
[35 FR 13257, Aug. 19, 1970, as amended by (c) The Associate Administrator or
Amdt. 19237, 46 FR 10160, Feb. 2, 1981; Amdt. the State Agency that has submitted a
19262, 54 FR 5628, Feb. 6, 1989; Amdt. 19585, current certification under the pipeline
63 FR 37504, July 13, 1998]
safety laws, (49 U.S.C. 60101 et seq.) with
respect to the pipeline facility gov-
Subpart LOperations erned by an operators plans and proce-
dures may, after notice and oppor-
192.601 Scope. tunity for hearing as provided in 49
This subpart prescribes minimum re- CFR 190.206 or the relevant State pro-
quirements for the operation of pipe- cedures, require the operator to amend
line facilities.
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
467
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00477 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
192.605 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
its plans and procedures as necessary or sections of pipe and for purging be-
to provide a reasonable level of safety. fore returning to service.
(7) Starting, operating and shutting
[35 FR 13257, Aug. 19, 1970, as amended by
Amdt. 19266, 56 FR 31090, July 9, 1991; Amdt.
down gas compressor units.
19271, 59 FR 6584, Feb. 11, 1994; Amdt. 19275, (8) Periodically reviewing the work
61 FR 18517, Apr. 26, 1996; Amdt. 192118, 78 done by operator personnel to deter-
FR 58915, Sept. 25, 2013] mine the effectiveness, and adequacy of
the procedures used in normal oper-
192.605 Procedural manual for oper- ation and maintenance and modifying
ations, maintenance, and emer- the procedures when deficiencies are
gencies. found.
(a) General. Each operator shall pre- (9) Taking adequate precautions in
pare and follow for each pipeline, a excavated trenches to protect per-
manual of written procedures for con- sonnel from the hazards of unsafe accu-
ducting operations and maintenance mulations of vapor or gas, and making
activities and for emergency response. available when needed at the exca-
For transmission lines, the manual vation, emergency rescue equipment,
must also include procedures for han- including a breathing apparatus and, a
dling abnormal operations. This man- rescue harness and line.
ual must be reviewed and updated by (10) Systematic and routine testing
the operator at intervals not exceeding and inspection of pipe-type or bottle-
15 months, but at least once each cal- type holders including
endar year. This manual must be pre- (i) Provision for detecting external
pared before operations of a pipeline corrosion before the strength of the
system commence. Appropriate parts container has been impaired;
of the manual must be kept at loca- (ii) Periodic sampling and testing of
tions where operations and mainte- gas in storage to determine the dew
nance activities are conducted. point of vapors contained in the stored
gas which, if condensed, might cause
(b) Maintenance and normal oper-
internal corrosion or interfere with the
ations. The manual required by para-
safe operation of the storage plant; and
graph (a) of this section must include
(iii) Periodic inspection and testing
procedures for the following, if applica-
of pressure limiting equipment to de-
ble, to provide safety during mainte-
termine that it is in safe operating
nance and operations.
condition and has adequate capacity.
(1) Operating, maintaining, and re-
(11) Responding promptly to a report
pairing the pipeline in accordance with
of a gas odor inside or near a building,
each of the requirements of this sub- unless the operators emergency proce-
part and subpart M of this part. dures under 192.615(a)(3) specifically
(2) Controlling corrosion in accord- apply to these reports.
ance with the operations and mainte- (12) Implementing the applicable con-
nance requirements of subpart I of this trol room management procedures re-
part. quired by 192.631.
(3) Making construction records, (c) Abnormal operation. For trans-
maps, and operating history available mission lines, the manual required by
to appropriate operating personnel. paragraph (a) of this section must in-
(4) Gathering of data needed for re- clude procedures for the following to
porting incidents under Part 191 of this provide safety when operating design
chapter in a timely and effective man- limits have been exceeded:
ner. (1) Responding to, investigating, and
(5) Starting up and shutting down correcting the cause of:
any part of the pipeline in a manner (i) Unintended closure of valves or
designed to assure operation within the shutdowns;
MAOP limits prescribed by this part, (ii) Increase or decrease in pressure
plus the build-up allowed for operation or flow rate outside normal operating
of pressure-limiting and control de- limits;
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
468
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00478 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 192.611
(v) Any other foreseeable malfunc- location, the operator shall imme-
tion of a component, deviation from diately make a study to determine:
normal operation, or personnel error, (a) The present class location for the
which may result in a hazard to per- segment involved.
sons or property. (b) The design, construction, and
(2) Checking variations from normal testing procedures followed in the
operation after abnormal operation has original construction, and a compari-
ended at sufficient critical locations in son of these procedures with those re-
the system to determine continued in- quired for the present class location by
tegrity and safe operation. the applicable provisions of this part.
(3) Notifying responsible operator (c) The physical condition of the seg-
personnel when notice of an abnormal ment to the extent it can be
operation is received. ascertained from available records;
(4) Periodically reviewing the re- (d) The operating and maintenance
sponse of operator personnel to deter- history of the segment;
mine the effectiveness of the proce- (e) The maximum actual operating
dures controlling abnormal operation pressure and the corresponding oper-
and taking corrective action where de- ating hoop stress, taking pressure gra-
ficiencies are found. dient into account, for the segment of
(5) The requirements of this para- pipeline involved; and
graph (c) do not apply to natural gas (f) The actual area affected by the
distribution operators that are oper- population density increase, and phys-
ating transmission lines in connection ical barriers or other factors which
with their distribution system. may limit further expansion of the
(d) Safety-related condition reports. more densely populated area.
The manual required by paragraph (a)
of this section must include instruc- 192.611 Change in class location:
tions enabling personnel who perform Confirmation or revision of max-
operation and maintenance activities imum allowable operating pressure.
to recognize conditions that poten- (a) If the hoop stress corresponding
tially may be safety-related conditions to the established maximum allowable
that are subject to the reporting re- operating pressure of a segment of
quirements of 191.23 of this sub- pipeline is not commensurate with the
chapter. present class location, and the segment
(e) Surveillance, emergency response, is in satisfactory physical condition,
and accident investigation. The proce- the maximum allowable operating
dures required by 192.613(a), 192.615, pressure of that segment of pipeline
and 192.617 must be included in the must be confirmed or revised according
manual required by paragraph (a) of to one of the following requirements:
this section. (1) If the segment involved has been
previously tested in place for a period
[Amdt. 19271, 59 FR 6584, Feb. 11, 1994, as
amended by Amdt. 19271A, 60 FR 14381, Mar.
of not less than 8 hours:
17, 1995; Amdt. 19293, 68 FR 53901, Sept. 15, (i) The maximum allowable operating
2003; Amdt. 192112, 74 FR 63327, Dec. 3, 2009] pressure is 0.8 times the test pressure
in Class 2 locations, 0.667 times the test
192.607 [Reserved] pressure in Class 3 locations, or 0.555
times the test pressure in Class 4 loca-
192.609 Change in class location: Re- tions. The corresponding hoop stress
quired study. may not exceed 72 percent of the SMYS
Whenever an increase in population of the pipe in Class 2 locations, 60 per-
density indicates a change in class lo- cent of SMYS in Class 3 locations, or 50
cation for a segment of an existing percent of SMYS in Class 4 locations.
steel pipeline operating at hoop stress (ii) The alternative maximum allow-
that is more than 40 percent of SMYS, able operating pressure is 0.8 times the
or indicates that the hoop stress cor- test pressure in Class 2 locations and
responding to the established max- 0.667 times the test pressure in Class 3
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
469
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00479 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
192.612 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
hoop stress may not exceed 80 percent graph (a) (1) or (2) of this section with-
of the SMYS of the pipe in Class 2 loca- in the 24-month period does not pre-
tions and 67 percent of SMYS in Class clude establishing a maximum allow-
3 locations. able operating pressure under para-
(2) The maximum allowable oper- graph (a)(3) of this section at a later
ating pressure of the segment involved date.
must be reduced so that the cor-
[Amdt. 19263A, 54 FR 24174, June 6, 1989, as
responding hoop stress is not more
amended by Amdt. 19278, 61 FR 28785, June
than that allowed by this part for new 6, 1996; Amdt. 19294, 69 FR 32895, June 14,
segments of pipelines in the existing 2004; 73 FR 62177, Oct. 17, 2008]
class location.
(3) The segment involved must be 192.612 Underwater inspection and
tested in accordance with the applica- reburial of pipelines in the Gulf of
ble requirements of subpart J of this Mexico and its inlets.
part, and its maximum allowable oper- (a) Each operator shall prepare and
ating pressure must then be estab- follow a procedure to identify its pipe-
lished according to the following cri- lines in the Gulf of Mexico and its in-
teria: lets in waters less than 15 feet (4.6 me-
(i) The maximum allowable operating ters) deep as measured from mean low
pressure after the requalification test water that are at risk of being an ex-
is 0.8 times the test pressure for Class posed underwater pipeline or a hazard
2 locations, 0.667 times the test pres-
to navigation. The procedures must be
sure for Class 3 locations, and 0.555
in effect August 10, 2005.
times the test pressure for Class 4 loca-
(b) Each operator shall conduct ap-
tions.
(ii) The corresponding hoop stress propriate periodic underwater inspec-
may not exceed 72 percent of the SMYS tions of its pipelines in the Gulf of
of the pipe in Class 2 locations, 60 per- Mexico and its inlets in waters less
cent of SMYS in Class 3 locations, or 50 than 15 feet (4.6 meters) deep as meas-
percent of SMYS in Class 4 locations. ured from mean low water based on the
(iii) For pipeline operating at an al- identified risk.
ternative maximum allowable oper- (c) If an operator discovers that its
ating pressure per 192.620, the alter- pipeline is an exposed underwater pipe-
native maximum allowable operating line or poses a hazard to navigation,
pressure after the requalification test the operator shall
is 0.8 times the test pressure for Class (1) Promptly, but not later than 24
2 locations and 0.667 times the test hours after discovery, notify the Na-
pressure for Class 3 locations. The cor- tional Response Center, telephone: 1
responding hoop stress may not exceed 8004248802, of the location and, if
80 percent of the SMYS of the pipe in available, the geographic coordinates
Class 2 locations and 67 percent of of that pipeline.
SMYS in Class 3 locations. (2) Promptly, but not later than 7
(b) The maximum allowable oper- days after discovery, mark the location
ating pressure confirmed or revised in of the pipeline in accordance with 33
accordance with this section, may not CFR part 64 at the ends of the pipeline
exceed the maximum allowable oper- segment and at intervals of not over
ating pressure established before the 500 yards (457 meters) long, except that
confirmation or revision. a pipeline segment less than 200 yards
(c) Confirmation or revision of the (183 meters) long need only be marked
maximum allowable operating pressure at the center; and
of a segment of pipeline in accordance (3) Within 6 months after discovery,
with this section does not preclude the or not later than November 1 of the fol-
application of 192.553 and 192.555. lowing year if the 6 month period is
(d) Confirmation or revision of the later than November 1 of the year of
maximum allowable operating pressure discovery, bury the pipeline so that the
that is required as a result of a study top of the pipe is 36 inches (914 milli-
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
under 192.609 must be completed with- meters) below the underwater natural
in 24 months of the change in class lo- bottom (as determined by recognized
cation. Pressure reduction under para- and generally accepted practices) for
470
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00480 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 192.614
471
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00481 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
192.615 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
(5) Provide for temporary marking of (i) Gas detected inside or near a
buried pipelines in the area of exca- building.
vation activity before, as far as prac- (ii) Fire located near or directly in-
tical, the activity begins. volving a pipeline facility.
(6) Provide as follows for inspection (iii) Explosion occurring near or di-
of pipelines that an operator has rea- rectly involving a pipeline facility.
son to believe could be damaged by ex- (iv) Natural disaster.
cavation activities: (4) The availability of personnel,
(i) The inspection must be done as equipment, tools, and materials, as
frequently as necessary during and needed at the scene of an emergency.
after the activities to verify the integ- (5) Actions directed toward pro-
rity of the pipeline; and tecting people first and then property.
(ii) In the case of blasting, any in- (6) Emergency shutdown and pressure
spection must include leakage surveys. reduction in any section of the opera-
(d) A damage prevention program tors pipeline system necessary to min-
under this section is not required for imize hazards to life or property.
the following pipelines:
(7) Making safe any actual or poten-
(1) Pipelines located offshore. tial hazard to life or property.
(2) Pipelines, other than those lo- (8) Notifying appropriate fire, police,
cated offshore, in Class 1 or 2 locations and other public officials of gas pipe-
until September 20, 1995.
line emergencies and coordinating with
(3) Pipelines to which access is phys- them both planned responses and ac-
ically controlled by the operator. tual responses during an emergency.
(e) Pipelines operated by persons (9) Safely restoring any service out-
other than municipalities (including age.
operators of master meters) whose pri-
(10) Beginning action under 192.617,
mary activity does not include the
if applicable, as soon after the end of
transportation of gas need not comply
the emergency as possible.
with the following:
(1) The requirement of paragraph (a) (11) Actions required to be taken by a
of this section that the damage preven- controller during an emergency in ac-
tion program be written; and cordance with 192.631.
(2) The requirements of paragraphs (b) Each operator shall:
(c)(1) and (c)(2) of this section. (1) Furnish its supervisors who are
responsible for emergency action a
[Amdt. 19240, 47 FR 13824, Apr. 1, 1982, as copy of that portion of the latest edi-
amended by Amdt. 19257, 52 FR 32800, Aug. tion of the emergency procedures es-
31, 1987; Amdt. 19273, 60 FR 14650, Mar. 20,
1995; Amdt. 19278, 61 FR 28785, June 6, 1996;
tablished under paragraph (a) of this
Amdt.19282, 62 FR 61699, Nov. 19, 1997; Amdt. section as necessary for compliance
19284, 63 FR 38758, July 20, 1998] with those procedures.
(2) Train the appropriate operating
192.615 Emergency plans. personnel to assure that they are
(a) Each operator shall establish knowledgeable of the emergency proce-
written procedures to minimize the dures and verify that the training is ef-
hazard resulting from a gas pipeline fective.
emergency. At a minimum, the proce- (3) Review employee activities to de-
dures must provide for the following: termine whether the procedures were
(1) Receiving, identifying, and effectively followed in each emergency.
classifying notices of events which re- (c) Each operator shall establish and
quire immediate response by the oper- maintain liaison with appropriate fire,
ator. police, and other public officials to:
(2) Establishing and maintaining ade- (1) Learn the responsibility and re-
quate means of communication with sources of each government organiza-
appropriate fire, police, and other pub- tion that may respond to a gas pipeline
lic officials. emergency;
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
(3) Prompt and effective response to a (2) Acquaint the officials with the op-
notice of each type of emergency, in- erators ability in responding to a gas
cluding the following: pipeline emergency;
472
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00482 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 192.616
(3) Identify the types of gas pipeline (f) The program and the media used
emergencies of which the operator no- must be as comprehensive as necessary
tifies the officials; and to reach all areas in which the operator
(4) Plan how the operator and offi- transports gas.
cials can engage in mutual assistance (g) The program must be conducted
to minimize hazards to life or property. in English and in other languages com-
[Amdt. 19224, 41 FR 13587, Mar. 31, 1976, as monly understood by a significant
amended by Amdt. 19271, 59 FR 6585, Feb. 11, number and concentration of the non-
1994; Amdt. 192112, 74 FR 63327, Dec. 3, 2009] English speaking population in the op-
erators area.
192.616 Public awareness. (h) Operators in existence on June 20,
(a) Except for an operator of a master 2005, must have completed their writ-
meter or petroleum gas system covered ten programs no later than June 20,
under paragraph (j) of this section, 2006. The operator of a master meter or
each pipeline operator must develop petroleum gas system covered under
and implement a written continuing paragraph (j) of this section must com-
public education program that follows plete development of its written proce-
the guidance provided in the American dure by June 13, 2008. Upon request, op-
Petroleum Institutes (API) Rec- erators must submit their completed
ommended Practice (RP) 1162 (incor- programs to PHMSA or, in the case of
porated by reference, see 192.7). an intrastate pipeline facility operator,
(b) The operators program must fol- the appropriate State agency.
low the general program recommenda-
(i) The operators program docu-
tions of API RP 1162 and assess the
mentation and evaluation results must
unique attributes and characteristics
of the operators pipeline and facilities. be available for periodic review by ap-
(c) The operator must follow the gen- propriate regulatory agencies.
eral program recommendations, includ- (j) Unless the operator transports gas
ing baseline and supplemental require- as a primary activity, the operator of a
ments of API RP 1162, unless the oper- master meter or petroleum gas system
ator provides justification in its pro- is not required to develop a public
gram or procedural manual as to why awareness program as prescribed in
compliance with all or certain provi- paragraphs (a) through (g) of this sec-
sions of the recommended practice is tion. Instead the operator must develop
not practicable and not necessary for and implement a written procedure to
safety. provide its customers public awareness
(d) The operators program must spe- messages twice annually. If the master
cifically include provisions to educate meter or petroleum gas system is lo-
the public, appropriate government or- cated on property the operator does
ganizations, and persons engaged in ex- not control, the operator must provide
cavation related activities on: similar messages twice annually to
(1) Use of a one-call notification sys- persons controlling the property. The
tem prior to excavation and other dam- public awareness message must in-
age prevention activities; clude:
(2) Possible hazards associated with (1) A description of the purpose and
unintended releases from a gas pipeline reliability of the pipeline;
facility; (2) An overview of the hazards of the
(3) Physical indications that such a pipeline and prevention measures used;
release may have occurred;
(3) Information about damage preven-
(4) Steps that should be taken for
tion;
public safety in the event of a gas pipe-
line release; and (4) How to recognize and respond to a
leak; and
(5) Procedures for reporting such an
event. (5) How to get additional informa-
(e) The program must include activi- tion.
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
ties to advise affected municipalities, [Amdt. 192100, 70 FR 28842, May 19, 2005; 70
school districts, businesses, and resi- FR 35041, June 16, 2005; 72 FR 70810, Dec. 13,
dents of pipeline facility locations. 2007]
473
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00483 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
192.617 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
Onshore gathering line that first be- March 15, 2006, or date line becomes 5 years preceding applicable date in sec-
came subject to this part (other than subject to this part, whichever is later. ond column.
192.612) after April 13, 2006.
Onshore transmission line that was a
gathering line not subject to this part
before March 15, 2006.
Offshore gathering lines ........................... July 1, 1976 ............................................. July 1, 1971.
All other pipelines ..................................... July 1, 1970 ............................................. July 1, 1965.
sion and the actual operating pressure. pressure from being exceeded, in ac-
(b) No person may operate a segment cordance with 192.195.
to which paragraph (a)(4) of this sec-
474
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00484 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 192.620
(c) The requirements on pressure re- (2) The alternative maximum allow-
strictions in this section do not apply able operating pressure is the lower of
in the following instance. An operator the following:
may operate a segment of pipeline (i) The design pressure of the weakest
found to be in satisfactory condition, element in the pipeline segment, deter-
considering its operating and mainte- mined under subparts C and D of this
nance history, at the highest actual op- part.
erating pressure to which the segment (ii) The pressure obtained by dividing
was subjected during the 5 years pre- the pressure to which the pipeline seg-
ceding the applicable date in the sec- ment was tested after construction by
ond column of the table in paragraph a factor determined in the following
(a)(3) of this section. An operator must table:
still comply with 192.611. Alternative test
Class location
(d) The operator of a pipeline seg- factor
ment of steel pipeline meeting the con- 1 ..................................................................... 1.25
ditions prescribed in 192.620(b) may 2 ..................................................................... 1 1.50
475
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00485 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
192.620 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
60 days prior to operation at the alter- must also send a copy to a State pipe-
native MAOP. An operator must also line safety authority when the pipeline
notify a State pipeline safety authority is located in a State where PHMSA has
when the pipeline is located in a State an interstate agent agreement, or an
where PHMSA has an interstate agent intrastate pipeline is regulated by that
agreement, or an intrastate pipeline is State.
regulated by that State; and (4) For each pipeline segment, do one
(7) At least 95 percent of girth welds of the following:
on a segment that was constructed (i) Perform a strength test as de-
prior to December 22, 2008, must have scribed in 192.505 at a test pressure
been non-destructively examined in ac- calculated under paragraph (a) of this
cordance with 192.243(b) and (c). section or
(c) What is an operator electing to use (ii) For a pipeline segment in exist-
the alternative maximum allowable oper- ence prior to December 22, 2008, certify,
ating pressure required to do? If an oper- under paragraph (c)(2) of this section,
ator elects to use the alternative max- that the strength test performed under
imum allowable operating pressure cal- 192.505 was conducted at test pressure
culated under paragraph (a) of this sec- calculated under paragraph (a) of this
tion for a pipeline segment, the oper- section, or conduct a new strength test
ator must do each of the following: in accordance with paragraph (c)(4)(i)
(1) For pipelines already in service, of this section.
notify the PHMSA pipeline safety re- (5) Comply with the additional oper-
gional office where the pipeline is in ation and maintenance requirements
service of the intention to use the al- described in paragraph (d) of this sec-
ternative pressure at least 180 days be- tion.
fore operating at the alternative (6) If the performance of a construc-
MAOP. For new pipelines, notify the tion task associated with imple-
PHMSA pipeline safety regional office menting alternative MAOP that occurs
of planned alternative MAOP design after December 22, 2008, can affect the
and operation at least 60 days prior to integrity of the pipeline segment, treat
the earliest start date of either pipe that task as a covered task, notwith-
manufacturing or construction activi- standing the definition in 192.801(b)
ties. An operator must also notify the and implement the requirements of
state pipeline safety authority when subpart N as appropriate.
the pipeline is located in a state where (7) Maintain, for the useful life of the
PHMSA has an interstate agent agree- pipeline, records demonstrating com-
ment or where an intrastate pipeline is pliance with paragraphs (b), (c)(6), and
regulated by that state. (d) of this section.
(2) Certify, by signature of a senior (8) A Class 1 and Class 2 location can
executive officer of the company, as be upgraded one class due to class
follows: changes per 192.611(a). All class loca-
(i) The pipeline segment meets the tion changes from Class 1 to Class 2
conditions described in paragraph (b) of and from Class 2 to Class 3 must have
this section; and all anomalies evaluated and remedi-
(ii) The operating and maintenance ated per: The original pipeline class
procedures include the additional oper- grade 192.620(d)(11) anomaly repair
ating and maintenance requirements of requirements; and all anomalies with a
paragraph (d) of this section; and wall loss equal to or greater than 40
(iii) The review and any needed pro- percent must be excavated and remedi-
gram upgrade of the damage preven- ated. Pipelines in Class 4 may not oper-
tion program required by paragraph ate at an alternative MAOP.
(d)(4)(v) of this section has been com- (d) What additional operation and
pleted. maintenance requirements apply to oper-
(3) Send a copy of the certification ation at the alternative maximum allow-
required by paragraph (c)(2) of this sec- able operating pressure? In addition to
tion to each PHMSA pipeline safety re- compliance with other applicable safe-
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
476
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00486 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 192.620
under paragraph (a) of this section, an tional operation and maintenance re-
operator must comply with the addi- quirements as follows:
To address increased risk of a
maximum allowable operating
pressure based on higher Take the following additional step:
stress levels in the following
areas:
(1) Identifying and evaluating Develop a threat matrix consistent with 192.917 to do the following:
threats. (i) Identify and compare the increased risk of operating the pipeline at the increased stress
level under this section with conventional operation; and
(ii) Describe and implement procedures used to mitigate the risk.
(2) Notifying the public ............. (i) Recalculate the potential impact circle as defined in 192.903 to reflect use of the alter-
native maximum operating pressure calculated under paragraph (a) of this section and pipe-
line operating conditions; and
(ii) In implementing the public education program required under 192.616, perform the fol-
lowing:
(A) Include persons occupying property within 220 yards of the centerline and within the po-
tential impact circle within the targeted audience; and
(B) Include information about the integrity management activities performed under this section
within the message provided to the audience.
(3) Responding to an emer- (i) Ensure that the identification of high consequence areas reflects the larger potential impact
gency in an area defined as circle recalculated under paragraph (d)(2)(i) of this section.
a high consequence area in
192.903.
(ii) If personnel response time to mainline valves on either side of the high consequence area
exceeds one hour (under normal driving conditions and speed limits) from the time the event
is identified in the control room, provide remote valve control through a supervisory control
and data acquisition (SCADA) system, other leak detection system, or an alternative method
of control.
(iii) Remote valve control must include the ability to close and monitor the valve position (open
or closed), and monitor pressure upstream and downstream.
(iv) A line break valve control system using differential pressure, rate of pressure drop or other
widely-accepted method is an acceptable alternative to remote valve control.
(4) Protecting the right-of-way .. (i) Patrol the right-of-way at intervals not exceeding 45 days, but at least 12 times each cal-
endar year, to inspect for excavation activities, ground movement, wash outs, leakage, or
other activities or conditions affecting the safety operation of the pipeline.
(ii) Develop and implement a plan to monitor for and mitigate occurrences of unstable soil and
ground movement.
(iii) If observed conditions indicate the possible loss of cover, perform a depth of cover study
and replace cover as necessary to restore the depth of cover or apply alternative means to
provide protection equivalent to the originally-required depth of cover.
(iv) Use line-of-sight line markers satisfying the requirements of 192.707(d) except in agricul-
tural areas, large water crossings or swamp, steep terrain, or where prohibited by Federal
Energy Regulatory Commission orders, permits, or local law.
(v) Review the damage prevention program under 192.614(a) in light of national consensus
practices, to ensure the program provides adequate protection of the right-of-way. Identify
the standards or practices considered in the review, and meet or exceed those standards or
practices by incorporating appropriate changes into the program.
(vi) Develop and implement a right-of-way management plan to protect the pipeline segment
from damage due to excavation activities.
(5) Controlling internal corro- (i) Develop and implement a program to monitor for and mitigate the presence of, deleterious
sion. gas stream constituents.
(ii) At points where gas with potentially deleterious contaminants enters the pipeline, use filter
separators or separators and gas quality monitoring equipment.
(iii) Use gas quality monitoring equipment that includes a moisture analyzer, chromatograph,
and periodic hydrogen sulfide sampling.
(iv) Use cleaning pigs and sample accumulated liquids. Use inhibitors when corrosive gas or
liquids are present.
(v) Address deleterious gas stream constituents as follows:
(A) Limit carbon dioxide to 3 percent by volume;
(B) Allow no free water and otherwise limit water to seven pounds per million cubic feet of
gas; and
(C) Limit hydrogen sulfide to 1.0 grain per hundred cubic feet (16 ppm) of gas, where the hy-
drogen sulfide is greater than 0.5 grain per hundred cubic feet (8 ppm) of gas, implement a
pigging and inhibitor injection program to address deleterious gas stream constituents, in-
cluding follow-up sampling and quality testing of liquids at receipt points.
(vi) Review the program at least quarterly based on the gas stream experience and implement
adjustments to monitor for, and mitigate the presence of, deleterious gas stream constitu-
ents.
(6) Controlling interference that (i) Prior to operating an existing pipeline segment at an alternate maximum allowable oper-
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
can impact external corrosion. ating pressure calculated under this section, or within six months after placing a new pipe-
line segment in service at an alternate maximum allowable operating pressure calculated
under this section, address any interference currents on the pipeline segment.
(ii) To address interference currents, perform the following:
477
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00487 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
192.620 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
(A) Conduct an interference survey to detect the presence and level of any electrical current
that could impact external corrosion where interference is suspected;
(B) Analyze the results of the survey; and
(C) Take any remedial action needed within 6 months after completing the survey to protect
the pipeline segment from deleterious current.
(7) Confirming external corro- (i) Within six months after placing the cathodic protection of a new pipeline segment in oper-
sion control through indirect ation, or within six months after certifying a segment under 192.620(c)(1) of an existing
assessment. pipeline segment under this section, assess the adequacy of the cathodic protection through
an indirect method such as close-interval survey, and the integrity of the coating using direct
current voltage gradient (DCVG) or alternating current voltage gradient (ACVG).
(ii) Remediate any construction damaged coating with a voltage drop classified as moderate or
severe (IR drop greater than 35% for DCVG or 50 dBv for ACVG) under section 4 of
NACE RP05022002 (incorporated by reference, see 192.7).
(iii) Within six months after completing the baseline internal inspection required under para-
graph (d)(9) of this section, integrate the results of the indirect assessment required under
paragraph (d)(7)(i) of this section with the results of the baseline internal inspection and take
any needed remedial actions.
(iv) For all pipeline segments in high consequence areas, perform periodic assessments as
follows:
(A) Conduct periodic close interval surveys with current interrupted to confirm voltage drops in
association with periodic assessments under subpart O of this part.
(B) Locate pipe-to-soil test stations at half-mile intervals within each high consequence area
ensuring at least one station is within each high consequence area, if practicable.
(C) Integrate the results with those of the baseline and periodic assessments for integrity done
under paragraphs (d)(9) and (d)(10) of this section.
(8) Controlling external corro- (i) If an annual test station reading indicates cathodic protection below the level of protection
sion through cathodic protec- required in subpart I of this part, complete remedial action within six months of the failed
tion. reading or notify each PHMSA pipeline safety regional office where the pipeline is in service
demonstrating that the integrity of the pipeline is not compromised if the repair takes longer
than 6 months. An operator must also notify a State pipeline safety authority when the pipe-
line is located in a State where PHMSA has an interstate agent agreement, or an intrastate
pipeline is regulated by that State; and
(ii) After remedial action to address a failed reading, confirm restoration of adequate corrosion
control by a close interval survey on either side of the affected test station to the next test
station unless the reason for the failed reading is determined to be a rectifier connection or
power input problem that can be remediated and otherwise verified.
(iii) If the pipeline segment has been in operation, the cathodic protection system on the pipe-
line segment must have been operational within 12 months of the completion of construc-
tion.
(9) Conducting a baseline as- (i) Except as provided in paragraph (d)(9)(iii) of this section, for a new pipeline segment oper-
sessment of integrity. ating at the new alternative maximum allowable operating pressure, perform a baseline in-
ternal inspection of the entire pipeline segment as follows:
(A) Assess using a geometry tool after the initial hydrostatic test and backfill and within six
months after placing the new pipeline segment in service; and
(B) Assess using a high resolution magnetic flux tool within three years after placing the new
pipeline segment in service at the alternative maximum allowable operating pressure.
(ii) Except as provided in paragraph (d)(9)(iii) of this section, for an existing pipeline segment,
perform a baseline internal assessment using a geometry tool and a high resolution mag-
netic flux tool before, but within two years prior to, raising pressure to the alternative max-
imum allowable operating pressure as allowed under this section.
(iii) If headers, mainline valve by-passes, compressor station piping, meter station piping, or
other short portion of a pipeline segment operating at alternative maximum allowable oper-
ating pressure cannot accommodate a geometry tool and a high resolution magnetic flux
tool, use direct assessment (per 192.925, 192.927 and/or 192.929) or pressure testing
(per subpart J of this part) to assess that portion.
(10) Conducting periodic as- (i) Determine a frequency for subsequent periodic integrity assessments as if all the alternative
sessments of integrity. maximum allowable operating pressure pipeline segments were covered by subpart O of
this part and
(ii) Conduct periodic internal inspections using a high resolution magnetic flux tool on the fre-
quency determined under paragraph (d)(10)(i) of this section, or
(iii) Use direct assessment (per 192.925, 192.927 and/or 192.929) or pressure testing
(per subpart J of this part) for periodic assessment of a portion of a segment to the extent
permitted for a baseline assessment under paragraph (d)(9)(iii) of this section.
(11) Making repairs .................. (i) Perform the following when evaluating an anomaly:
(A) Use the most conservative calculation for determining remaining strength or an alternative
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
validated calculation based on pipe diameter, wall thickness, grade, operating pressure, op-
erating stress level, and operating temperature: and
(B) Take into account the tolerances of the tools used for the inspection.
(ii) Repair a defect immediately if any of the following apply:
478
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00488 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 192.621
(A) The defect is a dent discovered during the baseline assessment for integrity under para-
graph (d)(9) of this section and the defect meets the criteria for immediate repair in
192.309(b).
(B) The defect meets the criteria for immediate repair in 192.933(d).
(C) The alternative maximum allowable operating pressure was based on a design factor of
0.67 under paragraph (a) of this section and the failure pressure is less than 1.25 times the
alternative maximum allowable operating pressure.
(D) The alternative maximum allowable operating pressure was based on a design factor of
0.56 under paragraph (a) of this section and the failure pressure is less than or equal to 1.4
times the alternative maximum allowable operating pressure.
(iii) If paragraph (d)(11)(ii) of this section does not require immediate repair, repair a defect
within one year if any of the following apply:
(A) The defect meets the criteria for repair within one year in 192.933(d).
(B) The alternative maximum allowable operating pressure was based on a design factor of
0.80 under paragraph (a) of this section and the failure pressure is less than 1.25 times the
alternative maximum allowable operating pressure.
(C) The alternative maximum allowable operating pressure was based on a design factor of
0.67 under paragraph (a) of this section and the failure pressure is less than 1.50 times the
alternative maximum allowable operating pressure.
(D) The alternative maximum allowable operating pressure was based on a design factor of
0.56 under paragraph (a) of this section and the failure pressure is less than or equal to
1.80 times the alternative maximum allowable operating pressure.
(iv) Evaluate any defect not required to be repaired under paragraph (d)(11)(ii) or (iii) of this
section to determine its growth rate, set the maximum interval for repair or re-inspection,
and repair or re-inspect within that interval.
479
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00489 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
192.623 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
(4) The combustible gas is hydrogen hazardous mixture of gas and air, a
intended for use as a feedstock in a slug of inert gas must be released into
manufacturing process. the line before the gas.
480
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00490 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 192.631
(b) When a pipeline is being purged of controllers prompt and appropriate re-
gas by use of air, the air must be re- sponse to operating conditions, an op-
leased into one end of the line in a erator must define each of the fol-
moderately rapid and continuous flow. lowing:
If air cannot be supplied in sufficient (1) A controllers authority and re-
quantity to prevent the formation of a sponsibility to make decisions and
hazardous mixture of gas and air, a take actions during normal operations;
slug of inert gas must be released into (2) A controllers role when an abnor-
the line before the air. mal operating condition is detected,
even if the controller is not the first to
192.631 Control room management.
detect the condition, including the con-
(a) General. (1) This section applies to trollers responsibility to take specific
each operator of a pipeline facility actions and to communicate with oth-
with a controller working in a control ers;
room who monitors and controls all or (3) A controllers role during an
part of a pipeline facility through a emergency, even if the controller is not
SCADA system. Each operator must the first to detect the emergency, in-
have and follow written control room cluding the controllers responsibility
management procedures that imple- to take specific actions and to commu-
ment the requirements of this section, nicate with others; and
except that for each control room (4) A method of recording controller
where an operators activities are lim- shift-changes and any hand-over of re-
ited to either or both of: sponsibility between controllers.
(i) Distribution with less than 250,000
(c) Provide adequate information. Each
services, or
operator must provide its controllers
(ii) Transmission without a com-
with the information, tools, processes
pressor station, the operator must have
and procedures necessary for the con-
and follow written procedures that im-
trollers to carry out the roles and re-
plement only paragraphs (d) (regarding
sponsibilities the operator has defined
fatigue), (i) (regarding compliance vali-
by performing each of the following:
dation), and (j) (regarding compliance
and deviations) of this section. (1) Implement sections 1, 4, 8, 9, 11.1,
(2) The procedures required by this and 11.3 of API RP 1165 (incorporated
section must be integrated, as appro- by reference, see 192.7) whenever a
priate, with operating and emergency SCADA system is added, expanded or
procedures required by 192.605 and replaced, unless the operator dem-
192.615. An operator must develop the onstrates that certain provisions of
procedures no later than August 1, 2011, sections 1, 4, 8, 9, 11.1, and 11.3 of API
and must implement the procedures ac- RP 1165 are not practical for the
cording to the following schedule. The SCADA system used;
procedures required by paragraphs (b), (2) Conduct a point-to-point
(c)(5), (d)(2) and (d)(3), (f) and (g) of this verification between SCADA displays
section must be implemented no later and related field equipment when field
than October 1, 2011. The procedures re- equipment is added or moved and when
quired by paragraphs (c)(1) through (4), other changes that affect pipeline safe-
(d)(1), (d)(4), and (e) must be imple- ty are made to field equipment or
mented no later than August 1, 2012. SCADA displays;
The training procedures required by (3) Test and verify an internal com-
paragraph (h) must be implemented no munication plan to provide adequate
later than August 1, 2012, except that means for manual operation of the
any training required by another para- pipeline safely, at least once each cal-
graph of this section must be imple- endar year, but at intervals not to ex-
mented no later than the deadline for ceed 15 months;
that paragraph. (4) Test any backup SCADA systems
(b) Roles and responsibilities. Each op- at least once each calendar year, but at
erator must define the roles and re- intervals not to exceed 15 months; and
jstallworth on DSK7TPTVN1PROD with CFR
481
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00491 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
192.631 49 CFR Ch. I (10116 Edition)
482
VerDate Sep<11>2014 08:20 Mar 10, 2017 Jkt 238227 PO 00000 Frm 00492 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\238227.XXX 238227
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration, DOT 192.706
carry out the roles and responsibilities (b) Each segment of pipeline that be-
defined by the operator. In addition, comes unsafe must be replaced, re-
the training program must include the paired, or removed from service.
following elements: (c) Hazardous leaks must be repaired
(1) Responding to abnormal operating promptly.
conditions likely to occur simulta-
neously or in sequence; 192.705 Transmission lines: Patrol-
(2) Use of a computerized simulator ling.
or non-computerized (tabletop) method (a) Each operator shall have a patrol
for training controllers to recognize program to observe surface conditions
abnormal operating conditions; on and adjacent to the transmission
(3) Training controllers on their re- line right-of-way for indications of
sponsibilities for communication under leaks, construction activity, and other
the operators emergency response pro- factors affecting safety and operation.
cedures;
(b) The frequency of patrols is deter-
(4) Training that will provide a con- mined by the size of the line, the oper-
troller a working knowledge of the
ating pressures, the class location, ter-
pipeline system, especially during the
rain, weather, and other relevant fac-
development of abnormal operating
conditions; and tors, but intervals between patrols may
not be longer than prescribed in the
(5) For pipeline operating setups that
are periodically, but infrequently used, following table:
providing an opportunity for control- Maximum interval between patrols
lers to review relevant procedures in
Class loca- At highway and rail-
advance of their application. tion of line road crossings At all other places
(i) Compliance validation. Upon re-
quest, operators must submit their pro- 1, 2 ........... 712 months; but at 15 months; but at
least twice each cal- least once each cal-
cedures to PHMSA or, in the case of an endar year. endar year.
intrastate pipeline facility regulated 3 ................ 412 months; but at 712 months; but at
by a State, to the appropriate State least four times least twice each cal-
agency. each calendar year. endar year.
4 ................ 412 months; but at 412 months; but at
(j) Compliance and deviations. An oper- least four times lea